Grayhill Catalog

DIP

S

witc

hes

Grayhil l , Inc. • 561 Hillgrove Avenue • LaGrange, I l l inois 60525-5997 • USA • Phone: 708-354-1040 • Fax: 708-354-2820 • www.grayhil l .com

PG_I 49_25REARANDFRONT.EPSPAGE_J26_ CIRCUIT DIAGRAM_SERIES 19.EPSPAGE J48 8 & 9 SERIES.EPSTRSGROUP.TIFUL.EPSTOGGLEGR.TIFSTUDDETA.EPSTACT GROUP.TIFSTDLIGHT.TIFSLIDEGRO.TIFSERIES 1X4 STANDARD LEGEND.EPSSERIES85.TIFWAVEFORM.EPSWEBSITE.TIFORIG SECTION F G H ILLUS FILESOPENLTPI.TIFLOCKWASH.EPSCUT-A-WA.YOL_COLOR.EPSOL POWER SUPPLY.EPSOPENDACB.TIFOPENDAC4.TIFOPENDAC.TIF

PageSELECTION CHART .................................................................................... 3

SURFACE MOUNT SWITCHES

Half-Pitch ............................................................. Series 97 ......................... 4SPST, Low Profile ................................................ Series 90HB .................... 5SPDT and DPST .................................................. Series 78H....................... 7Side Actuated PIANO-DIP®

.......................................................... Series 76HP .................... 8

THRU-HOLE DIP SWITCHES

Machine Insertable MIDIP®.......................................................... Series 90B ....................... 9

SPST Rocker ....................................................... Series 76 ....................... 10SPST to 4PST Slide ............................................ Series 78 ....................... 11SPDT ................................................................... Series 76 & 78 ............... 12DPDT ................................................................... Series 76 & 78 ............... 13Specifications ....................................................... Series 76, 78, 90B ......... 14Linear Action Tap ................................................. Series 79A & 79C .......... 15Linear Action Coded Output ................................ Series 79B ..................... 16Right Angle Terminal Option ............................... Series 78C..................... 17

ROTARY DIP SWITCHESBinary Coded ....................................................... Series 94H..................... 19Economical Binary Coded..................................... Series 94R..................... 21

Options and Accessories ............................................................................. 22

SURFACE MOUNT SWITCHES• Standard DIP Package Outline

Includes PIANO-DIP®

• Tactile Feedback, BoardMount Switches

THRU-HOLE DIP SWITCHES• Consistent High Contact

Pressure With Spring and BallContact System

• Standard Base Seal; OptionalTop Tape Seal

• Large Selection of Types andStyles Includes MilitaryQualified Switches

• RoHS Compliant

OPEN CLOSED

Series90HBW

90B

76

78

Contents: Surface Mount and Thru-Hole DIP Switches

DIP2


DIP

S

witc

hes

DIP Switch Selection Chart

SURFACE MOUNT SWITCHES

Circuitry Description Type of Series No. of Positions No. of PageActuation Available Actuators Number

Single Pole,Single Throw

Circuitry Description Type of Series No. of Positions No. of PageActuation Available Actuators Number

SINGLE THROW SWITCHES

Machine Insertable Recessed Slide 90 2–10 1/Station 9

Raised Rocker 76 2-10 & 12 1/Station 10Recessed Rocker 76 2-10 & 12 1/Station 10

Standard Side Actuated 76 2–10 & 12 1/Station 10Slide 78 2–10 & 12 1/Station 11Recessed Slide 78 2–10 1/Station 11

2PST Slide* 78 1–5 1/Station 113PST Slide* 78 1–3 1/Station 114PST Slide* 78 1 & 2 1/Station 115, 6, 7, 8, or 10PST Slide* 78 1 1/Station 11

Single Pole,Single Throw

Multiple Pole,Single Throw

MULTIPLE THROW SWITCHES

1-of-10 Circuits Linear Action Slide 79 10 1 151-of-16 Circuits Linear Action Slide 79 16 1 15

Raised Rocker 76 2–4 1/Station 10Standard Recessed Rocker 76 2–4 1/Station 10

Toggle 76 2–4 1/Station 10Slide 78 1–6 1/Station 10

Raised Rocker 76 1 & 2 1/Station 13Standard Recessed Rocker 76 1 & 2 1/Station 13

Toggle 76 1 & 2 1/Station 13Slide 78 1 & 2 1/Station 13

BCD & Hexadecimal Linear Action Slide 79 10 & 16 1 16Octal, BCD, & Hex Rotary 94 8, 10 & 16 1 20

Octal, BCD, & Hex Rotary 94 8, 10 & 16 1 20

Single Pole,Multiple Throw

Double Pole,Double Throw

BINARY CODED OUTPUT SWITCHES

Standard Code

Complement

Grayhill Series 76 DIP switches are covered by one or more of the following patents pending:4,031,345, Canada 1,035,820 (1978), and Canada 1,055,551 (1979). Series 79 switches areprotected by patent number 4,491,703. Series 90 switches are protected by patent numbers4,590,344 and 4,670,630.

THRU-HOLE DIP SWITCHES(Also see Series 76, 78 and 90 Surface Mount DIP Switches)

Circuit Selector

Half-Pitch Top Actuated, Recessed Slide 97 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 1/Station 4

Standard DIP Package Top Actuated, Recessed Slide 90 2-10 1/Station 5

Standard DIP Package Side Actuated 76 2-10 & 12 1/Station 8

Standard DIP Package Side Actuated, Top Actuated 78 1-5 1/Station 7

Octal, BCD & Hex Rotary 94 8, 10 & 16 1 20

SPDT, DPST

Standard,Complement Code

DIP3

DIP

S

witc

hes


SERIES 97Half-Pitch

Surface Mount DIP Switches

FEATURES• Half the Size of Standard DIP

Switches• Available in 2, 4, 6, 8, and 10

Positions• Low Profile• Less Mass for Easy Vacuum Pick

& Place

APPLICATIONSUsed in any DIP application wherespace is at a premium such asnotebook computers, hand-heldradios, industrial control products, CD-ROM drives, cellular base stationsand coin changers.

SPECIFICATIONSElectrical RatingsContact Rating: 25 mA at 24 Vdc switching;100 mA at 50 Vdc non-switchingContact Resistance: 100 mΩ max, initiallyInsulation Resistance: 100 MΩ minimum at100 VdcDielectric Strength: 300 Vac for one minuteSwitch Capacitance: 5pF maximumContact Arrangement: SPST

Mechanical RatingsLife: 1,000 cycles minimumOperation Force: 500 gFMechanical Shock: MIL-STD-202F, Method,213B, Test Condition A. Gravity: 50G's (peakvalue), 11 m/sec. Direction and times: 6 sidesand 3 times in each direction.Vibration: MIL-STD-202F, Method 201A.Passed 6 hours (2 hours in each) of three

perpendicular planes at a cycle of 10-55-10Hz/1minute.Operating Temperature Range: -40 to 85°CStorage Temperature Range: -40 to 85°C

MaterialsBase and Cover: UL94V-0 Nylon, blackActuators: UL94V-0 Nylon thermoplastic, whiteBase Contacts: Alloy copper with gold-platingover nickelTerminals: Brass with gold-platingTape Seal: Kapton

Soldering InformationVapor phase and IR-reflow soldering can beapplied. With stands 255°C peak temperature.

Cleaning: Tape sealed versions are capableof withstanding washing processes usingalcohol-based solvents only. Water or otherwater-based solvent washing processes arenot recommended. Care should be taken toavoid flux adhering to the switch body from thecircuit board soldering process. The switchshould be allowed to cool for at least 3 minutesbetween the end of the solder process and thebeginning of the wash process. The solventstage of the cleaning process is not to exceed1 minute and the whole wash process is not toexceed 3 minutes. Ultrasonic or pressure washcleaning is not recommended.

Packaging InformationTube: 130 pcs/tube (2 positions), 75 pcs/tube(4 positions), 54 pcs/tube (6 positions), 40 pcs/tube (8 positions), 33 pcs/tube (10 positions).Tape and Reel: 97C: 4,000 pcs/reel (allpositions). 97R: 2500 pcs/reel (all positions).

CIRCUITRY

Unless otherwise specified, tolerances are ±0.008 (0,20)

Fig. 1 Series 97C DIMENSIONS In inches (and millimeters)

LENGTHSEE ORDERING INFORMATION

.050 (1,27) Pitch

.193 (4,90)

.242(6,15)

.291(7,39)

Top View Side ViewFront View

.177 (4,50)

.024 (0,61)

.264 (6,71).004 (0,10)

.050 (1,27) Pitch

.016 (0,41)

.030 (0,76)

TAPE THICKNESS .003 (0,08)

.059 (1,50)

Recommended PC Pad Dimensions

Series: 97C see fig. 1, 97R see fig. 2Positions: 02 = .148 (3,76), 04 = .248 (6,30), 06 = .348 (8,84),08 = .448 (11,38), 10 = .548 (13,92)

97C06SRTT= RoHS compliantPackaging: Blank = Tube, R = Tape and Reel (see pkg note)Seal: Blank = Unsealed, S = Top Tape Seal

ORDERING INFORMATION


Fig. 2 Series 97R DIMENSIONS In inches (and millimeters)

ON

A

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Top View Side ViewFront View Recommended PC Pad Dimensions

.024(0,6)

.047(1,20) .177±.002

(4,50±0,05)

.024(0,6)

.319(8,1)

.016(0,40)

.050(1,27)PITCH

.004±.004(0,10±0,10)

TAPE.002

(0,05)

.057(1,44)

.030(0,76)

.310(7,85)

.360(9,10).260

(6,60)

.050 (1,27) PITCH

All DIP switches are shipped in the "ON" position.

DIP4


DIP

S

witc

hes

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

O N

.020 ± .002(0,51 ± 0,05) TYP..052 ± .002(1,32 ± 0,13) TYP.

.085 ± .005(2,16 ± 0,13) TYP. .100 ± .005

(2,54 ± 0,13)TYP.

C L C L

LENGTH ± .010 (0,25)SEE CHART

.160 ± .005(4,19 ± 0,13)

.220(5,59)MAX.

.085 ± .005(2,16 ± 0,13) TYP.

.020 ± .002(0,51 ± 0,05) TYP..100 ± .010(2,54 ± 0,25) TYP.

C L C L

.320 (8,13) MAX..290 (7,37) MAX.

.012 ± .001(0,30 ± 0,03) TYP..250 ± .010(6,35 ± 0,25)

.290 (7,37) MAX.

.012 ± .002(0,30 ± 0,05)

.395± .010(10,03± 0,25)


.160 ± .005(4,19 ± 0,13)

.190(4,83)MAX.

.004(0,10)

.004(0,10)

SWITCH IS PACKAGEDAS SHOWN HEREWITH ALLPOSITIONS ON

.350(8,90)TYP.

.150 (3,81) TYP.

.100 (2,54) TYP.

.100 (2,54) TYP..070 (1,78) TYP.

C L C L

.500(12,7)TYP.

.250 (6,35) TYP.

.125 (3,18) TYP.

.100 (2,54) TYP..070 (1,78) TYP.

C L C L

SERIES 90HBSPST, Low Profile

FEATURES• Compatible with SMT Assembly,

Including Infrared Reflow andVapor-Phase

• Top Seal Withstands HighPressure Aqueous Cleaning

• Reliable Spring and Ball Contact

DIMENSIONS In inches (and millimeters)

Top View–Gull Wing

CIRCUITRY

As viewed from the top of the switch in thepositions shown in the drawing.

Recommended PC Pad Dimensions–Gull Wing

Recommended PC Pad Dimensions–J-Bend

Gull Wing

J-Bend

DIP5


DIP

S

witc

hes



Meets requirements ofEIA 481-2 or EIA 481-3

Each reel has a 15.750 inch (390 mm)minimum leader and a 6.30 inch (160mm) minimum trailer.

TAPE AND REEL PACKAGING

13 INCH DIAMETER REEL

DIRECTION OF FEED

24mmTAPE

16mm

32 &44mmTAPE

16mm

PIN ONE LOCATION

CONDUCTIVE PLASTIC EMBOSSED TAPE

SPECIFICATIONSElectrical RatingsMake-and-break Current Rating: 2,000operations per switch position at these resistiveloads:10 mA, 30 Vdc; or 10 mA, 50 mVdc; 10mA, 50 mVdc; or 25 mA, 24 Vdc; or 100 mA,6Vdc.Contact Resistance: (measured at 10 mA, 50mVdc). Initial: 20 mohms maximum, After Life:100 mohms maximumInsulation Resistance: Minimum, at 100 Vdcbetween adjacent closed contacts and alsoacross open switch contacts.Initial (Mohms): 5,000, After Life (Mohms): 1,000Dielectric Strength: Minimum voltage (AC RMS)measured between adjacent closedcontacts and also across open switch contacts.lnitial: 500 volts, After Life: 500 voltsCurrent Carry Rating: 3A maximum rise of20°CSwitch Capacitance: 2 pF at 1 megahertz

Mechanical RatingsWhere Grayhill performance is superior, the MILspec is listed in parentheses.Mechanical Life: 2,000 operations per switchpositionVibration Resistance: Per Method 204, TestCondition B , 1mS opening (10 mS allowed)Mechanical Shock: Per Method 213, TestCondition A. 1mS opening (10 mS allowed)Thermal Shock Resistance: Per specification;no failures; passes contact resistance.Terminal Strength: Per specificationThermal Aging: 1,000 hours at 85°C; no failures.

Environmental RatingsMeets all requirements of MIL- S-83504.Operating Temperature Range: -40°C to +85°CStorage Temperature Range: -40°C to + 85°CMoisture Resistance: Per MIL-STD-202,Method 106.

Soldering InformationSolderability: Per MIL-STD-202, Method 208Soldering Heat Resistance: Per MIL-S-83504,six second test.Recommended Processing Temperature:220°C–230°C (1 pass—260°C maximum)Processing Position: Switch is to be processedwith all actuators in the closed (on) position asshipped.Fluxing: Per EIA RS-448-2 with flux touchingswitch body.Cleaning: Passes immersion test using water/detergent. Acceptable solutions include 1-1-1trichlorethane, freon, (TF, TE, or TMS), isopropylalcohol, detergent (140°F maximum). Terpeneacceptable for Series 90 only. Solutions whichare not recommended include acetone,methylene chloride, freon TMC.

Materials and FinishesShorting Member (Ball): Brass, gold-plateover nickel barrier.Base Contacts: Copper alloy, gold-plateover nickel barrier.Terminals: Copper alloy, matte tin plated overnickel barrier.Non-Conductive Parts: Thermoplastic (UL94V-O)

Tape and Reel PackagingTape Seal Integrity: Passes gross leak testusing 125°C flourinert for 20 seconds minimum.Reference MIL-STD-202, Method 112Tape Seal: Polyimide film


Available from your local Grayhill Distributor.For prices and discounts, contact a local SalesOffice, an authorized local Distributor or Grayhill.

SeriesTerminal Style: W = Gull Wing, J = J-BendRoHS compliant

90HBW02PRT

Packaging: R = Tape and reel packaging (750 switches/reel)Blank = Tube packaging (each tube is 19.5" long)

Seal: P = Polyimide SealBlank = No Seal

Number of Positions: 02 through 10

No. of Length Length NumberPositions Inches Metric Per Tube

2 .270" 6,9 mm 603 .370" 9,4 mm 474 .470" 11,9 mm 375 .570" 14,5 mm 316 .670" 17,0 mm 267 .770" 19,6 mm 238 .870" 22,1 mm 209 .970" 24,6 mm 18

10 1.070" 27,2 mm 16

DIP6


DIP

S

witc

hes

SERIES 78HSPDT and DPST

FEATURES• Compatible with SMT Assembly



SPECIFICATIONSElectrical RatingsMake-and-break Current Rating: 2,000operations per switch position at 1 mA, 5 Vdc;50 mA, 30 Vdc; or 150 mA, 30 VdcContact Resistance: Initial: 30 mohms max.After Life: 100 mohms max. (10 mA at 50 Vdc,open circuit)Insulation Resistance: Minimum, at 100 Vdcbetween adjacent closed contacts and alsoacross open switch contacts. Initial: 2,000Mohms; After Life: 1,000 MohmsDielectric Strength: Minimum voltage (AC,RMS) measured between adjacent closedcontacts and also across open switch contacts.Initial: 750 volts; After Life: 500 voltsCurrent Carry Rating: 4 amps, maximum riseof 20°CSwitch Capacitance: 2 pF at 1megahertz

Mechanical RatingsMechanical Life: 2,000 operations per switchpositionVibration Resistance: Per method 204, TestCondition B. 1 mS opening (10 mS allowed)Mechanical Shock: Per Method 213, TestCondition A. 1 mS opening (10 mS allowed)

Terminal Strength: Per specificationThermal Aging: 1,000 hours at 85°C; no failuresThermal Shock: Per specification; no failures;passes contact resistance

Environmental RatingsMeets all requirements of MIL- S-83504. WhereGrayhill performance is superior, the MIL spec islisted in parentheses.Operating Temperature Range: -40°C to +85°CStorage Temperature Range: -55°C to + 85°CMoisture Resistance: Per MIL-STD-202,Method 106

Soldering InformationSolderability: Per MIL-STD-202, Method 208Soldering Heat Resistance: Per MIL-S-83504,six second testRecommended Processing Temperature:220°C–230°C (1 pass—260°C maximum)Processing Position: Switch is to be processedwith all actuators in the closed (on) position asshipped.

Materials and FinishesShorting Member: Brass, gold-platedover nickel barrier.Base Contacts: Copper alloy, gold-platedover nickel barrier.Terminals: Copper alloy, matte tin-plated overnickel barrier.Non-Conductive Parts: Cover is natural colorthermoplastic, actuators are white thermoplastic(UL94V-O)

1 1

Dot indicates active circuit.

1 1ON

OFF

ON

ON

CIRCUITRY SPDT 2 Circuits (no common) DPST

No. of Length Length Carrier Width Part Number*Positions (inches) (metric) Dim. A SPDT DPST

1 0.280" 7,1 mm 24 mm 78HJ01GWT 78HF01GWT2 0.480" 12,2 mm 24 mm 78HJ02GWT 78HF02GWT3 0.680" 17,3 mm 32 mm 78HJ03GWT 78HF03GWT4 0.880" 22,4 mm 44 mm 78HJ04GWT 78HF04GWT5 1.080" 27,4 mm 44 mm 78HJ05GWT 78HF05GWT

* Insert "R" before the "T" in the Grayhill part number for tape and reel packaging (500 switches/reel).

ORDERING INFORMATION: Tube Packaging

Available from your local Grayhill Distributor. For prices and discounts, contact a local SalesOffice, an authorized local Distributor or Grayhill.


SPDT, DPST, Top Actuated, Slide Operated Recommended PC Pad Dimensions.380 ± .010(9,65 ± 0,25)

LENGTH ± .010 (0,25)SEE ORDER INFO

.303 ± .015(7,70 ± 0,38).424 ± .015(10,77 ± 0,38) TYP.

.023 (5,84) REF.

.012 ± .001(0,30 ± 0,03)

TYP.

.055 ± .010(1,40 ± 0,25)

.025 (0,64) R.

.100 ± .005(2,54 ± 0,13) TYP.C L C L

.268 ± .010(6,81 ± 0,25)

.530(13,46)TYP.

.280 (7,11)TYP.

C L C L

.070 (1,78) TYP.

.100 (2,54) TYP.

.295 + .000 – .020(7,49 – 0,51)


1

43

2

1

43

2

1

43

2

4

23

4

23

4

1


COVER TAPE

DIM. A (SEE ORDER INFO.)

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

11

1

2

3

4

1

PIN ONE LOCATION

16 & 24mm TAPE16mm

16mm 32 & 44mm TAPE

DIRECTION OF FEED


Meets requirements of EIA 481-2 orEIA 481-3

Each reel has a 15.750 inch (390 mm)minimum leader and a 6.30 inch (160 mm)minimum trailer.

DIP7


DIP

S

witc

hes


.100 ± .005(2,54 ± 0,13) TYP.C L C L

.305 ± .010(7,75 ± 0,25)

LENGTH ± .010 (0,25

SEE ORDER INFO

.380 ± .010(9,65

± 0,25)

.025 (0,64) R.

.424 ± .015(10,77 ± 0,38) TYP.

.303 ± .015(7,70 ± 0,38)

.023 (5,84) REF.

.012 ± .001(0,30 ± 0,03)

TYP.

.055 ± .010(1,40 ± 0,25)

.280 (7,11)TYP.

.530(13,46)TYP.

C L C L

.070 (1,78) TYP.

.100 (2,54) TYP.


DIRECTION OF FEED

16 & 24mm TAPE16mm

32, 44 & 56mm TAPE

16mm

PIN ONE LOCATION


COVER TAPE

76HP

SB

08GW

OP

EN

XX

XX

76HP

SB

08GW

OP

EN

XX

XX

76HP

SB

08GW

OP

EN

XX

XX

76HP

SB

08GW

OP

EN

XX

XX

76HP

SB

08GW

OP

EN

XX

XX

76HP

SB

08GW

OP

EN

XX

XX

DIM. A (SEE ORDER INFO.)

SERIES 76HPSide Actuated PIANO-DIP®


Recommended PC Pad Dimensions`

CIRCUITRY

SPECIFICATIONSElectrical RatingsMake-and-break Current Rating: 2,000operations per switch position at 1 mA, 5 Vdc; 50mA, 30 Vdc; or 150 mA, 30 VdcContact Resistance: Initial: 30 mohmsmaximum; After Life: 100 mohms maximum(10 mA at 50 Vdc, open circuit)Insulation Resistance: Minimum, at 100 Vdcbetween adjacent closed contacts and alsoacross open switch contacts. Initial: 2,000MohmsDielectric Strength: Minimum voltage (ACRMS) measured between adjacent closedcontacts and also across open switch contacts.Initial: 750 volts; After Life: 500 voltsCarry Rating: 5 amps, maximum rise of 20°CSwitch Capacitance: 2 pF at 1 megahertz

Mechanical RatingsMechanical Life: 2,000 operations per switchpositionVibration Resistance: Per Method 204, Test

FEATURES• Compatible with SMT Assembly


• Easily Accessed when PC Boardsare Racked


Condition B. 1 mS opening (10 mS allowed)Mechanical Shock: Per Method 213, TestCondition A. 1 mS opening (10 mS allowed)Thermal Shock Resistance: Per specification;no failures; passes contact resistanceTerminal Strength: Per specificationThermal Aging: 1,000 hours at 85°C; no failures

Environmental RatingsMeets all requirements of MIL- S-83504. WhereGrayhill performance is superior, the MIL spec islisted in parentheses.Operating Temperature Range: -40°C to +85°CStorage Temperature Range: -55°C to + 85°CMoisture Resistance: Per MIL-STD-202,Method 106

Soldering InformationSolderability: Per MIL-STD-202, Method 208Tested to EIA Standard RS-448-2.Resistance to Soldering Heat: Per MIL-S-83504, six second testRecommended Processing Temperature:220°C–230°C (1 pass—260°C maximum)Processing Position: Switch is to be processedwith all actuators in the closed (on) position asshipped.

Materials and FinishesShorting Member: Brass, gold-plated

over nickel barrier.Base Contacts: Copper alloy, gold-plated,over nickel barrier.Terminals: Copper alloy, matte tin platedover nickel barrier.Non-Conductive Parts: Cover is natural colorthermoplastic, actuators are whitethermoplastic (UL94V-O)Tape Seal: Not available with Tape Seal.

As viewed fromthe top of theswitch in thepositions shownin the drawing.

Meets requirements ofEIA 481-2 or EIA 481-3

Each reel has a 15.750 inch (390 mm)minimum leader and a 6.30 inch (160 mm)minimum trailer.

Available from your local Grayhill Distributor. For prices and discounts, contact a localSales Office, an authorized local Distributor or Grayhill.

No. of Length Length Carrier Width PartPositions* (inches) (metric) Dim. A Number

2 0.280" 7,1 mm 24 mm 76HPSB02GWRT4 0.480" 12,2 mm 24 mm 76HPSB04GWRT6 0.680" 17,3 mm 32 mm 76HPSB06GWRT8 0.880" 22,4 mm 44 mm 76HPSB08GWRT10 1.080" 27,4 mm 44 mm 76HPSB10GWRT

* For other lengths, contact Grayhill, Inc.

ORDERING INFORMATION: Tape and Reel Packaging (500 switches per reel)


DIP8



DIP

S

witc

hes

SERIES 90BMachine Insertable MIDIP


ORDERING INFORMATION: Tube Packaging (Each tube is 19.5 inches long)

90B

FEATURES• Tested for TO-116 Equipment• Up to 10 Positions• High Pressure, Reliable Contacts• Molded (Sealed) Base and

Optional Top Seal

As viewed from the top of the switch in thepositions shown in the drawing.

CIRCUITRY


*The "P"in the part number denotes top tape seal versions. To order without top tape seal, leave the"P" off the part number when ordering.

O

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

N


.165 ± .005(4,19 ± 0,13)

.195(4,95)MAX. .020 ± .002 (0,51 ± 0,05) TYP.

.100 ± .005 (2,54 ± 0,13) TYP.

.085 ± .005 (2,16 ± 0,13) TYP.

.135 ± .010(3,43 ± 0,25)TYP.

.375 ± .010(9,53

± 0,25).012 ± .001(0,30 ± 0,03)TYP.

C L

.290 (7,37)MAX.

DESIGNED FOR.100 X .300 (2,54 X 7,62)

ON CENTER HOLES

Switch is packaged as shown here with all positions on.

No. of Length Length Number PartPositions Inches Metric Per Tube Number*

2 .270" 6,9 mm 60 90B02PT3 .370" 9,4 mm 47 90B03PT4 .470" 11,9 mm 37 90B04PT5 .570" 14,5 mm 31 90B05PT6 .670" 17,0 mm 26 90B06PT7 .770" 19,6 mm 23 90B07PT8 .870" 22,1 mm 20 90B08PT9 .970" 24,6 mm 18 90B09PT10 1.070" 27,2 mm 16 90B10PT

DIP9

Thru-Hole DIP Switches

DIP

S

witc

hes


CL CL

.281 ± .010(7,14 ± 0,25)TYP.

B

.020 + .005 –.000(0,51 + 0,13)

B = .156 ± .010(3,96 ± 0,25)TYPICAL

.012 ± .001(0,30 ± 0,03).300 + .030 –.000(7,62 + 0,76)OPEN

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

LENGTH± .010 (±0,25)

SEE ORDER INFO.

.380 ± .010(9,65 ± 0,25)

.020 ± .002(0,51 ± 0,05)

.090 ± .005(2,29 ± 0,13)

.100 ± .005(2,5 ± 0,13)

Rocker

PIANO-DIP®

For recessed rockers, delete .295 dimension.

Side Actuated PIANO-DIP®Rocker and Recessed Rocker

SERIES 76SPST Rocker

See also end view.See also end view.

CIRCUITRY

Styles 76SB and 76RSB Style 76PSB Styles 76PRBUP IS CLOSED (ON)UP IS OPEN (OFF)

*A top tape seal is required for switches that aremachine soldered or heavily cleaned after handsoldering. To order top seal versions, add "S" tothe Grayhill part number.


Typical circuit diagram with actuatorin the closed position.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

OPEN

LENGTH± .010 (±0,25)

SEE ORDER INFO.

.380 ± .010(9,65 ± 0,25)

.020 ± .002(0,51 ± 0,05)

.090 ± .005(2,29 ± 0,13)

.100 ± .005(2,5 ± 0,13) CL CL

.012 ± .001(0,30 ± 0,03).300 + .030 –.000(7,62 + 0,76)

.020 + .005 –.000(0,51 + 0,13).295 + .000

–.020(7,49 –0,51)

A

.156 ± .010(3,96 ± 0,25)TYP.

A = .272 ± .010(6,91 ± 0,25)

FEATURES• Raised and Recessed, Rocker

and PIANO-DIP® Styles• Sealed Base Standard• Spring and Ball Contact• Top Tape Seal Option


Actuator shown in the down position. Actuator shown in the down position.

End Views


SeriesSwitch Style: SB = Raised Rocker

RSB = Recessed RockerPSB = Piano-DIP (Up is Off)PRB = Piano-DIP (Up is On)

76RSB04ST

T = RoHS compliantSealed*: S = Tape SealNumber of Positions: 02 through 10, 12

No. of Pos. Length (Inches) Length (Metric) No./Tube

2 0.280" 7,1 mm 353 0.380" 9,7 mm 274 0.480" 12,2 mm 215 0.580" 14,7 mm 186 0.680" 17,3 mm 157 0.780" 19,8 mm 138 0.880" 22,4 mm 129 0.980" 24,9 mm 1010 1.080" 27,4 mm 912 1.280" 32,5 mm 8

DIP1 0



DIP

S

witc

hes

SERIES 78SPST To 4PST Slide

78

FEATURES• Raised and Recessed Slides• SPST, 2PST, 3PST, 4PST• Sealed Base Standard• Spring and Ball Contact• Top Tape Seal Option

21 3 4ON

21 3 4ON

Single Pole/Single Throw Switch

CIRCUITRY

For switches with 5, 6, 7, 8, or 10PST circuitry,contact Grayhill.

*A top tape seal is required for switches that aremachine soldered or heavily cleaned after handsoldering. To order top seal versions, add "S"before the "T" in the Grayhill part number.

Typical MultiplePole Switch

Typical CircuitDiagram

1ON

1ON

No. of Length Length No./ Raised RecessedCircuitry Positions Inches Metric Tube Slides* Slides*

2 0.280" 7,1mm 35 78B02T 78RB02T3 0.380" 9,7mm 27 78B03T 78RB03T4 0.480" 12,2mm 21 78B04T 78RB04T5 0.580" 14,7mm 18 78B05T 78RB05T

SPST 6 0.680" 17,3mm 15 78B06T 78RB06T7 0.780" 19,8mm 13 78B07T 78RB07T8 0.880" 22,4mm 12 78B08T 78RB08T9 0.980" 24,9mm 10 78B09T 78RB09T10 1.080" 27,4mm 9 78B10T 78RB10T12 1.280" 32,5mm 8 78B12T 78RB12T

1 0.280" 7,1mm 35 78F01T2 0.480" 12,2mm 21 78F02T

2PST 3 0.680" 17,3mm 15 78F03T4 0.880" 22,4mm 12 78F04T Recessed5 1.080" 27,4mm 9 78F05T Slides6 1.280" 32,5mm 8 78F06T Not Available

1 0.380" 9,7mm 27 78G01T3PST 2 0.680" 17,3mm 15 78G02T

3 0.980" 24,9mm 10 78G03T

4PST 1 0.480" 12,2mm 21 78H01T2 0.880" 22,4mm 12 78H02T



Single Pole/Single Throw Switch in Raised and Recessed Slides


Note:Recessed slides have a dimple fortool actuation. For recessed slides,the .295 dimension does not apply.

Typical Multiple Pole Switch withRaised Slides(Switch shown here is 78H02, 4PST)

21ON

.380 ± .010(9,65 ± 0,25)

Length ± .010 (± 0.25)See Ordering Information

CL CL

DIM. B± .002

(± 0,05)

.020 ± .002 (0,51 ± 0,05)

.090 ± .005 (2,29 ± 0,13)

.100 ± .005 (2,5 ± 0,13)

DIM. B2PST = .100 (2,543PST = .200 (5,08)4PST = .300 (7,62)

21 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10ON

.380 ± .010(9,65 ± 0,25)

Length ± .010 (± 0.25)See Ordering Information

CL CL

.060 ± .002 (1,52 ± 0,05)

.020 ± .002 (0,51 ± 0,05)

.090 ± .005 (2,29 ± 0,13)

.100 ± .005 (2,5 ± 0,13)

CLCL

.070 (1,78) REF.

A.295 + .000 –.020

(7,49 –0,51).020± .002(0,51± 0,05)

.156 + .015 –.010 (3,96 + 0,38 –0,25) TYP.

A = .245 + .000 –.020 (6,22 + 0,51)

.050 ± .005(1,27 ± 0,13)TYP. .180 ± .010 (4,57 ± 0,25)

.012 ± .001 (0,30 ± 0,03).300 + .030 –.000(7,62 + 0,76)

DIP1 1


DIP

S

witc

hes


.247 ± .010(6,27 ± 0,25)

SERIES 76 and 78SPDT

DIMENSIONS: Series 76 In inches (and millimeters)

Toggle-DIPSeries 76 Raised Rocker

Recessed Rocker

Circuitry Positions Length Length No./ Raised Recessed Toggle-Inches Metric Tube Type* Rockers* DIP*

SPDT 2 0.380" 9,7mm 27 76SC02T 76RSC02T 76STC02T Form 3 0.580" 14,7mm 18 76SC03T 76RSC03T 76STC03T

C 4 0.780" 19,8mm 13 76SC04T 76RSC04T 76STC04T

SPDT 1 0.280" 7,1mm 35 78J01T — — 2 2 0.480" 12,2mm 21 78J02T — —

Circuits 3 0.680" 17,3mm 15 78J03T — —4 0.880" 22,4mm 12 78J04T — —5 1.080" 27,4mm 9 78J05T — —6 1.280" 32.5mm 8 78J06T

Series 78 Slide



1 2C1

C2

.380 ± .010(9,65 ± 0,25)

.380 ± .010(9,65 ± 0,25)

.020 ± .002(0,51

± 0,05)TYP.

.090 ± .005(2,29 ± 0,13)TYP.

.100 ± .005(2,54 ± 0,13)TYP.

.447 ± .015(11,35 ± 0,38)

TYP.

FEATURES• Raised and Recessed Rocker,

and Toggle Actuated Styles• SPDT with a Common Pole, or

SPDT with 2 Isolated Circuits• Spring and Ball Contact• Top Tape Seal Option for

Most Styles

*To order top seal versions, add "S" before the "T" in the Grayhill part number.Not available on Toggle-DIP.

11

SPDT with CommonTrue Form C Switching

CIRCUITRY: Series 78

1 2C1

1 C1 1 C1

C2

1 2C1

C2


To create common poles, tie together 2adjoining terminals on 1 (either) side of switch.

SPDT, 2 Circuits(No Commons)Dot on cover indicates active terminal whenslide is on that side of switch. Contact is madewith terminal on opposite side.

1

CL CL

2 3 4 50.380 ± .005(9,65 ± 0,13)

DIM. ASEE CHART

.100 ± .002(2,54 ± 0,05)

.020 ± .002 (0,51 ± 0,05) TYP.

.090 ± .005 (2,29 ± 0,13) TYP..100 ± .005 (2,54 ± 0,13) TYP.

CLCL

.070 (1,78) REF.

A.295 + .000 –.020

(7,49 –0,51).020± .002(0,51± 0,05)

.156 + .015 –.010 (3,96 + 0,38 –0,25) TYP.

A = .245 + .000 –.020 (6,22 + 0,51)

.050 ± .005(1,27 ± 0,13)TYP. .180 ± .010 (4,57 ± 0,25)

.012 ± .001 (0,30 ± 0,03).300 + .030 –.000(7,62 + 0,76)

CLCL

A

A = .247 ± .010 (6,27 ± 0,25)

.295 + .000 –.020(7,49 –0,51)

.020 + .005 –.000(0,51 + 0,13)

.050 ± .005(1,27 ± 0,13)

.180 ± .010(4,57 ± 0,25) .012 ± .001

(0,30 ± 0,03).300 + .030 –.000(7,62 + 0,76)

.156 + .015 –.010(3,96 + 0,38 –0,25)


DIP1 2



DIP

S

witc

hes

FEATURES• Raised and Recessed Rocker,

and Toggle Actuated Styles• DPDT with Common Poles, or

DPDT with 4 Isolated Circuits• Spring and Ball Contact• Top Tape Seal Option for

Most Styles

1

C1

C2

2

.380 ± .010(9,65 ± 0,25)

.380 ± .010(9,65 ± 0,25)

.020 ± .002(0,51

± 0,05)TYP.

.090 ± .005(2,29 ± 0,13)TYP.

.100 ± .005(2,54 ± 0,13)TYP.

Toggle-DIP


DIMENSIONS: Series 78 In inches (and millimeters) CIRCUITRY: Series 78


To create common poles, tie together 2adjoining terminals on 1 (either) side ofswitch.

Circuitry No./ Length Length No./ Raised Recessed Toggle-Positions Inches Metric Tube Type* Rockers* DIP*

DPDT 1 0.380" 9,7mm 27 76SD01T 76RSD01T 76STD01TForm D 2 0.780" 19,8mm 13 76SD02T 76RSD02T 76STD02T

DPDT 1 0.480" 12,2mm 21 78K01T — —4 Circ. 2 0.880" 22,4mm 12 78K02T — —

A top tape seal is required for switches that are machine soldered or heavily cleaned after handsoldering. To order top seal versions, add "S" before the "T" in the Grayhill part number. Not availableon Toggle-DIP.


DPDT, 4 Circuits(No Commons)Dot on cover indicates active terminal whenslide is on that side of switch. Contact ismade with terminal on opposite side.

Series 78 Slide

DPDT with CommonsTrue Form D Switching

Series 76 Raised Rocker, Double-DIP

Recessed Rocker

.247 ± .010(6,27 ± 0,25)

1

C1

C2

2 1

C1

C2

2

1 C1 2

C2

1 C1 2

C2

1

CL CL

2.380 ± .005

(9,65 ± 0,25)

DIM. ASEE CHART

.300 ± .002(7,62 ± 0,05)

.020 ± .002 (0,51 ± 0,05) TYP.

.090 ± .005 (2,29 ± 0,13) TYP..100 ± .005 (2,54 ± 0,13) TYP.

11

.447 ± .015(11,35 ± 0,38)

TYP.

CLCL

.070 (1,78) REF.

A.295 + .000 –.020

(7,49 –0,51).020± .002(0,51± 0,05)

.156 + .015 –.010 (3,96 + 0,38 –0,25) TYP.

A = .245 + .000 –.020 (6,22 + 0,51)

.050 ± .005(1,27 ± 0,13)TYP. .180 ± .010 (4,57 ± 0,25)

.012 ± .001 (0,30 ± 0,03).300 + .030 –.000(7,62 + 0,76)

CLCL

A

A = .247 ± .010 (6,27 ± 0,25)

.295 + .000 –.020(7,49 –0,51)

.020 + .005 –.000(0,51 + 0,13)

.050 ± .005(1,27 ± 0,13)

.180 ± .010(4,57 ± 0,25) .012 ± .001

(0,30 ± 0,03).300 + .030 –.000(7,62 + 0,76)

.156 + .015 –.010(3,96 + 0,38 –0,25)

SERIES 76 and 78DPDT


DIP13


DIP

S

witc

hes


Ratings 76 78 90BMechanical Life: Operations per switch position 2,000 2,000 2,000

Make-and-break Current Rating: Operationsper switch position at these resistive loads1 mA, 5 Vdc; 50 mA, 30 Vdc; or 150 mA, 30 Vdc: 2,000 2,000 —10 mA, 30 Vdc; or 10 mA, 50 mVdc: — — 2,00010 mA, 50 mVdc; or 25 mA, 24 Vdc; or 100 mA, 6 Vdc: — — 2,000

Contact Resistance: Initially: ≤ 30 mΩ ≤ 30 mΩ ≤ 20 mΩAfter life, at 10 mA, 50 mVdc, open circuit: ≤ 100 mΩ ≤ 100 mΩ ≤ 100 mΩ

Insulation Resistance:Minimum, at 100 Vdc between adjacent closedcontacts and also across open switch contacts

Initially (Mohms): 5,000 5,000 5,000After life (Mohms): 1,000 1,000 1,000

Dielectric Strength: Minimum voltage (AC,RMS) measured between adjacent closedcontacts and also across open switch contacts.

lnitially: 750 V 750 V 500 VAfter life: 500 V 500 V 500 V

Current Carry Rating: Maximum rise of 20°C 5 A 4 A 3 A

Switch Capacitance: At 1 megahertz 2 pF 2 pF 2 pF

Operating Temperature Range: -40°C to + 85°C -40°C to + 85°C -40°C to + 85°C

Storage Temperature Range: -55°C to + 85°C -55°C to + 85°C -55°C to + 85°C

SPECIFICATIONS: Standard Styles

Mechanical RatingsVibration Resistance: Per Method 204, TestCondition B, 1 mS opening (10 mS allowed)Mechanical Shock: Per Method 213, TestCondition A. 1 mS opening (10 mS allowed)Thermal Shock Resistance: Per specification;no failures; passes contact resistance.Terminal Strength: Per specificationThermal Aging: 1,000 hours at 85°C; no failures.

Environmental RatingsMeets all requirements of MIL- S-83504. WhereGrayhill performance is superior, the MIL spec islisted in parentheses.Moisture Resistance: Per MIL-STD-202,Method 106.

Soldering InformationSeries 90 MIDIP and Series 76 recessed rocker(76RSB style) sealed switches have been testedto EIA Standard RS-448-2. Similar performancecan be expected from other sealed Series 76and 78 DIP switches.Solderability: Per MIL-STD-202, Method 208Resistance to Soldering Heat: 76RSB: PassesEIA Standard using two, four, and six secondsoldering time. 90: Per MIL-S-83504, six secondtest.Fluxing: Per EIA RS-448-2 with flux touchingswitch body.Cleaning: 76, 78 and 90 series tape sealedproducts: Passes immersion test using water/detergent. Acceptable solutions include 1-1-1trichlorethane, freon, (TF, TE, or TMS), isopropylalcohol, detergent (140°F maximum). Terpeneacceptable for Series 90 only. Solutions whichare not recommended include acetone, methylenechloride, freon TMC.

Materials and FinishesShorting Member (Ball): Brass, gold-platedover nickel barrier.Base Contacts: Copper alloy, gold-platedover nickel barrier.Terminals: Copper alloy, matte tin plated overnickel barrier.Non-Conductive Parts: Thermoplastic (UL94V-O)Potting Material: Epoxy, 76,78 only.Protective Cover: 76,78, only-Polycarbonate.Tape Seal:76, 78: Polyester film90: Polyimide filmTape Seal Integrity: Passes gross leak testusing 125°C flourinert for 20 seconds minimum.Reference MIL-STD-202, Method 112.

MAX 260°255°

230°

150°

RoomTemperature

120-150 sec.

60 sec.

5-10 sec.

REFLOW TEMPERATURE PROFILE:ReflowSolderingProfile:

(260°CPeakTemperature)

Recommended Soldering Conditions:

WAVE SOLDERING: 260°C maximum solder temperature for 5 seconds max.

DIP14



DIP

S

witc

hes

SERIES 79ALinear Action Circuit SelectorSERIES 79CLinear Action Tap

FEATURES• Single-Setting Programming• Isolated or Bussed Circuits• 10 or 16 Positions• 125 mA, 6 Vdc, 2000 Cycles


Circuit SelectorIsolated Circuits in 10 and 16 PositionsEach position is a single isolated circuit, whichconnects the two terminals across the switchpackage. The movable contact is non-shorting.

Tap SwitchSP/10 Positions, and SP/16 PostionsAll contacts on one side of the switch are internallybussed for a common pole. Any terminal on thatside may be used as a common, the others maybe clipped. The movable contact is non-shorting.

CIRCUITRY

SPECIFICATIONSElectrical RatingsMake-and-break Current Rating: 2,000 cyclesat 10 mA, 50 mVdc; 2,000 cycles at 125 mA, 6Vdc; 2,000 cycles at 50 mA, 30 Vdc.Contact Resistance: (measured at 10 mA, 50mVdc) Coded Switches: 60 mohms maximuminitially. Other Switches: 50 mohms maximuminitially. After LIfe: 100 mohms maximumInsulation Resistance (at 100 Vdc):Between adjacent isolated contacts:Initial:5,000 Mohms; 1,000 Mohms minimumafter life. Across open contacts: Initial: 5,000Mohms; 1,000 Mohms minimum after life.Dielectric Strength: Between adjacent isolatedcontacts and also across open contacts. Initially:750 Vac: 500 Vac after lifeContact Carry Rating: 2 Amps with a maximumcontact temperature rise of 20°C

Mechanical RatingsMechanical Life: 4,000 cycles maximum. Note:a cycle is one complete operation, back andforth through all switch positions.Vibration Resistance: 10 to 2,000 Hz at 15Gor 0.060" double amplitude, per MIL-STD-202Fper MIL-5-83504; Method 213, Condition A. Nodamage and no contact openings exceeding10 mS (Method 204, Test Condition B).Shock Resistance: 509, 11 mS, half sine; nodamage and no openings exceeding 10 mS(Method 213, Test Condition A).

Environmental RatingOperating Temperature Range: -40°C to+85°CStorage Temperature Range: -55°C to +85°CMoisture Resistance: 240 hours withtemperature cycling and polarization, per MIL-STD-202F, Method 305

Materials and FinishesNonconductive Parts: Plastic UL94V-OShorting Arm: Phosphor bronze, gold plateover nickel plateBase Contacts: Copper alloy, gold plate overnickel plateTerminals: Copper alloy, matte tin plated overnickel barrier.Potting Material: Epoxy

Tape and Seal PackagingSeal Strength: Per MIL-STD-202, Method 112.30 seconds at 125° hot FluorocarbonSolderability: Per MIL-STD-202, Method 208.Tape Seal: Polyester film


Circuit Selector

Tap Switch

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

DIMENSION A± .010 (0,25)

.395 ± .010(10,03 ± 0,25)

.100 ± .005 (2,54 ± 0,13)

.020 ± .002 (0,51 ± 0,05) TYP.

.100 ± .005 (2,54 ± 0,13) TYP.

.140 ± .005 (3,56 ± 0,13) TYP.

.190 ± .010(4,83 ± 0,25)

.250 ± .010(6,35 ± 0,25)

.080 ± .005(2,03 ± 0,13)

.145 + .010 – .015(3,68 + 0,25 –0,38)

TYP.

.050 ± .005(1,27 ± 0,13)TYP.

.015/.020(0,38/0,51)

TYP.

.012 ± .001(0,30 ± 0,03)

TYP.

.180 ± .010(4,57 ± 0,25) .300 + .030 – .000

(7,62 + 0,76 – 0,00)C L C L C L

C L

DIMENSION AFor 10 Position Switch:1.180 ± .010 (29,97 ± 0,25)For 16 Position Switch:1.780 ± .010 (45,21 ± 0,25)

Number of Positions Type of Circuit Code Number per Tube Part Number*

10 Circuit Selector 9 79A10T10 Single Pole 9 79C10T16 Circuit Selector 6 79A16T16 Single Pole 6 79C16T


*A top tape seal is required for switches that are machine soldered or heavily cleaned after handsoldering. To order top seal versions, add "S" before the "T" in the Grayhill part number.

DIP1 5


DIP

S

witc

hes


SERIES 79BLinear Action, Coded OutputFEATURES• Reliable Switching, Positive Detent• Codes in BCD and Hexadecimal• True Zero Output• 10 or 16 Positions• 2000 Cycle Life• Up to 60,000 Detent Operations

DIMENSIONS In inches (and millimeters) CIRCUITRY

SPECIFICATIONSElectrical RatingsMake-and-break Current Rating: 2,000 cyclesat 10 mA, 50 mVdc; 2,000 cycles at 125 mA, 6Vdc; 2,000 cycles at 50 mA, 30 Vdc.Contact Resistance: 100 mohms maximumafter life, measured at 10 mA dc and 50 mV(open circuit). Initial values are 60 mohmsmaximum for coded switches, and 50 mohmsfor other linear action switches.Insulation Resistance (at 100 Vdc):Between adjacent isolated contacts: Initial:5,000 Mohms minimum; After Life: 1,000Mohms minimumAcross open contacts: Initial: 5,000 Mohmsminimum; After Life: 1,000 Mohms minimumDielectric Strength: Between adjacent isolatedcontacts and across open contacts. Initial: 750Vac; After Life: 500 VacContact Carry Rating: 2 amps with a maximum

contact temperature rise of 20°C.

Mechanical RatingsMechanical Life: 4,000 cycles maximum. Note:a cycle is one complete operation, back andforth through all switch positions.Vibration Resistance: 10 to 2,000 Hz at 15G or0.060" double amplitude; no damage and nocontact openings exceeding 10 mS (Method204, Test Condition B).Shock Resistance: 509, 11 mS, half sine; nodamage and no openings exceeding 10microseconds (Method 213, Test Condition A).

Environmental RatingsRefer to MIL-STD-202F per MIL-S-83504Operating Temperature Range: -40°C to +85°CStorage Temperature Range: -55°C to +85°CMoisture Resistance: 240 hours withtemperature cycling and polarization, per MIL-STD-202F, Method 305

Materials and FinishesNonconductive Parts: Plastic UL94V-OShorting Arm: Phosphor bronze, gold plateover nickel plateBase Contacts: Copper alloy, gold plate overnickel plateTerminals: Copper alloy, matte tin plated overnickel barrierPotting Material: Epoxy

Tape Seal and PackagingTape Seal: Polyester film

*A top tape seal is required for switches that are machine soldered or heavily cleaned after handsoldering. To order top seal versions, add "S" before the "T" in the Grayhill part number.


All dimensions not shown here are the same as those on the facing page.

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F

0 1 2 4 8 0 1 2 4 8

.100 ± .005 (2,54 ± 0,13) TYP.C L

C L

C L

C L

.240 ± .005(6.10 ± 0,13) TYP.

.100 ± .005 (2,54 ± 0,13) TYP.

.390 ± .005(9,91 ± 0,13)

.490 ± .005(12,45 ± 0,13)

.100 ± .005 (2,54 ± 0,13) TYP.

C L C L

.100 ± .005 (2,54 ± 0,13) TYP.

C L C LSEE NOTE A SEE NOTE A

NOTE A: All terminals on this side of the switch are bussed internally. Any one of them may be used as the common terminal.

SW

ITC

H P

OS

ITIO

NS

0123456789ABCDEF

16 10

0 1 2 4 8 0 1 2 4 8

BINARY CODES

TERMINAL LOCATIONS

Dot indicates contact made betweencontact and output terminal.

Number of Positions Type of Circuit Code Number per Tube Part Number*

10 Binary Code Decimal 9 79B10T16 Hexadecimal 6 79B16T


DIP1 6



DIP

S

witc

hes

SERIES 78CRight Angle Option


Right AngleFEATURES• Easy Access• SPST Circuitry• 2-10 and 12 positions available• Sealed versions available

APPLICATIONSTelecommunications, computers andperipherals, instruments and controls.

SPECIFICATIONSMechanicalMechanical Life: 2000 operations per switch.Operation Force: 1000gf max.Stroke: 2.0mmOperation Temp: -20°C to 70°CStorage Temp: -40°C to 85°CVibration Test: MIL-STD-202F METHOD201A.Frequency: 10-55-10Hz/1 min.Directions: X,Y,Z, three mutuallyperpendicular directions.Time: 2 hours each direction.High reliability.Shock Test: MIL-STD-202F METHOD 213 B.CONDITION A.Gravity: 50G (peak value), 11 msec.Direction and times: 6 sides and 3 Timesin each direction.High reliability.

ElectricalElectrical Life: 2000 operations per switch24VDC, 25mA.Non-Switching Rating: 100mA, 50VDC.Switching rating: 25mA, 24VDC.Contact Resistance: 50mΩ max. at initial.Insulation Resistance: (at 500VDC) 100mΩmin.Dielectric Strength: 500VAC/1 minute.Capacitance: 5pF max.Circuit: Single pole single throw.

Soldering and Cleaning ProcessFor best results follow these recommendations:Keep switch contacts in “OFF” position for alloperations.Wave Sodering: Recommended soldertemperature: 500°F (260°C) max 5 seconds.Hand Soldering: Use a soldering iron of 30Watts or less, controlled at 608°F (320°C)approximately 2 seconds while applying solder.Cleaning: Tape sealed versions withstandcleaning processes.

MaterialsBase Contact: Phospher bronze with goldplating over nickelTerminals: Brass with gold plating over nickelNonconductive Parts: Plastic UL94V-0Potting Material: EpoxyTape Seal: Polyester film.

CIRCUITRY


Series 78C DIMENSIONS In inches (and millimeters)

SeriesNumber of PositionsRoHS compliant

78C08SRATRight AngleS= Top Tape Sealed, Blank=Unsealed


Ø.038±.002(Ø0,97±0,05)

.100±.004(2,54±0,10)

.100±.004(2,54±0,10)

.059(1,50)

.055(1,40)

.039(1,0)

.272 MAX(6,90) .063

(1,60)

.006±.002(0,15±0,05)

.100±.024(2,54±0,60)

.244±.024(6,20±0,60)

ON GH

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

.137(3,50)

.389(9,90)

.023(0,60) .114 MIN

(2,90).100(2,54)

TYP.

LENGTHSEE TABLE

(2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, POS AVAIL)

DIP17

DIP

S

witc

hes


TABLE

Grayhill Part Number Length Dimension inches (mm) Packaging

78C02RAT 0.254(6,44) 73 pcs/tube

78C03RAT 0.354(8,98) 52 pcs/tube

78C04RAT 0.454(11,52) 40 pcs/tube

78C05RAT 0.554(14,06) 33 pcs/tube

78C06RAT 0.654(16,60) 28 pcs/tube

78C07RAT 0.754(19,14) 24 pcs/tube

78C08RAT 0.854(21,68) 21 pcs/tube

78C09RAT 0.954(24,22) 19 pcs/tube

78C10RAT 1.054(26,76) 17 pcs/tube

78C12RAT 1.254(31,84) 14 pcs/tube

78C02SRAT 0.254(6,44) 70 pcs/tube

78C03SRAT 0.354(8,98) 52 pcs/tube

78C04SRAT 0.454(11,52) 39 pcs/tube

78C05SRAT 0.554(14,06) 32 pcs/tube

78C06SRAT 0.654(16,60) 28 pcs/tube

78C07SRAT 0.754(19,14) 24 pcs/tube

78C08SRAT 0.854(21,68) 21 pcs/tube

78C09SRAT 0.954(24,22) 19 pcs/tube

78C10SRAT 1.054(26,76) 17 pcs/tube

78C12SRAT 1.254(31,84) 14 pcs/tube


DIP18


DIP

S

witc

hes

0 9

87

654

32

1

43

2

1 0 7

6

5

87654 3 2 1 0 FEDCB

A9 87654 3 2 1 0 FEDCB

A9

4C1

2C8

012

3 45

.190 (4,83)2 PLACES

PIN #1

.390(9,91)

.380 (9,65)

.500(12,7)

.025 (0,64)

.060(1,52)TYP.

.100 .005(2,54 0,13)

TYP.

.020 +.004/-.002(0,51 + 0,10/0,05)

TERMINALS ARE.020 +.004/-.002(0,51 +0,10/0,05)WIDE BY .012 .002(0,31 0,05) THICK.038 DIA. HOLE SIZE RECOMMENDED

PC board layoutas viewed from thetop of the switch

012

3 45

.390(9,91)

.040 .005(1,02 0,13)

.100 .005 TYP.(2,54 0,13)

0.410(10,41)

0.100(2,54) Typ.

0.050(1,27)

0.240(6,10)

.190 (4,83)2 PLACES

CORNERCLOSESTTO PIN #1

.380 (9,65)

.146 (3,71)

.300 (7,62) TYP.

012

3 45

.390(9,91)

.190 (4,83)2 PLACES

CORNERCLOSESTTO PIN #1

.225 (5,72)

.225 (5,72)

0.315 [8.00]

0.385 [9.78]

0.250[6.35]

0.280

0.560

0.100 TYP0.070 TYP

2

C

8

4

C

1

Solder pad layoutas viewed from thetop of the switch

2

C

8

4

C

1

SERIES 94HBinary Coded

Tolerances are ± .010 inches unless specified otherwise.


Surface MountGullwing

Standard Thru-Hole

ACTUATOR STYLES

All actuation types are available in octal (8),binary coded decimal (10), or hexadecimal(16) codes; with either standard orcomplement output. Standard code outputshave natural color rotors; complements in acontrasting color.

Octal–8 position

BCD–10 position

Hex–16 position

EXTENDED ACTUATOR TYPES

FEATURES• Sealed Construction; No Tape

Seal Required• Surface Mount or Thru-Hole Style• Tube or Tape and Reel Packaging• Octal, BCD, and Hexadecimal

Code• In Standard or Complement• Standard and Right Angle Mount• Flush or Extended Actuators• Gold-Plated Contacts

.282(7,16)

.270 (6,86)OR.170 (4,32)OR.090 (2,29)

SEEORDERINGINFORMATION

.200(5,08)

0

12 3

4

567

012

3 4 56

7

.140 DIA.( ∅ 3,56)

.140 DIA.( ∅ 3,56)

.270 (6,86)OR.170 (4,32)OR.090 (2,29)

SEEORDERINGINFORMATION

Figure 1"A" style rotor

Figure 3

Figure 2"F" style rotor

Surface Mount J-Lead

DIP19

Rotary DIP Switches

DIP

S

witc

hes


TAPE AND REEL PACKAGING:Series 94H

Available from your local GrayhillDistributor. For prices and discounts, contacta local Sales Office, an authorized localDistributor or Grayhill.

0

4

123 7

65

0

4

123 7

65

0

4

123 7

65

0

4

1

2

3

7

6

5

0

4

1

2

3

7

6

5

0

4

1

2

3

7

6

5

0

4

1

2

3

7

6

5


DIRECTION OF FEED

16mm

24mm


PIN #1CHAMFER

Meets requirements of EIA 481-2.

Each reel contains the following number ofswitches with a 15.35 inch (390 mm)minimum leader and a 6.30 inch (160 mm)minimum trailer.

94HA style 750 sw/reel94HB style 150 sw/reel94HC style 200 sw/reel94HE style 300 sw/reel94HF style 750 sw/reel

Knob Style and Height Knob Color Arrow Color Part Number

1A Gray N/A 947706-0015A Gray Black 947706-0051B Black N/A 947705-0011B Gray N/A 947705-0122B Gray White 947705-0043B Gray Black 947705-0174B Gray Black 947705-0181B Natural N/A 947705-0094B Black White 947705-0105B Gray Black 947705-019

ORDERING INFORMATION: Series 94 High Temperature Knobs*

*Ordered as a separate item. B = Standard (Natural), C = Complementary (Conrasting Color).

ORDERING INFORMATION: Series 94H

SeriesActuator Style: A = Flush, Figure 1

B = .270, Figure 3 (see page B-21)C = .170, Figure 3 (see page B-21)E = .090, Figure 3 (see page B-21)F = Flush, Figure 2

Code: B = Standard (Natural), 94HAB10WRT C = Complementary (Contrasting Color)

RoHS CompliantPackaging: R = Tape and Reel, (Surface Mount Only)

Blank = Tube*Terminal Style: RA = Right Angle, Thru-Hole

J = J-LeadW = Surface MountBlank = Thru-Hole

Number of Positions: 08 = Octal, 8 Position10 = BCD, 10 Position16 = Hex, 16 Position

* 27 Pieces per tube for surface mount and thru-hole, 24 pieces per tube for right angle switches.

SERIES 94 High Temperature Knobs: For Shaft Extensions

.370(9,40)

.190(4,83)

.370(9,40)

.040(1,02)

.210(5,33) .040

(1,02)

1 2 3 4 5

A B

Slotted knobs show switchmarkings. Contact Grayhillfor other knob material/marking color combinationsand geometrics.

* Use only with Actuator Type B or C

Right Angle Thru-Hole


0

12 3

4

567

.430 (10,92).210 (5,33)

.190(4,83).400

(10,16)

PIN #1 .100 ± .005 (2,54 ± 0,13) TYP.

.100 ± .005 (2,54 ± 0,13)

.145(3,68)

.282 (7,16)

.156(3,96)

8C2

1C4


TERMINALS ARE.020 ±.002 (0,51±0,05)WIDE BY .012 ±.002(0,31 ±0,05) THICK

DIP20

Rotary DIP Switches


DIP

S

witc

hes

SERIES 94REconomical, Binary Coded

FEATURES• 10,000 Cycles of Operation• Gold-Plated Contacts• Sealed Contact System• Right Angle Mount• Octal, BCD & Hexadecimal Codes• Standard or Complement• RoHS Compliant

SPECIFICATIONS: Series 94H and 94RElectrical RatingsMake-and-break Current Rating: 30 mA at 30Vdc for 10,000 cycles of operation.Carrying Current Rating: 100 mA at 50 VdcContact Resistance: 50 mohms maximuminitially (measured at 10 mA, 50 mVdc).150 mohms maximum after life.Insulation Resistance:(measured at 100 Vdcacross open switch contacts)Initial: 5000 Mohms minimum. After Life: 1000Mohms minimum.Dielectric Strength: (measured across openswitch contacts) Initial: 500 Vac RMSminimum. After Life: 250 Vac RMS

Mechanical RatingsMechanical Life: 10,000 cycles of operation.One cycle is a rotation through all positions anda complete return through all positions.Mechanical Shock: 1000g's, 0.5 mS, half sineper MIL-STD-202F, Method 213, Test ConditionE.Vibration Resistance: 10-2000 Hz at 15G or0.060" double amplitude per MIL-STD-202F,Method 204, Test Condition B.Operational Torque: 2 to 6 inch-ounces initiallyand 1.2 inch-ounces minimum after life.

Environmental RatingsOperating Temperature Range: -40° to +85°C.Storage Temperature Range: -40° to +85°C.

Moisture Resistance: 240 hours withtemperature cycling and polarization. Passesinsulation resistance and dielectric strengthper MIL-STD-202F, Method 106 followingexposure.

Materials and FinishesRotor and Switch Body: Plastic (UL94V-O)Contact Material: Copper alloy plated.30 microinches minimum gold over 50microinches minimum nickel.Shorting Member: Copper alloy plated.30 microinches minimum gold over 50microinches minimum nickel.Terminals: Copper alloy, matte tin plated overnickel barrier.

CODE & TRUTH TABLES:Series 94H and 94RDIMENSIONS In inches (and millimeters)

Unless otherwise indicated, tolerances are ± .010 (0,25)

SW

ITC

H P

OS

ITIO

N

CODE OUTPUT CODE OUTPUT

8 841 20123456789ABCDEF

41 2

StandardOutput

ComplementOutput

Dot indicates terminal to commonconnection. All switches are continuousrotation.

Octal and Octal Complement outputs are0 thru 7 positions.

BCD and BCD Complement outputs are 0thru 9 positions.

Hexadecimal and HexadecimalComplement outputs are 0 thru Fpositions.

Standard codes have natural colorrotors; complements have rotors in acontrasting color.

.213 (5,41)

.433 (11,00)

.443(11,25)

.480(12,19)

.286 (7,26)

.689 (17,50).210 (5,33) .200 (5,08)

1.123 (28,52)

.044 (1,12) DIA.

.179(4,55)

.094(2,93)

.162(4,11)

.059(1,50) .058 (1,47)

DIA..199 (5,05).235 (5,97)

8C2

1C4


Pin #1

Internal O-ring: Rubber BUNA-NSoldering InformationSoldering Temperature: 260° C maximum.Cleaning: Acceptable solutions include 1-1-1Trichlorenthane, Freon (TF, TE, or TMS),Isopropyl Alcohol and detergent (140°Fmaximum). Solut ions which are notrecommended include Acetone, MethyleneChloride, and Freon TMC.

ORDERING INFORMATION: Series 94RContinuous Rotation Versions

No. of Standard Code ComplementCode Positions Part Number Part Number

Octal 8 94RB08CT 94RC08CTBCD 10 94RB10CT 94RC10CTHexadecimal 16 94RB16CT 94RC16CT

Rotational Stop Versions*

No. of Standard Code ComplementCode Positions Part Number Part Number

Hexadecimal 16 94RB16FT 94RC16FT

* Consult Grayhill for 8 or 10 positionDIP21

Rotary DIP Switches

DIP

S

witc

hes


DIP Switch Options and Accessories

OPTIONS


Position Identification Line Option

For Series 76RSB, 76RSC, 76RSD, & 90BA line can be added to the recessed rocker orSeries 90 slide actuator to provide positiveidentification of the actuator position. To order,add L as a final suffix to the part number. Forexample, 76RSB08 becomes 76RSB08L; and,90B08S becomes 90B08SL.Available from a local Grayhill Distributor.

Other Switch Markings

For Series 76, 78, & 90We can mark your part number or other wordingon the switch, often at no charge. For somemarkings there will be a nominal charge fortooling plus a set-up charge. In addition, thereis a marking charge per side per switch. Add itto the unit price and discount it accordingly.To order, contact Grayhill.

ACCESSORIES

.152 (3,86) TYP.

.130(3,30)TYP.

.422 (10,72)REF.

.217(1,20)REF.

SEE NOTE

Protective Cover Accessory

For Series 76, & 78Rigid, clear plastic cover fits all but toggleactuated switches. It provides a top cover forless strenuous cleaning, serves as a dust coverin dirty environments, and provides protectionagainst accidental actuation.Material: 76,78, only-Polycarbonate.Purchase as a separate item. Check length ofthe desired DIP Switch, and then select fromthe ordering information on this page.Available from a local Grayhill Distributor.

Note: For length, add .042 "(1,07 MM)to length of DIP switch.

DIPSTICK Accessory

For all seriesPen-sized plastic DIPSTICK has a taperedend for actuating DIP Switches.

Part Number ........................ 90-DIPSTICK

Available from a local Grayhill Distributor

Length Protective CoverInches Part Number

0.280 76P020.380 76P030.480 76P040.580 76P050.680 76P060.780 76P070.880 76P080.980 76P091.080 76P101.180 79P101.780 79P16


DIP22


Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs

Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs


PageOPTICAL ENCODERS

High Resolution

Ball Bearing, 4-Pin ....................................................... Series 63K ............. 2Ball Bearing, 5-Pin ....................................................... Series 63R ............. 4Hollow Shaft ................................................................. Series 63T ............. 620mm ............................................................................ Series 63Q ............. 820mm Absolute Encoding ........................................... Series 63A........ 10

ACCESSORIESControl Knobs .............................................................. Series 11K ........... 12

Contents: Encoders

Encoder1

OPTICAL ENCODERS• Eliminates Rotary Mechanical

Contacts• Accurate Resolution up to 1024

Positions• Logic Compatible• Selects Menu or Display Items• Includes Data Input Switch• Up to 1 Billion Trouble-Free

Cycles


Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs

Optical Encoders

TOP VIEW

TOP VIEW

GRAYHILL XXXX X-X 63KXXX

XXXX X-XXX

GRAYHILL XXXX X-X 63KXXX-XXX

XXXX X-XXX-XXX

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, DIMENSION TOLERANCES ARE AS FOLLOWS: LINEAR .010 (.25), DIAMETERS .010 (.025), ANGULAR 5˚

1.250 DIA(31.75)

.215(5.46)KEYWAY DEPTH

.219(5.57)

.650 DIA(16.51)MOUNTINGSURFACE

.033(.84)

.066(1.68)

.250(6.35)

.501(12.73)

.725.025(18.41.64)

.350(8.89)

.225(5.71)

.776.025(19.71.64)

.249/.250 DIA(6.32/6.34).025 X 45˚

(.64)CHAMFER

1/2 - 32UN-2ATHREADS

1.250 DIA(31.75)


.219(5.57)


.033(.84)

.066(1.68)

.250(6.35)

.501(12.73)

.725.025(18.42.64)

.350(8.89)

.249/.250 DIA(6.32/6.34).025 X 45˚

(.64)CHAMFER


CABLE LENGTH

6.000, 25

CONNECTOR ISMOLEX P/N14-56-3046OR EQUIVALENT

.150(3.81)

.300(7.62)

.100(2.54)

PIN #1

PIN #1

FEATURES• 25, 32, 50, 64, 100, 128 and 256

Cycles per Revolution Available• Sealed Version Available• Rugged Construction• Cable or Pin Version• 300 Million Rotational Cycles• 5,000 RPM Shaft Rotation


SERIES 63KHigh Resolution, Ball Bearing,4-Pin

Encoder2

Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs


Optical Encoders

SPECIFICATIONSElectrical RatingsOperating Voltage: 5.0 ±.25 VdcSupply Current: 30 mA maximum at 5 VdcLogic Output Characteristics:Output Type: Open collector with integratedSchmitt Trigger and 10 KΩ pull-up resistorMaximum Sink Current: 16 mA at .40 voltsPower Consumption: 150 mW maximumOptical Rise Time: 500 nS typicalOptical Fall Time: 14 nS typical

Mechanical RatingsMechanical Life: 300 million revolutionsTime Life: Guaranteed for 10 years ofcontinuous operation (calculated from emitterdegradation data)Mounting Torque: 20 in-lbs maximumTerminal Strength: 5 lbs terminal pull-outforce minimumSolderability: 95% free of pin holes and voidsOperating Torque: 0.5 in-oz maximum (nodetents) for unsealed versionsExternally Applied Shaft Force: Axial: 15 lbsmaximum; Radial: 15 lbs maximum

Environmental RatingsOperating Temperature Range: -40°C to 85°CStorage Temperature Range: -55°C to 100°CRelative Humidity: 90-95% at 40°C for 96hoursVibration Resistance: Harmonic motion withamplitude of 15g, within a varied 10 to 2000Hz frequency for 12 hours per MIL-STD-202,Method 204Shock Resistance: Test 1: 100g for 6 mS,half-sine wave with velocity change of 12.3 ft/s.Test 2: 100g for 6 mS, sawtooth wave withvelocity change of 9.7 ft/s.

CIRCUITRY AND WAVEFORM: Standard Quadrature 2-Bit Code

Materials and FinishesBushing:Zinc diecastHousing: Hiloy 610BShaft: Stainless SteelCode Rotor and Aperture: Chemically etchedstainless steel/electroformed nickelPrinted Circuit Board: NEMA Grade FR-4.Five microinches minimum gold over 100microinches minimum nickel over copperOptical Barrier: Polyphenylene sulfide, 94 V-0Backplate: PolyesterHeader: Phosphor bronze, 200 microinchestin over 50 microinches nickel (pin versiononly)Infrared Emitter: Gallium aluminum arsenidePhoto IC: Planar siliconRetaining Ring: Stainless steelCable: 26 AWG, stranded/tinned wire, PVCcoated on .100 (2,54) centers (cable versiononly)Connector: Glass-filled PCT, UL94V-0

Bearing SubassemblyBearing: NSK ABEC 5 (stainless steel)Preload Collar: 303 (stainless steel)

1 CYCLE

OUTPUTA

OUTPUTB

CHANNEL A LEADS CHANNEL B BY90˚ ± 45˚ IN ALL ROTATIONS FORCLOCKWISE ROTATION OF SHAFT.

4

3

1

2

10 KΩ

PIN #

GROUND

OUTPUT B

OUTPUT A

POWER 5V

10 KΩ

Available from your local Grayhill Distributor. For prices and discounts, contact a local Sales Office, an authorized local Distributor or Grayhill.


SeriesStyle: K = Standard, 4-pin, high resolution

KS = Sealed, 4-pin, high resolutionCycles: per channel per revolution = 25, 32, 50, 64, 100, 128, 256

Termination:Blank (no dash or numbers): pins as described in drawing.Cable Termination: 060 = 6.0in. Cable is terminated with Molex Connnector P/N 14-56-3046.

63KS256–060

Encoder3


Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs

Optical Encoders

FEATURES• 25, 32, 50, 64, 100, 128 and 256

Cycles per Revolution Available• Sealed Version Available• Rugged Construction• Cable or Pin Versions• 300 Million Rotational Cycles• 5000 RPM Shaft Rotation• Index Pulse Available

SERIES 63RHigh Resolution, Ball Bearing,5-pin (Polarized Connection)

DIMENSIONS In Inches (and millimeters)

TOP VIEW

TOP VIEW

GRAYHILL XXXX X-X 63RXXX

XXXX X-XXX

GRAYHILL XXXX X-X 63RXXX-XXX

XXXX X-XXX-XXX

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, DIMENSION TOLERANCES ARE AS FOLLOWS LINEAR .010 (.25), DIAMETERS .010 (.25), ANGULAR 5˚

1.250 DIA(31.75)


.219(5.57)


.033(.84)

.066(1.68)

.250(6.35)

.400(10.16)

.200(5.08)

.100(2.54)

.501(12.73)

.725.025(18.41.64)

.350(8.89)

.225(5.71)

.776.025(19.71.64)

.249/.250 DIA(6.32/6.34).025 X 45˚

(.64)CHAMFER


1.250 DIA(31.75)


.219(5.57)


.033(.84)

.066(1.68)

.250(6.35)

.501(12.73)

.725.025(18.42.64)

.350(8.89)

.249/.250 DIA(6.32/6.34).025 X 45˚

(.64)CHAMFER


CABLE LENGTH6.000,25


PIN #1

PIN #1

Encoder4

Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs


Optical Encoders


SPECIFICATIONSElectrical RatingsOperating Voltage: 5 ±.25 VdcSupply Current: 30 mA maximum at 5 VdcLogic Output Characteristics:Output Type: Open collector with integratedSchmitt Trigger and 10 KW pull-up resistorMaximum Sink Current: 16 mA at .40 voltsPower Consumption: 150 mW maximumOptical Rise Time: 500 nS typicalOptical Fall Time: 14 nS typical

Mechanical RatingsMechanical Life: 300 million revolutionsTime Life: Guaranteed for 10 years ofcontinuous operation (calculated fromemitter degradation data)Mounting Torque: 20 in-lbs maximumTerminal Strength: 5 lbs terminal pull-outforce minimumSolderability: 95% free of pin holes and voidsExternally Applied Shaft Force:Axial:15 lbs maximum; Radial:15 lbsmaximumOperating Torque: 0.5 in-oz maximum (nodetents) for unsealed versions

Environmental RatingsOperating Temperature Range: -40°C to 85°CStorage Temperature Range: -55°C to 100°CRelative Humidity: 90-95% at 40°C for 96hoursVibration Resistance: Harmonic motion withamplitude of 15g, within a varied 10 to 2000 Hzfrequency for 12 hours per MIL-STD-202,Method 204Shock Resistance: Test 1: 100g for 6 mS,half-sine wave with velocity change of 12.3 ft/s.Test 2: 100g for 6 mS, sawtooth wave withvelocity change of 9.7 ft/s.

Materials and FinishesBushing: Zinc diecastHousing: Hiloy 610BShaft: Stainless steelCode Rotor and Aperture: Chemicallyetched stainless steel/electroformed nickelPrinted Circuit Board: NEMA Grade FR-4.Five microinches minimum gold over 100microinches minimum nickel over copperOptical Barrier: Polyphenylene sulfide, 94V-0

CIRCUITRY AND WAVEFORM: Standard Quadrature 2-Bit Code

Backplate: PolyesterHeader: Phosphor bronze, 200 microinchestin over 50 microinches nickel (pin versiononly)Infrared Emitter: Gallium aluminumarsenidePhoto IC: Planar siliconRetaining Ring: Stainless steelCable: 26 AWG, stranded/tinned wire, PVCcoated on .100 (2,54) centers (cable versiononly)Connector: Glass-filled PCT, UL94V-0

Bearing SubassemblyBearing: NSK ABEC 5 (stainless steel)Preload Collar: 303 stainless steel

1 CYCLE

OUTPUTA

OUTPUTB


1

2

3

5

4

10 KΩ

10 KΩ

PIN #

GROUND

NO CONTACT

OUTPUT A

POWER 5V

OUTPUT B


SeriesStyle: R = Standard, 5-pin, high resolution

RS = Sealed, 5-pin, high resolutionCycles: per channel per revolution = 25, 32, 50, 64, 100, 128, 256

63RS256–060

Termination:Blank (no dash or numbers): pins as described in drawing.Cable Termination: 060 = 6.0in. Cable is terminated with Molex Connnector P/N14-56-3056.

Encoder5


Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs

Optical Encoders

SERIES 63THigh Resolution, Hollow Shaft

FEATURES• Low Profile• Simplified Encoder Attachment• Resolutions up to 1024 Lines per

Revolutions• Three-Phase Commutation in

4,6 or 8 Pole Versions• Conductive Carbon Fiber Housing• Standard 1.812" (46mm) Bolt

Circle Mounting• Hollow Shaft Sizes Up to .375" or

10mm in Diameter• High Noise Immunity• Cost Competitive with Modular

Encoders• Industry Standard Line Drivers


0.87 (22,1)

1.45 +.01-.00(36,83 +0,25-00)

1.812 (46,02)

TWO 4-40 SET SCREWS @ 90˚

18" STRANDED CABLE WITH 100% FOIL SHIELD

FLEXIBLE MOUNT WITH INDUSTRY

STANDARD 1.812" (46,02) BOLT CIRCLE

HOLLOW SHAFTDIAMETERS FROM0.250" (6,350) UP TO 0.375" (9,525)

CONDUCTIVE CARBON FIBERCOMPOSITE HOUSING

30˚ ROTATIONAL ADJUSTMENT

2.10 (53,34)

Top View Bottom View

Side View

APPLICATIONS• Steer by Wire• Fractional Horse Power Motors• Machine Tool Controls• Material Handling• Flow Meters

Encoder6

Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs


Optical Encoders

SPECIFICATIONSElectrical RatingsInput Voltage: 5 ± 5% Vdc or 5-26 VdcRipple Current: 2% peak-to-peak @ 5 VdcOutput Circuits: AM26LS31 RS422A linedriver, OL7272 line driver, TTLLogic Output Characteristics:Output Type: Quadrature with channel Aleading channel B for CW rotation with indexcentered over AFrequency Response: 200 kHzSymmetry: 180° ±10% typicalMinimum Edge Separation: 54 electricaldegreesCommutation Format: Three phase: 4, 6 or8 polesCommuntation Accuracy: ±1° mechanicalInput Current Requirements: 125 mAtypical, 5 Vdc plus interface loads

Mechanical RatingsMaximum Shaft Speed: 8,000 RPMHollow Shaft Diameter: 0.250", 0.312",0.375", 6mm, 8mm, 10mmRadial Shaft Movement: 0.007"(0,178mm) T.I.R.Axial Shaft Movement: ±0.030"(7,62mm)Housing: Carbon fiber composite (caseground via cable)Housing Volume Resistivity: 10-2

ohm-cmTermination:Standard: 15-conductor stranded cable, 28 AWG, 18" (457mm) in lengthNon-commutation and TTL output:9-conductor stranded cable, 28 AWG,18" in lengthMounting: 1.812" (46mm) bolt circleAcceleration: 1x105

radians per second2

Moment of Inertia: 1.5 x 10-4 oz-in-s2

Accuracy: ±.8 arc minutes

Environmental RatingsOperating Temperature Range: -20°C to100°C typical; -20°C to 120°C optional(contact Grayhill for more information)Storage Temperature Range: -40°C to125°CRelative Humidity: 98% non-condensingVibration: 20G's @ 50-500 CPSMechanical Shock: 50g @ 11mS duration

OPTIONSContact Grayhill for custom terminations, reso-lutions, mounting configurations, and shaftcouplings and configurations.

SeriesResolution: (quadrature cycles per revolution) A = 500, B = 512, C = 1000, D = 1024, E = 256Voltage: L = 5.0 ± 5% Vdc, H = 5-26 VdcOutput Option: 1 = AM26LS31 RS422A Line Driver, 2 = OL7272, 5-26 Vdc Line Driver, 3 = TTL,Output Option: 4 = RS422A, for A, B, Z; Open Collector for U, R, WMounting: 1 = Std. 1.812" flexMounting: 2 = Size 15 Resolver Mount

63TAL-1-1-4-2-1

Index Gating: 0 = Ungated index; 1 = Gated to A, 180°; 2 = Gated to A and B, 90°Motor Poles: 4 = 4 pole, 6 = 6 pole, 8 = 8 pole, 0 = no commutationHollow Shaft Size: 1 = 0.250", 2 = 0.312", 3 = 0.375", 4 = 6mm, 5 = 8mm, 6 = 10mm


Available from your local Grayhill Component Distributor. For prices and discounts, contact a local Sales Office, an authorized localDistributor, or Grayhill.

WAVEFORM, CIRCUITRY, AND WIRING DIAGRAM Standard Quadrature 2-Bit Code

Output A

Output B

Output Z

Output A'

Output B'

Output Z'

Clockwise shaft rotation as viewed looking at the encoder face

Output U

Output U'

Output V'

Output V

Output W

Output W'

180˚ Electrical ± 10%90˚ Electrical Typical

120˚ Electrical Typical

240˚ Electrical Typical

WiringRed = +VdcBlack - CommonBrown - Output AWhite - Output A'Blue - Output BGreen - Output B'Orange - Output ZYellow - Output Z'

Maximum Z Width

Violet - Output UGray - Output U'Brown/White - Output VRed/White - Output V'Orange/White - Output WYellow/White - Output W'Black/White - Case GroundDrain Wire - Cable Shield

Output CircuitOutputs A, B, Z, U, V & W

Outputs A', B', Z', U', V' & W'

Encoder7


Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs

Optical Encoders

SERIES 63QHigh Resolution, 20mm


Unless otherwise specified, standard tolerance is ±.010 (0,25)

FEATURES• Miniature Size, 20mm (0.787")

Diameter• Resolutions up to 1024 Lines per

Revolution• Single Ended and Differential

Outputs• 1 Billion Rotational Life Cycles• Conductive Carbon Fiber Housing• IP 50 Sealing• High Noise Immunity• Low Supply Current

Requirements

DESCRIPTIONThe Series 63Q is intended forapplications requiring high performance,high-resolution digital feedback in a verysmall package. It provides the resolutionof larger encoder packages but in apackage only 20mm (0.787") in diameter.Outputs can be configured in either singleended, open collector or internal pull-upresistor, or with an industrial standardRS422A differential line driver. The

sensing scheme also embodies a muchsimplified encoder design, whichultimately results in longer service life, andless down time due to feedback devicefailure. The encoder housing isconstructed of a conductive carbon fibercomposite that provides the EMI shieldingof an all metal housing and theperformance of a lightweight robustassembly.

APPLICATIONS• Steer by Wire• Fractional Horse Power Motors• Machine Tool Controls• Material Handling• Flow Meters

Encoder8

1 2

9 10

Ø.787

Ø.438

2-56X.200 DEEP3 PLCS.ON Ø.550 BOLT CIRCLE

.8888.000±.050

.730

.925

.063

.138

.875.050

.365±.020

Ø.1247+.0000-.0004

10 POSITIONDUAL ROWCONNECTORØ.715

.500

Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs


Optical Encoders

SPECIFICATIONSElectrical RatingsInput Voltage: 5.0 ± 5% Vdc or 5-26 VdcInput Current Requirements: 100 mAmaximum output option 1 and 2, 50 mAmaximum output option 3; plus interfaceloadsRipple Current: 2% peak-to-peak @ 5 VdcOutput Circuits: AM26LS31 RS422A linedriver, OL7272 line driver, TTLLogic Output Characteristics:Output Type: Quadrature with channel Aleading channel B for CW rotation withungated index pulse true over A and B highFrequency Response: 200 kHzSymmetry: 180° ±10% typicalMinimum Edge Separation: 54 electricaldegrees

Mechanical RatingsMaximum Shaft Speed: 8,000 RPMShaft Diameter: 0.125" (3,175)Shaft Material: Stainless steelBearings: Radial ball bearing, R2 typeRadial Shaft Load: 2 lbs maximumAxial Shaft Load: 1 lbs maximumHousing: Carbon fiber composite (caseground via connector)Housing Volume Resistivity: 10-2 ohm-cmTermination: Two rows of 5 pins on 0.100"centers. 8" ten conductor ribbon cable with2x5 connectorMounting: ServoMoment of Inertia: 9.5x10-6 oz-in-sec2

Acceleration: 1x105 radians per second2

SeriesResolution: (quadrature cycles per revolution) A = 500, B = 512, C = 1000, D = 1024Voltage: L = 5 ±5% Vdc, H = 5-26 Vdc

63QAL-1-P

Termination: C = 8" cable with connector, P = pin (no cable)Output Option: 1 = RS422A line driver; 2 = OL7272 (5-26 Vdc) line driver; 3 = TTL output


Available from your local Grayhill Component Distributor. For prices and discounts, contact a local Sales Office, an authorized local Distributor,or Grayhill.

PIN WIRING, CIRCUITRY, AND WAVEFORM STANDARD

Environmental RatingsOperating Temperature Range: 0 to 70°Ctypical; -20°C to 100°C optional (contactGrayhill for more information)Storage Temperature Range: -40°C to125°CRelative Humidity: 98% non-condensingVibration: 20G's @ 50-500 CPSMechanical Shock: 50G @ 11mS duration

OPTIONSContact Grayhill for custom terminations, reso-lutions, mounting configurations, shaft cou-plings and configurations, and absolute posi-tioning up to 256 positions.

Encoder9


Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs

Optical Encoders

SERIES 63AHigh Resolution, 20mm,Absolute Encoding


FEATURES• Miniature Size, 20mm (0 .787")

Diameter• Single Ended Outputs• Long Service Life• Conductive Carbon Fiber Housing• IP 50 Sealing• High Noise Immunity• Low Supply Current

Requirements• 8-Bit Gray Code or Binary Output• Single Turn 8-Bit Word

APPLICATIONS• Steer by Wire• Machine Tool Controls• Material Handling• Flow Meters• Any Application Requiring

Discrete Digital Positioning andAngular Detection at Start Up.

DESCRIPTIONThe Series 63A is intended forapplications requiring highperformance, high-resolution digitalfeedback in a very small package.The Series 63A encoder provides 8-bit absolute resolution in a packageonly 20mm (0.787") in diameter.

Outputs can be configured in eithergray code or binary code. Theencoder housing is constructed of aconductive carbon fiber compositethat provides the EMI shielding of anall metal housing and the performanceof a lightweight robust assembly.

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, STANDARD TOLERANCE IS ±.010 [±,26]

.925(23,5)

.890(22,61)

CABLE LENGTH8.0±.5

(203±13)

.795(20,19)

STANDARD 14 POSITIONDUAL ROW HEADER

FEMALE SPACING = .100 x .100(2,54 x 2,54)

.731(18,57)

.050(1,27)

.888(22,56)

Ø.787(19,99)

2-56 THREADS.20

( 5,1)3 PLACES ON A

.550 B.C.(14,0 B.C.)

Ø.438 ± .002(11,11 ± 0,05) PIN #14

PIN #1

.365 ± .020(9,27 ± 0,5)

+.0000-.0003.1247

+.0,000-0,0073,167( )

Encoder10

Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs


Optical Encoders

SPECIFICATIONSElectrical RatingsInput Voltage: 5.0 ± 5% Vdc or 5-26 VdcInput Current Requirements: 40 mAmaximum plus interface loadsRipple Current: 2% peak-to-peak @ 5 VdcOutput Circuits: TTL CompatibleVOH >3.80v@-8mA, VOL<0.44v@8mAVOH >2.50v@-20mA, VOL<0.50v@20mAOutput Format:Gray code or Binary Code: 8-bit, single turn,single ended. Gray code option utilizes lowtrue Chip Enable (CE’) that is pulled down withinternal 10K resistor. Positive TTL signal toCE’ will force the 8-bit outputs to tri-statecondition allowing for shared data pathsbetween encoders, easing basicmicroprocessor bus interfacing.

Frequency Response: 50 kHzOutput Count Increase: Clockwise rotation(Option A); counter clockwise rotation(Option B) See ordering information.Positional Accuracy: ±0.5 LSB maximumerror

Mechanical RatingsMaximum Shaft Speed: 8,000 RPMShaft Diameter: 0.125" (3,175mm)Shaft Material: Stainless steelBearings: Radial ball bearing, R2 typeRadial Shaft Load: 2 lbs maximumAxial Shaft Load: 1 lb maximumHousing: Carbon fiber composite (caseground via connector)Housing Volume Resistivity: 10-2 ohm-cm

Termination: 8" 12-conductor ribbon cablewith 2x7 connectorMounting: ServoMoment of Inertia: 9.5x10-6 oz-in-sec2

Acceleration: 1x105 radians per second2

Environmental RatingsOperating Temperature Range: 0 to 70°Ctypical; -20°C to 100°C optional (contactGrayhill for more information)Thermal Shutdown: Tambiant max. vs.input voltage max. 40C°= 25.0v, 60°C =20.0v, 80°C = 15.0v, 100°C = 10.0v (Totalload currents=30 mA)Storage Temperature Range: -40°C to125°CHumidity: 98% non-condensingVibration: 20g @ 50-500 CPSMechanical Shock: 50g @ 11mS duration

OPTIONSContact Grayhill for custom terminations andtemperature ratings.

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONSGray Binary Gray Binary

Pin# Code Code Pin# Code Code 1 COM COM 8 G5 25

2 +V +V 9 G6 26

3 G0 20 10 G7 27

4 G1 21 11 Case Case

5 G2 22 12 CE’ N.C. 6 G3 23 13 N.C. N.C. 7 G4 24 14 N.C. N.C.

Series:Resolution: 256 Absolute PositionsVoltage: L = 5.0 ±5% Vdc, H = 5-26 Vdc

63A256-L-G-AOutput Count Increase: A = shaft turned clockwise*, B = shaft turned counterclockwise* (*flange side view)Output Option: B = Binary, G = Gray Code


Available from your local Grayhill Component Distributor. For prices and discounts, contact a local Sales Office, an authorized local Distributor,or Grayhill.

Encoder11


Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs

Control Knob Accessories

CONTROL KNOBSIdeally Suited for Encoder andRotary Switches

FEATURES• Standard Fit for Grayhill Encoder

and Rotary Switches• Custom Materials, Styles, Colors

and Markings Available• Standard Black or Gray• Choice of Spring Clip (Press-On)

or Metal Insert with Set ScrewVersions

Contact Grayhill for special designconsiderations

.335 (8,51)

1.330(33,78)

DIA.

.440 (11,18)

DIA.

.620 (15,75)

.593 (15,06)

DIA..700

(17,78) DIA.

.600(15,24)

Top View Top ViewStyle 5013 Style 5014


.

.894(22,71)

DIA.

.500(12,7)DIA.

.662(16,81)

.350(8,9)DIA.

.500(12,7)

.440(11,2)


Available in .125 and .157 (4mm) dia. shaft in spring clip(press-on) version only.*

Available in .250 Dia. Shaft only.*

*See Ordering Information.

Encoder12

Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs




.660(16,76)

.092 (2,34) TYP.

(4 PLACES).500

(12,7) DIA.

Top View Top ViewStyle 5020Style 5019

Top ViewStyle 5028

.730(18,54)

.710(18,03)

DIA.

1.090(27,69)

SPRING CLIP

.500 (12,7)DIA. .500

(12,7)

1.575 DIA.(40,01)

OF .220

(5,59) R.

C L

.315 (8,00)

.550(13,97)

DIA.

.220 R. (5,59)

.400(10,16)

.215(5,46)

.393(9,98)

Available in ABS, .250 dia. shaft in spring clip (press-on). The locking clipis also available, requires a custom shaft.**

Top ViewStyle 5029

*See Ordering Information. **Contact Grayhill representative

For prices and discounts, contact a local sales office or Grayhill.

Custom materials, styles and colors are available.


SeriesStyle*: 5013, 5014, 5015, 5017, 5019, 5020, 5028, 5029

(see dimension drawings for style options)Shaft Diameter:

J = .125 dia. shaftE = .157 (4mm) dia. shaftK = .250 dia. shaft

11K5028-KCNB

Knob Color:B = BlackG = Gray

Material:A = ABS (available on the styles 5017 and 5020 only)N = Nylon

Version:C = Spring Clip (press-on)L = Locking Clip (available on the style 5020 only)M = Metal Insert w/Set Screw(s)

Encoder13


Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs

Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs


PageMECHANICAL ENCODERSMulti-Deck ..................................................................... Series 25 ................ 2Hex, Gray and Quadrature Code ................................ Series 25L .............. 4Binary and Gray Code ................................................. Series 26 ................ 6Binary and Binary Complement Code ........................ Series 51 ................ 7Binary Code.................................................................. Series 71 ................ 9


MECHANICAL ENCODERS• Standard BCD and Multiple

Code Outputs• As Small as 1/2" Diameter• Economical Means to Provide

Code Output

Contents: Encoders

Encoder1


Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs

Mechanical Encoders

SERIES 25Multi-Deck

FEATURES• Multiple Code and Indexing

Choices• Reliability Tested to Listed

Specifications• Less than 1.0" Square• Termination Choices• Panel and Shaft Seal Option• Manufactured to ISO 9001 and

Military Standards• Custom Configurations Available


.865 ± .015(21,97 ± 0,38)

DIM. A ± .025 (DIM A ± 0,64)

.200 ± .015(5,08 ± 0,38) C L C L

.288 ± .015(7,31 ± 0,38)

.250 ± .015(6,35 ± 0,38)

.365 ± .020(9,27 ± 0,51)

.250 ± .020(6,35 ± 0,51)

.375 (9,53) 3/8-32 UNEF-2A THREAD

.320 ± .010(8,13 ± 0,25)

.050 ± .005(1,27 ± 0,13)

.100 ± .010(2,54 ± 0,25)TYP.

.060 ± .015(1,53 ± 0,38)

Number of Decks

.450 (11,43)

.650 (16,51)

.850 (21,59)1.050 (26,67)

Dimension A

1234

PART NUMBER, DATE CODE, AND PINOUT ID LABEL

.219 ± .005(5,56 ± 0,13)

∅ .250 + .001 - .002(6,35 + 0,03 - 0,05)

.190 ± .015(4,83 ± 0,38) .020 ± .005

(0,51 ± 0,13)

.865 ± .015(21,97 ± 0,38)

Encoder2

Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs


Mechanical Encoders

Series 25: Multi-deckShaft size: B = 1/4" diameter shaftSealed or non-sealed: S = Shaft and panel seal; No letter = no sealTerminal structure: P = PC, perpendicular to shaft; R = PC, rear facing (one deckonly); F = PC, front facing (one deck only).Angle of throw (determines the maximum number of positions):10 = 10°, 36 positions; 11 = 11.25°, 32 positions; 12 = 12°, 30 positions;15 = 15°, 24 positions; 18 = 18°, 20 positions; 22 = 22.5°, 16 positions;30 = 30°, 12 positions; 45 = 45°, 8 positions; 60 = 60°, 6 positions;90 = 90°, 4 positions.

25BSP22–Q–1–16 C

Stop arrangement: For switches with maximum positions, add C for continuous rotation;add F for stop between first and last. No notation required for less than maximumpositions.Number of positions: Maximum is dependent on the angle of throw. Minimum is two.Number of decks: One through four possible.Code output:B = Binary available in 22.5°Q = QuadratureG = Gray available in 22.5°

Specials include 1/8" diameter shaft, custom angles of throw for binary, binarycomplement and gray code outputs. Contact Grayhill Sales for availability.

SPECIFICATIONSElectrical RatingsSwitching Loads: 150 mA at 120 Vac,resistive; 150 mA at 28 Vdc, resistiveCurrent Carrying Capacity: 250 mA at 28 Vdc,resistiveContact Resistance: 75 mΩ maximum afterlifeInsulation Resistance: 1000 mΩ minimumbetween terminals and shaftVoltage Breakdown: 1000 Vac minimumbetween terminals and shaftLife Expectancy: 50,000 cycles at rated loadsContacts: Shorting

Materials and FinishesBushing: Die cast zinc alloy, tin-zinc platedMounting Hardware: plated brassDecks, Deck Separators, End Plate:ThermoplasticContacts and Terminals: Gold, silver, nickel-plated beryllium copperShaft, Stop Blades: Stainless SteelDetent Balls: Steel, nickel-platedRivets: Brass, zinc-plated

Mechanical RatingsStop Strength: 10 in-lbs minimumRotational Torque: 4-20 in-oz, dependent onthe number of decksOperating Temperature Range: -65°C to+85°CNon-Turn Device: Flatted mounting bushing,.375" dia. x .320"Package Size: .865" squareTermination: PC terminals, .100" on center.Decks are .200" apart.


Available from your local Grayhill Distributor. For prices and discounts, contact a local Sales Office, an authorized local Distributor or Grayhill. Control knobs available, see page I-57.

Encoder3


Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs

Mechanical Encoders

SERIES 25LHex, Gray and Quadrature Code

FEATURES• Price Competitive to Similar

Designs• Quality Construction and Contact

Materials• Multiple Code and Indexing

Choices


1.020 ± .010

(25,91 ± 0,25)

.590 ± .010(14,97 ± 0,25)

.865 ± .015

(21,97 ± 0,38)

.865 ± .015(21,97 ± 0,38)

.925 ± .010(23,50 ± 0,25)

C L

C L

.100 ± .005 (2,54 ± 0,13)TYP.

90˚

BUSHINGFLATS

SHAFTFLAT

.219 ± .004(5,56 ± 0,10)

Ø .470 ± .010(11,94 ± 0,25)

.320 ± .010(8,13 ± 0,25)

.400 ± .015(10,16 ± 0,38)

C LNON-TURN

TAB

3/8-32 UNEF-2ATHREAD

.250 + .001 –.002(6,35 + 0,03 –0,05)

DIA.

.250 ± .015(6,35 ± 0,38)

.500 ± .015(12,7 ± 0,38)

NON-TURN TABØ .120 ± .005 (3,05 ± 0,13) WIDEBY .068 ± .005 (1,73 ± 0,13) THICK

.250 ± .015(6,35 ± 0,38)

.343 ± .025(8,71 ± 0,64)

.045 ± .005(1,14 ± 0,13)

.250 ± .010(6,35 ± 0,25)

C L

C L

.500 ± .010(12,7 ± 0,25)

.025 ± .002 (0,64 ± 0,05)SQUARE PIN (3 PLACES)

LOCK TAB (2) FOR MOUNTING BRACKET 25J5155

MOUNTING BRACKET

Indicates closed circuit; blank indicates open circuit.

0123456789

101112131415

8421

16151413121110987654321

Clockwise Rotation

CodePosition

0123456789101112131415

8421Output

16151413121110987654321

SwitchPosition

Clockwise Rotation4-Bit Binary Code Hexadecimal-16 Position4-Bit Gray Code-16 Position

Indicates closed circuit; blank indicates open circuit. Code repeats every 4 positions.

Quadrature 2-Bit Code1/4 Cycle per Detent

3635343332313029282726252423222120191817

"B""A"Output

16151413121110987654321

SwitchPosition

Clockwise Rotation

SwitchPosition

CodePosition

Output

Indicates closed circuit; blank indicates open circuit.

• 100,000 Life Cycles• Less than 1.0" Square• Manufactured to ISO 9001

Standards

TRUTH TABLES

Encoder4

Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs


Mechanical Encoders

SPECIFICATIONSElectrical RatingsSwitching Loads: 1.5 mA at 115 Vac, resistive;150 mA at 14 Vdc, resistiveCurrent Carrying Capacity: 250 mAmaximum at 28 Vdc, resistive loadContact Resistance: 75 mΩ, typicalInsulation Resistance: 1000 mΩ minimumbetween terminalsVoltage Breakdown: 1000 Vac minimumbetween terminalsLife Expectancy: 100,000 cycles of operation atrated loads. One cycle of operation is a rotationthrough all of the active positions and a return tothe starting position.

Mechanical RatingsRotational Torque: 2 to 6 in-ozOperating Temperature Range: -40 C° to +85 C°Storage Temperature Range: -65 C° to +85 C°Continuous Rotation: All standard switchesare continuous rotation. Desired stop locationssupplied upon request.Anti-Rotation Device: Integral non-turn tab,flatted bushing, .375" diameter, .320 double “D”across flats.Termination: Standard is PC style, parallel toshaft, facing rear. Options include PC, parallel toshaft, facing front.Panel Mounting Torque: 10 in-lbs maximum

Materials and FinishesBushing/Housing and Shaft/Rotor: ReinforcedthermoplasticDetent Ball: Stainless steel, nickel-platedDetent Spring: Tinned music wireContacts: Beryllium copper, gold plate overnickelTerminals: Copper alloy, #725, 100% tin plateover nickel plateOutput Board: FR-4, copper/nickel-platedMounting Nut: Brass, tin/zinc-plated hex nutMounting Bracket: Stainless Steel, tin-plated

Series: 25L = Economical, single deck encoderHousing Color: B = Black housing; R = Red housingAngle of Throw: 10 = 10°, 36 positions; 11 = 11.25°, 32 positions;

15 = 15°, 24 positions; 18 = 18°, 20 positions;22 = 22.5°, 16 positions; 30 = 30°, 12 positions;45 = 45°, 8 positions

25LB10-Q-ZMounting Bracket: Z = with bracket, Blank = no bracketCode Output: H = Hexadecimal available only in 22.5°

G = Gray available only in 22.5°Q = Quadrature (2-bit)


Available from your local Grayhill Distributor. For prices and discounts, contact a local Sales Office, an authorized local Distributor or Grayhill. For Custom codes. Termination, Tirque, Angles of Throw, Call Grayhill for more information.

Custom materials, styles, color and markings are available. Custom knobs available, see page I-57.

Encoder5


Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs

Mechanical Encoders

SERIES 26Binary and Gray Code


Maximum Switch AnglePositions A

8 67.5°16 33.75°

Unless specified otherwise, all tolerances are ± .015 ( 0,38)

SPECIFICATIONSElectrical RatingsRated: 25,000 cycles with logic compatibleloads. Make and break 200 mA.Contact Resistance: 500 milliohms maximum(less than 100 milliohms initially)Insulation Resistance: 1000 megohmsminimum (10,000 megohms initially)Dielectric Strength: 250 Vac minimum

Materials and FinishesPanel Seal: Silicone RubberShaft Seal: FluorosiliconeMounting Nut (mounting hardware–oneper switch): Brass, tin/zinc-platedInternal Tooth Lockwasher (mountinghardware–one per switch): Steel,tin/zinc-platedDetent Balls: Carbon steel, nickel-platedDetent Spring: Pretinned music wireDetent Rotor: ThermoplasticShaft, Stop Arm and Stop Pins: StainlesssteelBushing: Zamak II tin/zinc alloy, zinc-platedSwitch Base: Diallyl phthalatePrinted Circuit Board: NEMA Grade FR-4.Terminals: Brass, gold-plated over nickelplateContacts: Copper alloy, gold-plated overnickel plate

Additional CharacteristicsRotational Torque: 4 to 8 oz-in on a newswitch.Vibration Resistance: 10 to 55 Hz at0.060" double amplitude; no damage andno contact openings per MIL-STD-202,Method 201A

Grayhill part number and datecode marked on label. Customerpart number marked on request.

C LC L

ANGLE A

.094 (2,39)

.203 ± .003(5,16 ± 0,10)ACROSS FLATS

.500 ± .015(12,7 ± 0,38) DIA.

POS. 0OF BUSHING FLATS

1/4-28 UNF-2A THREAD

.025 ± .005(0,64 ± 0,13)3 PLACES

.180 (4,57)

.332 (8,43)

.957(24,31)REF.

.250 (6,35)

.375 (9,53)

.250 (6,35)

.125 ± .003 DIA.(Ø 3,18 ± 0,10)

C

1 2

8 4C L

C L

COMMON TERMINAL

.300(7,62)

.150 (3,81)2 PLACES

.100 (2,54)2 PLACES

.200 (5,08)

Shock Resistance: Passes mediumrequirement MIL-S-3785 (MIL-STD-202,Method 213)Stop Strength: 5 in-lbs minimumTerminals: All switches are provided withall 5 terminals, regardless of the number ofactive positions.Relative Humidity: 90-95% at 40oC for 240hours (MIL-STD-202 Method 103, TestCondition A)

OPTIONSAdjustable Stop SwitchesThe switch may have continuous rotation, orbe adjusted to limit the rotation. The panelseal ring can be removed to expose the stoppin holes on the front of the switch. Two stoppins and panel seal o-ring are supplied withthe switch. One or both may be used to limitthe rotation as desired.

Shaft and Panel SealAll switches are provided with a shaft andpanel seal.

Number of PartPositions Number

16 Positions 26GSD22-01-1-AJS

8 Positions 26GSD45-01-1-AJS

Custom switches with options such as 1/4" shaftdiameter, longer shaft or terminals available bycontacting Grayhill sales. Custom encoders withoptions such as: custom code output, 1/4" shaftdiameter, and longer shaft and terminal lengthsare avalable by contacting the Grayhill salesoffice.

Gray Code Output–Continuous Rotation


Co

de

Po

siti

on

CODE AND TRUTH TABLE

BCD Output* Gray Output*

1 2 4 8 1 2 4 8

1 0

2 1

3 2

4 3

5 4

6 5

7 6

8 7

9 8

10 9

11 10

12 11

13 12

14 13

15 14

16 15

*Dot indicates terminal tied to common.

Sw

itch

Po

siti

on


AVAILABLE CODES• Hexadecimal• Octal• BCD (Adjusted)• Quadrative• Custom (4-Bit, 16 position maximum)• RoHS Compliant

Number of PartPositions Number

8 Positions 26ASD45-01-1-AJS16 Positions 26ASD22-01-1-AJS

BCD Output–Adjustable Stop

Encoder6

Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs


Mechanical Encoders

SERIES 51Binary or BinaryComplement Code

CIRCUIT DIAGRAMSSwitch is viewed from the shaft end and shownin switch position number 1, which is decimalnumber zero and BCD number zero.

BCD BCD Complement

10 9

8

7

6C2

5

43

2

1

12

11 C3

C1

4 OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT

2 OUTPUT

8 OUTPUT

TIED TOGETHERON PC BOARD

COMMON

ROTATINGCONTACTS



10 9

8

7

6C2

5

43

2

1

12

11 C3

C1

4 OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT

2 OUTPUT

8 OUTPUT


COMMON

ROTATINGCONTACTS




Indicates Terminal is present. Indicates Terminal is omitted.Note: Connections must be made on PC board to

generate code output.Switch position numbers do not correspond to thedecimal input or binary output. See Truth Tables.

FEATURES• PC Mount, 30° Angle of Throw• 2 to 12 Positions• .562" Diameter, 200 mA• Shaft and Panel Seal• Adjustable Stop Versions


.093 ± .005(2,36 ± 0,13)

105¡

SHAFTFLAT

C L

.203 ± .003(5,16 ± 0,08)

Ø .562 + .025 –.015

(14,27 + 0,64 – 0,38)

87

65

GR

AY

HIL

L

Ø .125 ± .002(3,18 ± 0,05)

.250 + .020 – .015(6,35 + 0,51 –0,38)

.375 ± .015(9,53 ± 0,38)

.250 ± .015(6,35 ± 0,38)

.537 + .020 –.030(13,64 + 0,51 –0,76)

1/4-28 UNF-2ATHREAD

.125 + .015 –.020(3,18 + 0,38 –0,51)

.035 (0,89) REF.

COMMONPOLE 1

COMMONPOLE 3

Ø .382 (9,70) TERMINALCIRCLE OF CENTERS

COMMONPOLE 2

Ø .232 (5,89) COMMON CIRCLE

OF CENTERS

.020 ± .003(0,51 ± 0,08)

.062 ± .004(1,57 ± 0,10)

.125± .015(3,18 ± 0,38)

Ø .025 ± .002(0,64 ± 0,05)

.125± .015(3,18 ± 0,38)

.020 ± .003(0,51 ± 0,08)

See circuit diagrams for omitted terminals.

All switches are provided with PC mount terminals.Grayhill part number and date code marked on label. Customer part number marked on request.

PC TERMINAL DETAIL PC COMMON DETAIL

Encoder7


Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs

Mechanical Encoders


OPTIONSAdjustable StopsSet and reset stops to limit rotation. Alldimensions are the same as for fixed stopswitches. Switches are shipped with the stopblades located to limit rotation to 11 switchpositions. For continuous rotation, remove bothblades. For limited rotation, remove the 2nd(clockwise) blade and move it to the holelocated between the positions shown in theTruth Tables. Removal of a plastic washerprovides access to the blades and slots.Adjustable stop versions are available inunsealed styles only.

Shaft and Panel SealSwitches are available in sealed or unsealedstyles. For sealed style, the panel is sealed byan o-ring at the base of the bushing. The shaftis sealed by an o-ring inside of bushing. Afterthe switch is mounted, seals do not alter thedimensions of the unsealed style.

Dec. Switch 2nd Output TerminalNo. Pos'n.* Pin** 1 2 4 8

0 1 4-5

1 2 5-6

2 3 6-7

3 4 7-8

4 5 8-9

5 6 9-10

6 7 10-11

7 8 11-12

8 9 12-1

9 10 1-2

10 11 2-3

11 12 3-4

Indicates contact made to common* The switch position number is the terminal location opposite the shaft flat; it is not the same asthe decimal number.** To limit an adjustable stop switch to the decimal number shown, insert the second pin in the holelying between the 2 switch positions indicated.

TRUTH TABLESBinary Code Decimal Binary Code Decimal Complement

Electrical RatingRated: To make and break 125 mA 30 Vdcresistive load for 25,000 cycles of operation.Cycle: (1 cycle = 360° rotation and return)Test conditions are standard atmosphericpressure, 25°C and 68% relative humidity.Contact Resistance: 20 milliohms initially,300 milliohms maximum after lifeInsulation Resistance: 50,000 megohmsinitially, 10,000 megohms after lifeVoltage Breakdown: 500 Vac betweenmutually insulated parts

SPECIFICATIONS

Type Of Maximum No. BCD Output BCD ComplementSwitch Of Positions Unsealed Sealed Unsealed Sealed

7 513360-7 513374-7 513361-7 513375-78 513360-8 513374-8 513361-8 513375-8

Fixed Stop 9 513360-9 513374-9 513361-9 513375-910 513360-10 513374-10 513361-10 513375-1011 513360-11 513374-11 513361-11 513375-1112 513360-12-F 513374-12-F 513361-12-F 513375-12-F

Continuous Rotation 12 513360-12-C 513374-12-C 513361-12-C 513375-12-C

Adjustable Stop 12 513385 ——— 513384 ———

The -C suffix indicates continuous rotation. The -F suffix indicates a fixed stop between positions 1 and 12.


Materials and FinishesBases: Thermoset plasticDetent Rotor: NylonShaft, Stop Blades, Stop Arm, ThrustWasher And Retaining Ring: Stainless steelDetent Balls: Steel, nickel-platedBushing: Zinc, Tin-zinc-platedDetent Spring: Stainless steelCommon Terminals and Rings: Brass, goldplate .00003" minimum over silver plate .0003"minimumTerminals: Brass with silver contact surface,gold-plated .00003"Rotor Contact: Berillium copper with silvercontact surfaceShaft And Panel Seal: Silicone rubberMounting Hardware: One mounting nut, .089"thick by .375" across flats, and one internaltooth lockwasher are supplied with the switch.

Additional CharacteristicsContact Type: Wiping contactsShaft Flat Orientation: Switch position isdefined as that position that is opposite theshaft flat. The location of the contacts inrelation to the shaft flat is shown on the circuitdiagram.Terminals: Only the active position terminals,as shown in the circuit diagram are suppliedwith the switch. All common terminals aresupplied.Stop Strength: 7.5 in-lbs minimumRotational Torque: 8 to16 in-ozBushing Mounting: Required for theseswitchesMaximum Mounting Torque: 15 in-lbs.

Dec. Switch 2nd Output TerminalNo. Pos'n.* Pin** 1 2 4 8

0 1 12-1

1 2 1-2

2 3 2-3

3 4 3-4

4 5 4-5

5 6 5-6

6 7 6-7

7 8 7-8

8 9 8-9

9 10 9-10

10 11 10-11

11 12 11-12

Encoder8

Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs


Mechanical Encoders

0.125"DiameterShaft

All dimensions and rear view not shown forthe .250" diameter shaft type are the sameas the .125" diameter shaft type.


Rear mountingplate stampingindicates CODEDoutput terminals,not decimalpositions.

Grayhill part number and date code marked on label. Customer part number marked on request.

CODE AND TRUTH TABLEOutput Decimal Position

Terminal 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 * * * * *2 * * * *4 * * * *8 * *

l Indicates contact is made to the common.

SPECIFICATIONSElectrical RatingRated: To make and break 125 mA at 30 Vdcresistive at standard conditionsLife Expectancy: 25,000 cycles at rated load;50,000 cycles mechanical. For ratings at differentloads and conditions, contact Grayhill.Contact Resistance: 100 milliohms maximum(50 milliohms initially)Insulation Resistance: As measured betweenmutually insulated partsInitially: 50,000 megohms minimumAfter Life: 10,000 megohms minimumVoltage Breakdown: 500 Vac between mutuallyinsulated partsCarry Current: These switches will carry 3amperes with a maximum contact temperaturerise of 20°C.

OPTIONSShaft and Panel SealShaft is sealed by o-ring inside the bushing;panel is sealed by o-ring at the base of thebushing. Seals do not alter dimensions asshown in the drawing when switch is mounted.Panel seal is silicone rubber. Shaft seal is ano-ring per MIL-P-5516B. Shaft and panel sealis not available on adjustable stop switch.

Additional CharacteristicsRotational Torque: 8 to 16 oz-in.Contacts: Non-shorting wiping contactsShaft Flat Orientation: As shown in the drawing,switch would provide a decimal 1 output.

Materials and FinishesBase: Diallyl per MIL-M-14Rotor Mounting Plate: Thermoplastic.Rotor Contact: Phosphor Bronze, gold-plated30 microinches minimumTerminals: Brass, gold plate (20 microinches)minimum over silver plate (300 microinches)minimumAdditional Materials: Other switch materialsand finishes are the same as listed for thestandard switch. See Standard Switch.

Adjustable Stop SwitchesAdjustable stop switch lets you limit the numberof positions. Remove and relocate pins in thefront plate. A sticker holds the pins in place.With the exception of holes in the front plate, alldimensions, ratings, and characteristics arethe same as the other Series 71 coded switches.For diagrams, see Standard Switch.


ORDERING INFORMATIONShaft Diameter PartAnd Description Number

1/8" Continuous Rotation 71AY234011/8" Cont. Rot., Sealed 71AY234021/4" Continuous Rotation 71BY234031/4" Cont. Rot., Sealed 71BY234041/8" Adjustable Stops 71AD36-31181/4" Adjustable Stops 71BD36-3119

SERIES 71Binary Code

FEATURES• 1/4" or 1/8" Shaft Diameters• 25,000 Cycles at 125 mA• Optional Seal Versions• Adjustable Stop Versions

OF BUSHINGFLATS

C L

.094 ± .010(2,39 ± 0,25)

OF SHAFT FLAT

C L

.203 ± .005(5,16 ± 0,13)

.687 ± .015(17,45 ± 0,38)

DIA.

.562 ± .015(14,27 ± 0,38)

1/4 32-UNEF-2A THREAD

.125 + .001/ –.002(3,18 + 0,03/ –0,05)

.031 (0,79)REF.

.761 ± .046(19,33 ± 1,17)

.312 ± .020(7,92 ± 0,51)

.375 ± .020(9,53 ± 0,51)

.250 ± .020(6,35 ± 0,51)

.500 ± .015(12,7 ± 0,38)DIA.

SEEDETAIL A

.750 ± .020(19,05 ± 0,51)

OVER TERMINALS

GR

AY

HIL

L

8107

3

814

C2

72˚

SHAFT IS SHOWNIN POSITION 1

OF BUSHINGKEYWAY

C L

.219 ± .004(5,56 ± 0,10)

OF SHAFT FLAT

C L

72°

.250 + .001/ –.002(6,35 + 0,03/ –0,05)

3/8 32-UNEF-2A THREAD

BUSHING KEYWAY .066 ± .002 (1,68 ± 0,05) WIDEBY .036 ± .003 (0,91 ± 0,08) FROM A .375 (9,53) DIAMETER

Detail A

.068 ± .005(1,73 ± 0,13)

.034 ± .003(0,86 ± 0,08)

SHAFT IS SHOWNIN POSITION 1

0.250"DiameterShaft

Encoder9


Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs








.335 (8,51)

1.330(33,78)

DIA.

.440 (11,18)

DIA.

.620 (15,75)

.593 (15,06)

DIA..700

(17,78) DIA.

.600(15,24)



.

.894(22,71)

DIA.

.500(12,7)DIA.

.662(16,81)

.350(8,9)DIA.

.500(12,7)

.440(11,2)





Encoder10

Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs




.660(16,76)

.092 (2,34) TYP.

(4 PLACES).500

(12,7) DIA.


Top ViewStyle 5028

.730(18,54)

.710(18,03)

DIA.

1.090(27,69)

SPRING CLIP

.500 (12,7)DIA. .500

(12,7)

1.575 DIA.(40,01)

OF .220

(5,59) R.

C L

.315 (8,00)

.550(13,97)

DIA.

.220 R. (5,59)

.400(10,16)

.215(5,46)

.393(9,98)


Top ViewStyle 5029





SeriesStyle*: 5013, 5014, 5015, 5017, 5019, 5020, 5028, 5029



11K5028-KCNB




Encoder11


Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs

Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs


Page

ENGINEERING INFORMATION .................................................................. 2

OPTICAL ENCODERSCompact, 1/2" Package ............................................... Series 62S ............. 3Low Cost, PC Mount .................................................... Series 62P ............. 51/2" Package ................................................................ Series 62A,V,D ...... 7High Torque.............................................................Series 62HS ........ 101/2" Package,Non-Turn Dedicated Shaft ................... Series 62N ........... 12High Torque, Non-Turn Concentric Shaft ................... Series 62HN ........ 14Concentric Shaft .......................................................... Series 62C ..........16High Torque, Concentric Shaft .................................... Series 62H ..........181/2" Package, Redundant Circuitry ............................. Series 62R ........... 201/2" Package, Redundant Circuitry, High Torque......Series 62HR ......... 221/2" Package, Lighted Shaft ....................................... Series 62F ........... 24Magnectic Detent ......................................................... Series 62M ........... 26Push-Pull, High Torque ............................................... Series 62B ........... 28Thumbwheel ................................................................. Series 62T ........... 30Full Quadrature Cycle Per Detent ............................... Series 61L ............ 32Price Competitive Solution .......................................... Series 62AG ........ 34Joystick ......................................................................... Series 60A ........... 36Multi-Function Joystick.............................................Series 60C............ 38Custom, Absolute......................................................... Series 61A ........... 41High Resolution 4 & 5 Pin ........................................... Series 61K, R ...... 43Simulated Mechanical Rotary Output ......................... Series 61M ........... 49

InterfaceOptical Encoder Interface ............................................ Series 65..............48


OPTICAL ENCODERS• Eliminates Rotary Mechanical

Contacts• Accurate Resolution up to 1024

Positions• Logic Compatible• Selects Menu or Display Items• Includes Data Input Switch• Up to 1 Billion Trouble-Free

CyclesMECHANICAL ENCODERS• Standard BCD and Multiple

Code Outputs• As Small as 1/2" Diameter• Economical Means to Provide

Code Output

Contents: Encoders

Encoder1


Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs

Open Collector Output Schmitt Trigger

POWERSOURCE

EXTERNALPULL-UPRESISTOR

OUTPUT

PHOTOTRANSISTOR

CURRENT FLOW HIGH

OUTPUTLEVELTO NEXTSTAGE

PHOTOTRANSISTOR AS AN OPEN SWITCH

POWERSOURCE

EXTERNALPULL-UPRESISTOR

OUTPUT

PHOTOTRANSISTOR

CURRENT FLOW LOW

OUTPUTLEVELTO NEXTSTAGE

PHOTOTRANSISTOR AS A CLOSED SWITCH

POWERSOURCE

EXTERNALPULL-UPRESISTOR OUTPUT

PHOTOTRANSISTOR

SCHMITT TRIGGER

In a phototransistor, base current is suppliedwhen light strikes the detector, which effectivelygrounds the output. Typically, the detector isoperated in saturation. This means sufficientlight is provided to completely sink, or ground,all the current provided by the pull up resistorplus that of the interfacing electronics. In thelogic high state, the light is sufficiently blockedby the rotor and the detector functions like anopen circuit. The pull up resistor then providessourcing current to the interfacing electronics.This “on” or “off” digital arrangement allows theopen collector to interface with popular integratedcircuit technologies such as TTL, TTL LS,CMOS, and HCMOS.

SCHMITT TRIGGERSTo provide signal enhancement it isrecommended that a Schmitt Trigger beconnected to each output. This device is alreadyincluded in the Series 61K, 61R, 63K and 63Rencoders. The Schmitt Trigger “cleans up” theoutput into a pure digital signal. It does this byremoving the small linear region between the“on” and “off” states of the detector. During thistransition the light is only partially blocked andthe output is somewhere between what theinterfacing circuit might consider to be “on” or“off”. In other words, the output is not completelydigital. The Schmitt Trigger contains a veryimportant feature which makes it attractive for

this application. The device has a higherthreshold, or trigger level, when it is in the “on”state than it does in the “off” state. This hysterisisfilters any electrical noise, which can cause theoutput to change state rapidly during thetransition. And since the output from the SchmittTrigger is a pure digital signal and is isolatedfrom the phototransistor, the signal is basicallyimmune to loading problems that can effectencoders without the Schmitt Trigger. SchmittTriggers are available in most popular ICtechnologies.

SHAFT AND PANEL SEALA shaft and panel seal are available to providewater-tight mounting for the Series 61B, 61D,61K, 61R and 62 encoders. Sealing isaccomplished by an o-ring shaft seal and apanel seal washer. The panel seal washer inthe 61B and 61D encoders does not affect theoverall dimensions of the switches. In the 61Kand 61R encoders, the .045" thick washer isplaced over the threads and sits flat on the baseof the bushing. The 61KS and 61RS are alsoepoxy-sealed on the bottom of the switch toprovide a completely sealed switch.

QUADRATUREAll Grayhill encoders use quadrature outputcode, which is the same as a 2-bit, repeatinggray code. Quadrature is the most popular andcost effective output format because only twodetectors are required. However, quadraturecan only be used in applications whereincremental data is required. Absolutepositioning is not possible because the coderepeats every four positions. In other words,changes in the encoder in magnitude anddirection can be determined, but the actualposition of the encoder cannot. In mostapplications this is not a problem.

In a quadrature rotary optical encoder twodetectors are used to provide outputs, “A” and“B”. The code rotor either blocks the infraredlight or allows it to pass to the detectors. As theshaft turns the rotor, the outputs change state toindicate position. The resulting output is twosquare waves which are 90° out of phase.

OPEN COLLECTOR OUTPUTThe open collector output is typical of the Series61B, 61C and 62, and is the simplest form ofoutput available. The first step in interfacingwith open collector outputs is to provide anexternal pull-up resistor from each output to thepower source. These pull-up resistors providethe output with the high-state voltage when thephototransistor is “off”.

UPPERTHRESHOLD

LOWERTHRESHOLD

INPUT TOSCHMITTTRIGGER

OUTPUTFROMSCHMITTTRIGGER

OUTPUTLOW

OUTPUTHIGH

OUTPUTLOW

LIGHT BLOCKED

LIGHTPARTIALLYBLOCKED

LIGHTDETECTED

Optical Encoder Engineering Information

Encoder2

Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs


Optical Encoders

FEATURES• Compact Size, Requires Minimal

Behind Panel Space• 1/2 Million Rotations for High

Torque• 1 Million Rotational Cycles,

3 Million for Non-Detent Styles• Optional Integral Pushbutton


• Choices of Cable Length andTerminations

APPLICATIONS• Global Positioning/Driver

Information Systems• Medical Equipment

Unless otherwise specified, standard tolerance is ±.010 (0,25)

Encoder3

SERIES 62SCompact 1/2'' Package

.066±.002 (1,68±0,05)

.152±.002 (3,86±0,05)

.500 (12,7)

.250 (6,35) .540

(13,72) .250 (6,35)

SCALE 0.500

.125 (3,18)

.250 (6,35)

.152.002 (3,860,05)

.066.002 (1,680,05)

.500 (12,7)

.540 (13,72)

.250 (6,36) .250

(6,35)

Ø.249.002 (6,320,05)

3/8-32 UNEF-2A THREAD

.130 (3,3)

.434.015 (11,020,38)

PINS ARE .016 SQUARE

(0,41)

SCALE 0.500

.219.003 (5,560,07)

.050 REF. (1,27)

.400 (10,15)

.500 (12,7)

SCALE 0.500

.250 (6,35)

.540 (13,72)

.500 (12,7)

.670 (17,02)

.250 (6,35)

.249.002 (6,320,05)

.219.003 (5,560,07)


.312 (7,92)

.687.015 (17,450,38)

.290 (7,37)

4.000.20CABLE LENGTH IS MEASURED FROM THE PCB TO THE BOTTOM OF THE CONNECTOR

CONNECTOR IS AMP P/N 640442-6 OR EQUIVALENT

.152.002 (3,860,05)

.066.002 (1,680,05)

.219±.003 (5,56±0,07)


.249.002 (6,320,05)

.687±.015 (17,45±0,38)

.290 (7,34)

CABLE LENGTH XXX.20

(XXX5,1)

CONNECTOR IS AMP P/N 215083-6

OR EQUIVALENT

.312 (7,92)

.290 (7,37)

.066.002 (1,680,05) .152.002

(3,860,05)

.100 REF. (2,54)

.500 (12,7)

.540 (13,72)

.250 (6,35)

.312 (7,92)

.290 (7,37)

.400.015 (10,160,38)

.687.015 (17,450,38)

.455 (11,56) .250

(6,35)

.630 (16) .500

(12,7) .250 (6,35)

SCALE 0.500

Ø.249.002 (6,320,05)

.219.003 (5,560,07)


.230 (5,84)

.574.015 (14,580,38)

PINS ARE .025 SQUARE

(0,64)

.312 (7,92)

.687.015 (17,450,38)

.350.015 (8,880,38)


Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs

Optical Encoders

SPECIFICATIONSEnvironmental SpecificationsOperating Temperture Range: -40°C to 85°CStorage Temperature Range: -55°C to 100°CHumidity: 96 Hours at 90–95% humidity at40°CMechanical Vibration: Harmonic motion withamplitude of 15G's, within a varied frequencyof 10 to 2000 HzMechanical Shock: Test 1: 100G for 6 mS, halfsine wave with a velocity change of 12.3 ft/s;Test 2: 100G for 6 mS, sawtooth wave with avelocity change of 9.7 ft/s

Rotary Electrical and MechanicalSpecificationsOperating Voltage: 5.00 ±0.25 VdcSupply Current: 30mA maximum at 5VdcOutput: Open collector phototransistor,external pull up resistors are requiredOutput Code: 2-Bit quadrature, channel Aleads channel B by 90° electrically duringclockwise rotation of the shaftLogic Output Characteristics:Logic High shall be no less than 3.0 VdcLogic Low shall be no greater than 1.0 VdcMinimum Sink Current: 2.0 mAPower Consumption: 150 mW maximumMechanical Life:Non-Detent 3 Million CyclesLow & Medium 1 Million CyclesHigh 1/2 Million Cycles1 cycle is a rotation through all positions anda full return

Torque shall be within 50% of initial valuethroughout lifeMounting Torque: 15 in-lbs maximumShaft Push-Out Force: 45 lbs minimumShaft Pull-Out Force: 45 lbs minimumTerminal Strength: 15 lbs minimum terminalpull-out force for cable or header terminationSolderability: 95% free of pin holes and voids

Pushbutton Electrical andMechanical SpecificationsRating: 10 mA at 5 VdcContact Resistance: <10ΩLife: 3 million actuations minimumContact Bounce: <4 ms Make, <10 ms BreakActuation Force: 9-950±250 grams, 5-510±110 grams, 4-400±100 grams, 3-300±90grams, 2-200±75 gramsShaft Travel: .020±.010 inch

Materials and FinishesBushing: Zamak 2Shaft: Aluminum or Zamak 2Retaining Ring: Stainless steelPushbutton Actuator: Zytel 70G33LDetent Spring: Music wireDetent Ball: Stainless steelCode Housing: Polyamide polymer, nylon 6/10 alloy UL94HB

CIRCUITRY, TRUTH TABLE, AND WAVEFORM Standard Quadrature 2-Bit Code

Code Rotor: Delrin 100Printed Circuit Boards: NEMA grade FR-4,double clad with copper, plated with gold overnickelInfrared Emiting Diode Chips: Galliumaluminum arsenideSilicon Phototransistor Chips: Gold andAluminum AlloysResistor: Metal oxide on ceramic substrateSolder Pins: Brass, plated with tinPushbutton Dome: Stainless steelBackplate: Stainless steelCable: Copper stranded with topcoat in PVCinsulation (Cable version only)Connector (.050 Center): PA4.6 with tin overnickel plated phosphor bronzeConnector (.100 Center): Nylon UL94V-2, tinplated copper alloyLabel: TT406 Thermal transfer cast filmSolder: Sn/Ag/Cu, Lead-Free, No CleanLubricating Grease: NYE nyogel 774LHex Nut: Nickel, plated with brassLockwasher: Stainless steelHeader: Hi-Temp glass filled thermoplasticUL94V-0, phoshor bronze (pinned versionsonly)Strain Relief: Glass filled thermoplastic (.100center cable versions only)

OPTIONSContact Grayhill for custom terminations, shaftand bushing configurations, rotational torquepushbutton force, and code output. Controlknobs are also available.

1

2

3

4

5

6POWER +5V

OUTPUT A

OUTPUT B

N.O.PUSH-

BUTTONSWITCH

GROUND

PIN #

R*

R*

OUTPUTA

OUTPUTB

HIGH

LOW

HIGH

LOW

POSITION NUMBER

1 2 3 4 5 6 • Indicates logic high; blank indicates

logic low.

Code repeats every 4 positions.

Clockwise RotationPosition Output A Output B

1

2

3

4

•• •

•

62SXX-XX-040X

TerminationC = .050 Center Ribbon Cable with ConnectorS = .050 Center Ribbon Cable with .100 Stripped EndP = .050 Center Pins with .185 LengthCH = .100 Center Ribbon Cable with ConnectorSH = .100 Center Ribbon Cable with .100 Stripped EndPH = .100 Center Pins with .230 Length

Cable LengthCable Termination: 040=4.0in or 040in. Cable isterminated with Amp Connector P/N 640442-6See Amp Mateability Guide for mating connector details.

Pushbutton Option0 = NO PUSHBUTTON 4 = 400 Grams9 = 950 Grams 3 = 300 Grams5 = 510 Grams 2 = 200 Grams

Angle of Throw 45=45° for Code Change and 8 Detent Positions 30=30° for Code Change and 12 Detent Positions 22=22.5° for Code Change and 16 Detent Positions 18=18° for Code Change and 20 Detent Positions 15=15° for Code Change and 24 Detent Positions 11=11.25° for Code Change and 32 Detent Positions

Rotational Torque Option N = Non-detent L = Low Torque (available with 0, 4, 5, 9 pushbutton only) M = Medium Torque (available with 0, 5, 9 pushbutton only) H = High Torque (available with 0, 9 pushbutton only)


AVERAGE ROTATIONAL TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS LOW MEDIUM HIGH ±0.50 IN-OZ ±1.40 IN-OZ ±1.60 IN-OZ

8 POSITION 1.10 1.85 2.7512 POSITION 1.00 1.70 2.9516 POSITION 1.40 2.35 3.4020 POSITION 1.35 2.05 2.8024 POSITION 1.25 1.95 2.9532 POSITION 0.95 1.40 2.15

Encoder4

Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs


Optical Encoders

FEATURES• Low Cost• Compact Size• PC Mount• No De-Bouncing Required• Reliable, Up to 2 Million Cycles• Choice of Detent and Pushbutton Force• Available in 16 Positions• Quadrature Output


APPLICATION• Automotive Controls• White Goods• Audio

SERIES 62PLow Cost, PC Mount

CIRCUITRY

Encoder5

1POWER (+5.0 V)

OUTPUT B

OUTPUT A

GROUND

PUSHBUTTON

PUSHBUTTON

10K *

10K *

150 *

*10K EXTERNAL PULL-UP RESISTORS REQUIRED ON PIN 3 AND PIN 4*150 EXTERNAL RESISTOR REQUIRED ON PIN 1

2

3

4

5

6

TOLERANCE: ±.002SUGGESTED HOLE LAYOUT DETAIL

.109(2,77)

4 PLCS.

.525(13,34)

.403(10,24)

.403(10,24)

Ø.187±.004(4,75±0,1)Ø.375(9,53)

Ø.059±.002(1,5±0,05).335(8,51)

.805(20,45)

.156±.004(3,96±0,1)

.030(0,76)

.700(17,78)

.220(5,59)

.325(8,26)

.660±.015(16,76±0,38)

.038(0,96)

4 PLCS.

.332(8,43)

.366(9,29)

CHAMFER.025 X 45°

.403(10,24)6 PLCS.

.202(5,14)

.655(16.64) .400

(10,16)

.250(6,35)

.100(2,54)

.625(15,88)

.200(5,08)

.080(2,03)

.250(6,35)

.070(1,78)

4 PLCS.

.064(1,63)

.100(2,54)

2 PLCS..250(6,35)

.263(6,67)

.400(10,16)

.042(1,07)

6 PLCS.

.365(9,27)

.730(18,54)

.200(5,08)

2 PLCS.

3 2 1

56 4

.030(0,76)

.250±.004(6.35±0,1)

.660±.0(16,76±0

.219±.002(5,56±0,1)

.625(15,88)

.403(10,24)6 PLCS.

.250(6,35)

.080(2,03).805

(20,45)

.335(8,51)

Ø.059±.002(1,5±0,05)

.025 X 45°

.366(9,29)

.332(8,43)

CHAMFER

.030(0,76)

Ø.375(9,53)

.700(17,78)

.030(0,76)

.038(0,96)

4 PLCS.

.220(5,59)

.325(8,26)

.100(2,54)

.250(6,35)

.201(5,14)

.400(10,16)

.200(5,08)

.655(16.64)

±.010 TOLERANCE APPLIES TO ALL DIMENSIONS UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED

PIN DESIGNATION


Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs

Optical Encoders

WAVEFORM AND TRUTH TABLE Standard Quadrature 2-bit Code

SPECIFICATIONSElectrical RatingsOperating Voltage: 5 Vdc +/-.25 VdcSupply Current: 30mA maximum at 5 VdcLogic High: 3.0V minimumLogic Low: 1.0V maximumLogic Rise and Fall: less than 30 ms

Pushbutton Switch RatingsRating: 5.0 Vdc at 10mA resistiveContact Resistance: less than 10 ohms(TTL or CMOS compatible)Voltage Breakdown: 250 Vac betweenmutually insulated partsContact Bounce: less than 4 ms at makeand less than 10 ms at breakActuation Life: 3,000,000 operationsActuation Force: 6: 600 +/- 200 grams4: 450 +/- 150 gramsShaft Travel: .015 ± .010 inch

Mechanical RatingsOperating Torque:H: 1.4 in-oz +/- 0.6 in-oz initialL: 0.6 in-oz +/- 0.3 in-oz initialN: ∠0.5 in-oz initialRotational Life:H&L: 500,000 cyclesN: 2 million cycles(1 cycle = 360 degree rotation and return)Shaft Push Out Force:20 lbs minimumOperating Speed: 100 RPM maximumAxial Shaft Play: .010 maximumEnvironmental RatingsOperating Temperature Range:-40°C to 85°CStorage Temperature Range:-55°C to 100°CRelative Humidity: 90-95% at 40°Cfor 96 hoursVibration Resistance: Harmonic motion withAmplitude of 15g, within a varied 10 to 2000Hz frequency for 12 hours per MIL-STD-202,Method 204Mechanical Shock Resistance:Test 1: Tested at 100g for 6mS, half sine,12.3 ft/s.

Test 2: 100g for 6mS, Sawtooth, 9.7 ft/sMaterials and FinishesCode/Pushbutton Housing: ThermoplasticShaft: ThermoplasticCode/Detent Rotor: ReinforcedThermoplasticBushing: ThermoplasticTerminal Pins: Brass, Tin platedDetent Spring: Stainless SteelDome: Stainless SteelPushbutton Contact: Nickel plated brassPhototransistor: Planar SiliconDetent Balls:.0625 dia. Stainless SteelInfrared Emitter:Gallium Aluminum ArsenideLabel:White Thermal Transfer Cast Film.Adhesive CoatedBracket: Stainless Steel, Tin plated


Encoder6

1

2

3

4

5

6

POWER (+5.0 V)

OUTPUT B

OUTPUT A

GROUND

PUSHBUTTON

PUSHBUTTON

10K *

10K *

150 *

*10K EXTERNAL PULL-UP RESISTORS REQUIRED ON PIN 3 AND PIN 4*150 EXTERNAL RESISTOR REQUIRED ON PIN 1

HIGH

LOW

HIGH

LOW

OUTPUT A

OUTPUT B

POS.#1

POS.#2

POS.#3

POS.#4

POS.#5

POS.#6

POSITION OUTPUT A OUTPUT B

#1

#2

#3

#4

INDICATES LOGIC HIGH CODE REPEATS EVERY FOUR POSITIONS.

62PXX-XXX62PXX-XXX

Rotational Torque: N - Non-detent L - Low torque H - High torque

Series

Angle of Throw: 22-16 Position (22°)

Pushbutton Force: 0 - No Pushbutton 4 - 450 grams 6 - 600 grams

Shaft Option: Blank - Standard Ø.187 Shaft S - Ø.250 Shaft Sleeve

Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs


Optical Encoders

FEATURES• Low Cost• Long Life• Available in 3.3 or 5.0 Vdc

Operating Voltages• High Torque Version

to Emphasize Rotational Feel• Economical Size• Optically Coupled for More than a

Million Cycles• Optional Integral Pushbutton• Compatible with CMOS, TTL and

HCMOS Logic• Available in 12,16, 20, 24 and 32

Detent Positions (Non-detent AlsoAvailable)


Cable Version


Information Systems• Medical Equipment


SERIES 62A,V,D1/2'' Package

Encoder7

62AXX-XX-XXXC

XXXX X-X

GRAYHILL

6 5 4 3 2 128 AWG CABLEWIRES ON.050 (1.27)CENTERS

.320 REF.(8,13)

Ø.250±.002(6,35±0,05)

.510±.015(12,95±0,38)

.525±.015(12,95±0,38)

.312(7,92)

.375±.015(9,52±0,38)

.250(6,35)

.250(6,35)

.540(13,72)

.066±.002(1,68±0,05

.390(9,91)

.250(6,35)

.500(13,26)

.152±.002(3,9±0,05)

.219±.003(5,6±0,08)

3/8-32 UNEF-2A THREADTHREADS TO BE WITHIN.030 (0,76) OF SHOULDER.

CONNECTOR ISAMP P/N215083-6

4.000 ±.20 (±5,1)


Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs

Optical Encoders


Pin Version


1

2

3

4

5

6POWER +5V

OUTPUT A

OUTPUT B

N.O.PUSH-

BUTTONSWITCH

GROUND

PIN #

R*

R*

OUTPUTA

OUTPUTB

HIGH

LOW

HIGH

LOW

POSITION NUMBER

1 2 3 4 5 6

• Indicates logic high; blank indicates logic low. Code repeats every 4 positions.

Clockwise Rotation

Position Output A Output B1

2

3

4

•• •

•

3.3 Volt (Style V only)

Standard 5.0 Volt (Styles A and D)

Unless otherwise specified, standard tolerance is ±.010 (0.25)

Encoder8

6

5

1

2

3

4

POWER +3.3V

OUTPUT A

OUTPUT B

N.O.PUSHBUTTONSWITCH

GROUND

* External pull-up resisitors required for operation (2.2k Ω)

100 Ω5%

R*

R*

100 Ω5%

PIN #

62AXX-XX-P

XXXX X-X

GRAYHILL

6 5 4 3 2 1

.470±.020(12,0±0,5)

.450±.010(11,43±0,3)

.100(2,54)TYP.

.940±.050(24,0±1,3)

.140±.015(3,6±0,4)

.066 ±.002(1,68±0,05)

.250(6,35)

.540(13,72)

.152±.002(3,9±0,05)

.250(6,35)

.500(13,26)

.522

.219±.003(5,6±0,08)

.602(15,29)

Ø.250 ±.002(6,32±0,05)

.250(6,35)

.375 ±.015(5,6±0,08) .312

(7,9)

.797(20,2)

.817(20,8)

3/8-32 UNEF-2A THREAD.THREADS TO BE WITHIN.030 (0,76) OF SHOULDER.

.620(15,7)

Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs


Optical Encoders

SPECIFICATIONSElectrical and Mechanical RatingsRating: 5 Vdc, 10 mA, resistiveContact Resistance: less than 10 ohms (TTLor CMOS compatible)Pushbutton Life: 3 million actuations minimumContact Bounce: less than 4 mS at make andless than 10 mS at breakActuation Force: 1000 ±300 gramsPushbutton Travel: .010/.025 inchCoding: 2-bit quadrature coded outputOperating Voltage: 5.0 ±.25 Vdc, 3.30±.125Vdc (style V only)Voltage Breakdown: 250 Vac between mutuallyinsulated partsSupply Current: 30 mA maximumLogic Output Characterisitics:Logic High: 3.8 Vdc (5.0 Vdc); 2.3 (3.3 Vdc)minimumLogic Low: 0.8 Vdc maximumRotational Life: 1,000,000 cycles minimum(One cycle is a rotation through all positionsand a full return)Minimum Sink Current: 2.0 mA for 5 Vdc; 1.0mA for 3.3 VdcPower Consumption: 150 mW maximum for 5Vdc; 80 mW for 3.3 VdcOptical Rise and Fall Times: less than 30 mSmaximum

Operating Torque:Style A and V: 2.0 ±1.4 in-oz. initiallyStyle D: 3.5 ±1.4 in-oz initiallyNon-detent: less than 1.5 in-oz initiallyShaft Push Out Force: 45 lbs minimumMounting Torque: 15 in-lbs maximumTerminal Strength: 15 lbs cable pull-out forceminimumOperating Speed: 100 RPM maximumAxial Shaft Play: .010 maximum

Environmental RatingsOperating Temperature Range: -40°C to 85°CStorage Temperature Range: -55°C to 100°CRelative Humidity: 90–95% at 40°C for 96 hoursVibration Resistance: Harmonic motion withamplitude of 15G, within a varied 10 to 2000 Hzfrequency for 12 hours per MIL-STD-202, Method204Mechanical Shock: Test 1: 100G for 6 mS, halfsine, 12.3 ft/s; Test 2: 100G for 6 mS, sawtooth,9.7 ft/s

Materials and FinishesCode Housing: Reinforced thermoplasticShaft: Zinc or aluminumBushing: Zinc castingShaft Retaining Ring: Stainless steel

Detent Spring: Stainless steelPrinted Circuit Boards: NEMA grade FR-4gold over nickel or palladiumTerminals: Brass, tin-platedMounting Hardware: One brass, nickel-platednut and stainless steel lockwasher supplied witheach switch. Nut is 0.094 inches thick by 0.562inches across flats.Rotor: ThermoplasticCode Housing: ThermoplasticPushbutton Dome: Stainless steelDome Retaining Disk: ThermoplasticPushbutton Housing: ThermoplasticPhototransistor: Planar Silicon NPNInfrared Emitter: Gallium aluminum arsenidePushbutton Contact: Brass, nickel-platedFlex Cable: 28 AWG, stranded/top coated wire,PVC coated on .050 or .100" centers (cabledversion)Header Pins: Phospher bronze, tin-platedSpacer: ABSBackplate/Strain Relief: Stainless steel

SeriesStyle: A = 1/2" package, 5.0 Vdc Input, D = high torque w/5.0 Vdc input, V = 3.3 Vdc inputAngle of Throw:

Detent Non-detent (Styles A&V only)11 = 11.25° or 32 positions 01 = 11.25° or 32 positions15 = 15° or 24 positions 05 = 15° or 24 positions18= 18° or 20 positions 08= 18° or 20 positions22 = 22.5° or 16 positions 02 = 22.5° or 16 positions30 = 30° or 12 positions 03 = 30° or 12 positions

Pushbutton Option: 01 = w/o pushbutton, 02 = with pushbutton62A22-01-040S

Termination: S = Stripped cable; .050" centersSH = Stripped cable; .100" centersC = Connector; .050" centersCH = Connector; .100" centersP = Pin; .100" centers

Cable Length: Cable Terminination: 040 = 4.0in. Cable is terminated withAmp P/N 215083-6. See Amp Mateability Guide for Mating Connector details.*Eliminate cable length if ordering pins. (Ex: 62A22-02-P).


These switches have Quadrature 2-bit code output and an optional shaft actuated pushbutton switch.

Available from your local Grayhill Component Distributor.For prices and discounts, contact a local Sales Office, an authorized local Distributor, or Grayhill.

Custom materials, styles, colors, and markings are available. Control knobs available.

Encoder9


Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs

Optical Encoders

FEATURES• High Rotational Torque Provides

Positive Tactile Feedback• Optically Coupled for More than a


HCMOS Logic

Cable Version Unless otherwise specified, standardtolerance is ±.010 (0,25).


• Available in 8,12 and 16 DetentPositions

• Choice of Cable Length andTerminations

APPLICATIONS• Avionics

Pin Version Stripped Version

WAVEFORM AND TRUTH TABLE

Clockwise Rotation

Position Output A Output B


•• •

•

1

2

34

OUTPUTA

OUTPUTB

HIGH

LOW

HIGH

LOW

POSITION NUMBER

1 2 3 4 5 6

SERIES 62HSHigh Torque

Encoder10

.3759,53[ ]

.2506,35[ ]

.3127,92[ ]

.51112,98[ ]

.530 ±.01513,46 ±0,38[ ]

±.2004.000±5,084.000

.75019,05[ ]

.50012,7[ ]

.152 ±.0023,86 ±0,05[ ]

.2506,35[ ]

.54013,72[ ]

.65016,5[ ]

.2005,08[ ]

.066 ±.0021,68 ±0,05[ ]

.40010,15[ ]

.219 ±.0025,56 ±0,05[ ]

.250 ±.0026,34 ±0,05[ ]

.1102,79[ ]

.2365,99[ ] CONNECTOR IS AMP

P/N 215083-6OR EQUIVALENT

.1002,54[ ]

±.2004.000±5,084.000

3/8-32 UNEF-2A THREADTHREADS TO BE WITHIN.030 (0, 76) OF SHOULDER

.2305,84[ ]

.690 .01517,53 0,38[ ]

Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs


Optical Encoders

62HSXX-XX-XXXX


SeriesStyle: HS = High TorqueAngle of Throw: 45 = 45° or 8 positions,30 = 30° or 12 positions,22 = 22.5° or 16 positions

Termination: S = stripped cable, C = connector, P = pinsCable Termination: 040 = 4.0in. Cable is terminated with

Amp P/N 215083-6. See Amp MateabilityGuide for mating connector details.*Eliminate cable length if ordering pins. (Ex: 62HS22-H9-P)

Pushbutton Option: 0 = w/o pushbutton, 9 = 1100g

Rotational Torque: H = High Torque

SPECIFICATIONSPushbutton Switch RatingsRating: at 5 Vdc, 10 mA, resistiveContact Resistance: less than 10 ohms(TTL or CMOS compatible)Pushbutton Life: 3 million actuationsminimumVoltage Breakdown: 250 Vac betweenmutually insulated partsContact Bounce: less than 4 mS at makeand less than 10 mS at breakActuation Force: 1100 ±300g

Encoder RatingsCoding: 2-bit quadrature coded outputOperating Voltage: 5.0 ±.25 VdcSupply Current: 30 mA [email protected] VdcLogic Output Characterisitics:Logic High: 3.0 Vdc minimumLogic Low: 1.0 Vdc maximumMechanical Life: 1,000,000 cycles minimum(One cycle is a rotation through all positionsand a full return)Minimum Sink Current: 2.0 mA for 5 VdcPower Consumption: 150mW maximumOutput: open collector phototransistorLogic Rise and Fall: less than 30 mS max

Operating Torque: 5.0 in-oz +/- 1.5 in-ozinitialShaft Push Out Force: 45 lbs minimumMounting Torque: 15 in-lbs maximumTerminal Strength: 15 lbs cable pull-out forceminimumOperating Speed: 100 RPM maximum

Environmental RatingsOperating Temperature Range: -40°C to 85°CStorage Temperature Range: -55°C to 100°CVibration Resistance: Harmonic motion withamplitude of 15G, within a varied 10 to 2000 Hzfrequency for 12 hoursMechanical Shock: Test 1: 100G, 6 mS, halfsine, 12.3 ft/s; Test 2: 100G, 6 mS, sawtooth,9.7 ft/sRelative Humidity: 90–95% at 40°C for 96hours

Materials and FinishesCode Housing: Reinforced thermoplasticShaft: Stainless Steel

Bushing: Zinc castingShaft Retaining Ring: Stainless steelDetent Spring: Stainless steelDetent Ball: Stainless steelDetent Section: Hiloy 610Printed Circuit Boards: NEMA grade FR-4gold over nickel or palladiumTerminals: Brass, tin-platedMounting Hardware: One brass, nickel-platednut and stainless steel lockwasher suppliedwith each switch. Nut is 0.094 inches thick by0.562 inches across flatsRotor: ThermoplasticPushbutton Dome: Stainless steelPhototransistor: Planar Silicon NPNInfrared Emitter: Gallium aluminumarsenideFlex Cable: 28 AWG, stranded/top coated wire,PVC coated on .050" centers (cabled version)Header Pins: Brass, tin-platedSpacer: Hiloy 610Shim: Stainless SteelBackplate/Strain Relief: Stainless steel

CIRCUITRY

Encoder11

1

2

3

4

5

6POWER +5V

OUTPUT A

OUTPUT B

N.O.PUSH-

BUTTONSWITCH

GROUND

PIN #

R*

R*

100 Ω

* External pull-up resistors required for operation (2.2 kΩ).


Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs

Optical Encoders

62NX

X-XX

XCX

XX

X X

-X

GR

AY

HIL

L6 5

4 3 2

1

CONNECTOR VERSION STRIPPED CABLE

VERSION

.320(8,13) REF..250.002

(6,350,05) DIA.

.312(7,9)

.375.015(9,50,38)

.250(6,35)

.250(6,35)

.540(13,72)

.066.002(1,680,05)

.390(9,91)

.250(6,35)

.500(12,7)

.152(3,86)

.219.003(5,60,1)

3/8-32 UNEF-2A THREADTHREADS TO BE WITHIN.030 OF SHOULDER.

DIM. "4.000".20

.670.015(17,020,38)

.592.015(15,040,38)

.125.002(3,180,05) DIA.

.375.015(9,50,38)

.250(6,35)

.094.003(2,40,08)

.100 (2,54)STRIPPEDAND TINNED

CONNECTOR IS AMP P/N 215083-6,.050 (1,27) CENTERSP/N 640443-6, .100 (2,54) CENTERS

28 AWG CABLE WIRES ON.050 (1,27) CENTERS

62NX

X-P

XX

XX

X-X

GR

AYH

ILL

6 5

4 3

2 1

3/8-32 UNEF-2A THREADTHREADS TO BE WITHIN.030 OF SHOULDER

.470.020(11,90,5)

.450.010(11,430,3)

.100(2,54)TYP.

.940.050(23,81,3)

.066 .002(1,680,05)

.250(6,35)

.540(13,72)

.152(3,86)

.250(6,35)

.500(12,7)

.522(13,26)

.219.003(5,60,1)

.301(7,6)

.602(15,29)

.250 .002(6,350,05) DIA.

.250(6,35)

.375 .015(9,50,38)

.312(7,9)

.620(15,7)

.094.003(2,40,08)

.375.015(9,50,38)

.125.002(3,180,05) DIA.

.250(6,35)

.592.015(15,040,38)

.670.015(17,020,38)

.267.015(6,80,38)

Top View

Front View

Side View

Front View

Side View

Top View

SERIES 62N1/2'' Package, non-turn, Dedicated Shaft

FEATURES• Non-turn Pushbutton to Ensure

Pushbutton Text and Orientation• Seperate Pushbutton Function• Low Cost• Economical Size• Optically Coupled for More than a

Million Cycles• Compatible with CMOS, TTL and

HCMOS Logic


Unless otherwise specified, standard tolerances are ±0.10 (0,25)

Cable Version

• Available in 12, 16, 24, and 32Detent Positions (Non-detent AlsoAvailable)



Information Systems• Medical Equipment• Cockpit Controls• Mixing Boards

Encoder12

Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs


Optical Encoders

SPECIFICATIONSPushbutton Switch RatingsRating: at 5 Vdc, 10 mA, resistiveContact Resistance: less than 10 ohms (TTLor CMOS compatible)Pushbutton Life: 3 million actuationsminimumVoltage Breakdown: 250 Vac betweenmutually insulated partsContact Bounce: less than 4 mS at make andless than 10 mS at breakActuation Force: 1000 ±300gPushbutton Travel: .010/.025 inch

Encoder RatingsCoding: 2-bit quadrature coded outputOperating Voltage: 5.0 ±.25 VdcSupply Current: 30 mA [email protected] VdcLogic Output Characterisitics:Logic High: 3.8 Vdc minimumLogic Low: 0.8 Vdc maximumMechanical Life: 1,000,000 cycles minimum(One cycle is a rotation through all positionsand a full return)Minimum Sink Current: 2.0 mA for 5 VdcPower Consumption: 150mW maximumOutput: open collector phototransistorLogic Rise and Fall Times: less than 30 mSmaximum

Operating Torque:Detent: 2.0 in-oz ±70% initiallyNon-Detent: less than 1.5 in-oz initiallyShaft Push Out Force: 45 lbs minimumMounting Torque: 15 in-lbs maximumTerminal Strength: 15 lbs cable pull-out forceminimumOperating Speed: 100 RPM maximum

Environmental RatingsOperating Temperature Range: -40°C to 85°CStorage Temperature Range: -55°C to 100°CVibration Resistance: Harmonic motion withamplitude of 15G, within a varied 10 to 2000 Hzfrequency for 12 hoursMechanical Shock: Test 1: 100G, 6 mS, halfsine, 12.3 ft/s; Test 2: 100G, 6 mS, sawtooth, 9.7ft/sRelative Humidity: 90–95% at 40°C for 96hours

Materials and FinishesCode Housing: Reinforced thermoplasticShafts: AluminumBushing: Zinc castingShaft Retaining Ring: Stainless steel

Detent Spring: Stainless steelPrinted Circuit Boards: NEMA grade FR-4gold over nickel or palladiumTerminals: Brass, tin-platedMounting Hardware: One brass, nickel-platednut and stainless steel lockwasher supplied witheach switch. Nut is 0.094 inches thick by 0.562inches across flatsRotor: ThermoplasticCode Housing: ThermoplasticPushbutton Dome: Stainless steelDome Retaining Disk: ThermoplasticPushbutton Housing: ThermoplasticPhototransistor: Planar Silicon NPNInfrared Emitter: Gallium aluminum arsenidePushbutton Contact: Brass, nickel-platedFlex Cable: 28 AWG, stranded/top coated wire,PVC coated on .050 or .100" centers (cabledversion)Header Pins: Phospher bronze, tin-platedSpacer: ThermoplasticEndcap: ThermoplasticNon-turn Pin: Stainless steelBackplate/Strain Relief: Stainless steelLockwashers: Stainless steelHex Nuts: Stainless steelStuds: Stainless steel

Series and Style = 1/2" package, non-turn, dedicated shaftAngle of Throw: Detent Non-detent

11 = 11.25° or 32 pos. 01 = 11.25° or 32 positions 15 = 15° or 24 positions 05 = 15° or 24 positions 22 = 22.25° or 16 positions 02 = 22.5° or 16 positions

62N22-040S 30 = 30° or 12 positions 00 = 30° or 12 positionsTermination: S = Stripped cable; .050" centers

SH = Stripped cable; .100" centersC = Connector; .050" centersCH = Connector; .100" centersP = Pin; .100" centers

Cable Termination: 040 = 4.0in. Cable is terminated with Amp ConnectorP/N 215088-6. See Amp Mateability Guide for mating connector details.*Eliminate cable length if ordering pins (Ex: 62N22-P)


These switches have Quadrature 2-bit code output and an optional shaft actuated pushbutton switch.



OUTPUTA

OUTPUTB

HIGH

LOW

HIGH

LOW

POSITION NUMBER

1 2 3 4 5 6• Indicates logic high; blank indicates logic low. Code repeats every 4 positions.


1

2

3

4

•• •

•

1

2

3

4

5

6POWER +5V

OUTPUT A

OUTPUT B

N.O.PUSH-

BUTTONSWITCH

GROUND

PIN #

R*

R*

Available from your local Grayhill Component Distributor. For prices and discounts, contact a local Sales Office, an authorized local Distributor, or Grayhill.

Encoder13


Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs

Optical Encoders

.2506,35[ ]

.2506,35[ ]

.3759,53[ ]

.3759,53[ ]

.3127,92[ ]

.69117,55[ ]

.78519,94[ ]

IM. 4.000 ± .200DIM. 4.000 ± 5,08D

.50012,7[ ]

.75019,05[ ]

.152 ±.0023,86 ±0,05[ ]

.2506,35[ ]

.54013,72[ ]

.74018,8[ ]

.066 ±.0021,68 ±0,05[ ]

.2005,08[ ]

.49012,45[ ]

.125 ±.0023,18 ±0,05[ ]

.219 ±.0025,56 ±0,05[ ]

.250 ±.0026,34 ±0,05[ ]

.1102,79[ ]

.2365,99[ ]

.094 ±.0022,39 ±0,05[ ]

CONNECTOR IS AMPP/N 215083-8OR EQUIVALENT

SERIES 62HNHigh Torque, Non-TurnConcentric Shaft


Positive Tactile Feedbackï Non-turn Pushbutton to Ensure

Pushbutton Text and Orientation• Optically Coupled for More than a

Million Cycles• Seperate Pushbutton Function

Cable Version

Unless otherwise specified, standard tolerance is ±.010 (0,25).


• Compatible with CMOS, TTL andHCMOS Logic




Pin VersionStripped Version

CIRCUITRY

Encoder14

6

5

4

3

2

1

OUTPUT BDECK A

NO FUNCTION

GROUND

PUSHBUTTON

PUSHBUTTON

R*

R*

100

*EXTERNAL 2.2k PULL-UP RESISTORS REQUIRED FOR OPERATION

7

8

R*

R*OUTPUT A DECK A

POWER 5 V

100

NO FUNCTION

.1002,54[ ]

4.000 ± .200 4.000 ± 5,08


1.000 ±.01525,4 ±0,38[ ]

.3358,51[ ]

Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs


Optical Encoders

62HNXX-XX-040C


Encoder RatingsCoding: 2-bit quadrature coded outputOperating Voltage: 5.0 ±.25 VdcSupply Current: 30 mA [email protected] VdcLogic Output Characterisitics:Logic High: 3.0 Vdc minimumLogic Low: 1.0 Vdc maximumMechanical Life: 1,000,000 cycles minimum(One cycle is a rotation through all positionsand a full return)Minimum Sink Current: 2.0 mA for 5 VdcPower Consumption: 150mW maximumOutput: open collector phototransistorLogic Rise and Fall Times: less than 30 mSmaximumOperating Torque: 5.0 in-oz +/- 1.5 in-ozinitial

Shaft Push Out Force: 45 lbs minimumMounting Torque: 15 in-lbs maximumTerminal Strength: 15 lbs cable pull-out forceminimumOperating Speed: 100 RPM maximum


Materials and FinishesCode Housing: Reinforced thermoplasticShafts: Stainless SteelBushing: Zinc castingShaft Retaining Rings: Stainless steelDetent Spring: Stainless steelDetent Ball: Stainless steelDetent Section: Hiloy 610Printed Circuit Boards: NEMA grade FR-4gold over nickel or palladium

Terminals: Brass, tin-platedMounting Hardware: One brass, nickel-platednut and stainless steel lockwasher suppliedwith each switch. Nut is 0.094 inches thick by0.562 inches across flatsRotor: ThermoplasticPushbutton Dome: Stainless steelPhototransistor: Planar Silicon NPNInfrared Emitter: Gallium aluminumarsenideFlex Cable: 28 AWG, stranded/top coated wire,PVC coated on .050 centers (cabled version)Header Pins: Brass, tin-platedSpacer: Hiloy 610Shim: Stainless SteelEndcap: ThermoplasticNon-turn Pin: Stainless steelBackplate/Strain Relief: Stainless steelLockwashers: Stainless steelHex Nuts: Stainless steelStuds: Stainless steel


Available from your local Grayhill Component Distributor.For prices and discounts, contact a local Sales Office, an authorized local Distributor, or Grayhill.


SeriesStyle: HN = High Torque, Concentric, Non-TurnAngle of Throw: 45 = 45° or 8 positions,30 = 30° or 12 positions,22 = 22.5° or 16 positions

Termination: S = stripped cable, C = connector, P = pinsCable Termination: 040= 4.0in. Cable is terminated with Amp Connector

P/N 215083-6. See Amp Mateability Guide for matingconnector details. *Eliminate cable length if orderingpins. (Ex: 62HN22-H9-P)

Pushbutton Option: 0 = w/o pushbutton, 9 = 1100gpushbutton


OUTPUTA

OUTPUTB

HIGH

LOW

HIGH

LOW

POSITION NUMBER

1 2 3 4 5 6

Clockwise Rotation



•• •

•

1

23

4


Encoder15


Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs

Optical Encoders

GR

AY

HIL

L

87

65

43

21

.066 ± .005(1,68 ± 0,13)

.152 ± .005(3,86 ± 0,13)

.230 ± .050(5,84 ± 1,27)

GR

AY

HIL

L

87

65

43

21

3/8-32 UNEF-2A THREAD. TO BE WITHIN .030 (0,76) OF SHOULDER

4.0 ± .20(4.0 ± 5,08)

.100 (2,54)STRIPPED AND TINNED

28 AWG CABLEWIRES ON .050 (1,27)CENTER


.933 (23,69) REF.

.040 (1.02)

62C

XX

XX

-XX

-XX

XC

XX

XX

X-X

.312 ± .005(7,92 ± 0,13)

.375 ± .015(9,53 ± 0,38)

.375 ± .015(9,53 ± 0,38)

.250 ± .005(6,35 ± 0,13)

.250 ± .005(6,35 ± 0,13)

.250 ± .002(6,35 ± 0,05)

.125 ± .002(3,18 ± 0,05)

.490 ± .010(12,45 ± 0,25)

.460 ± .010(11,68 ± 0,25)

.360 ± .010(9,14 ± 0,25)

.094 ± .004(2,39 ± 0,1)

.219 ±.004(5,56 ± 0,1)

.540 ± .010(13,72 ± 0,25)

.500 ±.010(12,7 ± 0,25)

.250 ± .005(6,35 ± 0,13)

.250 ± .005(6,35 ± 0,13)

C L

C L

Pin Version

Cable Version

.580(14,73)

SERIES 62CConcentric Shaft

FEATURES• Economical Size• Combined Functionality• Optically Coupled for More than a

Million Cycles of Operations• Optional Integral Pushbutton• Compatible with CMOS, TTL, and

HCMOS Logic• Available with 12, 16, 24, and 32

Detent Positions for Each CodeSection


• Available in 3.3 Volt Input.(Contact Grayhill for details)


APPLICATIONS• Used to Set Radio Frequency, Drill

Depth, RPM, Menu Selection,Parameter Selection for PatientMonitoring Devices, etc.

Unless otherwise specified, standard tolerance are:Linear ± .025Diameter ± .010Angle ± 2.0°

Encoder16

Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs


Optical Encoders


Custom custom shaft, pushbutton actuation force and termination options are available.

SPECIFICATIONSPushbutton Switch RatingsRating: 5 Vdc, 10 mA, resistiveContact Resistance: less than 10 ohms (TTLor CMOS compatible)Voltage Breakdown: 250 Vac between mutuallyinsulated partsContact Bounce: less than 4 mS at make, lessthan 10 mS at breakActuation Life: 3,000,000 operationsActuation Force: 1000 ± 300 gramsPushbutton Travel: .010 / .025 inch

Encoder RatingsCoding: 2-bit quadrature coded outputOperating Voltage: 5 ± .25 VdcSupply Current: 50 mA maximum at 5 VdcLogic High: 3.8V minimumLogic Low: 0.8V maximumLogic Rise and Fall Times: less than 30 mSOperating Torque: 2.0 in-oz ± 1.4 in-ozinitially

Rotational Life: more than 1,000,000 cyclesof operation (1 cycle = 360° rotation andreturn)Shaft Push Out Force: 45 lbs minimumMounting Torque: 15 in-lbs maximumOperating Speed: 100 RPM maximumAxial Shaft Play: .010 maximum for eachshaft

Environmental RatingsOperating Temperature Range: -40°C to 85°CStorage Temperature Range: -55°C to 100°CRelative Humidity: 90–95% at 40°C for 96hoursVibration Resistance: Harmonic motion withamplitude of 15g, within a varied 10 to 2000 Hzfrequency for 12 hours per MIL-STD-202,Method 204Shock Resistance: Test 1: Tested at 100gfor 6 mS, half sine, 12.3 ft/s Test 2: 100g for6 mS, sawtooth, 9.7 ft/s

CIRCUITRY, TRUTH TABLE AND WAVEFORM: Standard Quadrature 2-Bit Code

Materials and FinishesBushing: Zinc castingShaft: AluminumShaft Retaining Ring: Stainless steelDetent Spring: Stainless steelPrinted Circuit Board: NEMA grade FR-4Terminals: Brass, tin-platedMounting Hardware: One brass, nickel-platednut and lockwasher supplied with each switch.(Nut is 0.094 inches thick by 0.562 inchesacross flats)Rotor: ThermoplasticCode Housing: Reinforced thermoplasticPushbutton Dome: Stainless steelPushbutton Housing: ThermoplasticPushbutton Contact: Brass, nickel-platedDome Retaining Disk: ThermoplasticStrain Relief: Stainless steelCable: 28 AWG, stranded/top coated wire,PVC coated on .050 centers(cable version only)Header Pins: Phosphor bronze, tin-platedInsulator: Glass-filled polyesterSpacer: Zinc castingORDERING INFORMATION

Clockwise Rotation

Position Output A Output B1

2

3

4

•• •

•• Indicates logic high; blank indicates logic low. Code repeats every 4 positions.

SeriesStyle: C = ConcentricAngle of Throw (Deck A): 11 = 11.25° or 32 positions,

15 = 15° or 24 positions, 22 = 22.5° or 16 positions, 30 = 30° or 12 PositionsAngle of Throw (Deck B): 11 = 11.25° or 32 positions,

15 = 15° or 24 positions, 18 = 18° or 20 positions, 22 = 22.5° or 16 positions, 30 = 30° or 12 Positions

62C2211- 02 - 040 C

Termination: S = stripped cable, C = connector, P = pinsCable Termination: 040 = 4.0in. Cable is terminated with Amp ConnectorP/N 215083-6. See Amp Mateability Guide for mating connector details.*Eliminate cable length if ordering pins. (Ex: 62C2211-02-P)Pushbutton Option: 01 = w/o pushbutton

02 = with pushbutton

Encoder17

OUTPUTA

OUTPUTB

HIGH

LOW

HIGH

LOW

POSITION NUMBER

1 2 3 4 5 6

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

POWER +5V

OUTPUT ADECK A

OUTPUT B DECK A

OUTPUT ADECK B

OUTPUT BDECK B

N.O.PUSHBUTTONSWITCHDECK B

GROUND

* External pull-up resistors required for operation (2.2kΩ)

R*

R*

PIN#

R*

R*


Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs

Optical Encoders

.87822,3[ ]

.81720,75[ ]

.3127,92[ ]

.3759,53[ ]

.3759,53[ ]

.2506,35[ ]

.2506,35[ ]

4.000 ± .200 4.000 ± 5,08

.2506,35[ ]

.54013,72[ ]

.74018,8[ ]

.50012,7[ ]

.75019,05[ ]

±.002±0,05 ]

.2005,08[ ]

.066±.0021,68 ±0,05[ ]

.49012,45[

.125 ±.0023,18 ±0,05[ ]

.219 ±.0025,56 ±0,05[ ]

.250 ±.0026,34 ±0,05[ ]

.40110,19[ ]

.52713,39[ ]

.1102,79[ ]

.2365,99[ ]

.094 ±.0022,39 ±0,05[ ]

CONNECTOR IS AMPP/N 215083-8OR EQUIVALENT

SERIES 62HHigh Torque, Concentric Shaft


Positive Tactile Feedback• Optically Coupled for More than a


HCMOS Logic

Cable Version





Clockwise Rotation



•• •

•

1

2

3

4


Encoder18

OUTPUTA

OUTPUTB

HIGH

LOW

HIGH

LOW

POSITION NUMBER

1 2 3 4 5 6

1.126±.01528,6 ±0,38[ ]

.3358,51[ ]

Stripped Version Pin Version

4.000 ± .200 4.000 ± 5,08

.1002,54[ ]


Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs


Optical Encoders

62HXXXX-XX-040C




Materials and FinishesCode Housing: Reinforced thermoplasticShafts: Stainless SteelBushing: Zinc castingPushbutton Actuator: Zytel 70G33L

Shaft Retaining Rings: Stainless steelDetent Spring: Stainless steelDetent Ball: Stainless steelDetent Section: Hiloy 610Printed Circuit Boards: NEMA grade FR-4gold over nickel or palladiumTerminals: Brass, tin-platedMounting Hardware: One brass, nickel-platednut and stainless steel lockwasher suppliedwith each switch. Nut is 0.094 inches thick by0.562 inches across flatsRotor: ThermoplasticPushbutton Dome: Stainless steelPhototransistor: Planar Silicon NPNInfrared Emitter: Gallium aluminumarsenideFlex Cable: 28 AWG, stranded/top coated wire,PVC coated on .050 or .100" centers (cabledversion)Header Pins: Brass, tin-platedSpacer: Hiloy 610Shim: Stainless SteelBackplate/Strain Relief: Stainless steelLockwashers: Stainless steelHex Nuts: Stainless steelStuds: Stainless steel

SPECIFICATIONSPushbutton Switch RatingsRating: at 5 Vdc, 10 mA, resistiveContact Resistance: less than 10 ohms(TTL or CMOS compatible)Pushbutton Life: 3 million actuationsminimumVoltage Breakdown: 250 Vac betweenmutually insulated partsContact Bounce: less than 4 mS at makeand less than 10 mS at breakActuation Force: 1100 ±300gShaft Travel: .020±.010 inch

Encoder RatingsCoding: 2-bit quadrature coded outputOperating Voltage: 5.0 ±.25 VdcSupply Current: 50 mA [email protected] VdcLogic Output Characterisitics:Logic High: 3.0 Vdc minimumLogic Low: 1.0 Vdc maximumMechanical Life: 1,000,000 cycles minimum(One cycle is a rotation through all positionsand a full return)Minimum Sink Current: 2.0 mA for 5 VdcPower Consumption: 150mW maximumOutput: open collector phototransistorLogic Rise and Fall Times: less than 30 mSmaximum

SeriesStyle: H = High Torque, ConcentricAngle of Throw (Deck A): 45 = 45° or 8 positions,30 = 30° or 12 positions,22 = 22.5° or 16 positionsAngle of Throw (Deck B): 45 = 45° or 8 positions, 30 = 30° or 12 positions,22 = 22.5° or 16 positions

Termination: S = stripped cable, C = connector, P = pinsCable Termination: 040 = 4.0in. Cable is terminated with Amp Connector P/N 215083-8.

See Amp Mateability Guide for mating connector details.*Eliminate cable length if ordering pins. (Ex: 62H2222-H9-P)

Pushbutton Option: 0 = w/o pushbutton, 9 = 1100gpushbutton


CIRCUITRY

Encoder19

6

5

4

3

2

7

1

OUTPUT BDECK A

OUTPUT ADECK B

OUTPUT BDECK B

GROUND

PUSHBUTTON

PUSHBUTTON

R*

R*

100

*EXTERNAL 2.2k PULL-UP RESISTORS REQUIRED FOR OPERATION

100

8

R*

R*OUTPUT A DECK A

POWER 5 V


Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs

Optical Encoders

SERIES 62R1/2'' Package, Redundant Circuitry


FEATURES• Redundant Circuitry• 1 Million Rotational Cycles• Compatible with CMOS, TTL and

HCMOS Logic• Optional Integral Pushbutton• Available in 12, 16, 24, and 32

Detent Positions• Choices of Cable Length and

Terminations• Ideal for Critical Applications

APPLICATIONS• Cockpit Controls• Medical Equipment

Unless otherwise specified, standard tolerances are ±0.10 (0,25)

Encoder20

62RX

XXX-

XX-X

XXC

XX

XX

X-X

GR

AY

HIL

L

10 9 8

7 6 5 4

3 2 1

GR

AY

HIL

L

10 9 8

7 6 5 4

3 2 1

Cable Version

Pin Version

.230±.050(5,84±1,27)

.933(23,69) REF.

.855±.020(21,7±0,51)

.375±.015(9,53±0,38)

.312±.005(7,92±0,13)

.540±.010(13,72±0,25)

.066±.005(1,68±0,13)

.152±.005(3,86±0,13)

.490±.010(12,45±0,25)

.500±.010(12,7±0,25)

.250±.005(6,35±0,13)

.219±.004(5,56±0,1)

.250±.005(6,35±0,13)

.250±.005(6,35±0,13)

4.000±.20(4.000±5,08)

.580±.010(14,73±0,25)

.460±.010(11,68±0,25)

.250±.002(6,35±0,05) DIA.

CONNECTORIS AMP P/N1-215083-0

28 AWG CABLEWIRES ON .050(1,27) CENTER

.100 (2,54)STRIPPEDAND TINNED

3/8-32 UNEF-2ATHREAD.TO BEWITHIN .030 (0,76)OF SHOULDER

.360±.010(9,14±0,25)

.700±.010(17,78±0,25)

.815±.015(20,70±0,38)

Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs


Optical Encoders

SPECIFICATIONSPushbutton Switch RatingsPushbutton Rating: 10 mA, 5 Vdc, resistiveContact Resistance: less than 10 ohms (TTLor CMOS compatible)Pushbutton Life: 3 million actuations min.Contact Bounce: less than 4 mS at makeand less than 10 mS at breakActuation Force: 1000 ±300 gramsPushbutton Travel: .010/.025"

Switch RatingsCoding: 2-bit quadrature coded outputOperating Voltage: 5.0 ±.25 VdcVoltage Breakdown: 250 Vac betweenmutually insulated partsSupply Current: 30 mA [email protected] Vdc(per deck)Logic Output Characterisitics:Logic High: 3.5 Vdc minimumLogic Low: 1.5 Vdc maximumMechanical Life: 1,000,000 cycles minimum(One cycle is a rotation through all positionsand a full return)Minimum Sink Current: 2.0 mAPower Consumption: 150mW max. (perdeck)Output: open collector phototransistorOptical Rise and Fall Times: less than 30

mS maximumOperating Torque: 3.5 ±1.4 in-oz initiallyShaft Push Out Force: 45 lbs minimumMounting Torque: 15 in-lbs max.Terminal Strength: 15 lbs cable pull-out forcemin.Operating Speed: 100 RPM max.

Environmental RatingsOperating Temperature Range: -40°C to 85°CStorage Temperature Range: -55°C to 100°CVibration Resistance: Harmonic motion withamplitude of 15G's, within a varied 10 to 2000Hz frequency for 12 hoursMechanical Shock: Test 1: 100g, 6 mS, halfsine, 12.3 ft/s; Test 2: 100g, 6 mS, sawtooth, 9.7ft/sHumidity: 90–95% at 40°C for 96 hours

Materials and FinishesShaft: AluminumBushing: Zinc castingShaft Retaining Ring: Stainless steelDetent Spring: Stainless steelPrinted Circuit Boards: NEMA grade FR-4gold over nickel or palladium

Terminals: Brass, tin-platedMounting Hardware: One brass, nickel-platednut and stainless steel lockwasher suppliedwith each switch. Nut is 0.094 inches thick by0.562 inches across flatsRotor: ThermoplasticCode Housing: ThermoplasticPushbutton Dome: Stainless steelDome Retaining Disk: ThermoplasticPushbutton Housing: ThermoplasticPhototransistor: Planar Silicon NPNInfrared Emitter: Gallium aluminumarsenidePushbutton Contact: Brass, nickel-platedFlex Cable: 28 AWG stranded, halogen-freepolyolefin insulation on .050" centers (cabledversion)Header Pins: Phospher bronze, tin-platedSpacer: Zinc castingBackplate/Strain Relief: Stainless steelLockwasher(s): Stainless steelHex Nuts: Stainless steelStuds: Stainless steel

OPTIONSContact Grayhill for custom terminations, shaftand bushing configurations, and resolutions.Control knobs are also available.


SeriesAngle of Throw: 11 = 11.25° or 32 pos., 15 = 15° or 24 pos, 22 = 22.5° or 16 positions,30 = 30° or 12 PositionsPushbutton Option: 01 = w/o pushbutton, 02 = with pushbutton

62R22-01-040S

Termination: .050" centers; S = Stripped cable, C = Connector, P = PinCable Length: 040 = 4.0 inches. Cable is terminated with Amp Connector P/N 215083-8.See Amp Mateability Guide for mating connector details.*Eliminate cable length if ordering pins. (Ex: 62R22-02-P)


Available from your local Component Grayhill Distributor. For prices and discounts, contact a local Sales Office, an authorized localDistributor, or Grayhill.


Encoder21

POSITION OUTPUT "A" OUTPUT "B"

1

2

3

4

INDICATES LOGIC HIGH. BLANK INDICATES LOGIC LOW. CODE REPEATS EVERY 4 POSITIONS

7

6

5

4

3

2

DECK A OUTPUT "B"

DECK B OUTPUT "A"

DECK B OUTPUT "B"

DECK A GROUND

PUSHBUTTON N.O.

PIN #Switch Schematic Truth Table (CW Rotation)

LOW

LOWHIGH

HIGHOUTPUT "A"

OUTPUT "B"

POS.#1

POS.#2

POS.#3

POS.#4

POS.#5

POS.#6

Wave Form (CW Rotation)

OUTPUT "A" OUTPUT "B"

DECK A DECK B

LOW

HIGHLOW

HIGHOUTPUT "A"

OUTPUT "B"

10

9

8

DECK B POWER 5V

DECK A OUTPUT "A"

DECK A

DECK B1DECK B GROUND

DECK A POWER 5V

R*

R*

R*

R*

* 2.2k EXTERNAL PULL-UP RESISTORS REQUIRED FOR OPERATION


Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs

Optical Encoders

SERIES 62HR1/2'' Package, Redundant CircuitryHigh Torque


FEATURES• Redundant Circuitry• 1 Million Rotational Cycles• Compatible with CMOS, TTL and

HCMOS Logic• Optional Integral Pushbutton• Available in 12, 16, 24, and 32

Detent Positions• Choices of Cable Length and

Terminations• Ideal for Critical Applications

APPLICATIONS• Cockpit Controls• Medical Equipment

SERIES 62HR WITH .050 CENTER RIBBON CABLE SERIES 62HR WITH .050 CENTER TERMINAL PINS

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, STANDARD TOLERANCE IS ±.010 (0,25). UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, STANDARD TOLERANCE IS ±.010 (0,25).

.540(13,72)

.066±.002(1,68±0,05)

.250(6,35)

.500(12,70)

.250(6,35)

.152±.002(3,86±0,05)

.490(12,45)

.375(9,53)

.750(19,05)

.250±.005(6,35±0,13)

.375±.015(9,52±0,38)

.312(7,92)

.751±.015(19,08±0,38)

.845±.015(21,46±0,38)

DIM "XXX" ±.20 (±5,1)

.110(2,79)


28 AWG CABLEWIRES ON.050 (1,27)CENTERS

CONNECTOR ISAMP P/N 1-215083-0OR EQUIVALENT.

.236(5,99)

.219±.003(5,56±0,08)

.460(11,68)

.845±.015(21,46±0,38)

.751±.015(19,08±0,38)

.312(7,92)

.375±.015(9,52±0,38)

.250±.005(6,35±0,13)

.250(6,35)

.500(12,70)

.152±.002(3,86±0,05)

.250(6,35)

.540(13,72)

.066±.002(1,68±0,05)

.375(9,53)

.750(19,05)

.490(12,45)


.110(2,79)

.236(5,99)

.219±.003(5,56±0,08)

PINS ARE.016 (0,41)SQUARE

.250±.002(6,35±0,05)

.250±.002(6,35±0,05)

1.075±.020(27,31±0,50)

.230±.025(5,84±0,64)

.440 REF.(11,18)

Encoder22

Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs


Optical Encoders


POSITION OUTPUT "A" OUTPUT "B"

1

2

3

4

INDICATES LOGIC HIGH. BLANK INDICATES LOGIC LOW. CODE REPEATS EVERY 4 POSITIONS

7

6

5

4

3

2

DECK A OUTPUT "B"

DECK B OUTPUT "A"

DECK B OUTPUT "B"

DECK A GROUND

PUSHBUTTON N.O.

PIN #Switch Schematic Truth Table (CW Rotation)

LOW

LOWHIGH

HIGHOUTPUT "A"

OUTPUT "B"

POS.#1

POS.#2

POS.#3

POS.#4

POS.#5

POS.#6

Wave Form (CW Rotation)

OUTPUT "A" OUTPUT "B"

DECK A DECK B

LOW

HIGHLOW

HIGHOUTPUT "A"

OUTPUT "B"

10

9

8

DECK B POWER 5V

DECK A OUTPUT "A"

DECK A

DECK B1DECK B GROUND

DECK A POWER 5V

R*

R*

R*

R*

* 2.2k EXTERNAL PULL-UP RESISTORS REQUIRED FOR OPERATION


SeriesStyle: HR = High Torque, RedundantAngle of Throw: 45 = 45° or 8 positions,30 = 30° or 12 positions,

22 = 22.5° or 16 positions

Termination: S = stripped cable, C = connector, P = pinsCable Length: 020 = 2.0 inches. Cable is terminated with AmpConnector P/N 1-215083-0. See Amp Mateability Guide for matingconnector details. *Eliminate cable length if orderingpins. (Ex: 62HR22-H9-P)Pushbutton Option: 0 = w/o pushbutton, 9 = 1100g

pushbuttonRotational Torque: H = High Torque

62HRXX-XX-020X


Encoder RatingsCoding: 2-bit quadrature coded outputOperating Voltage: 5.0 ±.25 VdcSupply Current: 30 mA [email protected] VdcLogic Output Characterisitics:Logic High: 3.0 Vdc minimumLogic Low: 1.0 Vdc maximumMechanical Life: 1,000,000 cycles minimum(One cycle is a rotation through all positionsand a full return)Minimum Sink Current: 2.0 mA for 5 VdcPower Consumption: 150mW maximumOutput: open collector phototransistorLogic Rise and Fall: less than 30 mSmaximum



Materials and FinishesCode Housing: Reinforced thermoplasticShaft: Stainless Steel

Bushing: Zinc castingShaft Retaining Ring: Stainless steelDetent Spring: Stainless steelDetent Ball: Stainless steelDetent Section: Hiloy 610Printed Circuit Boards: NEMA grade FR-4gold over nickel or palladiumTerminals: Brass, tin-platedMounting Hardware: One brass, nickel-platednut and stainless steel lockwasher suppliedwith each switch. Nut is 0.094 inches thick by0.562 inches across flatsRotor: ThermoplasticPushbutton Dome: Stainless steelPhototransistor: Planar Silicon NPNInfrared Emitter: Gallium aluminumarsenideFlex Cable: 28 AWG, stranded/top coated wire,PVC coated on .050" centers (cabled version)Header Pins: Brass, tin-platedSpacer: Hiloy 610Shim: Stainless SteelBackplate/Strain Relief: Stainless steel

Encoder23


Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs

Optical Encoders

.070 (1,78)

DIA

.070 (1,78)

DIA

.360 (9,14) REF.

.010 (0,25)/.025 (0,64)

PUSH BUTTONTRAVEL

.236(5,99)

.525 ± .015(13,34 ± 0,38)

.312 (7,92)

.250 ± .002(6,35 ± 0,05) DIA.

.375 ± .015(9,53

± 25,42)

.250(6,35)

.219 ± .003(5,56 ± 0,08)

.390(9,91)

.152 ± .002(3,86 ± 0,05).250 (6,35)

.066 ± .002(1,68 ± 0,05)

.250 (6,35)

.250 (6,35)

.500(12,7)

.152 ± .002(3,86 ± 0,05).250 (6,35)

.500(12,7)

.540(13,72)

3/8-32 UNEF-2A THREADTHREADS TO BE WITHIN.030 (0,76) OF SHOULDER

6 5 4

3 2 1

GR

AY

HIL

L

XX

XX

X-X

62FX

X-XX

-P

ConnectorVersion

StrippedVersion

62F

XX

-01-

XX

XC

XX

XX

X

-X

.390(9,91)

28 AWG CABLE WIRES ON .050 (1,27) CENTERS

4.00 ± .20 (.040 ± 5,08)


GR

AY

HIL

L6

5 4

3 2

1

.250(6,35)

.320 (8,13)REF

.312 (7,92)

.375 ± .015(9,52 ± 0,38)

.250 ± .005(6,35 ± 0,13)

.525 ± .015(13,34 ± 0,38)

.100 (2,54) STRIP-PED AND TINNED

.219 ± .003(5,56 ± 0,08)

.540(13,72

.066 ± .002(1,68 ± 0,05)

.510 ± .015(12,95 ± 0,38) 3/8-32 UNEF-2A THREAD

THREADS TO BE WITHIN.030 (0,76) OF SHOULDER

.010 (0,25)/.025 (0,64)

PUSH-BUTTONTRAVEL

62FX

X-XX

-P-L

XX

XX

X-X

GR

AY

HIL

L8 7

6 5 4

3 2 1

.460(11,68) REF

.490(12,45)

.448(11,4)

.657±.015(16,7±0,4)

.581±.010(14,8±0,3) .087(2,21)

.293(7,4) REF

62FX

X-XX

-XXX

C-L

XX

XX

X-X

GR

AY

HIL

L

8 7

6 5

4 3

2 1

.490(12,45)

.657±.015(16,7±0,4)

.581±.010(14,8±0,3)

.500(12,7)

.391(10,0) REF

FEATURES• Integrated Self-Lighting System

for Knob Illumination• 1 Million Rotational Cycles• 1/2" Package• Compatible with CMOS, TTL and

HCMOS Logic• Optional Integral Pushbutton• Choices of Cable Length and

Terminations• Other Customized Solutions

Available



Information Systems• Medical Equipment• Cockpit Controls• Mixing Boards

Pin Version

Cable Version

Withon-boardlightingsystem

Withon-boardlightingsystem


SERIES 62F1/2'' Package, Lighted Shaft

Encoder24

Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs


Optical Encoders

SPECIFICATIONSPushbutton Switch RatingsRating: 5 Vdc, 10 mA, resistiveContact Resistance: less than 10 ohms(TTL or CMOS compatible)Pushbutton Life: 3 million actuationsminimumContact Bounce: less than 4 mS at makeand less than 10 mS at breakActuation Force: 500 ±300 gramsPushbutton Travel: .010/.025 inch

Switch RatingsCoding: 2-bit quadrature coded outputOperating Voltage: 5.0 ±.25 VdcVoltage Breakdown: 250 Vac betweenmutually insulated partsSupply Current: 30 mA maximumLogic Output Characterisitics:Logic High: 3.8 Vdc minimumLogic Low: 0.8 Vdc maximumRotational Life: 1,000,000 cycles minimum(One cycle is a rotation through all positionsand a full return)Minimum Sink Current: 2.0 mAPower Consumption: 150mW maximumOptical Rise and Fall Times: less than 30 mSmaximum

Operating Torque:Detent: 2.0 ±1.4 in-oz initiallyNon-detent: less than 1.5 in-oz initiallyShaft Push Out Force: 45 lbs minimumMounting Torque: 15 in-lbs maximumTerminal Strength: 15 lbs cable pull-out forceminimumOperating Speed: 100 RPM maximumAxial Shaft Play: .010 maximum

Environmental RatingsOperating Temperature Range: -40°C to 85°CStorage Temperature Range: -55°C to 100°CRelative Humidity: 90–95% at 40°C for 96hoursVibration Resistance: Harmonic motion withamplitude of 15G's, within a varied 10 to 2000Hz frequency for 12 hours per MIL-STD-202,Method 204Mechanical Shock: Test 1: 100G for 6 mS, halfsine, 12.3 ft/s; Test 2: 100G for 6 mS, sawtooth,9.7 ft/s

Materials and FinishesCode Housing: Reinforced thermoplasticShaft: AluminumBushing: Zinc castingShaft Retaining Ring: Stainless steelDetent Spring: Stainless steel

SeriesAngle of Throw: Detent Non-detent

11 = 11.25° or 32 pos. 01 = 11.25° or 32 positions 15 = 15° or 24 positions 05 = 15° or 24 positions 18 = 18° or 20 pos. 08 = 18° or 20 positions 22 = 22.5° or 16 positions 02 = 22.5° or 16 positions

Pushbutton Option: 01 = w/o pushbutton, 02 = with pushbutton62F22-01-040S-L

LED: blank = no LED, L = supplied with LEDTermination: S = Stripped cable; S-L = Stripped cable, LED;C = Connector; C-L = Connector, LED; P = Pin; P-L = Pin, LEDCable Termination: 040 = 4.0in. Cable is terminated with Amp P/N 215083-6.See Amp Mateability guide for mating connector details.*Eliminate cable length if ordering pins. (Ex: 62A22-02-P)




Printed Circuit Boards: NEMA grade FR-4gold over nickel or palladiumTerminals: Brass, tin-platedMounting Hardware: One brass, nickel-platednut and stainless steel lockwasher suppliedwith each switch. Nut is 0.094 inches thick by0.562 inches across flatsRotor: ThermoplasticCode Housing: ThermoplasticPushbutton Dome: Stainless steelDome Retaining Disk: ThermoplasticPushbutton Housing: ThermoplasticPhototransistor: Planar Silicon NPNPushbutton Contact: Brass, nickel-platedFlex Cable: 28 AWG, stranded/top coated wire,PVC coated on .050 or .100" centers (cabledversion)Header Pins: Phospher bronze, tin-platedSpacer: ABSBackplate/Strain Relief: Stainless steelLockwasher: Stainless steelLight Pipe: ThermoplasticLED Housing: Thermoplastic

OPTIONSContact Grayhill for custom terminations, shaftand bushing configurations, and resolutions.Control knobs are also available.

• Indicates logic high; blank indicates

logic low. Code repeats every 4 positions.


1

2

3

4

•• •

•

OUTPUTA

OUTPUTB

HIGH

LOW

HIGH

LOW

POSITION NUMBER

1 2 3 4 5 6


* EXTERNAL PULL-UP RESISTORS REQUIRED FOR OPERATION (2.2k).** Circuit shown with on-board lighting system. Versions without on-board lighting **system do not have LED power connections. Refer to standard 62A series for circuitry.

5%150

R*

R*

SWITCHPUSHBUTTONNORMALLY OPEN

2

3

1

4

5

6

7

8

GROUND

GROUND

(LED)POWER +5 V

OUTPUT B

OUTPUT A

POWER +5 V

PIN #s

Encoder25


Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs

Optical Encoders

SERIES 62MMagnetic Detent

FEATURES• Ultra Smooth Magnetic Detent• 10 Million Rotational Cycles,

Ten Times the Life of a MechanicalDetent System

• Optional Integrated Pushbutton• Available in 24 Positions• Choice of Cable Lengths

Applications• Medical• Audio• Instrumentation


Stripped VersionCableVersion

PinnedVersion

SWITCH SCHEMATIC

6

5

4

3

2

1

POWER (5V)

OUTPUT A

OUTPUT B

PUSHBUTTON

PUSHBUTTON

GROUND

*EXTERNAL 2.2k PULL-UP RESISTORS REQUIRED FOR OPERATION.

R*

R* 200

1.034 ±.01526,26 ±0,38[ ]

.3759,53[ ]

Ø 1.10027,94[ ]

.57014,48[ ]

.315 ±.0158±0,38[ ]

.2556,48[ ]

.720 ±.01518,29 ±0,38[ ]

.68617,42[ ]

.1002,54[ ]

Ø .249 ±.0016,32 ±0,02[ ]

.236 ±.0045,99 ±0,1[ ]

±.204.000

.217 ±.0025,51 ±0,05[ ]

*TOLERANCES ±.010 U.O.S.

3/8-32 UNEF-2A THREADS

4.000 ±.20

CONNECTOR ISAMP P/N 640442-6OR EQUIVALENT

Encoder26

Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs


Optical Encoders

SPECIFICATIONSEnvironmental SpecificationsOperating Temperature Range: -400 C to 850 CStorage Temperature Range: -550 C to 1000 CHumidity: 96 hours at 90-95% humidityat 400 CMechanical Vibration: Harmonic motion withamplitude of 15 g, within a varied frequency of10 to 2000 HzMechanical Shock:Test 1: 100 g for 6 ms half-sine wave with avelocity change of 12.3 ft/secTest 2: 100 g for 6 ms sawtooth wave with avelocity change of 9.7 ft/sec

Rotary Electrical andMechanical SpecificationsOperating Voltage: 5.00±.25 VdcSupply Current: 30 mA maximum at 5 VdcOutput: Open collector phototransistor,external pull-up resistors are requiredOutput Code: Two-bit quadrature, channel Aleads channel B by 900 electrically duringclockwise rotation of the shaftLogic Output Characteristics:Logic high signal shall be no lessthan 3.0 VdcLogic low signal shall be no greaterthan 1.0 VdcMinimum Sink Current: 2.0 mAPower Consumption: 150 mW maximumMechanical Life: 10 million rotational cycles ofoperation. One cycle is a rotation through allpositions and a full return

Tolerances: H=1.70 ± 1.00 in-oz, M=1.25 ±0.75 in-oz, L=0.75 ± 0.5 in-ozMounting Torque: 15 in-oz maximumShaft Pull-Out Force: 45 lbs minimumTerminal Strength: 15 lbs minimum terminalpull-out force for cable or header terminationSolderability: 95% free of pin holes andvoids

Pushbutton Electrical andMechanical SpecificationsRating: 10 mA at 5 VdcContact Resistance: <10 ohmsLife: 3 million actuations minimumContact Bounce: <4 ms make,<10 msbreakActuation Force: 2=200±75 grams,3=300±90 grams, 4=510±150 gramsShaft Travel: .25 ± .010 inches

Materials and FinishesBushing: Zinc Diecast, Cadmium Plated perQQP-416, Class II, Type IIInsert Molded into 25% Glass ReinforcedNylon Zytel FR-50Shaft: NdFeB XE-3594 over GrilamidLV23HStator: Powdered Metal per F-0000-20

Through Bolts: 305 Stainless SteelThrough Bolts Nuts: Stainless SteelSpacer Washer: BrassSnap Dome: Stainless SteelPrinted Circuit Boards: Nema Grade FR4,Double Clad with Copper, Plated with Goldover NickelInfrared Light Emitting Diode Chips:Gallium Aluminum ArsenideSilicon Phototransistor Chips: Gold andAluminum AlloysResistor: Metal Oxide on Ceramic SubstrateSolder Pins: Brass, Plated with TinCode Rotor: Acetal (Delrin 100)Code Housing: Polyamide Polymer (Nylon6/10 Alloy)Backplate Strain Relief: Hiloy-610Cable: Copper Standard with Topcoat inPVC Insulation (Cabled Versions Only)Connector: PA4.6 with Tin Plated CopperAlloy (Cable/Connector Versions)Label: TT406 Thermal Transfer Cast FilmSolder: Sn/Ag/Cu, Lead Free, No CleanMounting Hex Nut: Tin/Zinc Over 1/2 HardBrassLockwasher: 8-18 Stainless Steel,Passivate FinishPin Header: Hi-Temp Glass Filled Thermo-plastic UL94V-0, Phosphor Bronze (PinnedVersions Only)


62MXX-XX-040X

SeriesAngle of Throw: 15 = 150 for code change and 24 detent positions

Rotational Torque: H=High Torque (1.70 in-oz), M=Medium Torque (1.25 in-oz),L=Low Torque (0.75 in-oz)Pushbutton Option: 0=Non-Pushbutton, 2 = 200 grams, 3 = 300 grams, 4 =510 grams

Cable Termination: 040 = 4.0in. Cable is terminated with Amp Connector P/N 215083-6. See AmpMateability Guide for mating connector details.*Eliminate cable length if ordering pins (Ex: 62M22-42-PH)

Termination: CH =.100 Cable with connector, SH = Cable with Stripped-End, PH = Pin Header

OUTPUTA

OUTPUTB

HIGH

LOW

HIGH

LOW

POSITION NUMBER

1 2 3 4 5 6

Clockwise Rotation

Position1

2

3

4

•• •

•

Output A Output B

• Indicates logic high; blank indicates logiclow. Code repeats every 4 positions.

Encoder27


Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs

Optical Encoders

SERIES 62BPush-Pull, High Torque

FEATURES• Multiple Switching Functions Available

in One Compact Device• Push and Pull Travel Options• Pull Shaft Resists Accidental

Actuation• High Rotational Torque for Positive

Detent Feel and Superior TactileFeedback

• Long Life, High Reliability• CMOS, HCMOS, and TTL Compatible


Pinned Version

SWITCH SCHEMATIC, WAVEFORM, AND TRUTH TABLE

1.183±.015(30,05±0,38)

.335(8,51)

4.000±.20

CONNECTOR ISAMP P/N 215083-8OR EQUIVALENT

ØØ

# POS

.687(17,45) .250.001)

(6,350,02)


.250.004(6,350,1)

.100(2,54)

XXX.20SEE ORDERING INFO

11.255.625

DIM "A"

1632

SHAFT-DETENT POSITION CHART

*SHAFT SHOWN IN A DETENT POSITION

1.080.015(27,430,38)

1.045(26,54)

.395.015(10,030,38)

.110(2,79)

*TOLERANCES.010 U.O.S.

.707(17,96)

.312(7,92)

.350(8,89)

(.050 SPC X 7)

.219.004(5,560,1)

.430(10,92)

DIM "A"SEE CHART

.400(10,16)

.500(12,7)

Connector Version

Stripped Version

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

R*

R

*EXTERNAL 2.2k PULL-UP RESISTANCE REQUIRED FOR OPERATION.

PUSHBUTTON

GROUND

PUSHBUTTON

PULLBUTTON

PULLBUTTON

OUTPUT B

OUTPUT A

Encoder28

• Pin, Cable and Connector with Cable Termination Options• Custom Modifications Available

APPLICATIONS• Use for Menu Scrolling or• Function Selection• Avionics• Industrial• Medical

Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs


Optical Encoders

SeriesAngle of Throw: 22 = 22.50 For Code Change and 16 Detent Positions.11 = 11.250 For Code Change and 32 Detent Positions.Push/Pull-Button Travel: S = Standard Travel (.030" Both Directions). L = Long Travel (.050" Both Directions)Push/Pull Option: P = Pull-Button Only. PP = Push and Pull-ButtonTermination: C = .050" Pitch Ribbon Cable with Connector

S = .050" Pitch Ribbon Cable with Stripped EndP = .050" Pitch Pin Header

Cable Termination: 040 = 4.0in. Cable is terminated with Amp Connector P/N 215083-6.See Amp Mateability Guide for mating connector details.*Eliminate cable length if ordering pins (Ex: 62B22-SP-P)

62BXX-XXX-040X

SPECIFICATIONSEnvironmental SpecificationsOperating Temperature Range: -400 C to 850

CStorage Temperature Range: -550 C to 1000 CHumidity: 96 hours at 90-95% humidityat 400 CMechanical Vibration: Harmonic motionwith amplitude of 15 g, within a variedfrequency of 10 to 2000 HzMechanical Shock:Test 1: 100 g for 6 ms half-sine wave with avelocity change of 12.3 ft/secTest 2: 100 g for 6 ms sawtooth wave with avelocity change of 9.7 ft/sec

Rotary Electrical andMechanical SpecificationsOperating Voltage: 5.00±.25 VdcSupply Current: 30 mA maximum at 5 VdcOutput: Open collector phototransistor,external pull-up resistors are requiredOutput Code: Two-bit quadrature, channel Aleads channel B by 900 electrically duringclockwise rotation of the shaftLogic Output Characteristics:Logic high signal shall be no lessthan 3.0 VdcLogic low signal shall be no greaterthan 1.0 VdcMinimum Sink Current: 2.0 mAPower Consumption: 150 mW maximumMechanical Life: 1 million rotational cycles ofoperation. One cycle is a rotation through allpositions and a full returnAverage Rotational Torque: 6.0±1.5 in-ozinitially. Torque shall be within 50% of initialvalue throughout lifeMounting Torque: 15 in-oz maximum

Shaft Push-Out Force: 45 lbs minimumShaft Pull-Out Force: 20 lbs minimumTerminal Strength: 15 lbs minimumterminal pull-out force for cable or headerterminationSolderability: 95% free of pin holes andvoids

Pull-Button/Push-Button Electricaland Mechanical SpecificationsRating: 10 mA at 5 VdcContact Resistance: <10 ohmsLife: 3 million actuations minimumContact Bounce: <4 ms make,<10 msbreakActuation Force: 1700±450 g for both pushand pull-buttonShaft Travel: .030±.010 standard travel..050±.010 long travel

Materials and FinishesBushing: Zinc Diecast, Cadmium Plated perQQP-416, Class II, Type IIShaft: AluminumDetent Cover: Powered Metal perSS-316N1-25Through Bolts: 305 Stainless SteelThrough Bolts Nuts: 305 Stainless SteelShaft Travel Springs: Carbon Steel,Oil Dip FinishDetent Ball: Stainless SteelDetent Spring: Tinned Music WireSpacer/Push Dome Retainer: Ryton R-4Push Actuator: Zytel 70G33LSnap Dome: Stainless SteelPrinted Circuit Boards: Nema Grade FR4,Double Clad with Copper, Plated with Goldover Nickel

Infrared Light Emitting Diode Chips:Gallium Aluminum ArsenideSilicon Phototransistor Chips: Gold andAluminum AlloysResistor: Metal Oxide on Ceramic SubstrateSolder Pins: Brass, Plated with TinCode Rotor: Delrin 100Code Housing: Hiloy-610Pull Dome Retainer: Ryton R-4Pull Actuator: Polyurethane, Isoplast 101LGF40 BlkCover: Ryton R-4Cable: Copper Standard with Topcoat inPVC Insulation (Cabled Versions Only)Connector: PA4.6 with Tin over NickelPlated Phosphor Bronze (Cable/ConnectorVersions)Label: TT406 Thermal Transfer Cast FilmSolder: Sn/Ag/Cu, lead-free, no cleanLubricating Grease: Nye Nyogel 774LMounting Hex Nut: Tin/Zinc Over 1/2 HardBrassLockwasher: 8-18 Stainless Steel,Passivate FinishPin Header: Hi-Temp Glass Filled Thermo-plastic UL94V-0, Phosphor Bronze (PinnedVersions Only)


logic low.

Code repeats every 4 positions.


1

2

3

4

•• •

•

WAVEFORM AND TRUTH TABLE Standard Quadrature 2-Bit Code

654321POSITION NUMBER

OUTPUT "B"

OUTPUT "A"

HIGH

HIGH

LOW

LOW


Encoder29


Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs

Optical Encoders

SERIES 62TThumbwheel


Encoder30

FEATURES• Sealed against dust and particles• Custom bezels that will blend with HMI grips

and control panels• Optional integrated pushbutton with over 3

million actuations• MIL-STD-202 and MIL-STD-810F Compliant

• Standard panel seal

APPLICATIONS• Scroll & select equipment in industrial

and non-automotive transportationapplications

Ø

C-BORE.265

X2

.200 ± .0055,0 ][

Ø

THRU HOLEX2

.128 ± .0023,25 ][

4.00 ±.25

.83021,08 ][

1.500 ± .00538,1][

1.75844,65 ][

.78019,81][

.3278,31][

.114 ±.0152,9 ][

.64016,26 ][

R.2506,35 ][

.97024,64 ][

.0200,51 ][

.65016,51 ][

.51513,08 ][

.48512,32 ][

OFWHEEL

.1253,18 ][

.0200,51[ ]

Ø.95024,13][

CLOCKWISE ROTATION

AMP CONNECTORPN 7-215083-6

Unless otherwise specified, standard tolerances are:Linear ± .025Diameter ± .010Angle ± 2.0 0

Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs


Optical Encoders

SPECIFICATIONSEnvironmental SpecificationsMIL-STD-810F QualifiedOperating Temperature Range: -400 C to 850 CStorage Temperature Range: -550 C to 1000 CHumidity: 96 hours at 90-95% humidityat 400 CMechanical Vibration: Harmonic motionwith amplitude of 15g, within a variedfrequency of 10 to 2000 HzMechanical Shock:Test 1: 100g for 6 ms half-sine wave with avelocity change of 12.3 ft/secTest 2: 100g for 6 ms sawtooth wave with avelocity change of 9.7 ft/sec

Rotary and Mechanical SpecificationsOperating Voltage: 5.00±0.25 VdcSupply Current: 25mA Max.Output: Open collector phototransistor,external pull up resistors are requiredOutput Code: Two-bit quadrature, channel aleads channel B by 90° electrically duringclockwise rotation of the thumbwheelLogic high shall be no less than 3.8 VdcLogic low shall be no greater than 0.8 VdcPower Consumption: 125 mW Max.Mechanical Life: 1,000,000 cycles ofoperation for Low and Non-Rotational

Rotational Torque. 1 cycle is a rotationthrough all positions and a full return.Average Rotational Torque:M: 2.2±.75 in-oz, L: 1.2±0.5 in-oz, N: <0.50in-oz. Initially torque shall be within 75% ofinitial value throughout life.

Pushbutton Electrical andMechanical SpecificationsRating: 10mA @ 5 VdcContact Resistance: <10WLife: 3 million actuations minimumContact Bounce: <4 ms make, <10msbreakActuation Force: N – None, 7–700g,10 – 1000g.Thumbwheel Travel: .060 ± .015 inMaterials and FinishesFace Plate: PlasticHousing: Nylon 6/6Side Plate: Reinforced thermoplasticWiper: Silicone rubber with adhesiveGasket: Silicone rubber with adhesiveWheel: PlasticShaft: AluminumSlide Springs: Music wireDetent Spring: Music wire

Detent Balls: Nickel plated stainless steelPC Boards: NEMA grade FR4. Double cladwith copper platedPlated with gold over nickelPushbutton board is tin plating over copperLED: Gallium Aluminum ArsenidePhototransistor: Gold and AluminumAlloysCode Section Housing: Reinforced plasticDetent Housing: ThermoplasticCode Rotor: Delrin 100 plasticDome: Stainless steelDome retainer: Delrin 100 plasticSlide Rods: Stainless steelSplining Key: Stainless steelActuator: Reinforced thermoplasticScrews: Aluminum or StainlessWiper Plate: CopperSolder: 63/67 tin-lead, no clean - lowresidue flux


Available from your local Grayhill Component Distributor. For pricing an discounts, contact a local Sales Office, an authorized local Distributor, or Grayhill.

Encoder31

90˚± 45˚1

2

3

4

5

6

R*

R*

N.O., MOMENTARYPUSHBUTTON SWITCH

+5Vdc

OUTPUT "A"

OUTPUT "B"

GROUND

PUSHBUTTON

PUSHBUTTON

R* - TWO 2.2K RESISTORS REQUIRED FOR OPERATION.


#1

#2

#3

#4

Indicates logic high; blank indicates logic low. Code repeats every 4 positions.

POS#1

POS#2

POS#3

POS#4

POS#5

POS#6

OUTPUT A

HIGH (3.8-5V)

LOW (0-.8V)

OUTPUT B

HIGH (3.8-5V)

LOW (0-.8V)

Torque. 500,000 cycles of operation forMedium

62T22-XX-040C

Series

Pushbutton Option: 0=No Pushbutton, 7=700 grams, 10=1000 grams

Termination: C = .050 Center ribbon Cable with connectorCable Termination: 040=4.0 inches. Cable is terminated with Amp Connector P/N 7-215083-6.See Amp Mateability Guide for Mating Connector details.

Rotational Torque: N = Non-Detent, L=Low Torque, M=Medium Torque

Angle of Throw: 22 = 22.5° for code change and 16 detent positions


Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs

Optical Encoders

Encoder32

SERIES 61LFull Quadrature Cycle Per Detent



FEATURES• .650 sq. inch package size• Optically coupled for 1 million

rotational cycles• Optional integrated pushbutton• Detented and non-detented

versions available• Available in 24 positions

APPLICATIONS• Medical Devices• Test and Measurement

Equipment• Other Scroll and Select

Applications

.250[6,35].360

[9,14]

.735 ±.015[18,67]

.518 ±.015[13,16 ]

∅.250 ±.002[6,35]

4.00 ± .20

.219 ±.003[5,56]

.590 ±.015[14,99 ]

45˚ X .025[0,64]

3/8 UNEF-2ATHREAD

AMP CONNECTOR7-215083-6

TERMINAL #1

.325[8,26] .733

[18,62]

.325[8,26]

SQUARE

.650[16,51]

.328 ±.005[8,33].164

[4,17].066±.002[1,68±0,05]

.152±.002[3,86]

Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs


Optical Encoders

Encoder33

CIRCUITRY, WAVEFORM AND TRUTH TABLE

Indicates logic high; blank indicates logic low.Code repeats every four cycles.

DETENT 2DETENT 1

RANGE OF DETENT

REST POSITION

SPECIFICATIONSEnvironmental SpecificationsOperating Temperature Range: -400 C to 850 CStorage Temperature Range: -550 C to 1000 CHumidity: 96 hours at 90-95% humidityat 400 CMechanical Vibration: Harmonic motion withamplitude of 15g, within a varied frequency of10 to 2000 HzMechanical Shock:Test 1: 100g for 6 ms half-sine wave with avelocity change of 12.3 ft/secTest 2: 100g for 6 ms sawtooth wave with avelocity change of 9.7 ft/sec

Rotary Electrical andMechanical SpecificationsOperating Voltage: 5.00±.25VdcSupply Current: 30 mA maximum at 5Vdc

Output Code: Two-bit quadrature, channel Aleads channel B by 900 electrically duringclockwise rotation of the shaft.Logic Output Characteristics:Logic high signal shall be no lessthan 3.8 VdcLogic low signal shall be no greaterthan 0.8 VdcMinimum Sink Current: 2.0 mAPower Consumption: 150 mW maximumMechanical Life: 1 million cycles of operationfor Medium, Low and Non-Detent. 1/2 millioncycles of operation for High. One cycle is arotation through all positions and a full return.

Average Rotational Torque: H= 6.0 ± 2.6 in-oz, M= 2.7 ± 1.8 in-oz, L= 1.4 ± 0.8 in-oz, N=<0.50 in-oz. Torque shall be within 50% ofinital value throughout life.Mounting Torque: 15 in-oz maximumShaft Push-Out Force: 45 lbs minimumShaft Pull-Out Force: 45 lbs minimumTerminal Strength: 15 lbs minimum terminalpull-out force for cable or header terminationSolderability: 95% free of pinholes andvoids

Pushbutton Electrical andMechanical SpecificationsRating: 50 mA at 12 VdcContact Resistance: <10ΩLife: 1/2 million actuations minimumContact Bounce: <4 ms make, <10 ms breakActuation Force:510 ±150 gramsShaft Travel: .025 ± .015 inch

Materials and FinishesBushing: ZincShaft: AluminumRetaining Ring: Stainless SteelDetent Spring: Music WireDetent Ball: High Carbon Chrome, NickelfinishCode Housing: Polyamide Polymer, Hiloy610Aperture: Stainless Steel

Detent: Polyamide Polymer, Hiloy 610Rotor Hub: Polyamide Polymer, Hiloy 610Code Rotor: Stainless SteelPrinted Circuit Boards: Nema Grade FR4,Double Clad with Copper, Plated with Gold overNickelInfrared Light Emitting Diode Chips:Gallium Aluminum ArsenideSilicon Phototransistor Chips: Gold andAluminum AlloysResistor: Metal Oxide on Ceramic SubstrateSolder Pins: Brass, Plated with TinTact Switch: Cover - Stainless Steel, contactDisc - Phosphor Bronze with silver cladding,terminal - brass with silver cladding, base -UL94V-0 Nylon 19: High TempBack Plate: Stainless SteelSpacer: Nomex Type 410Cable: Copper Standard with Topcoat in PVCInsulationConnector: Glass filled Polyester, Tin/NickelPhosphor BronzeLabel: TT406 Thermal Transfer Cast FilmSolder: 96.5% tin / 3% silver / 0.5% copper,no cleanLubricating Grease: NYE Nyogel 774LStuds: Stainless SteelLockwasher: Stainless SteelHex Nuts: Stainless Steel

61L515 -XX-040c

SeriesOperating Voltage: 5 = 5 Volts

Rotational Torque: N = Non-Detent, H=High Torque, M=Medium Torque, L=Low Torque

Pushbutton Option: 0=Non-Pushbutton, 5=510 grams

Termination: C = .050 Center ribbon Cable with connector

Cable Termination: 040=4.0 inches. Cable is terminated with Amp Connector P/N7-215083-6.See Amp Mateability Guide for Mating Connector details.

Angle of Throw: 15 = 15° for complete quadrature cycle change and 24 detent positions



Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs

Optical Encoders

Encoder34

SERIES 62AGPrice Competitive Solution



FEATURES• Long Lasting (1 million cycles)• Optional pushbutton• Available in 16 and 32 Detent Positions• 4 inch cable / connector assembly

APPLICATIONS• Automotive audio, navigation & driver information systems• Medical Equipment• Test & Measurement Equipment• Audio & Video Equipment

.3127,92[ ]

.687[ 17,45 ]

.250[6,35]

.580[14,73]

.500[12,70]

.066 ±.002[1,68 ]

.152 ±.002[3,86 ]

Ø

SHAFT

.249 ±.0026,32 ][ .219 ±.004

5,56 ][

.51213,00[ ].532 ±.015

13,51 ][ 4.000 ± .2000[101,60]

CONNECTOR IS AMPP/N 7-215083-6OR EQUIVALENT

3/8-32 UNEF-2A THREADTHREADS TO BE WITHIN.030 [0,76] OF SHOULDER

NOTE: GRAYHILL ALLOWS MULTIPLE ORIENTATIONS FOR THE GRAYHILL TEXT ON THE BACKPLATE.

Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs


Optical Encoders

Encoder35



6

5

4

3

2

1

POWER (+5.0 V)

OUTPUT A

OUTPUT B

GROUND

PUSHBUTTON

PUSHBUTTON

*EXTERNAL 10k PULL-UP RESISTORS REQUIRED FOR OPERATION

HIGH

LOW

HIGH

LOW

OUTPUT A

OUTPUT B

POS.#1

POS.#2

POS.#3

POS.#4

POS.#5

POS.#6


#1

#2

#3

#4

INDICATES LOGIC HIGH; BLANK INDICATES LOGIC LOW.CODE REPEATS EVERY FOUR POSITIONS.

*CLOCKWISE SHAFT ROTATION

R*

R*

SPECIFICATIONSEnvironmental SpecificationsOperating Temperature Range: -40°C to85°CStorage Temperature: -43°C to 38°CHumidity: 96 Hours at 90-95% humidity at40°CMechanical Vibration: Harmonic motionwith amplitude of 15g within a variedfrequency of 10 to 2000 Hz for 12 hoursMechanical ShockTest 1: 100g for 6 ms half-sine wave with avelocity change of 12.3 ft/s.Test 2: 100g for 6 ms sawtooth wave with avelocity change of 9.7 ft/s.Rotary Electrical and MechanicalSpecificationsOperating Voltage: 5.00±0.25 VdcSupply Current: 30 mA maximum at 5 Vdc.Logic Output Characteristics:Logic high shall be no less than 3.0 VdcLogiclow shall be no greater than 1.0 VdcMinimum sink current: 0.5 mA for 5 Vdc.(Preliminary)Power Consumtpion: 150 mW maximumfor 5 VdcOutput: Open Collector PhototransistorOptical Rise Time: 30ms maximum.Optical Fall Time: 30ms maximum.Average Rotational Torque:2.0±1 4 in-oz before life. 50% of initialvalue after 1 million cycles.

Mechanical Life: 1,000,000 cycles ofoperation. 1 cycle is a rotation through allpositions and a full return.Mounting Torque: 15in-lbs. maximumShaft Pushout Force: 45 lbs. minimumTerminal Strength: 15 lbs. Cable pull outforce minimumSolderability: 95% free of pin holes andvoidsMaximum rotational speed: 100 rpm.

Pushbutton Electrical andMechanical SpecificationsRating: 10 mA @ 5 VdcContact Resistance: <10 W (Compatiblewith CMOS or TTL)Life: 1 million actuations minimumContact Bounce: <4 ms make, <10msbreakActuation Force: 510±150 gramsShaft Travel: .017 ± .008 INCHMaterials and FinishesBushing: Zamak 2Shaft: Zamak 2Detent Rotor: Reinforced Nylon Zytel70G33L UL 94Detent Spring: 303 Stainless SteelHousing, Upper: Nylon 6/6 25% glassreinforced. Zytec FR-50

Light Pipe: Lexan, GECode Rotor: Delrin 100Housing, Lower: Nylon 6/6 25% glassreinforced. Zytec FR-50Pushbutton Actuator: Reinforced nylon.Zytel 70G33L. UL 94Pushbutton Dome: Stainless SteelPrinted Circuit Board: NEMA Grade FR4,Double clad with copper, Plated with goldover nickelInfrared Emitting Diode: Gallium ArsenidePhototransistor Diode: NPN SiliconResistor: Metal oxide on ceramic substrateSpacer: Pet plasticBackplate: Stainless SteelLabel: TT406 thermal transfer cast film.Solder: 96.5% tin / 3% silver / 0.5% copper.No clean.Hex Nut: Brass, Plated with nickelLockwasher: Stainless steelCable: Copper Stranded with topcoat in PVCinsulationConnector (.050 center): PA4.6 with tin/nickel plated phosphor bronze.

62AGXX-XX-040C

Series

Pushbutton Option: 01=No Pushbutton, 02=With Pushbutton

Angle of Throw: 22 = 22.5° for code change and 16 detent positions11 = 11.25° for code change and 32 detent positions

Termination: C = .050 Center ribbon Cable with connectorCable Termination: 040=4.0 inches.Cable is terminated with Amp Connector P/N215083-6.See Amp Mateability Guide for Mating Connector for details.


Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs

Optical Encoders

.650(16,51)

.265±.020(6,73)

.210±.020(5,33)

.408(10,36)

HEADER IS SAMTEC P/NMTMS-108-58-T-S-485OR EQUIVALENT

.380±.003(9,65±0,07)

Ø1.000±.015(25,4±0,38)

Ø.810(20,57)

.615±.003(15,62 ±0,07)

.250(6,35)

Ø.050±.003(1,27±0,07)LOCATING PIN

.040 ± .003(1,02 ± 0,07) CONNECTOR IS

AMP P/N 0-215083-8OR EQUIVALENT

Ø.250±.002(6,35±0,05)

M17X1 THREAD .598 ± .015(15,19 ± 0 ,38)

.205 ± .001(5,21 ± 0 ,02)

.219 ± .003(5,56 ± 0 ,07)

.580 ± .015(14,73 ± 0 ,38)

.708 ± .015(17,98 ± 0 ,38)

PIVOT POINT

4.000 ± .2004.000 ± (5,08)

SERIES 60AJoystick

FEATURES• Optical Encoder, Pushbutton, and

Joystick in One Shaft• Long Life, High Reliability• Compatible with CMOS, HCMOS,

and TTL Logic• Choices of Cable Length and

Termination• Customized Solutions Available


Pin Version

CIRCUITRY AND JOYSTICK OPERATION Standard Quadrature 2-Bit Code


Information Systems• Medical Equipment Control• Radio Control• Robotics• Commercial Appliances

X DIRECTIONJOYSTICK

Y DIRECTIONJOYSTICK

POWER +5.0V

2

3

4

6

5

*EXTERNAL PULL-UP RESISTORS REQUIRED FOR OPERATION (2.2k Ω).

R*

R*

GROUND

SWITCH PUSHBUTTON

NORMALLY OPEN

OUTPUT B

OUTPUT A

8

7

1

* DEFINED BY LOCATING PIN ON TOP OF HOUSING

X LOW

Y LOW

X HIGH

Y HIGH*

2.5V

Encoder36


Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs


Optical Encoders

SeriesAngle of Throw: Detent: 18 = 18° or 20 positions; Non-detent: 08 = 18° or 20 positions;

Non-Turn: 00 = Joystick and Pushbutton onlyJoystick Contacts: 2 = 2 Discrete Contacts

4 = 4 Discrete Contacts60A18-4-040S 8 = 4 Contacts in 8 possible directions

Termination: S = Stripped cable; .050" centers; C = Connector; .050" centers; P = Pin; .050" centersCable Termination: 040 = 4.0in. Cable is terminated with Amp Connector P/N 215083-6.

See Amp Mateability Guide for mating connector details.*Eliminate cable length if ordering pins (Ex: 60A18-4-P)

SPECIFICATIONSRotary Electrical and MechanicalRatingsOperating Voltage: 5.00 ± 0.25 VdcSupply Current: 20 mA maximum at 5 VdcOutput: Open collector phototransistor.External pull up resistors are requiredOutput Code: 2-Bit quadrature, channel Aleads channel B by 90° electrically duringclockwise rotation of the shaftLogic Output Characteristics:High: No less than 3.5 VdcLow: No greater than 1.0 VdcMinimum Sink Current: 2.0 mAPower Consumption: 100 mW maximumMechanical Life: 1 million rotational cyclesof operation (1 cycle is a rotation through allpositions and a full return)Average Rotational Torque: 2.0 ± 1.0 in-oz initially, torque shall be within 50% ofinitial value throughout lifeMounting Torque: 15 in-lbs. maximumShaft Push-Out Force: 45 lbs minimumShaft Pull-Out Force: 45 lbs minimumTerminal Strength: 15 lbs terminal pull-outforce minimum for cabled and headerterminationSolderability: 95% free of pin holes and voids

Pushbutton Electrical andMechanical RatingsRating: 10 mA at 5 Vdc resistiveContact Resistance: less than 10 ohmsLife: 1 million actuations minimumContact Bounce: < 4 mS make, 10 mSbreakActuation Force: 400 ± 150 grams forceShaft Travel: 0.020 ± 0.010 inches

Joystick Electrical and MechanicalRatingsSupply Current: 5 mA maximumOutput Code: 2-BitLogic Output Characteristics:Neutral: 2.5 ± 0.5 VdcHigh: > 4.5 VdcLow: < 0.5 VdcAngle of Throw: 8° ± 2° in all directionsLife: 500,000 actuations in each direction

Environmental RatingsOperating Temperature Range: -40°C to85°CStorage Temperature Range: -55°C to100°CRelative Humidity: 96 hours at 90-85%humidity at 40°CVibration: Harmonic motion with amplitudeof 15g, within a varied 10 to 2000 Hzfrequency for 12 hoursMechanical Shock:Test 1: 100g for 6ms half-sine wave with avelocity change of 12.3 ft/sTest 2: 100g for 6ms sawtooth wave with avelocity change of 9.7 ft/s

Materials and FinishesAssembly Studs: 305 Stainless steelDetent Housing: Polyamide polymer (nylon6/10 alloy)Printed Circuit Boards: Glass cloth epoxydouble clad with copper gold over nickelplatedInfrared Emitting Diode Chips: Galliumaluminum arsenideSilicon Phototransistor Chips: Gold andaluminum alloys



Resistors: Metal oxide on ceramic substrateSolder Pins: Brass, Plated with tinShaft: Polyamide polymer (nylon 6/10 alloy)with stainless steel insertDetent Balls: Carbon steel plated with nickelDetent Springs: Music wire plated with tinCode Rotor: 33% Glass reinforced nylon 66Pushbutton Dome: Stainless steelPushbutton Dome Retainer: PolycarbonateJoystick Housing: Polyamide polymer(nylon 6/10 alloy)Joystick Contact: Stainless steel, siliconerubber, brass with silver cladding, high-tempthermoplastic, phosphor bronze with silvercladdingCable: Copper stranded with plating in PVCinsulationConnector: PA 4.6 with tin over nickel platedphosphor bronzeLockwashers: Stainless steel with passivatefinishHex Nuts: 303 Stainless steelLabel: TT406 Thermal transfer cast filmSolder: Sn/Ag/Cu, Lead-Free, No CleanMounting Nut: PolyurethaneLubricating Grease: Nye nyogel 774L

OPTIONSContact Grayhill for custom terminations,rotational torque, number of positions, shaftconfigurations, and resolutions. Control knobsare also available.


logic low. Code repeats every 4 positions.


1

2

3

4

•• •

•


654321POSITION NUMBER

OUTPUT "B"

OUTPUT "A"

HIGH

HIGH

LOW

LOW

Encoder37


Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs

Optical Encoders

SERIES 60CMulti-Function Joystick

FEATURES• Three-in-One Optical Encoder,

Pushbutton, and Joystick• Compact Packaging• Choices of Cable Length and

Termination• Customized Solutions Available


APPLICATIONS• Automotive Navigation &

Infotainment Equipment• Avionics• Medical Equipment

Encoder38


.661 ± .01616,79 ±0,40[ ]

.0802,03[ ]

.1203,05[ ]

.375 ±.0089,53 ±0,20[ ]

.2506,35[ ] .240

6,10[ ].0751,91[ ]

Ø

.200[5,08]

3 PLACES FOR MOUNTING

.0691,75[ ]

R .1002,54[ ]

.431±.00910,95 ±0,22[ ]

3.984±.200[25±5,08]

1.15029,21[ ]Ø.585

14,86[ ]

.0120,30[ ]

Ø.74919,02[ ]

Ø.84921,56[ ]

35.0°

55.0°45.0°

.0671,70[ ]

1.00025,40[ ]

1.00025,40[ ]

Ø

.300[7,62]3 PLACES FOR MOUNTING

.0691,75[ ].233

5,92[ ]

.40410,25[ ] .429

10,90[ ]

30.0°

30.0°

67.0°

Ø

2 PLACES

.079 ±.0022,01±0,05[ ]

.45311,51[ ]

Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs


Optical Encoders


Encoder39

POSITION BIT 1 BIT 2 BIT 3 BIT 4123 4 5

HIGH

LOW

HIGH

LOW

OUTPUT A

OUTPUT B

POS.#1

POS.#2

POS.#3

POS.#4

POS.#5

POS.#6


#1

#2

#3

#4

CODE REPEATS EVERY FOUR POSITIONS.

OUTPUT FOR ROTARY ENCODER OPERATIONOUTPUT FOR JOYSTICK OPERATION

INDICATES LOGIC HIGH

CODE REPEATS EVERY FOUR POSITIONS.

INDICATES LOGIC HIGH

CIRCUITRY AND JOYSTICK OPERATION Standard Quadrature 2-Bit Code

6

5

4

3

2

1

JOYSTICK BIT 1

GROUND

PUSH BUTTON

200

7

8

ENCODER OUTPUT A 9

POWER+5.0 v 10

P

10k

SCHM

ITT

TRIG

GER

10k

10k

10k

10k

10k 68

PUSH BUTTON

1

4

3

25

ENCODER OUTPUT B

JOYSTICK BIT 2

JOYSTICK BIT 4

JOYSTICK BIT 3

MOUNTING PANELTO HAVE Ø

3 PLACES

.1102,79[ ] MOUNTING PANEL

TO HAVE Ø .88922,58[ ]

.80120,35[ ]

.0701,78[ ]

.80120,35[ ] .070

1,78[ ]

.3719,43[ ]

.3719,43[ ]

FRONT MOUNTING

MOUNTING PANELTO HAVE Ø

5 PLACES

.1102,79[ ]

.2335,91[ ]

.63516,13[ ]

.0511,29[ ].050

1,28[ ].40310,23[ ]

.63516,13[ ]

.83121,10[ ]

REAR MOUNTING

FRONT AND REAR MOUNTING


Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs

Optical Encoders

SeriesAngle of Throw: 22 = 22.5° or 16positionsRotation Torque: L = Low torque, M = Medium torque, H= High torquePushbutton: 3= 300 gramsJoystick: 4 = Four directions

60C22-L3-4-040S

Termination: S = Stripped cable; .050" centers; C = Connector; .050" centers;Cable Termination: 040 = 4.0in. Cable is terminated with Amp Connector P/N 215083-6.



SPECIFICATIONSRotary Electrical and MechanicalRatingsOperating Voltage: 5.00 ± 0.25 VdcSupply Current: 35mA at TYP at 5 VdcOutput: Direct output from convertingSchmidt triggerOutput Code: 2-Bit quadrature, channel Aleads channel B by 90° electrically duringclockwise rotation of the shaftLogic Output Characteristics:High: No less than 3.5 VdcLow: No greater than 1.0 VdcMinimum Sink Current: 2.0 mAPower Consumption: XXX mW maximumMechanical Life: 500 thousand rotationalcycles of operation (1 cycle is a rotationthrough all positions and a full return)Average Rotational Torque: 2.0 ± 1.0 in-oz initially, torque shall be within 50% ofinitial value throughout lifeMounting Torque: 15 in-lbs. maximumShaft Push-Out Force: 20 lbs minimumShaft Pull-Out Force: 20 lbs minimumTerminal Strength: 15 lbs terminal pull-outforce minimum for cabled and headerterminationSolderability: 95% free of pin holes and voids

Pushbutton Electrical andMechanical RatingsRating: 10 mA at 5 Vdc resistiveContact Resistance: less than 10 ohmsLife: 500 thousand actuations minimumContact Bounce: < 4 mS make, 10 mS breakActuation Force: 600 ± 150 grams forceShaft Travel: 0.020 ± 0.010 inches

Joystick and Mechanical RatingsSupply Current: 35mA at TYP at 5 VdcOutput Code:2-Bit quadrature, channel Aleads channel B by 90° electrically duringclockwise rotation of the shaftLogic Output Characteristics:Neutral: 2.5 ± 0.5 VdcHigh: > 4.5 VdcLow: < 0.5 VdcAngle of Throw: 7° ± 2° in all directionsLife: 500 thousand actuations in eachdirection

Environmental RatingsOperating Temperature Range: -40°C to85°CStorage Temperature Range: -55°C to100°CRelative Humidity: 96 hours at 90-95%humidity at 40°CVibration: Harmonic motion with amplitude of15g, within a varied 10 to 2000 Hz frequencyfor 12 hoursMechanical Shock:Test 1: 100g for 6ms half-sine wave with avelocity change of 12.3 ft/sTest 2: 100g for 6ms sawtooth wave with avelocity change of 9.7 ft/sThermocycle: 4 hours cycling between-40°C to 80°C

Materials and FinishesBushing: ThermoplasticUpper Housing: ThermoplasticInfrared Emitting Diode Chips: Galliumaluminum arsenideBackplate: ThermplasticLightpipe, Joystick: Thermoplastic

Lightpipe, 16 pos: ThermoplasticCentering Profile: ThermoplasticShaft Inner: AluminumBarbed Rivet: Stainless StealSilicon Phototransistor Chips: PlanarResistors: Carbon filmSolder Pins: Stainless steelShaft Outer: ThermoplasticSlider Plate: ThermoplasticDetent Balls: Carbon steel 100 with nickelfinishCentering Balls: Carbon steel 100 with nickelfinishDetent Springs: Music wire plated with tinCentering Springs: Music wire plated with tinSchmidt Trigger: RoHS Compliant TSSOP,14 pinPushbutton Rocker: ThermoplasticPushbutton Actuator: ThermoplasticPushbutton Dome: Stainless steelLabel: TT406 Thermal transfer cast filmSolder: 95.5% Sn/ 4% Ag/ 0.5% Cu

OPTIONSContact Grayhill for custom terminations,rotational torque, number of positions, shaftconfigurations, and resolutions. Control knobsare also available.

Encoder40

Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs


Optical Encoders

SERIES 61ACustom, Absolute

FEATURES• Absolute Position Sensing• 3, 4, or 5-Bit Custom Output Coding• 8 to 32 Positions• Fixed Stops Only• Angles of Throw to 45° (Design

Specifications Will Dictate the Angleof Throw)


Encoder41

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, DIMENSION TOLERANCES ARE AS FOLLOWS: LINEAR ±.010 (0,25), DIAMETERS ±.010 (0,25), ANGULAR ±5

.875±.005 SQUARE

.562 3 PLACES

.320±.005 (BUSHING FLATS)

.218±.005

.688 3 PLACES

.331

.250

.780±.025

.248/.250

.093

6.000±.300

3/8-32 UNEF 2A THREAD

MOUNTING SURFACE

CONNECTOR IS MOLEX P/N 14-56-2074


Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs

Optical Encoders

CIRCUITRY

SPECIFICATIONSRatingsOperating Voltage: 5 ±.25V DCSupply Current: 85 mA maximum at 5V DCLife: 1 million cycles of operation; 1 cycle isrotation through all positions and a full returnRotational Torque: 1.5 in-oz (Initial)Output High: 3.8V minimum for CMOS &HCMOS; 2.7V minimum for TTLOutput Low: 0.8V maximumShaft Push Out Force: 25 lbs.Mounting Torque: 10 in-lb maximumLoad Current: 5 mA maximum per channelLogic Rise and Fall Times: 30 mSec typical

TRUTH TABLE

+5 VOLTS

BIT 0

BIT 1

BIT 2

BIT 3

BIT 4

GROUND 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

R*

R*

R*

R*

R*

* EXTERNAL PULL-UP RESISTORS REQUIRED FOR OPERATION (4.7k)

4 BIT, 16 POSITION

Position

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

B1 B2 B3 B4

INDICATES LOGIC HIGHBLANK INDICATES LOGIC LOW

3 BIT, 8 POSITION

Position

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

B2 B3 B4


Position

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

B0 B1 B2 B3 B4

5 BIT, 32 AND 24 POSITION


SeriesStyle: A = unsealedNumber of positions: 32 = 32 positions with 10" of throw

16 = 16 positions with 18" of throw 8 = 8 positions with 26" of throw

61A32-060Termination: Cable Termination: 060=6.0 inches.Cable is terminated with Molex connector P/N 14-56-2074.


Available from your local Grayhill Component Distributor. For prices and discounts, contact a local Sales Office, an authorized local Distributor, or Grayhill.

Encoder42

EnvironmentalOperating Temperature Range: -40°C to +85°CStorage Temperature Range: -55°C to +100°CVibration: MIL-STD 202, method 204, condition BMechanical Shock: 100 g’s, 6 ms, half Sine12.3 ft/s and 100 g’s, 6 ms, sawtooth, 9.7 ft/sHumidity: 90-95% Relative humidity at40°C for 96 hrs.

Materials and FinishesDetent Housing: Stainless SteelBushing: Brass, tin/zinc platedShaft: Stainless steelDetent Balls: Steel, nickel-platedCode Housings: Nylon 6/10Backplate: Nylon 6/10

Aperture: Chemically etched stainless steel withblack oxide finishRotor: Electroformed nickel and chemicallyetched stainless steel with black oxide finishDetent Springs: Tinned music wirePC Boards: NEMA grade FR-4Through Bolts: Stainless steel, unplatedThrough Bolt Nuts: Stainless steelMounting Hardware: One brass, tin/zinc-platednut and one stainless steel, zinc-platedlockwasher supplied with each switch. Nut is0.094 inches thick by 0.562 inches across flats.

Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs


Optical Encoders

SERIES 61KHigh Resolution, 4-Pin

FEATURES• 25, 32, 50, 64, 100, 128 and 256

Cycles per Revolution Available• Sealed Version Available• Rugged Construction• Cable or Pin Versions• 10 Million Rotational Life Cycles• 300 RPM Shaft Rotation


Pin Version

GRAYHILL XXXX X-X 61kXXX

XXXX X-XXX

1.250 DIA(31.75)

.219(5.57)

.033(.84)

.066(1.68)

.250(6.35)

.100(2.54)

.501(12.73)

.725.025(18.42.64)

.225(5.71)

.776.025(19.71.64)

.249/.250 DIA(6.32/6.34).025 X 45˚

(.64)CHAMFER

3/8 - 32UNEF-2ATHREADS

PIN #1

.350(8.89)



.150(3.81)

.300(7.62)

Encoder43



Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs

Optical Encoders


CIRCUITRY, TRUTH TABLE, AND WAVEFORM: Standard Quadrature 2-Bit Code

SPECIFICATIONSElectrical RatingsOperating Voltage: 5.0 ±.25 VdcSupply Current: 30 mA maximum at 5 VdcLogic Output Characteristics:Output Type: Open collector with integratedSchmitt Trigger and 10K ohms pull-up resistorMaximum Sink Current: 16 mA at .40 voltsPower Consumption: 150 mW maximumOptical Rise Time: 500 nS typicalOptical Fall Time: 16 nS typical

Mechanical RatingsMechanical Life: 10 million revolutionsTime Life: Guaranteed for 10 years ofcontinuous operation (calculated from emitter

degradation data)Mounting Torque: 20 in-lbs maximumShaft Push Out Force: 100 lbsTerminal Strength: 5 lbs terminal pull-outforce minimumSolderability: 95% free of pin holes and voidsOperating Torque: 1.5 in-oz maximum (nodetents) for unsealed versions

Environmental RatingsOperating Temperature Range: -40°C to 85°CStorage Temperature Range: -55°C to 100°CRelative Humidity: 90-95% at 40°C for 96 hoursVibration Resistance: Harmonic motion with

amplitude of 15g, within a varied 10 to 2000 Hzfrequency for 12 hours per MIL-STD-202,Method 204Mechanical Shock: Test 1: 100g for 6 mS, half-sine wave with velocity change of 12.3 ft/s. Test2: 100g for 6 mS, sawtooth wave with velocitychange of 9.7 ft/s.

4

3

1

2

10 KΩ

PIN #

GROUND

OUTPUT B

OUTPUT A

POWER 5V

10 KΩ

1 CYCLE

OUTPUTA

OUTPUTB


90˚ ± 45˚

Cable Version

GRAYHILL XXXX X-X 61KXXX-XXX

XXXX X-X XX-XXX

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, DIMENSION TOLERANCES ARE AS FOLLOWS: LINEAR .010 (.25), DIAMETERS .010 (.25), ANGULAR 5˚

1.250 DIA (31.75)

.219 (5.57)

.033 (.84)

.066 (1.68)

.250 (6.35)

.501 (12.73)

.725.025 (18.42.64)

.350 (8.89)

.249/.250 DIA (6.32/6.34) .025 X 45˚

(.64) CHAMFER

3/8 - 32 UNEF-2A THREADS

CABLE LENGTH 4.000,25(4.000, 7)

CONNECTOR IS MOLEX P/N 14-56-3046 OR EQUIVALENT

PIN #1

.550 DIA (13.97) MOUNTING SURFACE

.152 (3.86) KEYWAY DEPTH

Encoder44

Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs


Optical Encoders


SERIES 61RHigh Resolution, 5-Pin(Polarized Connection)

FEATURES• 25, 32, 50, 64, 100, 128 and 256

Cycles per Revolution Available• Sealed Version Available• Rugged Construction• Cable or Pin Version• 10 Million Rotational Cycles• 300 RPM Shaft Rotation• Index Pulse Available

Pin Version

GRAYHILL XXXX X-X 61RXXX

XXXX X-XXX

1.250 DIA(31.75)

.219(5.57)

.033(.84)

.066(1.68)

.250(6.35)

.400(10.16)

.200(5.08)

.100(2.54)

.501(12.73)

.725.025(18.42.64)

.225(5.71)

.776.025(19.71.64)

.249/.250 DIA(6.32/6.34).025 X 45˚

(.64)CHAMFER


PIN #1

.350(8.89)



Encoder45



Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs

Optical Encoders


SPECIFICATIONSElectrical RatingsOperating Voltage: 5.0 ±.25 VdcSupply Current: 30 mA maximum at 5 VdcLogic Output Characteristics:Output Type: Open collector with integratedSchmitt Trigger and 10K ohms pull-up resistorMaximum Sink Current: 16 mA at .40 voltsPower Consumption: 150 mW maximumOptical Rise Time: 500 nS typicalOptical Fall Time: 16 nS typical

Mechanical RatingsMechanical Life: 10 million revolutionsTime Life: Guaranteed for 10 years ofcontinuous operation (calculated from emitterdegradation data)Mounting Torque: 20 in-lbs maximumShaft Push Out Force: 100 lbsTerminal Strength: 5 lbs terminal pull-out forceminimumSolderability: 95% free of pin holes and voids

Operating Torque: 1.5 in-oz maximum (nodetents) for unsealed versions

Environmental RatingsOperating Temperature Range: -40°C to 85°CStorage Temperature Range: -55°C to 100°CRelative Humidity: 90-95% at 40°C for 96 hoursVibration Resistance: Harmonic motion withamplitude of 15g, within a varied 10 to 2000 Hzfrequency for 12 hours per MIL-STD-202,Method 204

Cable Version

CIRCUITRY, TRUTH TABLE, AND WAVEFORM: Standard Quadrature 2-Bit Code

1 CYCLE

OUTPUTA

OUTPUTB


90˚ ± 45˚

1

2

3

5

4

10 KΩ

10 KΩ

PIN #

GROUND

NO CONTACT

OUTPUT A

POWER 5V

OUTPUT B

GRAYHILL XXXX X-X 61RXXX-XXX

XXXX X-XXX-XXX

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, DIMENSION TOLERANCES ARE AS FOLLOWS: LINEAR .010 (.25), DIAMETERS .010 (.25), ANGULAR 5˚1.250 DIA

(31.75)

.219(5.57)

.033(.84)

.066(1.68)

.250(6.35)

.501(12.73)

.725.025(18.42.64)

.350(8.89)

.249/.250 DIA(6.32/6.34).025 X 45˚

(.64)CHAMFER


CABLE LENGTH6.000, 25(6.000, 7)


PIN #1



Encoder46

Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs


Optical Encoders

Available from your local Grayhill Distributor. For prices and discounts, contact a local Sales Office, an authorized local Dstributor or Grayhill.

Shock Resistance: Test 1: 100g for 6 mS, half-sine wave with velocity change of 12.3 ft/s. Test2: 100g for 6 mS, sawtooth wave with velocitychange of 9.7 ft/s.

Materials and FinishesBushing: AluminumCode Housing: Hiloy 610BShaft: Stainless steelRetaining Ring: Stainless steelCode Rotor and Aperture: Chemically etchedstainless steel/electroformed nickel

Printed Circuit Board: NEMA Grade FR-4.Five microinches minimum gold over 100microinches minimum nickel over copperOptical Barrier: Polyphenylene sulfide, 94 V-0Backplate: PolyesterHeader: Phosphor bronze, 200 microinches tinover 50 microinches nickel (pin version only)Infrared Emitter: Gallium aluminum arsenidePhoto IC: Planar siliconCable: 26 AWG, stranded/tinned wire, PVCcoated on .100 (2,54) centers (cable versiononly)

ACCESSORIESNon-Turn WasherThe Series 61 bushing is 3/8 inches in diameterand has a non-turn keyway to prevent rotationof the switch body when the panel is cut to fit.Another way to keep the switch from turning isto use a non-turn washer. The washer iscadmium-plated brass.Part number: 12C1087-1Part number: SHH694-11, 302-2B stainlesssteel, no plating


Shaft and Panel SealFor shaft and panel seal version, the shaft issealed by an o-ring inside the bushing. Thepanel is sealed by a flat gasket .045" thick at thebase of the bushing. The panel seals will increasethe behind panel dimension by .020" to .040",when the switch is mounted. The panel seal issilicon rubber.

Part Number: 12C1087-1 Part Number: SHH694-11

C L

.125 ± .010(3,16 ± 0,25)

.005 ± .003(0,38 ± 0,08)RADIUS

.032 ± .002(0,81 ± 0,05)

90˚ ± 1˚

.625 ± .010 DIA.(15,89 ± 0,25)

.120 ± .003(3,05 ± 0,08)

.437 + .010 –.000(11,10 + 0,25 –0,00)

.032 ± .002(0,81 ± 0,05)

.110 ± .003(2,79 ± 0,08)

.030 (0,76) RADIUS MAX.

.625 ± .010(15,88 ± 0,25) DIA.

.120 ± .003(3,05 ± 0,08)

.530 ± .005(13,46 ± 0,13)

90˚ ± 1˚


SeriesStyle: K = Standard, 4-pin, high resolution

KS = Sealed, 4-pin, high resolutionR = Standard, 5-pin, high resolutionRS = Sealed, 5-pin, high resolution

Cycles: per channel per revolution = 25, 32, 50, 64, 100, 128, 256

61RS256 – 060

Cable Termination: 060 = 6.0in. Cable is terminated with Molex Connector P/N14-56-3056.

Encoder47


Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs

Optical Encoders


SERIES 65Optical Encoder Interface

FEATURES• Interfaces with all Grayhill and

Most Standard Quadrature OpticalEncoders

• Power Reduction of Up to 75-90%in Optical Encoder Use ThroughPower Management Feature

• User Selectable Output Modes:Magnitude/Direction, Up/Down,Standard Quadrature


GH65C11-X-YY

Temperature: Packaging:C = Commercial (0° C to 70° C) PD = 18 lead 300 mil wide Plastic DIPN = Industrial (-40° C to 85° C) SO = 18 lead 300 mil wide gull wing SOIC

SS* = 20 lead SSOP

* The SS package style is not available in the -40°C to 85°C temperature range.

• Simplified Microprocessor InterfaceReduces Design Time

• Debounces Encoder IntegralPushbutton Switch

• Ideal for Battery PoweredApplications that Include OpticalEncoders

For additional information about the use of theGH65 interface chips with optical encodersrequest Grayhill Application Note #719.

DESCRIPTIONThe GH65C11-X is designed to receive inputfrom standard quadrature optical encoders.The power management feature allows powerto the encoder to be applied only duringsampling intervals, thus conserving power

(especially advantageous in battery poweredsystems). Sample rate is a nominal 4K persecond allowing high speed quadrature input.The optical encoder interface can operate in 1of 3 user-selectable output modes. These

modes are: magnitude and direction, up anddown count, and standard quadrature.Debouncing of an integral pushbutton switchwithin the optical encoder can also beaccomplished.

Name Type* DescriptionM0, M1 I Mode selection input pinsVDD P 3–6 Vdc power sourceRES I Reset pin, normally connected to VDD

VSS P GND, 0v nominal power returnØAI, ØBI I Phase A and B quadrature input pinsSWI I Switch input pinSWO O Debounced switch output pinNC O No connect, this pin must be left unconnectedPW O Power source for encoder power managementRC I/O RC oscillator pinØBO/DN/DR O Phase B, down, direction, mode conditional output pinØAO/UP/MG O Phase A, up, magnitude, mode conditional output pin* Pin Types: I = Input, O = Output, P = Power.

M0M1VRESVØAIØBISWISWO

ØBO/DN/DRØAO/UP/MGRCNCVPWPWPWPW

SOIC/DIP

DD

SS DD

123456789

181716151413121110

M0M1VRESVVØAIØBISWISWO

ØBO/DN/DRØAO/UP/MGRCNCVVPWPWPWPW

SSOP

DD

SS

SS

DD

DD

12345678910

20191817161514131211

Encoder48

Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs


Optical Encoders

SERIES 61MOptically Coupled for SimulatedMechanical Rotary Switch Output

FEATURES• Optical Alternative to Rotary

Contacts• One Pulse Per Detent Position

Per Rotation• Long Life of a Million Cycles• With or Without Pushbutton• Continuous Rotation and Fixed

Stops Available• Rugged Construction• 8, 10 and 12 Positions Available



X-01

XXXX X61M12-02-01

345678910

1211 21PB PBG+5

DETAIL “A”PINOUT

.0942,38

.375 ± .029,52 ± 0,50

.3127,92

.250 ± .0106,35 ± 0,25

.0461,17

.68717,45

.0310,79

.57914,71

.0792,0114 PLACES

.2025,13

1/4"32-UNEF-2ATHREAD

.59014,99

SEE DETAIL A

.010 X 45°

.750 ± .02019,05 ± 0,50

.022 DIA0,5616 PLACES

.44511,30

.52413,31

Applications• Avionics• Any application requiring rotary

switch output and the increasedreliability of an optical device

Encoder49


Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs

Optical Encoders

SPECIFICATIONSPushbutton RatingsOperating Voltage: 5 Vdc, 60mA maximum,resistiveContact Resistance: Less than 10 OhmsVoltage Breakdown: 250 Vac betweenmutually insulated partsContact Bounce: Less than 4 mS at makeand less than 10 mS at breakActuation Life: 3,000,000 operationsActuation Force: Maximum actuation forceof 650 grams and a minimum force of 300gramsPushbutton Travel: .010/.025

Mechanical RatingsLife Expectancy: 1 million cycles ofoperation; (1 cycle=360° rotation and return)Rotational Torque: 10 in-oz. ±3 in-oz.customs also available.Shaft Pushout Force: 50 lbs. minimumMounting Torque: 20 in-lbs. maximum

Switch RatingsOutput: One pulse per position per rotation(360 degrees CW/CCW)Operating Voltage: 5.0 ± .25 VdcSupply Current: 60mA maximum at 5 VdcLogic High: 3.8V minimumLogic Low: .8V minimumLogic Rise and Fall Time: 30mS Typ.

EnvironmentalOperating Temperature Range: -40°C to+85°CStorage Temperature Range: -55°C to +100°CVibration: MIL-STD 202, Method 204,Condition BMechanical Shock: 100g’s, 6 ms, Half Sine,12.3 ft/s and 100g’s, 6 ms, Sawtooth, 9.7 ft/sHumidity: 90-95% Relative Humidity at40°C for 96 hours

Series“M” StyleAngle of Throw: Detent

08 = 45° or 8 positions 10 = 36° or 10 positions 12 = 30° or 12 positions

61MXX-XX-XX

Termination: 01 = without terminal pins, 02 = with terminal pinsPushbutton Option: 01 = without P.B., 02 = with P.B.





Materials and FinishesCode Housing: Nylon (Red) Hiloy 610Detent Housing: Stainless SteelRotor: Reinforced Thermoplastic, 30% GlassFilled PolyesterBushing: Zinc Die Cast, Cadmium PlatedShaft: Stainless SteelDetent Balls: 302 Stainless SteelThrough Bolts: 305 Stainless SteelThrough Bolt Nuts: Stainless SteelPrinted Circuit Boards: NEMA Grade FR-4Terminals: Copper AlloyAperture: Chem Etched Stainless Steel and/or Electroformed NickelDome Retainer: ThermoplasticMounting Hardware: One Brass, cadmium-plated nut and lockwasher supplied with eachswitch

OPTIONSContact Grayhill for customer application needs.

P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 P9 P10 P11 P12

1 •2 •3 •4 •5 •6 •7 •8 •9 •10 •11 •12 •

PO

SIT

ION

PIN NUMBER

Note:Blank Indicates high state

• Indicates low stateCode repeats every 12 positions

611

SWITCH SCHEMATIC

R1 R1 R1 R1 R1R1

N.O. PUSHBUTTON

+5 G

9 8 7 5 4 3 2 1101213141516PIN#

Note: External pull-up resistors required for operation. 20ký is suggested.

Encoder50

Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs









.335 (8,51)

1.330(33,78)

DIA.

.440 (11,18)

DIA.

.620 (15,75)

.593 (15,06)

DIA..700

(17,78) DIA.

.600(15,24)



.

.894(22,71)

DIA.

.500(12,7)DIA.

.662(16,81)

.350(8,9)DIA.

.500(12,7)

.440(11,2)





Encoder51


Op

tica

l a

nd

M

ec

ha

nic

al

En

co

de

rs



.660(16,76)

.092 (2,34) TYP.

(4 PLACES).500

(12,7) DIA.


Top ViewStyle 5028

.730(18,54)

.710(18,03)

DIA.

1.090(27,69)

SPRING CLIP

.500 (12,7)DIA. .500

(12,7)

1.575 DIA.(40,01)

OF .220

(5,59) R.

C L

.315 (8,00)

.550(13,97)

DIA.

.220 R. (5,59)

.400(10,16)

.215(5,46)

.393(9,98)


Top ViewStyle 5029





SeriesStyle*: 5013, 5014, 5015, 5017, 5019, 5020, 5028, 5029



11K5028-KCNB




Encoder52


Sys

tem

50

System 50

SYSTEM 50


Sys

tem

50

System 50

SYSTEM 50• MicroDAC• MicroDAC LT• Promux• Microlon• Various I/O Racks

Contents:

Page

SYSTEM 50 RACKS OVERVIEW ................................................................ 3Racks4 Channel ...................................................................................................... 48 Channel ...................................................................................................... 616 Channel .................................................................................................. 1124 Channel (In-Line) ................................................................................... 1824 Channel .................................................................................................. 2232 Channel .................................................................................................. 2532 Channel Parallel Controller Board for 72-PMX-32D ............................ 27ControllersMicroDAC (Optomux) .................................................................................. 29MicroDAC LT (Optomux) ............................................................................. 31Network InterfacesPromux (Optomux) ...................................................................................... 33Parallel Bus Interface .................................................................................. 35Communication Converters ........................................................................ 37Accessories ................................................................................................. 38

System 502


Sys

tem

50

System 50

Series Number

70MRCK16–HL

Input Connection/MountingBlank = Edge Card Connector Only for Std. I/O (Note 1)EC = Edge Card Connector only for Mini I/O (Note 1)HL = Header Connector: long ejector levers (Note 2)HS = Header Connector: short ejector levers (Note 2)DIN = DIN Rail Mount48 = 48-pin Euro DIN Connector (Note 3)

Number of Modules or Rack Positions4 = 4 Modules4R = 4 Modules, Positive or Negative True Logic8 = 8 Modules16 = 16 Modules16T= Terminal Blocks for Control and Field Wiring16I = Terminal Blocks for Control and Field Wiring:

Positive or negative true logic24 = 24 Modules32 = 32 Modules

Mounting Rack TypeK = 1 Row of Modules in LineQ = 2 Rows of Modules (Mini racks replace Quad racks)M = Special 32 Position G5 Rack for MicroDACP = Special 32 Position G5 Rack for ParallelController Board

RC = Mounting Rack

Module TypeL = OpenLine® I/O ModulesG = G5 I/O ModulesM = Mini I/O ModulesBlank = Standard I/O Module

I/O RacksI/O racks are passive backplanes into whichI/O modules can be installed and removed. I/Oracks connect one of the “logic side” terminalsfrom each module to an associated pin on thelogic side connector for interface to the controller.I/O bases have an integral processor and dualport memory chip. The I/O handles scanningand storage of the I/O information which can beaccessed over the bases address/databus.Up to 8 racks can be stacked along a DIN rail.

Standard Mounting RacksMounting racks provide a convenient methodof connecting to I/O modules. Most racks havethe option of a card edge or header connectorfor the logic signals. Field wires are connectedto open or closed terminal blocks.

The modules are plugged into receptacle cupsor connectors and are held in place by holddown screws, bars or clips. An LED indicatesthe status of each digital module. A five ampreplaceable fuse protects the outputs fromshort circuits.

SYSTEM 50 RACKS OVERVIEWI/O Racks Part Number Explanation

G5 Mounting RacksG5 mounting racks are designed toaccommodate G5 modules, which incorporatea status LED in the module. The G5 outputmodules also have an integral fuse. Thiseliminates the need for module fuses and LEDstatus indicators on the rack. The G5 modulesare slightly thinner than the standard modules.When used with the MicroDAC or Microlon®

controllers, analog and digital I/O modules canbe intermixed on the same G5 rack.

Miniature-Sized RacksOur mini racks are much smaller than theindustry standard racks. In addition to savingprecious panel space, mini racks saveinstallation time by replacing the individualmodule screws with a single hold down barwhich is installed with two thumb screws.

UL Recognition/CSA CertificationThose I/O racks indicated as UL and CSAcertified are listed in UL file E94540 and CSAfile LR38763.

Replacement FusesAll I/O locations on standard and mini I/Oracks are fused with five amp Littelfuse 251-005 or Bussman GFA5 fuses. Logic supply on24 and 32 position standard and mini I/O racksare fused with one amp Littelfuse 251-001 orBussman GFA1 fuses. Logic supply on 16, 24and 32 position G5 I/O racks are fused with5 x20mm glass fuses rated one amp or fiveamps.

Custom I/O Racks andTermination AssembliesFor applications where our standard I/O racksdo not fit your application, we offer custom I/O racks and termination assemblies. We haveprovided custom I/O racks with the followingfeatures:• Special control logic connectors• DIN rail mounting• Depluggable terminal strips• Options for sinking and/or sourcing of field

power• 19” Rack for mounting options• Signal conditioning and transient protection

Our application engineers are ready to helpyou design your I/O termination assembly. Ifyou have a unique application, give us a try.

I/O Module and Fuse SocketsWe recommend customers designing theirown mini, standard or G5 I/O racks use Mill-Max part number 0355-0-15-01-02-01-10-0sockets or equivalent for the I/O module leadsand Mill-Max part number 0660-0-15-01-20-02-10-0 or equivalent for Littelfuse pico fuseleads. Custom OpenLine® I/O racks shoulduse Crane connectors for the input and for theoutput.

Logic SupplyTo power an I/O rack, connect a power supplyto the 2 position logic supply terminal block,taking care that the polarity is correct.Alternately, the I/O rack may be poweredthrough the 50-pin connector. Pin #49 on allother racks is +Vcc. Installation of a jumper orfuse may be necessary on the I/O rack tocomplete this connection. See details on thefollowing pages.

Field Terminal Block-Wire Size Quantity per Terminal

AWG

I/O Rack Type 10 12 14 16

Mini – – 1 2G5 1 1 2 3OpenLine® – – 1 2

Note 1–Note 2–

Note 3–

50-pin card edge mates with 3M part number 3415-0001 or equivalent.Racks with long ejector levers mate with ribbon cable connectors with strain relief (Molex part number15-29-9350 or equivalent) or discrete wire connectors (Molex part number 22-55-2502 or equivalent).Racks with 48-pin Euro DIN connector are special 16 position OpenLine© racks for OpenDAC© controllers.

Not all combinations are valid, see Ordering Information on each page.

System 503


Sys

tem

50

System 50

9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 B A

C O

UT

PU

T R

DC

OU

TP

UT

Y A

C IN

PU

T W

DC

INP

UT

STANDOFF I.D. 0.15 ( 3,8),DIA.(4 PLACES)CLEARANCE FOR #6 SCREW

9 POSITION TERMINALSTRIP FOR GROUNDAND LOGIC SIGNALS

3.00(76,2) 3.50

(88,9)

0.25 (6,4)0.25 (6,4)4.00 (101,6)

4.50 (114,3)

STATUS LED

3.3K RESISTOR

5 AMP FUSE

TERMINAL STRIP FORFIELD WIRING

2.20 (55,9)MAX.

0.75 (19,1)

MODULE SHOWN FORREFERENCE ONLY

NOTE: MAXIMUM TERMINAL SCREW TORQUE NOT TO EXCEED 5 IN-LBS.

4 CHANNEL RACK: G5

Part No. 70RCK4Dimensions are shown in inches(and millimeters).All tolerances are ± 0.010 (0,25)unless otherwise specified.

4 CHANNEL RACK: Standard

Panel MountDIN-RailMount

RACKS4 Channel

FEATURES• Use for Isolating and Coverting Signal Types to

Standard Logic Voltages• Terminal Block Connection for Input and Output• Available for Standard and G5 I/O Modules• Panel and DIN Rail Mount Versions• UL, CSA Certified

System 504

BRYW

AC

OU

TP

UT

DC

OU

TP

UT

AC

INT

PU

TD

C IN

TP

UT

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

2.75 (69,85)

3.25 (82,55)

2.75(69,85)

.76 (19,30)

4.27(108,46)

.25(6,35)

SWAGED STANDOFF THRU HOLE .15 (3,81) DIA. (4 PLACES) (CLEARANCE FOR #6 SCREW)

9 POSITION TERMINAL STRIP FOR CONTROL LOGIC

3.365,34)

.75 (19,05)

9 POSITION TERMINALSTRIP FOR FIELD WIRING

4.00(101,6)

4.70(119,38)

DIN-RAIL CARRIER NOTE: MAXIMUM TERMINAL SCREW TORQUE NOT TO EXCEED 5 IN-LBS.

Part No. 70GRCK4Dimensions are shown in inches(and millimeters).All tolerances are ± 0.010 (0,25)unless otherwise specified.


Sys

tem

50

System 50

70RCK4 For Negative True Logic Only

SCHEMATICS: Part No. 70RCK4

SCHEMATICS: Part No. 70GRCK4

70GRCK4 and 70GRCK4-DIN For Negative True Logic Only

70RCK4R For Negative or Positive TrueLogic

Part Number I/O Description UL CSA Style

70RCK4 4 Negative true logic X X Standard70RCK4R 4 Positive or negative true logic* X X Standard70GRCK4 4 Negative true logic X X G570GRCK4R 4 Positive or negative true logic* X X G570GRCK4-DIN 4 Negative true logic–DIN rail mount X X G570GRCK4R-DIN 4 Positive or negative true logic*– X X G5

DIN rail mount

*Note: Positive True Logic applies to output modules only.

ORDERING INFORMATION (modules ordered separately)

70GRCK4R and 70GRCK4R-DIN For Negativeor Postive True Logic

.

Available from your local Grayhill Distribu-tor. For prices and discounts, contact a localSales Office, an authorized local Distributor, orGrayhill.

System 505

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

12345

0 1 2 3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

MODULEPOSITION

FIELD WIRINGTERMINAL STRIP

N/C

3.3K

+V

CC

GN

D

LOG

IC

GN

D

LOG

IC

GN

D

LOG

IC

GN

D

LOG

IC

FUSE5A

TERMINAL STRIPFOR LOGIC ANDGROUND SIGNALS

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

12345

0 1 2 3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

MODULEPOSITION

TERMINAL STRIPFOR LOGIC ANDGROUND SIGNALS


N/C

3.3K

FUSE5A

GN

D

+V

CC

LOG

IC

+V

CC

LOG

IC

+V

CC

LOG

IC

+V

CC

LOG

IC

12345

BARRIER STRIPFOR FIELD WIRINGOF MODULE

MODULELOCATION0 1 2 3

CONTROLBARRIERSTRIP

PULL-UPRESISTOR3.3 KΩ

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

NC

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

GR

OU

ND

+V

CC

LOG

IC

+V

CC

LOG

IC

+V

CC

LOG

IC

+V

CC

LOG

IC

12345

BARRIER STRIPFOR FIELD WIRINGOF MODULEINPUT/OUTPUT

MODULELOCATION0 1 2 3

CONTROLBARRIERSTRIP


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

NC

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

+V

CC

GN

D

LOG

IC

GN

D

LOG

IC

GN

D

LOG

IC

GN

D

LOG

IC


Sys

tem

50

System 50

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Y B W R

AC

INP

UT

AC

OU

TP

UT

DC

INP

UT

DC

OU

TP

UT

162 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

++

+1

12

5/4

9

1

-+

3.00(76,2) 3.50

(88,9)

0.25 (6,4)0.25 (6,4)

0.40 (10,2)

7.50 (190,5)

8.00 (203,2)

TERMINAL STRIP FORFIELD WIRING

2.20 (55,9)MAX.

1.40(35,6)

0.45(11,4)

2.60(66,0) 0.30

(7,6)

KEYSLOTPINS5/7

TERMINAL STRIPFOR LOGIC SUPPLY

STANDOFF I.D.0.15 (3,8) DIA.(4 PLACES)CLEARANCEFOR #6 SCREW

0.75(19,1)

USER INSTALLABLE JUMPERSFOR +VCC (3 PLACES)

CARD EDGE OR HEADERCONNECTOR FOR LOGICSIGNALS. (SEE NOTES)

PIN 1




RACKS8 Channel

FEATURES• For use with System 50 Style Controllers• Available for Standard Miniature and

OpenLine® Modules• Panel and DIN Rail Mount Versions• UL, CSA Certified

System 506


Sys

tem

50

System 50

8 CHANNEL RACK: DIN Rail Mount

Part No. 70LRCK8-DINDimensions are shown in inches(and millimeters).All tolerances are ± 0.010 (0,25)unless otherwise specified.

System 507

3.8(95.81)

REF

2.2(56.49)

DIN CARRIER4.7 (119.13)

PCB4.3 (108.46)

DIN CARRIER 3.7 (92.96)

PCB 3.5 (89.15)

REMOVABLE JUMPERCONNNECTS GNDTO PLATED HOLEFOR GROUNDING


PIN 1

3.15A FUSE

50-PINSTRAIGHT

HEADERCONNECTOR

LOGIC SUPPLY TERMINAL STRIPTOP ROW: + LOGIC SUPPLY

BOTTOM ROW: GND

BA

M3M2M1M0

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

2 4

31+5 +5

502 1

49



Sys

tem

50

System 50

+ –

6.00 (152,4)

5.125 (130,18)

STANDOFF I.D. 0.15 (3,8) DIA.(4 PLACES) CLEARANCEFOR #6 SCREW

PIN 1

.620 (15,75)

3.250(82,55)

2.750(69,85)

.093 (2,36) REF.

50 PIN STRAIGHT HEADER CONNECTOR

HOLES FOR USER INSTALLED JUMPER(22 AWG) COPPER WIRE

LOGIC SUPPLYTERMINAL STRIP

3.40(86,4)MAX.

.75 (19,1)

.250 (6,35)

STATUS LEDON THE MODULE

FUSEPULLER


8 CHANNEL RACK: Miniature

8 CHANNEL RACK: G5

System 508

+– 16151413121110987654321

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

YBWR

AC

INP

UT

AC

OU

TP

UT

DC

INP

UT

DC

OU

TP

UT

6.00 (152,4)

5.20 (132,1)



0.25 (6,35)

STANDOFF I.D. 0.15 (3,8) DIA.(4 PLACES) CLEARANCE FOR #6 SCREW

STATUS LED

0.40(10,2)

0.45(11,4)

1.40(35,6)

2.6066,0) 3.50

(88,9)3.00

(76,2)

2.20 (55,9)MAX.

0.75(19,1)

5A FUSE

MODULE HOLD DOWNSTRIP WITH THUMB SCREWS

CARD EDGE OR HEADER CONNECTORFOR LOGIC SIGNALS (SEE NOTES)

PIN 1

KEY SLOTPINS 5/7

NOTE: MAXIMUM TERMINAL SCREWTORQUE NOT TO EXCEED 5 IN-LBS


Part No. 70MRCK8Dimensions are shown in inches(and millimeters).All tolerances are ± 0.010 (0,25)unless otherwise specified.


Sys

tem

50

System 50

SCHEMATIC: Part Nos. 70RCK8, 70MRCK8

8 CHANNEL RACK: OpenLine® System 50

Part No. 70LRCK8Dimensions are shown in inches(and millimeters).All tolerances are ± 0.010 (0,25)unless otherwise specified.

System 509

.75(19.05)

REF

3.4(85.93)MAX

4.3(108.46)

3.8(96.52)

.24 (6.05).25

(6.35) 3.0 (76.20)

3.5 (88.90)


STANDOFF I.D. 0.15(3.81) DIA. (4 PLACES)

CLEARANCE FOR #6 SCREW

PIN 1

3.15A FUSE

50-PINSTRAIGHT

HEADERCONNECTOR


LOGIC SUPPLY TERMINAL STRIP

TOP ROW: + LOGIC SUPPLYBOTTOM ROW: GND

BA

M3M2M1M0

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

2 4

31+5 +5

502 1

49


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12–

+

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

4947454341393735333129272523211917151311 9

13 14 15 16

1234525

23211917151311 9 7 5 3 1

262422201816141210 8 6 4 2

N/CN/CN/C

N/CN/CN/C

N/CN/CN/CN/CN/CN/CN/CN/CN/CN/CN/C

201816141210 8 6 4 2

504846444240383634323028262422

7 5 3 1

USER INSTALLABLE JUMPERSFOR +VCC (3 PLACES)


FIELDWIRINGTERMINALSTRIP

MODULEPOSITION

3.3K

• • •

26-PIN EDGECONNECTORFOR LOGICSIGNALS

50-PIN EDGEOR HEADERCONNECTORFOR LOGICSIGNALS

5A FUSE


Sys

tem

50

System 50

SCHEMATIC: Part No. 70GRCK8


70RCK8 8 Card edge X X Standard70RCK8-HL 8 50-pin header with ejector levers X X Standard70MRCK8-EC 8 Card edge X X Mini70MRCK8-HL 8 50-pin header with ejector levers X X Mini70GRCK8-HL 8 50-pin header with ejector levers X X G570LRCK8-HL 8 50-pin header with ejector levers Pend Pend OpenLine®

70LRCK8-DIN 8 50-pin header with DIN rail mount Pend Pend OpenLine®

ORDERING INFORMATION (modules ordered separately)Available from your local GrayhillDistributor. For prices and discounts, contacta local Sales Office, an authorized localDistributor or Grayhill.

SCHEMATIC: Part No. 70LRCK8

System 501 0

N/CN/CN/CN/CN/CN/CN/CN/CN/CN/CN/CN/CN/CN/CN/CN/C12

345678910

1112131517

141618

1921232527293133

2022242628303234

56789

4321

44464850

36384042

43454749

35373941

15

1614

1311

1210

97

86

53

42

1FIELDWIRINGTERMINALSTRIP

MODULELOCATION

LOGICSUPPLYTERMINALSTRIP

–

–

+

+

M0 M1 M2 M3

PULL-UP RESISTORNETWORK 10K OHM

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

–+

4947454341393735333129272523211917151311 9 7 5 3 1

504846444240383634323028262422201816141210 8 6 4 2

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

12345

N/CN/CN/CN/CN/CN/CN/CN/CN/CN/CN/CN/CN/CN/CN/CN/C

3.3K

50 PIN HEADERCONNECTOR FORLOGIC SIGNALS


USER INSTALLABLEJUMPER FOR +VCC


MODULEPOSITION


Sys

tem

50

System 50

32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

YBWR

AC INPUTAC OUTPUTDC INPUTDC OUTPUT

+ –

14.05 (356,9)

13.55 (344,2)

0.40(10,2)

50 PIN EDGE CARD OR HEADERCONNECTOR FOR LOGIC SIGNALS(SEE NOTES)



5 AFUSE

0.45 (11,4)

2.60 (66,0)

KEYSLOTPINS11/13

PIN 1

USER INSTALLABLEJUMPER FOR +VCC (2 PLACES) STATUS LED

STANDOFF I.D. 0.15 (3,8) DIA.(4 PLACES) CLEARANCEFOR #6 SCREWS

2.20(55,9)MAX.

3.00(76,2)

3.50(88,9)

0.25 (6,4)

0.25(6,4)

0.75 (19,1)




RACKS16 Channel

FEATURES• For use with System 50 Style Controllers• Available for Standard, Miniature, G5 and

OpenLine® Modules• Panel and DIN Rail Mount Versions• UL, CSA Certified

System 501 1


Sys

tem

50

System 50


16 CHANNEL RACK: G5

System 501 2

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

YBWR


+ –

16151413121110987654321 32313029282726252423222120191817

10.00 (254,0)

9.35 (237,5)LOGIC SUPPLYTERMINAL STRIP


STANDOFF I.D0.15 (3,8) DIA.(4 PLACES)CLEARANCEFOR #6 SCRE

STATUS LED

0.40(10,2)

.451,4)

0.25 (6,4)

.606,0)

3.50(88,9)3.00

(76,2)

2.20 (55,9)MAX.

0.75(19,1)

5A FUSE


CARD EDGE OR HEADER CONNECTORFOR LOGIC SIGNALS (SEE NOTES)

USER INSTALLABLE JUMPERFOR +VCC (2 PLACES)

PIN 1

KEYSLOTPINS 11/13

0.2 (5,1)


Part No. 70MRCK16Dimensions are shown in inches(and millimeters).All tolerances are ± 0.010 (0,25)unless otherwise specified.


0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

+ –

10.00 (254,0)

9.125 (231,8)LOGIC SUPPLYTERMINAL STRIP



STATUS LEDON THE MODULE

0.25 (6,4)

3.25(82,6)2.75

(69,9)

3.39(86,1)MAX.

0.75(19,1)

PIN 1

0.2 (5,1)

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 312 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32

.093 (2,36) REF.



Sys

tem

50

System 50

16 CHANNEL RACK: G5 Control and Field Connection Terminal Blocks

Part No. 70GRCK16TDimensions are shown in inches(and millimeters).All tolerances are ± 0.010 (0,25)unless otherwise specified.

16 CHANNEL RACK: G5 Channel-to-Channel Isolation

Part No. 70GRCK16I and 70GRCK16I-DINDimensions are shown in inches(and millimeters).All tolerances are ± 0.010 (0,25)unless otherwise specified.

System 501 3

1.687(42,85)

3.392(86,16)REF.

.750(19,05)REF.

2 POSITION TERMINAL STRIPFOR CONTROL LOGIC

SPARE FUSE

SWAGED STANDOFF THRU HOLE .15 (3,81) DIA. (4 PLACES)(CLEARANCE FOR #6 SCREW)

RES. 3.3 KΩ/.25W(2 PLACES)

KNURL FASTENER(16 PLACES)

32 POS. TERMINALSTRIP FOR CONTROL LOGIC STRIP

9.500 (241,3)

9.000 (228,6)

32 POSITION TERMINAL STRIPFOR FIELD WIRING

2.750(69,85)

3.250(82,55)

.250 (6,35)

.250 (6,35)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 +VCC –

CO

NT

RO

LF

IELD

32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

GN

D

2.125(53,98)

4.00(101,6)REF.

DIN CARRIER9.160 ± .020 (232,66 ± 0,51)

PANEL MOUNT9.000 ± .010 (228,6 ± 0,25)

32 POSITION TERMINAL STRIPFOR FIELD WIRING

PANELMOUNT4.270 ± .010

(108,46 ± 0,25)

DIN CARRIER

4.800± .020

(121,92± 0,51)

RES. 3.3 KΩ/.25W(16 PLACES)

KNURL FASTENER(16 PLACES)

32 POS. TERMINALSTRIP FOR CONTROL LOGIC STRIP

CO

NT

RO

LF

IELD

32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

3.500 ± .010(88,9 ± 0,25)

8.500 ± .010 (215,9 ± 0,25)



Sys

tem

50

System 50

16 CHANNEL RACK: OpenLine® for System 50

Part No. 70LRCK16-HLDimensions are shown in inches(and millimeters).All tolerances are ± 0.010 (0,25)unless otherwise specified.

16 CHANNEL RACK: OpenLine® w/ DIN Rail Mount for System 50

Part No. 70LRCK16-DINDimensions are shown in inches(and millimeters).All tolerances are ± 0.010 (0,25)unless otherwise specified.

System 501 4

3.4(85.93)MAX.75

(19.05)REF

.24(6.05)

4.3(108.46)

3.8(96.52)

.25(6.35) 5.0 (127.00)

5.5 (139.70)



STANDOFF I.D. 0.15(3.81) DIA. (4 PLACES)

CLEARANCE FOR #6 SCREW

PIN 1

5A FUSE

50-PINSTRAIGHT

HEADERCONNECTOR

LOGIC SUPPLY TERMINAL STRIPTOP ROW: + LOGIC SUPPLY

BOTTOM ROW: GND

M7M6M5M4

BA

M3M2M1M0

502 1

49

31

32

29

30

27

28

25

26

23

24

21

22

19

20

17

1816

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

2 4

31+5 +5


3.8(95.81)

REF

2.2(56.49)


PCB4.3 (108.46)

PCB5.5 (139.70)

DIN CARRIER 5.7 (143.76)



TOP ROW: + LOGIC SUPPLYBOTTOM ROW: GND


PIN 1

5A FUSE

50-PINSTRAIGHT

HEADERCONNECTOR

+5 +5

M7M6M5M4

BA

M3M2M1M0

502 1

49

31

32

29

30

27

28

25

26

23

24

21

22

19

20

17

1816

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

2 4

31



Sys

tem

50

System 50

SCHEMATIC: Part No. 70GRCK16

SCHEMATIC: Part No. 70GRCK16T

SCHEMATIC: Part Nos. 70GRCK16I AND 70GRCK16I-DIN

System 501 5

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

–+

4947454341393735333129272523211917151311 9 7 5 3 1

504846444240383634323028262422201816141210 8 6 4 2

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

12345

N/CN/CN/CN/CN/CN/CN/C

3.3K

50 PIN HEADERCONNECTOR FORLOGIC SIGNALS



1 A FUSEFIELDWIRINGTERMINALSTRIP

MODULEPOSITION

12345

BARRIER STRIPFOR FIELD WIRINGOF MODULE

MODULELOCATION

CONTROLBARRIERSTRIP


+V

CC

LOG

IC

+V

CC

LOG

IC

+V

CC

LOG

IC

+V

CC

LOG

IC

+V

CC

LOG

IC

+V

CC

LOG

IC

+V

CC

LOG

IC

+V

CC

LOG

IC

+V

CC

LOG

IC

+V

CC

LOG

IC

+V

CC

LOG

IC

+V

CC

LOG

IC

+V

CC

LOG

IC

+V

CC

LOG

IC

+V

CC

LOG

IC

+V

CC

LOG

IC

GN

D

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33


Sys

tem

50

System 50

SCHEMATIC: Part Nos. 70RCK16 and 70MRCK16

SCHEMATIC: Part No. 70LRCK16-HL, -DIN

System 501 6

N/CN/CN/CN/CN/CN/CN/CN/C12

3456789101112131517

141618

1921232527293133

2022242628303234

56789

4321

44464850

36384042

43454749

35373941

31

3230

2927

2826

2523

2422

2119

2018

1715

1614

1311

1210

97

86

53

42

1FIELD WIRINGTERMINAL STRIP

MODULELOCATION

M0 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7

LOGICSUPPLY

TERMINALSTRIP

–

–

+

+

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32–+

4947454341393735333129272523211917151311 9 7 5 3 1

504846444240383634323028262422201816141210 8 6 4 2

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

12345

N/CN/CN/CN/CN/CN/CN/C

3.3K50 PIN EDGEOR HEADER

CONNECTOR FORLOGIC SIGNALS



(2 PLACES)


5A FUSE

MODULEPOSITION


Sys

tem

50

System 50


70RCK16 16 Card edge X X Standard70RCK16-HL 16 50-pin header with ejector levers X X Standard70MRCK16-EC 16 Card edge X X Mini70MRCK16-HL 16 50-pin header with ejector levers X X Mini70GRCK16-HL 16 50-pin header with ejector levers X X G570LRCK16-HL 16 50-pin header with ejector levers X X OpenLine®

70LRCK16-DIN 16 50-pin header with DIN rail mnt. X X OpenLine®

70GRCK16I 16 Positive or negative true logic*–Panel Mount X X G5

70GRCK16I-DIN 16 Positive or negative true logic*–DIN rail mount X X G5

70GRCK16T 16 Negative true logic*–Panel Mount X X G5

* Positive true logic applies to output modules only.


Available from your local GrayhillDistributor. For prices and discounts, contacta local Sales Office, an authorized localDistributor, or Grayhill.

System 501 7


Sys

tem

50

System 50


Part No. 70RCK24Dimensions are shown in inches (and millimeters).Tolerances are ± 0.010 (0,25) unless indicated otherwise.

RACKS24 Channel (In-Line)

FEATURES• For use with System 50 Style Controllers• Available for Standard, Miniature, G5 and

OpenLine® Modules• UL, CSA Certified

System 501 8

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

YBWR


– +

18.75 (476,3)

16.50 (419,1)

5A FUSE


STANDOFF I.D.0.15 (3,8) DIA. (8 PLACES)CLEARANCE FOR #6 SCREWS

11.00 (279,4)

5.50 (139,7)

50 PIN EDGE CARD OR HEADER CONNECTORFOR LOGIC SIGNALS (SEE NOTES)

KEY SLOTPINS 23/25

2.60 (66,0)SOCKETS FOROPTIONAL 1A FUSE

1A FUSE


0.25(6,4)

2.20 (55,9)MAX.

0.75(19,1)

8.08 (205,2)

1.00 (25.4) (2 PLACES)

4.50(114,3)

4.00(101,6)

1.12(28,4)

0.40(10,2)



Sys

tem

50

System 50


Part No. 70MRCK24Dimensions are shown in inches (and millimeters).All tolerances are ± 0.010 (0,25) unless otherwise specified.

24 CHANNEL RACK: OpenLine®

Part No. 70LRCK24Dimensions are shown in inches (and millimeters).All tolerances are ± 0.010 (0,25)unless otherwise specified.

System 501 9

50 PIN EDGE CARD ORHEADER CONNECTORFOR LOGIC SIGNALS(SEE NOTE)

STANDOFF I.D.0.15 (3,8) DIA.(8 PLACES)CLEARANCEFOR #6 SCREWS

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

YBWR


+

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

–

13.45 (341,6)12.00 (304,8)

8.00 (203,2)

4.00 (101,6)

FIELD WIRING TERMINALSTRIPS (3 PLACES)

5A FUSE

0.73 (18,5)

5.42 (137,7)

MODULE HOLD DOWN STRIPWITH THUMB SCREWS

SOCKETSFOR OPTIONAL1A FUSE

1A FUSEKEY SLOTPINS 23/25

PIN 10.40 (10,2)

2.20 (55,9)MAX.

0.75 (19,1)

2.60(66,0)

3.05(77,5)

3.75(95,3)

0.35(8,9)

STATUSLED



BA

502 1

49

47

48

45

46

43

44

41

42

39

40

37

38

35

36

33

34

31

32

29

30

27

28

25

26

23

24

21

22

19

20

17

1816

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

2 4

31+5 +5

REMOVABLE JUMPERCONNECTS GNDTO EARTH GROUND

7.500(190,5)7.000

(177,8)

0.250(6,3)

50-PINSTRAIGHT

HEADERCONNECTOR

PIN 1

4.270(108,5)

3.800(96,5)

0.238(6,0)


5A FUSE

STANDOFF I.D. (3,81) DIA.(4 PLACES) CLEARANCE FOR #6 SCREW

3.383(85,9)MAX.

0.750 (19,0)REF.

LOGIC SUPPLY TERMINAL STRIPTOP ROW: + LOGIC SUPPLY BOTTOM ROW: GROUND

M0 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8 M9 M10 M11



Sys

tem

50

System 50

SCHEMATIC: Part Nos. 70RCK24 and 70MRCK24

24 CHANNEL RACK: OpenLine® DIN Rail Mount for System 50

Part No. 70LRCK24-DINDimensions are shown ininches (and millimeters).All tolerances are ± 0.010 (0,25)unless otherwise specified.

System 502 0

PCB 7.5 (190.50)

PCB4.3 (108.46)


2.2(56.49)

3.8(95.81)

REF


REMOVABLE JUMPERCONNECTS GND TO PLATED HOLEFOR GROUNDING

5A FUSE


PIN 1

50-PINSTRAIGHT

HEADERCONNECTOR


TOP ROW: + LOGIC SUPPLY

BOTTOM ROW: GND+5 +5

M11M10M9M8M7M6M5M4

BA

M3M2M1M0

502 1

49

47

48

45

46

43

44

41

42

39

40

37

38

35

36

33

34

31

32

29

30

27

28

25

26

23

24

21

22

19

20

17

1816

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

2 4

31


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48

–+

4947454341393735333129272523211917151311 9 7 5 3 1

504846444240383634323028262422201816141210 8 6 4 2

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

12345


OPTIONAL1A FUSE

50 PIN EDGECARD ORHEADERCONNECTORFOR LOGICSIGNALS


1A

5A

MODULEPOSITION

3.3K


Sys

tem

50

System 50


70RCK24 24 Card edge X X Standard70RCK24-HL 24 50-pin header with ejector levers X X Standard70MRCK24-EC 24 Card edge X X Mini70MRCK24-HL 24 50-pin header with ejector levers X X Mini70LRCK24-HL 24 50-pin header with ejector levers X X OpenLine®

70LRCK24-DIN 24 50-pin header, DIN rail mount X X OpenLine®



SCHEMATIC: Part No. 70LRCK24

System 502 1

45 47

46 48

41 43

42 44

37 39

38 40

33 35

34 36

12345678910

1112131517

141618

1921232527293133

2022242628303234

56789

4321

44464850

36384042

43454749

35373941

31

3230

2927

2826

2523

2422

2119

2018

1715

1614

1311

1210

97

86

53

42

1FIELD WIRINGTERMINAL STRIP

MODULELOCATION

PULL-UP RESISTORNETWORK 10K OHM(3 PLACES)

MOUNTING POSTFOR EARTH GROUNDCONNECTION

LOGICSUPPLY

TERMINALSTRIP

––++

M0 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8 M9 M10 M11


Sys

tem

50

System 50

RACKS24 Channel

FEATURES• For use with System 50 Style Controllers• Available for Miniature, G5 and

OpenLine® Modules• UL, CSA Certified


Part No. 70MRCQ24Dimensions are shown in inches(and millimeters).Tolerances are ± 0.010 (0,25)unless otherwise specified.

System 502 2

YBWR

AC IN

PUT

AC O

UTPU

TD

C IN

PUT

DC

OU

TPUT

+ –40

1

121110987654321 242322212019181716151413

543210 11109876

373839404142434445464748 252627282930313233343536

181920212223 121314151617

0.40(10,2)

8.00 (203,2)

7.50 (190,5)


0.25 (6,4)

0.25 (6,4)

FIELD WIRINGTERMINAL STRIP(POSITIONS 0-11)

6.00(152,4)

5.50(139,7)

STANDOFF I.D.0.15 (3,8) DIA.(4 PLACES)CLEARANCEFOR #6 SCREWS

FIELD WIRINGTERMINAL STRIPS(POSITIONS 12-23)

5AFUSE


2.20 (55,9)MAX.

0.75(19,1)

STATUS LED

50 PIN EDGE CARD ORHEADER CONNECTOR FOR LOGIC SIGNALS (SEE SCHEMATIC)

PIN 1

KEY SLOTPINS 23/25

2.60(66,0)

1A FUSE

SOCKETSFOROPTIONAL1A FUSE

1.70(43,2)



Sys

tem

50

System 50

24 CHANNEL RACK: G5

Part No. 70GRCQ24Dimensions are shown in inches(and millimeters).All tolerances are ± 0.010 (0,25)unless otherwise specified.

24 Channel Racks

System 502 3

7.50 (190,5)

7.00 (177,8)

PIN 1

6.25(158,8)

5.75(146,1)

HOLES FOR USER INSTALLED JUMPER(22 AWG) COPPER WIRE


.25 (6,4)

50 PIN STRAIGHT HEADER CONNECTOR



NYLON STANDOFF(1 PLACE)

3.380(85,85)

.750 (19,05) REF.

.25 (6,4)

.093 (2,36) REF.

1.675(42,55)

.075(1,91)



Sys

tem

50

System 50

SCHEMATIC: PART NO. 70MRCQ24 AND 70GRCQ24


70MRCQ24-EC 24 Card edge X X Mini70MRCQ24-HL 24 50-pin header with ejector levers X X Mini70GRCQ24-HL 24 50-pin header with ejector levers X X G5



(modules ordered separately)

System 502 4

–+

49

474543413937353331292725

23211917151311 9 7 5 3 1

1 A FUSE


MODULEPOSITION

ALLEVENPINS2-50

PULL UP RESISTOR NETWORK 3.3 KW(3 PLACES)

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

12345

23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12

48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25

54321

50 PINCONNECTOR

MODULEPOSITION


OPTIONAL1A FUSE

5A FUSES (MINI RACKS ONLY)

5A FUSES (MINI RACKS ONLY)

LED STATUSINDICATORS(MINI RACKS ONLY)

LED STATUSINDICATORS(MINI RACKS ONLY)


Sys

tem

50

System 50

32 CHANNEL RACK: G5

RACKS32 Channel

FEATURES• For Use with MicroDac or PAMUX

Controllers• Available for G5 I/O Modules• UL, CSA Certified

Part No. 70GRCM32Dimensions are in inches (and millimeters).All tolerances are ± 0.010 (0,25)unless indicated otherwise.

System 502 5

6.500(165,1)

6.000(152,4)

50 PIN STRAIGHTHEADER CONNECTOR


FUSE 5A


.250 (6,35)


.750 (19,05)REF.

3.338 (84,79)

REF.

.250 (6,35)

10.000 (254,00)

9.500 (241,3)

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

49 1

0Ω JUMPER



Sys

tem

50

System 50

SCHEMATIC: Part No. 70GRCM32


70GRCM32-HL 32 50-pin header with ejector levers X X G5

ORDERING INFORMATION (modules ordered separately)Available from your local Grayhill Distributor.For prices and discounts, contact a local SalesOffice, an authorized local Distributor, or Grayhill.

System 502 6

4964 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33

161 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15–+

0 1 2 3 4 5 6

47454341

12345

393735333129272523211917

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

54321

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

151311 9 7 5 3 1 2 4 6 810121416

50484644424038363432 302826 2422 20 18

5AFUSE


FIELDWIRINGTERMINALSTRIPS(POSITIONS0-15)

MODULEPOSITION

3.3KΩ RESISTORNETWORKS

MODULEPOSITION

FIELD WIRINGTERMINAL STRIPS(POSITIONS 16-31)

50 PIN EDGEOR HEADERCONNECTORFOR LOGICSIGNALS

49



Sys

tem

50

System 50

32 Module Racks and Bases

RACKS32 Channel ParallelController Board for72-PMX-32D

FEATURES• For Use with PAMUX Controllers• Available for G5 I/O Modules• UL, CSA Certified

Part No. 70GRCP32Dimensions are shown in inches(and millimeters).All tolerances are ± 0.010 (0,25)unless otherwise specified.


System 502 7

7.00(177,8)

6.50(165,1)


.250 (6,35)

.750 (19,05) REF

3.40 (86,36)

REF.

.250 (6,35)

10.50 (266,7)

10.00 (254,00)

33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64


50 PIN STRAIGHTHEADER CONNECTOR

FUSE 2A


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

70GR

CP

32-HL

POWERON LED

3.87(98,3)MAX.

+5V GND GND

RES NET 8 PIN WITHSOCKET (3 PLACES)



Sys

tem

50

System 50

SCHEMATIC: Part No. 70GRCP32


70GRCP32-HL 32 50-pin header with ejector levers X X G5


Available from your local Grayhill Distributor.For prices and discounts, contact a local SalesOffice, an authorized local Distributor, or Grayhill.

System 502 8

161 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15–+

0 1 2 3 4 5 6

12345

19212325

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

2AFUSE

FIELD WIRINGTERMINAL STRIPS(4 PLACES)

39404142434445464748495051525354

MODULEPOSITION

TO 72-PMX--32DBRAIN BOARD

+5V GND

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

R1

REDLED

272931333435363738

R2

4833 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47

16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 54321

49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64

70696867666564636261605958575655

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

R1 R2

TO 72-PMX-32DBRAIN BOARD

24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

PULL UP RESISTORNETWORK 3.3K½(4 PLACES)


MODULEPOSITION

+5V

GND

135791113151719212325272931333537394143454749

135791113151719212325272931333537394143454749

13579111315323028262422201816141210864217

2468101214161820222426283032343638404244464850

2468101214161820222426283032343638404244464850

GND

GND

50 PIN HEADER CONNECTORSFOR PARALLEL NETWORK


GND

+5V

TERMINATION RESISTOR SOCKETS. (3 PLACES) SEE NOTE.

NOTE: TERMINATION RESISTORS ARE PROVIDED ON EVERY I/O RACK.THEY ARE ONLY REQUIRED ON THE LAST RACK IN THE NETWORK.

Grayhil l , Inc. • 561 Hil lgrove Avenue • LaGrange, I l l inois 60525-5997 • USA • Phone: 708-354-1040 • Fax: 708-354-2820 • www.grayhil l .com

I/O

Modules

I/O MODULESI/O MODULESI/O MODULESI/O MODULESI/O MODULES

I/O

Modules


Contents: I/O Modules

Page

ENGINEERING INFORMATION, DIGITAL I/O MODULES ................................ 2

SELECTION CHART, DIGITAL I/O MODULES .................................................. 5

DIGITAL I/O MODULESAC Output Modules .............................................................................................. 6DC Output Modules .............................................................................................. 8Dry Contact and Electromechanical Relay Output Modules ............................ 10Manual Override Output Modules ...................................................................... 12AC Input Modules ............................................................................................... 14AC/DC Input Modules ........................................................................................ 16DC Input Modules ............................................................................................... 18Contact Closure Input Modules ......................................................................... 20

ENGINEERING INFORMATION AND SELECTION CHART,ANALOG I/O MODULES ................................................................................... 21

ANALOG I/O MODULESVoltage and Current Output Modules ................................................................ 25Voltage Input Modules ....................................................................................... 27Current Input Modules ........................................................................................ 30Thermocouple Input Modules ............................................................................ 32RTD Input Modules ............................................................................................ 34

I/O MODULES• Mix Digital and Analog

Modules on the SameRack

• Choice of Standard,Miniature, Fusible G5Package or Dual PointOpenLine® Styles

• Companion Racks for AllPackages Provide Mountingand Wiring TerminationSolutions

• Combine with ControllerBoards in a Distributed I/OSystem or Stand AloneConfiguration

WARRANTYAll products in this section arecovered by a limited two-yearwarranty from the date of purchase.All digital I/O and OpenLine® analogI/O are covered with a lifetimewarranty.

I/O1


I/O

Modules

I/O MODULESOur line of pluggable input and output modulesprovide a low cost, versatile method forinterconnecting real world analog and digitalsignals to data acquisition, monitoring, or controlsystems. All modules provide an opticallyi s o l a t e d b a r r i e r b e t w e e n s e n s i t i v emicroprocessor or digital logic circuits andfield power devices.

In the G5 and OpenLine® packages, analogand digital I/O modules are available with thesame pin-out. This gives the flexibility of mixingand matching module types on the samemounting rack or base; making them perfectin applications which require interface to avariety of different sensors and loads.

The case color of the single point modulesidentify their function. The industry standardfor single point I/O module case colors is:

Digital AC Output Module = Black CaseDigital DC Output Module = Red CaseDigital AC Input Module = Yellow CaseDigital DC Input Module = White Case

DIGITAL OUTPUT MODULESDigital output modules are used to switch ACand DC loads such as solenoids, motors, orlamps from logic signal levels. Their inputs aredirectly compatible with TTL or CMOS interfacecircuitry.

AC output modules have zero voltage turn-onof the load to greatly reduce generated EMIand RFI. They are highly immune to electrical

Digital I/O Module Engineering Information

transients, and have built-in RC snubbernetworks for increased capability with inductiveloads.

DC output modules can operate DC loads overa wide voltage range and have built-in voltagespike protection.

DIGITAL INPUT MODULESDigital input modules are used to monitor thestatus of a load or a sensor (such as a limitswitch, pressure switch, or temperatureswitch). The output of these modules is a logiclevel signal which corresponds to the status ofthe device being monitored. A high level outputsignal indicates the load is off (the switch isopen). A low level output signal indicates theload is on (the switch is closed). Input modulesare designed to give fast, clean switching byproviding filtering and hysteresis.

Input and output modules are compatible inthat the output of one can drive the input of theother.

UL, CSA AND CE APPROVALSAs one of the world's leading manufacturers ofI/O modules, we strive to assure that ourproducts comply with all of the applicableinternational standards. In doing so, we believeyour products will also be readily accepted andeasily certified. All modules shown in thissection have been tested to UL Standard 508and are documented in UL file number E58632.Similarly, they have been tested to CSA

Standard 22.2 No. 14-95M and are documentedin CSA file LR38763. Additionally, OpenLine®

modules were tested and passed CSA 22.2No. 213-M1987 Class I, Div. 2 Groups A, B, Cand D. Parts bearing the CE logo indicateconformance with EN50082-2 and EN50081-2(89/336/EEC EMC directive) as well as EN60950(61010-1) for the low voltage directive. ContactGrayhill for copies of our Declaration ofConformity or visit out website. Parts bearingthe TÜV logo indicate that they were the agencywhich performed the EN60950 evaluation.

CONSTRUCTION AND LIFETIMEWARRANTYAll of our I/O modules are hard potted withthermally conductive epoxy to withstand harshindustrial environments. The modules provideoptical isolation, immunity to mechanical shockand vibration, and operate over a widetemperature range. The module cases are asolvent resistant thermoplastic which meetsUL94-V-0 rating. The terminal pins are a tin-plated copper wire. Component selection andsurface mount construction allow low operatingjunction temperatures for long life. Superiordesign, rigorous testing, and field data give usthe confidence to back our I/O modules withthe industry's first lifetime warranty.

I/O MODULE WIRINGAnalog and digital modules can be placed atany I/O location, however, to minimize thepossibility of crosstalk and noise pickup it is agood practice to group similar module typestogether. 14 or 16 gauge wire is typically usedto wire the field devices to the I/O rack terminalblock.

Module Type70 = Digital Module, Standard Package70G = Digital Module, G5 Package70L = Digital Module, OpenLine® Package70M = Digital Module, Mini Package

FunctionOAC = Digital Output ACODC = Digital Output DCIAC = Digital Input AC

70M-ODC5A IDC = Digital Input DC

SuffixAC Inputs: Blank = 120 Vac A = 220 VacDC Inputs: Blank = 3-32 Vdc B = Fast Switching NP = 15-32 Vac/10-32 Vdc

G = 35-60 Vac/Vdc D =2.5–28 Vdc K = 2.5-16 VdcL = Inductive loads S = Dry Contacts

AC Outputs: Blank = 120 Vac A = 220 Vac A-11 = Non-Zero CrossMA = 120 Vac, Manual Override A-5 = Normally ClosedAMA = 240 Vac, Manual Override

DC Outputs: Blank = 3-60 Vdc Fast A = 4-200 Vdc R = Dry ContactMA = 3-60 Vdc, Manual Override B = 3-60 Vdc, Low Leakage

Logic Supply Voltage or RangeDigital Modules: Blank = 4.5-28 Vdc (OpenLine®)

5 Vdc, 15 Vdc, 24 Vdc = Logic Supply Voltage (Standard, Mini, G5)Analog Modules: 4.75-5.25 Vdc

PART NUMBER EXPLANATION: Digital I/O Modules

I/O2

I/O

Modules


45 3 2 1

1.90 (48,3)

.46(11,7)

GREEN STATUS LED

2.20(55,9)

.20 (5,1)

.40 (10,2)

1.15 (29,2)

1.35 (34,3)

1.55 (39,4)

O .040/.042(1,02/1,07)

.235 (5,97)

.15 (3,8)

.20 (5,1).90 (22,9)

DIMENSIONS: G5 Digital Modules

Ouput ModulesInput Modules

Dimensions shown in inches (and millimeters).Tolerances are ± .010 (0,25) unless indicated otherwise.

Digital I/O Modules Engineering Information

DIMENSIONS: OpenLine® Digital Modules


4 3 2 1

1.90 (48,3)

.46(11,7)

FUSE HOLDERGREEN STATUS LED

2.55(64,8)

2.20(55,9)

.20 (5,1)

.40 (10,2)

1.15 (29,2)

1.35 (34,3)

O .040/.042(1,02/1,07)

.235 (5,97)

.15 (3,8)

.20 (5,1).90 (22,9)

4-40 X 2-1/2" PHILLIPS HOLD-DOWN SCREW INCLUDEDWITH EACH MODULEMAXIMUM TORQUE = 5 FT-LB

Note: For PC board layout information, request Bulletin #745

I/O3

DATE CODE

2.23(56,64)

.24 (6,10)

.38(9,65)

.03(0,76)

2.70 (68,58)

.14(3,56)

.10(2,54)

.34 (8,64)

.22(5,59)

.51(12,95)2.09 (53,09)

.19(4,83)

PIN

9P

IN 8

PIN

7P

IN 6

PIN

5

PIN

4

PIN

3

PIN

2

PIN

1

Module TypeI/O Module Pin #

123456789

OutputFunctionOutput A+Output A-Output B+Output B-Logic GndVcc Ch. A InputCh. B InputModule ID

InputFunctionInput A+Input A-Input B+Input B-Logic GndVcc Ch. A StatusCh. B StatusModule ID

FUSE HOLDERS(OUTPUTS ONLY)

2.49(63,25)

.025(0,635)SQ.

GREEN STATUS LEDS


I/O

Modules

.40 (10,2)

1.70 (43,2)

1.00(25,4)

.235 ±.020(6,0 ± 0,52)

.30 (7,6).10 (2,5)

.40 (10,2)

.90 (22,9)

1.10 (27,9)

1.30 (33,0)

5 4 3 2 1

Ø .040/.042(1,02/1,07)

.60 (15,2)

1.70 (43,2)

1.25(31,8)

.235 ± .02(6,0 ± 0,52)

.30 (7,6)

.20 (5,1)

Ø .040/.042(1,02/1,07)

.30 (7,6)

.40 (10,2)

.90 (22,9)

1.10 (27,9)

1.00 (25,4)

1.30 (33,0)

5 4 3 2 1

DIMENSIONS: Standard and Miniature Digital Modules


Standard Module

4–40 X 1-1/2" PHILLIPS HOLD-DOWN SCREW INCLUDEDWITH EACH MODULEMAXIMUM TORQUE = 5 FT-LB

OUTPUTMODULESHAVE ONLYTERMINALSNUMBER 1-4

OUTPUTMODULESHAVE ONLYTERMINALSNUMBER 1-4

Miniature Module

Digital I/O Modules Engineering Information

WIRING DIAGRAM: Digital I/O Modules

+

–

LOADDC SUPPLY

DIGITALAC OUTPUT

HOT

NEUTRALAC SUPPLY

AC SUPPLYHOT

NEUTRAL

DC SUPPLY

LOAD2 1

2 1DIGITAL

DC OUTPUT

2 1DIGITALAC INPUT

DIGITALDC INPUT

2 1

+

–

DIGITALCONTACTCLOSURE

2 1

I/O4

I/O

Modules


I/O MODULE SIZE

MiniatureSaves 35% Space

StandardCompatible Industry Size

G5Fused Outputs,

Integral LED

DigitalAC Output

DigitalDC Output

DigitalAC Input

DigitalDC Input

Load Control Vcc Unique Options120 Vac 5 Vdc Random Turn-on220 Vac 15 Vdc Normally Closed

24 Vdc Manual Override4.5-28 Vdc Inductive Load

Load Control Vcc Unique Options60 Vdc 5 Vdc Dry Contacts

200 Vdc 15 Vdc Manual Override24 Vdc

4.5-28 Vdc

Supply Vcc Input Voltage Unique Options5 Vdc 120 Vac High DC15 Vdc 220 Vac Voltage24 Vdc Input

4.5-28 Vdc

Supply Vcc Input Voltage Unique Options5 Vdc 3 to 32 Vdc 10 to 32 Vdc/15 Vdc 15 to 32 Vac24 Vdc 8 KHz Switching

4.5-28 Vdc 35 to 60 Vac/VdcContact Closure

(Check Specifications for Input and Output combinations, Feature or Option availability.)FUNCTION

Digital I/O Module Selection Chart

OpenLine®

Two Channel,Fused Outputs,

Integral LED

Module Calibrator/ProgrammerThe field programmer can be used to test,calibrate and transfer data to smart OpenLine®

modules. On-board switches also allow testing of

Part Number Description

Programmer/Calibrator

70L-PROG Field programmer/calibrator for OpenLine® I/O


digital I/O modules. The programmer connects toa PC through an RS-232 serial port. Software isincluded to communicate with smart I/O modules.

Test DigitalI/O Modules

I/O5


I/O

Modules

AC Output Modules

FEATURES• Transient Protection: Meets the

requirements of IEEE 472, “SurgeWithstanding Capability Test”

• SPST, Normally Open• Zero Crossing Turn-On• UL, CSA, CE, TÜV Certified• Optical Isolation• OpenLine® and G5 Modules

Provide Replaceable 5x20 mmGlass Fuses

• Built-in Status LED• Lifetime Warranty

Maximum Current VersusAmbient TemperatureThe chart indicates continuous current to limitthe junction temperatures to 100°C. Informationis based on steady state heat transfer in a 2cubic foot sealed enclosure.

Figure 1

DIMENSIONSFor complete dimensional drawings, see pagesL-4 or L-5.

FUSESG5 Fuses are 5 Amp Littelfuse part number217005 or equivalent. OpenLine® fuses are3.15 Amp Littelfuse part number 2173.15.

CIRCUITRY

70L-OAC 70G-OAC 70-OAC 70M-OAC

4

3

2

1

-40˚ -20˚ 0 20˚ 40˚ 60˚ 80˚ 100˚AMBIENT TEMPERATURE (˚C)

LO

AD

CU

RR

EN

T (

AM

PS

) STANDARD, G5 PACKAGES

MINIATURE PACKAGE

OPENLINE PACKAGE/CH

Package Style Std (70-) Mini (70M-) G5 (70G-) OL (70L-)

Specifications Units

Load Current Range1 A rms 0.03 to 3.5 0.03 to 3.0 0.03 to 3.5 0.03 to 2.0/CHMaximum 1 Cycle Surge2 A rms 80 80 80 30Maximum Turn-On-Time (60 Hz)3 mSec 8.33 8.33 8.33 8.33Maximum Turn-Off Time (60 Hz) mSec 8.33 8.33 8.33 8.33Static dv/dt7 V/µsec 3000 3000 3000 3000Typ. Power Dissipation W/A 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0Isolation Voltage4 V rms 4000 4000 4000 2500Vibration5 MIL-STD-202 MIL-STD-202 MIL-STD-202 IEC68-2-6Mechanical Shock6 MIL-STD-202 MIL-STD-202 MIL-STD-202 IEC68-2-27Storage Temp. Range °C -40 to 125 -40 to 125 -40 to 125 -40 to 100Operating Temp. Range °C -40 to 100 -40 to 100 -40 to 100 -40 to 85Warranty Lifetime Lifetime Lifetime Lifetime

1 See Figure 1 for derating.2 Maximum 10 cycle surge is 50% of 1 cycle surge. Application of maximum surge may not be repeated until module temperature has returned

to its steady state value.3 Except 70-OAC5A5 which is 200 µSec and 70-OAC5A-11, 70M-OAC5A-11, and 70G-OAC5A-11 which are 100 µSec.4 Field to logic and channel-to-channel if Grayhill racks are used.5 MIL-STD-202, Method 204, 20 , 10-2000 Hz or IEC68-2-6, 0.15 mm/sec2, 10-150 Hz.6 MIL-STD-202, Method 213, Condition F, 1500G or IEC68-2-27, 11 mS, 15g.7 Except part numbers with -L suffix which have a dv/dt rating of 200 V/µSec.

SPECIFICATIONS: By Package Style

Standard, Mini, G5 OpenLine®

1

2

3

4

Rx

VAC

DC CONTROL

TRIGGERCIRCUIT

SNUBBER

LOAD

LOAD

–

+

Fuse and status LED in G5 and OpenLine modules only.

TYPICAL WIRING FOR MODULE 0

5

1 1

2 2

6

7

2.15K

MODULE

OPTICALISOLATION

OPTICALISOLATION SNUBBER

SNUBBER

CHANNEL A

CHANNEL B

B

A

RACKOR

BASE

LOAD

LOAD

3 3

4 4

TERMINALBLOCK #

I/O MODULEPIN #

GND

Vcc

CH. A CONTROL

CH. B CONTROL

MODULE ID

I/O6

I/O

Modules


AC Output Modules

Miniature, Normally Open, Random Turn-on 70M-OAC5A-11

Miniature, Normally Open, Zero Voltage Turn-on (ZVT) 70M-OAC5 70M-OAC5A 70M-OAC15 70M-OAC15A 70M-OAC24 70M-OAC24A

Miniature, Normally Open, ZVT, Inductive Load 70M-OAC5-L 70M-OAC5A-L

Standard, Normally Closed, Random Turn-on 70-OAC5A5

Standard, Normally Open, Random Turn-on 70-OAC5A-11 70-OAC24A-11

Standard, Normally Open, ZVT 70-OAC5 70-OAC5A 70-OAC15 70-OAC15A 70-OAC24 70-OAC24A

Standard, Normally Open, ZVT, Inductive Load 70-OAC5-L 70-OAC5A-L

Specifications UnitsNominal Line Voltage Vac 120 240 120 240 120 240Load Voltage Range Vac 24-140 24-280 24-140 24-280 24-140 24-280Minimum Peak Blocking Voltage Volts 400 600 400 600 400 600Maximum Off-state Leakage @ 60Hz mA, rms 2 4 2 4 2 4Nominal Logic Voltage (Vcc) Vdc 5 5 15 15 24 24Logic Voltage Range Vdc 2.5-10 2.5-10 10-18 10-18 15-30 15-30Max. Logic Supply Current @ Nominal Vcc mA 16 16 9 9 9 9Nominal Input Resistance (Rx) Ω 240 240 1800 1800 2700 2700Minimum Drop Out Voltage Vdc 1 1 1 1 1 1Maximum Reverse Logic Voltage Vdc -5 -5 -5 -5 -5 -5

Type/Function Grayhill Part Number

Standard and Miniature ModulesSPECIFICATIONS: By Part Number

G5 Modules

Grayhill Part Number

70G-OAC5 70G-OAC5A 70G-OAC15 70G-OAC15A 70G-OAC24 70G-OAC24A

70G-OAC5-L 70G-OAC5A-L 70G-OAC15-L 70G-OAC15A-L 70G-OAC24-L 70G-OAC24A-L

70G-OAC5A-11

Nominal Line Voltage Vac 120 240 120 240 120 240Load Voltage Range Vac 24-140 24-280 24-140 24-280 24-140 24-280Minimum Peak Blocking Voltage Volts 400 600 400 600 400 600Maximum Off-state Leakage @ 60Hz mA, rms 2 4 2 4 2 4Nominal Logic Voltage (Vcc) Vdc 5 5 15 15 24 24Logic Voltage Range Vdc 4-6 4-6 8-20 8-20 18-32 18-32Max. Logic Supply Current @ Nominal Vcc mA 20 20 12 12 8 8Nominal Input Resistance (Rx) W 100 100 1000 1000 2700 2700Minimum Drop Out Voltage Vdc 1 1 1 1 1 1Maximum Reverse Logic Voltage Vdc -5 -5 -5 -5 -5 -5

OpenLine® Modules


Dual, Fusible, Normally Open, ZVT 70L-OAC 70L-OACA

Dual, Fusible, Normally Open, ZVT, Inductive Load 70L-OAC-L 70L-OACA-L


Nominal Line Voltage Vac 120 240Load Voltage Range Vac 24-140 24-280Minimum Peak Blocking Voltage Volts 600 600Maximum Off-State Leakage @ 60 Hz mA, rms 2 4Nominal Logic Voltage Vdc 5 5Logic Voltage Range Vdc 4.5-28 4.5-28Max. Logic Supply Current @ Nominal Vcc mA 7/CH 7/CHModule ID Resistance to Logic Ground Ω 2.15K 2.15KMinimum Drop Out Voltage Vdc 1 1


Type/Function

G5 Fusible, Normally Open, ZVT

G5 Fusible, Normally Open, ZVT, Inductive Load

G5 Fusible, Normally Open, Random Turn-on


I/O7


I/O

Modules

70L-ODC 70G-ODC 70-ODC 70M-ODC

CIRCUITRY

DIMENSIONSFor complete dimensional drawings, see pagesL-4 or L-5.

FUSESG5 Fuses are 5 Amp Littelfuse part number217005 or equivalent. OpenLine® fuses are3.15 Amp Littelfuse part number 2173.15.

Fuse kits available, see page L-104.

DC Output Modules


requirements of IEEE 472, "SurgeWithstanding Capability Test"

• SPST, Normally Open• UL, CSA, CE, TÜV Certified• Optical Isolation• OpenLine® and G5 Modules

Provide Replaceable 5x20mmGlass Fuses

• Built-in Status LED• Lifetime Warranty

Figure 1

Maximum Current VersusAmbient TemperatureThe chart indicates continuous current to limitthe junction temperatures to 115°C. Informationis based on steady state heat transfer in a 2cubic foot sealed enclosure.

4

3

2

1


LO

AD

CU

RR

EN

T (

AM

PS

) STANDARD, G5 PACKAGES

MINIATURE PACKAGE

OPENLINE PACKAGE/CH

200 VDC STYLE



Load Current Range1 A 0.02-3.5 0.02-3.0 0.02-3.5 0.02-2.0/CHSurge Current for 1 Sec. A 5 5 5 5Maximum Reverse Logic Voltage Vdc -5 -5 -5 -5Isolation Voltage2 Vrms 4000 4000 4000 2500Vibration3 MIL-STD-202 MIL-STD-202 MIL-STD-202 IEC68-2-6Mechanical Shock4 MIL-STD-202 MIL-STD-202 MIL-STD-202 IEC68-2-27Storage Temp. Range °C -40 to 125 -40 to 125 -40 to 125 -40 to 100Operating Temp. Range °C -40 to 100 -40 to 100 -40 to 100 -40 to 85Warranty Lifetime Lifetime Lifetime Lifetime

1 See Figure 1 for derating.2 Field to logic and channel-to-channel if Grayhill racks are used.3 MIL-STD-202, Method 204, 20 G, 10-2000 Hz or IEC68-2-6, 0.15 mm/sec2, 10-150 Hz.4 MIL-STD-202, Method 213, Condition F, 1500 G or IEC68-2-27, 11 mS, 15g.



1

2

3

4

Rx

VDC

DC CONTROL

VOLTAGESPIKE

PROTECTION

LOAD

LOAD

DRIVERCIRCUIT

–

+

–

+

Fuse and status LED in G5 and OpenLine modules only.


2.15K

B

A

OPTICALISOLATION

OPTICALISOLATION

DRIVERCIRCUIT

DRIVERCIRCUIT

CHANNEL A

CHANNEL B

BASEOR

RACK

I/O MODULEPIN #

TERMINALBLOCK #

LOAD

DCSUPPLY

DCSUPPLY

LOAD

+

–

+

–

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

GND

Vcc

CH. ACONTROL

CH. BCONTROL

MODULE ID

I/O8

I/O

Modules


DC Output Modules


Miniature, Normally Open 70M-ODC5 70M-ODC5A 70M-ODC5B 70M-ODC15 70M-ODC15B 70M-ODC24 70M-ODC24B

Standard, Normally Open 70-ODC5 70-ODC5A 70-ODC5B 70-ODC15 70-ODC15B 70-ODC24 70-ODC24B


Maximum Line Voltage Vdc 60 200 60 60 60 60 60Load Voltage Range Vdc 3-60 4-200 3-60 3-60 3-60 3-60 3-60Max. Off-State Leakage @ Max. Line mA 1.5 0.01 0.01 1.5 0.01 1.5 0.01Maximum Turn-On Time µSec 20 75 75 20 75 20 75Maximum Turn-Off Time µSec 50 750 500 50 500 50 500Typ. Power Dissipation W/A 1 1.5 1 1 1 1 1Clamping Voltage Vdc 80 360 80 80 80 80 80Nominal Logic Voltage (Vcc) Vdc 5 5 5 15 15 24 24Logic Voltage Range Vdc 2.5-10 2.5-9 2.5-10 10-18 10-18 15-30 15-30Maximum Logic Supply Current @ Nominal Vcc mA 14 18 14 9 9 9 9Nominal Input Resistance (Rx) Ω 300 220 300 1800 1800 2700 2700Minimum Drop Out Voltage Vdc 1 1 1 1 1 1 1


Standard and Miniature ModulesSPECIFICATIONS: By Part Number

G5 and OpenLine® Modules

70G-ODC570G-ODC570G-ODC570G-ODC570G-ODC5 70G-ODC5A70G-ODC5A70G-ODC5A70G-ODC5A70G-ODC5A 70G-ODC5B70G-ODC5B70G-ODC5B70G-ODC5B70G-ODC5B 70G-ODC1570G-ODC1570G-ODC1570G-ODC1570G-ODC15 70G-ODC15B70G-ODC15B70G-ODC15B70G-ODC15B70G-ODC15B 70G-ODC2470G-ODC2470G-ODC2470G-ODC2470G-ODC24 70G-ODC24B70G-ODC24B70G-ODC24B70G-ODC24B70G-ODC24B

Maximum Line Voltage Vdc 60 200 60 60 60 60 60Load Voltage Range Vdc 3-60 4-200 3-60 3-60 3-60 3-60 3-60Max. Off-State Leakage @ Max. Line mA 1.5 0.01 0.01 1.5 0.01 1.5 0.01Maximum Turn-On Time µSec 20 75 75 20 75 20 75Maximum Turn-Off Time µSec 50 750 500 50 500 50 500Typ. Power Dissipation W/A 1 1.5 1 1 1 1 1Clamping Voltage Vdc 80 360 80 80 80 80 80Nominal Logic Voltage (Vcc) Vdc 5 5 5 15 15 24 24Logic Voltage Range Vdc 4-6 4-6 4-6 10-20 10-20 18-32 18-32Maximum Logic Supply Current@ Nominal Vcc mA 13 13 13 9 9 9 9Nominal Input Resistance (Rx) Ω 150 150 150 1500 1500 2700 2700Minimum Drop Out Voltage Vdc 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Grayhill Part Number Type/Function

Fusible, Normally Open


OpenLine® Modules


Dual, Fusible, Normally Open 70L-ODC 70L-ODCA 70L-ODCB


Maximum Line Voltage Vdc 60 200 60Load Voltage Range Vdc 3-60 4-200 3-60Max. Off-State Leakage @ Max. Line mA 1.5 .01 .01Maximum Turn-On Time µSec 20 75 75Maximum Turn-Off Time µSec 50 750 500Typ. Power Dissipation WA 1 1.5 1Clamping Voltage Vdc 80 360 80Nominal Logic Voltage (Vcc) Vdc 5 5 5Logic Voltage Range Vdc 4.5-28 4.5-28 4.5-28Maximum Logic Supply Current

@ Nominal Vcc mA 7/CH 7/CH 7/CHModule ID Resistance to LogicGround Ω 2.15K 2.15K 2.15KMinimum Drop Out Voltage Vdc 1 1 1

I/O9


I/O

Modules

Dry Contact and Mechanical Relay Output Modules

70L-ODC5R 70G-ODCR/OACRLY 70-ODCR/OACRLY 70M-ODCR

Package Style Std (70-) Mini (70M-) G5 (70G-) OpenLine® (70L-)


Isolation Voltage1 Vrms 1500 1500 1500 1500Vibration2 MIL-STD-202 MIL-STD-202 MIL-STD-202 IEC68-2-6Mechanical Shock3 MIL-STD-202 MIL-STD-202 MIL-STD-202 IEC68-2-7Storage Temp. Range °C -40 to 70 -40 to 70 -40 to 70 -40 to 70Operating Temp. Range °C -40 to 70 -40 to 70 -40 to 70 -40 to 70

1 Field to logic and channel-to-channel if Grayhill racks are used.2 MIL-STD-202, Method 204, 20 G, 10-2000 Hz or IEC68-2-6, 0.15 mm/sec2, 10-150 Hz.3 MIL-STD-202, Method 213, Condition F, 1500 G or IEC68-2-27, 11 mS, 15g.

SPECIFICATIONS BY PACKAGE STYLE

CIRCUITRY


VAC/VDC

+VCC

INPUT

GROUND

1

2

3

4

5

AMP

LOAD

LOAD

Fuse and status LED in G5 modules only.

AMP

AMP

1

2

3

4

5

6

8

7

9

FEATURES• SPST, Normally Open• UL, CSA Certified• 1500 Vac Optical Isolation• G5 and OpenLine® Modules Provide

Replaceable 5x20mm Glass Fuse• Built-in Status LED• Lifetime Warranty• Switch AC or DC with the Same

Module• Very Low Off-State Leakage Current

for AC loads• No Off-State Leakage Current for

DC loads

I/O10

I/O

Modules


Dry Contact and Mechanical Relay Output Modules


Miniature, Normally Open 70M-ODC5R 70M-ODC24RStandard, Normally Open 70-ODC5R 70-OAC5RLY 70-ODC24R


Maximum Line Voltage Vdc/Vac 100/120 110/250 100/120Load Voltage Range Vdc/Vac 0-100/0-120 0-110/0-250 0-100/0-120Maximum Contact Rating W 10 90 10Maximum Switching Current1 A 0.5 3.0 0.5Maximum Carry Current1 A 1.0 5.0 1.0Minimum Life Expectancy

@ 10 Vdc/10 mA Cycles 200 x 106 — 200 x 106

@ 48 Vdc/100 mA Cycles 500 x 103 — 500 x 103

@ 120 Vac/80 mA Cycles 500 x 103 — 500 x 103

@ 30 Vdc or 230 Vac/3A Cycles — 100 x 106 —Maximum Contact Resistance mΩ 250 250 250Maximum Off-State Leakage mA .002 .002 .002Maximum Turn-On Time2 mSec 1 11 1Maximum Turn-Off Time2 mSec 1 11 1Nominal Logic Voltage (Vcc) Vdc 5 5 24Logic Voltage Range Vdc 4.8-6.0 4.8-6.0 20-30Maximum Logic Supply Current @ Nominal Vcc mA 10 26 16Nominal Input Resistance (Rx) Ω 500 200 1700Minimum Drop-Out Voltage Vdc 2.5 4.8 23Maximum Reverse Logic Voltage Vdc -5 -5 -5

Standard and Miniature ModulesSPECIFICATIONS BY PART NUMBER

G5 and OpenLine® Modules


G5 Fusible, Normally Open 70L-ODC5R 70G-ODC5R 70G-OAC5RLY 70G-ODC24R


Maximum Line Voltage Vdc/Vac 200/200 100/120 110/250 100/120Load Voltage Range Vdc/Vac 0-200/0-200 0-100/0-120 0-110/0-250 0-100/0-120Maximum Contact Rating W 10 10 90 10Maximum Switching Current1 A 0.5 0.5 3.0 0.5Maximum Carry Current1 A 1.5 1.0 5.0 1.0Minimum Life Expectancy@ 1Vdc/10 mA Cycles 1000 x 106 — — —@ 10 Vdc/10 mA Cycles — 200 x 106 — 200 x 106

@ 48 Vdc/100 mA Cycles — 500 x 103 — 500 x 103

@ 120 Vac/80 mA Cycles 500 x 103 500 x 103 — 500 x 103

@ 30 Vdc or 230 Vac/3A Cycles — 100 x 106 —Maximum Contact Resistance mΩ 300 250 250 250Maximum Turn-On Time2 mSec 1 1 11 1Maximum Turn-Off Time2 mSec 1 1 11 1Max. Off-State Leakage @ Max. Line mA .002 .002 .002 .002Nominal Logic Voltage (Vcc) Vdc 5 5 5 24Logic Voltage Range Vdc 4.5-6.0 4.8-6.0 4.8-6.0 18-32Max. Logic Supply Current@ Nominal Vcc mA 30 max./channel 10 26 23Nominal Input Resistance (Rx) Ω 167 500 200 1200Minimum Drop-Out Voltage Vdc 4.5 1 1 23

1 Inductive loads require diode suppression or RC network.2 Times include debounce.


I/O11


I/O

Modules

Manual Override Output Modules

FEATURES• Integral Three Position Manual

On/Manual Off and AutomaticControl Toggle Switch

• Transient Protection: Meets therequirements of IEEE 472, “SurgeWithstanding Capability Test”

• UL, CSA Certified• Optical Isolation• G5 Modules Provide Replaceable

5x20 mm Glass Fuse• Built-in Status LED

CIRCUITRYMaximum Current VersusAmbient TemperatureThe chart indicates continuous current to limitthe junction temperatures to 100°C. Informationis based on steady state heat transfer in a twocubic foot sealed enclosure.

Figure 1

FUSESG5 Fuses are 5 Amp Littelfuse part number217005 or equivalent.

Figure 2

Maximum Peak Surge CurrentVersus Surge Duration (AC Outputs)Information is based on a supply frequency of60 Hz sinusoidal and a resistive or inductiveload. Application of maximum surge currentmay not be repeated until the moduletemperature has returned to its steady statevalue.

4

3

2

1


LO

AD

CU

RR

EN

T (

AM

PS

) G5 PACKAGE

80

4060

3020

10

6431

11 2 3 4 6 2010 40 60 100 1000

300200

100

NUMBER OF FULL CYCLES AT 60 HERTZ

PE

AK

SU

RG

E C

UR

RE

NT

(A

MP

ER

ES

)

STANDARD, MINI, G5OPENLINE

1

2

3

4

Rx

VAC

DC CONTROL

TRIGGERCIRCUIT

SNUBBER

LOAD

LOAD

–

+

5

OFF

AUTOON

1

2

3

4

Rx

VDC

DC CONTROL

VOLTAGESPIKE

PROTECTION

LOAD

LOAD

DRIVERCIRCUIT

–

+

–

+

5

OFF

AUTOON

AC Outputs DC Outputs

I/O12

I/O

Modules


Manual Override Output Modules

SPECIFICATIONS: All Modules*

Output SpecificationsLoad Current Range (rms): 0.03 to 3.5Amps, Maximum current is derated as shownin Figure 1.Maximum Surge Current (peak): 80 Ampsat 60 Hz, 1 cycle as qualified by Figure 2 forAC outputs. 5 Amp maximum for 1 second forDC outputs.Turn-on Time (60 Hz): 8.3 mSec maximumfor AC outputs. 20 µSec maximum for DCoutputs.Turn-off Time (60 Hz): 8.3 mSec maximum

for AC outputs. 50 µSec maximum for DCoutputs.ON State Voltage Drop (peak): 1.5 voltsmax.Power Dissipation: 1.0 Watt/Amp typical

General CharacteristicsIsolation Voltage Field to Logic: 4000 Vac(rms) minimumVibration: 20 G's peak or .06” double amplitude10–2000 Hz per MIL–STD–202, Method 204,Condition D


AC OutputsSPECIFICATIONS: By Part Number

DC Outputs


G5, Zero Voltage Turn On, Manual Override 70G-OAC5MA 70G-OAC5AMA 70G-OAC24MA 70G-OAC24AMA


Nominal Line Voltage Vac 120 240 120 240Load Voltage Range Vac 24-140 24-280 24-140 24-280Minimum Peak Blocking Voltage Volts 400 600 400 600Maximum Off-state Leakage @ 60Hz mA, rms 2 4 2 4Nominal Logic Voltage (Vcc) Vdc 5 5 24 24Logic Voltage Range Vdc 4-6 4-6 18-32 18-32Max. Logic Supply Current @ Nominal Vcc mA 20 20 8 8Nominal Input Resistance (Rx) Ω 100 100 2700 2700Minimum Drop-Out Voltage Vdc 1 1 1 1Maximum Reverse Logic Voltage Vdc -5 -5 -5 -5Maximum Zero Voltage Offset (Vpeak) 8 8 8 8Frequency Range (Hz) 25-70 25-70 25-70 25-70

70G-ODC5MA 70G-ODC24MA

Maximum Line Voltage Vdc 60 60Load Voltage Range Vdc 3-60 3-60Maximum Off-state Leakage @ 60 Vdc mA 1.5 1.5Maximum Turn-on Time µSec 20 20Maximum Turn-off Time µSec 50 50Nominal Logic Voltage (Vcc) Vdc 5 24Logic Voltage Range Vdc 4-6 18-32Max. Logic Supply Current@ Nominal Vcc mA 13 9Nominal Input Resistance (Rx) Ω 150 2700Minimum Drop-Out Voltage Vdc 1 1Maximum Reverse Logic Voltage Vdc -5 -5Maximum Clamping Voltage Vdc 80 80


Mechanical Shock: 1500 G's 0.5 mS half-sine per MIL–STD–202, Method 213,Condition FStorage Temperature Range:-40°C to +125°COperating Temperature Range:-40°C to +100°C

Type/Function

G5 Manual Override


*Specifications apply over operating temperature range unless noted otherwise.

I/O13


I/O

Modules

CIRCUITRY


requirements of IEEE 472, “SurgeWithstanding Capability Test”

• UL, CSA, CE, TÜV Certified (TÜVnot available on OpenLine)

• Optical Isolation• OpenLine® and G5 Modules have

Built-in Status LED• Lifetime Warranty

AC Input Modules



Output Current Range mA 1-50 1-50 1-50 1-50Minimum Output Breakdown Voltage Vdc 50 50 50 50Maximum Turn-On Time mS 20 20 20 20Maximum Turn-Off Time mS 20 20 20 20Isolation Voltage1 Vrms 4000 4000 4000 2500Vibration2 MIL-STD-202 MIL-STD-202 MIL-STD-202 IEC68-2-6Mechanical Shock3 MIL-STD-202 MIL-STD-202 MIL-STD-202 IEC68-2-27Storage Temp. Range °C -40 to +125 -40 to +125 -40 to +125 -40 to +100Operating Temp. Range °C -40 to +100 -40 to +100 -40 to +100 -40 to +85Warranty Lifetime Lifetime Lifetime Lifetime




1

2

3

4

5

Rx

VDC

+VCC

OUTPUT

GROUND

INPUTVOLTAGE

HYST. CIRC.

CURRENTREGULATING

Status LED in G5 modules only.

+ TYPICAL WIRING FOR MODULE 70I/O MODULEPIN #

INPUT DEVICE 1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

6

7

5

8

90Ω

A

B

MODULE

TERMINALBLOCK #

INPUT DEVICE

OPTICALISOLATION

FILTER

FILTER

OPTICALISOLATION HYSTERESIS

HYSTERESIS

BASEOR

RACK

Vcc

CH. A STATUS

GND

CH. B STATUS

MODULE ID

*

* Separate supplies may also be used.

I/O14

70L-IAC 70G-IAC 70-IAC 70M-IAC

I/O

Modules


SPECIFICATIONS: By Part NumberStandard and Miniature Modules


Miniature 70M-IAC5 70M-IAC5A 70M-IAC15 70M-IAC15A 70M-IAC24 70M-IAC24AStandard 70-IAC5 70-IAC5A 70-IAC15 70-IAC15A 70-IAC24 70-IAC24A


Nominal Input Voltage Vac 120 240 120 240 120 240Input Voltage Range1 Vac/Vdc 90-140 180-280 90-140 180-280 90-140 180-280Input Current @ Maximum Input Voltage mA, rms 8 6 8 6 8 6Nominal Input Resistance (Rx) Ω 22K 60K 22K 60K 22K 60KMaximum Pick-Up Voltage (Output Low) Vac 90 180 90 180 90 180Minimum Drop-Out Voltage (Output High) Vac 25 50 25 50 25 50Nominal Logic Voltage (Vcc) Vdc 5 5 15 15 24 24Logic Voltage Range Vdc 3-6 3-6 8-18 8-18 15-30 15-30Max. Logic Supply Current @ Nominal Vcc mA 10 10 10 10 10 10

AC Input Modules

G5 Modules


G5, Status LED 70G-IAC5 70G-IAC5A 70G-IAC15 70G-IAC15A 70G-IAC24 70G-IAC24A


Nominal Input Voltage Vac 120 240 120 240 120 240Input Voltage Range1 Vac/Vdc 90-140 180-280 90-140 180-280 90-140 180-280Input Current @ Maximum Input Voltage mA, rms 8 6 8 6 8 6Nominal Input Resistance (Rx) Ω 22K 60K 22K 60K 22K 60KMaximum Pick-Up Voltage (Output Low) Vac 90 180 90 180 90 180Minimum Drop-Out Voltage (Output High) Vac 25 50 25 50 25 50Nominal Logic Voltage (Vcc) Vdc 5 5 15 15 24 24Logic Voltage Range Vdc 4.5-6 4.5-6 10-18 10-18 17-30 17-30Max. Logic Supply Current @ Nominal Vcc mA 10 10 10 10 10 10

OpenLine® Modules


70L-IAC 70L-IACA

Nominal Input Voltage Vac 120 240Input Voltage Range1 Vac/Vdc 0-140 0-280Input Current @ Max. Input Voltage mA, rms 8 6Nominal Input Resistance (Rx) Ω 22K 64KMax. Pick-Up Voltage (Output Low) Vac 90 180Min. Drop-Out Voltage (Output High) Vac 25 50Nominal Logic Voltage (Vcc) Vdc 5 5Logic Voltage Range Vdc 4.5-28 4.5-28Max. Logic Supply Current @ Nominal Vcc mA 6/CH 6/CHModule ID Resistance to Logic Ground Ω 0 0

1 For input voltages in the range of 15-32 Vac, or 35-60 Vac, see DC input Modules with the NP or G suffix.


Type/Function

Dual, Status LED


I/O15


I/O

Modules

70L-IDC 70G-IDC 70-IDC 70M-IDC

Standard, Mini, G5


requirements of IEEE 472, “SurgeWithstanding Capability Test”*

• Non-Polarized Types ProvideInputs For AC or DC

• UL, CSA, CE , TÜV Certified (TÜVnot available on OpenLine)

• Optical Isolation• OpenLine® and G5 Modules have

Built-in Status LED

AC/DC Input Modules



Output Current Range mA 1-50 1-50 1-50 1-50Min. Output Breakdown Voltage Vdc 50 50 50 50Isolation Voltage1 Vrms 4000 4000 4000 2500Vibration2 MIL-STD-202 MIL-STD-202 MIL-STD-202 IEC68-2-6Mechanical Shock3 MIL-STD-202 MIL-STD-202 MIL-STD-202 IEC68-2-27Storage Temp. Range °C -40 to +125 -40 to +125 -40 to +125 -40 to +100Operating Temp. Range °C -40 to +100 -40 to +100 -40 to +100 -40 to +85Warranty Lifetime Lifetime Lifetime Lifetime



CIRCUITRY

OpenLine®

1

2

3

4

5

Rx

VDC

+VCC

OUTPUT

GROUND

INPUTVOLTAGE

HYST. CIRC.

CURRENTREGULATING


+ TYPICAL WIRING FOR MODULE 0

OPTICALISOLATION

MODULE

HYSTERESIS

HYSTERESISOPTICALISOLATION

FILTER

FILTER

BASEOR

RACK

INPUTDEVICE

INPUTDEVICE

DCSUPPLY

1

2

3

4

TERMINALBLOCK #

I/O MODULEPIN #

A

B

0Ω

+/-

+/-

+/-

+/-

1

2

3

4

6

7

5

8

9

*

* Separate supplies may also be used.

Vcc

CH. A STATUS

GND

CH. B STATUS

MODULE ID

I/O16

I/O

Modules



Miniature, Non-Polarized 70M-IDC5G 70M-IDC5NP 70M-IDCI5NPStandard, Non-Polarized 70-IDC5G 70-IDC5NP 70-IDC15NP 70-IDC24NP


Maximum Input Voltage Vac/Vdc 60 32 32 32 Input Voltage Range1 Vac/Vdc 35-60 15-32/10-32 15-32/10-32 15-32/10-32 Input Current @ Max. Input Voltage mA 6 18 18 18

Maximum Turn-on Time mSec 10 5 5 5Maximum Turn-off Time mSec 10 5 5 5Nominal Input Resistance (Rx) Ω 10K 1.8K 1.8K 1.8KMaximum Pick Up Voltage (Output Low) Vac/Vdc 35 15/10 15/10 15/10Minimum Drop Out Voltage (Output High) Vac/Vdc 9 3 3 3Nominal Logic Voltage (Vcc) Vdc 5 5 15 24Logic Voltage Range Vdc 3-6 3-6 8-18 15-30Max. Logic Supply Current

@ Nominal Vcc mA 10 10 10 10


AC/DC Input Modules



G5, Non-Polarized, Status LED 70G-IDC5G 70G-IDC5NP 70G-IDC15NP 70G-IDC24NP


Maximum Input Voltage Vac/Vdc 60 32 32 32 Input Voltage Range1 Vac/Vdc 35-60 15-32/10-32 15-32/10-32 15-32/10-32 Input Current @ Max. Input Voltage mA 6 18 18 18

Maximum Turn-on Time mSec 10 5 5 5Maximum Turn-off Time mSec 10 5 5 5Nominal Input Resistance (Rx) Ω 10K 1.8K 1.8K 1.8KMaximum Pick Up Voltage (Output Low) Vac/Vdc 35 15/10 15/10 15/10Minimum Drop Out Voltage (Output High) Vac/Vdc 9 3 3 3Nominal Logic Voltage (Vcc) Vdc 5 5 15 24Logic Voltage Range: Std & Mini Vdc 4.5-6 4.5-6 10-18 17-30Max. Logic Supply Current

@ Nominal Vcc mA 10 10 10 10

G5 Modules


Dual, Non-Polarized, Status LED 70L-IDCG 70L-IDCNP


Maximum Input Voltage Vac/Vdc 60 32Input Voltage Range1 Vac/Vdc 35-60 15-32/10-32Input Current @ Max. Input Voltage mA 6 17Maximum Turn-on Time mSec 10 5Maximum Turn-off Time mSec 10 5Nominal Input Resistance (Rx) Ω 10.6K 1.9KMaximum Pick Up Voltage (Output Low) Vac/Vdc 35 15/10Minimum Drop Out Voltage (Output High) Vac/Vdc 9 3Nominal Logic Voltage (Vcc) Vdc 5 5Logic Voltage Range Vdc 4.5-28 4.5-28Max. Logic Supply Current

@ Nominal Vcc mA 6/CH 6/CHModule ID Resistance to Logic Ground Ω 0 0

1 For input voltages in the range of 90 to 140 Vdc, use AC input modules 70-IAC5, 70M-IAC5, 70G-IAC5or 70L-IAC. For input voltages in the range of 180 to 280 Vdc, use AC input modules 70-IAC5A,70M-IAC5A, 70G-IAC5A or 70L-IACA.

OpenLine® Modules

I/O17


I/O

Modules

70L-IDC 70G-IDC 70-IDC 70M-IDC

FEATURES• Fast Switching Polarized Input

Types• UL, CSA, CE, TÜV Certified (TÜV

not available on OpenLine®)• Optical Isolation• OpenLine® and G5 Modules have

Built-in Status LED

DC Input Modules



Output Current Range mA 1-50 1-50 1-50 1-50Minimum Output Breakdown Voltage Vdc 50 50 50 50Isolation Voltage1 Vrms 4000 4000 4000 2500Vibration2 MIL-STD-202 MIL-STD-202 MIL-STD-202 IEC68-2-6Mechanical Shock3 MIL-STD-202 MIL-STD-202 MIL-STD-202 IEC68-2-27Storage Temp. Range °C -40 to 125 -40 to 125 -40 to 125 -40 to 100Operating Temp. Range °C -40 to 100 -40 to 100 -40 to 100 -40 to 85Warranty Lifetime Lifetime Lifetime Lifetime

1 Field to logic and channel-to-channel if Grayhill racks are used.2 MIL-STD-202, Method 204, 20G, 10-2000 Hz or IEC68-2-6, 0.15 mm/sec2, 10-150 Hz.3 MIL-STD-202, Method 213, Condition F, 1500G or IEC68-2-27, 11 mS, 15g.


CIRCUITRY


1

2

3

4

5

Rx

VDC

+VCC

OUTPUT

GROUND

INPUTVOLTAGE

HYST. CIRC.

CURRENTREGULATING


+ TYPICAL WIRING FOR MODULE 0

0ΩMODULE

BASEOR

RACK

TERMINALBLOCK #

B

A

I/O MODULEPIN #

INPUT DEVICE

INPUT DEVICE

DCSUPPLY

FILTER

FILTEROPTICAL

ISOLATION

OPTICALISOLATION

HYSTERESIS

HYSTERESIS

+

–

–

+

–

+

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

6

7

5

8

9

Vcc

CH. A STATUS

GND

CH. B STATUS

MODULE ID

I/O18

I/O

Modules



DC Input Modules



Dual, Polarized 70L-IDC 70L-IDCB


Maximum Input Voltage Vdc 32 32Input Voltage Range1 Vdc 0-32 0-32Input Current @ Max. Input Voltage mA 18 18Maximum Turn-on Time mSec 0.20 0.05Maximum Turn-off Time mSec 0.40 0.075Nominal Input Resistance (Rx) Ω 1800 900Maximum Pick-Up Voltage (Output Low) Vdc 3 3Minimum Drop-Out Voltage (Output High) Vdc 0.9 0.9Nominal Logic Voltage (Vcc) Vdc 5 5Logic Voltage Range Vdc 4.5-28 4.5-28Max. Logic Supply Current

@ Nominal Vcc mA 6/CH 6/CHModule ID Resistance to Logic Ground Ω 0 0

1 For input voltages in the range of 90 to 140 Vdc, use AC input modules 70-IAC5, 70M-IAC5,70G-IAC5 or 70L-IAC. For input voltages in the range of 180 to 280 Vdc, use AC input modules70-IAC5A, 70M-IAC5A, 70G-IAC5A or 70L-IACA.

OpenLine® Modules


Miniature, Polarized 70M-IDC5 70M-IDC15 70M-IDC24Standard, Non-Polarized 70-IDC5 70-IDC5B 70-IDC5K 70-IDC15 70-IDC24


Maximum Input Voltage Vdc 32 32 16 32 32Input Voltage Range1 Vdc 3-32 3-32 2.5-16 3-32 3-32Input Current @ Maximum Input Voltage mA 18 18 30 18 18Maximum Turn-On Time mSec 0.20 0.050 0.025 0.20 0.20Maximum Turn-Off Time mSec 0.40 0.075 0.030 0.40 0.40Nominal Input Resistance (Rx) Ω 1.8K 1.8K 500 1.8K 1.8KMaximum Pick-Up Voltage (Output Low) Vdc 3 3 2.5 3 3Minimum Drop-Out Voltage (Output High) Vdc 1 1 1 1 1Nominal Logic Voltage (Vcc) Vdc 5 5 5 15 24Logic Voltage Range Vdc 3-6 3-6 3.5-6 8-18 15-30Max. Logic Supply Current @ Nominal Vcc mA 10 18 18 10 10

G5 Modules


G5, Polarized, Status LED 70G-IDC5 70G-IDC5B 70G-IDC5D 70G-IDC5K 70G-IDC15 70G-IDC24


Maximum Input Voltage Vdc 32 32 28 16 32 32Input Voltage Range1 Vdc 3-32 3-32 2.5-28 2.5-16 3-32 3-32Input Current @ Maximum Input Voltage mA 18 18 23 30 18 18Maximum Turn-On Time mSec 0.20 0.050 0.050 0.025 0.20 0.20Maximum Turn-Off Time mSec 0.40 0.075 0.075 0.030 0.40 0.40Nominal Input Resistance (Rx) Ω 1.8K 1.8K 1.2K 500 1.8K 1.8KMaximum Pick-Up Voltage (Output Low) Vdc 3 3 2.5 2.5 3 3Minimum Drop-Out Voltage (Output High) Vdc 1 1 1 1 1 1Nominal Logic Voltage (Vcc) Vdc 5 5 5 5 15 24Logic Voltage Range Vdc 4.5-6 4.5-6 4.5-6 4.5-6 10-18 17-30Max. Logic Supply Current @ Nominal Vcc mA 10 18 10 18 10 10

I/O19


I/O

Modules

Contact Closure DC Input Modules

FEATURES• Wire Dry Contact Sensors Directly

to Module, Eliminate ExternalPower Supply

• 2500 Vac Isolation• Built-In Status LED• UL, CSA, CE Mark, TÜV Certified

(TÜV not available on OpenLine®)• Simplifies Field Wiring

3

4

5

+1

2

10KΩ

+VCC

OUTPUT

GROUND

VDC

TRANSFORMERISOLATION

CONTACTDEBOUNCE

OUTPUTDRIVERCIRCUIT

CIRCUITRY: Negative True Logic

SPECIFICATIONS:Specifications apply over operatingtemperature range unless noted otherwise.All ModulesOutput SpecificationsOutput Current Range: 1-50 mABreakdown Voltage: 50 Vdc minimumOff State Leakage Current: 1 µA maximumOn State Voltage Drop: 0.45 Vdc at 50 mAmaximum

General CharacteristicsIsolation Voltage Field to Logic:2500 Vac (rms) minimum

OpenLine®

Vibration: .15mm, 10 to 50 Hz per IEC68-2-6Mechanical Shock: 50 G's, 0.5 mS, sinsoidalper IEC68-2-27Storage Temperature Range:-40°C to +100°COperating Temperature Range:-40°C to +85°C

G5Vibration: 20 G's peak or .06" double amplitude10–2000 Hz per MIL–STD–202, Method 204,Condition DMechanical Shock: 1500 G's 0.5 mS half-sine

G5, Dry Contact 70L-IDC5S 70G-IDC5S 70G-IDC24S


Maximum Dry Contact Voltage Rating Vdc 25 25 25Minimum Dry Contact Current Rating mA 5 5 5Maximum Turn-on Time mSec 10 3.0 3.0Maximum Turn-off Time mSec 10 3.0 3.0Contact Resistance (Output Low) Ω ≤ 1.25K ≤ 1.25K ≤ 1.25KContact Resistance (Output High) Ω 25K 25K 25KNominal Logic Voltage (Vcc) Vdc 5 5 24Logic Voltage Range: G5 Vdc 4.5-5.5 4.5-6 15-30Max. Logic Supply Current mA 1201 41 41@ Nominal Vcc

SPECIFICATIONS: By Part Number


per MIL–STD–202, Method 213, Condition FStorage Temperature Range:-40°C to +125°COperating Temperature Range:0°C to +60°C


OpenLine®


0ΩMODULE

BASEOR

RACK

TERMINALBLOCK #

B

A

I/O MODULEPIN #

INPUT DEVICE

INPUT DEVICE

DCSUPPLY

FILTER

FILTEROPTICAL

ISOLATION

OPTICALISOLATION

HYSTERESIS

HYSTERESIS

+

–

–

+

–

+

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

6

7

5

8

9

Vcc

CH. A STATUS

GND

CH. B STATUS

MODULE ID

G5

70L-IDL 70G-IDC

1WHEN BOTH CHANNELS ARE ACTIVATED

I/O20

I/O

Modules


ANALOG I/O MODULESAnalog output modules are used in proportionalcontrol of devices such as valves, motors, andheaters. Analog input modules are used in datagathering and proportional control applications.

Al l modules are potted for industr ialenvironments. They operate under highvibration (IEC68-2-6; 0.15 mm/sec2 at 10-150Hz) mechanical shock (IEC68-2-27; 11mS, sinusoidal 30 gS) and high relative humidity(IEC68-2-3; 5-95% non-condensing). Theyfeature a high level of noise immunity andaccuracy. All models provide isolation fromfield to logic, field to power supply and moduleto module.

OpenLine® AnalogOpenLine® analog modules communicateserially with the controller. Each module has aseparate transmit and receive line that operatesat 115,200 baud with no parity bits, 8 data bits,and 1 stop bit (115.2K,N,8,1). The commandstructure and responses for all modules aredetailed in Bulletin No. 743. Each module hasa microcontroller and non-volatile serialEEPROM memory. The calibration data isstored within the EEPROM, and may bechanged using the appropriate commandsand the 70L-PROG field calibration unit. Thesoftware provided with the calibration unitcommunicates with the modules through theserial port of a PC. Calibration equipment is notprovided.

OpenLine® Analog Input ModulesUpon request, analog input modules return a

12-bit value that is right justified and packed ina 16-bit word that represents the equivalentanalog value sensed.

OpenLine® thermocouple inputs linearize thethermocouple reading and returns degrees tothe controller.

Openline® Analog OutputFor analog output modules, the output of thesemodules is zero scale on power up, then it isthe analog equivalent of the 12-bit value sentto the module over the communication lines.

G5 Analog OutputThe output (voltage or current level) of thesemodules varies proportionally to the 12-bitserial data string sent to them by a controlcircuit. The data string is typically 213.2 µSec.long as detailed in Figure 1. Once a data stringis received, the output is set and remainsconstant until another data string is sent.Therefore, the output level of the module couldbe changed almost 4700 times a second.

For more information on programming Grayhillanalog output modules, request a copy ofBulletin No. 581.

START 12 BIT DATA END

9.6µS 153.6µS 500µS

Figure 1

Analog I/O Modules Engineering Information and Selection Chart

Start Pulse: High for 6.4 µS Min., then lowfor 3.2 µS

Data Packet: Each bit is 12.8 µS long.High for first 3.2 µS of the bit.Middle 6.4 µS determines the value of thedata bit (High = 1, Low = 0).Low for last 3.2 µS of the bit.

Stop Pulse: Low for 500 µS minimumTimes shown are ± 10%, except minimums.

SERIAL DATA FORMAT**

G5 Analog InputG5 voltage or current input modules are actuallyfrequency converters. The input to thesemodules is a signal from a sensor. The outputfrom these modules is a squarewave whosefrequency varies linearly from 14.4 to 72 KHzand is proportional to the input signal. Thecontroller must be able to measure thisfrequency and convert it back to a signal level.

G5 thermocouple modules pass through thethermocouple reading and do not linearize thesignal. Linearization must take place within thecontroller.

Agency ApprovalsOpenLine® analog modules are EN50082-2and EN50081-2 compliant and meet therequirements of 89/336/EEC EMC directive.They are also EN60950 (61010-1) compliant.Meeting these requirements allows the modulesto bear the CE mark. Additionally, the modulesare CSA certified to CSA 22.2 No. 14-95M andCSA 22.2 No. 213-M1987 Class I, Div. 2Groups A, B, C and D and are UL recognizedto UL 508.

Module Type73G = Analog Module, G5 Package, Single Channel73L = Analog Module, OpenLine® Package, Dual Channel

FunctionOV = Analog Output, Voltage II = Analog Input, CurrentOI = Analog Output, Current IT = Analog Input, TemperatureIV = Analog Input, Voltage

73G-IV50M

SuffixAnalog Modules: 5 = 0–5 Vdc 10 = 0 - 10 Vdc 50M = 0–50 mV

5B = -5–5 Vdc 10B = -10 - 10 Vdc 100M = 0–100 mV1 = 0–1 Vdc 020 = 0 to 20 mA R100 = RTDCJ = J type TC 420 = 4 to 20 mA R3100 = 3 Wire RTDCK = K type TC 5000 = 0 to 5 A R4100 = 4 Wire RTDCR = R type TC AC120 = 28 to 140 VacCT = T type TC AC240 = 28 to 280 Vac

PART NUMBER EXPLANATION: Analog I/O Modules

I/O21


I/O

Modules


DIMENSIONS: OpenLine® Modules

DIMENSIONS: OpenLine® Thermocouple Modules

DATE CODE

.24 (6,10)

.38(9,65)

.03(0,76)

2.70 (68,58)

.14(3,56)

.10(2,54)

.34 (8,64)

.22(5,59)

.51(12,95)2.09 (53,09)

.19(4,83)

PIN

9P

IN 8

PIN

7P

IN 6

PIN

5

PIN

4

PIN

3

PIN

2

PIN

1

I/O Module Pin #123456789

Output FunctionOutput A+Output A-Output B+Output B-Logic GndVcc (+5V dc) Serial InSerial OutModule ID

Input FunctionInput A+Input A-Input B+Input B-Logic GndVcc (+5V dc) Serial InSerial OutModule ID

2.23(56,64)

THERMOCOUPLECONNECTOR

DATE CODE

.03 (0,76)

2.70 (68,58)

.14(3,56)

.34 (8,64)

.10(2,54)

.24 (6,10)

.38(9,65)

2.23(56,64)

2.93(74,42)

B A

XXX-XXXTHERMOCOUPLE

INPUT

.22(5,59)

.51(12,95)

2.09 (53,09)

.19(4,83)

PIN

9P

IN 8

PIN

7P

IN 6

PIN

5

PIN

4

PIN

3

PIN

2

PIN

1

I/O Module Pin #123456789

FunctionN/CN/CN/CN/CLogic GndVcc (+5V dc) Serial InSerial OutModule ID

I/O22

I/O

Modules


45 3 2 1

1.90 (48,3)

.46(11,7)

2.20(55,9)

.20 (5,1)

.40 (10,2)

1.15 (29,2)

1.35 (34,3)

1.55 (39,4)

O .040/.042(1,02/1,07)

.235 (5,97)

.15 (3,8)

.20 (5,1)

3.20(81,3)

WIRE LENGTH IS 5.5 (139,7)

MINIMUM

MALE AND FEMALE RTD CONNECTOR (INCLUDED)

MALE THERMOCOUPLE

CONNECTOR (INCLUDED)

TYPE R THERMOCOUPLE ANDRTD MODULES

THERMOCOUPLEMODULES ONLY

.90 (22,9)

DIMENSIONS: G5 Analog Modules


4-40 X 2-1/2" PHILLIPS HOLD-DOWN SCREW INCLUDEDWITH EACH MODULEMAXIMUM TORQUE = 5 FT-LB


DIMENSIONS: OpenLine® 3-Wire and 4-Wire RTD Modules

I/O23

.03(.76)

.19(4.83)

2.09(53.09)

.51(12.95)

.22(5.59)

.34(8.64)

.10(2.54)

2.70 (68.58)MIN.

2.57(65.28)

.38(9.65)

.24(6.11)

DATECODE

PIN

1

PIN

2

PIN

3

PIN

4

PIN

5P

IN 6

PIN

7P

IN 8

PIN

9

B2B4A2A4

B1B3A3 A1

BA

PT

XX

X

XXßC TO XXßCDUAL 4-WIRE PTXXX RTD

XXX-XXX

4-WIR

E


I/O

Modules

Supply Vcc Voltage Range Current Range5 Vdc 0 to 5 Vdc 4 to 20 mA

-10 to 10 Vdc

Supply Vcc Voltage Range Temperature5 Vdc 50 or 100 mV J Type

1, 5, or 10 Vdc K Type-5 to +5 Vdc R Type

-10 to +10 Vdc T Type28 to 140 or 280 Vac RTD

Current Range4-20 mA

0-5 A

AnalogOutput

AnalogInput

(Check Specifications for Input and Output combinations, Feature or Option availability.)FUNCTION


WIRING DIAGRAM: Analog I/O Modules

Y

+

–

ANALOGVOLT/CURRENT

OUTPUT

LOAD

ANALOGVOLT/CURRENT

INPUT

2 1

2 1

+

–

VOLT SENSOR OR 4-20 mA

TRANSMITTER

LOOP SUPPLY

ANALOGTHERMOCOUPLE

INPUT

ANALOGRTD

INPUT

2 1

2 1

I/O24

I/O

Modules


CIRCUITRY: Voltage Output

+

–

+5V

SERIALINPUTDATA

1

2

3

4

5GROUND

AMP

DC/DCCONVERTER

VS

VS-

D/A

BUFFER

VS2KΩ

10KΩ

Analog Voltage and Current Output Modules

FEATURES• Standard Package and Pin-out• Single 5V Power Supply• 12-Bit Resolution• Optical Isolation• Intermix With Digital Modules on

the Same Rack• Meets the Requirements of IEEE 472• UL, CSA, CE Certified (OpenLine® only)


G5, OpenLine® 73G-OV5, -OV5B 73G-OV10, -OV10B 73L-OV5, -OV5B 73L-OV10, -OV10B


Number of Outputs 1 Ch., Diff. 1 Ch., Diff. 2 Ch., S.E. 2 Ch., S.E.Resolution bits 12 12 12 12

mV/count -OV5: 1.22 -OV10: 2.44 -OV5: 1.22 -OV10: 2.44-OV5B: 2.44 -OV10B: 4.88 -OV5B: 2.44 -OV10B: 4.88

Absolute Accuracy @ 25°C1, 2 0.3% of full scale 0.3% of full scale 0.08% of full scale 0.06% of full scaleAccuracy Drift w/Temp.2

Maximum Offset PPM/°C +/- 45 +/- 45 +/- 25 +/- 25Maximum Gain (0 to 60°C) PPM/°C +/- 150 +/- 150 +/- 100 +/- 100

Serial Data Format 12-bit packet 12-bit packet Left-justified, 16-bit Left-justified, 16-bitSerial Data Packet — — 115.2Kb, N, 8, 2 115.2Kb, N, 8, 2Step Response Time mS 0.5 0.5 0.8 0.8Output Noise Ripple mV rms — — 1.5 max. 3.7 max.Output Voltage Range Vdc -OV5: 0-5 -OV10: 0-10 -OV5: 0-5 -OV10: 0-10

-OV5B: -5-5 -OV10B: -10-10 -OV5B: -5-5 -OV10B: -10-10Maximum Load Ω 250 1000 250 500Logic Voltage Range Vdc 4.5-5.5 4.5-5.5 4.75-5.25 4.75-5.25Maximum Logic Supply Current @ 5Vdc mA/Ch. 140 140 105 105Power Up Status Output @ min. value Output @ min. value Output @ min. value Output @ min. valueShort Circuit Protection Yes Yes Yes YesModule ID (Pin 9) KΩ N/A N/A 5.23 5.23Isolation Voltage

Field to Logic Vrms 2500 2500 2500 2500Field to Power Vrms 2500 2500 2500 2500Module to Module Vrms 2500 2500 2500 2500Channel A to Channel B N/A N/A None None

Environmental ConditionsOperating Temperature °C 0-60 0-60 -40-85 -40-85Storage Temperature °C -25-85 -25-85 -40-100 -40-100

1 Includes offset, gain, non-linearity and repeatability error terms.2 Accuracy and drift graphs are available in Bulletin #753.


G5 OpenLine®

TERMINALBLOCK #

I/O MODULEPIN #

OPTICALISOLATION

ISOLATEDDC/DC

CONVERTERCHANNEL A

CHANNEL B

OUTPUTDEVICE

OUTPUTDEVICE

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

+

–

+

–

D/AµP

5.23K

10K

ISO

LAT

ION

VS

VS–

6

5

7

8

9

Vcc

GND

TXD

RXD

MODULE ID

73L-OV 73G-OV

I/O25


I/O

Modules




G5, OpenLine® 73G-OI420 73G-OI020 73L-OI420 73L-OI020 73L-OI024


Number of Outputs 1 Ch., Diff. 1 Ch., Diff. 2 Ch., S.E. 2 Ch., S.E. 2 Ch., S.E.Resolution bits 12 12 12 12 12

µA/count 3.9 4.9 3.9 4.9 5.9Absolute Accuracy @ 25°C1

Accuracy Drift w/Temp.2

Maximum Offset PPM/°C +/- 45 +/- 45 +/- 50 +/- 50 +/- 50Maximum Gain (0 to 60°C) PPM/°C +/- 150 +/- 150 +/- 100 +/- 75 +/- 100

Serial Data Format 12-bit packet 12-bit packet Right Justified, Right Justified, Right Justified,16-bit 16-bit 16-bit

Serial Data Packet — — 115.2Kb, N, 8, 2 115.2Kb, N, 8, 2 115.2Kb, N, 8, 2Step Response Time µS 0.5 0.5 500 500 500Max. Loop Resistance3 Ohms 330 330 500 500 500Output Current Range mA 4-20 0-20 4-20 0-20 0-24Maximum Load Ω 250 1000 Continuous short Continuous short Continuous short

circuit circuit circuitLogic Voltage Range Vdc 4.5-5.5 4.5-5.5 4.75-5.25 4.75-5.25 4.75-5.25Maximum Logic Supply Current

@ 5V dc mA/Ch. 140 140 80 80 100Power Up Status Output @ min. Output @ min. Output @ min. Output @ min. Output @ min.

value value value value valueShort Circuit Protection Yes Yes Yes Yes YesModule ID (Pin 9) KΩ N/A N/A 5.23 5.23 5.23Isolation Voltage

Field to Logic Vrms 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500Field to Power Vrms 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500Module to Module Vrms 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500Channel A to Channel B N/A N/A None None None

Environmental ConditionsOperating Temperature3, 4 °C 0-60 0-60 -40-85 -40-85 -40-85Storage Temperature °C -25-55 -25-55 -40-100 -40-100 -40-100

1 Includes offset, gain, non-linearity and repeatability error terms.2 Accuracy and drift graphs are available in Bulletin #753.3 External loop supply can increase maximum loop resistance rating.

Analog Voltage and Current Output Modules

CIRCUITRY: Current OutputG5 OpenLine®

+

–

+5V

SERIALINPUTDATA

1

2

3

4

5GROUND

AMP

DC/DCCONVERTER

VS

VS-

D/A

BUFFER

VS2KΩ

10KΩ

5.23K

10K

CHANNEL A

CHANNEL B

OPTICALISOLATION

ISOLATEDDC/DC

CONVERTER

I/O MODULEPIN #

OUTPUTDEVICE

OUTPUTDEVICE

TERMINALBLOCK #

D/A

ISO

LAT

ION

6

5

7

8

9

µP

Vs

Vs–

Vs

Vs

–

–

+

+

5Ω

5Ω

1

2

3

4 4

3

1

2

Vcc

GND

TXD

RXD

MODULE ID

I/O26

I/O

Modules


73L-IV 73G-IV

OPTICALISOLATION

ISOLATEDDC/DC

CONVERTER

5.23K

10K

CHANNEL A

CHANNEL B

ISO

LAT

ION

Vs

Vs–

µPCH. AA/D

CH. B

SIGNALCONDITIONING

ANDFILTER

SIGNALCONDITIONING

ANDFILTER

I/O MODULEPIN #

TERMINALBLOCK #

–

+

–

+

INPUTDEVICE

INPUTDEVICE

TWISTEDPAIR

TWISTEDPAIR

1

2

3

44

3

2

1

5

6

7

8

9 MODULE ID

RXD

TXD

Vcc

GND

+5V 3

4

5GROUND

AMP

V/F

DC/DCCONVERTER

VS

VS-VS

FILTER &BUFFER

SQUARE-WAVE

OUTPUT

RX

+

–

1

2

10KΩ

˜CURRENT

SOURCE


Analog Voltage Input Modules

FEATURES• Wide Variety of Input Ranges• Standard Package and Pin-out• Single 5V Power Supply• 12-Bit Resolution• Optical Isolation from Input to Output• Intermix With Digital Modules on the

Same Rack• Meets the Requirements of IEEE 472• UL, CSA, CE Certified (OpenLine only)

G5 OpenLine®


G5, OpenLine® 73G-IV1 73G-IV5 73G-IV10 73L-IV1 73L-IV5 73L-IV10


Number of Inputs 1 Ch., Diff. 1 Ch., Diff. 1 Ch., Diff. 2 Ch., S.E. 2 Ch., S.E. 2 Ch., S.E.Resolution bits 12 12 12 12 12 12

µV/count 244.1 1221 2441 244.1 1221 2441Absolute Accuracy@25°C1, 2 % of full scale +/- 0.1 +/- 0.1 +/- 0.1 0.075 0.075 0.075Accuracy Drift w/Temp.2

Maximum Offset PPM/°C +/- 50 +/- 50 +/- 50 +/- 35 +/- 25 +/- 25Maximum Gain (0-60°C) PPM/°C +/- 55 +/- 55 +/- 55 +/- 75 +/- 75 +/- 75

Serial Data Format 12-bit packet 12-bit packet 12-bit packet Right Justified, Right Justified, Right Justified,16-bit 16-bit 16-bit

Serial Data Packet N/A N/A N/A 115.2Kb,N,8,2 115.2Kb,N,8,2 115.2Kb,N,8,2Step Response Time4 mS 2.5 2.5 2.5 1.5 1.5 1.5Input Resistance (Rx) Mohm 1 1 1 2.2 2.2 2.2Input Voltage Range Vdc 0-1 0-5 0-10 0-1 0-5 0-10Maximum Overload V — — — +/- 30 +/- 30 +/- 30Logic Voltage Range Vdc 4.5-5.5 4.5-5.5 4.5-5.5 4.75-5.25 4.75-5.25 4.75-5.25Maximum Logic Supply

Current @ 5Vdc mA/Ch. 150 150 150 38 38 38Module ID (Pin 9) KΩ N/A N/A N/A 5.23 5.23 5.23Isolation Voltage

Field to Logic Vrms 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500Field to Power Vrms 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500Module to Module Vrms 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500Channel A to Channel B — — — None None None

Environmental ConditionsOperating Temperature3 ° C 0 to 60 0 to 60 0 to 60 -40 to 85 -40 to 85 -40 to 85Storage Temperature ° C -25 to 85 -25 to 85 -25 to 85 -55 to 100 -55 to 100 -55 to 100

1 Includes offset, gain, non-linearity and repeatability error terms.2 Accuracy and drift graphs are available in Bulletin #753.3 Start up temperature greater than -25°C.


I/O27


I/O

Modules



G5, OpenLine® 73G-IV50M 73G-IV100M 73L-IV50M 73L-IV100M


Number of Inputs 1 Ch., Diff. 1 Ch., Diff. 2 Ch., S.E. 2 Ch., S.E.Resolution bits 12 12 12 12

µV/Count 12.2 24.4 12.2 24.4Absolute Accuracy @ 25°C1, 2 % of full scale +/- 0.1 +/- 0.1 0.07 0.07Accuracy Drift w/Temp.2


Serial Data Format 12-bit packet 12-bit packet Right Justified,16-bit Right Justified,16-bitSerial Data Packet — — 115.2Kb, N, 8, 2 115.2Kb, N, 8, 2Step Response Time3 mS 2.5 2.5 1.5 1.5Input Resistance (Rx) Mohm 1 1 2.2 2.2Input Voltage Range mV 0-50 0-100 0-50 0-100Maximum Overload V — — +/- 30 +/- 30Logic Voltage Range Vdc 4.5-5.5 4.5-5.5 4.75-5.25 4.75-5.25Maximum Logic Supply Current@5Vdc mA/Ch. 150 150 30 30Module ID (Pin 9) KΩ N/A N/A 5.23 5.23Isolation Voltage

Field to Logic Vrms 2500 2500 2500 2500Field to Power Vrms 2500 2500 2500 2500Module to Module Vrms 2500 2500 2500 2500Channel A to Channel B N/A N/A None None

Environmental ConditionsOperating Temperature ° C 0 to 60 0 to 60 -40 to 85 -40 to 85Storage Temperature ° C -25 to 85 -25 to 85 -55 to 100 -55 to 100

1 Includes offset, gain, non-linearity and repeatability error terms.2 Accuracy and drift graphs are available in Bulletin #753.3 Start up temperature greater than -25°C.



G5, OpenLine® 73G-IV5B 73G-IV10B 73L-IV5B 73L-IV10B


Number of Inputs 1 Ch., Diff. 1 Ch., Diff. 2 Ch., S.E. 2 Ch., S.E.Resolution bits 12 12 12 12

mV/count 2.44 4.88 2.44 4.88Absolute Accuracy @ 25°C1, 2 % of full scale +/-0.1 +/- 0.1 0.075 0.075Accuracy Drift w/Temp.2


Serial Data Format 12-bit packet 12-bit packet Right Justified, 16-bit Right Justified, 16-bitSerial Data Packet — — 115.2Kb, N, 8,2 115.2Kb, N, 8,2Step Response Time3 mS 2.5 2.5 1.5 1.5Input Resistance (Rx) Mohm 1 1 2.2 2.2Input Voltage Range Vdc -5 to 5 -10 to 10 -5 to 5 -10 to 10Maximum Overload V — — +/- 30 +/- 30Logic Voltage Range Vdc 4.5-5.5 4.5-5.5 4.75-5.25 4.75-5.25Maximum Logic Supply Current@5Vdc mA/Ch. 150 150 38 38Module ID (Pin 9) KΩ N/A N/A 5.23 5.23Isolation Voltage

Field to Logic Vrms 2500 2500 2500 2500Field to Power Vrms 2500 2500 2500 2500Module to Module Vrms 2500 2500 2500 2500Channel A to Channel B — — None None

Environmental ConditionsOperating Temperature ° C 0 to 60 0 to 60 -40 to 85 -40 to 85Storage Temperature ° C -25 to 55 -25 to 85 -55 to 100 -55 to 100

I/O28

I/O

Modules


Available from your local Grayhill Distributor.For prices and discounts, contact a localDistributor, a local Sales Office or Grayhill.


G5 73G-IVAC120 73G-IVAC240


Number of Inputs 1 Ch., Diff. 1 Ch., Diff.Resolution bits 12 12

mV/Count 27.34 65.52Absolute Accuracy @ 25°C1 % of full scale +/- 0.3% +/- 0.3%Accuracy Drift w/Temp.

Maximum Offset PPM/°C +/- 150 +/- 150Maximum Gain (0 to 60°C) PPM/°C +/- 150 +/- 150

Serial Data Format 12-bit packet 12-bit packetStep Response Time2 mS 2.5 2.5Input Resistance Mohm 1 1Input Voltage Range Vac 28 to 140 28 to 280Logic Voltage Range Vdc 4.5-5.5 4.5-5.5Maximum Logic Supply Current

@ 5V dc mA/Ch. 150 150Isolation Voltage

Field to Logic Vrms 2500 2500Field to Power Vrms 2500 2500Module to Module Vrms 2500 2500

Environmental ConditionsOperating Temperature3 ° C 0 to 60 0 to 60Storage Temperature ° C -25 to 85 -25 to 85

1 Includes offset, gain, non-linearity and repeatability error terms.2 Time required for output frequency to change to within 1% of final reading.



I/O29


I/O

Modules

FEATURES• Wide Variety of Input Ranges• Standard Package and Pin-out• Single 5V Power Supply• 12-Bit Resolution• Optical Isolation from Input to

Output• Intermix With Digital Modules on

the Same Rack• Meets the Requirements of IEEE

472• UL, CSA, CE Certified (OpenLine only)


Analog Current Input Modules

73L-II 73G-II

G5: 0-5A

OpenLine®

G5: 4-20mA

3

4

5

RECTIFY,FILTER,

AMPLIFY

1

2

10KΩ+5 V

GROUND

5A SECONDARYTRANSFORMER

OPTICALISOLATION

VOLTAGECONTROLLEDOSCILLATOR

OUTPUTDRIVERCIRCUIT

CURRENTSOURCE

SQUARE-WAVE

OUTPUT

+5V 3

4

5GROUND

AMP

V/F

DC/DCCONVERTER

VS

VS-VS

FILTER &BUFFER

SQUARE-WAVE

OUTPUT

RX

+

–

1

2

10KΩ

˜CURRENT

SOURCE

OPTICALISOLATION

ISOLATEDDC/DC

CONVERTER

5.23K

10K

CHANNEL A

CHANNEL B

ISO

LAT

ION

Vs

Vs–

µPCH. AA/D

CH. B

SIGNALCONDITIONING

ANDFILTER

SIGNALCONDITIONING

ANDFILTER

I/O MODULEPIN #

TERMINALBLOCK #

–

+

–

+

4-20mATRANSMITTER

TWISTEDPAIR

TWISTEDPAIR

1

2

3

44

3

2

1

5

6

7

8

9

133Ω

133Ω4-20mA

TRANSMITTER

LOOPSUPPLY

LOOPSUPPLY

–

+

–

+

MODULE ID

RXD

TXD

Vcc

GND

I/O30

I/O

Modules



G5, OpenLine® 73G-II020 73G-II420 73G-II5000 73L-II020 73L-II420 73L-II222


Number of Inputs 1 Ch., Diff. 1 Ch., Diff. 1 Ch., Diff. 2 Ch., S.E. 2 Ch., S.E. 2 Ch., S.E.Resolution bits 12 12 12 12 12 12

µA/Count 4.88 3.91 1221 4.88 3.91 4.88Absolute Accuracy @ 25°C1, 2 % of full +/- 0.2 +/- 0.2 +/- 0.3 0.075 0.075 0.075

scaleAccuracy Drift w/Temp.2

Maximum Offset PPM/°C +/- 50 +/- 50 +/- 150 +/- 25 +/- 25 +/- 25Maximum Gain (0 to 60°C) PPM/°C +/- 55 +/- 55 +/- 150 +/- 75 +/- 75 +/- 75

Serial Data Format 12-bit 12-bit 12-bit Right Justified, Right Justified, Right Justified,packet packet packet 16-bit 16-bit 16-bit

Serial Data Packet — — — 115.2Kb, N, 8, 2 115.2Kb, N, 8,2 115.2Kb, N, 8,2Step Response Time3 mS 2.5 2.5 2.5 1.5 1.5 1.5Input Resistance (Rx) ohms 133 +/- 1% 133 +/- 1% .020 +/-.02% 133/- 1% 133 +/- 1% 133 +/- 1%Input Current Range mA or A 0-20mA 4-20mA 0-5A TRMS 0-20mA 4-20mA 2-22mAMaximum Overload V — — — 6 6 6Logic Voltage Range Vdc 4.5-5.5 4.5-5.5 4.5-5.5 4.75-5.25 4.75-5.25 4.75-5.25Maximum Logic mA/Ch. 150 120 160 38 38 38Supply Current@5VdcModule ID (Pin 9) KΩ N/A N/A N/A 5.23 5.23 5.23Isolation Voltage

Field to Logic Vrms 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500Field to Power Vrms 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500Module to Module Vrms 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500Channel A to Channel B — — — None None None

Environmental ConditionsOperating Temperature3 °C 0 to 60 0 to 60 0 to 60 -40 to 85 -40 to 85 -40 to 85Storage Temperature °C -25 to 85 -25 to 85 -25 to 85 -55 to 100 -55 to 100 -55 to 100

1 Includes offset, gain, non-linearity and repeatability error terms.2 Accuracy and drift graphs are available in Bulletin #753.3 Time required for output to change to within 1% of final value.


Analog Current Input Modules


I/O31


I/O

Modules

FEATURES• Wide Variety of Input Types• Standard Package and Pin-out• Single 5V Power Supply• 12-Bit Resolution• Optical Isolation from Input to

Output• Cold Junction Temperature

Compensated Connector Included• Intermix With G5 Digital Modules

on the Same Rack• Meets the Requirements of IEEE

472• UL, CSA, CE Certified (OpenLine only)

CIRCUITRY

Thermocouple Wire Colors

Type + –

J White RedK Yellow RedT Blue RedR Black Red

+5V

1

2

3

4

5GROUND

AMP

V/F

DC/DCCONVERTER

VS

VS-

THERMO-COUPLE

VS

T

T

N/C

N/C

COLDREFERENCE

SQUARE-WAVE

OUTPUT

10KΩ

–+

–+

OMEGACONNECTORTYPE SMPINCLUDED

MODULE

Thermocouple Input Modules

G5 G5: ConnectorWiring

OpenLine®

Thermocouple Wire Colors

Type + –

J White RedK Yellow RedT Blue RedR Black Red

–+

–+

OMEGACONNECTORTYPE SMPINCLUDED

MODULE

OpenLine®:Connector Wiring

SIGNALCONDITIONING

COLDJUNCTION

TEMP.COMP.

SIGNALCONDITIONING

COLDJUNCTION

TEMP.COMP.

A/P µP OPTICALISOLATION

ISOLATEDDC/DC

CONVERTER

CH. A– +

CH. B– +

Vs

Vs–

10K

5.23K

ISO

LAT

ION

I/O MODULEPIN #

TERMINALBLOCK #

NC

NC

NC

NC

9

8

7

6

5

1

2

3

44

3

2

1 MODULE ID

RXD

TXD

Vcc

GND

73L-IT 73G-IT

I/O32

I/O

Modules



G5 73G-ITCJ 73G-ITCK 73G-ITCR 73G-ITCT


Number of Inputs 1 Ch. 1 Ch. 1 Ch. 1 Ch.Resolution bits 12 12 12 12

°C/count 0.18 0.25 0.23 0.10Absolute Accuracy @ 25°C1, 2 ° C +/- 3.0 +/- 3.0 +/- 3.0 +/- 3.0Accuracy Drift w/Temp.2


Serial Data Format 12-bit packet 12-bit packet 12-bit packet 12-bit packetSerial Data Packet — — — —Step Response Time3 mS 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5Input Temperature Range °C (°F) 0 to 700 -100 to 924 0 to 960 -200 to 224

(32-1292) (-148-1695) (32-1760) (-328-435)Maximum Overload V — — — —Logic Voltage Range Vdc 4.5 to 5.5 4.5 to 5.5 4.5 to 5.5 4.5-5.5Maximum Logic Supply

Current @ 5V dc mA/Ch. 150 150 150 150Module ID (Pin 9) KΩ — — — —Isolation Voltage

Field to Logic Vrms 2500 2500 2500 2500Field to Power Vrms 2500 2500 2500 2500Module to Module Vrms 2500 2500 2500 2500Channel A to Channel B — — — —

Environmental ConditionsOperating Temperature3 ° C 0 to 60 0 to 60 0 to 60 0-60Storage Temperature ° C -25 to 85 -25 to 85 -25 to 85 -25-85



OpenLine® 73L-ITCJ 73L-ITCK 73L-ITCT


Number of Inputs 2 Ch. 2 Ch. 2 Ch.Resolution bits 12 12 12

°C/count 0.34 0.36 0.16Absolute Accuracy @ 25°C1, 2 ° C +/- 1.0 +/- 1.0 +/- 0.4Accuracy Drift w/Temp.2

Maximum Offset PPM/°C +/- 50 +/- 50 +/- 50Maximum Gain (0 to 60°C) PPM/°C +/- 100 +/- 100 +/- 100

Serial Data Format Right Justified,16-bit Right Justified,16-bit Right Justified,16-bitSerial Data Packet 115.2 Kb, N, 8, 2 115.2 Kb, N, 8, 2 115.2 Kb, N, 8, 2Step Response Time3 mS 100 100 100Input Temperature Range °C (°F) -210 to 1200 (-346 to 2192) -100 to 1372 (-148 to 2502) -240 to 400 (-400 to 752)Maximum Overload V +/- 6 +/- 6 +/- 6Logic Voltage Range Vdc 4.75 to 5.25 4.75 to 5.25 4.75 to 5.25Maximum Logic Supply

Current @ 5V dc mA/Ch. 38 38 38Module ID (Pin 9) KΩ 5.23 5.23 5.23Isolation Voltage

Field to Logic Vrms 2500 2500 2500Field to Power Vrms 2500 2500 2500Module to Module Vrms 2500 2500 2500Channel A to Channel B None None None

Environmental ConditionsOperating Temperature3 ° C -40 to 85 -40 to 85 -40 to 85

Storage Temperature ° C -55 to 100 -55 to 100 -55 to 100

1 Includes offset, gain, non-linearity and repeatability error terms.2 Accuracy and drift graphs are available in Bulletin #753.3 Time required for output to change within 1% of final reading.


Thermocouple Input Modules

I/O33


I/O

Modules

CIRCUITRY

+5V

1

2

3

4

5GROUND

AMP

V/FDC/DC

CONVERTER

VS

VS-

VS

T

T

N/C

N/C

SIGNALCONDITIONING

SQUARE-WAVE

OUTPUT

TRTD

10KΩ

G+–

73G-ITR100 73G-ITR100

2 WIRE RTD

BLACK

BLACK

OMEGACONNECTORTYPE MTPMALE AND FEMALE(INCLUDED)

RED

G+–

73G-ITR100

3 WIRE RTD

BLACK

BLACK

OMEGACONNECTORTYPE MTPMALE ANDFEMALE(INCLUDED)

4 WIRE RTD

BLACK

BLACK

OMEGACONNECTORTYPE MTPMALE ANDFEMALE(INCLUDED)

RED REDRED

G

RTD Input Modules

FEATURES• Standard Package and Pin-out• Single 5V Power Supply• 12-Bit Resolution• Optical Isolation from Input to

Output• Intermix With Digital Modules on

the Same Rack• Meets the Requirements of

IEEE 472• UL, CSA, CE Certified (OpenLine only)• OpenLine® has 2-wire, 3-wire and

4-wire versions

73L-ITR3100 (4100) 73L-ITR100 73G-ITR

G5 G5: ConnectorWiring

OpenLine®: 2 Wire RTD

5.23K

10K

CHANNEL A

CHANNEL B

4.53K

4.53K

I/O MODULEPIN #

TERMINALBLOCK #

OPTICALISOLATION

ISOLATEDDC/DC

CONVERTER

SIGNALCONDITIONING

ANDFILTER

SIGNALCONDITIONING

ANDFILTER

Vs

Vs–

µPCH. AA/D

CH. B

2.5V

2.5V

+

–

+ ISO

LAT

ION

9

8

7

6

5

11

22

33

44

MODULE ID

RXD

TXD

Vcc

GND

I/O34

I/O

Modules


RTD Input Modules

CIRCUITRYOpenLine®: 3 or 4 Wire RTD

OpenLine®: Connector Wiring


G5, OpenLine® 73G-ITR100 73L-ITR100 73L-ITR3100/73L-ITR4100


Number of Inputs 1 Ch. 2 Ch. 2 Ch.Resolution bits 12 12 12

°C/count 0.10 0.098 0.098Absolute Accuracy @ 25°C1, 2 +/- 0.8 +/- 0.3 +/- 0.3Full Range Deflection DIN 43760 standard DIN 43760 standard DIN 43760 standardTemperature Coefficient 0.00385 (European) 0.00385 (European) 0.00385 (European)Serial Data Format 12-bit packet Right Justified, 16-bit Right Justified, 16-bitSerial Data Packet — 115.2Kb, N, 8, 2 115.2Kb, N, 8, 2Step Response Time3 mS 2.5 42 42Input Temperature Range °C (°F) -50-350 (-58-662) -50-350 (-58-662) -50-350 (-58-662)RTD Type 100 ohm platinum 100 ohm platinum 100 ohm platinumMaximum Overload V — +/- 6 +/- 6Logic Voltage Range Vdc 4.5-5.5 4.75-5.25 4.75-5.25Max. Logic Supply Current@5Vdc mA/Ch. 150 38 38Module ID (Pin 9) KΩ N/A 5.23 5.23Isolation Voltage

Field to Logic Vrms 2500 2500 2500Field to Power Vrms 2500 2500 2500Module to Module Vrms 2500 2500 2500Channel A to Channel B — None None

Environmental ConditionsOperating Temperature °C 0 to +60°C -40 to +85°C -40 to +85°CStorage Temperature °C -40 to +85°C -55 to -100°C -55 to +100°C

1 Includes offset, gain, non-linearity and repeatability error terms.2 Accuracy and drift graphs are available in Bulletin #753.3 Time required for output to change to within 1% of final reading.



I/O35

9

8

7

5.23K

10K

ISOLATEDDC/DC

CONVERTER

OPTICALISOLATION

µPCH. AA/D

CH. B

CHANNEL A

CHANNEL B

ISO

LAT

ION

SIGNALCONDITIONING

ANDFILTER

SIGNALCONDITIONING

ANDFILTER

Vs

Vs–

5V

5V

100µA

100µAA1A2A3A4B1B2B3B4

+ +– –

1

2

3

4

6

5

1

2

3

4

NC

NC

NC

NC

MODULE ID

TXD

RXD

Vcc

GND

Circuits connected on 3-wire version

G NC+–

73L-ITR3100

3 WIRE RTD

PHOENIX CONTACT

CONNECTOR (INCLUDED)

A4B4 B3 B2 B1

A3 A2 A1

G S+–

73L-ITR4100

4 WIRE RTD

A4B4 B3 B2 B1

A3 A2 A1


Sys

tem

50

System 50

SYSTEM 50


Sys

tem

50

System 50

SYSTEM 50• MicroDAC• MicroDAC LT• Promux• Microlon• Various I/O Racks

Contents:

Page

SYSTEM 50 RACKS OVERVIEW ................................................................ 3Racks4 Channel ...................................................................................................... 48 Channel ...................................................................................................... 616 Channel .................................................................................................. 1124 Channel (In-Line) ................................................................................... 1824 Channel .................................................................................................. 2232 Channel .................................................................................................. 2532 Channel Parallel Controller Board for 72-PMX-32D ............................ 27ControllersMicroDAC (Optomux) .................................................................................. 29MicroDAC LT (Optomux) ............................................................................. 31Network InterfacesPromux (Optomux) ...................................................................................... 33Parallel Bus Interface .................................................................................. 35Communication Converters ........................................................................ 37Accessories ................................................................................................. 38

System 502


Sys

tem

50

System 50

CONTROLLERSMicroDAC (Optomux)

FEATURES• Each Unit Controls/Monitors up to

32 Analog (G5 Only) and/or DigitalI/O Modules

• Executes On-Board ProgramsCreated With Borland C

• Network up to 64 MicroDACs perHost Serial Port, Each Separatedby as Much as 4000 Feet

• Communicate Over RS-422/485 atSpeeds From 1200 Bd to 115.2 KB

• 100% Optomux™ Compatible, WithExpanded Command Set

• I/O Update Rates of 500 µSec per32 Digital I/O, and 10 mS perAnalog Input or 2 Analog Outputs

• BASIC and C Drivers for the PC• DIN Rail or Panel Mountable Metal

Enclosure• Hardware Expansion With SBX Port• Real Time Clock Option (Y2K

Compliant)

ANALOG & DIGITAL I/OA 50 conductor ribbon cable is supplied to connectMicroDACs to any 8,16,24, or 32 modulemounting rack. If connected to a G5 rack, anycombination of analog and digital I/O modulesmay be used. OpenLine®, standard and miniracks permit only a combination of digital modules.MicroDACs can be networked to a PC whichruns programs that monitor the input signals andcontrol the outputs. In addition to simple ON/OFFinstructions, commands are included whichpermit you to:• Sample analog signals at 10 mS per input• Flag values above or below prescribed levels• Capture min/max values• Calculate the average input signal levels• Provide linearized thermocouple and

RTD temperature values• Determine the width of input pulses• Count pulses at frequencies up to 1000 Hz• Detect rising or falling edges• Latch momentary input events• Set the level of analog outputs• Provide delayed-on or delayed-off outputs

COMMUNICATIONSThe host PC and MicroDAC(s) communicateserially over one or two pair of twisted wires perRS-422/485 in either a multi-drop or repeatconfiguration. They use Optomux™ ASCII formatto code the command and the responsemessages. Application programs running on thehost PC issue commands and then awaitresponses from the MicroDAC. Thecommunications speed is selectable between1.2 and 115.2 KBaud. Each controller on thenetwork is assigned a unique base address. Youcan separate units from one another by as muchas 4,000 feet.

EMBEDDED CONTROLPROGRAMSBy specifying MicroDAC(s) with the optional64KB of flash memory, you can develop anddownload C language programs to any of thenetworked controllers.

Even while an Embedded Control Program (ECP)is running on MicroDAC, any Optomux™

command it receives from the host will beprocessed as usual, which allows you to delegatesome or all of the control and data acquisitionresponsibility from the host PC. This reducescommunications time and improves systemresponse.

For embedded or stand-alone applications,downloaded ECP routines can be initiated onpower-up. Where redundant control or processshutdown procedures are vital, ECP initiation canbe tied to the communications watchdog timer. Inthe event the host computer goes off line, the ECPautomatically begins executing.

Libraries and the appropriate download utility areincluded with the ECP Programmers Manual.

SOFTWARESoftware drivers are available which simplify thetask of interfacing host programs written in VisualBasic or C. Sample programs, set-up and debugutilities are included on the disk with the drivers.Interface drivers for most third party softwarepackages are available through their distributors.Our MicroDAC DDE Server dramaticallysimplifies data sharing between MicroDACs andWindows applications, such as Microsoft Excel(see Optomux Software). Our DLL will assist youin building custom Windows Man-MachineInterfaces or control programs using Visual Basic,Visual C/C++, or Borland compilers.

OTHER FEATURES/OPTIONSThe RS-232 serial port provides a connection forremote RS-232 devices. You can use this port toread information from input devices such as barcode readers or keyboards or to write informationto output devices such as operator interfaces,intelligent displays or printers.

The optional real time clock permits ECP routinesto be executed based on date or time of day. Italso allows data that is collected to be timestamped and stored in battery backed RAMmemory.

Stand Alone Control

Local Control & I/O

Remote I/O

Distributed I/O

SCADA

RTU

APPLICATIONS

System 502 9


Sys

tem

50

System 50


Unless otherwise specified, tolerances are ± .010 (0,25).

SPECIFICATIONSPower Supply: 4.75 to 5.25 VdcSupply Current (less modules): 1A maxi-mumOperating Temperature: 0 to 60°CHumidity: 95% non-condensingHousing Material: Anodized AluminumMicroprocessor: V25 @ 10 MHzConnections:RS-422/485: 12 position terminal blockRS-232 (DCE or DTE): 9-pin D-Sub (male)SBX: 36-pin dual row (female)Rack: 50-pin male headerSerial Data:Format: 10-Bit ASCII, 1 Start, 1 Stop, 8 DataIntegrity: Message Checksum or 4 Pass + CSRange of Network: Compliant with EIA/TIARS-485-A (1 standard load per controller).Operates in multi-drop or repeat mode. 64 DIPswitch selectable addresses. May requireRS485 repeaters for lengths over 4,000 feetor more than 32 controllers in multi-dropmode. Consult factory for special configura-tions.

ORDERING INFORMATIONPart Number Description

MicroDAC Controllers

72-MDC-32ADC Analog/Digital MicroDAC with RS-232 and SBX ports, 64K batt.backed RAM, 64K flash for C ECP storage, and real time clock.

MicroDAC User's Manuals and Software

72-UMM Introduction to MicroDAC72-UMM-D Driver development and protocol definition. Includes driver source code72-UMM-DDE Optomux DDE Server for Windows 3.172-UMM-DLL Optomux DLL for Windows 3.172-UMM-DLL32 Optomux DLL for Windows 95/98/NT72-UMM-E C language ECP manual with libraries72-UMM-H Programmers manual with Basic and C host drivers & examples72-UMM-IL Hardware installation and set-up. Includes set-up and debug programs.7W-UM-MDL32 Windows ECP download Utility

Available from your local authorizedGrayhill Distributor.

For prices and discounts, contact your localsales office, an authorized Distributor, orGrayhill.

System 503 0

PANEL MOUNTING HOLES I.D. 0.18 (4,6) DIA. (2 PLACES)MOUNT WITH #8 SCREWS 0.75 (19,05) LONG MIN.

.632 (16,05)

5.105(129,67)

6.370(161,80)

6.755 ± .005(171,58 ± 0,13)

7.885 (200,28)

5.745 (145,92)THUMB SCREW FOR COVER REMOVAL (2 PLACES)

2.843(72,21)

0.719(18,26)

CONNECTION FOR RS-422/485 WIRES

9 PIN D-SUB FOR RS-232 CONNECTION

2.402(61,01)

3.857(97,97)

DIN RAIL CLIP.560 (14,2)

E R

R O

R

C O

P

R C

V

X M

T

D A T A A C Q U I S I T I O N A N D C O N T R O L

ATTACHES TO 35 MM DIN RAIL EN50022


Sys

tem

50

System 50

CONTROLLERSMicroDAC LT (Optomux)


32 Analog (G5 Only) and/or DigitalI/O Modules

• Executes On-Board ProgramsCreated With Borland C

• Network up to 64 MicroDAC LTsper Host Serial Port, Spanning asMuch as 4000 Feet

• Communicate Over RS-422 /485 atSpeeds From 1200 Baud to115.2 KB

• 100% Optomux Compatible, WithExpanded Command Set

• I/O Update Rates of 500 µSec per32 Digital I/O, and 10 mS perAnalog Input or 2 Analog Outputs

• 64-Bit Floating Point Math

APPLICATIONS

GENERAL DESCRIPTIONMicroDAC LT is a low cost version of MicroDACfor customers who don't need all of the featuresof MicroDAC. Missing are the battery back-upfor the RAM memory, real-time clock, RS-232,and SBX ports. The DIN Rail Mountable metalenclosure is optional. ECP routines written forMicroDAC can be easily transferred toMicroDAC LT and vice versa. By combiningMicroDAC, MicroDAC LT and ProMux thecost/performance of a distributed control ordata acquisition network is optimized for priceand performance.

ANALOG & DIGITAL I/OMicroDAC LT connects directly to any 8,16,24,or 32 module mounting rack with a 50-pinheader. If connected to a G5 rack, anycombination of analog and digital I/O modulesmay be used. Standard and Mini racks permitonly a combination of digital modules. MicroDACLTs can be networked to a host PC whichexecute programs that monitor the input signals

and control the outputs. In addition to simpleON/OFF instructions, commands are includedwhich permit you to:• Sample analog signals at 10 mS per input• Flag values above or below prescribed levels• Capture min/max values• Calculate the average input signal levels• Provide linearized thermocouple and

RTD temperature values• Determine the width of input pulses• Count pulses at frequencies up to 1000Hz• Detect rising or falling edges• Latch momentary input events• Set the level of analog outputs• Provide delayed-on or delayed-off outputs

COMMUNICATIONSThe host computer and MicroDAC LT(s)communicate serially over one or two pair oftwisted wires per RS-422/485 in a multi-dropconfiguration. They use Optomux™ ASCIIformat to code the command and the responsemessages. Application programs running onthe host computer issue commands and thenawait responses from the MicroDAC. Thecommunications speed is selectable between1.2 and 115.2 KBaud. Each controller on thenetwork is assigned a unique base address.The entire network can span 4000 feet.

EMBEDDED CONTROL PROGRAMSBy specifying MicroDAC LT(s) with the optional64KB of flash memory, you can develop anddownload C language programs to any of thenetworked controllers.

Even while an Embedded Control Program(ECP) is running on MicroDAC LT, anyOptomux™ command it receives from the hostwill be processed as usual, which allows you todelegate some or all of the control and dataacquisition responsibility from the host computer.This reduces communications time andimproves system response.

For embedded or stand-alone applications,downloaded ECP routines can be initiated onpower-up.

Libraries and the appropriate download utilityare included with the ECP ProgrammersManual.

SOFTWARESoftware drivers are available which simplifythe task of interfacing host programs written in.Visual Basic or C to the MicroDAC network.Sample programs, set-up and debug utilitiesare included on the disk with the drivers.Interface drivers for most third party softwarepackages are available through theirdistributors. Our MicroDAC DDE Serverdramatically simplifies data sharing betweenMicroDACs and Windows applications, suchas Microsoft Excel (see Controller Software).Our DLL will assist you in building customWindows Man-Machine Interfaces or controlprograms using Visual Basic, Visual C/C++, orBorland compilers.

1 With optional enclosure.

System 503 1


Sys

tem

50

System 50


Unless otherwise specified, tolerances are ± .010 (0,25).

SPECIFICATIONSPower Supply: 4.75 to 5.25 VdcSupply Current (less modules): 300 mAOperating Temperature: 0 to 70°CHumidity: 95% non-condensingMicroprocessor: V25 @ 10 MHzHousing Material: Painted steelConnections: RS-422/485: 10 position terminal block Rack: 50-pin female plugSerial Data: Format: 10-Bit ASCII, 1 Start, 1 Stop, 8 DataIntegrity: Message Checksum or 4 Pass + CSRange of Network: Compliant with EIA/TIARS485-A (1 standard load per controller).Operates in multi-drop mode. 64 DIP switchselectable addresses. May require RS485repeaters for lengths over 4000 feet or morethan 32 controllers. Consult factory for specialconfigurations.


MicroDAC LT Controllers

72-MDL-32ADC Analog/Digital with 64K flash for C ECP storage

MicroDAC LT User's Manuals and Software

72-UMM Introduction to MicroDAC72-UMM-D Driver development and protocol definition. Includes driver source code72-UMM-DDE Optomux DDE Server for Windows 3.172-UMM-DLL Optomux DLL for Windows 3.172-UMM-DLL32 Optomux DLL for Windows 95/98/NT72-UMM-E C language ECP manual with libraries72-UMM-H Programmers manual with Basic and C host drivers & examples72-UMM-IL Hardware installation and set-up. Includes set-up and debug programs


Available from your local authorized Gray-hill Distributor.


System 503 2

2.20 (55,9) PLUG CONNECTOR

MATES DIRECTLY WITH A RACK

4.875(123,83)

0.20(5,08)

4.25 (107,95)

+5VGNDFH+FH-TH+TH-FO+FO-TO+TO-

0.625(15,88)

0.725(18,42)

2.80 (71,12)

0.725(18,42)

STANDOFF I.D. 0.15 (3,8) DIA. CLEARANCE FOR #6 SCREW

4.975(126,37)

1.385(35,18)

.758(19,25)

3.000 (76,2)

.758 (19,25)

ATTACHES TO 35 MM DIN RAIL EN50022


Sys

tem

50

System 50

APPLICATIONS

DIGITAL INPUTS/OUTPUTSThe ProMux® network interface mates withany of our 8, 16, or 24 digital module racks.Plug Grayhill OpenLine®, standard, miniature,or G5 digital I/O modules into the racks. Theycan be mixed in any combination. Connect theProMux® boards serially to a host computerand then issue commands to monitor theinputs or control the outputs. Commands areincluded which permit you to:• Read the ON/OFF status of inputs• Determine the width of input pulses

• Count pulses at frequencies up to 400Hz• Detect rising or falling edges• Latch momentary input events• Turn outputs ON or OFF individually or in

groups• Pulse-width modulate outputs• Provide delayed-on or delayed-off outputs• Generate pulses or squarewaves

COMMUNICATIONSThe host computer and ProMux® boardscommunicate serially over two pair of twistedwires per RS-422/485 in either a multi-drop orrepeat configuration. They use an industrystandard ASCII string format to code thecommand and response messages.Application programs running on the hostcomputer issue commands and then awaitresponses from the ProMux® boards. Thecommunications speed is selectable between300 baud and 38.4 KBaud. Each controller onthe network is assigned a unique base addressfrom 0 to 255. You can separate boards fromone another by as much as 4,000 feet.

SOFTWARESoftware drivers are available which simplifythe task of interfacing programs written inVisual Basic or C to the ProMux® network.Sample programs and the set-up and debugutilities are included on the disk with the drivers.Interface drivers for most third party softwarepackages are available through theirdistributors.

OTHER FEATURESAll ProMux® boards are thoroughly tested andshipped in static proof boxes.

Because space inside your enclosure can belimited, we offer numerous rack plug-inconfiguration options. For applications requiringeven more mounting flexibility, the ProMux®

boards can be connected to racks with aribbon cable up to six feet long.

If you do not have an RS-422 or RS-485 serialport on your PC, we offer a variety of RS-232to RS-422/485 converters.

NETWORK INTERFACESProMux® (Optomux)

FEATURES• Each Board Controls Up to 24

Standard, Mini, G5 or OpenLine®

Digital Modules

• Up to 256 Addressable ProMux®

Boards Separated by 4,000 Feet

• 100% Optomux Compatible,Plus Extra Commands

• Communications at Speeds From300 Baud to 38.4 KBaud.

• Transient Protection onCommunications Lines

• Direct Plug-In or Ribbon

Cable Interconnection

• BASIC and C Drivers for the PC

Stand Alone Control

Local Control & I/O

Remote I/O

Distributed I/O

SCADA

RTU

System 503 3


S

yste

m

50

System 50


Unless otherwise specified, tolerances are ± 0.010 (0,25).

SPECIFICATIONSSupply Voltage: 4.5 to 5.5 VdcSupply Current (less modules): 300 mAmax.Operating Temperature: 0° to 70°CHumidity: 95% non-condensingMicroprocessor: 68HC11 @ 7.4 MHzConnections:RS-422/485: 12 position terminal blockRack: 50-pin female plug connector or 50-pin

male header connectorSerial Data: Format: 10-Bit ASCII, 1 Start, 1 Stop, 8 Data Integrity: Message Checksum or 4 Pass + CSRange of Network: Compliant with EIA/TIARS485-A (1 standard load per controller).Operates in multi-drop or repeat mode. 256DIP switch selectable addresses. May requireRS485 repeaters for lengths over 4,000 feet ormore than 32 controllers in multi-drop mode.Consult factory for special configurations.


Network Interfaces

72-PMO-1 Plug connector for direct rack connection72-PMO-3 Header connector for ribbon cable to rack connection

User’s Manuals and Software

72-UMO Manual with no software, for evaluating boards for purchase72-UMO-C Manual with Basic and C software drivers and utilities72-UMM-DDE Optomux DDE server for Windows 3.172-UMM-DLL Optomux DLL for Windows 3.172-UMM-DLL32 Optomux DLL for Windows 95/98/NT




System 503 4

3.50 (88,9)CONNECTION FOR RS-422/485 WIRES

2.625(66,68)

0.275(7,0)

0.25(6,4)

2.25 (57,1)

NOTE: FRONT LEGS AREINSTALLED ONLY ON 72-PMO-3

0.67 (17,0) 2.66 (67,5)

4.00 (101,6)

4.00(101,6)

4.50(114,3)

HEADER CONNECTOR ON 72-PMO-3 MATES WITH A RIBBON CABLE

PLUG CONNECTOR ON 72-PMO-1 MATES DIRECTLY WITH A RACK

STANDOFF I.D. 0.15 (3,8) DIA. CLEARANCE FOR #6 SCREW

1.35(34,29)

0.55 (13,97) PIN 1

1.5 (38,1)


Sys

tem

50

System 50

APPLICATIONS

DIGITAL INPUTS/OUTPUTSThe 72-PMX-24D controller board mates withany of our 8, 16, or 24 digital module racks. The72-PMX-32D or 72-PMX-32AD controllerboard mates with special rack part number70GRCP32-HL which accepts up to 32 G5analog or digital I/O modules. Connections aremade between the PC (or other type of host)parallel port and the controller boards via a 50pin flat ribbon cable. The cable can be up to 500feet in length. The cable from the host isconnected to the first controller board on thebus and then daisy chained to additionalcontroller boards. Up to 32 controller boardswith 16 module racks (or 16 controller boardswith 24 or 32 module racks) can be addedanywhere along the cable. The maximumnumber of I/O per parallel port is 512.

NETWORK INTERFACESParallel Bus

FEATURES• Each Board Controls Up to 24 or 32

I/O Modules• Scans 512 Digital I/O Points in

Less Than 200 µSec.• Compatible With Parallel Controller

Boards From Other Manufacturers• DIP Switch Selectable Address

and Options• Up to 32 Addressable Boards Over

500 Feet• On-Board Terminating Resistors• On-Board Communications

Watchdog Timer

SPEEDThe parallel bus is high speed. The host PCcan read or write eight digital I/O modules inless than 3 microseconds which means that512 digital I/O modules can be scanned in lessthan 200 microseconds! Each group of eightI/O modules are accessed through a separateI/O port register on the host PC or controller.In assembly language, an IN or OUT instructionis used to read or write this information. In Clanguage, an inp or outp function call is used.In BASIC, an INP or OUTP instruction is used.

WATCHDOG TIMEREach controller board has an on-boardcommunications watchdog timer whichmonitors communications between the hostand controller board. A timer value between0.5 seconds and 12 seconds is selected foreach board. On power up, the timer beginscounting down. Whenever a message fromthe host is received, the timer is restarted.Should the timer time out, all of the outputmodules being controlled by the board will beset to one of four DIP switch selectableconditions (ie. all off).

OTHER FEATURESOne of the control lines on the parallel bus iscalled RESET. The RESET line can be used tosimultaneously turn off all of the output modulesbeing controlled by each of the boards on thebus.

Three LEDs on the controller boards assist introubleshooting problems. They indicate whenpower is being applied, when messages arebeing received, and when the watchdog timerhas timed out.

THE 72-PC28 ADAPTER CARDIn applications where the host computer is aPC, the 72-PC28 adapter card is an IBM PC/XT/AT bus to parallel bus interface whichoccupies a single half slot in the computer. Thebus ribbon cable plugs into it's 50-pin maleheader connector. Each adapter card candrive up to thirty two 72-PMX-24D controllerboards, sixteen 72-PMX-32D controller boardsor sixteen 72-PMX-32AD controller boardsover a total distance of 500 feet. Up to four 72-PC28 adapter cards can be installed in one PC.The base address for the card and wait statesare DIP switch selectable.

Each 72-PC28 includes a complete User'sManual and a software setup/test utilityprogram. This program graphically shows youdip switch, jumper and termination resistorsettings for the system configuration youdecided. You can then use the program toconfigure and manipulate any I/O on the parallelbus.

All controller boards are thoroughly testedprior to shipment.

Stand Alone Control

Local Control & I/O

Remote I/O

Distributed I/O

SCADA

RTU

System 503 5


S

yste

m

50

System 50


Part No. 72-PMX-24D

Unless otherwise specified, tolerances are ± 0.010 (0,35).

Part No. 72-PMX-32AD or 72-PMX-32D



Controller Board

72-PMX-24D Parallel controller board for up to 24 digital I/O modules72-PMX-32AD Parallel controller board for 32 G5 analog or digital I/O modules72-PMX-32D Parallel controller board for 32 G5 digital I/O modules

Adapter Card

72-PC28 IBM PC parallel port plug-in board, includes 72-UMP manual

User’s Manual

72-UMP Manual with utility software and sample programs

For finished ribbon cable assemblies, see “Controller Accessories”



SPECIFICATIONSSupply Voltage: 4.9 to 5.1 VdcSupply Current (board only): 1.5A maximumOperating Temperature: 0° to 60°CHumidity: 95% non-condensingConnections (72-PMX-24D):Parallel bus: Two 50-pin male headerconnectorsRack: 50-pin female plug connectorConnections (72-PMX-32D or 72-PMX-32AD):Parallel bus: Two 50-pin male headerconnectors located on rack 70GRCP32-HLRack: 70-pin female plug connectorParallel Data:Format: 8-Bit ParallelRange of Network:Multi-drop: Up to 500 feet total cable length,with (32) 72-PMX-24D or (16) 72-PMX-32D or72-PMX-32AD boards maximum

System 503 6

– +

POWER LEDADDRESS LED

WATCHDOG LED

TERMINATIONRESISTOR PACKS


PLUG CONNECTORTO MOUNTING RACK

1.50

(38,

1)

6.00 (152,4)

5.50 (139,7)

4.50(114,3)

DIP SWITCH0.25 (6,35)

0.50 (12,7)

STANDOFF I.D. 0.15 (3,8) DIA.CLEARANCE FOR #6 SCREWS

50 PIN RIBBONCABLE CONNECTORS FOR PARALLEL BUS


Sys

tem

50

System 50

COMMUNICATIONCONVERTERSRS-232 to RS-422/485

FEATURES• Selectable RTS operation for 2

wire applications• Transient Protection on the

RS-422/485 Lines´ On-Board Power Supply With

Jumper Selectable 110/220 VacOperation

• Optical Isolation Between RS-232and RS422/485

• DIP Switch Selectable DTE/DCESetting

• Multiple Mounting and ConnectorOptions

GENERAL DESCRIPTIONThe 72-CNV-XX family of converters offer aflexible and reliable solution to the challenge ofinterfacing devices conforming to different serialcommunication standards. Grayhill converterproducts are designed for industrialenvironments. All communication lines havetransient protection which other commerciallyavailable converters lack. The converters allowan RS-232 device (ie. PCs, PLCs, EmbeddedControllers) to communicate reliably over longdistances to multiple devices utilizing the RS-422/485 standard. Reliability is an inherent benefitof the differential mode communication of RS-422/485. Noise introduced onto the RS-422/485link affects both the positive and negative sideequally, preserving the integrity of the differentialsignal between them. Long distances and multipleslave devices are supported by the converters.In half-duplex (2-wire) RS-485 mode,



72-CNV-10 RS-232 to RS-422/485 converter for DIN card cage (Pictured)72-CNV-11 RS-232 to RS-422 converter for panel mount72-CNV-12 RS-232 to RS-422/485 converter for DIN rail mounting

handshaking can be controlled from either end ofthe communication link. Typical applicationsinvolve connecting a host computer to remotelylocated serial devices such as printers, controlequipment, or data acquisition devices distributedthroughout an office or factory.

The multiple mounting and connector optionsallow for many installation possibilities. All threeversions conform to a Eurocard 3U size (160 mmx 100 mm). 72-CNV-10 will mount in a DIN 41494card cage. AC power and the RS-422 signals arebrought out to a DIN standard 41612 15-pinconnector (Harting p/n 09061152911 orequivalent). 72-CNV-11 has standoffs to facilitatepanel mounting. AC power comes in to a screw-

type terminal strip. RS-422 signals are on aseparate terminal strip or a female DB-9connector. 72-CNV-12 has a DIN rail cardcarrier which permits the assembly to snap ona DIN rail. AC power and RS-422 signals arebrought in to two screw-type terminal strips. Afemale DB-25 connector transfers the RS-232signals for all three versions.

SPECIFICATIONSSupply Voltage Range (Vps): 110/220 Vac(jumper selectable)Maximum Supply Current (Ips): 120 mAIsolation Voltage: 4000 VacTransmission Rate: 300 to 115,200 BaudOperating Temperature Range: 0 to 60°C95% relative humidity, non-condensingIndicators: TX, RX, CTS, RTS and Power


72-CNV-2 RS-232 to RS-422 converter with optical isolation72-CNV-4 RS-232 to RS-422/485 converter with 8 to 15V operation72-CNV-5 RS-232 to RS-422/485 converter with 5V operation


Available from your local Grayhill Distributor. For prices and discounts, contact a local SalesOffice, an authorized Distributor, or Grayhill.

72-CNV-2, 72-CNV-4 AND 72-CNV-5 72-CNV-4 and 72-CNV-5 convert serialcommunications from RS-232 to RS-485 inboth directions. The converter simply plugsinto any male RS-232 DB-25 connector andconverts the transmit and receive signals toRS-485 (RS-422) levels at speeds to 115.2KB. The converters are configured for DTE(default) or DCE operation.

The 72-CNV-2 is similar to the 72-CNV-4except that it provides optical isolation and

operates only in an RS-422 mode at a maximumrate of 19.2 KB.Supply Voltage:

+8 to +15 Vdc (-2 and -4 versions)+5Vdc (-5 version)

Supply Current:62 mA plus output load (-2 version)30 mA plus output load (-4 and -5 version)

Operating Temperature Range: 0-60°C

System 503 7


Sys

tem

50

System 50

CABLE ASSEMBLIES TEST MODULESSeveral standard cable assem-blies to connect controllers to ourI/O module mounting racks maybe ordered. The 72-CHH cablehas a 50-pin header connector oneach end to mate with those onmounting racks. The 72-CHE cablehas a 50-pin header connector onone end and a 50-pin edge cardconnector on the other.

Modules for use in system set upand testing may be ordered. Mod-ules 70M-ISW1and 70G-ISW1simulates an input; 70M-OSW1switch simulates an output.

Controller Boards, I/O Modules, ModuleRacks, and Accessories are availablethrough Authorized Grayhill Industrial Dis-tributors. For prices and discounts, contactyour local sales office, an authorized IndustrialDistributor, or Grayhill.

FUSE KITSPart Number Description

Cable Assemblies

72-CHH-1 Ribbon cable assembly, header to header, 1 foot long72-CHH-2 Ribbon cable assembly, header to header, 2 feet long72-CHH-4 Ribbon cable assembly, header to header, 4 feet long72-CHH-6 Ribbon cable assembly, header to header, 6 feet long72-CHE-2 Ribbon cable assembly, header to edge card, 2 feet long72-CHE-4 Ribbon cable assembly, header to edge card, 4 feet long72-CHE-6 Ribbon cable assembly, header to edge card, 6 feet long

Test Modules

70L-ISW Input module test switch, OpenLine® package70G-ISW1 Input module test switch, G5 package70M-ISW1 Input module test switch, mini package70M-OSW1 Output module test switch, 3 amp, mini package

Fuses

70-FUSE-3AC Fuse, 3.15A, 5x20mm, used on all AC Digital Output Modules70-FUSE-3DC Fuse, 3.15A, 5x20mm, used on all Solid State OpenLine ®

DC Digital Output Modules70-FUSE-H Fuse holder for Output Modules, used on all Digital Output Modules


Fuse and fuse holder Replacement kits of 10can be ordered directly from Grayhill.

SYSTEM 50 JUMPER BARSGrayhill jumper bars are available forapplications that require commonterminals to be bussed together ondigital I/O mounting racks. Jumperbars are available for both our Miniand G5 racks. Grayhill jumper barsare made from .032” thick tin-platedbrass. The jumper bars are insulatedwith a molded sleeve for excellentdielectric properties.

ORDERING INFORMATION: Jumper Bars for Grayhill G5 and Mini Series I/O Racks

Part Number Description Dimension “L” in. (mm) Use on Grayhill I/O Rack

70G-JUMP8 8 position jumper for G5 I/O racks 3.60 (91,44) 70GRCK8-HL, 70GRCK16-HL, 70GRCM32-HL,70GRCP32-HL, 70GRCK16I, 70GRCK16T

70G-JUMP12 12 position jumper for G5 I/O racks 5.60 (142,24) 70GRCQ24-HL70M-JUMP6 6 position jumper for Mini I/O racks 2.08 (52,83) 70MRCQ24-HL70M-JUMP8 8 position jumper for Mini I/O racks 2.88 (73,15) 70MRCK8-HL, 70MRCK16-HL, 70MRCK24-HL

G5

Mini

DIMENSIONS: Jumper Bars

ACCESSORIES

System 503 8

DIM. L ± .010 (0,25)

.500 (12,7) TYP.

.100 (2,54).240(6,10)

.180(4,57)

.032(0,81)

.655 (16,64)

.087(2,21)

DIM. L ± .010 (0,25)

.400 (10,16) TYP..080 (2,03).240

(6,10)

.180(4,57)

.032(0,81)

.555 (14,10)

.087(2,21)

Grayhill , Inc. • 561 Hillgrove Avenue • LaGrange, Il l inois 60525-5997 • USA • Phone: 708-354-1040 • Fax: 708-354-2820 • www.grayhill .com

OpenD

AC

® I/O

System

OpenDAC® I/O System

OPENDOPENDOPENDOPENDOPENDAAAAACCCCC®

I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O SYSTEMSYSTEMSYSTEMSYSTEMSYSTEM


OpenD

AC

® I/O

System

OpenDAC® I/O SystemContents: OpenDac® I/O System

Page

Network Interfaces

OpenDAC® for Ethernet .............................................................................................. 2

OpenDAC® for Modbus .............................................................................................. 4

OpenLT (Optomux) ..................................................................................................... 6

OpenDAC® for Profibus ............................................................................................. 8

Racks

16 Channel ............................................................................................................... 10

OpenDAC® I/O SystemThe OpenDAC® family is a compact, low costand flexible I/O system that is used for remotedata requisition and control. Each networkinterface is capable of interfacing with one ortwo OpenDAC® I/O racks that allow amaximum of 32 channels of OpenLine® I/Omodules. With the exception of the OpenLT™,they do not have the capability of runningembedded control programs (ECPS). If thisis a requirement, please review the OpenLine®

Control System. OpenDAC® I/O racks arenot compatible with the OpenLine®

Controllers.

OPENDAC® I/O SYSTEMLow Cost Remote I/O System

FEATURES• Compatible with Present

Systems

• Communicates within thirdparty hardware and software

• Ethernet Version

OpenDAC1


OpenD

AC

® I/O

System


NETWORK INTERFACESOpenDAC® for Ethernet

FEATURES• Use Ethernet to Control/Monitor up

to 32 Analog and/or Digital I/OChannels using OpenLine® I/OModules

• Network Multiple OpenDACs®

• 10Base-T and 100Base-TX Support• Extremely Fast Response Times

over Network• Support Modbus/TCP Protocol

and HTTP• Use Web Browser for Configuration,

Monitoring and Control of I/Omodules

• Diagnostic LEDs• CE Certified• DIN Rail Mounting• Modbus TCP

GENERAL DESCRIPTIONThe OpenDAC® for Ethernet network inter-face is a remote slave that responds toModbus/TCP commands that it receives overthe network. The status and configuration ofup to 32 OpenLine® analog or digital I/O chan-nels is stored and constantly refreshed.OpenDAC® for Ethernet is self-configuring. Onpower up, the controller will identify the typesof I/O modules present. The unit will then con-tinuously scan and update the digital and ana-log modules. Digital input channels can besetup for latching operation. The OpenDAC®

for Ethernet supports the OpenLine® SmartModule Protocol (SMP) that allows field cali-bration and parameter setup of I/O modules.

Each OpenDAC® or third party device on thenetwork is assigned a unique IP address. Thereare three methods of assigning the internetprotocol address -BOOTP, DHCP, and a staticmethod. The controller is shipped with the defaultIP address of 128.0.0.1. The IP address can bechanged using a web browser. The web browsercan also be used to select BOOTP or DHCP toassign the IP address. Communication datarates are either 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps.OpenDAC® automatically detects whether it isconnected to a 10Base-T or 100Base-TXnetwork, eliminating switch settings andsimplifying set up. Network and controller statuscan be monitored by status LEDs.

Each OpenDAC® incorporates a communicationwatchdog timer that monitors communicationfrom the Modbus/TCP master. When thewatchdog is enabled and the slave does notreceive a valid Modbus/TCP message within aspecified time, the OpenDAC® will set all outputmodules to the stored fault-state values. Shoulda valid message be received, the timer is resetand communication resumes. All configurationparameters are displayed and modified using aweb browser. The configuration parametersare password protected to provide securityagainst unauthorized access.

ANALOG & DIGITAL I/OMODULESOpenDAC® for Ethernet connects directly toone or two 16 channel racks. Any combinationof analog and digital I/O modules may be used.On power up, the OpenDAC® scans and storesthe I/O configuration and makes the informationavailable to the master.

In addition to simple On/Off instructions, theOpenDAC® allows you to:• Read linearized thermocouple and RTD

temperature values• Detect rising or falling edges• Latch momentary input events• Set the level of analog outputs

Stand Alone Control

Local Control & I/O

Remote I/O

Distributed I/O

SCADA

RTU

APPLICATIONS

ETHERNET UNIT ON OPENDAC® SYSTEM

OpenDAC2


OpenD

AC

® I/O

System



2.3 (57.17)TO CENTERLINE OFDIN RAIL CHANNEL

3.9 (99,56)

4.1(104,26)

2.6(65.48)

DIN RAIL LATCH

PIN 1

LINK

ST

AT

CO

NF

IG

PO

WE

R

RE

SE

T

DE

FA

ULT

for Ethernet

OpenD

AC

SPECIFICATIONSSupply Voltage: 4.80 to 5.25 VdcSupply Current (less modules): 1.0 ampmax.Operating Temperature: -40 to 85°CHumidity: 5-95% non-condensingHousing Material: ABS/Polycarbonate blendCPU: Net+ARM 40Connections: Network: RJ-45 Passive Rack: 48-Pin Euro DIN (male) Range of Network (without repeaters): 100 meters with CAT 5 UTP


Ethernet Network Interface

72-ETH-T000 Analog/Digital OpenDAC® for Ethernet

Ethernet User’s Manual and Software

72-UM-OETH OpenDAC® for Ethernet user’s manual72-UM-ETH OpenLine® for Ethernet user’s manual72-UOL OpenLine®/OpenDAC® configuration and product data72-UME-DLL32 Ethernet/Modbus DLL for Windows 95/98/NT

Compatible Components

OpenDAC® I/O Racks Analog OpenLine® I/O ModulesDigital OpenLine® I/O Modules Power Supply


Available from your local authorizedGrayhill Distributor. For prices and discounts,contact your local sales office, an authorizedDistributor or Grayhill.

OpenDAC3


OpenD

AC

® I/O

System


NETWORK INTERFACESOpenDAC® for Modbus


32 Analog and/or Digital I/O usingOpenLine® Modules

• Network up to 247 OpenDACs® perHost PC, Each Separated by asmuch as 4,000 Feet

• Communicate Over RS-422/485 atSpeeds from 9600 Baud to 56.7 KB

• 100% Modbus ASCII or ModbusRTU Compatible

• CE Certified• DIN Rail or Panel Mount

APPLICATIONS GENERAL DESCRIPTIONOpenDAC® for Modbus is an inexpensive,flexible interface to 32 analog or digitalOpenLine® I/O. As one of 247 slave devices ona Modbus network, OpenDAC® for Modbusconstantly scans and stores the current statusof each I/O. Upon command from the hostdevice, the controller will change the status ofan output or return the value of an input. Theslave address is switch selectable. DiagnosticLEDs provide troubleshooting assistance.

ANALOG & DIGITAL I/OOpenDAC® for Modbus connects directly to two16 channel racks. Any combination of analogand digital I/O modules may be used. On powerup, the OpenDAC® scans and stores the I/Oconfiguration and makes the informationavailable to the master for query.

In addition to simple On/Off instructions, Modbuscommands allow you to:• Read linearized thermocouple and RTD

temperature values• Count pulses at frequencies up to 1000Hz• Detect rising or falling edges• Latch momentary input events• Set the level of analog outputs

COMMUNICATIONSThe host computer and OpenDAC® for Modbuscommunicate serially over one or two pair oftwisted wires per RS-422/485 in a multi-dropconfiguration. They use Modbus ASCII or RTU

format to code the command and the responsemessages. Application programs running onthe host computer issue commands and thenawait responses from the OpenDAC®. Thecommunications speed is switch selectablebetween 9600 and 56700 baud. The entirenetwork can span 4000 feet.

FAULT TOLERANCEEach OpenDAC® for Modbus has an internalcommunications watchdog timer to minimizethe impact of a broken Modbus link between thecontroller and the master device. If activated,the timer must be reset by an incoming messagewithin the prescribed period of time. If not, thecontroller will force it’s outputs into a defaultstate.

SOFTWARESoftware drivers are available which simplifythe task of interfacing host programs written inVisual Basic or C to the Modbus network. Sampleprograms, set-up and debug utilities are includedon the disk with the drivers. Interface drivers formost third party software packages are availablethrough their distributors. Our DLL will assistyou in building custom Man-Machine Interfacesusing Visual Basic, Visual C/C++, or Borlandcompilers running on Windows 95, 98 or NT.

Stand Alone Control

Local Control & I/O

Remote I/O

Distributed I/O

SCADA

RTU

MODBUS UNIT ON OPENDAC® SYSTEM

OpenDAC4


OpenD

AC

® I/O

System



SPECIFICATIONSPower Supply: 4.75 to 5.25 VdcSupply Current (less modules): 1 amp @ 5Vdc max.Operating Temperature: 0 to 60°CHumidity: 95% non-condensingMicroprocessor: V25 @ 10 MHzHousing Material: ABS/Polycarbonate blendConnections:RS-422/485: 5 position depluggable connectorPassive Rack: 48-pin Euro DIN (male)Serial Data:Format: 10 Bit ASCII: 1 Start, 1 Stop, 8 DataIntegrity: Message ChecksumRange of Network: Compliant with EIA/TIARS485-A (1 standard load per controller).Operates in multi-drop mode. 247 DIP switchselectable addresses. May require RS485repeaters for lengths over 4000 feet or morethan 32 controllers. Consult factory for specialconfigurations.


OpenDAC® Network Interface

72-MOD-4000 Analog/Digital OpenDAC® for Modbus

OpenDAC® User’s Manual and Software

72-UM-OMOD OpenDAC® for Modbus user’s manual 72-UME-DLL32 Ethernet/Modbus DLL for Windows 95/98/NT 72-UOL OpenLine® configuration and product data


OpenDAC® I/O RacksDigital OpenLine® I/O ModulesAnalog OpenLine® I/O ModulesPower Supply


Available from your local authorized GrayhillDistributor. For prices and discounts, contactyour local sales office, an authorized Distributor,or Grayhill.


2.6(65.48)

3.0(75.69)

1.0(25.86)

1.1(28.22)3.9 (99.56)

DIN RAIL LATCH

PIN 1

4.1(104.26)

OpenDAC5


OpenD

AC

® I/O

System


NETWORK INTERFACESOpenLT™ (Optomux)

FEATURES• Each Unit Controls/Monitors up to 32

Analog and/or Digital I/O using OpenLine®

Modules• Executes On-Board Programs Created

With Borland C• Network up to 64 OpenLTs per Host Serial

Port, Spanning as Much as 4000 Feet• Communicate Over RS422 /485 at

Speeds from 9600 Baud to 115.2 KB• 100% Optomux Compatible, With

Expanded Command Set• I/O Update Rates of 500 µSec per 32

Digital I/O, and 2 mS per Analog Inputor 2 Analog Outputs

• 64-Bit Floating Point Math• DIN Rail or Panel Mountable• CE Certified

APPLICATIONS

GENERAL DESCRIPTIONThe OpenLT™ Optomux™ controller is a remoteslave that responds to Optomux™ commandsfrom the master or host PC. The 72-OPT-4100version has memory for Embedded ControlPrograms (ECPs) which are control or dataacquisition routines which run locally on theOpenLT™ and off-load some responsibilitiesfrom the host. ECP routines written for MicroDACcan be easily transferred to OpenLT™ and viceversa. By combining MicroDAC, OpenLT™ andProMux® the cost/performance of a distributedcontrol or data acquisition network is optimizedfor price and performance.

ANALOG & DIGITAL I/OOpenLT® connects directly to one or twoOpenLine® racks (part number 70LRCK16-48).Any combination of OpenLine® analog and digitalI/O modules may be used. OpenLTs™ can benetworked to a host PC which execute programsthat monitor the input signals and control theoutputs. In addition to simple ON/OFFinstructions, commands are included whichpermit you to:• Sample analog signals at 2 mS per input• Flag values above or below prescribed levels• Capture min/max values• Calculate the average input signal levels• Provide linearized thermocouple and

RTD temperature values• Determine the width of input pulses• Count pulses at frequencies up to 1000Hz• Detect rising or falling edges• Latch momentary input events• Set the level of analog outputs• Provide delayed-on or delayed-off outputs

COMMUNICATIONSThe host computer and OpenLT(s)™

communicate serially over one or two pair oftwisted wires per RS-422/485 in a multi-dropconfiguration. They use Optomux™ ASCII formatto code the command and the responsemessages. Application programs running onthe host computer issue commands and thenawait responses from the OpenLT™. Thecommunications speed is selectable between9.6 and 115.2 KBaud. Each controller on thenetwork is assigned a unique base address.The entire network can span 4000 feet.Diagnostic LEDs show traffic on the network.

EMBEDDED CONTROL PROGRAMSBy specifying OpenLT(s)® with the optional 64KB of flash memory, you can develop anddownload C language programs to any of thenetworked controllers.

Even while an ECP is running on OpenLT®, anyOptomux™ command it receives from the hostwill be processed as usual, which allows you todelegate some or all of the control and dataacquisition responsibility from the host computer.This reduces communications time and improvessystem response.

For embedded or stand-alone applications,downloaded ECP routines can be initiated onpower-up.

Libraries and the appropriate download utilityare included with the ECP Programmers Manual.

SOFTWARESoftware drivers are available which simplifythe task of interfacing host programs written inVisual Basic or C to the Optomux network.Sample programs, set-up and debug utilitiesare included on the disk with the drivers. Interfacedrivers for most third party software packagesare available through their distributors. OurOptomux DDE Server dramatically simplifiesdata sharing between OpenLTs™ and Windowsapplications, such as Microsoft EXCEL (seeController Software). Our DLL will assist you inbuilding custom Windows Man-MachineInterfaces using Visual Basic, Visual C/C++, orBorland compilers.

Stand Alone Control

Local Control & I/O

Central Processing: Remote I/O

Distributed Processing: Remote I/O

SCADA

RTU

OPENLT® UNIT ON OPENDAC® SYSTEM

OpenDAC6


OpenD

AC

® I/O

System



SPECIFICATIONSPower Supply: 4.75 to 5.25 VdcSupply Current (less modules): 300 mA max.Operating Temperature: 0 to 60°CHumidity: 95% non-condensingMicroprocessor: V25 @ 10 MHzHousing Material: ABS/Polycarbonate blendConnections:RS-422/485: 5 position pluggable terminal blockRack: 48-pin Euro DIN (male)Serial Data:Format: 10-Bit ASCII, 1 Start, 1 Stop, 8 DataIntegrity: Message Checksum or 4 Pass + CSRange of Network: Compliant with EIA/TIARS485-A (1 standard load per controller).Operates in multi-drop mode. 64 DIP switchselectable addresses. May require RS485repeaters for lengths over 4000 feet or morethan 32 controllers. Consult factory for specialconfigurations.


OpenLT® Network Interface

72-OPT-4000 Analog/Digital OpenLT®

72-OPT-4100 Analog/Digital OpenLT® with 64K flash for C ECP storage

OpenLT® User’s Manuals and Software

72-UMM-D Driver development and protocol definition (includes driver source code)72-UMM-DDE Optomux DDE server for Windows 3.172-UMM-DLL Optomux DLL for Windows 3.172-UMM-DLL32 Optomux DLL for Windows 95/98/NT72-UMM-E C language ECP manual with libraries72-UMM-H Programmer’s manual with Basic and C host drivers and examples72-UM-OOPT Hardware installation and setup. Includes setup and debug programs72-UOL OpenLine® configuration and product data7W-UM-MDL32 Windows ECP download Utility


OpenDAC® I/O Racks Digital OpenLine® I/O Modules Analog OpenLine® I/O Modules Power Supplies


Available from your local authorized GrayhillDistributor. For prices and discounts, contactyour local sales office, an authorized Distributor orGrayhill.


2.6(65.48)

3.0(75.69)

1.0(25.86)

1.1(28.22)3.9 (99.56)

DIN RAIL LATCH

PIN 1

4.1(104.26)

OpenDAC7


OpenD

AC

® I/O

System


NETWORK INTERFACESOpenDAC® for Profibus


32 Analog and/or Digital I/O usingOpenLine® Modules

• Network up to 127 OpenDACs®

per Host PC• Communicate at Speeds

Up to12 MB• Auto Baud Rate Detect• 100% Profibus DP Compatible

(PTO Tested and Approved)• I/O Update Rates of 500 µSec per

32 Digital and 1 mS per AnalogModule (2 Channels)

• Diagnostic LEDs• CE Certified• DIN Rail Mount

APPLICATIONS GENERAL DESCRIPTIONThe OpenDAC® for Profibus network interfaceis a remote slave that responds to Profibus DPcommands that it receives over the network.The status and configuration of up to 32OpenLine® analog or digital I/O channels isstored and constantly refreshed.

OpenDAC® for Profibus is self-configuring. Onpower up, the controller will read the ID of eachI/O module and build an internal database.During the master configuration the controllerwill compare this configuration with the storedconfiguration. If there is a match, the master willallow exchange of information to occur.

Each OpenDAC® or third party device on thenetwork will occupy 1 of 127 unique addresses.Communication between the master and slavedevices takes place at baud rates from 50 KB to12 MB. OpenDACs® automatically detect thebaud rate, eliminating switch settings andsimplifying set up. Network traffic and controllerstatus can be monitored by status LEDs on thecontrollers. Diagnostic information is routinelyexchanged between master and slave devices.

Each OpenDAC® incorporates a communicationwatchdog timer that monitors communicationfrom the Profibus master. When the watchdogis enabled and the slave does not receive a validProfibus message within 100 mS, the OpenDAC®

will set all output values to zero. Should a validmessage be received, the timer is reset andcommunication resumes.

Stand Alone Control

Local Control & I/O

Remote I/O

Distributed I/O

SCADA

RTU

PROFIBUS UNIT ON OPENDAC® SYSTEM

OpenDAC8


OpenD

AC

® I/O

System



SPECIFICATIONSSupply Voltage: 4.75 to 5.25 VdcSupply Current (less modules): 0.5A max.Operating Temperature: -40 to 85°CHumidity: 5-95% non-condensingHousing Material: ABS/Polycarbonate blendCPU: AM 188ES @ 24 MHzConnections: Profibus: 9-Pin D-Sub (female) Passive Rack: 48-Pin Euro DIN (male)Serial Data: Format: 11 bits: 1 start, 1 stop, 1 parity (even), 8 data Integrity: Frame checksumRange of Network (without repeaters):1200 meters for entire network below 93 KB;600 meters at 187.5 KB; 200 meters at 500 KB



Available from your local authorizedGrayhill Distributor.


Profibus Network Interfacer

72-PRO-4000 Analog/Digital OpenDAC® for Profibus DP

Profibus User’s Manual and Software

72-UM-PRO OpenDAC® for Profibus DP user’s manual72-UOL OpenLine® configuration and product data

3.90 (99,06)

4.20 (106,68)

DIN RAIL LATCH

1.0 (25,4)

PIN #1 2.31 (58,75)TO CENTERLINE

OF DIN RAIL CHANNEL

2.60(66,04)

2.90(73,66)

OpenDAC9


OpenD

AC

® I/O

System


2.8(72.21)

2.8(72.21)

6.2(156.87)

5.9(149.66)

4.4(111.56)

3.9(99.85)

DIN RAIL CLIP

I/O BUSJ4PIN 1

J4PIN 1

J1 TOP ROW: +5VBOTTOM ROW: GND

J1 TOP ROW: +5VBOTTOM ROW: GND

(WP VERSION SOLDWITH PLUGS)

32302826242220181614121086

31292725232119171513119753

42

1+5+5

M8

M7

M6

M5

M4

M3

M2

M1

70LRCK16-48P

70LRCK16-48

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

16 CHANNEL RACK: OpenDAC® Rack

Part No. 70LRCK16-48Dimensions are shown in inches(and millimeters).All tolerances are ± 0.010 (0,25)unless otherwise specified.

RACKS16 Channel

FEATURES• Automatically Detects OpenLine®

I/O Module Types• Provides Direct Interface for the I/O to

OpenDAC® Network Interfaces• Multiple Termination Options• Stack up to Two Racks for the

32 I/O channels• Small Footprint• DIN Rail Mount• UL, CSA, CE (See Engineering Info, p. L-6)

OpenDAC10


OpenD

AC

® I/O

System


SCHEMATIC: Part No. 70LRCK16-48

/CS2

A5A6A7A8

A1A2A3A4

B4B12B13

MODULEID

DETECT

/CS1ISCLKIDI

/ICONV

/IDORIDOIEOC

B8B7B6B5

B11B10B9

J3

A9A10A11A12A13A14A15A16

J2

0

56789

4321

B10B8B7B6

B13B12B11

J2A4A3A2A1

A8A7A6A5

J3

C12C11C10C9

C16C15C14C13

J3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

A12A11A10A9

A16A15A14A13

J2

C4C3C2C1

C8C7C6C5

J2

C12C11C10C9

C5C6C7C8

C1C2C3C4

J3

C16C15C14C13

J2

B14B2B1

J3

B9B5B4

J3

J2

B16B15B3

B16B15B3

B14B2B1

+5+5 31

3230

2927

2826

2523

2422

2119

2018

1715

1614

1311

1210

97

86

53

42

1FIELDWIRINGTERMINALSTRIP

MODULELOCATION


16 Channel Racks

70LRCK16-48 16 48-pin Euro DIN logic signal connector. DIN rail mount. X X OpenDAC®

70LRCK16-48C 16 48-pin Euro DIN logic signal connector. DIN rail mount with X X OpenDAC®

cage clamp style terminal blocks70LRCK16-48P 16 48-pin Euro DIN logic signal connector. DIN rail mount with X X OpenDAC®

pluggable terminal blocks70LRCK16-48WP 16 48-pin Euro DIN logic signal connector. DIN rail mount with X X OpenDAC®

pluggable terminal blocks, plug included

ORDERING INFORMATION (MODULES ORDERED SEPARATELY)


OpenDAC11


Standard KeypadsK

eyb

oa

rds a

nd

Keyp

ad

s

SERIES 96Conductive Rubber

FEATURES• Quality, Economical Keyboards• Easily Customized Legends• Matrix Circuitry• Backlit and Shielded Options

Available• Termination Mates With Standard

Connectors• Tactile Feedback to Operator• 1,000,000 Operations per Button• Compatible With High Resistance

Logic Inputs

The Series 96 is Grayhill's most economical 3x4and 4x4 keypad family. The contact systemutilizes conductive rubber to mate theappropriate PC board traces. Offered in matrixcircuitry, with shielded and backlit options. Builtwith quality component parts, the Series 96 issubjected to our rigid statistical process controlto insure that it meets our reliability standards.


3x4 Front Mount Keyboard Standard Versions Shielded/Backlit Versions

1

4

7

10

2

5

8

11

3

6

9

12

2.000 ± .015(50,8 ± 0,38)

.500 (12,7)

1.000(25,4)

.500 (12,7)

.500 (12,7)

1.000(25,4)

1.500(38,1)

.600 (15,24)

2.700 ± .015(68,58 ± 0,38)

.150 (3,81) R.4 CORNERS

.308 (7,82) SQ. BUTTON 12 PLS.

SWITCH POSITIONIDENTIFICATION

.075 (1,91)BUTTON HEIGHT

.020 (0,51) HIGH BUTTON GUARD

.250 (6,35) 4 PLS..200 (5,08)

GRAYHILL INC

.100 (2,54)DIA. 4 PLS.

LABEL

1.700 (43,18)

.150 (3,81)

2.400(60,96)

.150(3,81)

.600 (15,24) .550 (13,97)

.030(0,76)

.340 ± .015(8,64 ± 0,38)

.025 ± .002(0,64 ± 0,05) SQ. PIN

.098 (2,49) REF. TERMINAL

PIN HEADER

.100 (2,54) REF. TERMINAL PIN HEADER

7 6 5 4 3 2 1

TERMINAL PIN IDENTIFICATION

.100 (2,54) TYP.

GRAYHILL INC

.100 (2,54)DIA. 4 PLS.

LABEL

1.700 (43,18)

.150 (3,81)

2.400(60,96)

.150(3,81)

1.100 (27,94) .350 (8,89)

.030(0,76)

.340 ± .015(8,64 ± 0,38)

.025 ± .002(0,64 ± 0,05) SQ. PIN

1.700 (43,18)

2.400(60,96)

.062 (1,57) R.2 PLS.

.125 (3,18)

.125 (3,18) DIA. 2 PLS.

.125 (3,18) MAXIMUM PANEL THICKNESS RECOMMENDED

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1


PIN HEADER


10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1


.100 (2,54) TYP.

FRONT PANEL MOUNT CUTOUT

Keypads3


Standard Keypads

Keyb

oa

rds a

nd

Keyp

ad

s

3x4 Rear Mount Keyboard Standard Versions Shielded/Backlit Versions

4x4 Front Mount Keyboard Standard Versions Shielded/Backlit Versions


1

4

7

10

2

5

8

11

3

6

9

12 GRAYHILL INC

2.200 ± .015(55,88 ± 0,38)

.600 (15,24)

1.000(25,4).500 (12,7)

.150 (3,81) R.4 PLS.

.500 (12,7)

2.000 (50,8)

.500 (12,7)

1.000 (25,4)

.650 (16,51)

1.500(38,1)

.750(19,05)

3.000 ± .015(76,2 ± 0,38)

2.800 (71,12)

.495 (12,57)

.308 (7,82) SQ.BUTTON12 PLS.

1.990 + .000 –.005(50,55 + 0,00 –0,13)

.595(15,11)

2.690 + .000–.005 (68,33 + 0,00–0,13

SW. POS. ID .062 (1,57).200 (5,08)


.020 (0,51) HIGHBUTTON GUARD

.093 (2,36)DIA. 4 PLS.

LABEL.100 (2,54) R.4 PLS.

.700 (17,78)

.200 (5,08)

.025 ± .002(0,64 ± 0,05) SQ. PIN

.030(0,76)

.340 ± .015(8,64 ± 0,38)


PIN HEADER


7 6 5 4 3 2 1


.100 (2,54) TYP.

.600 (15,24)

GRAYHILL INC

.093 (2,36)DIA. 4 PLS.

LABEL.100 (2,54) R.4 PLS.

.500 (12,7)

.200 (5,08)

.025 ± .002(0,64 ± 0,05) SQ. PIN

.030(0,76)

.340 ± .015(8,64 ± 0,38)


PIN HEADER



.100 (2,54) TYP.

1.100 (27,94)

2.000 (50,8)

2.800(71,12)

2.700(68,58)

.050(1,27)

.093 (2,36) DIA., 4 PLS. OR2-56 X .250 (6,35) LONG STUD

.150 + .000 –.005 R.(3,81 + 0,00 –0,13)4 PLS.


REAR PANELMOUNT CUTOUT

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1

5

9

13

2

6

10

14

3

7

11

15

2.500 ± .015(63,5 ± 0,38)

.500 (12,7)

1.000(25,4)

.500 (12,7)

.500 (12,7)

1.000(25,4)

1.500(38,1)

.600 (15,24)

2.700 ± .015(68,58 ± 0,38)

.150 (3,81) R.4 CORNERS

.308 (7,82) SQ. BUTTON 12 PLS.

SWITCH POSITIONIDENTIFICATION

.075 (1,91)BUTTON HEIGHT.020 (0,51) HIGH BUTTON GUARD

.250 (6,35) 4 PLS..200 (5,08)

GRAYHILL INC

.100 (2,54)DIA. 4 PLS.

LABEL

2.200 (55,88)

.150 (3,81)

2.400(60,96)

.150(3,81)

.700 (17,78) .750(19,05)

.030(0,76)

.340 ± .015(8,64 ± 0,38)

.025 ± .002(0,64 ± 0,05) SQ. PIN


PIN HEADER


8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1


.100 (2,54) TYP.

4

8

12

16

1.500 (38,1)

2.200 (55,88)

2.400(60,96)

.062 (1,57) R.2 PLS.

.125 (3,18)

.125 (3,18) DIA. 2 PLS.


GRAYHILL INC

.100 (2,54)DIA. 4 PLS.

LABEL

2.200 (55,88)

.150 (3,81)

2.400(60,96)

.150(3,81)

1.200 (30,48)

.700(17,78)

.030(0,76)

.340 ± .015(8,64 ± 0,38)

.025 ± .002(0,64 ± 0,05) SQ. PIN

1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1


PIN HEADER


1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1


.100 (2,54) TYP.

FRONT PANELMOUNT CUTOUT

Keypads4


Standard KeypadsK

eyb

oa

rds a

nd

Keyp

ad

s


4x4 Rear Mount Keyboard Standard Versions Shielded/Backlit Versions

CODE AND TRUTH TABLES

Dots in the chart indicate connected terminals when switch is closed.Terminals are identified on the keyboard.

12 Button Keypads 16 Button Keypads

123456789101112

••••

••••

MATRIX CODES3x4Standard Shielded/Backlit

TERMINAL LOCATION

BU

TT

ON

LO

CA

TIO

N

5 6 7 1 2 3 4

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•••

•••

•••

MATRIX CODES

12345678910111213141516

4x4Standard Shielded/Backlit

TERMINAL LOCATION

BU

TT

ON

LO

CA

TIO

N

5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 5 1 10 11

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

••••

••••

••••

••••

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

••••

••••

6 7 8 2 3 4 5 1 9 10

•••

•••

•••

•••

•••

Shielded keypad = ShieldedBacklit keypad = NCShielded and backlit keypad = Shielded

Shielded keypad = NCBacklit keypad = EL Panel 1Shielded and backlit keypad = EL Panel 1


Shielded keypad = ShieldedBacklit keypad = NCShielded and backlit keypad = Shielded



1

5

9

13

2

6

10

14

3

7

11

15 GRAYHILL INC

2.700 ± .015(68,58 ± 0,38)

.600 (15,24)

1.000(25,4).500 (12,7)

.150 (3,81) R.4 PLS.

.500 (12,7)

2.500 (63,5)

.500 (12,7)

1.000 (25,4)

.650 (16,51)

1.500(38,1)

.750(19,05)

3.000 ± .015(76,2 ± 0,38)

2.800 (71,12)

.495 (12,57)

.308 (7,82) SQ.BUTTON12 PLS.

2.490+ .000 –.005(63,25 + 0,00 –0,13)

.595(15,11)

2.690 + .000–.005 (68,33 + 0,00–0,13

SW. POS. ID .062 (1,57).200 (5,08)


.020 (0,51) HIGHBUTTON GUARD

.093 (2,36)DIA. 4 PLS.

LABEL.100 (2,54) R.4 PLS.

.900 (22,86)

.200 (5,08)

.025 ± .002(0,64 ± 0,05) SQ. PIN

.030(0,76)

.340 ± .015(8,64 ± 0,38)


PIN HEADER


8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1


.100 (2,54) TYP.

4

8

12

16

1.500(38,1)

.700 (17,78)

GRAYHILL INC

.093 (2,36)DIA. 4 PLS.

LABEL.100 (2,54) R.4 PLS.

.700 (17,78)

.200 (5,08)

.025 ± .002(0,64 ± 0,05) SQ. PIN

.030(0,76)

.340 ± .015(8,64 ± 0,38)


PIN HEADER



.100 (2,54) TYP.

1.200 (30,48)

2.500 (63,5)

2.800(71,12)

2.700(68,58)

.050(1,27)

.093 (2,36) DIA., 4 PLS. OR2-56 X .250 (6,35) LONG STUD

.150 + .000 –.005 R.(3,81 + 0,00 –0,13)4 PLS.


1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

REARPANELMOUNT CUTOUT

11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Keypads5


Standard Keypads

Keyb

oa

rds a

nd

Keyp

ad

s


Grayhill Series NumberKeyboard Size: A = 3x4, B = 4x4

Circuitry: B2 = Matrix (terminal pin header)

96AB2-102-FS-ELE.L. Panel Backlighting OptionEL = Backlit, Blank = Non-backlit

EMI/RFI Shielding OptionS = Shielded, Blank = Non-shielded

Mounting Option: F = Front panel mount, R = Rear panel mountStandard Legend Choices12 Position legends102 = Black legends on a white button152 = White legends on a black button16 Position legends006 = Black legends on a white button056 = White legends on a black button


SPECIFICATIONSRating CriteriaRating at 12 Vdc: 5 milliamps for .5 secondsContact Bounce: < 12 millisecondsContact Resistance: < 300 milliohms max.Voltage Breakdown: 250 Vac betweencomponentsMechanical Operation Life: 1,000,000operations per keyInsulation Resistance: > 1012 ohms @ 500 VdcPush Out Force Per Pin: 5 lbs.

Operating FeaturesTravel: .040 minimumOperating Force: 175 ± 40 gramsOperating Temperature: -30°C to +80°C

Material and FinishesTerminal Pin: Phosphor bronzePC Board: FR-4 glass cloth epoxyKeypad: Silicone rubber, durometer 50 ± 5Housing: ABS, cycolac FR15Housing Color: Black

Shielding EffectivenessResults shown are typical for a standard GrayhillSeries 84S keyboard. A conductive gasket willgenerally increase the shielding, depending onthe size and shape of the gasket and its material.Data derived for E-Field Radiation.

Test Method:Measurements were made with the keyboardmounted to a brass plate, which in turn wasmounted to a shielded enclosure containing thereceiving equipment. A signal generator providedthe frequency source that was radiated from thetransmitting antenna to the enclosed receivingantenna. The spacing between antennas wasmaintained constant throughout the frequencyrange. The effectiveness rating is determinedby establishing a reference reading withoutobstruction between the two antennas anddetermining the difference between that readingand the test setup reading.

Note:When measured in actual equipment, shieldingeffectiveness is determined by many factors.This method accurately represents the shieldingeffectiveness of the Grayhill Series 84S underIdeal test conditions.

Frequency RatingM Hz in dB

0.1 ≥ 66.210 ≥ 94.8100 90.5400 64.2800 42.32,000 40.56,000 33.110,000 34.418,000 37.0

STANDARD LEGENDS

-102 -006 -152 -056

Available through Grayhill Distributors To order one of the configurations below, use the dash number shown here; select the keypadsize and code, and order the part number with the appropriate legend dash number.

1

4

7

2

5

8

0

3

6

9

A

B

C

DOPER0

1 2ABC

3DEF

4GHI

5JKL

6MNO

7PRS WXY

98TUV

1

4

7

2

5

8

0

3

6

9

A

B

C

DOPER0

1 2ABC

3DEF

4GHI

5JKL

6MNO

7PRS WXY

98TUV

100

80

60

40

20

0

SHIELDING EFFECTIVENESS OF SERIES 96 E.L. KEYPADSdB

0.1 10 100 400 800 2000 6000 10000 18000

MHzRepresents shielding effectiveness greater than or equal to line.

Keypads6


Piezo KeypadsK

eyb

oa

rds a

nd

Keyp

ad

s

SERIES 37FKeypads

FEATURES• Fully Sealed• Virtually Indestructible• Vandal Resistant• Indoor and Outdoor Use


12

3

45

6

78

9

0* #

FRONT MOUNT OPT- #2 REAR MOUNT OPT- #4

3.661(93,00)

3.268(83,00)

.748(19,00)

.748(19,00)

.354(9,00) .177

(4,50)

3.110(79,00)

2.323(59,00) .158 X 45

(4,00 X 45)

.165 DIA.(4.2 DIA.)

.748(19,00)

.748(19,00)

.354(9,00)

3.110(79,00)

2.323(59,00).158 X 45(4,00 X 45)

.165 DIA.(4.2 DIA.)

2.874(73,00) 2.480(63,00)

3.071(78,00)

2.677(68,00)

3.819(97,00)

3.425(87,00)

2.441(62,00)

3.189(81,00)

.106(2,7)

.071(1,8)

12

3

45

6

78

9

0* #

R1 C3 R1 C3

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0* #

R1 C3

FRONT MOUNT OPT- #1

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0* #

REAR MOUNT OPT- #3

3.661(93,00)

3.268(83,00)

.748(19,00)

.748(19,00)

.354(9,00) .177

(4,50)

3.110(79,00)

2.323(59,00) .158 X 45

(4,00 X 45)

.165 DIA.(4.2 DIA.)

.748(19,00)

.748(19,00)

.354(9,00)

3.110(79,00)

2.323(59,00).158 X 45(4,00 X 45)

.165 DIA.(4.2 DIA.)

2.874(73,00) 2.480(63,00)

3.071(78,00)

2.677(68,00)

3.819(97,00)

3.425(87,00)

2.441(62,00)

3.189(81,00)

.106(2,7)

.071(1,8)

R1 C3

3x4 Keypad

Keypads37


Piezo Keypads

Keyb

oa

rds a

nd

Keyp

ad

s


CONNECTORS In inches (and millimeters)

1 2

4 5

7 8

0*

FRONT MOUNT OPT- #1

#

9

6

3 A

B

C

D

1 2

4 5

7 8

0*

REAR MOUNT OPT- #3

#

9

6

3 A

B

C

D

.354(9,00) .177

(4,50)

3.661 SQ.

3.268 SQ.

.748(19,00)

.748(19,00) 3.110 SQ.

(79,00)

Ø.165(Ø4,2)

.236 X 45(6,00 X 45)

.354(9,00)

.748(19,00)

.748(19,00) 3.110 SQ.

(79,00)

.236 X 45(6,00 X 45)

.071(1,8)

.106(2,7)

3.819 SQ.(97,00)3.425 SQ.(87,00)

3.189 SQ.(81,00)

.118 R.(3,00 R.)

.788(20,0)

.787(20,0)

.158 R.(4,00 R.)

Ø.165(Ø4,2)

R1 C4 R1 C4

CONNECTOR FC-10

SAME CONNECTOR USEDFOR 3X4 AND 4X4 KEYPAD

1

2

FLAT CABLE30cm12"

4X4 Keypad


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

1 2 3 4

4X4

5 6 7 8

Connector Pin Number

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

3X4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Connector Pin Number

SW

ITC

H P

OS

ITIO

NS

SW

ITC

H P

OS

ITIO

NS

Keypads38


Piezo KeypadsK

eyb

oa

rds a

nd

Keyp

ad

s

SPECIFICATIONSRating CriteriaRated Voltage: 0 – 24V AC/DCRated Current: 0 – 2 Amps.Resistance “ON”: <10 Ohms.Resistance “OFF”: >5 megohms

Switch Capacitance: 25pFSwitch Functioning: One ShotActivation Force: 3-5N Typ.Operating Temperature: -40°C to 85°C(40° to 125°C upon requested)

Lifecyle: >50 millionEMI or RFI Effect: NoneHousing Material: AluminiunProtection System: IP68according to IEC 529.


Grayhill Series NumberMounting OptionsOption3x4 (1, 2, 3, 4)4x4 (1, 2)

Keypad SizeA - 3x4, B - 4x4Circuitry OptionB2 - Matrix, C2 - Common Bus

37F1-AB2 - AC1

Housing Material: AluminumElectrical Spec:AC - Cable and Connector, AP - AP Terminal Pins

Keypads39


Sealed KeypadsK

eyb

oa

rds a

nd

Keyp

ad

s

SERIES 37FPIEZO Pushbutton Switches

FEATURES• Fully Sealed• Virtually Indestructible• Vandal Resistant• Indoor and Outdoor Use


ORDERING INFORMATION, 37FMA AND 37FML

WIRE FUNCTION

RED

RED

BLUE

YELLOW

24V AC/DC

0.2A SWITCH

LED (-)

LED (+) 5V DC

18"

BLUE

YELLOW

RED

ML1 ML2

MA1 MA2

.443(11,25)

.276(7,00)

Ø .118Ø (3,00)

.059 R.(1,50 R.)

.118 (3,00)

.055 (1,40)

.748(19,00)

.236(6,00)

Ø .815(Ø 20,70)

Ø .886Ø 22,50) .443

(11,25)

.276(7,00)

Ø .118Ø (3,00)

.059 R.(1,50 R.)

.748 (19,00).236 (6,00)

Ø .815(Ø 20,70)

Ø .886Ø 22,50)

M22 x 1.5THREAD

.055 (1,40) .118(3,00)

M22 x 1.5 THREAD

Ø .787(Ø 20,00)

.039 X45(1,00 X 45)

Ø 1.102(Ø 28,00)

Ø 1.102(Ø 28,00)

Ø 1.102(Ø 28,00)

Ø .815(Ø20,70)

M22 x 1.5THREAD

.748(19,00)

.197(5,00)

.118(3,00)

.768(19,50)

.197(5,00)

.118(3,00)

Ø 1.102(Ø 28,00)

Ø .815(Ø 20,70)

.039 x 45 CHAMFER(1,00 x 45 CHAMFER)

M22 x 1.5 THREADIlluminated

Single Button

Non-IlluminatedSingle Button

*LED Option

**This Option Not Available with LED Housing ML1 or ML2

***Only Available with Housing Types ML1 and ML2.

Special colors, S.S. andlegends available. ContactGrayhill for more information.

Wire Colors Changewith Electrical SpecOption

37FMA1-AAP11N

Grayhill SeriesHousing TypeMA1, MA2 ML1*, ML2*CircuitryA - N.O., B - N.C.Electrical SpecificationsAW - V Max: 24V, I Max: 0.2 A AC/DC, Term: Red wireBW - V Max: 24V, I Max: 0.2 A AC/DC, 150 Transient, Term: Purple wireCW - V Max: 24V, I Max: 1.0 A AC/DC, 150 Transient Term: Orange/White wireEW - V Max: 24V, I Max: 0.2 A AC/DC, Term: Green wire, N.C. Circuitry Option OnlyAP - V. Max: 24V, I Max 0.2 A AC/DC, Term: PINCP** - V Max: 24V, I Max: 1.0 A AC/DC, Term: PINHousing Color: N - NaturalHousing Material: 1 - AluminumLED: 1- Red, 2 - Green, 3 - Yellow, 4 - Red/Green

Keypads51


Standard Keypads

Keyb

oa

rds a

nd

Keyp

ad

s


BR1

BR2

BR3

BR4

(-)(+)

RED LED12V DC MAX 40mA

PIEZO

(-)(+)


PIEZO

1.24V AC/DCMAX 0.2A

1.24V AC/DCMAX 0.2A

(-)(+)


PIEZO

1.24V AC/DCMAX 0.2A

(-)(+)


PIEZO

1.24V AC/DCMAX 0.2A

Ø .984(Ø 25,00)

Ø .787(Ø 20,00)

Ø .591(Ø 15,00)

ILUMINATED RING .787(20,00)

.055(1,40)

.039(1,00)

.276(7,00) .835

(21,20)

M22 x 1.5THREAD

.100(2,54)

.032(0,80)

Ø .984(Ø 25,00)

Ø .787(Ø 20,00)

Ø .591(Ø 15,00)

ILUMINATED RING .787(20,00)

.055(1,40)

.039(1,00)

.276(7,00) .835

(21,20)

M22 x 1.5THREAD

.100(2,54)

.032(0,80)

.878(22,30)

.878(22,30)

ILUMINATED RING

Ø1.220(Ø31,00)

Ø.984(Ø25,00)

.079(2,00) .295

(7,50)

.984(25,00)

M27 X 1,50 THREAD

ILUMINATED RING

Ø1.220(Ø31,00)

Ø.984(Ø25,00)

.079(2,00) .295

(7,50)

.984(25,00)

M27 X 1,50 THREAD

12.000.800(30020)

12.000.800(30020)

PIN # 1

PIN # 1

PIN # 1

PIN # 1

ORDERING INFORMATION, 37FBR

Available from your local Grayhill Component Distributor. For prices and discounts, contact a local Sales Office, an authorized local Distributoror Grayhill.

Special configurations and legends available. Contact Grayhil for more information.

Special colors, S.S. andlegends available.Contact Grayhill for moreinformation.

Grayhill SeriesHousing Type BA1, BA2BF1, BF2Switch TypeC - Continuous, T - ToggleCircuitryA - N.O., B - N.C.Electrical SpecificationAW: 10-24V, .15A AC/DC,Wire: 1 - Black, 1 - Brown, 2 - Blue

Housing Color: N - NaturalHousing Material: 1 - Aluminum

37FBA1-CAAW1N

Keypads52


Sealed KeypadsK

eyb

oa

rds a

nd

Keyp

ad

s


BA1

BA2

BF1

BF2

Ø .787(Ø 20,00)

Ø .886(Ø 22,50)M22x1.5 THREAD

Ø 1.102(Ø 28,00)

1.378(35,00)

.276(7,00)

.118(3,00)

.039(1,00)

.055(1,40)

.039 R.(1,00 R.)

Ø .787(Ø 20,00)

Ø .886(Ø 22,50)M22x1.5 THREAD

Ø 1.102(Ø 28,00)

1.378(35,00)

.276(7,00)

.118(3,00)

.039(1,00)

.055(1,40)

.059 R.(1,50 R.)

.020(0,50)

Ø .630(Ø 16,00)

Ø .732(Ø 18,60M22x1.5 THREAD

.276(7,00)

1.378(35,00)

.118(3,00)

.039(1,00)

.055(1,40)

Ø .866(Ø 22,00)

.059 R.(1,50 R.)

Ø .630(Ø 16,00)

Ø .732(Ø 18,60M22x1.5 THREAD

.276(7,00)

1.378(35,00)

.118(3,00)

.039(1,00)

.055(1,40)

Ø .866(Ø 22,00)

.059 R.(1,50 R.)

.020(0,50)

ORDERING INFORMATION, 37FBR


Special colors, S.S. andlegends available.Contact Grayhill for moreinformation.

Grayhill SeriesHousing Type BA1, BA2BF1, BF2Switch TypeC - Continuous, T - ToggleCircuitryA - N.O., B - N.C.Electrical SpecificationAW: 10-24V, .15A AC/DC,Wire: 1 - Black, 1 - Brown, 2 - Blue

Housing Color: N - NaturalHousing Material: 1 - Aluminum

37FBA1-CAAW1N

SPECIFICATIONSRated Voltage: 0-24V AC/DCRate Current: 0-24 amps.Resistance “ON”: <10 OhmsResistance “OFF”: >5 megohmsSwitch Capacitance: 25pF

Activation Force: 3-5N Typ.Switch Action:Momentary: 120 Msec. Pulse typeContinuous: Circuit is closed as longas switch is pressed, 30 sec. max.Toggle: Switch changes position ateach activation.

Lifecycle: >50 millionOperating Temp: -40°C- 85°Cstandard. (-40°C- 125°C upon request)Storage Temp: -40°C- 125°CEMI or RFI Effect: NoneProtection System: IP68 according toIEC529LED: 5Vdc, 1 max, 10 mAHousing Material: Aluminum

Keypads53


Standard KeypadsK

eyb

oa

rds a

nd

Keyp

ad

s

SERIES 84RSealed, Low Profile

FEATURES• Metal Keys• Easily Customized Legends• Sealed Construction• Choice of Dome Contacts or

Carbon Pill• 3,000,000 Operations per Button

DESCRIPTIONCustom legends and colors are available at anominal cost. The Series 84R is offered with achoice of matrix or single pole/common buscircuitries.


3x4 Keyboard Single Pole/Common Bus

Keypads17

3.780

2.910

4.5303.660

.435

.435

2.265

1.590

.600

1.590

Ø.180

.750

.750 .159

.375

.513

.585

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

* 0 #

Preliminary Specification


Standard Keypads

Keyb

oa

rds a

nd

Keyp

ad

s


The chart indicates the relationship of the terminal pins to each key switch.The dot indicates a closed switch. Terminals are identified on the keyboard.

12 Button Keypads 16 Button Keypads

SPECIFICATIONSRating CriteriaRating at 24 Vdc: ≤ 10 milliamps resistiveContact Bounce: 4 milliseconds maximum atmake; 10 milliseconds, at breakContact Resistance: MOS, TTL, and DTLcompatible. (10 ohms maximum for domecontacts; 300 ohms maximum for carbon pillversion)

Operating Temperature: -55°C to 85°CLife Expectancy: 3 million operations/buttonInsulation Resistance: 1,000 megohms

Operating FeaturesPre-Travel: .030 inches minimumOperating Force: 20 ± 4 ouncesHumidity: 0 to 98% (no condensation)Minimum Push Out Force Per Pin: 5 pounds

Materials and FinishesTerminal Pins: Copper alloy CDA 725PC Board: FR-4 glass cloth epoxyDome Retainer/Rear Seal Sheet: PolyesterHousing: Die cast aluminum, anodizedKeys: Die cast aluminum, anodized with engravedepoxy filled legends

123456789

101112

••••

••••

••••••••••••••••

CODES3x4Matrix Single Pole/Common Bus

TERMINAL LOCATION

BU

TT

ON

LO

CA

TIO

N

C B A G F E D E C B F D A N K H M L J G

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•••

•••

•••

•••

••••••••••••

• •

• •

• •

• •

• •

• •

CODES

123456789

10111213141516

4x4Matrix Single Pole/Common Bus

TERMINAL LOCATION

BU

TT

ON

LO

CA

TIO

N

A B C D E F G H D B A C H F E G K M L J P R Q N S

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

••••

••••

• •

• •

• •

• •

• •

• •

• •

• •

Keypads18

-112 -014

STANDARD LEGENDS

Available through Grayhill Distributors To order one of the configurations below, use the dash number shown here; select the keypadsize and code, and order the part number with the appropriate legend dash number.

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0 A B

C

D

E

F0

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

Grayhill Series Number

Size OptionA = 3x4 B = 4x4Circuitry OptionB2 = Matrix in-line pins C2 = Single pole/common bus

84R-AB2-112-PDD = Metal domes, R = Conductive rubberP = Terminal pins, C = Locking connectorStandard Legend Choices3x4 Size, choose -1124x4 Size, choose -014


CUSTOM LEGENDSAny reasonable legend can be printed in thekey area. Fax a sketch of your requirementsto Grayhill. Legends will be coordinated inkeeping with concepts of good design. Or, ifrequired, the details of your submitted artwork

will be matched as closely as possible. Allow3 to 4 weeks for custom legend delivery. Anominal charge, depending on the total quantityof keypads ordered and the complexity of thelegend, will be assessed.

HEADER CONNECTORSCompatible with:Samtec, Inc. Header SeriesBCS, BSW, CES, ESW, ESQ,SLW, SSW, SSQ, IDSS andIDSD or equivalent.

Available from your local Grayhill Distributor.For prices and discounts, contact a local SalesOffice, an authorized local distributor or Grayhill.


Standard KeypadsK

eyb

oa

rds a

nd

Keyp

ad

s

Keypads19

Grayhill Series NumberShielded or Non-Shielded OptionR = ShieldedRN = Non-ShieldedSize OptionA = 3x4 B = 4x4Circuitry OptionB2 = Matrix in-line pins C2 = Single pole/common bus

84R-AB2-112-PDD = Metal domes, R = Conductive rubberP = Terminal pins, C = Locking connectorStandard Legend Choices3x4 Size, choose -1124x4 Size, choose -0141x4 Size, choose -301 or -302


CUSTOM LEGENDSAny reasonable legend can be printed in thekey area. Fax a sketch of your requirementsto Grayhill. Printing and symbols will becoordinated in keeping with concepts of gooddesign. Or, if required, the details of your

submitted artwork will be matched as closelyas possible. Allow 3 to 4 weeks for customlegend delivery. A nominal charge, dependingon the total quantity of keypads ordered andthe complexity of the legend, will be assessed.

HEADER CONNECTORSCompatible with:Samtec, Inc. Header SeriesBCS, BSW, CES, ESW, ESQ,SLW, SSW, SSQ, IDSS andIDSD or equivalent.

Available from your local Grayhill Distributor.For prices and discounts, contact a local SalesOffice, an authorized local distributor or Grayhill.


Push

butto

n S

witc

hes

Push

butto

n S

witc

hes


Contents: Pushbutton Switches

PUSHBUTTON SWITCHES

• Large Selection of Types andStyles

• Wiping, Butt, and Snap ActionContacts

• SPST, SPDT, DPDT Circuitryand 4PST Joystick Action

• Space Saving Miniature Sizes• Bushing or Bezel Mounting• RoHS Compliant

Page

ENGINEERING INFORMATION .................................................................. 2

SELECTION CHART .................................................................................... 3

BUTT CONTACT PUSHBUTTON SWITCHES

Miniature Surface Mount ..................................... Series 38BM ................... 4Miniature Horizontal PC Mount ........................... Series 38BT .................... 6Miniature Vertical PC Mount ............................... Series 38BT .................... 7Snap Action Miniature Pushbutton ..................... Series 38C ...................... 8Alternate Action Pushbutton ............................... Series 38D .................... 13Sealed Snap Action Miniture Pushbutton .......... Series 38E .................... 18Subminiture Pushbutton ..................................... Series 38F ..................... 23Sealed Subminiture Pushbutton ......................... Series 38G .................... 27Sealed Surface Mount Subminiture Pushbutton Series 38H .................... 31SPST and SPDT, Stackable with LED ............... Series 32 ....................... 35SPST and SPDT, 1/4 Amp ................................. Series 39 ....................... 37SPST, 150mA...................................................... Series 39 ....................... 38Miniature Limit ..................................................... Series 39 ....................... 40SPST, 150 mA to 1/2 Amp ................................. Series 39 ....................... 41SPST, 1 and 5 Amp ............................................ Series 30 ....................... 434PST .................................................................... Series 04 ....................... 47Snap-In Panel Mount .......................................... Series 30 & 46 .............. 48Snap-In Panel Mount .......................................... Series 30 ....................... 49Decorator Line ..................................................... Series 30 & 46 .............. 51

WIPING CONTACT PUSHBUTTON SWITCHES

SPDT and DPDT, 1/4 Amp ................................. Series 46 ....................... 54SPST, 1/4 Amp ................................................... Series 23 ....................... 57SPST, 1 and 3 Amp ............................................ Series 10 & 4000 .......... 58

SNAP ACTION CONTACT PUSHBUTTON SWITCHES

SPST and SPDT, 10 Amp .................................. Series 7 & 2000 ............ 59

OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

Sealed Terminals and Wire Leads ..................... Series 23, 30, 39 & 46 ..... 60Accessories

Pushbutton1


Push

butto

n S

witc

hes

Engineering Information

Ratings, operating environments and switchselection are discussed in detail on pages E-3thru E-5. This information is applicable topushbutton switches as well as rotary and DIPswitches.

Pushbutton switches are selected not only bytheir ratings, but also by their contact type.While nearly all rotary switches and DIP switcheshave wiping contacts, pushbutton switches mayhave either wiping or butt contacts (see internalviews below).

Snap Action switches are basically butt contactswitches with a spring mechanism whichprovides the make and break. The mechanismcontrols both the operating point and the rate ofoperation, but adds to the wear of the switch.

The rapid rate of make and break means thatthese switches are appropriate for high currentloads. They usually have a slight wiping actionand contact surfaces made of precious metalsto minimize their disadvantages.

Wiping Contacts are self-cleaning and usuallyprovide a low resistance in circuits wherecontact resistance is critical. However, thewiping action creates mechanical wear andconductive wear products.

Butt Contacts have less wear than wipingcontacts and therefore, have a longer life. Theyare also smaller. Butt contacts are not self-cleaning, so their contact resistance can varyfrom operation to operation.

Actuator: The part of the switch to which anexternal force is applied to operate the switch.

Alternate Action (Push-Push) Switch: Aswitch in which the operable position ismaintained after the first actuation, and thendisengaged with the second operation.

Break-Before-Make Switch (BBM): A doublethrow switch in which the moving contact breaksthe connection with the first circuit beforemaking contact with the second; also callednon-shorting switch.

Double Throw Switch: A switch which has anormally open as well as a normally closedcircuit per pole.

Joystick Action Switch: (From Joystick, thecontrol for an airplane). A lever switch whichoperates with momentary action in 4 directions,and is disengaged in the upright position.

Make-Before-Break Switch (MBB): A doublethrow switch in which the contacts makesconnection with the second circuit beforebreaking contact with the first; also calledshorting switch.

Maintained Contact Switch: A switch in whichthe actuator remains in a position until it isactuated to another position where it also remainsuntil actuated. Example: Push-Pull Switch.

Momentary Contact Switch: A switch in whichthe shorting bar returns from its operatedposition to its normal or free position when theactuating force is removed.

Operating Position or Point: The position ofthe actuator when the desired electrical action(make or break of contact) occurs.

N.C., Normally Closed: Switch in which thecircuit is closed without actuation (with actuatorin the "normal" position).

N.O., Normally Open: Switch in which thecircuit is open without actuation (with actuator inthe "normal" position).

Overtravel: The distance or angle between theoperating position and the extreme position towhich the actuator may be moved.

Pole: An electrically isolated circuit within aswitch; a common terminal and all the selectedterminals to which it connects.

Pretravel: The distance or angle through whichthe actuator moves from its free position to itselectrical operating position.

Single Throw Switch: A switch which has onlyone normally open or one normally closed circuitper pole.

Throw: See Single Throw and Double Throw.

SWITCH TERMINOLOGY

INTERNAL VIEWS OF PUSHBUTTON SWITCHES

Wiping Contact

Snap Action

Butt Contact

Joystick ActionPushbutton

.187(4,75)

1.250 (31,75)

.312 (7,92)

HEX NUTS .344 (8,74) ACROSS FLATS, .125 (3,18) THICK

#8-32 UNC-2A THREAD

.550 (13.97)

.375 (9,53) DIA.

HEX NUTS .344 (8,74) ACROSS FLATS, .125 (3,18) THICK

#8-32 UNC-2A THREAD

1.125 (28,58)

.937 (23,80)

.312 (7,92)

.550 (13.97)

1.250 (31,75)

.500 (12,7) DIA.

.312(7,92)

A B

A = .063 (1,60)B = .094 (2,39)

.550 (13.97)

FIXED CONTACTS

RETURNSPRING

SHORTINGBAR

BUSHING

ACTUATOR

INTERNALBUTTON

FIXED CONTACTS

RETURNSPRING

SHORTINGBAR

BUSHING

ACTUATOR

RETURNSPRINGSHORTING

BAR

FIXED CONTACTS

ACTUATORSHORTINGBAR

ACTUATOR

BUSHING

FIXED CONTACTS

OVERSPRING

MOVABLECONTACT

Pushbutton2

Push

butto

n S

witc

hes


N.O. or N.C. 5 6,000 3/8 (9,53) UL Listed 30 E-17N.O. or N.C. 1 1,000,000 3/8 (9,53) Momentary, Terminal Seal, (Wire Leads Optnl.) 30 E-17N.O. 1 500,000 3/8 (9,53) Overtravel, Terminal Seal, (Wire Leads Optnl.) 30 E-19N.O. 1 200,000 11/16 (17,46) Positive Feel, Overtravel, Terminal Seal, (Wire 30 E-19

Leads Optional)On or Off 1 100,000 11/16 (17,46) Push/Pull Action (Maintained) 30 E-19N.O. or N.C. 1 250,000 1/2 (12,7) Watertight, Terminal Seal, (Wire Leads Optnl.) 30 E-18N.O. 1 1,000,000 11/16 (17,46) Square & Round Bezels 30 E-26N.O. or N.C 1 1,000,000 1+ (25,4) Square Bezel Panel Mount 30 E-26N.O. 1 200,000 11/16 (17,46) Pos. Feel, Overtravel, Square & Round Bezels 30 E-26N.O. 1 200,000 11/16 (17,46) Pos. Feel, Overtravel, Sq. Bezel Panel Mount 30 E-26N.O. .020** 80,000 5/16+ (8,13) Miniature, Surface Mount 38 E-5N.O. .020** 80,000 5/16+ (8,13) Miniature, Horizontal PC Mount 38 E-7N.O. .020** 80,000 5/16+ (8,13) Miniature, Vertical to PC Mount 38 E-8N.O. or N.C. .250 100,000 1/4 (6,35) Sealed Plunger, Stackable with LEDs 32 E-9N.O. .500 1,000,000 1/4 (6,35) Miniature 39 E-11N.O. .500 500,000 1/2 (12,7) Overtravel, Miniature Limit Switch, (Wire Leads 39 E-14

Optional)SPST N.O. .500 100,000 1/2 (12,7) Overtravel, Miniature, (Wire Leads Optional) 39 E-12

N.O. .500 250,000 5/16 (7,94) Watertight Seal, Miniature, (Wire Leads Optional) 39 E-14N.C. .250 250,000 1/4 (6,35) Miniature (Wire Leads Optional) 39 E-15N.C. .250 100,000 5/16 (7,94) Watertight Seal, Miniature, (Wire Leads Optnl.) 39 E-15N.C. .250 100,000 1/2 (12,7) Actuator Seal, Miniature Limit Switch (Wire 39 E-14

Leads Optional)N.O. .150** 1,000,000 1/4 (6,35) PC Mount, Miniature, Sealed 39 E-11N.O. .150** 1,000,000 1/4 (6,35) PC Mount, Miniature, Right Angle, Cap Seal 39 E-12N.O. .150** 100,000 1/4 (6,35) PC Mount, Miniature, Overtravel 39 E-12N.O. .020, .150** 1,000,000 3/8 (9,53) Economical Contact Plating 30 E-16N.O. .020, .150** 1,000,000 3/8 (9,53) Econ. Plating, Square Bezel Panel Mount 30 E-26N.O. .020, .150** 1,000,000 1/4 (6,35) Economical Contact Plating 39 E-14N.O. .020, .150** 100,000 1/2 (12,7) Actuator Seal, Overtravel, Miniature Limit 39 E-14

Switch, (Wire Leads Optional)

BBM .250 100,000 1/4 (6,35) SPST AND SPDT, Stackable w/LEDs 32 E-9SPDT BBM .250 500,000 1/2 (12,7) PC Mount, 2 Circuits, Right Angle, Total Seal 39 E-11

BBM .020** 80,000 5/16 (8,13) Miniature, Surface Mount 38 E-5

* BBM is Break-Before-Make (Non-Shorting). MBB is Make-Before-Break (Shorting).

Pushbutton Switch Selection Chart

Rating Maximum(Amps at Operations Width***

Circuitry* 115 Vac Res.) At Rating inch (mm) Features Series Page

BUTT CONTACT

** Rated for 28 Vdc and/or 5 Vdc (.150 A) and 20 Vdc (.020 A).*** Maximum width behind panel or above PC board rounded to next highest 1/16" (1,59 mm).

4PST BBM .250 500,000 7/8 (22,23) 4-Way Action, 3 Actuator Choices 04 E-21

JOYSTICK BUTT CONTACT

SNAP ACTION CONTACT

SPST N.O. or N.C. 1, 3 25,000 7/8 (22,23) SPST, 1 and 3 Amp 4000/10 E-31

SPDT BBM 5, 10 25,000 7/8 (22,23) Audible Click 2000/7 E-33

WIPING CONTACT

N.O. or N.C. 3 6,000 13/16 (20,6) Decorator Line 4000/10 E-31SPST N.O. or N.C. 1 100,000 13/16 (20,6) Momentary Action & Positive Feel Types 4000/10 E-31

N.O. .250 100,000 1/2 (12,7) Momentary Action & Terminal Seal Types 23 E-30N.O. .4VA 40,000 .177 (4,5) Process Sealed, Subminiture 49 E-32

BBM or MBB .250 250,000 7/16 (11,11) Momentary Action 46 E-21BBM or MBB .250 250,000 1+ (25,4+) Square Bezel Panel Mount 46 E-26BBM or MBB .250 100,000 1/2 (12,7) Watertight Seal 46 E-23

SPDT BBM .250 250,000 11/16 (17,46) Square & Round Bezels 46 E-26BBM .250 250,000 11/16 (17,46) Alternate Action, Square & Round Bezels 46 E-26BBM .250 250,000 1+ (25,4+) Alternate Action, Square Bezel Panel Mount 46 E-26N.O. .4VA 40,000 .177 (4,5) Process Sealed, Subminiature 49 E-32

BBM or MBB .250 100,000 5/8 (15,88) Momentary Action 46 E-22BBM .250 250,000 13/16 (20,6) Environmental Seal/Wire Leads 46 E-23

DPDT BBM or MBB .250 100,000 11/16 (17,46) Watertight Seal 46 E-23BBM .250 250,000 11/16 (17,46) Square & Round Bezel & Positive Feel Types 46 E-26BBM .250 250,000 11/16 (17,46) Alternate Action, Square & Round Bezels 46 E-26BBM or MBB .250 250,000 1+ (25,4+) Alternate Action, Square Bezel Panel Mount 46 E-26

Pushbutton3


Push

butto

n S

witc

hes

.320 (8,13)

.410 (10,41) MAX.

.162(4,11)DIM "A"

.200(5,08) .024

(0,61)

.075 (1,91)

.030 (0,76)

.289 (7,34)

.105 (2,67)TYP.

.200.010(5,080,25)

.020 (0,51)TYP.

.180 (4,57) DIA.

.100 (2,54) DIA.

C L

.125(3,18)

.125(3,18) .024

(0,61)

.162 (4,11)

.289(7 34)

DIM "A"

"A"

.100(2,54)

.200.010(5,080,25)

.200(5.08)

.320(8.13)

90˚

.105(2,67)TYP.

.075 (1,91)

.410 (10,41)MAX.

1 2 3.030

(0,76)

TERMINAL ID

38BC

Butt Contact Pushbutton Switches

SERIES 38BM AND 38BCSub-Miniature Surface Mount

FEATURES• Surface Mount Process Compatible• Sealed Construction• SPST and SPDT, Momentary Contact• Extended or Flush Plunger• Drop-In Replacement for Industry Standard

SPECIFICATIONS

PC Mounting

Rating CriteriaOperating Life: 80,000 make-and-break cyclesat full loadContact Rating (resistive load):Gold Contacts: 0.4 VA maximum at 20 Vac orVdc maximumSilver Contacts: I.O. Amps maximum at 120 Vacor 28 VdcContact Resistance: Below 20 milliohms typicalinitial at 2-4 Vdc, 100 mAInsulation Resistance: 1000 megaohms min.Voltage Breakdown: 1000 Vrms minimum atsea levelOperating Temperature: -30°C to +85°CSolderability: Per MIL-STD-202F, Method 208D,or EIA RS-186E Method 9 (1 hour steam aging)Materials and Finishes


.070(1,78)

.040(1,02)TYP.

.143(3,63)TYP.

.128(3,25)TYP.

.080 (2,03)TYP.

.040(1,02)TYP.

.080(2,03)

.368(9,35)

.150 (3,81) TYP.

TERMINAL PADS

.040(1.02)

STANDOFF PADS

.070(1.78)

.368(9.35)

.080 (2,03)

.128 (3,25)

.040(1.02)

.150(3.81)

.080(2,03)

.143(6.63)


Base and Cover: Thermoplastic (UL 94V-0)Plunger: Thermoplastic (UL 94V-0), withstandard internal o-ring sealTerminals: Copper alloy, gold plate over nickelplateSpring: Plated Music WireContact System: Copper alloy, gold or silverplate (as specified) over nickel plateSwitch Support: Brass, tin-plated

SPST

SPDT

38BM

Pushbutton4

Push

butto

n S

witc

hes



Pushbutton5

Series: 38BM = SPST, Momentary, Surface Mount 38BC = SPDT, Momentary, Surface Mount

Dimension "A":0 = 0.020" 4 = 0.215"

38BX-0-H-3-S

Seal: S = O-Ring Seal

Contact Material:1 = Solder Dip over Gold2 = Solder Dip over Silver3 = Gold - RoHS Compliant4 = Silver - RoHS Compliant

Orientation:H = Horizontal to PCB

SPST–N.O.

CIRCUITRY TAPE AND REEL PACKAGING


38BM-4-H-1-SSHOWN FORREFERENCE

SWITCHES AND COVER TAPENOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY

1.260±.012(32.00±0.3MM)

13INCHREEL

.630±.004 (16.00±0.1MM)POCKET CENTER LINES

DIRECTION OF FEED

SPDT–N.O.

N.O.TERM. 3

N.C.TERM. 1

COMMTERM. 2

SERIES 38BM AND 38BCSub-Miniature Surface Mount


Push

butto

n S

witc

hes


Series: 38BT = SPST, Momentary, Thru HoleSeries: 38BH = SPDT, Momentary, Thru HoleDimension A: 0 = 0.020" 4 = 0.215"

38BX-4-H-3-N

Seal: S = O-Ring Seal, N = No SealContact Material: 1 = Solder Dip over Gold2 = Solder Dip over Silver3 = Gold - RoHS Compliant4 = Silver - RoHS CompliantOrientation: H = Horizontal to PCB

1 2 3

CL

CL

.320(8.13)

.200(5.08)

.020(0.51)TYP.

.162(4.11)

DIM. "A"

.180(4.57) DIA.

.100(2.54) DIA. .165

(4.19)

.015(0.38) TYP.

.200(5.08)

.030(0.76) TYP.

.130(3.30)

.025(0.64)

.125(3.18).030

(0.76) TYP. .200

(5.08)

.249(6.32)

TERMINALIDENT-IFICATION .200

(5.08) .200(5.08)

.100(2.54) TYP.

.043 (1.09) DIA. TYP.

38BH

38BT

.249(6,32)

.200(5,08)

.030(0,76)TYP.

.162(4,11)

.215(5,46)

.025(0,64)

.030 (0,76) TYP.

.200 (5,08)

.165 (4,19)

.015 (0,38) TYP.

.200(5,08)

.320 (8,13)

.020 (0,51) TYP.

.200(5,08)

.200(5,08)

.043 (1,09)DIA. TYP..130

(3,30)

.180 (4,57) DIA.

.100 (2,54) DIA.

C L

C L

.125 (3,18)

.125(3,18)


PC Mounting

SPECIFICATIONSRating CriteriaOperating Life: 80,000 make-and-break cyclesat full loadContact Rating (resistive load):Gold Contacts: 0.4 VA maximum at 20 Vac orVdc maximumSilver Contacts: 1.0 Amp maximum at 120 Vacor 28 VdcContact Resistance: Below 20 milliohms typicalinitial at 2-4 Vdc, 100 mA

Insulation Resistance: 1000 megaohmsminimumVoltage Breakdown: 1000 Vrms minimum atsea levelOperating Temperature: -30°C. to +85°C.Solderability: Per MIL-STD-202F, Method208D, or EIA RS-186E Method 9 (1 hour steamaging)

Materials and FinishesBase and Cover: Thermoplastic (UL 94V-0)Plunger: Thermoplastic (UL 94V-0), (S versionsinclude an internal o-ring seal)Terminals: Copper alloy, gold or silver plate (asspecified) over nickel plateSpring: Plated Music WireContact System: Copper alloy, gold or silverplate (as specified) over nickel plateSwitch Support: Brass, tin-plated

CIRCUITRY

SPST–N.O.

SPST N.O.


Available from your local Grayhill Distributor For prices and discounts, contact a local SalesOffice, an authorized local distributor, or Grayhill.


SERIES 38BT and 38BHSub-Miniature Horizontal PC Mount

FEATURES• Drop-In Replacement for Industry

Standard• Sealed Plunger Option• Printed Circuit Board Mount• SPST and SPDT, Momentary Contact

SPST

SPDT

PC Mounting

SPDT–N.O.

N.O.TERM. 3

N.C.TERM. 1

COMMTERM. 2

Pushbutton6

Push

butto

n S

witc

hes



Series: 38BT = SPST, Momentary, Thru-HoleSeries: 38BC = SPDT, Momentary, Thru-HoleDimension A: 0 = 0.020" 4 = 0.215"

38BT-4-V-3-S

Seal: S = O-Ring Seal, N = No SealContact Material: 1 = Solder Dip over Gold2 = Solder Dip over Silver3 = Gold - RoHS Compliant4 = Silver - RoHS CompliantOrientation: V = Vertical to PCB

38BC

SPDT

38BT

SERIES 38BT and 38BCSub-Miniature Vertical PC Mount

FEATURES• Actuates at Right Angle to Printed Circuit

Board• Drop-In Replacement for Industry

Standard• SPST and SPDT, Momentary Contact• Sealed Plunger Option


CIRCUITRY

SPST–N.O.

SPST N.O.

Available from your local Grayhill Distributor. For prices and discounts, contact a local SalesOffice, an authorized local Distributor or Grayhill.



SPECIFICATIONSElectrical RatingsOperating Life: 80,000 make-and-breakcycles at full loadContact Rating (resistive load):Gold Contacts: 0.4 VA maximum at 20 Vac orVdcSilver Contacts: 1.0 Amp maximum at 120Vac or 28 VdcContact Resistance: Below 20 milliohmstypical initial at 2-4 Vdc, 100 mA, for bothsilver and gold-plated contacts

Insulation Resistance: 1000 megaohmsminimumVoltage Breakdown: 1000 Vrms minimum atsea levelOperating Temperature: -30°C. to +85°C.Solderability: Per MIL-STD-202F, Method208D, or EIA RS-186E, Method 9 (1 hoursteam aging)

Materials and FinishesBase and Cover: Thermoplastic (UL 94V-0)Plunger: Thermoplastic (UL 94V-0), (Sversions include an internal o-ring seal)Terminals: Copper alloy, gold or silver plate(as specified) over nickel plateSpring: Plated music wireContact System: Copper alloy, gold or silverplate (as specified) over nickel plate

SPDT–N.O.

N.O.TERM. 3

N.C.TERM. 1

COMMTERM. 2

SPST

Pushbutton7

.190 (4,83)DIA.

Dim.A

.177(4,50)

.527 (13,39) .130 (3,30) TYP.

.200(5,08)

.200(5,08)

.320(8,13)

.020 (0,51) SQUARE.180 (4,57)

DIA.

.100 (2,54) DIA.

1

.200(5,08)

.200

.177(4,50)

.527(13,39)

.130(3,30)TYP.

DIM "A"

.100(2,54)DIA.

.180(4,57)DIA.

.020 (0,51) SQ. TYP.

.320(8,13)

.100(2,54) TYP.

.190(4,83)DIA.


Push

butto

n S

witc

hes

Snap Action Miniature Pushbutton Switches

1 COMM.

2 NO

3 NC

1 COMM.

2 NO

3 NC

4

5

6

SWITCH POSITIONMODEL NO.

SP71-3

ON

1-2

(ON)

TERM. COMM.()=MOMENTARY

()=MOMENTARY

SCHEMATIC01COMM.

NC 3 NO 2

SCHEMATIC

01COMM.

NC 3 2 NO

4

NC 6 5 NO


DP71-3, 4-6

ON

1-2, 4-5

(ON)

TERM. COMM.

.500(12.7)

KEYWAYTHIS SIDE

KEYWAY

.500(12.7)

FLAT

.450(11.43)

.190(4.83)

.270(6.86)

.030(0.76)

.185(4.70)

EPOXY SEAL

.250(6.35)

.040(1.02)

Ø.122(Ø3.10)

.218(5.54)

.256(6.50)

.390(9.93)

.030(0.76)

.185(4.70)

EPOXY SEAL

.250(6.35)

.040(1.02)

Ø.122(Ø3.10)

.218(5.54)

.205(5.20).431

(10.95)

.225(5.72)

.051(1.30)

.040(1.02)

.028(0.72)

.040(1.02)

.270(6.90)

.250(6.35)

.040(1.02)

1/4-40 UNS-2A 1/4-40 UNS-2A

.225(5.72)

.272(6.90)

.250(6.35)

.040(1.02)

SERIES 38CMiniature Pushbutton Switches

FEATURES• SPDT and DPDT Circuitry• Choice of Bushings, and

Terminations• Caps and Frames Available• UL Recoginized

DIMENSIONS IN INCHES (AND MILLIMETERS)

SPDT

DPDT

BUSHING OPTIONS IN INCHES (AND MILLIMETERS)

B10 Thd StdB20 Non-Thd


Pushbutton8

Push

butto

n S

witc

hes



1 2 3

P.C. MOUNTING

.500(12.7)

.030(0.76) .500

(12.7)

.270(6.86)

.500(12.7)

.200(5.08)

.185(4.69)

.125(3.17)

.050(1.27)

Ø.073(Ø1.85)

.298(7.57)

.202(5.12)

Ø.122(Ø3.10)

EPOXYSEAL

.185(4.70) .200

(5.08).048(1.22)

1 2 3

4 5 6

P.C. MOUNTING

1 4

.500(12.7)

.030(0.76)

.125(3.18)

.500(12.7)

.150(3.81)

.050(1.27)

.450(11.43)

.185(4.70)

.500(12.7)

.150(3.81)

.200(5.08)

.185(4.70)

.202(5.12)

Ø.122(Ø3.10)

.296(7.53)

EPOXYSEAL

.185(4.70)

.200(5.08)

.048(1.22)

3

1

2

P.C. MOUNTING

1 2 3

.270(6.86)

.050(1.27)

.500(12.7)

.150(3.81).500

(12.7)

.500(12.7)

.150(3.81)

.200(5.08)

Ø.073(Ø1.85)

.125(3.18)

.048(1.22)

.200(5.08)

.030(0.76)

.202(5.12)

.296(7.53)

EPOXY SEAL

Ø.122(Ø3.10)

THK. .030 (0.76)

THK. .030 (0.76) .030 (0.76) THK.

EPOXY SEAL

.080(2.03)

.047(1.19)

.050(1.27)

.189(4.80)

.250(6.35)

.062(1.57)

.189(4.80)

.250(6.35).108

(2.75).205(5.20)

EPOXY SEALEPOXY SEAL

W1

OPTIONCODE

W2W3W4

DIM."A".750(19.05)

.964(24.48)

.425(10.80)

1.062(26.97)

DIM."A"

.075(1.91)

.050(1.27)

EPOXYSEAL

M1 Solder Lug (Std) M2 P. C. Mount M3 P. C. Mount, Quick Connect

WX Wire Wrap

TERMINATION OPTIONS IN INCHES (AND MILLIMETERS)

M6 Right Angle P. C. Mount, Horizontal

M7 Right Angle P.C. Mount, Vertical

SPDT

DPDT

SPDT

Pushbutton9


Push

butto

n S

witc

hes


3

1

2

P.C. MOUNTING

4

5

6

4 5 6

OPTIONCODE DIM."A"

V2

V3

.460(11,68)

.630(16,00)

P.C. MOUNTING

1 2 3

.450(11.43)

.150(3.81)

.500(12.7)

.500(12.7)

.150(3.81)

.200(5.08)

Ø.073(Ø1.85)

.125(3.17)

.200(5.08)

.125(3.18)

.048(1.22)

.500(12.70)

.030(0.76).050

(1.27)

.202(5.12)

Ø.122(Ø3.10)

.296(7.53)

EPOXY SEAL

DIM. "A"

.185(4.70)

.320(8.13)

.048(1.22)

.125(3.18)

.620(15.75)

.020(0.51)

.185(4.70)

.030(0.76)

.620(15.75)

.185(4.70)

.125(3.18)

Ø.073(Ø1.85)

EPOXY SEAL

Ø.122(Ø3.10)

.290(7.37)

.202(5.12)

.185(4.70)

.185(4.70)

P.C. MOUNTING

4 5 6

OPTIONCODE DIM."A"

V4

V5

.460(11,68)

.630(16,00)

P.C. MOUNTING

1 2 3

.460(11.68)

.185(4.70)

.320(8.13)

.048(1.22)

.125(3.18)

.620(15.75)

.020(0.51)

.185(4.70)

.030(0.76)

.620(15.75)

.125(3.18)

.450(11.43)

Ø.073(Ø1.85)

.190(4.83)

.185(4.70)

EPOXY SEAL

Ø.122(Ø3.10)

.202(5.12)

.290(7.37)

.185(4.70)

.048(1.22)

.020(0.51)

.185(4.70)

.030(0.76)

.750(15.75)

.185(4.70)

.250(3.18)

Ø.073(Ø1.85)

EPOXY SEAL

Ø.122(Ø3.10)

.290(7.37)

.202(5.12)

.250(6.35).360

(9.14)

DIM."A"

.750(19.05)

M7

V2-V3 Vertical Bracket, P. C. Mount

TERMINATION OPTIONS (CONT.) IN INCHES (AND MILLIMETERS)

DPDT

SPDT

DPDT


SPDT

Pushbutton10

Push

butto

n S

witc

hes



OPTIONCODE DIM."A"

V4

V5

.460(11,68)

.630(16,00)

P.C. MOUNTING

4 5 6

.185(4.70)

.048(1.22)

.020(0.51)

.185(4.70)

.030(0.76)

.750(15.75)

.185(4.70)

.250(3.18)

Ø.073(Ø1.85)

EPOXY SEAL

Ø.122(Ø3.10)

.290(7.37)

.202(5.12)

.250(6.35).360

(9.14)

DIM."A"

.750(19.05)

.190(4.83)

1 2 3

INCREASE TO .620/.625(15.75/15.88)FOR .091/.125(2.32/3.18) THK. PANEL

PANEL LAYOUT

4 5 6


PANEL LAYOUT

EPOXY SEAL

.763(19.40)

.618(15.70)

.460(11.70)

.060(1.52)

.047 TO .125(1.19 TO 3.18)

PANEL THICKNESS

.079(2.00)

.284(7.20)

.500(12.74)

.600(15.24)

R.005(R.130)

EPOXY SEAL

.763(19.40)

.618(15.70)

.460(11.70).060

(1.52)

.047 TO .125(1.19 TO 3.18)

PANEL THICKNESS

.079(2.00)

.284(7.20) .500

(12.74).600(15.24)

R.005(R.130)


Snap-in Termination Options(Snap-in termination options have the same PC layout as M2, M6 and M7 options)

S2 S6

V4-V5

DPDT


FOR PANEL MOUNTING

AP1 Cap OnlyAP2 Cap and Frame

SPDT

DPDT

Pushbutton11


Push

butto

n S

witc

hes



FOR PANEL MOUNTING

AP3 Cap OnlyAP4 Cap and Frame

SPECIFICATIONSRATINGSContact Rating: Q & G option - 3A withresistive load @ 125 VAC or 28 VDC; 1.5Awith resistive load @ 250 VAC. R option - 0.4VA max @ 20 Vmax (AC or DC)Electrical Life: 50,000 make-and-breakcycles at full loadTravel: .050 ± .010

Contact Resistance: 20 milliohms max.initial @ 2-4 VDC, 100 mAInsulation Resistance: 1,000 megaohmsminimumDielectic Strength: 1,000 V RMS @ sealevelOperating Temperature: -30°C to 85°C

MATERIALSCase: Diallyl phthalate (DAP) (UL94V-0)Plunger: Glass filled nylon or glass filledpolyesterBushing: Brass, nickel platedHousing: Stainless steelTerminal/Switch Support: Brass, electrotinplatedTerminal Seal: Epoxy


38C =MiniaturePushbuttonSwitches

Options:SP7, DP7(see modelsforswitchingpositions)

Options:Blank=stdas shownin dwg0 = 0.0 (Flush)1 = .205 (5.02)2 = .079 (2.00)

Options: M1,M2, M3, M6,M7, S2, S6V2, V3, V4,V5, W1, W2,W3, W4 (seeterminationoptions)

R = Copperalloy, goldplate overnickel plate.

Q = Copperalloy, silverplated

G=Goldplate oversilver plate

T = LeadFree andRoHSCompliant

SERIES MODEL NO. PLUNGER BUSHING TERMINATION CONTACT SEAL

38C SP7 B10 M1 Q T

Options:AP1, AP2,AP3, AP4,B10, B11,B21, B21(seebushingoptions)

DPDT

SPDT

Pushbutton12

4 5 6


PANEL LAYOUTEPOXY SEAL

.763(19.40)

.618(15.70)

.460(11.70)

.047 TO .125(1.19 TO 3.18)PANEL THICKNESS

.079(2.00)

.284(7.20) .500

(12.74).600(15.24)

R.005(R.130)

1 2 3


PANEL LAYOUTEPOXY SEAL

.763(19.40)

.618(15.70)

.460(11.70)

.047 TO .125(1.19 TO 3.18)PANEL THICKNESS

.079(2.00)

.284(7.20) .500

(12.74).600(15.24)

R.005(R.130)

Push

butto

n S

witc

hes


Alternate Action Pushbutton Switches

2-3 OPEN

1

2

3

TERM. COMM.

1

2

3

4

5

6

SCHEMATIC02COMM.

1 3

SCHEMATIC

02COMM.

1 3 4 6

SP1 ON NONE

SWITCH POSITION

ON

2-1

MODEL NO.

2-3,5-6 OPENTERM. COMM.

DP1 ON NONE

SWITCH POSITION

ON2-1,5-4

MODEL NO.

1

2

3

4

5

6

SCHEMATIC 2-3,5-68-9

OPENTERM. COMM.

3P1 ON NONE

SWITCH POSITION

ON2-1,5-4

8-7

MODEL NO.

7

8

9

05COMM.

02COMM.

3 4 6

05COMM.

1 9

08COMM.

7

.500(12.7)

KEYWAY

.500(12.7)

.450(11.43)

.190(4.83)

.270(6.86)

.030(0.76)

.185(4.70)

EPOXYSEAL

.303(7.70)

.280(7.11)

.419(10.65)

.040(1.02)

.156(3.96)

.080(2.03)

KEYWAY .030(0.76)

.185(4.70)

EPOXYSEAL

.303(7.70)

.280(7.11)

.419(10.65)

.156(3.96)

Ø.114(Ø2.90)

Ø.114(Ø2.90)

.080(2.03)

.500(12.7)

.190(4.83)

.040(1.02)KEYWAY

.030(0.76)

.185(4.70)

EPOXY SEAL

.303(7.70)

.280(7.11)

Ø.114(Ø2.90)

.080(2.03)

.650(16.51)

.475(12.06)

.571(14.50)

.156(3.96)

SERIES 38DAlternate ActionPushbutton Switches

FEATURES• SPDT, DPDT, 3PDT, 4PDT Circuitry• Choice of Plunger Length, Bushings,

and Terminations• UL Recognized

MODELS IN INCHES (AND MILLIMETERS)

SPDT

DPDT

3PDT

Pushbutton13


Push

butto

n S

witc

hes


1

2

3

8

9

SCHEMATIC 2-3,5-68-9,11-12

OPENTERM. COMM.

4P1 ON NONE

SWITCH POSITION

ON2-1,5-4

8-7,11-10

MODEL NO.

()=MOMENTARY

11

02COMM.

343 6

05COMM.

1 9

08COMM.

766

4

5

6

12

11COMM.

10

.500(12.7)

.040(1.02)KEYWAY

.030(0.76)

.185(4.70)

EPOXY SEAL

.303(7.70)

.280(7.11)

Ø.114(Ø2.90).850

(21.59)

.475(12.06)

.571(14.50)

.156(3.96)

.190(4.83)

.080(2.03)

NO. 4 PLUNGER MUSTBE USED WITH BDBUSHING

.299(7.60)

Ø.188(Ø3.00)

.244(6.20)

Ø.188(Ø3.00)

Ø.114(Ø2.90)

.335(8.50)

.276(7.00)

Ø.242(Ø6.15)

.040(1.00)

1/4-40 UNS

.260(6.60)

.069(1.75)

.069(1.76)

.305(7.75)

1/4-40 UNS

.069(1.76).305

(7.75)

.260(6.60)

.222(5.65)

.553(14.05)

.075(1.90)

.036(0.91)

15/32-32UNS

THK. .030 (0.76) THK. .030 (0.76)

W1CODE

W2W3W4

DIM."A"

.964(24.48)

.425(10.80)

1.062(26.97)

THK. .030 (0.76)

.080(2.03) .050

(1.27)

.189(4.80)

.250(6.35)

DIM."A"

.075(1.91)

.050(1.27)

.205(5.20)


EPOXYSEAL


M1 Solder Lug (Std) M2 P. C. Mount WX Wire Wrap

PLUNGER OPTIONS IN INCHES (AND MILLIMETERS)


BDB10 Thd StdB20 Non-Thd



41 2 3

4PDT

Pushbutton14

Push

butto

n S

witc

hes



3

1

2

P.C. MOUNTING

4

5

6

3

1

2

P.C. MOUNTING

.450(11.43)

.150(3.81)

.500(12.7)

.500(12.7)

.150(3.81)

.200(5.08)

Ø.073(Ø1.85)

.200(5.08)

.125(3.18)

.048(1.22)

.270(6.86)

.050(1.27)

.500(12.7)

.150(3.81)

.500(12.7)

.500(12.7)

.150(3.81)

.200(5.08)

Ø.073(Ø1.85)

.125(3.18)

.048(1.22).200(5.08)

.030(0.76)

.030(0.76)

.050(1.27)

EPOXY SEAL

EPOXY SEAL

.106(2.69)

Ø.114(Ø2.90)

.280(7.11)

.303(7.70)

Ø.114(Ø2.90)

.280(7.11)

.303(7.70)

.500(12.70)

.106(2.69)

.190(4.83)

.190(4.83)

P.C. MOUNTING

1 2 3

P.C. MOUNTING

.500(12.7)

.030(0.76)

.125(3.18)

.500(12.7)

.150(3.81)

.050(1.27)

.450(11.43)

.185(4.70)

.500(12.7)

.150(3.81)

.200(5.08)

.185(4.70)

.515(13.08)

.030(0.76)

.500(12.7)

.500(12.7)

.200(5.08)

.185(4.69)

.050(1.27)

Ø.073(Ø1.85)

.280(7.11)

.200(5.08)

.048(1.22)

EPOXYSEAL

.200(5.08)

.048(1.22)

.278(7.06)

.132(3.34)

.303(7.70)

Ø.114(Ø2.90)

.185(4.69)

.280(7.11)

.303(7.70)

Ø.114(Ø2.90)

EPOXYSEAL

.069(1.76)

.095(2.42)

M6 Right Angle, P. C. Mount, Horizontal


DPDT

SPDT

DPDT

SPDT

M7 Right Angle, P. C. Mount, Vertical

Pushbutton15


Push

butto

n S

witc

hes


3

1

2

P.C. MOUNTING

4

56

7

89

.650(16.51)

.150(3.81)

.500(12.7)

.150(3.81)

.200(5.08)

Ø.073(Ø1.85)

.200(5.08)

.125(3.18)

.048(1.22)

.030(0.76)

.050(1.27)

EPOXY SEAL

Ø.114(Ø2.90)

.280(7.11)

.303(7.70)

.500(12.7)

.565(14.35).190

(4.83)

.190(4.83)

3

1

2

P.C. MOUNTING

4

56

10

1112 9

8

7

.850(16.51)

.150(3.81)

.500(12.7)

.200(5.08) Ø.073

(Ø1.85)

.200(5.08)

.125(3.18)

.048(1.22)

.030(0.76)

.050(1.27)

EPOXY SEAL

Ø.114(Ø2.90)

.280(7.11)

.303(7.70)

.500(12.7)

.565(14.35)

.190(4.83)

.190(4.83)

.150(3.81)


M7

DPDT

SPDT

4PDT

3PDT

V2-V3

VerticalBracket,P. C.Mount

Pushbutton16

Push

butto

n S

witc

hes



SPECIFICATIONSRATINGSContact Rating: Q & G option - 6A @ 125VAC or 28 VDC or 28 VDC; 3A @ 250 VAC.R option - 0.4 VA max @ 20 Vmax (AC orDC)Electrical Life: 50,000 make-and-breakcycles at full load


MATERIALSCase: Diallyl phthalate (DAP) (UL94V-0)Plunger: Glass filled nylon or glass filledpolyesterBushing: Zinc, nickel platedHousing: Stainless steelTerminal Seal: Epoxy


38D =AlternateActionPushbuttonSwitches

Options:SP1, DP1,3P1, 4P1(see modelsforswitchingpositions)

Options:1, 2, 3, 4(seeplungeroptions)

Options: M1,M2, M6, M7,S2, S6 V2,V3, V4, V5,W1, W2, W3,W4 (seeterminationoptions)






38D SP1 B10 M1 Q T

Options:B10, B11,B20, B21,BD (seebushingoptions)

1


SPDT

DPDT

Pushbutton17


Push

butto

n S

witc

hes

Sealed Snap Action Miniature Pushbutton Switches

OPTIONCODE

1

2

3

DIM."A"

.173(4.40)

.220(5.60)

.087(2.20)

OPTIONCODE

1

2

3

DIM."A"

.276(7.00)

.327(8.30)

.193(4.90)FOR B1

BUSHINGFOR B4

BUSHING

DIM."A" DIM."A"

Ø.114(Ø2.90)

Ø.114(Ø2.90)

SERIES 38ESealed Snap Action MiniaturePushbutton Switches

FEATURES• SPDT and DPDT Circuitry• Choice of Bushings, and

Terminations• UL Recognized• IP-68 Degree of Protection• RoHS Compliant


SPDT

DPDT

PLUNGER OPTIONS IN INCHES (AND MILLIMETERS)

Pushbutton18


WSP71-3

ON

1-2

(ON)

1

2

3

TERM. COMM.

1

2

3

4

5

6

()=MOMENTARY

()=MOMENTARY

SCHEMATIC01COMM.

3 2

SCHEMATIC

01COMM.

3 2 6 5


WDP71-3, 4-6

ON

1-2, 4-5

(ON)

TERM. COMM.

04COMM.

.500(12.7)

.190(4.83)

.260(6.60)

.030(0.76)

.185(4.70)

.663(16.85)

EPOXY SEAL

Ø.114(Ø2.90)

.050(1.26)

.050(1.26)

.276(7.00)

.185(4.70)

.500(12.7)

.449(11.40)

.030(0.76)

.185(4.70)

.663(16.85)

EPOXY SEAL

Ø.114(Ø2.90)

.260(6.60)

.185(4.70)

Ø.236(Ø6.00)

Ø.205(Ø5.20)

Push

butto

n S

witc

hes



3

1

2

P.C. MOUNTING

.500(12.7)

.150(3.81)

.500(12.7)

.500(12.7)

.150(3.81)

.200(5.08)

Ø.073(Ø1.85).030

(0.76)

EPOXY SEAL

.663(16.85)

.276(6.60)

Ø.114(Ø2.90)

.050(1.26)

.260(6.60)

.200(5.08)

Ø.236(Ø6.00)

.050(1.26)

1 2 3

P.C. MOUNTING

.500(12.7)

.500(12.7)

.500(12.7)

.200(5.08)

.185(4.69)

.050(1.26)

Ø.073(Ø1.85)

EPOXYSEAL

.050(1.26)

.200(5.08)

.276(7.00)

.663(16.85)

.185(4.70)

.260(6.60)

.030(0.75)

Ø.236(Ø5.20)

Ø.114(Ø2.90)

.185(4.70)

.030(0.75)

1 2 3

4 5 6

P.C. MOUNTING

.500(12.7)

.500(12.7)

.150(3.81)

.050(1.27)

.449(11.40)

.185(4.70)

.500(12.7)

.150(3.81)

.200(5.08)

.185(4.70)

EPOXYSEAL

.050(1.26)

.200(5.08)

.260(6.60)

Ø.114(Ø2.90)

.663(16.85)

.030(0.75)

M1 Solder Lug (Std) M2 P. C. Mount


M6 Right Angle P. C. Mount, Horizontal

M7 Right Angle P.C. Mount, Vertical

SPDT

DPDT

SPDT


B1 B4

Pushbutton19


Push

butto

n S

witc

hes


OPTIONCODE DIM."A"

V4

V5

.460(11,68)

.630(16,00)

P.C. MOUNTING

.050(1.26)

.020(0.51)

.185(4.70)

.030(0.76)

.750(15.75)

.185(4.70)

.250(3.18)

Ø.073(Ø1.85)

EPOXY SEAL

.250(6.35).362

(9.20)

DIM."A"

.750(19.05)

Ø.114(Ø2.90)

.276(7.00)

.230(5.85)

OPTIONCODE DIM."A"

V2

V3

.460(11,68)

.630(16,00)

P.C. MOUNTING

OPTIONCODE DIM."A"

V2

V3

.460(11,68)

.630(16,00)

P.C. MOUNTING

DIM. "A"

.321(8.15)

.050(1.26)

.125(3.18)

.620(15.75)

.020(0.50)

.185(4.70)

.030(0.75)

.620(15.75)

.185(4.70)

.125(3.18)

.073 DIA.(Ø1.85)

EPOXY SEAL

Ø.114(Ø2.90)

.230(5.85)

.276(7.00)

DIM. "A"

.321(8.15)

.050(1.26)

.125(3.18)

.620(15.75)

.020(0.50)

.185(4.70)

.030(0.75)

.620(15.75)

.185(4.70)

.125(3.18)

Ø.073(Ø1.85)

EPOXY SEAL

Ø.114(Ø2.90)

.230(5.85)

.260(6.60)

.190(4.83)

P.C. MOUNTING

.500(12.7)

.150(3.81)

.500(12.7)

.500(12.7).150(3.81)

.200(5.08)

Ø.073(Ø1.85).030

(0.76)

EPOXYSEAL

.663(16.85)

.260(6.60)

Ø.114(Ø2.90)

.050(1.26)

.449(11.40)

.200(5.08)

.050(1.26)

.190(4.83)

.190(4.83)

Ø.205(Ø5.20)

M7



DPDT

SPDT

DPDT


SPDT

Pushbutton20

Push

butto

n S

witc

hes



OPTIONCODE DIM."A"

V4

V5

.460(11,68)

.630(16,00)

P.C. MOUNTING

.050(1.26)

.020(0.51)

.185(4.70)

.030(0.76)

.750(15.75)

.185(4.70)

.250(3.18)

Ø.073(Ø1.85)

EPOXY SEAL

.250(6.35).362

(9.20)

DIM."A"

.750(19.05)

.190(4.83)

Ø.114(Ø2.90)

.230(5.85)

.260(6.60)



S2-S3

S6

V4-V5

DPDT

S7

S4-S5

Pushbutton21


Push

butto

n S

witc

hes


SPECIFICATIONSRATINGSContact Rating: Q & G option - 1A withresistive load @ 125 VAC or 28 VDC.R option - 0.4 VA max @ 20 Vmax (AC orDC)Electrical Life: 50,000 make-and-breakcycles at full loadTravel: .040 ± .010


MATERIALSCase: Glass filled Nylon 6/6 (UL94V-0)Plunger: Glass filled nylon or glass filledpolyesterBushing: Brass, nickel platedHousing: Stainless steelTerminal/Switch Support: Brass or steel,electrotin platedTerminal Seal: Epoxy






38E =SealedSnapActionPushbuttonSwitches

Options:WSP7,WDP7(see modelsforswitchingpositions)

Options:1, 2, 3 (seeplungeroptions)

Options:M1, M2, M6,M7, S2, S3,S4, S5, S6,S7 V2, V3,V4, V5, (seeterminationoptions)


38E WSP7 B1 M1 Q T

Options:B1, B4(seebushingoptions)

1

Pushbutton22

Push

butto

n S

witc

hes


Subminiature Pushbutton Switches

SERIES 38FSub-MiniaturePushbutton Switches

FEATURES• Save Space and Weight• SPDT and DPDT Circuitry• Choice of Actuators, Bushings, and

Terminations• UL Recoginized



SP9 OFF (ON)()=MOMENTARY

()=MOMENTARY

SCHEMATIC

SCHEMATIC SWITCH POSITIONMODEL NO.

SP82-1

ON

2-3

(ON)

TERM. COMM.3 N.O.N.C.1

2COMM.

.200(5.08)

.059(1.52)

.321(8.16)

.173(4.39)

Ø.240(Ø6.10)

FLAT

Ø.100(Ø2.54)

.200(5.08)

.020(0.51)

.282(7.18)

.214(5.45)

.155(3.94) 10-48UNS

.200(5.08)

.059(1.52)

.321(8.16)

.173(4.39)

Ø.240(Ø6.10)

FLAT

Ø.100(Ø2.54)

.200(5.08)

.020(0.51)

.282(7.18)

.214(5.45)

.155(3.94) 10-48UNS

.110(2.79)

.110(2.79)

.160(4.06)

SPST

SPDT


B5 B6

Pushbutton23


Push

butto

n S

witc

hes


THK. .020 (0.51)

.040(1.02)

.160(4.06)

.110(2.79)

.060(1.53)

.060(1.52)

.030(0.76)

THK. .020 (0.51)

.040(1.02)

.130(3.30)

.030(0.76)

P.C. MOUNTING

.200(5.08)

.200(5.08)

Ø.043(Ø1.09)

.200(5.08)

.036(0.90)

.173(4.39)

Ø.240(Ø6.10)

Ø.187(Ø4.75)

FLAT

.128(3.26) .577

(14.65)

.362(9.20)

.152(3.86)

.016(0.41)

.200(5.08) .034

(0.86)

Ø.100(Ø2.54)

.020(0.51)

.134(3.40)

.321(8.16)

.199(5.04)

.020(0.51)

.220(5.59)

.020(0.51)

Ø.100(Ø2.54)Ø.187

(Ø4.75)

.310(7.87)

Ø.122(Ø3.10)

.200(5.08)

.225(5.72)

Ø.314(Ø8.00)

.020(0.51)

1/4 40NS

.020(0.51)

Ø.100(Ø2.54)

.310(7.87)

Ø.122(Ø3.10)

.200(5.08)

.225(5.72)

Ø.314(Ø8.00)

.020(0.51)

.130(3.30)

Ø.200(Ø5.08)

Ø.187(Ø4.75)

BUSHING OPTIONS (CONT.) IN INCHES (AND MILLIMETERS)

B7 B8

B9 B0


M1 Solder Lug

M6 Right Angle, P. C. Mount

M2 P. C. Mount (Std)

SPST

Pushbutton24

Push

butto

n S

witc

hes



.200(5.08)

.036(0.90)

.173(4.39)

Ø.240(Ø6.10)

Ø.187(Ø4.75)

FLAT

.137(3.50)

.577(14.65)

.362(9.20)

.152(3.86)

.016(0.41)

.200(5.08) .034

(0.86)

Ø.100(Ø2.54)

.020(0.51)

.134(3.40)

.321(8.16)

.199(5.04)

.020(0.51)

P.C. MOUNTING

Ø.043(Ø1.09)

.200(5.08)

.200(5.08)

P.C. MOUNTING

.200(5.08)

Ø.240(Ø6.10)

FLAT Ø.100(Ø2.54)

.173(4.39)

Ø.187(Ø4.75)

.128(3.26)

.220(5.59)

.320(8.13)

.152(3.86)

.016(0.41)

.020(0.51)

.130(3.30)

.400(10.16)

.356(9.04)

.200(5.08) .200

(5.08)

.030(0.76)

.200(5.08)

Ø.043(Ø1.09)

.030(0.76)

.200(5.08)

Ø.240(Ø6.10)

FLAT

Ø.100(Ø2.54)

.173(4.39)

Ø.187(Ø4.75)

.137(3.50)

.220(5.59) .320

(8.13)

.152(3.86)

.016(0.41)

.020(0.51)

.130(3.30)

.400(10.16)

.356(9.04)

.200(5.08) .200

(5.08)

.030(0.76)

.030(0.76)

P.C. MOUNTING

.200(5.08)

.100(2.54)

Ø.043(Ø1.09)

P.C. MOUNTING

.200(5.08)

.030(0.76)

Ø.100(Ø2.54)

Ø.187(Ø4.75)

.020(0.51)

.338(8.60)

.130(3.30)

.128(3.26)

.236(6.00)

.173(4.39)

.200(5.08)

.400(10.16)

.017(0.42)

.020(0.51)

.400(10.16)

.200(5.08)

Ø.043(Ø1.09)

P.C. MOUNTING.200(5.08)

.030(0.76)

Ø.100(Ø2.54)

Ø.187(Ø4.75)

.020(0.51)

.338(8.60)

.130(3.30)

.128(3.26)

.236(6.00)

.173(4.39)

.400(10.16)

.017(0.42)

.020(0.51)

.400(10.16)

.100(5.08)

Ø.043(Ø1.09)

.100(2.54)

M6


M7 Right Angle, P. C. Mount

SPDT

SPST

SPDT

SPST

V2 Vertical Bracket, P. C. Mount

SPDT

Pushbutton25


Push

butto

n S

witc

hes



SPECIFICATIONSRATINGSContact Rating: Q & G option - 1A withresistive load @ 125 VAC or 28 VDC;R option - 0.4 VA max @ 20 Vmax (ACor DC)Electrical Life: 30,000 make-and-breakcycles at full loadTravel: .030 ± .010

Contact Resistance: 20 milliohms max. initial@ 2-4 VDC, 100 mAInsulation Resistance: 1,000 megaohmsminimumDielectic Strength: 1,000 V RMS @ sealevelOperating Temperature: -30°C to 85°C

MATERIALSCase: Diallyl phthalate (DAP) (UL94V-0)Plunger: PolyesterBushing: Brass, nickel platedHousing: Stainless steelTerminal/Switch Support: Brass, electrotinplatedTerminal Seal: Epoxy

S2 S6 S7


38F =Sub-MiniaturePushbuttonSwitches

Options: SP8, SP9(see models forswitching positions)

Options:B5, B6, B7,B8, B9, B0(seebushingoptions)

Options: M1,M2, M6, M7,V2, S2, S6,S7 (seeterminationoptions)




Example Part Number: 38FSP8B5M1QE


SERIES MODEL NO. BUSHING TERMINATION CONTACT SEAL

38F SP8 B5 M1 Q T


Pushbutton26

Push

butto

n S

witc

hes


Sealed Subminiature Pushbutton Switches

.362(8,30)

.200(5,08)

.158(4,00)

.200(5,08)

.100(2,54)

.034(0,85)

EPOXYSEAL

.200(5,08).030

(0,76)

Ø.177(Ø4,50)

Ø.100(Ø2,54)

.016(0,40)

.217

.177

5,50)

.020(0,50)

.327(8,30)


M7

SPST

SPST

M6

SERIES 38GSealed SubminiaturePushbutton Switches

FEATURES• Drop-In Replacement for Industry

Standard• Choice of Terminations• Printed Circuit Board Mount• SPST, DPST and SPDT Momentary

Contact• Sealed Per IP67

Pushbutton27


Push

butto

n S

witc

hes



SERIES 38G

SPDT

DPST

DPST

SPST

V2

M7

Pushbutton28

Push

butto

n S

witc

hes



P.C. MOUNTING

.400(10.16)

.016(0.40)

.020(0.50)

.400(10.16)

Ø.043(Ø1.09)

.201(5,10)

.030(0,76)

Ø.177(Ø4,50)

.366(9,30)

.161(4,10)

.217(5,50)

Ø.100(Ø2,54)

EPOXY SEAL

.100(2,54)

.100(2,54)


WSP9 OFF (ON)

()=MOMENTARY

SCHEMATIC

SPST

()=MOMENTARY


WDP92-1

OFF

2-3

(ON)

TERM. COMM.

SCHEMATIC


WSP82-1

ON

2-3

(ON)

TERM. COMM.

()=MOMENTARY

SCHEMATIC 3 N.O.N.C.1

2COMM.

SPDTDPST

Snap-in Termination Options (Same P.C. mounting as V2, M6, M7 but with snap-in bracket)

SERIES 38GDIMENSIONS In inches (and millimeters)

Circuitry

V2

SPDT

S2 S6 S7

Pushbutton29


Push

butto

n S

witc

hes


SPECIFICATIONSRating CriteriaOperating Life: 30,000 make-and-break cyclesat full loadContact Rating (resistive load):R Option: 0.4 VA maximum at 20 Vac or VdcmaximumG Option: 1A max at 125 Vac or 28 VdcContact Resistance: 20 milliohms max initial at2-4 Vdc, 100 mA

Insulation Resistance: 1000 megaohmsminimumVoltage Breakdown: 1500 Vrms minimum atsea levelOperating Temperature: -30°C. to +85°C.

Materials and FinishesCase: Glass filled Nylon 6/6 (UL 94V-0)Plunger: Thermoplastic Polyester(UL 94V-0)(with internal o-ring seal)

Terminals: Copper alloySpring: Plated Music WireContact System: Copper alloySwitch Support: Brass, tin-plated

SERIES 38G




Options:WSP8,WSP9,WDP9(see modelsforswitchingpositions)

Options:M6, M7, S2,S6, S7, V2(seeterminationoptions)


38G M7 R TWSP8

SubminiatureSealedPushbuttonSwitches

Pushbutton30

Push

butto

n S

witc

hes


Sealed Surface Mount Subminiature Pushbutton Switches

SERIES 38HSealed Surface Mount SubminiaturePushbutton Switches

FEATURESï Surface Mount Process Compatibleï Sealed Constructionï Solder-Coated Terminalsï Tape and Reel Packagingï SPST and SPDT Momentary Contact• Sealed Per IP67

DIMENSIONS In inches (and millimeters)SERIES 38H

SPST

M7

Ø.177(Ø4,50) Ø.102

(Ø2,60)

.030(0,50)

EPOXY SEAL

.177(3,00)

.342(5,80)

.242(4,10)

.045(0,76)

.300(5,08)

.548(9,30)

.325(5,50)

.242(4,10).420

(7,10)

.024(0,40)

.125(3,18)

.173(4,39)

.079(2,00)

.063(1,60).325

(8,27)

.125(3,18)

.561(14,25)

.120(3,00)

.221(5,60)

Pushbutton31


Push

butto

n S

witc

hes



SERIES 38H

SPDT

SPST

S6

M7

.228(5,80)

.319(8,10)

.161(4,10)

.016(0,40)

.353(8,97)

.030(0,76)

.102(2,60).226

(5,75)

.142(3,60)

Ø.177(Ø4,50)

.161(4,10)

.020(0,50)

.280(7,10)

EPOXY SEAL

.032(0,80)

.143(3,63)

.080(2,03)

.040(1,02)

.421(10,70)

.128(3,25)

.079(2,00) .200

(5,08)

.200(5,08)

Pushbutton32

Ø.177(Ø4,50) Ø.102

(Ø2,60)

EPOXY SEAL

.118(3,00)

.228(5,80)

.030(0,76)

.161(4,10)

.366(9,30)

.100(2,54)

.020(0,50) .280

(7,10)

.161(4,10)

.217(5,50)

.016(0,40)

.120(3,00)

.221(5,60)

.063(1,60)

.125(3,18)

.325(8,27)

.100(2,54)

.125(3,18)

.173(4,39)

.561(14,25)

.079(2,00)

Push

butto

n S

witc

hes



SERIES 38HDIMENSIONS In inches (and millimeters)

Circuitry

S6

SPDT

.228(5,80)

.319(8,10)

.161(4,10)

.016(0,40)

.353(8,97)

.030(0,76)

.102(2,60).226

(5,75)

.142(3,60)

Ø.177(Ø4,50)

.161(4,10)

.020(0,50)

.280(7,10)

EPOXY SEAL

.032(0,80)

.143(3,63)

.080(2,03)

.040(1,02)

.421(10,70)

.128(3,25)

.079(2,00) .200

(5,08)

.200(5,08)

Pushbutton33


WSP9 OFF (ON)

()=MOMENTARY

SCHEMATIC


WSP82-1

ON

2-3

(ON)

TERM. COMM.

()=MOMENTARY

SCHEMATIC3 N.O.N.C.1

2COMM.

SPDTSPST


Push

butto

n S

witc

hes


SPECIFICATIONSRating CriteriaOperating Life: 30,000 make-and-break cyclesat full loadContact Rating (resistive load):R Option: 0.4 VA maximum at 20 Vac or VdcmaximumQ & G Options: 1A max at 125 Vac or 28 VdcContact Resistance: 20 milliohms max initial at2-4 Vdc, 100 mAInsulation Resistance: 1000 megaohmsminimum

Voltage Breakdown: 1500 Vrms minimum atsea levelOperating Temperature: -30°C. to +85°C.

Materials and FinishesCase: Glass Filled Nylon 4/6, UL94V-)Plunger: Thermoplastic Polyester(UL 94V-0)(with internal o-ring seal)Terminals: Copper alloySpring: Plated Music Wire

Contact System: Copper alloySwitch Support: Brass, tin-plated

SERIES MODEL NO. TERMINATION CONTACT SEAL

SERIES 38H



G = Copperalloy, Goldplate oversilver plate

Q = Copperalloy, SilverPlate

Options:WSP8,WSP9(see modelsforswitchingpositions)

Options:M7, S6(seeterminationoptions)

T = LeadFree andRoHScompliant

38H M7 R TWSP8

SealedSurface MountSubminiaturePushbuttonSwitches

Pushbutton34

Push

butto

n S

witc

hes



.100 (2,54) .200 (5,08)TYP.

.120 (3,05)

.070 (1,78) .050 (1,27)

.100 ± .004 (2,54 ± 0,10) TYP. BTWN. PINS OF SAME SWITCH

.100 ± .004 (2,54 ± 0,10) TYP. BTWN. PINS OF STACKED SWITCHES

.084 (2,13) DIA.

.110 (2,79).090 (2,29)

.400 (10,16).190 (4,83)

.100 ± .004(2,54 ± 0,10)

.030 ± .002 (0,76 ± 0,05)DIA. 4 PLS.

.272 (6,91)

.220 (5,59)

.100 (2,54)

.180 (4,57)

.100 ± .004(2,54 ± 0,10)

.200 (5,08) REF.

GR

AYH

ILL

GR

AYH

ILL

GR

AYH

ILL

GR

AYH

ILL

GR

AYH

ILL

.050 (1,27)

XXXX

E.I.A.DATECODE

SWITCH DIMENSIONS (In inches and millimeters)

LED DIMENSIONS (In inches and millimeters)

Unless otherwise stated, linear dimension tolerances are ± .010 (0,25); diameters are ± .005 (0,13)

Unless otherwise stated, linear dimension tolerances are ± .010 (0,25); diameters are ± .005 (0,13)

SERIES 32SPST and SPDT,Stackable with LED

FEATURES• Stackable, Provides Custom Switch

Arrangements• .200" Centers When Stacked• SPST–N.O., SPST–N.C. Circuitry in

the Same Package• Process Compatible, Internally

Sealed Plunger• Status/Reset or Press-to-Test

Functions with Companion LED

Action Total Travel

Momentary .050 (1,27) Approx.

SWITCH CIRCUITRY

2 Circuits Per Switch

Alternate Wiring

Rating at Operations28 Vdc at Rated Part

Resistive Load Number

150 mA 100,000 32-01

.220 (5,59)

GRAYHILL

.200 (5,08) REF..100 (2,54)

.118 (3,0)DIA.

.050 (1,27)

.100 (2,54)

.010(0,25)

.180(4,57)

.272(6,91)

.100 (2,54)

.230 (5,84)

.110(2,79)

.190(4,83)

.020 (0,51)SQ. 2 PLS.

C

CATHODE

SPST N.C.

SPST N.O.N.O. N.O.

N.C. N.C.

SPDTBREAK BEFORE

MAKE

N.O.

N.C.

C

CONNECT PINSON PC BOARD

Actuator

Actuator

E-9

Pushbutton35


Push

butto

n S

witc

hes


SPECIFICATIONSRating CriteriaContact Resistance: 25 milliohms maximumon a new switchVoltage Breakdown: 1,000 Vac betweenmutually insulated partsInsulation Resistance: 1,000 megohmsminimumSwitch and LED Operating Temperature:-40°C to +85°C

Materials and FinishesSwitch Base, LED Base, Button and Cover:PolyesterShorting Bar: Phosphor bronze, gold-platedover nickelSwitch Terminals: Brass, gold-plated overnickelLED Terminals: Steel, tin-platedSpring: Tinned Music Wire

LED InformationMCD* Viewing

Color Min. Max. Angle

Red 0.8 5.0 60°Green 0.8 3.2 60°Yellow 0.8 3.2 60°

*MCD = Millicandellas at 2 mA

Recommended Current: 2mACurrent limiting resistor is not supplied.

ORDERING INFORMATION: Individual Units


32-01 Switch, 10 microinches gold plating, black button, red body32-02 Switch, 30 microinches gold plating, black button, red body32LED-RED Red LED and holder, red body32LED-GRN Green LED and holder, red body32LED-YEL Yellow LED and holder, red body

Grayhill or your local Distributor will assemble stacks of switches, LEDs or combinations.

Example Part Number

Example part number describes a stack of 6 elements consisting of two switches, a redLED, a green LED, a switch and a yellow LED. Shorter stacks will have fewer letters inthe arrangement definition. Contact Grayhill for stacks of more than six elements.

Basic switch part number (see Ordering Information)Number of ganged elements (2 thru 6)

32-01-6-AARGYA

Arrangement definition (left to right, front view)A = SwitchR = Red LEDG = Green LEDY = Yellow LED


Assemblies of Switches or Switches and LED Combinations

Assemblies of LEDs Only

Example Part Number

Example part number describes a stack of 3 LEDs, arranged red, yellow and green fromleft to right. Maximum number of stacked LEDs in this part numbering scheme is six.Contact Grayhill for stacks of more than six elements.

Basic identification for LEDsNumber of ganged elements (2 thru 6)

32LED-3-RYG

Arrangement definition (left to right, front view)R = Red LEDG = Green LEDY = Yellow LED

Pushbutton36

Push

butto

n S

witc

hes



SPDT–PC MountLarge Button Style

39-261*


Small Button Style

39-251*

Rating at115 Vac

Resistive

Rating at220 Vac

Resistive

Operationsat Rated

Load

PartialPart

Number39-251*39-261*

.090 + .010/ – .015(2,29 + 0,25/ – 0,38)

.200 ± .015 (5,08 ± 0,38)

.060 (1,52) REF.

.100 ± .015 (2,54 ± 0,38)

.100 ± .010 (2,54 ± 0,25)

.400 ± .015(10,16 ± 0,38)

.100 ± .010 (2,54 ± 0,25).300

± .010(7,62± 0,25)

.050 ± .005 (1,27 ± 0,13) TYP.

.050 ± .005 (1,27 ± 0,13)

.084 ± .005 (2,13 ± 0,13) DIA.

.250 ± .010 (6,35 ± 0,25) DIA.

END OF BUTTON HAS A .200 (5,08) SPHERICAL RADIUS

C LC L

.340 ± .015(8,64 ± 0,38)

.090 ± .010(2,29 ± 0,25)

Rating at28 Vdc

Resistive

150 mA 1/4 Amp 1/8 Amp 500,000

Action Actuating Force (oz.)Total Travel

Momentary 10 ± 3 oz.

.500 ± .015(12,7 ± 0,38)

.270 (6,86) REF.

.125 ± .010 (3,18 ± 0,25)

.030 ± .002 (0,76 ± 0,05) DIA.

.250 ± .015 (6,35 ± 0,38)

.060 (1,52) REF.

.100 ± .015 (2,54 ± 0,38)

.100 ± .010 (2,54 ± 0,25)

.100 ± .010 (2,54 ± 0,25)

.300± .010(7,62± 0,25)

.050 ± .005 (1,27 ± 0,13) TYP.

.084 ± .005 (2,13 ± 0,13) DIA.

.250 ± .010 (6,35 ± 0,25) DIA.

.100 ± .010 (2,54 ± 0,25)

.068 ± .010 (1,73 ± 0,25)

.187 ± .010 (4,75 ± 0,25) DIA.

.328 ± .015(8,33 ± 0,38)

E

C L C L

.090 ± .010(2,29 ± 0,25)

.400 ± .015(10,16 ± 0,38)

.340 ± .015(8,64 ± 0,38)

.050 ± .005(1,27 ± 0,13)

.100 ± .005 (2,54 ± 0,13)

N.C.

N.O.

GR

AY

HIL

L

XXXX

E.I.A. DATECODE

SPECIFICATIONSRating CriteriaContact Resistance: 25 milliohms maximum ona new switchVoltage Breakdown: 1,000 Vac betweenmutually insulated partsInsulation Resistance: 1,000 megohmsminimumOperating Temperature: -40°C to +125°C

Materials and FinishesButton: NylonBase and Cover: Polyester, red in colorShorting Bar: Phosphor bronze, gold-platedover nickelTerminals: Brass, gold-plated over nickelSpring: Tinned music wireO-Ring: Fluorosilicone

ORDERING INFORMATION*Complete


39-251 RED Small Red Button, SPDT39-251 BLK Small Black Button, SPDT39-261 RED Large Red Button, SPDT39-261 BLK Large Black Button, SPDT


CIRCUITRY

2 Circuits Per Switch

Alternate Wiring

SPST N.C.

SPST N.O.N.O. N.O.

N.C. N.C.

SPDTBREAK BEFORE

MAKE

N.O.

N.C.

C

CONNECT PINSON PC BOARD

Actuator

Actuator

SERIES 39SPST and SPDT, 1/4 Amp

FEATURES• Fully Protected During Flux

Cleaning Operations

Pushbutton37


Push

butto

n S

witc

hes


SERIES 39SPST, 150 mA

FEATURES• 1/4" Diameter• Up to 1,000,000

Cycles of Operation• PC Mount

Rating at28 Vdc

Resistive

Operationsat Rated

Load

ButtonColor

39-424 RED Red39-424 BLK Black

150 mA 100,000

TotalTravel

Action

SPST–Normally Open, With Overtravel39-424*

*CompletePart

Number

ActuatingForce (oz.)

OverTravel

SPST–Normally Open, With Nut39-401*

SPST–Normally Open, Without Nut39-405*

Rating at28 Vdc

Resistive

Operationsat Rated

Load

ButtonColor


150 mA 1,000,000

*CompletePart

Number

Action ActuatingForce (oz.)

TotalTravel

.035 ± .015(0,89 ± 0,38)

Action

Rating at28 Vdc

Resistive

Operationsat Rated

Load

ButtonColor


TotalTravel


150 mA 1,000,000

*CompletePart

Number

.035 ± .015(0,89 ± 0,38)

Momentary 4 + 4 – 2

Momentary 4+ 4– 2


.130 ± .025 .015 (0,38)(3,30 ± 0,64) Min.

Momentary 5 ± 3

Pushbutton38

Push

butto

n S

witc

hes




TotalTravel

.035 ± .015(0,89 ± 0,38)

Rating at28 Vdc

Resistive

Operationsat Rated

Load

ButtonColor

150 mA 1,000,000

39-501 RED Red39-501 BLK Black39-503 RED Red39-503 BLK Black

Mounting Footprint

39-501*39-503*

Right Angle, SPST–Normally Open


*CompletePart

Number

Momentary 4

ACCESSORIES

SHH1699

30B1012-530B1012-830B1012-9

See page E-36 for dimensions.

Part No. Type & Button Color

39-401 RED N.O., Red39-401 BLK N.O., Black39-405 RED N.O., No Nut, Red39-405 BLK N.O., No Nut, Black39-424 RED N.O., Overtravel, Red39-424 BLK N.O., Overtravel, Black39-501 RED N.O., Right Angle, Red39-501 BLK N.O., Right Angle, Black39-503 RED 39-501 Red & Cap Seal39-503 BLK 39-501 Blk & Cap Seal


AccessoryPart Number Description

30B1012-5 Red Accessory Cap30B1012-8 White Accessory Cap30B1012-9 Black Accessory CapSHH1699 Cap Seal Only, Black

SPECIFICATIONSRating CriteriaContact Resistance: 25 milliohms maximumon a new switchVoltage Breakdown: 1,000 Vac betweenmutually insulated partsInsulation Resistance: 1,000 megohmsminimumOperating Temperature: -40°C to +85°C

Accessory cap may be used with part numbers39-405, 39-401, 39-424, 39-501, 39-503.


Protective cap (included with 39-503 RED and 39-503 BLK)seals switch during wave soldering.

+ 4– 2

CIRCUITRY

Materials and FinishesBushing/Housing: Brass, tin zincStandoff: (39-501 and 39-503) Brass, tin platedover nickelBase and Button: ThermoplasticShorting Bar: Brass, gold-plated over nickelplate for 39-501and 39-503; fine silver, gold-plated for othersTerminals: Brass, gold-plated over nickelSpring: Tinned music wireMounting Nut: (39-401 and 39-424) Brass,zinc trivalent chromate-plated

HOLES FOR.020 (0,51) SQUARE PINS (4)

.100(2,54)

.200(5,08)

.100 (2,54)

.300(7,62)

.050 (1,27)

.110 (2,79) ± .010 (0,25) DIA.

.175 +.025/ –.020(4,45 +0,64/ – 0,51)

A = .125 ± .010 (3,18 ± 0,25)

.600 (15,24)REF.

.100 (2,54) REF.

.250 + .010/ –.005 (6,35 + 0,25/ – 0,13) DIA.

A

B C

.315 ± .010(8,00 ± 0,25)

.300 ± .005(7,62 ± 0,13)

.089 (2,26) MIN.

C = .060 ± .005 (1,52 ± 0,13)

.075 ± .010(1,91 ± 0,25)

.300 (7,62) REF.

.050 ± .010(1,27 ± 0,25)

.140 ± .015(3,56 ± 0,38)

.200 ± .005(5,08 ± 0,13)

.050 (1,27) REF.

B = .215 ± .015 (5,46 ± 0,38)

E.I.A. DATE CODE

LABEL*

*Label increases nominal diameter to .255 (6,48)

SPST N.O.

Pushbutton39


Push

butto

n S

witc

hes


SERIES 39Miniature Limit

FEATURES• Adjustable Location Setting• Plunger Sealed Version

SPECIFICATIONSRating CriteriaContact Resistance: 25 milliohms maximumon a new switchVoltage Breakdown: 1,000 Vac betweenmutually insulated partsInsulation Resistance: 1,000 megohmsminimumOperating Temperature: -40°C to +85°C

Materials and FinishesBushing and Mounting Nuts: Brass, tin zincInsulation Sleeve: Molded polyester for39-101, 39-102, 39-103 and 39-701: phenolicper MIL-M-14 type CFG for 39-702Base: Thermoset plasticTerminals: Commercial bronze, gold platedover nickel for 39-101, 39-102, 39-103 and 39-701; silver for 39-702Springs: Tinned music wireContacts: Commercial bronze, gold-plated for39-101, 39-102, 39-103 and 39-701; fine silverfor 39-702Button: ThermoplasticO-Ring: (39-701 & 39-702) Silicone


SPST–Normally Open,With Overtravel39-101

Terminals are not oriented to bushing flat

Action OverTravel

TotalTravel

Operationsat Rated

Load

Rating at220 Vac

Resistive

Rating at115 Vac

Resistive

PartNumber

ButtonColor

1/2 Amp 1/4 Amp 500,000 39-101 Nat. Nylon


Mounting Hole.339 (8,61) Diameter‘D’ shape per above.

Momentary 5+ 3– 2

.187 ± .015 .060 (1,52) Min.(4,75 ± 0,38) from top of bushing

.136 ± .005 (3,45 ± 0,13) DIA.

.068 ± .015 (1,73 ± 0,38)

A

.287 (7,29)MAX.

.650± .032(16,51± 0,81)

.837(21,26)REF.

B


HEX. NUT (2).093 (2,36) THICK.437 (11,10) ACROSS FLATS

.072 ± .005(1,83 ± 0,13)

A = .187 ± .015 (4,75 ± 0,38)B = .450 ± .015 (11,43 ± 0,38)

XXXX

E.I.A. DATE CODE

CIRCUITRY STANDARD OPTIONSOptional plating: gold-plated contacts for dry circuitconditions, contact Grayhill.

Action

Operationsat Rated

Load

Rating at220 Vac

Resistive

Rating at115 Vac

Resistive

PartNumber

ButtonColor

1/4 Amp 1/8 Amp 100,000 39-702 Nat. Nylon


Momentary None 8 ± 4

OverTravel

TotalTravel

SPST–Normally Closed,Sealed Actuator39-702

.042 ± .010(1,07 ± 0,25)

Mounting Nuts per above.

.110 ± .005 (2,79 ± 0,13) DIA.

.068 ± .015 (1,73 ± 0,38)

A

.800±.032(20,32± 0,81)

.987(25,07)REF.

B


.072 ± .005(1,83 ± 0,13)

A = .187 ± .015 (4,75 ± 0,38)B = .600 ± .015 (15,24 ± 0,38)

E.I.A. DATE CODE

XXXX

Mounting Nuts per above.

SPST–Normally Open,With Overtravel, Sealed Actuator39-701

SPST–Normally Open,With Extended Overtravel39-10239-103

.110 ± .005 (2,79 ± 0,13) DIA.

.060 ± .005 (1,52 ± 0,13)

.100 ± .005 (2,54 ± 0,13)

A

.610± .032(15,5

± 0,81)

.775(19,69)REF.

B

5/16-32 UNS-2ATHREAD

A = .165 +.035 –.015 (4,19 +0,89 –0,38)B = .410 ± .015 (10,41 ± 0,38)

.020 (0,51) REF.

.040 (1,02) REF.

E.I.A. DATE CODE

XXXX

.100 (2,54) MAX.

Available from your local Grayhill Distributor.For prices and discounts, contact a local SalesOffice, an authorized local Distributor orGrayhill.

Operationsat Rated

Load

Rating at220 Vac

Resistive

Rating at115 Vac

Resistive

PartNumber

ButtonColor

150 mA 75 mA 30,000 39-102 Nat. Nylon

150 mA 75 mA 100,000 39-701 Nat. Nylon

1/2 Amp 1/4 Amp 30,000 39-103 Nat. Nylon

Action OverTravel

TotalTravel


39-102 and 39-103:.200 (5,08) Nominal.from top of bushing

39-701:.060 (1,52) Min.

from top of bushing

.250 ± .015(6,35 ± 0,38)

.187 ± .015(4,75 ± 0,38)

6.8 ± 5

8 ± 4

Momentary

Momentary

SPST N.O.

.110 ± .005 (2,79 ± 0,13) DIA.

.068 ± .015 (1,73 ± 0,38)

A

.800±.032(20,32± 0,81)

1.050(26,67)REF.

B


.072 ± .005(1,83 ± 0,13)

A = .250 ± .015 (6,35 ± 0,38)B = .600 ± .015 (15,24 ± 0,38)

E.I.A. DATE CODE

XXXX

SPST N.C.

Part No. Description

39-101 SPST, N.O. With Overtravel39-102 SPST, N.O. With Extended Overtravel39-103 SPST, N.O. With Extended Overtravel39-701 SPST, N.O. With Overtravel, Sealed39-702 SPST, N.C. Sealed


Pushbutton40

Push

butto

n S

witc

hes



SERIES 39SPST, 150 mA to 1/2 Amp

FEATURES• Requires an Absolute Minimum of Space• Molded-In Terminals in SPST–N.O.• Solder Lug Terminals

Normally Open–SPST Economy and Standard Version


39-139-339-601*

TotalTravel

ActionActuatingForce (oz.)

+ 4- 2

Momentary 4

1,000,000At 5 Vdc At 20 Vdc 39-601 RED Red150 mA 20 mA 39-601 BLK Black

ElectricalRatings

ButtonColor

Operationsat Rated

Load

*CompletePart

Number

Economy Version

Mtg.Hole

.035 ± .015 11/64"(0,89 ± 0,38) (4,37) DIA.

Mtg.Hole

TotalTravel


Momentary 4

Action

+ 4– 2

ButtonColor

Operationsat Rated

Load

1,000,000At 115 Vac At 220 Vac 39-1 Red1/2 Amp Res. 1/4 Amp Res. 39-3 Black

ElectricalRatings

StandardComplete

PartNumber

.035 ± .015 11/64"(0,89 ± 0,38) (4,37) DIA.

Normally Open–SPST with Sealed Bushing and Button39-351*

Normally Open–SPST with Overtravel39-1239-24

39-12 Red39-24 Black

Operationsat Rated

Load

Rating at220 Vac

Resistive

ButtonColor

Rating at115 Vac

Resistive

1/2 Amp 1/4 Amp 100,000

CompletePart

Number


Mtg.Hole

TotalTravel

OverTravel

.130 ± .025 .015 (0,38) (3,30 ± 0,64) Min.

Momentary 5 ± 3 11/64"

(4,37) DIA.


Operationsat Rated

Load

Rating at220 Vac

Resistive

ButtonColor

Rating at115 Vac

Resistive

1/2 Amp 1/4 Amp 250,000

*CompletePart

Number


TotalTravel

Action

Momentary 16 ± 8.035 ± .015 (0,89 ± 0,38)

.110 ± .005(2,79 ± 0,13) DIA.

.615 (15,62)REF.

A

B

C

D

8-40 UNS-2ATHREAD

.250 + .010/ –.005(6,35 + 0,25/ – 0,13)DIAMETER

A = .175 + .025/ –.020 (4,45 + 0,64/ – 0,51)B = .125 ± . 010 (3,18 ± 0,25)C = .215 ± .015 (5,46 ± 0,38)D = .100 ± .020 (2,54 ± 0,51)

H = HEX MTG NUT.063 ± .010 (1,59 ± 0,25) THICK.219 ± .010 (5,56 ± 0,25)ACROSS FLATS

H

E.I.A. DATE CODE

LABEL*


.650(16,51)REF.

A

.312 ±.005(7,92 ±0,13)

ACROSSFLATS

D

C

B

A = .175 +.025/ –.020 (4,45 +0,64/ – 0,51)B = .125 ± .010 (3,18 ± 0,25)C = .250 ±.015 (6,35 ± 0,38)D = .100 ± .020 (1,54 ± 0,51)

.110± .005 DIA.(2,79 ± 0,13)

#8-40 UNS-2A THREAD

.036 ± .005 (0,91 ± 0,13)

.072 ± .005 (1,83 ± 0,13)

.068 ± .005 (1,73 ± 0,13)

HEX MTG. NUT.0625 (1,59) TYP.THICK AND .218 (5,54) TYP.ACROSS FLATS

O

Button is O-Ringsealed internally.

O = O RING

E.I.A. DATE CODE

XXXX

.110 .005(2,79 0,13) DIA.

.755 (19,18)REF.

A

B

C

D

8-40 UNS-2ATHREAD

.250 + .010/ – .005(6,35 + 0,25/ – 0,13)DIAMETER

A = .175 + .025/ –.020 (4,45 + 0,64/ – 0,51)B = .125 .010 (3,18 0,25)C = .355 .015 (9,02 0,38)D = .100 .020 (2,54 0,51)

H = HEX MTG NUT.063 .010 (1,60 0,25)THICK.219 .010 (5,56 0,25)ACROSS FLATS

H

E.I.A. DATE CODE

LABEL*


.068 ±.005(1,73 ± 0,13).036 ±.005

(0,91 ± 0,13)

.072 ±.005(1.83± 0,13)

Pushbutton41


Push

butto

n S

witc

hes



Normally Closed–SPST39-2

39-2 Black

Operationsat Rated

Load

Rating at220 Vac

Resistive

CapColor

Rating at115 Vac

Resistive

PartNumber

1/4 Amp 1/8 Amp 250,000

Mtg.Hole

TotalTravel


+ 4– 2

Action

Momentary 4.042 ± .010 .172

(1,07 ± 0,25) (4,37) DIA.

Normally Closed–SPST with Sealed Bushing and Button39-352*


Operationsat Rated

Load

Rating at220 Vac

Resistive

ButtonColor

Rating at115 Vac

Resistive

1/4 Amp 1/8 Amp 100,000

*CompletePart

Number


TotalTravel

Action

Momentary 8 ± 4.042 ± .010(0,17 ± 0,25)

CIRCUITRY

SPST–N.O. WITH OVERTRAVEL

SPECIFICATIONSRating CriteriaContact Resistance: 25 milliohms maximumon a new switchVoltage Breakdown: 1,000 Vac betweenmutually insulated partsInsulation Resistance: 1,000 megohmsminimumOperating Temperature: -40°C to +85°CMounting Torque: 2 inch-pounds

Materials and FinishesMounting Nut: Brass, tin zincHousing: Aluminum, clear anodized for39-351 and 39-352; Brass, zinc trivalentchromate-plated for othersButton: Thermoset plasticBase: Thermoset plasticShorting Bar: Fine silver for 39-2 and 39-352;brass, gold-plated over nickel plate for 39-601;fine silver, gold-plated for othersTerminals: Fine silver for 39-2 and 39-352;commercial bronze with gold-plated fine silvercontact surface for othersSpring: Tinned music wireO-Rings: (39-351 and 39-352) Internal ring issilicone; external ring is buna ‘N’



30B1012-5 Red Button Cap30B1012-9 Black Button Cap30B1012-8 White Button Cap

Part Number Description39-1 N.O., Red Button39-2 N.C., Black Button39-3 N.O., Black Button39-12 N.O., Overtravel Red Button39-24 N.O., Overtravel Black Button39-351 RED N.O., Sealed, Red Button39-351 BLK N.O., Sealed, Black Button39-352 RED N.C., Sealed, Red Button39-352 BLK N.C., Sealed, Black Button39-601 RED N.O., Economy, Red Button39-601 BLK N.O., Economy, Black Button


Accessory cap may be used with all switchesshown except 39-2.

ACCESSORY

Button CapPart No. 30B1012For use with part numbers39-351 and 39-352.(Fasten to button withCyanoacrylate Adhesive)See page E-XXfor dimensions.

.105 ± .005(2,67 ± 0,13) DIA.

.780 (19,81)REF.

A

B

C

D

8-40 UNS-2ATHREAD

.250 +.010/ –.005(6,35 +0,25/ – 0,13)DIAMETER

A = .175 ± .025 (4,45 ±0,64)B = .125 ± . 010 (3,18 ± 0,25)C = .390 ± .010 (9,91 ± 0,25)D = .100 (2,54) MAX.

H = HEX MTG NUT.063 ± .010 (1,60 ± 0,25) THICK.219 ± .010 (5,56 ± 0,25)ACROSS FLATS

H

E.I.A. DATE CODE

LABEL*


.819(20,80)REF.

A

.312 ±.005(7,92 ±0,13)

ACROSSFLATS

D

E

C

B

A = .165 +.035/ –.015 (4,19 +0,89/ – 0,38)B = .125 ± .007 (3,18 ± 0,18)C = .429 ±.015 (10,90 ± 0,38)D = .100 (2,54) MAX.E = 10˚ TO 40˚ APPROX.

.110± .005 DIA.(2,79 ± 0,13) #8-40 UNS-2A THREAD

.100 ± .010 (2,54 ± 0,25)

.060 ± .010 (1,52 ± 0,25)

.100 (2,54) MAX.

H = HEX MTG. NUT.0625 (1,59) TYP.THICK AND .218 (5,56) TYP.ACROSS FLATS

O-RING

.250 +.010/ –.005(6,35 + 0,25/ – 0,13)

H

E.I.A. DATE CODE

LABEL*

*Label increases nominal diameter to .255 (6,48)Button is o-ringsealed internally.

SPST N.O.

SPST N.C.

.060 ± .010(1,52 ± 0,25)

.100 ±.010(2,54 ± 0,25)

Pushbutton42

Push

butto

n S

witc

hes



SERIES 30SPST, 1 and 5 Amp

FEATURES• Reliable• Economical• Large Selection• UL Recognized• CSA Certified• Sealed Bushing and

Pushbutton Option

Normally Open–SPST Standard, Economy and UL Recognized30-130-1UL30-330-3UL30-601*


At 5 Vdc At 20 Vdc 30-601 RED Red150 mA 20 mA 30-601 BLK Black

ButtonColor

Operationsat Rated

Load

1,000,000

Mtg.Hole

TotalTravel


ElectricalRatings

Action

.062 ± .010 17/64"(1,57 ± 0,25) (6,75)

Momentary 10 ± 4

Economy Version

Mtg.Hole

TotalTravel


ButtonColor

30-1 Red 30-3 Black

PartNumber

Operationsat Rated

Load

Rating at115 Vac

Resistive

Rating at220 Vac

Resistive

1 Amp 0.5 Amp 1,000,000

Momentary 10 ± 4

Standard

Mtg.Hole

TotalTravel


ButtonColor

30-1UL Red30-3UL Black

PartNumber

Operationsat Rated

Load

Rating at120 Vac

Resistive

Rating at220 Vac

Resistive

5 Amp 2.5 Amp 6,000

Momentary 10 ± 4

UL Recognized*Complete

PartNumber

.062 ± .010 17/64" (1,57 ± 0,25) (6,75)

.062 ± .010 17/64" (1,57 ± 0,25) (6,75)

.162 ± .005(4,11 ± 0,13)

A

.992(25,20)REF.


.375± .005

(9,53 ± 0,13)

D

C

B

A = .150 ± .015 (3,81 ± 0,38)B = .250 ± .010 (6,35 ± 0,25)C = .370 ±.015 (9,40 ± 0,38)D = .222 ± .020 (5,64 ± 0,51)

HEX MOUNTING NUT.375 (9,53) ACROSS FLATS.109 (2,77) THICK

LABEL*

*PART NUMBER AND E.I.A. DATE CODE LABEL

.186 (4,72) REF.C L C L

Pushbutton43


Push

butto

n S

witc

hes


A

1.091(27,71)REF.

.437 ± .010

(11,10 ± 0,25)ACROSS FLATS OF HEX

.505 (12,83) REF. ACROSS CORNERS

D

C

B

A = .209 ± .015 (5,31 ± 0,38)B = .250 ± .010 (6,35 ± 0,25)C = .410 ±.015 (10,41 ± 0,38)D = .222 ± .020 (5,64 ± 0,51)E = .187 ±.010 (4,75 ± 0,25)F = .100 ± .010 (2.54 ± 0,25)

F

T

SNAP ON CAP

E

.375± .010 DIA.(9,53± 0,25)

T = 1/4-32 UNEF-2A THREADO = O RING

OHEX MTG NUT.312 (7,92)ACROSS FLATS.062 (1,57) THICK

LABEL*


.015 (0,38)

.186 REF.(4.7)

Normally Open–SPST WithSealed Bushing and Button30-251*

Normally Closed–SPST WithSealed Bushing and Button30-252*

Mtg.Hole

TotalTravel

Action

ButtonColor

Operationsat Rated

Load

Rating at115 Vac

Resistive

Rating at220 Vac

Resistive

1 Amp 1/2 Amp 250,000


Momentary 30 ± 8

*CompletePart

Number

Mtg.Hole

TotalTravel

Action

ButtonColor

Operationsat Rated

Load

Rating at115 Vac

Resistive

Rating at220 Vac

Resistive


Momentary 12 ± 4

*CompletePart

Number

30-230-2UL30-630-6UL

Normally Closed–SPST and UL Recognized Normally Closed–SPST

Mtg.Hole

TotalTravel


ButtonColor

30-2 Black 30-6 Red

PartNumber

Operationsat Rated

Load

Rating at115 Vac

Resistive

Rating at220 Vac

Resistive

Momentary 8 ± 4

UL Recognized

Mtg.Hole

TotalTravel


ButtonColor

30-2UL Black30-6UL Red

PartNumber

Operationsat Rated

Load

Rating at120 Vac

Resistive

Rating at220 Vac

Resistive

5 Amp —– 6,000

Momentary 8 ± 4


1 Amp 1/2 Amp 1,000,000

.065 + .010/ - .015 17/64"(1,65 + 0,25/ - 0,38) (6,75)

.065 + .010/ - .015 17/64"(1,65 + 0,25/ - 0,38) (6,75)

30-251 RED Red 30-251 BLK Black

.062 ± .020 17/64" (1,57 ± 0,51) (6,75)


.065 ± .010 17/64"(1,65 ± 0,25) (6,75)

1 Amp 1/2 Amp 250,000

.162 ± .005(4,11 ± 0,13) DIA.

A

1.005(25,53)REF.


.375± .005

(9,53 ± 0,13)

.230 REF.(5.8)

D

C

B

A = .150 ± .015 (3,81 ± 0,38)B = .250 ± .010 (6,35 ± 0,25)C = .375 ±.015 (9,53 ± 0,38)D = .230± .020 (5,84 ± 0,51)


LABEL*


A

1.104(28,04)REF.

T = 1/4-32 UNEF-2A THREADO = O RING

.437± .010

(11,10 ± 0,25)ACROSS FLATS OF HEX.

.505 (12,83) REF. ACROSS CORNERS

D

C

BO

A = .209 ± .015 (5,31 ± 0,38)B = .250 ± .010 (6,35 ± 0,25)C = .415 ± .015 (10,54 ± 0,38)D = .230 ± .015 (5,84 ± 0,38)E = .187 ±.010 (4,75 ± 0,25)F = .100 ± .010 (2.54 ± 0,25)

F

T

SNAP ON CAP

E

.375 ± .010 DIA.(9,53± 0,25)

HEX MTG NUT.312 (7,92) ACROSS FLATS.062 (1,57) THICK

LABEL*

.230 REF.(5.8)


Pushbutton44

Push

butto

n S

witc

hes



Normally Open–SPST WithOvertravel30-1530-37


Normally Open–SPST WithPositive Feel30-17*

Normally Open–SPST WithPush-Pull30-16*

Mtg.Hole

TotalTravel


ButtonColor

30-15 Red 30-37 Black

PartNumber

Operationsat Rated

Load

Rating at115 Vac

Resistive

Rating at220 Vac

Resistive

8 ± 4

ButtonColor

Operationsat Rated

Load

Rating at115 Vac

Resistive

Rating at220 Vac

Resistive

1 Amp 1/2 Amp 100,000

*CompletePart

Number


Mtg.Hole

TotalTravel


Push-to-Make 56 ± 16

Momentary .125 + .020/ - .010 17/64" .020" Overtravel (3,18 + 0,51/ - 0,25) (6,75)

1 Amp 1/2 Amp 500,000

.145 ± .015 31/64"(3,68 ± 0,38) (12,30)

C

.162 ± .005(4,11 ± 0,13)

A

1.077(27,36)REF.


.375± .005

(9,53 ± 0,13)

D

B

A = .150 ± .015 (3,81 ± 0,38)B = .250 ± .010 (6,35 ± 0,25)C = .455 ±.015 (11,56 ± 0,38)D = .222 ± .020 (5,64 ± 0,51)

HEX NUT (SEE H)

H = HEX NUT3/8 ± .010 (9,53 ± 0,25)ACROSS FLATS3/32 ± .010 (2,38 ± 0,25) THICK

LABEL*

.186 REF.(4.7)


.390 ± .010(9,91 ± 0,25)

15/32-32UNS-2ATHREAD

A = .392 ± .015 (9,96 ± 0,38)B = .421 ± .015 (10,69 ± 0,38)C = .315 ±.015 (8,00 ± 0,38)D = .222 ± .020 (5,64 ± 0,51)E = .205 (5,21) REF.

HEX NUT (2)(SEE H)

AE

1.35(34,3)REF.

D

C

B


LABEL*

.186 REF(4.7)


.187 ± .005(4,75 ± 0,13)

A

1.45(36,8)REF.


D

C

B

A = .493 ± .015 (12,52 ± 0,38)B = .421 ± .015 (10,69 ± 0,38)C = .315 ±.015 (8,00 ± 0,38)D = .222 ± .020 (5,64 ± 0,51)

HEX NUT (2)(SEE H)


LABEL*

.186 REF(4.7)


Rating at115 Vac

Resistive

Rating at220 Vac

Resistive


ButtonColor

*CompletePart

Number

Operationsat Rated

Load

1 Amp 1/2 Amp 200,000

Action Mtg.Hole

TotalTravel


OverTravel

18 ± 4Momentary .156 ± .015 .046 (1,17) 31/64"Pos. Feel (3,96 ± 0,38) Min. (12,30)

Pushbutton45


Push

butto

n S

witc

hes



Normally Closed–SPST WithPush-Pull30-32

ACCESSORIES

Button Cap and GuardThe button cap is available in 3 colors: partnumber 30B1012-5 is red; part number30B1012-8 is white; and part number 30B1012-9 is black. It may be fastened to the button withadhesive. It may be used with the followingSeries 30 switches: 30-1, 30-1UL, 30-2, 30-2UL, 30-3, 30-3UL, 30-15, 30-37, 30-601 BLK,and 30-601 RED.

The button guard, part number 10C1015-1 ismade to be used with 15/32" (11,91) inchdiameter switches to prevent unintentionalactuation. It may be used with the followingSeries 30 switches: 30-16 BLK, 30-16 RED,30-17 BLK, 30-17 RED, 30-32 BLK, and 30-32REDFor the dimensions, materials and finishes ofthe button cap and guard, see page E-36.

Decorative Mounting NutsPart Number 30C1023-1 is made for switcheswith 1/4" (6,35) inch diameter bushings. It maybe used with the following Series 30 switches:30-1, 30-1 UL, 30-2, 30-2 UL, 30-3, 30-6, 30-15,30-37, 30-251 BLK, 30-251 RED, 30-252 BLK,30-252 RED, 30-601 BLK and 30-601 RED.

Part Number 07C1040-1 is made for switcheswith 15/32" (11,91) inch diameter bushings. Itmay be used with the following Series 30 switches:30-16 BLK, 30-16 RED, 30-17 BLK, 30-17 RED,30-32 BLK and 30-32 RED.For the dimensions, materials and finishes ofthese decorative mounting nuts, see pageE-36.

STANDARD OPTIONSDecorative mountings, see pages E-24 to E-26.

SPECIFICATIONSRating CriteriaFor UL recognized switches, see individualswitch chart. File number is E35289.Contact Resistance: 25 milliohms maximumon a new switchVoltage Breakdown: 1,000 Vac betweenmutually insulated partsInsulation Resistance: 1,000 megohmsminimumOperating Temperature: -40° to +85°CMounting Torque: 2 inch-pounds

Switch Materials and FinishesMounting Nut and Cover Bushing: Brass, tinzinc

ButtonColor

Operationsat Rated

Load

Rating at115 Vac

Resistive

Rating at220 Vac

Resistive

1 Amp 1/2 Amp 100,00030-32 RED Red30-32 BLK Black

Mtg.Hole

TotalTravel


PartNumber

Pull-to-Make 56 ± 16

Part Description Number and Button Color

30-1* N.O., Standard, Red30-2* N.C., Standard, Black30-3* N.O., Black30-6* N.C., Red30-15 N.O., Overtravel, Red30-16 BLK Push to Make, Black30-16 RED Push to Make, Red30-17 BLK N.O., Positive Feel, Black30-17 RED N.O., Positive Feel, Red30-32 BLK Pull to Make, Black30-32 RED Pull to Make, Red30-37 BLK N.O., Overtravel, Black30-251 BLK N.O., Sealed, Black30-251 RED N.O., Sealed, Red30-252 BLK N.C., Sealed, Black30-252 RED N.C., Sealed, Red30-601 BLK N.O., Economy, Black30-601 RED N.O., Economy, Red


30B1012-5 Accessory Cap, Red30B1012-8 Accessory Cap, White30B1012-9 Accessory Cap, Black30C1023-1 Accessory Nut07C1040-1 Accessory Nut10C1015-1 Button Guard

Accessory Cap30B1012-530B1012-830B1012-9

Button Guard10C1015-1

Decorative Mounting Nuts

07C1040-1

30C1023-1

CIRCUITRY


See page E-36 for dimensions.

*Add “UL” suffix to part number for UL recognizedswitches.Available from your local Grayhill Distributor.For prices and discounts, contact a local SalesOffice, an authorized local Distributor or Grayhill.

.145 ± .015 31/64"(3,68 ± 0,38) (12,30)

Base: Thermoset plasticButton: Polyester for 30-16 and 30-32; Phenolicfor 30-17, 30-1UL, 30-2, 30-2UL, 30-3UL, 30-6and 30-6UL; Polycarbonate for all others.Shorting Bar: Brass with gold over nickel platingfor 30-601; brass with fine silver contact surfacefor all others.Terminals: Brass with gold over nickel platingfor 30-601; commercial brass with fine silvercontact surface and silver-plated for all others.Spring: Tinned music wireButton Cap: Nylon for 30-17; Polyethylene for30-251 and 30-252.Detent Balls: Carbon steel, nickel-platedTerminal Type: Solder lugO-Ring Seal: (30-251, 30-252) Nitrile perMIL-P-5516

1.87 ± .005(4,75 ± 0,13)

A

1.36(34.5)REF.


D

C

B

A = .493 ± .015 (12,52 ± 0,38)B = .421 ± .015 (10,69 ± 0,38)C = .225 ±.015 (5,72 ± 0,38)D = .222 ± .020 (5,64 ± 0,51)

HEX NUT (2)(SEE H)


LABEL*

.230 REF(5.8)


SPST N.O. SPST N.C.

Pushbutton46

Push

butto

n S

witc

hes



.850 (21,59)SQUARE

.125 (3,18) RADIUS 4 PLACES

.188 ± .005 (4,78 ± 0,13)DIAMETER

.187 ±.010(4,75 ± 0,25)

.460 ± .010 (11,68 ± 0,25)

.550 ± .010(13,97 ± 0,25)

.020 ± .010 (0,51 ± 0,25)

.040 (1,02) DIA. 5 PLACES

.150 ± .010(3,81 ± 0,25)

E.I.A. DATE CODE


Basic Switch04A

Bat Handle04A-B01

04A-K01

Keycap

Recommended InterfaceFor customers who prefer to purchase or designseparate keycaps, Grayhill recommends thedimensions shown here to acquire parts which willmate well with the basic switch, part number 04A.

SERIES 044PST

FEATURES• Joy Stick Action• Position Locator On CRT Screens• Moves Cursor On Menu Display

SPECIFICATIONSRating CriteriaRated: Make and break 250 mA at 115 Vac or125 mA at 220 Vac resistive load for 500,000operationsContact Resistance: 25 milliohms maximumon a new switchInsulation Resistance: 1,000 megohms at 100VdcDielectric Strength: 500 Vac RMS minimumOperating Temperature: -40°C to +85°C

CIRCUITRY

Footprint

ORDERING INFORMATION Description Part No.

Basic Switch 04ASwitch with Arrowhead Keycap 04A-K01Switch with Bat-Handle 04A-B01*

*Shipped with bat handle permanently attached.

Materials and FinishesBase, Cover and Switch Actuator: Polyester(Black)Terminals: Brass, gold-plated over nickelShorting Bar: Phosphor bronze, gold-platedover nickelSpring: Tinned music wireKeycap: ABS or equivalentBat-Handle: ABS

.195 ± .005 (4,95 ± 0.13)

.046 +.000/ –.001(1,17 + 90/ – 0,03)

.375 ± .005 (9,53 ± 0,13) DIA.

.469 ± .010(11,91 ± 0,25)

1.219 ± .020(30,96 ± 0,51)

.725 ± .010(18,42 ± 0,25) SQUARE

.487 ± .010(12,37) ± 0,25)

1.315 ± .020(33,40 ± 0,51)

.250 ± .010(6,35 ± 0,25)

COMMON

.500 (12,7) TYP.


Pushbutton47


Push

butto

n S

witc

hes


SERIES 30 and 46Snap-in Panel Mount

FEATURES• Sleek Black Matte Bezel• Convenient Snap-In Front Mount• Choice of 6 Button Colors• SPST, SPDT or DPDT Circuitry• Alternate Action, Positive Feel

and Overtravel Versions• Printed Button Option

Butt Contact Switches - Series 30SPST-N.O. .205 (5,21) 1.119 (28,42) .062 ± .010 (1,57 ± 0,25) 10 ± 4 oz. 30-001-A-*SPST-N.O., Overtravel .205 (5,21) 1.204 (30,58) .125 ± .020 (3,18 ± 0,51) 8 ± 4 oz. 30-015-A-*SPST-N.O., Overtravel & Positive Feel Adjustable** Adjustable** .156 ± .015 (3,96 ± 0,38) 18 ± 4 oz. 30-017-A-*SPST-N.O., Economical .205 (5,21) 1.119 (28,42) .062 ± .010 (1,57 ± 0,25) 10 ± 4 oz. 30-601-A-*SPST-N.C. .205 (5,21) 1.132 (28,75) .065 ± .015 (1,65 ± 0,38) 8 ± 4 oz. 30-002-A-*

Wiping Contact Switches - Series 46SPDT, BBM .205 (5,21) 1.417 (35,99) .180 (4,57) min. 1.1 ± .25 lbs. 46-102-A-*SPDT, MBB .205 (5,21) 1.417 (35,99) .180 (4,57) min. 1.1 ± .25 lbs. 46-111-A-*SPDT, BBM, Alternate Action .293 (7,44) 1.448 (36,78) .180 (4,57) min. 1.5 ± .25 lbs. 46-502-A-*DPDT, BBM .205 (5,21) 1.448 (36,78) .180 (4,57) min. 2.2 ± .5 lbs. 46-200-A-*DPDT, MBB .205 (5,21) 1.448 (36,78) .180 (4,57) min. 2.2 ± .5 lbs. 46-201-A-*DPDT, BBM, Alternate Action .293 (7,44) 1.448 (36,78) .180 (4,57) min. 1.8 ± .5 lbs. 46-402-A-*

ADDITIONAL DIMENSIONS AND PART NUMBERS

*Partial part number, complete part number by adding a dash forbutton color: white -01; red -03; green -04; blue -05; yellow -06or black -07, see Ordering Information.

CIRCUITRY

Switches have momentary action unlessotherwise indicated in the chart below.

**Adjustable from Dim. A .170 (4,32) minimum, Dim. B 1.285 (32,64)maximum to Dim. A .290 (7,37) maximum, Dim. B 1.165 (29,59)minimum with hex nut below bezel.


.800(20,32)

SQ.

.600 (15,24)

.180 (4,57) TYP.

Dim. A: Dim. B:Button Height Behind Panel

(± .015) Length (± .040)Circuitry and Total Actuating Partial

Features Travel Force Part No.*

Tolerances are ± .010 (0,25) unless otherwise specified.

For bottom views andterminal markings, seeSeries 30 and 46 switcheswithout bezels.

Hex nut for 30-017-A IS9/16" (14,29)across flatsand .094 (2,38)thick.

.485 (12,32) SQ.

.063 (1,60)

.527 (13,39)

DIM. A SEE CHART± .015 (0,38)

DIM. BSEE CHART± .040 (1,02)

.738 (18,75)

1.016 (25,81) REF.

LABEL*


SPDT - BBM

N.C.

N.O.

C.

DPDT BBM

N.C.

N.O.

C1

N.C.

N.O.

C2

N.O.

N.C.

C.SPDT MBB

DPDT MBB

N.O.

N.C.

C.

N.O.

N.C.

C.

Pushbutton48

Push

butto

n S

witc

hes



SERIES 30Snap-in Panel Mounting

FEATURES• Convenient Snap-in Panel

Mounting• Choice of 6 Button Colors• SPST (Momentary Contact)• Gold Plated Contacts• Sealed• Butt Contact System


MATERIAL• Button, Housing, Base and Plunger: Nylon, 45%

Glass-filled• Terminal: Brass, gold-plated over nickel• Shorting Bar: Brass, gold-plated over nickel• Internal Seal: Silicon Rubber• O-ring Seal: Silicon• Spring: Tinned music wire

RATINGS• Cycles: 500,000 Actuations• Operating Temperature: -40o C to +80o C• Shock: 100 G’s/ 6 Milliseconds• Rating at 24 VDC: 150 Milliamps• Voltage Breakdown: 1000 Vac between mutually

insulated parts• Contact Resistance: 25mý max on new switch• Insulation: 1,000 megohms minimum

SPST N.O.



30-100 Black 30-101 Red 30-102 Green 30-103 Yellow 30-104 Orange 30-105 White

CIRCUITRY

• Travel: .090 Nominal• Travel Before Make: .035 Nominal

(Unless otherwise noted, standard tolerances are +/- .020)

SPST N.O.

Pushbutton49

Ø .596 / .602

.240.160

.540

.200

Ø.690

RECOMMENDED PANEL CUT-OUTSCALE: 1 TO 1

PANEL THICKNESS WITH "O" RING: .098-.106

PANEL THICKNESS WITHOUT "O" RING: .140-.144

YYWW GH

SCALE 2.000


Push

butto

n S

witc

hes


SPECIFICATIONS

Life Limiting Criteria–Series 30 & 46Contact Resistance: Less than 25 milliohmson a new switchVoltage Breakdown: 1,000 Vac betweenmutually insulated partsInsulation Resistance: 1,000 megohmsminimum

Ratings–Series 30Current Rating:30-601 150 mA, 5 Vdc resistive and

20 mA, 20 Vdc resistiveAll others 1 A, 115 Vac resistive, or 0.5 A,

220 Vac resistiveLife Expectancy:30-015 500,000 operations30-017 200,000 operationsAll others 1,000,000 operations

Ratings–Series 46Current Rating: 250 mA, 115 Vac resistiveor 125 mA, 220 Vac resistiveLife Expectancy: 250,000 operations

Materials and Finishes–Series 30Bezel: NylonButton Cap: ABS plasticSwitch Bushing: Brass, tin zincBase: Thermoset plasticSpring: Tinned music wirePlunger: PolycarbonateShorting Bar:30-601 Brass, gold-plated over nickelAll Others Brass with fine silver contact areaBase Contacts:30-601 Brass, gold-plated over nickel30-002 Brass with fine silver contact areaAll Others Bronze with fine silver contact areaTerminals:30-002 Brass, silver-plated30-601 Bronze, gold-plated over nickelAll Others Bronze, silver-platedNut: Provided only on 30-017; allows buttonheight adjustment. Brass, zinc trivalentchromate-plated.

Materials and Finishes–Series 46Bezel: NylonButton Cap: ABS plasticSwitch Bushing: Brass, zinc trivalentchromate-plated.Base: Thermoset plasticSpring: Tinned music wirePlunger: 46-402/502 Nickel-plated brass

All Others PolycarbonateShorting Bar: Phosphor bronze, silver-platedBase Contacts: Phosphor bronze with silvercontact areaTerminals: Phosphor bronze,tin/silver platingCovers (46-200/201): Brass, zinc trivalentchromate-plated

Just snap intopre-cut panel hole.

Plastic wings lockswitch in place.

PANEL CUTOUTRecommended Panel CutSwitch will fit panels .049" (1,24) to .125" (3,18)thick. Recommended panel thickness is 18gauge.

MOUNTINGEasy Snap-In Mounting

STANDARD OPTIONSEpoxy-sealed terminals and wire leads, seepage E-35.


01 = White 03 = Red 04 = Green05 = Blue 06 = Yellow 07 = Black

46-200-A-03

Use the partial part number you haveselected from the Dimensions and PartNumber chart, and add the button colorsuffix. Example:

Color: 01, 03, 04,05, 06, 07

.005 (0,13) MAXIMUM RADIUS

.750" (19,05)

SQUARE

LEGENDING OPTIONContact GrayhillA button legend can be printed in epoxy inkwhich bonds to the surface of the button cap.Any type style or design which can bephotographed can be used to produce thelegend.

There is a per-button printing charge. A nominalset up charge per legend applies to orders of 1to 99 pieces. Non-standard legends are subjectto one time artwork and tooling charges. ConsultGrayhill for help with actual legend.

Pushbutton50

Push

butto

n S

witc

hes



SERIES 30 and 46Decorator Line

FEATURES• Attractive Front Panel Bezels (6 choices)• Space-Saving: Only 5/8" Diameter

(SPST & SPDT) and 3/4" Diameter (DPDT)Round Bezels

• SPST with Option of Positive Feel• SPDT, DPDT with Momentary Contact or

Alternate Action• Sturdy Metal Sleeve or Bushing and Nut

Provide Secure Mounting• UL Recognized Version

SPDT–Break Before MakeSPST–Normally Open

PartialPart No.Feature

Dim.F

Dim.A

Momentary 46-05-05-502-* .992 (25,20)Alt. Action 46-05-07-502-* 1.278 (32,46)


Dim.A

Momentary 30-05-01-502-* .710 (18,03)Pos. Feel 30-05-04-502-* .910 (23,11)


Dim.A

46-05-05-502-*46-05-07-502-*

30-05-01-502-*30-05-04-502-*

CIRCUITRY


*Partial part number; complete part number by adding a dash for button color: white -01; red -03;green -04; blue -05; yellow -06 or black -07, see Ordering Information.** Contact Grayhill for part number.

Mounting HardwareFor 46-05-08-502 & 46-05-09-502:

One internal tooth lockwasherOne knurled ring nut .765 ± .010 (19,43 ± 0,25) Dia.

.094 ± .010 (2,39 ± 0,25) Thk.For SPST & SPDT switches

One internal tooth lockwasherOne knurled ring nut .640 ± .010 (16,26 ± 0,25) Dia.

.094 ± .010 (2,39 ± 0,25) Thk.

RECOMMENDED PANEL CUTOUT AND MOUNTING HARDWARE

Note: All switches fit panelsup to .250 (6,35) thick, except46-05-08-502 which fitspanels up to .187 (4,75) thick.Front and back panel accessrequired for installation.

.440 (11,17) MIN.ACROSS FLATS

.516 (13,10) MIN. DIA.

.565 (14,35) MIN.ACROSS FLATS

.641 (16,28) MIN. DIA.

SPST AND SPDT VERSION DPDT VERSION

Momentary 46-05-08-502-* 1.001 (25,43) .314 (7,98)Alt. Action 46-05-09-502-* 1.130 (28,70) .355 (9,02)

Terminals are marked on switch. Terminals are marked on switch.

DPDT–Break Before Make46-05-08-502-* (UL)**46-05-09-502-*

NC

NO

C

.430 ± .005(10,92 ± 0,13)ACROSS FLATS

1/2-32 UN-2ATHREAD

B = .375 ± .010 (9,53 ± 0,25) DIA.C = .625 ± .005 (15,88 ± 0,13) DIA.D = .255 ± .032 (6,48 ± 0,81)E = .093 ± .010 (2,36 ± 0,25)F = .355 ± .015 (9,02 ± 0,38)G = .150 ± .010 (3,81 ± 0,25)

DIM A± .015(0,38)

(SEE CHART)

F

D

E

G

.187 ± .015(4,75 ± 0,38)

INSULATINGBARRIER

BC

LABEL*


.555 ± .005(14,10 ± 0,13)ACROSS FLATS

5/8-32 UN-2ATHREAD

INSULATINGBARRIER

B = .375 ± .010 (9,35 ± 0,25) DIA.C = .750 ± .005 (19,05 ± 0,13) DIA.D = .255 ± .032 (6,48 ± 0,81)F = SEE CHART ± .015 (0,38)E = .093 ± .010 (2,36 ± 0,25)G = .150 ± .010 (3,81 ± 0,25)

DIM A± .015(0,38)

(SEE CHART)

F

D

E

G

.187 ± .015(4,75 ± 0,38)

NO

NO C

CNC

NC

B

C

LABEL*


.100 ± .005(2,54 ± 0,13) .430 ± .005

(10,92 ± 0,13)ACROSS FLATS

1/2-32 UN-2ATHREAD

B = .375 ± .010 (9,53 ± 0,25) DIA.C = .625 ± .005 (15,88 ± 0,13) DIA.D = .255 ± .032 (6,48 ± 0,81)E = .093 ± .010 (2,36 ± 0,25)F = .355 ± .015 (9,02 ± 0,38)G = .220 ± .025 (5,59 ± 0,64)

DIM A± .020(0,51)

(SEE CHART)

F

G

D

E

C

B

LABEL*


.186 (4,72) REF.C L C L

SPST N.O. SPDT - BBM

N.C.

N.O.

C.

DPDT BBM

N.C.

N.O.

C1

N.C.

N.O.

C2

Pushbutton51


Push

butto

n S

witc

hes


SERIES 30 and 46Decorator Line

FEATURES• Attractive Front Panel Bezels (6

choices)• Space-Saving: Only 11/16" Square• SPST with Option of Positive Feel• SPDT, DPDT with Momentary

Contact or Alternate Action• Sturdy Metal Sleeve or Bushing and

Nut Provide Secure Mounting

CIRCUITRY

SPST–Normally Open SPDT–Break Before Make DPDT–Break Before Make46-01-05-500-*46-01-07-500-*

46-01-08-500-*46-01-09-500-*

30-01-01-500-*30-01-04-500-*

Momentary 46-01-08-500-*Alt. Action 46-01-09-500-*


Momentary 30-01-01-500-* .880 (22,35)Pos. Feel 30-01-04-500-* 1.037 (26,34)


Dim.A


*Partial part number; complete part number by adding a dash for button color: white -01; red -03;green -04; blue -05; yellow -06 or black -07, see Ordering Information.

Mounting HardwareFor 46-01-08-500 & 46-01-09-500

(See drawing above–mounting hardware shipped loose.)

For SPST & SPDT switchesOne internal tooth lockwasherOne knurled ring nut .640 ± .010 (16,26 ± 0,25) DIA.

.094 ± .010 (2,39 ± 0,25) Thk.

FRONT VIEWS AND MOUNTING

Momentary 46-01-05-500-* 1.174 (29,82)Alt. Action 46-01-07-500-* 1.264 (32,11)


Dim.A

Terminals aremarked on switch.

1/2-32 UN-2ATHREAD

.100 ± .005(2,54 ± 0,13 )

.220 ± .025(5,59 ± 0,64)

DIM. A± .015 (0,38)SEE CHART

.255 ± .032(6,48 ± 0,81)

.093 ± .005(2,36 ± 0,13)

.590 ± .003(14.99 ± 0,08)

SQUARE WILL FIT PANEL.020 (0,51) MIN. TO .125 (3,18) MAX.

LABEL*


Terminals are marked on switch.

WILL FIT PANEL.020 (0,51) MIN. TO .125 (3,18) MAX.

1/2-32 UN-2A THREAD

DIM. A± .015 (0,38)SEE CHART

.255 ± .032(6,48 ± 0,81)

.093 ± .005(2,36 ± 0,13)

.590 ± .003(14.99 ± 0,08)

SQUARE

NC

NOC INSULATING

BARRIER

.150 ± .010(3,81 ± 0,25) .187 ± .015

(4,75 ±, 0,38)

LABEL*


.150 ± .010(3,81± 0,25)

1.194 ± .031(30,33 ± 0,79)

.281 ± .032(7,14 ± 0,81)

.093 ± .010(2,36 ± 0,25)

.605 (15,37)SQUARE MAX.

INSULATING BARRIER

WILL FIT PANEL.010 (0,25) MIN.TO .218 (5,54) MAX.

NC

NO

C

C

NC

NO

MOUNTING SLEEVE

.187 ± .015(4,75 ± 0,38)

E.I.A. DATE CODE LABEL

SPST N.O. SPDT - BBM

N.C.

N.O.

C.

DPDT BBM

N.C.

N.O.

C1

N.C.

N.O.

C2

.485 ± .010(12,32 ± 0,25)

.687 (17,45)MAX.

.610 ± .004 (15,49 ± 0,02) Sq.

.610 ± .004 (15,49 ± 0,02)

Wide Slot.031 (0,79)MAX. RADIUS

SINGLE STACKED

RECOMMENDED PANEL CUTOUT FOR SQUARE BEZEL SWITCHES

Note: All switches fit panels up to .250 (6,35) thick.Front and back panel access required for installation.

Pushbutton52

Push

butto

n S

witc

hes



Contacts Butt type Wiping type

Rating at 115 Vac Res. 1 Amp 0.25 Amp

Rating at 220 Vac Res. 0.5 Amp 0.125 Amp

Circuitry SPST–N.O. (Standard); SPDT, DPDTSPST–N.O. (w/Overtravel), Break Before MakeSPST–N.O. (w/Positive Feel)

Life Expectancy SPST–N.O. (Standard): 250,0001,000,000 operations operationsSPST–N.O. (w/Positive Feel):200,000 operations;SPST–N.O. (w/Overtravel):500,000 operations

Contact Resistance 25 milliohms or less on a new switch

Voltage Breakdown 1000 Vac between mutually insulated parts

Insulation Resistance 1000 megohms minimum

Operating Temperature -40°C to +85°C

RATINGS Electrical Ratings Series 46Series 30

SPECIFICATIONSMaterial and FinishesLockwasher (Round Bezel): Steel, zinc trivalentchromate-platedBehind Panel Plate (Square Bezel): Steel,zinc trivalent chromate-platedMounting Sleeve and Screws (46-01-08-500,46-01-09-500 only): Steel, zinc trivalentchromate-plated. Base: Phenolic per MIL-M-14, Type CFGSquare Bezel: ABS (SPST, SPDT), thermosetplastic (DPDT)Mounting Nut, Bushing, and Round Bezel:Brass, tin zincButton Cap: ABS (UL version is PPS)Shorting Bar: Series 30–Fine silver contactareaSeries 46–Phosphor bronze, silver-platedTerminals: Series 30–Fine silver contact areawith silver-plated terminal endsSeries 46–Silver contact surface with tin/silverclad terminal endsSpring: Tinned music wirePlunger: Polyphenylene sulfide (PPS) for 30-01-01-500-X and 46-01-05-500-X. Nickel-platedbrass for 46-01-07-500-X, 46-05-07-502-X, 46-01-09-500-X and 46-05-09-502-X. Zinc trivalentchromate-plated brass for 46-01-08-500-X.Polycarbonate for all others.Operating Temperature: -40°C to +85°C

LEGENDSAll button caps can be printed in epoxy ink. Anytype style or design can be used to produce thelegend. If News Gothic Condensed style isused, limits can be approximated from the chartbelow; actual limits depend on specific legend.

Grayhill TypeIdentification

No.

Round ButtonCharacter and Line

Limitation

4GH088

1GH125

3GH187

2GH250

15

OFF

TAB

N/A

3 Char.1 Line

3 Char.1 Line

2 Char.1 Line

N/A

Square ButtonCharacter and Line

Limitation

TABLOCATE

INDEX

OFF

15

6 Char.2 Lines

5 Char.1 Lines

3 Char.1 Line

2 Char.1 Line

Sample Styleand Sizes

ABCDEFGHIJ

ABCDEFGHIJ

ABCDEF

ABCD

CharacterHeight(Typ.)

.083(2,1)

.138(3,5)

.207(5,3)

.276(7,0)

There is a per-button impression charge. Anominal set up charge per legend applies toorders of 1 to 99 pieces. (Non-standard legendsare subject to a one time tooling charge. ContactGrayhill for more specifics.)

.080 ± .015(2,03 ± 0,38)

Positive Feel & .156 ± .015Overtravel (3,96 ± 0,38)

46-01-05-500-* 46-05-05-502-* SPDT Momentary .180 min. (4,57) 1.1 ± .25 Lbs. —— ——.210 ± .015(5,33 ± 0,38)

46-01-08-500-* 46-05-08-502-* DPDT Momentary .180 min. (4,57) 1.6 ± .5 Lbs. —— ——.210 ± .015(5,33 ± 0,38)

ORDERING INFORMATION & OPERATING FEATURES

ButtContact

SquareBezel

RoundBezel

Circuitry Feature TotalTravel

OvertravelActuatingForce

BottomingForce

*Partial part number; complete the part number by adding a dash for button color:white –01; red –03; green –04; blue –05; yellow –06 or black –07.

30-01-01-500-* 30-05-01-502-* SPST–N.O. Momentary —— 10 ± 4 oz. ——

46-01-09-500-* 46-05-09-502-* DPDT Alternate Action 1.8 ± .5 Lbs. —— ——

WipingContact

46-01-07-500-* 46-05-07-502-* SPDT Alternate Action 1.5 ± .25 Lbs. —— ——


STANDARD OPTIONSEpoxy-sealed terminals and wire leads, seepage E-35.

30-01-04-500-* 30-05-04-502-* SPST–N.O. —— 18 ± 4 oz. .046 Min.

ALTERNATE ACTION (PUSH-PUSH)OPERATING SEQUENCEPart Number* 46-05-07-502, 46-05-09-502,

46-01-07-500, 46-01-09-500Alternate action (Push-Push) switches providea maintained actuated position until the buttonis pushed again to release.

LOCK DOWNPOSITIONC. & N.O.

SHORTEDN.C. OPEN

UP POSITIONC. & N.C.

SHORTEDN.O. OPEN

PUSH TOACTUATE

13/64 (5,16) Approx. 3/32 (2,38)

Approx.

Pushbutton53


Push

butto

n S

witc

hes

Wiping Contact Pushbutton Switches

Single Pole/Double Throw

46-101* (BBM)46-110* (MBB)


46-102* (BBM)46-111* (MBB)

Double Pole/Double Throw

46-200* (BBM)46-201* (MBB)

SERIES 46SPST and DPDT, 1/4 Amp

FEATURES• Long Wipe Contact Assures

High Reliability• 250,000 Cycles of Operation

CIRCUITRY

46-101 RED Red46-101 BLK Black46-102 RED Red46-102 BLK Black46-110 RED Red46-110 BLK Black46-111 RED Red46-111 BLK Black

Operationsat Rated

Load

1/4 Amp 1/8 Amp 250,000

TotalTravel

*CompletePart

Number

Buttonor CapColor

Rating at220 Vac

Resistive

Rating at115 Vac

Resistive

Mtg.Hole

BottomingForce (oz.)Action

Momentary 17 ± 5


Operationsat Rated

Load

Rating at220 Vac

Resistive

CapColor

1/4 Amp 1/8 Amp 250,000

Rating at115 Vac

Resistive

Action

*CompletePart

Number

Momentary 35 ± 9

BottomingForce (oz.)

TotalTravel

Mtg.Hole

.180 (4,57) 17/64"Min. (6,75)

.180 (4,57) 17/64"Min. (6,75)

.375 ± .010(9,53 ± 0,25) DIA.

HEX MOUNTING NUT.375 (9,53) ACROSS FLATS

.109 (2,77) THICK

1,56(39,6)REF.

SNAP ONBUTTON CAP


A = .250 ± .005 (6,35 ± 0,13)B = .734 (18,64) REF.C = .187 ± .010

(4,75 ± 0,38)

.625 ± .015(15,88 ± 0,38)

.187 ± .015(4,75 ± 0,38)

B

A

.391(9,93)REF.

NONC

NOC

NCC

C

.453 ± .015(11,51 ± 0,38)

LABEL*


.125 ±.005(3,18 ± 0,13) DIA.


HEX MOUNTING NUT.375 (9,53) ACROSS FLATS

.109 (2,77) THICK

.437 ± .010(11,10 ± 0,25) DIA.

.187 ± .015(4.75 ± 0,38)

.703(17,86)MAX.

1.327(33,7)REF.

A

.187 ± .010(4,75 ± 0,25)

A = .250 ± .005 (6,35 ± 0,13)

NC NO

C

LABEL*


.375 ± .010(9,53 ± 0,25)DIA.

.187± .010(4,75

± 0,25)

.391(9,93)REF.

SNAP ONBUTTON CAP

LABEL**PART NUMBER AND E.I.A. DATE CODE LABEL

SPDT - BBM

N.C.

N.O.

C.

N.O.

N.C.

C.SPDT MBB

DPDT BBM

N.C.

N.O.

C1

N.C.

N.O.

C2

DPDT MBB

N.O.

N.C.

C.

N.O.

N.C.

C.

Pushbutton54

Push

butto

n S

witc

hes



SERIES 46SPST and DPDT, 1/4 Amp

FEATURES• Bushing and Button Seal• Environmentally Sealed

CIRCUITRY

SPDT - BBM

N.C.

N.O.

C.

N.O.

N.C.

C.SPDT MBB

DPDT BBM

N.C.

N.O.

C1

N.C.

N.O.

C2

DPDT MBB

N.O.

N.C.

C.

N.O.

N.C.

C.

Sealed Bushing and ButtonDouble Pole/Double Throw

46-270* (BBM)46-271* (MBB)

Sealed Bushing and ButtonSingle Pole/Double Throw

46-150* (BBM)46-151* (MBB)


Momentary 48 ± 4

Mtg.Hole


TotalTravel


Operationsat Rated

Load

Rating at220 Vac

Resistive

CapColor

Rating at115 Vac

Resistive

Action

*CompletePart

Number

Mtg.Hole


TotalTravel


Operationsat Rated

Load

Rating at220 Vac

Resistive

CapColor

Rating at115 Vac

Resistive

*CompletePart

Number

Action

Momentary 24 ± 4

1/4 Amp 1/8 Amp 100,000 1/4 Amp 1/8 Amp 100,000

.180 (4,57) 17/64"Min. (6,75)

.180 (4,57) 17/64"Min. (6,75)



.450 (11,43) MAX.ACROSS FLATS OF HEX.505 (12,83) REF. ACROSS CORNERS

.187 ± .015(4,75 ± 0,38)

B

1.62(41,15)REF.

A = .250 ± .005 (6,35 ± 0,13)B = .770 ± .015 (19,56 ± 0,38)C = .187 ± .010 (4,75 ± 0,25)

.375 ± .010(9,53 ± 0,25) DIA.

.391(9,93)REF.

SNAP ONBUTTON CAP

A

C

O

O = O RING

LABEL*




.580 (14,73) MAX. ACROSSFLATS OF HEX.650 (16,51) REF. ACROSSCORNERS

.187 ± .015(4,75 ± 0,38)

B

1.62(41,15)REF.

A = .250 ± .005 (6,35 ± 0,13)B = .770 ± .015 (19,56 ± 0,38)C = .187 ± .010 (4,75 ± 0,25)

.375 ± .010(9,53 ± 0,25) DIA.

.391(9,93)REF.

SNAP ONBUTTON CAP

A O

C

O = O RING

LABEL*


Terminals aremarked as shownin bottom view ofDPDT switch onprevious page.

Terminals aremarked as shownin bottom view ofSPDT switch onprevious page.

Pushbutton55


Push

butto

n S

witc

hes



ACCESSORYCIRCUITRY

46-260* (BBM)

Environmentally SealedDouble Pole/Double Throw

Mtg.Hole


TotalTravel


Operationsat Rated

Load

Rating at220 Vac

Resistive

CapColor

Momentary Approx. 45

1/4 Amp 1/8 Amp 250,000

Action

Description Part No.

SPDT, BBM, Red Button 46-101 REDSPDT, BBM, Black Button 46-101 BLKSPDT, BBM, Red Cap 46-102 REDSPDT, BBM, Black Cap 46-102 BLKSPDT, MBB, Red Button 46-110 REDSPDT, MBB, Black Button 46-110 BLKSPDT, MBB, Red Cap 46-111 REDSPDT, MBB, Black Cap 46-111 BLKSPDT, BBM, Red Cap 46-150 REDSPDT, BBM, Black Cap 46-150 BLKSPDT, MBB, Red Cap 46-151 REDSPDT, MBB, Black Cap 46-151 BLKDPDT, BBM, Red Cap 46-200 REDDPDT, BBM, Black Cap 46-200 BLKDPDT, MBB, Red Cap 46-201 REDDPDT, MBB, Black Cap 46-201 BLKDPDT, BBM, Red Cap 46-270 REDDPDT, BBM, Black Cap 46-270 BLKDPDT, MBB, Red Cap 46-271 REDDPDT, MBB, Black Cap 46-271 BLKDPDT, BBM, Sealed, Red 46-260 REDDPDT, BBM, Sealed, Black 46-260 BLK

ACCESSORY

Decorative Nut 30C1023-1

Rating at115 Vac

Resistive

Decorative Mounting NutPart No. 30C1023-1Fits .250" (6,35) BushingFor dimensions, materials andfinishes, see page E-36.

.180 (4,57) 25/64"Min. (9,92)

*CompletePart

Number

SPECIFICATIONSRating CriteriaContact Resistance: Less than 25 milliohmsat the switch initially. Less than 4 milliohms/inchof wire.Voltage Breakdown: 1,000 Vac betweenmutually insulated partsInsulation Resistance: 1,000 megohmsminimum

Materials and FinishesCover, Bushing, Mounting Nut: Brass,tin zincShorting Bar: Phosphor bronze, silver-plated.Terminals: Phosphor bronze, silver contactsurface. Terminal ends are tin/silverBase or Potting Shell: Phenolic per MlL-M-14, type CFGSpring: Tinned music wireButton Cap: PolyethyleneButton: Polyphenylene sulfide (PPS) for 46-200 and 46-201. Polycarbonate for all otherunsealed versions. Aluminum for all sealedversions.

O-Ring Seal: Nitrile per MIL-P-5516, class BSeal Adapter and Hex Nut (46-260): Brass,zinc trivalent chromate-platedWire Leads (46-260): Per MIL-W-16878 type E.#26 AWG, insulated teflon, copper strandedwire

Operating FeaturesBreak-Before-Make: Rest position to N.C. break.020" (0,51) minimum. Rest position to N.O.Make .140" (3,35) maximum.Make-Before-Break: Rest position to N.O. make.065" ± .015 (1,65 ± 0,38). Rest position to N.C.break .130" ± .015 (3,30 ± 0,38).Operating Temperature: -40°C to +85°C

STANDARD OPTIONSEpoxy sealed terminals and wire leads, seepage E-34 and E-35.

Decorative mountings, see pages E-24 to E-26.Available from your local Grayhill Distributor.For prices and discounts, contact a local SalesOffice, an authorized local Distributor or Grayhill.


.281 ± .010 (7,14 ± 0,25)

.390 ± .010(9,90 ± 0,25) .641 ± .005

(16,28 ± 0,13)

.812 ± .005 (20,62 ± 0,13)

DIAMETER

.375 ± .010 (9,53 ± 0,25) DIA.

SNAP ON BUTTON CAP

RO

YBR

GBL

A

B

.250 ± .010(6,35 ± 0,25)

3/8-32 UNEF-2ATHREAD TO .060 (15,24) MAX.FROM SHOULDER

O-RING SEALED


SWITCH ANDWIRE LEADSENCAPSULATED

A = 1.14 (29,0) MAX.B = 22.00 (558,8) MAX.C = .187 ± .010 (4,75 ± 0,25)D = .125 ± .005 (3,18 ± 0,13)

C

D

DPDT BBM

N.C.

N.O.

C1

N.C.

N.O.

C2

Pushbutton56

Push

butto

n S

witc

hes



SERIES 23SPST, 1/4 Amp

FEATURES• Momentary Contact• 100,000 Cycles of Operation

Normally Open–SPST

23-123-4

DIMENSIONS In Inches (and millimeters) CIRCUITRY

ACCESSORY

Decorative Mounting NutPart No. 23C1024

Terminals: Brass, silver-plated.Spring: Tinned music wireShorting Bar: Phosphor bronze, silver-plated.Operating Temperature: -40° to +85°C

Operating FeaturesTotal Button Travel: .095 ± .010 (2,41 ± 0,25)Overtravel: .005 (0,13) minimumActuating Force: 16 ± 4 ouncesMounting Hole: 21/64" (8,33)

Available From Your Local Grayhill Distributor.For prices and discounts, contact a local SalesOffice, an authorized local Distributor or Grayhill.

SPECIFICATIONSRating CriteriaRated: To-Make-and-Break: 1/4 Amp at 115Vac, or 1/8 Amp at 220 Vac resistive.Contact Resistance: 25 milliohms maximumon a new switch.Voltage Breakdown: 1,000 Vac betweenmutually insulated parts.Insulation Resistance: 1,000 megohmsminimum.

Materials and FinishesMounting Nut and Cover Bushing: Brass, tinzincBase: Phenolic per MIL-M-14, Type CFG.Button: Polycarbonate

Description & Button Color Part No.

SPST, N.O., Red 23-1SPST, N.O., Black 23-4Accessory Nut 23C1024-1


C

.187 ± .005 (4,75 ± 0,13)DIA.

A

1.059(26,90)REF.


.468± .010

(11,89 ± 0,25) DIA.

D

B

A = .146 ± .015 (3,71 ± 0,38)B = .250 ± .010 (6,35 ± 0,25)C = .476 ±.015 (12,09 ± 0,38)D = .187 ± .015 (4,75 ± 0,38)

LABEL*


SPST N.O.

Pushbutton57


Push

butto

n S

witc

hes


SERIES 10SERIES 4000SPST, 1 and 3 Amp

FEATURES• Momentary or

Momentary With Positive Feel• UL Recognized at 3 Amps

4001(UL)10-09 (UL)10-1004002 (UL)10-10 (UL)10-101



DecorativeMounting NutPart No. 07C1040-1

Button GuardPart No. 10C1015-1

Oper. at Rating at Rating atRated 115 Vac 220 Vac Actuating

Action Part No. Circuitry Load Resistive Resistive Force

Momentary 4001 SPST-N.O. 100,000 1 Amp 1/2 Amp 22 oz. ± 810-09

Momentary 4002 SPST-N.C. 100,000 1 Amp 1/2 Amp 23 oz. ± 710-10

Pos. Feel 10-100 SPST-N.O. 100,000 1 Amp 1/2 Amp 35 oz. ± 8Pos. Feel 10-101 SPST-N.C. 100,000 1 Amp 1/2 Amp 35 oz. ± 10

Underwriters Laboratory Recognized

Momentary 4001 UL SPST-N.O. 6,000 3 Amp —– 22 oz. ± 810-09 UL

Momentary 4002 UL SPST-N.C. 6,000 3 Amp —– 23 oz. ± 710-10 UL

CIRCUITRY

ACCESSORIES

Description & Button Color Part No.

SPST, N.O., Red 4001SPST, N.O., Black 10-09SPST, N.O., UL, Red 4001ULSPST, N.O., UL, Black 10-09 ULSPST, N.O., Positive Feel, Red 10-100SPST, N.C., Positive Feel, Black 10-101SPST, N.C., Red 10-10SPST, N.C., Black 4002SPST, N.C., UL, Red 10-10 ULSPST, N.C., UL Black 4002 ULAccessory Nut 07C1040-1Accessory Button Guard 10C1015-1

ORDERING INFORMATIONSPECIFICATIONSRating CriteriaRated: See chart aboveContact Resistance: 25 milliohms or less on anew switchVoltage Breakdown: 1,000 Vac betweenmutually insulated partsInsulation Resistance: 1,000 megohmsminimum

Additional CharacteristicsTotal Travel: Normally open .140 ± .032 (3,56± 0,81). Normally closed .110 + .010/ - .020(2,79 + 0,25/ - 0,51).Overtravel: Normally open .020 (0,51) minimumPretravel: Normally closed .010 (0,25) minimumOperating Temperature: -40°C to +85°CUL Recognition: See chart above for rating. ULfile number is 35289.

Materials and FinishesMounting Nut: Brass, tin zincMounting Bushing and Cover: Zinc, zinctrivalent chromate-platedButton and Base: Thermoset plasticShorting Bar: Brass, silver-platedSpring: Tinned music wireContact Terminals: Berylium copper, silver-plated .0003" to .0005"

STANDARD OPTIONSEpoxy sealed terminals are not available throughdistributors.

For terminals bent at 90°, contact Grayhill.

D

.312 + .000 – .012(7,92 – 0,30) DIA.

B

A

15/32-32 UNS-2A THREAD

HEX MOUNTING NUT.094 (2,39) THICK.563 (14,30) ACROSS FLATS

.800 ± .015(20,32 ± 0,38)

DIA.

E

C

A = N.O. 1.500 (38,1) REF.

B = N.O. .160 ± .015 (4,06 ± 0,38)

C = .375 ± .010 (9,53 ± 0,25)D = .668 ± .015 (16,97 ± 0,38)E = .297 ±.020 (7,54 ± 0,51)

N.C. .150 ± .015 (3,81 ± 0,38)

N.C. 1.490 (37,8) REF. LABEL*


Dimension across bushing flatsis .406 ± .010 (10,31 ± 0,25).

The inside distance between terminalsis .359 (9,12) at the switch base.

SPST N.O.

SPST N.C.

Pushbutton58

Push

butto

n S

witc

hes



N.C.

C.N.O.

A

B

C

D

.312 ± .005(7,92 ± 0,13)

KEYWAY.068 (1,72) WIDE

15/32-32 UNS-2ATHREAD

HEX MOUNTINGNUTS (2).094 ± .010(2,39 ± 0,25) THICK.562 ± .010(14,27 ± 0,25)ACROSS FLATS

.95 (24,13) MAX. OVER PIN HEADS

.880 ± .010 DIA.(22,35 ± 0,25)

1.966(49,94) REF.

A = .273 ±.020 (6,93 ± 0,51)B = .454 ± .015 (11,53 ± 0,38)C = .796 ± .015 (20,22 ± 0,38)D = .443 ± .015 (11,25 ± 0,38)

LABEL*



SPDT Solder Lug Terminal07-26*

SPST–Faston Terminals07-2107-22

All dimensionsnot shown aresame aspart no. 7-26.

All dimensionsnot shown aresame aspart no. 7-26.

CIRCUITRY

SERIES 07SERIES 2000SPST and SPDT, 10 Amp

FEATURES• Momentary Contact• Extremely Fast Make-and-Break• Audible Click

SPECIFICATIONSRating CriteriaRated: To make and break 10 Amps at 115 Vac,or 5 Amps at 220 Vac resistive load for 25,000operationsContact Resistance: 25 milliohms or less on anew switchVoltage Breakdown: 1,000 Vac betweenmutually insulated partsInsulation Resistance: 1,000 megohmsminimum

Operating FeaturesTotal Button Travel: .065 (1,65) approximatelyOvertravel: .008 (0,20) approximatelyActuating Force: 24 ounces approximatelyMounting Hole: 31/64" (12,30) inchesTerminal Type: Solder Lug/FastonOperating Temperature: -40°C to +85°C


Materials and FinishesHousing, Button and Internal Bridge:Thermoset plasticMounting Nuts, Bushings, and InternalBracket: Brass, tin zincFixed and Moving Contacts: Fine silverInternal Spring, Link and Contact Carrier:Beryllium, copperCover-to-Base Mounting Pins: BrassFaston Terminals: Brass, tin over nickelSolder Lug Terminals: Brass,zinc trivalent chromate-plated

2201220207-707-8

SPST–Solder Lug Terminals

.380 ± .015(9,65 ± 0,38)

1.903(48,34) REF.

LABEL*


.387 ± .015(9,83 ± 0,38)

1.910(48,51) REF.

TERMINALS TO ACCOMMODATE1/4 INCH PUSH-ON TERMINATION

LABEL*


SPST N.O. SPST N.C.SPDT - BBM

N.C.

N.O.

C.

ACCESSORIES

Button CapPart No. 07Z1047

Button GuardPart No. 10C1015-1

DecorativeMounting Nut

Part No. 07C1040-1

ORDERING INFORMATION *Part Description Number Circuitry Button Terminal

2201 SPST–N.O. Red Solder07-7 SPST–N.O. Black Solder07-21 SPST–N.O. Red Faston2202 SPST–N.C. Black Solder07-8 SPST–N.C. Red Solder07-22 SPST–N.C. Black Faston07-26 RED SPDT–BBM Red Solder07-26 BLK SPDT–BBM Black Solder

Part AccessoryNumber Description

07Z1047-1 BLK Black Button Cap07Z1047-2 RED Red Button Cap07C1040-1 Decorative Nut10C1015-1 Button Guard

• 25,000 Cycles ofOperation

Pushbutton59


Push

butto

n S

witc

hes

Pushbutton Options and Accessories

SEALED TERMINAL ANDWIRE LEAD OPTIONSOPTION -E AND -EW

FEATURES• 1/4, 1/2, and 1 Amp• Limit, Overtravel, or Panel Seal• Butt or Wiping Contact• Normally Open or Normally Closed• Momentary or Push/Pull• Series 23, 30, 39 and 46

SPECIFICATIONSRating CriteriaMake and Break Current Rating: See pagefor standard part numberContact Resistance: 25 milliohms maximumon a new switch. Less than 4 milliohms per inchof wire for wire lead option styles.Insulation Resistance: 1,000 megohmsminimum between mutually insulated partsVoltage Breakdown: 1,000 Vac minimumbetween mutually insulated parts

Materials and FinishesPotting Sleeve (Series 39): Thermoset PlasticWire Leads: #26AWG, (.99mm diameter)insulated Teflon, Copper stranded wire, perMlL-W-16878,Type E. Ends are stripped0.250" (6.35) and solder dipped. For otherspecifications, see Page References.

Option -EEpoxy-SealedTerminals

Option -EW,Potted Base & 6"Wire Leads

StandardPart NumberRed Button

StandardPart NumberBlack Button

-EW StyleBody

Length Behind PanelIn inches (and millimeters)

*Epoxy potting sleeve enlarges the diameter of the -EW style to 0.300 (7,62).**Sealed terminal (-E) option is not necessary; terminals have sealed construction.***Natural Color Button†Adjustable from 1.214 (30,84) to 1.334 (33,88) dependent on button height, see switch pages.

Choicesof

SuffixStandard Switch

& Terminals

23-1 23-4 -E 0.665 (16,89) ––––30-1 30-3 -E, -EW 0.592 (15,04) 0.645 (16,38)30-15 30-37 -E, -EW 0.679 (17,25) 0.728 (18,49)30-17 RED 30-17 BLK -E, -EW 0.958 (24,33) 1.007 (25,58)30-16 RED 30-16 BLK -E, -EW 0.958 (24,33) 1.007 (25,58)30-251 RED 30-251 BLK -E, -EW 0.632 (16,05) 0.685 (17,40)30-252 RED 30-252 BLK -E, -EW 0.645 (16,38) 0.700 (17,78)30-32 RED 30-32 BLK -E, -EW 0.867 (22,02) 0.896 (22,76)30-6 30-2 -E, -EW 0.605 (15,37) 0.640 (16,26)30-601 RED 30-601 BLK -E, -EW 0.592 (15,04) 0.645 (16,38)39-1* 39-3* -EW** 0.315 (8,00) 0.440 (11,18)–––– 39-2 -E,- EW 0.490 (12,45) 0.575 (14,61)39-12* 39-24* -EW** 0.455 (11,56) 0.575 (14,61)39-101 –––– -EW** 0.650 (16,51) 0.775 (19,69)39-351 RED 39-351 BLK -EW** 0.350 (8,89) 0.450 (11,43)39-352 RED* 39-352 BLK* -E, -EW 0.529 (13,44) 0.630 (16,00)39-601 RED 39-601 BLK -EW* 0.315 (8,00) 0.440 (11,18)39-701*** –––– -EW** 0.800 (20,32) 0.925 (23,50)39-702*** –––– -E, -EW 0.510 (12,95) 0.750 (19,05)46-101 RED 46-101 BLK -E, -EW 0.890 (22,61) 0.957 (24,31)46-102 RED 46-102 BLK -E, -EW 0.890 (22,61) 0.957 (24,31)46-110 RED 46-110 BLK -E, -EW 0.890 (22,61) 0.957 (24,31)46-111 RED 46-111 BLK -E, -EW 0.890 (22,61) 0.957 (24,31)46-150 RED 46-150 BLK -E, -EW 0.957 (24,31) 1.024 (26,01)46-151 RED 46-151 BLK -E, -EW 0.957 (24,31) 1.024 (26,01)46-200 RED 46-200 BLK -E 0.921 (23,39) ––––46-201 RED 46-201 BLK -E 0.921 (23,39) ––––46-270 RED 46-270 BLK -E 0.957 (24,31) ––––46-271 RED 46-271 BLK -E 0.957 (24,31) ––––

Pushbutton60

Push

butto

n S

witc

hes



ORDERING INFORMATIONUse the Selector Charts at the beginning of thesection to select a series. Use the pages listedthere or referenced here to select a switch.

To order epoxy sealed terminals, add the suffix -E to the selected part number as allowed in thechart. Example: 30-1-E.

To order the epoxy-potted version with 6-inchwire leads, use the suffix -EW as allowed in thechart. Example: 39-1-EW

Available From Your Local GrayhillDistributors. For prices and discounts, contacta local Sales Office, an authorized localDistributor or Grayhill.


-EW StyleBody

Length Behind PanelIn inches (and millimeters)

*Epoxy potting sleeve enlarges the diameter of the -EW style to 0.300 (7,62).**Sealed terminal (-E) option is not necessary; terminals have sealed construction.***Natural Color Button†Adjustable from 1.214 (30,84) to 1.334 (33,88) dependent on button height, see switch pages.

Standard Switch& Terminals

Choicesof

Options

StandardPart Number

Choice ofButton Color

(see switch pages)

Standard Part NumberWithout OptionsChoice of Button

Color(see switch pages)

–––– 30-001-A-XX -E, -EW 1.119 (28,42) 1.172 (29,77)–––– 30-002-A-XX -E, -EW 1.132 (28,75) 1.167 (29,64)–––– 30-015-A-XX -E, -EW 1.204 (30,58) 1.253 (31,83)–––– 30-017-A-XX -E, -EW Adjustable† Adjustable†

30-01-01-500-XX 30-1-1-50-XX -E, -EW 1.100 (27,94) 1.153 (29,29)30-01-04-500-XX 30-1-4-50-XX -E, -EW 1.257 (31,93) 1.310 (33,27)30-05-01-502-XX 30-5-1-52-XX -E, -EW 0.930 (23,62) 0.983 (24,97)30-05-04-502-XX 30-5-4-52-XX -E, -EW 1.130 (28,70) 1.183 (30,05)

–––– 30-601-A-XX -E, -EW 1.119 (28,42) 1.172 (29,77)46-01-05-500-XX 46-1-5-50-XX -E, -EW 1.361 (34,57) 1.428 (36,27)46-01-07-500-XX 46-1-7-50-XX -E, -EW 1.451 (36,86) 1.518 (38,56)46-01-08-500-XX 46-1-8-50-XX -E 1.381 (35,08) ––––46-01-09-500-XX 46-1-9-50-XX -E 1.381 (35,08) ––––46-05-05-502-XX 46-5-5-52-XX -E, -EW 1.179 (29,95) 1.246 (31,65)46-05-07-502-XX 46-5-7-52-XX -E, -EW 1.465 (37,21) 1.532 (38,91)46-05-08-502-XX 46-5-8-52-XX -E 1.188 (30,18) ––––46-05-09-502-XX 46-5-9-52-XX -E 1.317 (33,45) ––––

–––– 46-102-A-XX -E, -EW 1.417 (35,99) 1.484 (37,69)–––– 46-111-A-XX -E, -EW 1.417 (35,99) 1.484 (37,69)–––– 46-200-A-XX -E 1.448 (36,78) –––––––– 46-201-A-XX -E 1.448 (36,78) ––––

SPDTWIPING CONTACTS

N.C.(YELLOW)

N.O.(GREEN)

C1(RED)

Pushbutton61


Push

butto

n S

witc

hes


Decorative Mounting Nuts

30C1023-1

Brass, nickel-platedfor 1/4" (6,35)bushing.

Thermosetting plastic (Fasten tobutton with cyanoacrylateadhesive) black, red or white.

For use with all Series 30 and 39switches except part number39-101. See switch pages.

30B1012 07Z1047

Brass, nickel-platedfor 5/16" (7,93)bushing.

23C1024-1 07C1040-1

Brass, nickel-plated for15/32" (11,9) bushing.

10C1015-1

Brass, zinc trivalentchromate-plated for 15/32" (11,9) bushing.

Thermoplastic, black or redcolor.

For use with Series 2000 andSeries 7 switches. See switchpages.

Button Caps and Guard

DecorativeMounting Nuts

ButtonCaps

ButtonGuard

Pendant Housing


Remote Switching AccessoriesPendant Housing and Caps

Housing

Material: ThermoplasticSpecials: other colors available onspecial order.

Application:All grayhill pushbutton switches with 15/32-32 bushings: catalog numbers 2201,2202, 07-7, 07-8, 07-21, 07-22, 07-26, 4001, 4002, 10-9, 10-10, 10-100, 10-101,30-16, 30-17 and 30-32. any other switch with 15/32-32 bushing if it fits housing.

Recessed Cap07Z495007Z5051



07Z4950 RED Red Flat Cap & Housing07Z4950 BLK Black Flat Cap & Housing07Z5051 RED Red Rcssd Cap & Housing07Z5051 BLK Black Rcssd Cap & Housing

Sold only as sets of one housing and one cap.

Pendant Housing and Caps Part

Number Color

07C1040-1 Decorative Nut23C1024 Decorative Nut30C1023-1 Decorative Nut07Z1047-1 BLK Black Button Cap07Z1047-2 RED Red Button Cap10C1015-1 Button Guard30B1012-5 Red Cap30B1012-8 White Cap30B1012-9 Black Cap

ORDERING INFORMATION:Mounting Nuts, Button Caps, and Guards

.44 (11,2)ACROSSFLATS

.46(11,7)DIA.

.09 (2,3)


.52(13,2)DIA.

.09 (2,3)

.77(19,6)DIA.


.12 (3,1)

.34 (8,6)

1.00(25,4)DIA.

.19 (4,8)

.25 (6,4)DIA.

.09 (2,3)

.89 (22,6)DIA.

.41 (10,4)

.89 (22,6)

.33 (8,4)REF.

1.19 (30,2)

.48 (12,2)

.08 (2,0)

ACCESSORIESFor Pushbutton Switches

2.45 (62,23)

.42 (10,67)1.03

(26,16)

1.19 (30,2)

.27 (6,86) DIA.

.89 (22,6)

.48 (12,2)

1.04(26,4)

1.19 (30,2)

.08 (2,03).25 (6,4)

.59 (15,0)

Flat Cap

Pushbutton62


Ro

cke

r

an

d

Pa

dd

le

Sw

itc

he

s

PICTURE

G-1

DIP

S

wit

ch

es


R

oc

ke

r

an

d

Pa

dd

le

Sw

itc

he

s

Slid

e D

IP S

wit

ch

es

PageROCKER AND PADDLE SWITCHES

Miniature .............................................................. Series 47A ...................... 3Sealed Miniature ................................................. Series 47B ...................... 9Sub-Miniature ...................................................... Series 47C .................... 15Sealed Sub-Miniature ......................................... Series 47D .................... 18

ROCKER SWITCHES• Save Space and Weight• SPDT, DPDT, 3PDT, and

4DPT Circuitry• Choice of Actuators, Bushings

and Terminations• PC and Panel Mount Versions

Contents: Rocker Switches

Typical Applications:• Computers and Peripherals• Instrumentation• Medical Equipment• Telecommunications• Test and Measurement Equipment

Rocker1


Ro

cke

r

an

d

Pa

dd

le

Sw

itc

he

s

Series 47A 47B 47C 47D

Page Number 2 9 15 18

Size Miniature Miniature Sub-Miniature Sub-Miniature

Circuitry SPDT, DPDT, 3PDT, 4PDT SPDT, DPDT, 3PDT SPDT, DPDT SPDT, DPDT

Max Contact Rating 5A 5A 3A 3A

Process Sealed Yes Yes

Mounting Options

PC Vertical Yes Yes Yes Yes

PC Vertical w/ Support Bracket Yes Yes Yes Yes

PC Right Angle Yes Yes Yes Yes

PC Right Angle Vertical Yes Yes Yes Yes

Panel Yes Yes Yes

Termination Options

Solder Lug Yes Yes Yes

PC Mount Yes Yes Yes Yes

PC Mount, Quick Connect Yes Yes

Selection Chart

ROCKER AND PADDLE SWITCHES

Rocker2

DIP

S

wit

ch

es


R

oc

ke

r

an

d

Pa

dd

le

Sw

itc

he

s

Slid

e D

IP S

wit

ch

es

OPEN2-3

SP2

SP3

SP4

SP5

SP1NONEON

(ON)

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON NONE

2-1

(ON)

(ON)

(ON)

ON

ON

TERM. COMM.

OPEN2-3,5-6

DP2

DP3

DP4

DP5

DP1NONEON

(ON)

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON NONE

2-1,5-4

(ON)

(ON)

(ON)

ON

ON

TERM. COMM.



02COMM.

1 3

05COMM.

4 6

SCHEMATIC

SCHEMATIC

SCHEMATIC

02COMM.

1 3

()=MOMENTARY

()=MOMENTARY

3

2

1

32

1

3

2

1

32

1

4

5

6

.147(3.70)

.020(0.50)

.376(9.56)

1.156(29.36)

.937(23.80)

.275(6.99)

Ø.094(Ø2.39)

.155(3.96)

.185(4.70)

.030(0.76)

25˚.500(12.70)

.270(6.86)

.080(2.03)

Ø.094(Ø2.39)

25˚1.156(29.36)

.937(23.80)

.190(4.83)

.080(2.03).450

(11.43)

.500(12.70)

.275(6.99)

.185(4.70)

.030(0.76)

.147(3.70)

.020(0.50)

.376(9.56)

.155(3.96)

OPEN2-3,5-6

3P2

3P3

3P4

3P5

3P1NONEON

(ON)

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON NONE

2-1,5-4

(ON)

(ON)

(ON)

ON

ON

TERM. COMM.


02COMM.

1 3

05COMM.

4 6

08COMM.

7 9

()=MOMENTARY

3

2

1

32

1

7

8

96

54

Ø.094(Ø2.39)

25˚

1.156(29.36)

.937(23.80)

.650(11.43)

.500(12.70)

.275(6.99)

.185(4.70)

.030(0.76) .190

(4.83)

.080(2.03)

.147(3.70)

.020(0.50)

.441(11.21)

.155(3.96)

SERIES 47AMiniature Rocker and PaddleSwitches

FEATURES• Save Space and Weight• SPDT, DPDT, 3PDT and 4PDT Circuitry• Choice of Actuators and Terminations• UL Recoginized

MODELS In inches (and millimeters)

SPDT

DPDT

3PDT

Series 47A: Miniature Rocker and Paddle Switches

Rocker3


Ro

cke

r

an

d

Pa

dd

le

Sw

itc

he

s

OPEN2-3,5-6

4P2

4P3

4P4

4P5

4P1NONEON

(ON)

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON NONE

2-1,5-4

(ON)

(ON)

(ON)

ON

ON

TERM. COMM.


02COMM.

1 3

05COMM.

4 6

08COMM.

7 9

SCHEMATIC

()=MOMENTARY

3

2

1

32

1

10

11

129

87

6

54

Ø.094(Ø2.39)

25˚1.156(29.36)

.937(23.80)

.850(11.43)

.500(12.70)

.275(6.99)

.185(4.70)

.030(0.76)

.080(2.03)

.190(4.83)

.147(3.70)

.020(0.50)

.441(11.21)

.155(3.96)

.740(18.8)

.383(9.73)

.576 NOM. (14.63)

.320(8.13)

.024(0.61)

.138(3.50)

.906(23.01)

1.625(41.27)

1.375(34.92)

.505(12.83)BRACKET WIDTH

.595(15.11)ROCKERWIDTH

2 PLCS.Ø.125(Ø3.17)

.937(23.80)

.275(6.99)

Ø.094(Ø2.39)

1.156(29.36)

.310(7.87)

.375(9.52)

.531(13.49)

.020(0.50)

.138(3.50)

.365(9.27)

.937(23.80)

.275(6.99)

Ø.094(Ø2.39)

1.156(29.36) .365

(9.27)

.020(0.50)

.138(3.50)

.875(22.22)

.084(2.13)

.332 R.(8.43 R.)

1.625(41.27)

1.375(34.92)



2 PLCS.Ø.125(Ø3.17)

.888(22.56) 1.174

(29.82)

.024(0.61)

.138(3.50)

.437(11.10)

.093(2.36)

1.312(33.32)

R4

R3

R2


4PDT

ACTUATOR OPTIONS: For Panel Mount Only In inches (and millimeters)

R1


Rocker4

DIP

S

wit

ch

es


R

oc

ke

r

an

d

Pa

dd

le

Sw

itc

he

s

Slid

e D

IP S

wit

ch

es

ACTUATOR OPTIONS: For Panel Rear Mount Only In inches (and millimeters)

R5

R7

R6

ACTUATOR OPTIONS: For P.C. Mount Only In inches (and millimeters)

J1

J2


.024(0.61) .138

(3.50)

1.875(41.27)

1.625(34.92)



.478(12.14) 1.318

(33.4)

PANEL MOUNTING

PANEL MOUNTING

.280(7.11)

.090(2.29)

PANEL THICKNESS.047 TO .125(1.19 TO 3.18)

.615(15.62)

.765(19.43)

.450(11.43)

.500(12.70)

.600(15.24)

.005 R.(4)(0.13 R.)MAX. TYP.

.280(7.11)

.090(2.29)

PANEL THICKNESS.047 TO .125(1.19 TO 3.18)

.615(15.62)

.765(19.43)

.450(11.43)

.500(12.70)

.600(15.24)

.005 R.(4)(0.13 R.)MAX. TYP.

.456(11.58).093

(2.36)

.128(3.25)

.365(9.27)

.365(9.27)

.310(7.87)

.531(13.49)

.299(7.59)

.332 R.(8.43 R.)

.084(2.13)

.156(3.96)

.740(18.80)

Rocker5


Ro

cke

r

an

d

Pa

dd

le

Sw

itc

he

s

.595(15.11) .320

(8.13)

.906(23.01)

1.055(26.80)

.351(8.92)

.595(15.11)

1.174(29.82)

1.055(26.80)

.093(2.36)

.888(22.55)

THK. .030 (0.76) THK. .030 (0.76) W1

OPTIONCODE

W2

W3

W4

DIM."A"

.750(19.05)

.964(24.48)

.425(10.80)

1.062(26.97)

.078(1.98)

.080(2.03)

.047(1.19)

.156(3.96) .189

(4.80)

.250(6.35)

.050(1.27)

.075(1.91)

.062(1.57)

.250(6.35)

EPOXY SEAL

DIM."A"

.150(1.91)

.100(1.27)

.230 R.(5,84 R.)

.644(16,36)

.093(2,36)

.125(3,18)

.450(11,43)

.432(10,97)

.230 R.(5,84 R.)

.093(2,36)

.125(3,18)

.450(11,43)

.432(10,97)

.894(22,71)

.260(7,11)

.460(11,68)

.362(9,19)

.450(11,43)

.230 R.(5,84 R.)

.644(16,36)

.093(2,36)

.125(3,18)

.450(11,43)

.432(10,97)

.306(7,77)

ACTUATOR OPTIONS: For P.C. Mount Only In inches (and millimeters)

J3 J4

J7

TERMINATION OPTIONS In inches (and millimeters)

M1 Solder Lug M2 P.C. Mount (Std) M3 P.C. Mount, Quick Connect


NOTE: Solder lug terminals supplied with mounting tabs standard.PC Mount terminals supplied without mounting tabs standard.

J5 J6

J8

WX

Rocker6

DIP

S

wit

ch

es


R

oc

ke

r

an

d

Pa

dd

le

Sw

itc

he

s

Slid

e D

IP S

wit

ch

es

M7 Right Angle P.C. Mount, Vertical Actuation


M6 Right Angle P.C. Mount, Horizontal Actuation


SPDT

DPDT

SPDT

DPDT

3PDT

1 2 3

4 5 6

1 2 3

1

2

3

1 2 3

.048(1.22)

.200(5.08) .500

(12.70)

.016(0.41)

.050(1.27)

PIVOT EPOXY SEAL.500(12.70)

.030(0.76)

.185(4.70)

.200(5.08)

.500(12.70)

.185(4.69)

Ø.073(Ø1.85)

.048(1.22)

.200(5.08)

.500(12.70)

.016(0.41) .050

(1.27)

EPOXY SEAL.500(12.70)

.030(0.76)

.185(4.70)

.200(5.08)

.500(12.70)

Ø.073(Ø1.85)

.125(3.18)

.150(3.81)

.450(11.45)

.185(4.69)

.150(3.81)

.050(1.27)

.050(1.27)

.500(12.70)

.150(3.81)

.030(0.76)

.100(2.54) .125

(3.18)

.500(12.70)

.200(5.08).016

(0.40)

.500(12.70)

.150(3.81)

.200(5.08)

Ø.073(Ø1.85)

EPOXY SEAL

.169(4.29)

.270(6.86)

PIVOT

.169(4.29)

.235(5.97)

.270(6.86)

.230(5.84)

.062(1.57)

.125(3.18)

1

2

3

4

5

6

7 8 9

7

8

9

4 5 6

4

5

6

1

2

3

.050(1.27)

.050(1.27)

.150(3.81)

.030(0.76)

.100(2.54)

.125(3.18) .500

(12.70)

.016(0.40)

.150(3.81)

.200(5.08)

.190(4.83)

.650(16.50)

Ø.073(Ø1.85)

.190(4.83)

.565(14.35)

.565(14.35)

EPOXY SEAL

.050(1.27)

.500(12.70)

.150(3.81)

.030(0.76)

.100(2.54) .125

(3.18)

.500(12.70)

.200(5.08).016

(0.40)

.500(12.70)

.150(3.81)

.200(5.08)

EPOXY SEAL

.235(5.97)

.450(6.86)

.190(4.83)

.050(1.27)

Ø.073(Ø1.85)

.190(4.83)

.235(5.97)

.200(5.08)

Rocker7


Ro

cke

r

an

d

Pa

dd

le

Sw

itc

he

s

4

5

6

7

8

9

10 11 12

10

11

12

1

2

3

.050(1.27)

.050(1.27)

.150(3.81)

.030(0.76)

.100(2.54)

.125(3.18)

.500(12.70)

.016(0.40) .200

(5.08).190(4.83)

Ø.073(Ø1.85)

.565(14.35)

EPOXY SEAL

.235(5.97)

.200(5.08)

.850(21.59)

.190(4.83)

.565(14.35)

.150(3.81)

OPTIONCODE DIM."A"

V2

V3

.460(11,68)

.630(16,00)

4 5 6

OPTIONCODE DIM."A"

V2

V3

.460(11,68)

.630(16,00)

1 2 3

DIM. "A"

.620(15.75)

.020(0.51)

.185(4.70)

.030(0.76)

EPOXY SEAL

.620(15.75)

.125(3.18)

.048(1.22)

.125(3.18)

.320(8.13)

.185(4.70)

.190(4.83)

Ø.073(1.85)

.370(9.40)

Ø.073(Ø1.85).125

(3.18)

.048(1.22)

.320(8.13)

.185(4.70)

DIM. "A"

.620(15.75)

.020(0.51)

.185(4.70)

.030(0.76)

EPOXY SEAL

.620(15.75)

.125(3.18)

.162(4.11)

.162(4.11)

V2-V3 Vertical Bracket P.C. Mount


SPECIFICATIONSRATINGSContact Rating: Q option - 5A with resistiveload @ 125 VAC or 28 VDC; 2A with resistiveload @ 250 VAC. R option - 0.4 VA max @ 20Vmax (AC or DC)Electrical Life: 40,000 make-and-breakcycles at full load

Contact Resistance: 10 milliohms max. initial@ 2-4 VDC, 100 mAInsulation Resistance: 1,000 megaohmsminimumDielectic Strength: 1,000 V RMS @ sealevelOperating Temperature: -30°C to 85°CUL Recognition: File number is E35289

MATERIALSCase: Diallyl phthalate (DAP) (UL 94V-0)Rockers: Nylon (UL 94V-0)Bushing: Stainless steelSwitch Support: Brass, tin-platedTerminal/Contacts: Brass with silver or goldplateTerminal Seal: Epoxy


Available from your local Grayhill Component Distributor. For prices and discounts, contact a local Sales Office, an authorized localDistributor or Grayhill.


4PDT

SPDT

DPDT

47ASP1J2M6RT

Series 47A Minature Rocker and Paddle SwitchesModel: SPDT: SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4, SP5DPDT: DP1, DP2, DP3, DP4, DP53PDT: 3P1, 3P2, 3P3, 3P4, 3P54PDT: 4P1, 4P2, 4P3, 4P4, 4P5(See Model options.)Actuator: R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7J1, J2, J3, J4, J5, J6, J7, J8 (See actuator options.)

RoHS CompliantContact: R = Brass alloy, gold plate over nickel plateQ = Brass alloy, silver plated

Termination Options: M1, M2, M3, M6, M7, S6, V2, V3, W1, W2, W3, W4 (See Termination options.)

Rocker8

DIP

S

wit

ch

es


R

oc

ke

r

an

d

Pa

dd

le

Sw

itc

he

s

Slid

e D

IP S

wit

ch

es

OPEN2-3

WSP2

WSP3

WSP4

WSP5

WSP1NONEON

(ON)

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON NONE

2-1

(ON)

(ON)

(ON)

ON

ON

TERM. COMM.

3

2

1

OPEN2-3,5-6

WDP2

WDP3

WDP4

WDP5

WDP1NONEON

(ON)

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON NONE

2-1,5-4

(ON)

(ON)

(ON)

ON

ON

TERM. COMM.

3

2

14

5

6



02COMM.

1 3

05COMM.

4 6

SCHEMATIC

SCHEMATIC

SCHEMATIC

02COMM.

1 3

()=MOMENTARY

()=MOMENTARY

1.156(29.36)

.937(23.80)

.356(9.27)

.345(8.76)

Ø.094(Ø2.39)

.500(12.70)

.260(6.60)

.131(3.33)

.059(1.50)

.078(1.98)

.156(3.96)

.185(4.70)

.030(0.76)

EPOXY SEAL

1.156(29.36)

.937(23.80)

.356(9.27)

.345(8.76)

Ø.094(Ø2.39)

.500(12.70)

.131(3.33)

.059(1.50)

.078(1.98)

.156(3.96)

.185(4.70)

.030(0.76)

EPOXY SEAL

.190(4.83)

.450(11.43)

OPEN2-3,5-6

W3P2

W3P3

W3P4

W3P5

W3P1NONEON

(ON)

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON NONE

2-1,5-4

(ON)

(ON)

(ON)

ON

ON

TERM. COMM.

6

5

47

8

9


3

2

1

02COMM.

1 3

05COMM.

4 6

08COMM.

7 9

()=MOMENTARY

1.156(29.36)

.937(23.80)

.356(9.27)

.345(8.76) Ø.094

(Ø2.39)

.500(12.70)

.131(3.33)

.059(1.50)

.078(1.98)

.156(3.96)

.185(4.70)

.030(0.76)

EPOXYSEAL

.190(4.83)

.650(16.50)

SERIES 47BSealed Miniature Rocker andPaddle Switches

FEATURES• Save Space and Weight• SPDT, DPDT and 3PDT Circuitry• Choice of Actuators and

Terminations• Sealed per IP-67


SPDT

DPDT

3PDT

Series 47B: Sealed Miniature Rocker and Paddle Switches

Rocker9


Ro

cke

r

an

d

Pa

dd

le

Sw

itc

he

s

1.156(29.36)

.937(23.80)

.356(9.27) .345

(8.76)

Ø.094(Ø2.39)

.131(3.33)

.059(1.50)

.078(1.98)

.310(7.87)

.531(13.49)

1.156(29.36)

.937(23.80)

.356(9.27) .345

(8.76)

Ø.094(Ø2.39)

.131(3.33)

.059(1.50)

.933(23.72)

25˚ .740(18.80)

.084(2.13)

.078(1.98)

25?

1.156(29,36)

.937(23.80)

.345(8.76)

.059(1,50)

.078(1,98)

.457(11,60)

.111(2,83)

.283(7,20)

.453(11,50)

?.095(?2,40)

.076(2,40)

.634(16,10)

.131(3,33)

.059(1,50)

.079(2,00)

1.156(29,36)

.937(23.80)

.345(8.76)

?.095(?2,40)

.457(11,60)

ACTUATOR OPTIONS In inches (and millimeters)

R1

R2

R3

R4


Rocker10

DIP

S

wit

ch

es


R

oc

ke

r

an

d

Pa

dd

le

Sw

itc

he

s

Slid

e D

IP S

wit

ch

es

.370(9,40)

.366(9,30)

.319(8,10)

.551(14,00)

.331 R.(8.40 R.)

.075(1,90)

.713(18.10)

.630(16,00) .315

(8.00)

.906(23.00)

.190(4,83)

.193(4,90)

.114(2,90)

1.055(26,80)

.169(4,30)

1.164(29.56)

.529 R.13.44

.0932.36

1.31833.48

.598(15,20)

1.067(27,10)

.169(4,30)

.169(4,30)

1.346(34,20)

.606(15,40)



J1

J2

J3

J4

J5

Rocker11


Ro

cke

r

an

d

Pa

dd

le

Sw

itc

he

s

THK. .030 (0.76) THK. .030 (0.76) THK. .030 (0.76) THK. .030 (0.76)

W1

OPTIONCODE

W2W3W4

DIM."A".750(19.05)

.964(24.48)

.425(10.80)

1.062(26.97)

.078(1,98)

.080(2,03)

.047(1,20)

.144(3,65)

EPOXYSEAL

EPOXYSEAL

.050(1.26)

.191(4,84)

EPOXYSEAL

.191(4,84)

.062(1,57)

DIM."A"

.150(1.91)

.100(1.27)

1 2 3

4 5 6

1 2 3

.048(1.22)

.200(5.08)

(.500)12.70

.230(5.84)

.016(0.41)

.178(4.52)

.050(1.27)

.062(1.57)

.125(3.18)

PIVOT EPOXY SEAL .500(12.70)

.093(2.36)

.260(6.60)

.030(0.76)

.200(5.08) .185

(4.70)

.200(5.08)

.500(12.70)

.185(4.69)

Ø.073(Ø1.85)

.048(1.22)

.200(5.08)

.500(12.70)

.016(0.41)

.178(4.5)

.050(1.27)

PIVOTEPOXY SEAL

.500(12.70)

.030(0.76)

.200(5.08) .185

(4.70)

.200(5.08)

.500(12.70)

Ø.073(Ø1.85)

.125(3.18)

.150(3.81)

.108(2.74)

.450(11.45)

.185(4.69).150

(3.81)

7 8 9

1 2 3

4 5 6

1

2

3

1 2 3

.048(.200)

PIVOT

EPOXY SEAL .500(12.70)

.030(0.76)

.200(5.08)

.185(4.70)

.200(5.08)

.565(12.70)

Ø.073(Ø1.85)

.108(2.74)

.650(16.50)

.565(14.35)

.178(4.52)

.016(0.41) .050

(1.27).125(3.18)

.185(4.69)

.150(3.81)

.050(1.27) .243

(6.17)

.048(1.22)

.500(12.70)

.150(3.81)

.030(0.76)

.100(2.54) .125

(3.18)

.500(12.70)

.200(5.08).014

(0.36)

.260(6.60)

.500(12.70)

.150(3.81)

.200(5.08)

Ø.073(Ø1.85)

EPOXY SEAL

M6




SPDT

DPDT

3PDT

SPDT

Right Angle P.C. Mount,Horizontal Actuation

M1 M2 M3 WX

Rocker12

DIP

S

wit

ch

es


R

oc

ke

r

an

d

Pa

dd

le

Sw

itc

he

s

Slid

e D

IP S

wit

ch

es

1

2

3

4

5

6

4 5 6

.050(1.27)

.243(6.17)

.048(1.22)

.500(12.70)

.150(3.81)

.030(0.76)

.100(2.54)

.125(3.18)

.500(12.70)

.014(0.36)

.500(12.70)

.150(3.81)

.200(5.08)

.190(4.83)

.450(11.43)

Ø.073(Ø1.85)

.190(4.83)

EPOXY SEAL

1

2

3

4

5

6

7 8 9

7

8

9

OPTIONCODE DIM."A"

V2

V3

.460(11,68)

.630(16,00)

1 2 3

.050(1.27)

.243(6.17)

.048(1.22)

.150(3.81)

.030(0.76)

.100(2.54)

.125(3.18)

.500(12.70)

.014(0.36)

.150(3.81)

.200(5.08).190

(4.83)

.650(16.50)

Ø.073(Ø1.85)

.190(4.83)

.565(14.35)

.565(14.35)

.073 DIA.(Ø1.85).125

(3.18)

.048(1.22)

.320(8.13)

.185(4.70)

DIM. "A"

.170(4.32)

.620(15.75)

.020(0.51)

.185(4.70)

.030(0.76)

EPOXY SEAL

EPOXY SEAL

.620(15.75)

.125(3.18)

OPTIONCODE DIM."A"

V2

V3

.460(11,68)

.630(16,00)

4 5 6

OPTIONCODE DIM."A"

V2

V3

.460(11,68)

.630(16,00)

7 8 9

DIM. "A"

.170(4.32)

.620(15.75)

.020(0.51)

.185(4.70)

.030(0.76)

EPOXY SEAL

.620(15.75)

.125(3.18)

.048(1.22)

.125(3.18)

.320(8.13)

.185(4.70)

.190(4.83)

Ø.073(1.85)

.370(9.40)

DIM. "A"

.170(4.32)

.620(15.75)

.020(0.51)

.185(4.70)

.030(0.76)

EPOXY SEAL

.620(15.75)

.125(3.18)

.048(1.22)

.125(3.18)

.320(8.13)

.185(4.70)

.190(4.83)

Ø.073(1.85)

.185(4.70)

V2-V3 Veritcal Bracket P.C. Mount


Series 47B; Sealed Miniature Rocker and Paddle Switches

DPDT

3PDT

SPDT

DPDT

3PDT

Rocker13


Ro

cke

r

an

d

Pa

dd

le

Sw

itc

he

s

MATERIALSCase and Bushing: Glass-filled nylon 6/6 ,flame retardant, heat stabilized (UL94V-0)Actuator: Nylon, black standard. Internal O-ring seal standard with all actuators.Frame: Spring steel, black (standard)Switch Support: Brass, tin-platedActuator Pivot & Mounting Bracket:Nylon (UL 94V-0)Actuator Pivot Retainer: Stainless SteelTerminal Seal: EpoxyTerminal/Contacts: Copper alloy with goldplate over nickel or silver plate

SPECIFICATIONSRATINGSContact Rating: Q option - 5A with resistiveload @ 125 VAC or 28 VDC; 2A with resistiveload @ 250 VAC. R option - 0.4 VA max @ 20Vmax (AC or DC)Electrical Life: 50,000 make-and-breakcycles at full load

Contact Resistance: Below 10 milliohmsmax. initial @ 2-4 VDC, 100 mAInsulation Resistance: 1,000 megaohmsminimumDielectic Strength: 1,500 V RMS @ sealevelOperating Temperature: -30°C to 85°C




47BWSP1J2M6RT

Series Sealed Miniature Rocker and Paddle Switches

Model: SPDT: WSP1, WSP2, WSP3, WSP4, WSP5DPDT: WDP1, WDP2, WDP3, WDP4, WDP53PDT: W3P1, W3P2, W3P3, W3P4, W3P5(See Model options.)Actuator: R1, R2, R3, R4, J1, J2, J3, J4, J5(See Actuator options)

RoHS Compliant

Contact: R = Copper alloy, gold plate over nickel plate, Q = Copper alloy, gold plate over silver plate

Termination Options: M1, M2, M6, M7, V2, V3, W1, W2, W3, W4(See Termination options)

Rocker14

DIP

S

wit

ch

es


R

oc

ke

r

an

d

Pa

dd

le

Sw

itc

he

s

Slid

e D

IP S

wit

ch

es

OPEN2-3

MSP2

MSP3

MSP4

MSP5

MSP1NONEON

(ON)

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON NONE

2-1

(ON)

(ON)

(ON)

ON

ON

TERM. COMM.

3

2

1

OPEN2-3,5-6

MDP2

MDP3

MDP4

MDP5

MDP1NONEON

(ON)

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON NONE

2-1,5-4

(ON)

(ON)

(ON)

ON

ON

TERM. COMM.



02COMM.

1 3

05COMM.

4 6

SCHEMATIC

SCHEMATIC

02COMM.

1 3

()=MOMENTARY

()=MOMENTARY

3

2

1

1

2

3

6

5

4

STD. ALL MODELS EXCEPT SPDTWITH M6 TERMINATIONS

STD. ON SPDT MODELSWITH M6 TERMINATIONS

1

2

3

1

2

3

.300(7.62)

.320(8.13)

.200(5.08)

.320(8.13)

.360(9.14)

1.095(27.81)

.250(6.35)

.580(14.73)

.187(4.75)

.300(7.62)

.475(12.07)

.250(6.35)

.350(8.87)

.580(14.73)

.187(4.75)

.230(7.62)

.475(12.07)

.250(6.35)

.350(8.87)

.437(11.10)

.324(8.23)

.016(0.41)

.332(8.43)

.110(2.79)

.160(4.06)

.020(0.51)

.100(2.54)

EPOXYSEAL

.060(1.52)

.300(7.62)

1.095(27.81)

.250(6.35) .437

(11.10)

.324(8.23)

.016(0.41)

.332(8.43)

.110(2.79)

.160(4.06)

.020(0.51)

.100(2.54)

EPOXYSEAL

Ø.093(Ø2.36)

.850(21.59)

.850(21.59)

.060(1.52)

Ø.093(Ø2.36)

R2

SERIES 47CSub-Miniature Rocker Switches

FEATURES• Save Space and Weight• SPDT and DPDT Circuitry• Choice of Actuators and

Terminations• UL Recognized


SPDT

DPDT


R1

Series 47C: Sub-Miniature Rocker Switches

Rocker15


Ro

cke

r

an

d

Pa

dd

le

Sw

itc

he

s

1 2 3

P.C. MOUNTING

THK. .020 (0.51)THK. .020 (0.51)SP

DP

THK. .020 (0.51)THK. .020 (0.51)SP

DP

.200(5.08)

.100(2.54)Ø.043

(Ø1.09)

EPOXYSEAL

.200(5.08)

.030(0.76)

.200(5.08)

.030(0.76)

.016(0.41)

.130(3.30).020

(0.51)

.320(8.13)

.200(5.08)

.020(0.51) .200

(5.08)

.060(1.52)

.030(0.76)

.060(1.52)

.110(2.79) .160

(4.06)

.060(1.52)

.110(2.79).160

(4.06)

.160(4.06)

.030(0.76)

EPOXYSEAL

EPOXYSEAL

.030(0.76)

EPOXY SEAL

.130(3.30)

.030(0.76)

.200(5.08)

.130(3.30)

EPOXY SEAL

.417(10.5)

.230(5.84)

.158(4.01)

1 2 3

4 5 6

P.C. MOUNTING

3

2

1

P.C. MOUNTING

3

2

1

P.C. MOUNTING

4

5

6

EPOXYSEAL

.200(5.08)

.200(5.08)

.030(0.76)

.016(0.41)

.100(2.54)

.200(5.08)

.320(8.13)

.020(0.51)

.200(5.08)

.100(2.54)Ø.043

(Ø1.09).200(5.08)

.100(2.54)

.320(8.13)

.200(5.08)

.300(7.62)

.030(0.7)

.200(5.08)

.200(5.08)

.100(2.54)

Ø.043(Ø1.09)

.130(3.30)

.300(7.62)

.417(10.59)

.158(3.96)

.020(0.51)

EPOXYSEAL

.304(7.72)

.417(10.59)

.016(0.41)

.020(0.51)

.200(5.08)

.100(2.54) .030

(0.76)

.300(7.62)

.200(5.08)

.100(2.54)

EPOXYSEAL

.304(7.72)

.417(10.59)

.016(0.41)

.020(0.51)

.200(5.08)

.100(2.54)

.030(0.76)

.200(5.08)

.320(8.13)

.360(9.14)

Ø.043(Ø1.09)

.200(5.08)

.200(5.08)


M1 Solder Lug M2 P.C. Mount (Std)

M7

M6


SPDT

DPDT

SPDT

DPDT

Right Angle P.C. Mount,Horizontal Actuation

Right Angle P.C.Mount, VerticalActuation

Note: Solder lug terminalssupplied with mounting ears standard.

PC mount terminalssupplied without mounting ears standard

Rocker16

DIP

S

wit

ch

es


R

oc

ke

r

an

d

Pa

dd

le

Sw

itc

he

s

Slid

e D

IP S

wit

ch

es

V3 VerticalBracketP.C. Mount

P.C. MOUNTING

P.C. MOUNTING

1 2 3

4 5 6

.200(5.08)

.030(0.76)

.130(3.30)

.352(8.94)

.400(10.16)


.100(2.54)

.016(0.41)

.400(10.16)

.100(2.54)

Ø.043(Ø0.19)

.200(5.08)

.400(10.16)

.200(5.08)

Ø.043(Ø1.09)

.304(7.72)

.417(10.59)

.300(7.62)

.300(7.62)

.100(2.54)

.200(5.08).030

(0.76)

.130(3.30)

.352(8.94)

.400(10.16)


.100(2.54)

.016(0.4)

.304(7.72)

.417(10.59)

.360(9.14)


V2 Vertical Bracket P.C. Mount

SPECIFICATIONSRATINGSContact Rating: Q option - 3A with resistiveload @ 125 VAC or 28 VDC; 1.5A withresistive load @ 250 VAC. R option - 0.4 VAmax @ 20 Vmax (AC or DC)Electrical Life: 30,000 make-and-breakcycles at full load


MATERIALSCase: Diallyl phthalate (DAP) (UL94V-0)Rocker: NylonBushing: Brass, nickel platedHousing: Stainless steelSwitch Support: Brass, electrotin platedTerminal/Contacts: Copper alloy with silveror gold platingTerminal Seal: Epoxy




SPDT

DPDT

47CMSP1R2M6RT

RoHS CompliantType of Contact: R = Copper alloy, gold plate over nickel plateQ = Copper alloy, silver platedTermination Options: M1, M2, M6, M7, V2, V3(See Termination options.)

Actuator Options: R1, R2 (See Actuator options.)

Model: SPDT: MSP1, MSP2, MSP3, MSP4, MSP5DPDT: MDP1, MDP2, MDP3, MDP4, MDP4(See Model for options.)

Series 47C Sub-Miniature Rocker Switches

Rocker17


Ro

cke

r

an

d

Pa

dd

le

Sw

itc

he

s

R2

SERIES 47DSealed Sub-Miniature RockerSwitches

FEATURES• Save Space and Weight• SPDT and DPDT Circuitry• Choice of Actuators and

Terminations• Sealed per IP-67


SPDT

DPDT


R1

Series 47D: Sealed Sub-Miniature Rocker Switches

OPEN2-3

WMSP2

WMSP3

WMSP4

WMSP5

WMSP1NONEON

(ON)

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON NONE

2-1

(ON)

(ON)

(ON)

ON

ON

TERM. COMM.

32

1

OPEN2-3,5-6

WMDP2

WMDP3

WMDP4

WMDP5

WMDP1NONEON

(ON)

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON NONE

2-1,5-4

(ON)

(ON)

(ON)

ON

ON

TERM. COMM.



02COMM.

1 3

05COMM.

4 6

SCHEMATIC

SCHEMATIC

02COMM.

1 3

()=MOMENTARY

()=MOMENTARY

3

2

1

1

2

3

4

5

66

5

4

.781(19.84)

.353(8.96)

.135(3.42)

.124(3.14)

.100(2.54)

.020(0.51)

.300(7.62)

.320(8.13)

.200(5.08)

.030(0.76)

EPOXY SEAL

.781(19.84)

.353(8.96)

.135(3.42)

.124(3.14)

.100(2.54)

.020(0.51)

.300(7.62)

.320(8.13)

.030(0.76)

EPOXY SEAL

.360(9.14)

.200(5.08)

.579(14.70)

.250(6.35)

.311(7.90)

.476(12.10)

.181(4.60)

.299(7.60)

.579(14.70)

.250(6.35)

.311(7.90)

.476(12.10) .228

(7.60)

.157(4.00)

Rocker18

DIP

S

wit

ch

es


R

oc

ke

r

an

d

Pa

dd

le

Sw

itc

he

s

Slid

e D

IP S

wit

ch

es

SINGLE POLE P.C. MOUNTING P.C. MOUNTINGDOUBLE POLE

1 2 3

P.C. MOUNTING

1 2 3

4 5 6

P.C. MOUNTING

.030(0.76)

.130(3.30)

EPOXY SEAL

.100(2.54)

Ø.043(Ø1.09)

.130(3.30)

.200(5.08)

.030(0.76)

.100(2.54)

Ø.043(Ø1.09)

.200(5.08)

EPOXY SEAL

.200(5.08)

.100(2.54)Ø.043

(Ø1.09)

EPOXY SEAL

EPOXY SEAL

.200(5.08)

.299(7.60)

.580(14.73)

.200(5.08)

.030(0.76)

.200(5.08)

.030(0.76)

.015(0.38)

.471(11.96)

.130(3.30).020

(0.51)

.320(8.13)

.200(5.08)

.020(0.51) .200

(5.08)

.580(14.73)

.200(5.08)

.030(0.76)

.299(7.60)

.016(0.41)2 PL.

.100(2.54)

.471(11.96)

.200(5.08)

.377(9.58)

.320(8.13)

.362(9.20)

.020(0.51)

.200(5.08)

.100(2.54)Ø.043

(Ø1.09).200(5.08)

.100(2.54)

.360(9.14)

.016(0.40)

.130(3.30)

3

2

1

3

1

2

6

5

4

P.C. MOUNTING

P.C. MOUNTING

.320(8.13)

.200(5.08)

EPOXY SEAL

.130(3.30)

.530(13.46)

.300(7.62)

.030(0.76)

.015(0.38)

.165(4.19)

.200(5.08)

.200(5.08)

.200(5.08)

.100(2.54)

Ø.043(Ø1.09)

.320(8.13)EPOXY SEAL

.130(3.30)

.530(13.46)

.300(7.62)

.015(0.38)

.165(4.19)

.200(5.08)

.200(5.08)

.100(2.54)

.389(10.11)

.200(5.08)

.030(0.76)TYP.

.200(5.08)

Ø.043(Ø1.09)

.200(5.08).100

(2.54)


M2 M2

M7

M6


SPDT

DPDT

SPDT

DPDT

RightAngle P.C.Mount,HorizontalActuation

Right AngleP.C. Mount,VerticalActuation

Rocker19


Ro

cke

r

an

d

Pa

dd

le

Sw

itc

he

s

P.C. MOUNTING

P.C. MOUNTING

1 2 3

4 5 6

.200(5.08)

.030(0.76)

.130(3.30)

.352(8.94)

.300(7.62)

.400(10.16)

.670(17.02)

EPOXY SEAL.020(0.51).100

(2.54)

.015(0.38)

.400(10.16)

.100(2.54)

Ø.043(Ø0.19)

.300(7.62)

.400(10.16)

EPOXY SEAL.020(0.51).100

(2.54)

.127(3.22)

.200(5.08)

.032(0.82)

.366(9.30)

.202(5.12)

.392(9.98)

.493(12.52)

.115(2.93)

.409(10.40)

.200(5.08) .400

(10.16)

.200(5.08)

Ø.043(Ø1.09)


V2 Verical Bracket P.C. Mount

SPECIFICATIONSRATINGSContact Rating: Q option - 3A with resistiveload @ 125 VAC or 28 VDC; 1.5A withresistive load @ 250 VAC. R option - 0.4 VAmax @ 20 Vmax (AC or DC)Electrical Life: 30,000 make-and-breakcycles at full load

Contact Resistance: 20 milliohms max.initial @ 2-4 VDC, 100 mAInsulation Resistance: 1,000 megaohmsminimumDielectic Resistance: 1,500 V RMS @ sealevelOperating Temperature: -30°C to 85°C

MATERIALSCase and Bushings: Glass-filled nylon 6/6 ,flame retardant, heat stabilized (UL94V-0)Actuator: Nylon, black standard. Internal o-ring seal standard with all actuators.Switch Support: Brass, tin-platedTerminal Seal: EpoxyTerminal/Contacts: Copper alloy with goldplate or silver plate over nickel




SPDT

DPDT

47DWMSP1R2M6RT

RoHS Compliant

Contact: R= Copper alloy, gold plate over nickel plateQ = Copper alloy, gold plate over silver plateTermination Options: M2, M6, M7, V2(See Termination options.)

Actuator Options: R1, R2(See Actuator options.)

Model: SPDT: WMSP1, WMSP2, WMSP3, WMSP4, WMSP5DPDT: WMDP1, WMDP2, WMDP3, WMDP4, WMDP5

Series 47D Sealed Sub-Miniature Rocker Switch

Rocker20

Grayhil l , Inc. • 561 Hil lgrove Avenue • LaGrange, I l l inois 60525-5997 • USA • Phone: 708-354-1040 • Fax: 708-354-2820 • www.grayhil l .comGrayhil l , Inc. • 561 Hil lgrove Avenue • LaGrange, I l l inois 60525-5997 • USA • Phone: 708-354-1040 • Fax: 708-354-2820 • www.grayhil l .comGrayhil l , Inc. • 561 Hil lgrove Avenue • LaGrange, I l l inois 60525-5997 • USA • Phone: 708-354-1040 • Fax: 708-354-2820 • www.grayhil l .comGrayhil l , Inc. • 561 Hil lgrove Avenue • LaGrange, I l l inois 60525-5997 • USA • Phone: 708-354-1040 • Fax: 708-354-2820 • www.grayhil l .comGrayhil l , Inc. • 561 Hil lgrove Avenue • LaGrange, I l l inois 60525-5997 • USA • Phone: 708-354-1040 • Fax: 708-354-2820 • www.grayhil l .com

Rotary S

witches

Rotary S

witches

Rotary S

witches

Rotary S

witches

Rotary S

witches


Rotary S

witches

Single Deck Rotary SwitchesContents: Single Deck Rotary Switches

Page

0.3" Diameter, 200 mA ...................................... Series 75 .........................2

0.5" Diameter, 200 mA, .698" Behind Panel .... Series 50 & 51 .................4

0.5" Diameter, 200 mA, .355" Behind Panel .... Series 56 ...................... 11

2.0" Diameter, 15 Amp ...................................... Series 19 ...................... 15

1.0" Diameter, 1 Amp, .470" Behind Panel ...... Series 5000 .................. 16

1.0" Diameter, 1Amp, .580" Behind Panel ....... Series 24....................... 17

SINGLE DECKROTARY SWITCHES

• Minimal Space Behind Panel.3" up to 1"+ In Diameter

• More Economical Choice ThanMulti Deck Rotary Switches

• High Quality, Enclosed SwitchesIncluding Military Types

• Low Current, Wiping Contacts

Rotary1


Rotary S

witches

Single Deck Rotary Switches

Screwdriver Actuated

All dimensions not shown andfront views same as style AP.

Style AP Style AF

Rear view shownon next page.

Shaft Actuated


Style BP

Style BF


All dimensions not shown andfront views same as style BP.

Style CP Style CFAll dimensions not shown andfront views same as style CP.


Integral Knob Actuated

Grayhill part number and date code marked on label.Customer part number marked on request.


.298 ± .010(7,57 ± 0,25)

DIA.

SCREWDRIVER SLOT.032 ± .010(0,81 ± 0,25) DEEP

.125 ± .005(3,18 ± 0,13)

.020 ± .005(0,51 ± 0,13)

01

234

56

7 8 9

.489 ± .020(12,42 ± 0,51) .109 ± .010

(2,77 ± 0,25).032 (0,81)

REF. SHOULDERDIAMETERØ .031 ± .002(0,79 ± 0,05)

TERMINALDIAMETER

Ø .015 ± .002(0,38 ± 0,05)

2

1

10

9

2

1

10

9

.539 ± .020(13,69 ± 0,51)

.109 ± .010(2,77 ± 0,25)

2

1

10

9

.550 ± .020(13,97 ± 0,51)

.109 ± .010(2,77 ± 0,25)

.298 ± .010(7,57 ± 0,25)

DIA..203 ± .003(5,16 ± 0,08)ACROSS FLATSOF BUSHING

.094 ± .015(2,39 ± 0,38)

108°

C L OF POSITION 1

2

1

10

9

.500 ± .020(12,7 ± 0,51)

.250± .015(6,35

± 0,38)

.109 ± .010(2,77 ± 0,25)

.032 (0,81)REF.

1/4-32 UNF-2A THREAD

.375 ± .015(9,53 ± 0,38)

.250 ± .015(6,35

± 0,38)

Ø .125 + .001/ - .002(3,18 + 0,03/ - 0,51)

SHOULDERDIAMETERØ .031 ± .002(0,76 ± 0,05)

TERMINALDIAMETER

Ø .015 ± .002(0,38 ± 0,05)

.489 ± .020(12,42 ± 0,51) .109 ± .010

(2,77 ± 0,25).032 (0,81)

REF.

2

1

10

9

.115 ± .010(2,92 ± 0,25)

.539 ± .020(13,69 ± 0,51)

2

1

10

9

.109 ± .010(2,77 ± 0,25)

.298 ± .010(7,57 ± 0,25)

DIA.

C L OF POSITION 1

SHOULDERDIAMETERØ .031 ± .002(0,76 ± 0,05)

TERMINALDIAMETER

Ø .015 ± .002(0,38 ± 0,05)

SERIES 750.3" Diameter, 200 mA

FEATURES• Small Size• Flush, Shafted, or Knobbed Shaft

Rotary2


Rotary S

witches


CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS AND REAR VIEWS

Style FCircle of terminal centers isØ .300 ± .010 (7,62 ± 0,25).

Circle of terminal centers isØ .187 ± .010 (4,75 ± 0,25).

Style P

ONE POLE TWO POLE ONE POLE TWO POLE ONE POLE TWO POLE

36° ANGLEOF THROWSwitch is viewedfrom actuator endand shown inPosition 1.

.298 ± .010(7,57 ± 0,25) COMMON LOCATION

FOR A TWO POLESWITCH LOCATED ON.064 ± .010 (1,63 ± 0,25)

DIA. CIRCLE OF CENTERS36° ± 3°

TYP.

COMMON LOCATIONFOR A SINGLE POLE

SWITCH

36° ± 3°TYP. Screwdriver Actuated Integral Knob Actuated Shaft Actuated

Dot on actuator is next to contacting position of pole 1. Line on knob points to contacting position of pole 1. Shaft flat opposite point of contact of pole 1.

1

2 3

4

5

6

78

9

10

1

2 3

4

5

6

78

9

10

1

2 3

4

5

6

78

9

10

1

2 3

4

5

6

78

9

10

1

2 3

4

5

6

78

9

10

1

2 3

4

5

6

78

9

10

SPECIFICATIONSElectrical RatingsChart shown for non-shorting (break beforemake) contacts, resistive load.

One cycle is 360° rotation and a return throughall switch positions to the starting position. Thedata for the curve was measured at sea level,25°C and 68% relative humidity with thefollowing limiting criteria:Contact Resistance: 50 milliohms maximum(15 milliohms initially).Insulation Resistance: 10,000 Mohmsminimum between mutually insulated parts.

300

200

100

00 5 10 15

CYCLES x 1,000

CU

RR

EN

T(M

ILLI

AM

PS

)

CURVE B: 115 Vac or 30 VdcCURVE A: 220 Vac

A

B

Voltage Breakdown: 500 Vac between mutuallyinsulated parts.Life Expectancy: 10,000 cycles at 200 milliamps.One cycle is 360° rotation and a return through allswitch positions to the starting position.Low Level Rating: Make and break a 50 mV, 1milliamp, resistive load for 10,000 cycles with amaximum contact resistance of 50 milliohms.

Contact Grayhill for information if the life limitingcriteria is more critical than those listed, if therequired cycles of operation are greater thanthose listed, if a larger make and break current isrequired than the one listed for the desired numberof cycles, or if elevated temperatures or reducedpressures are part of the operating environment.

Materials and FinishesSwitch Base: Diallyl per MIL-M-14Detent Cover and Detent Rotor in Styles AP,AF, BP, and BF: Phenolic per MIL-M-14Bushing: Brass, tin zinc plating

Stop Pin: Stainless steel, passivatedDetent Balls: Steel, nickel-platedDetent and Contact Springs: Tinned musicwireRotor Contact: Silver cad-oxide, gold-platedTerminals and Common: Brass, gold plate.00002" minimum thickness over silver plate.0003" minimum.Shaft in Style BF or BP: ZincIntegral Knob and Detent Rotor in Style CF orCP: Red ThermoplasticMounting Hardware for Style BF or BP: Onemounting nut .062" thick by .312" across flatsand one external tooth lockwasher suppliedwith each switch. Mounting nut is brass, zincplated and lockwasher is spring steel.

Additional CharacteristicsContact Type: Non-shorting, wiping contactsTerminals: Switches are provided with the fullcircle of terminals regardless of the number ofactive positions.Stop Strength: 8 ounce-inches minimum

Style and Designation Number of DecksØ 0.187 (4,75) Ø 0.300 (7,62) Angle Poles Non- Number of

Circle of Term. Circle of Term. Of Throw Per Deck Shorting Positions/Pole

AP = Screwdriver AF = ScrewdriverActuated Actuated 36° Fixed Printed 1 Not 1 2 thru 10

BP = Shaft Operated BF = Shaft Operated 2 Available 1 2 thru 5CP = Integral Knob CF = Integral Knob

CHOICES AND LIMITATIONS

Stops Terminal Shorting

ORDERING INFORMATIONSeriesStyle: Letters from Choices and Limitations ChartAngle of Throw: 36° only

75AP36–01–1–10N–C

Stop Arrangement: The suffix C or F must be added to aone pole per deck switch to indicate continuous rotation (C) or fixed stop

(F) between position 1 and position 10.Type of Contacts: N=Non-shorting onlyPositions per Pole: requires 02 positions as a minimum tomaximumallowable dependent on the poles per deckPoles per Deck: 1 or 2 poles availableNumber of Decks: 1 deck only


Rotary3


Rotary S

witches


.203 ± .003(5,16 ± 0,08)ACROSS FLATS

DIMENSIOND

A

POS. 1

OPTIONAL PANEL SEALGASKET

.093 ± .005(2,36 ± 0,13)

.171 ± .015(4,34 ± 0,38)

.125 (3,18) REF.

TERMINALS ARE .016 ± .003 (0,41 ± 0,08) SQ.

TERMINAL SEALANTIN STYLE T

COMMON Ø .025 ± .002 (0,64 ± 0,06) AND EXTEND TO SAME PLANE AS POSITION TERMINALS

.125 ± .015(3,18 ± 0,38)

.020 ± .003(0,51 ± 0,08)

.020 ± .004(0,51 ± 0,10)

.062 ± .003(1,57 ± 0,08)

.171 ± .015(4,34 ± 0,38)

Ø .025 ± .002(0,64 ± 0,05)

GR

AY

HIL

L 910

12

+.001- .002Ø.125

.375±.015(9,53±0,38)

.250±.015(6,35±0,38)

DIMENSION "B"

.125±.015(3,18±0,38)

1/4-28 UNF-2ATHREAD

.250±.015(6,35±0,38)

TERMINALSEALANTIN STYLE "T"

(3,18 + 0,03 -0,05)

.064 ± .005(1,63 ± 0,13)

.020 ± .004(0,51 ± 0,10)

.062 ± .004(1,57 ± 0,10)

.032 ± .004(0,81 ± 0,10)

.064 ± .005(1,63 ± 0,13)

.016 ± .004(0,41 ± 0,10)

.046 ± .004(1,17 ± 0,10)

.021 ± .004(0,53 ± 0,10)

GR

AY

HIL

L 910

12

Ø.125 + .001 - .002(3,18 + 0,03 - 0,05)

.375±.015(9,53±0,38)

.250±.015(6,35±0,38)

1/4-28 UNF-2ATHREAD

.250±.015(6,35±0,38)

TERMINALSEALANTIN STYLE "T"

.658±.015(16,71±0,38)

.153±.015(3,89±0,38)

.234±.015(5,94±0,38)

Solder Lug Style

PC Mount Style

Front view same asPC Mount style.


SERIES 50 SERIES 510.5" Diameter, 200mA,.698" Behind Panel

FEATURES• Optional Complete Seal for

PC Board Assembly and Cleaning• Small 1/2" Diameter• Choice of 22.5°, 30°, 36°, 45°, 60°

and 90° Angles of Throw• Up to 4 Poles on 1 Deck• Up to 16 Positions Per Switch• PC or Solder Lug Termination• Positive Shaft Grounding for

EMI/RFI Shielding

Angle of Angle Angle of AngleThrow A Throw A

22.5° 101.25° 45° 112.5°30° 105° 60° 120°36° 108° 90° 135°

D B

Dimension Style T All Others All 22.5°

.576 ± .015 .537 ± .015 .537 ± .015(14,63 ± 0,38) (13,64 ± 0,38) (13,64 ± 0,38)

Dimension Series 50 Series 51

.500 ± .015 .562 ± .015(12,70 ± 0,38) (14,27 ± 0,38)

Side ViewAll others as shown at left

Grayhill part number and date codemarked on label. Customer partnumber marked on request. Militarypart number marked when required.

PC TERMINAL DETAILAll angles of throw, except 22.5°

PC COMMON DETAILAll angles of throw, except 22.5°

SOLDER LUG TERMINAL DETAILAll angles of throw, except 22.5°

SOLDER LUG TERMINAL DETAIL 22.5°

Rotary4


Rotary S

witches


DIM. A ±.005 (0,13)

POLE 1

POS. 1

THREE POLESDimension A, diameter circle of common centers,is .175 (4,45) for Solder Lug and .232 (5,89) for PC.

CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS AND REAR VIEWS: Solder Lug and PC Mount

TWO POLES

Circuit as Viewed From Shaft End

TWO POLES

TWO POLES

TWO POLESONE POLE

ONE POLE

ONE POLE

ONE POLE

FOUR POLES

TWO POLES

THREE POLES

ONE POLE

TWO POLESONE POLE

Rear View

7

8

910

1415

16

1311

12

12

3456

C2

C1

7

89 10

11

12

1

234

5

6

7

89 10

11

12

1

234

5

6

C2

C1

7

89 10

11

12

1

234

5

6

C3

C2C1

7

89 10

11

12

1

234

5

6

C3C4

C2C1

6

78

9

10

1

23

4

5

C2

C1

6

78

9

10

1

23

4

5

5

6 7

8

1

23

4

5

6 7

8

1

23

4

C2

C1

1

2

3

4

5

6

1

2

3

4

5

6C2

C1

3 4

12

3 4

12

C2

C1

7

8

910

1415

16

1311

12

12

3456

90° Angleof Throw

60° Angleof Throw

45° Angleof Throw

30° Angleof Throw

36° Angleof Throw

22.5° Angleof Throw

COMMON TERMINAL(1 POLE)

SOLDER LUG

.382 ± .015 (9,70 ± 0,13)DIAMETER CIRCLE OFTERMINAL CENTERS

.156 ± .015(3,96 ± 0,13)

LOCATION OF COMMONS2 POLES

11.25˚

22.5˚POS. 1

PC MOUNT.500 ± .015(12,7 ± 0,13)DIA. CIRCLEOF CENTERS

.156 ± .015(3,96 ± 0,13)


COMMON TERMINAL(1 POLE)

11.25˚

22.5˚POS. 1

COMMON TERMINAL (1 POLE).382 ± .005 (9,70 ± 0,13)DIAMETER CIRCLE OFTERMINAL CENTERS

.156 ± .005 (3,96 ± 0,13)


30˚

15˚POS. 1

18˚

36˚

.320 ± .015 (8,13 ± 0,38) DIAMETERCIRCLE OF TERMINAL CENTERS


COMMON TERMINAL (1 POLE)

POS. 1

.125 ± .015(3,18 ± 0,38)

45˚

22.5˚




POS. 1

.125 ± .015(3,18 ± 0,38)

60˚

30˚


POS. 1

.125 ± .015(3,18 ± 0,38)



45˚

90˚


POS. 1

.125 ± .015(3,18 ± 0,38)


.320 ± .015 (8,13 ± 0,38) DIAMETER CIRCLE OF TERMINAL CENTERS

.175 ± .005 (4,45 ± 0,13)DIAMETER CIRCLE OF COMMON CENTERSFOUR POLES

POS. 1

POLE 1

Rotary5


Rotary S

witches


SPECIFICATIONS

Military QualificationThe dimensions for qualified switches are thesame as those indicated in the drawings ofstandard switches. Switches with standardvariations, such as shaft and bushing length,which do not affect switch performance, canbe marked as qualified product. ContactGrayhill for complete information on variations.

36°, 45°, 60°, 90° (Series 50): The C and Mstyle switches are qualified to MIL-S-3786/20.They include the following:

Solder lug or PC terminalsWith or without panel seal

Series 50 qualified switches may be orderedby the ‘M’ number or by the Grayhill partnumber.30° (Series 51): The C and M style switchesare qualified to MIL-S-3786/35. They includethe following:

Solder lug or PC terminalsWith or without panel seal

Series 51 qualified switches may be orderedby the ‘M’ number or by the Grayhill partnumber.

Additional CharacteristicsContact Type and Forces: Shorting or non-shorting wiping contacts with over 80 grams ofcontact force.Shaft Flat Orientation: Flat opposite contactingposition of pole number one (see circuitdiagrams).Terminals: Switches have the full circle ofterminals, regardless of number of activeposition.Stop Strength: 7.5 pound-inches minimumRotational Torque: 8–24 ounce-inches,depending on the number of poles.

SPECIFICATIONS: Other

PROCESS SEALED–Style TSwitch can be mounted on PC board with othercomponents and subjected to wave solderingand conventional board cleaning techniques.No secondary wiring or soldering is necessary.

Bushing is o-ring sealed; epoxy potting sealsthe terminals and the rear of the switch. De-signed for PC assembly, this sealing techniquecan also be applied to solder lug terminalswitches. A bushing to panel seal can also beadded to the process sealed versions. Militaryqualified versions are available, see orderinginformation.

Electrical RatingsLife Expectancy: With the limiting criteria statedhere, the Series 50 and 51 with non-shortingcontacts will switch the following loads atatmospheric and reduced pressures for 25,000cycles of operations. One cycle is 360° rotationclockwise and 360° return.

At 85°C, atmospheric pressure200 mA, 28 Vdc resistive150 mA, 115 Vac resistive30 mA, 28 Vdc inductive100 mA, 28 Vdc lamp load75 mA, 220 Vac lamp load

At 25°C, reduced pressure (70,000 feet)200 mA, 28 Vdc resistive150 mA, 115 Vac resistive75 mA, 220 Vac resistive

Contact Resistance: 20 milliohms maximum,(10 milliohms initially).Insulation Resistance: 1,000 Mohmsminimum between mutually insulated parts.Voltage Breakdown: 600 Vac minimumbetween mutually insulated parts at standardatmospheric pressure.Life Expectancy: Listed for the voltage sourceand make and break current levels. ContactGrayhill for more information if any of thefollowing is true: the life limiting criteria aremore critical than those listed; longer operationis required; a larger make and break current isrequired; the operating environment includeselevated temperatures or reduced pressures.Contact Carry Rating: Switch will carry 6amperes continuously with a maximumcontact temperature rise of 20°C.

Materials and FinishesSwitch Base: ThermosetDetent Rotor: NylonShaft, Stop Blades, Stop Arm, Thrust washer,and Retaining Ring: Stainless steelDetent Balls: Steel, nickel-platedBushing: Zinc, tin-zinc platedDetent and Contact Springs: Stainless steelCommon Ring: Brass, gold-plated over silverplate.Terminals: Brass, gold-plated over silver plateand nickel plateRotor Contact: Precious metal alloy, gold-plated

Panel Seal: Silicone rubberShaft Seal: FluorosiliconeMounting Nuts: Brass, tin-zinc platedMounting Hardware: One mounting nut .089"thick by .375" across flats and one internaltooth lockwasher are supplied with the switch.Maximum Mounting Torque: 15in-lbs

1/4" SHAFT: Style K

POS. 1

CIRCLE SHOWINGDIMENSIONS OFHOLE TO BE CUT

IN PANEL.POS. 1POS. 1

Ø0.254 Ø0.280Ø0.380

0.2080.240 0.350

1/8"Shaft "E" Style "K" Style


.250±.015

.375±.015

+.002-.001

.250

.250±.015.340

±.005

.219±.004

Rotary6


Rotary S

witches


ADJUSTABLE STOPS: Style DAdjustable stops permit the user to set andreset the number of positions per poles. Shownin the diagram, a plastic washer can be removedto reveal slots at the base of the bushing. Stopblades can be inserted into the appropriate slotsto limit switch rotation. Positions per poleconfiguration can thus be changed to meet theneeds of the application. Dimensions are thesame as the fixed stop version, when plasticwasher is in place. Most desirable for prototypework. Readily available from local distributor.

Shaft and panel seal switchesare watertight to the panel. Theyare not totally process sealedlike the Style “T”. Panel is sealedby a gasket at the base of thebushing. Shaft is sealed by anO-ring inside the bushing. Aftermounting, seals do not alterswitch dimensions. See Style“S” (standard switches) andStyle “M” (military switches) inthe Choices and Limitationschart.

SHAFT AND PANEL SEAL: Styles S and M

SCREWDRIVER SLOTTED SHAFT: Style B

Form, fit and function equiva-lent to standard shaft switches.The dimensions shown haveevolved as the most popular forthis type of switch. See Style “B”in the Choices and Limitationschart. Previous users may haveordered these switches by anon-descriptive part numbercontaining a “Y”. ContactGrayhill, if in doubt about across-reference.

METRIC SHAFT AND BUSHING: Style E

Metric standard dimensions forthe shaft and bushing are shownin the drawing. Other dimensionsapproximately the same asshown in dimensional drawing.Contact Grayhill for exactdimensions. See Style “E” inthe Choices and Limitationschart.

SUGGESTED ADJUSTABLE STOPSUBSTITUTION GUIDE

Fixed Adj. Stop Fixed Adj. StopStop Style Stop StyleStyle Equivalent Style Equivalent

50A 50D 51A 51D50C 50CD 51C 51CD50CP 50CDP 51CP 51CDP50M 50CD* 51M 51CD*50MP 50CDP* 51MP 51CDP*50P 50DP 51P 51DP50S 50D* 51S 51D*50SP 50DP* 51SP 51DP*

*Form fit and function equivalents, but not watertight sealed tothe panel.

Stop BladeSlots

Plastic Washer Stop

Blades

ACCESSORY: Non-Turn WashersIn Inches (and millimeters)

Part No. 71J1103Designed to fit the double flatted bushingof the metric dimensioned bushing, thisnon-turn washer permits a round hole forthe bushing and the tab while still prevent-ing switch rotation. Washer is only soldwhen accompanied by a like number ofswitches. Washer is 302 stainless steel.

.250 ± .003(6,35 ± 0,08)

.060 ± .001(1,52 ± 0,25)

.400 ± .005

DIA. (10,16 ± 0,13)

90° ± 1°

.125 ± .005(3,16 ± 0,13)

.015 (0,38)RADIUS MAX.

.025 ± .001(0,64 ± 0,03)

Dimensions are in millimeters

Part No. 50J1066Cut round hole for the bushing and for thenon-turn tab. Washer fits the double Dbushing flats. Washer is sold only whenaccompanied by an order for a like numberof switches. Washer is 302 stainless steel.

C L

1,57 ± 0,08

5,08 ± 0,05

11,13 ± 0,13

DIA.

90˚ ± 1˚

0,64 ± 0,05

2,36 ± 0,13


0.032

0.375

0.125 0.187

SEAL

"A"

.032±.005(0,81±0,13)

.125±.015(3,18±0,38)

.050±.005(1,27±0,13)

7,0±0,51

9,53±0,38

6,35±0,38)

4,0±0,03 M7 x 0,75

6,0±0,08

3,15±0,12

"A"

Part No. 50J5140-4Designed to fit the single flatted bushing ofthe "K" style switches, this non-turn washerprevents switch rotation when using a fullround hole in the panel. Washer is only soldwhen accompanied by a like number ofswitches. Washer is 302 stainless steel.

Rotary7


Rotary S

witches


CHOICES AND LIMITATIONS: Series 50

Angle Number Number of Shorting orStyle Choices1 of of Positions Non-Shorting

Series Std., 1/8" Shaft 1/4" Shaft Metric, 4mm Shaft Terminals Throw Poles Per Pole Contacts

36°

45°

60°

90°

SolderLug

50

PC Mount

1 02 thru 10 N or S2 02 thru 05 N or S

1 02 thru 08 N2 02 thru 04 N

1 02 thru 06 N2 02 or 03 N

1 02 thru 04 N2 02 N

A = Standard, 1/8" ShaftB = Screwdriver Slot ShaftC = Military, Without Panel SealD = Adjustable Stop (Adj. Stop)

E = Metric, 4mm ShaftK = 1/4" ShaftM = Military

P = PC Mount TerminalsS = Shaft/Panel Seal (S/P Seal)T = Process Sealed

AATBBSBSTBTDSST

36°

45°

60°

90°


1 02 thru 08 N2 02 thru 04 N

1 02 thru 06 N2 02 or 03 N

1 02 thru 04 N2 02 N

EESESTETEBEBSEBSTEBT

KKSKSTKTKBKBSKBSTKT

Standard Style

BPBPTBSPBSPTDPPPTSPSPT

KPKPTKSPKSPTKBPKBSPKBSPTKBT

EPEPTESPESPTEBPEBSPKBSPTEBT

Angle Number Number of Shorting orStyle Choices of of Positions Non-Shorting


36°

45°

60°

90°

SolderLug

50

PC Mount


1 02 thru 08 N2 02 thru 04 N

1 02 thru 06 N2 02 or 03 N

1 02 thru 04 N2 02 N

CCBCBTCDCTMMBMBTMT

36°

45°

60°

90°


1 02 thru 08 N2 02 thru 04 N

1 02 thru 06 N2 02 or 03 N

1 02 thru 04 N2 02 N

EMEMBEMBTEMT

Military Style

CBPCBPTCDPCPCPTMBPMBPTMPMPT

EMBPEMBPTEMPEMPT

KMKMBKMBTKMT

KMBPKMBPTKMPKMPT

Rotary8


Rotary S

witches



A = Standard, 1/8" ShaftB = Screwdriver Slot ShaftC = Military, Without Panel SealD = Adjustable Stop (Adj. Stop)

E = Metric, 4mm ShaftK = 1/4" ShaftM = Military

P = PC Mount TerminalsS = Shaft/Panel Seal (S/P Seal)T = Process Sealed

Angle Number Number of Shorting orStyle Choices of of Positions Non-Shorting


SolderLug

51

PC Mount

CCBCBTCDCTMMBMBTMT

EMEMBEMBTEMT

Military Style

CBPCBPTCDPCPCPTMBPMBPTMPMPT

EMBPEMBPTEMPEMPT

30°

1 02 thru 12 N or S2 02 thru 06 N or S3 02 thru 04 N or S4 02 or 03 N or S

30°


1 Contact Grayhill if 1/4" or metric shaft required with a 22.5° angle of throw.

KMKMBKMBTKMT

KMBPKMBPTKMPKMPT

Angle Number Number of Shorting or Style Choices1 of of Positions Non-Shorting

Series Std., 1/8" Shaft 1/4" Shaft Metric, 4mm Shaft1 Terminals Throw Poles Per Pole Contacts

22.5°

30°Solder

Lug

51

PC Mount



A ATB BTS STBS BST

AATBBSBSTBTDSST

EESESTET

KKSKSTKT

Standard Style

P PTBP BPTSP SPTBSP BSPT

BPBPTBSPBSPTDPPPTSPSPT

KPKPTKSPKSPT

EPEPTESPESPT

22.5°

30°



SolderLug

PC MountSEE BELOW SEE BELOW

SEE BELOW SEE BELOW

Rotary9


Rotary S

witches


Series: Series 51 (30°; 22.5°)Style*: Letters from Choices ChartAngle of Throw: Use 22 (for 22.5°), 30

51SPT30–01–1–12S–F

Stop Arrangement: Needed only with 1 pole switches withmaximum positions. Leave blank for continuous rotation;add F for fixed stop.Type of Contacts: N = Non-shorting, S = ShortingPositions Per Pole: 02 as a minimum to the maximum allowablefor the angle of throw and the number of poles per the Choices Chart.Use Letters AJ in this location if adjustable stop switch is ordered.Poles per Deck: See chartNumber of Decks: 01 only

ORDERING INFORMATION: Series 50

ORDERING INFORMATION: Series 51

ADDITIONAL FEATURESEconomy keylock switch, isolated position,spring return, and coded switches are availablein similar series. See Keylock and SpecialFunction Rotary Switch sections.


Series: Series 50 (36°, 45°, 60°, or 90°)Style*: Letters from Choices ChartAngle of Throw: 36, 45, 60, or 90

50AT36–01–1–10N–F

Stop Arrangement: Needed only with 1 pole switches withmaximum positions. Leave blank for continuous rotation;add F for fixed stop.Type of Contacts: N = Non-shorting, S = ShortingPositions Per Pole: 02 as a minimum to the maximum allowablefor the angle of throw and the number of poles per the Choices Chart.Use Letters AJ in this location if adjustable stop switch is ordered.Poles per Deck: See chartNumber of Decks: 01 only

* All rotary switches that are required to have military designated markings and testing adhering to MIL-3786 are to be ordered by specifying the military part number identified on the appropriate slash sheet.

* All rotary switches that are required to have military designated markings and testing adhering to MIL-3786 are to be ordered by specifying the military part number identified on the appropriate slash sheet.

Rotary10


Rotary S

witches


Solder Lug Style

PC Mount Style

FOR REARVIEWS, SEEFOLLOWINGPAGE.

FOR REARVIEWS, SEEFOLLOWINGPAGE.

ANGLE OF ANGLETHROW A

30° 105°36° 108°


SOLDER LUG COMMON

GR

AY

HIL

L2

110

9.500Ø

± .015(12,70 ± 0,38)

.203 ± .003(5,16 ± 0,08)ACROSSBUSHINGFLATS

A

POS. 1

.094 ± .010(2,39 ± 0,25)

.375 ± .015(9,53 ± 0,38)

.250 ± .015(6,35 ± 0,38)

Ø .125 ± .002(3,18 ± 0,06)

1/4-28 UNF-2ATHREAD

.250 ± .015(6,35 ± 0,38)

.480 ± .020 (12,19 ± 0,51)

.125 ± .015(3,18 ± 0,38)

SERIES 560.5" Diameter, 200mA,.355" Behind Panel

FEATURES• Requires Minimum Distance Behind

the Panel• Adjustable Stop Types Provide

Prototypes Immediately• Industrial Quality, Economically

Priced• RoHS Compliant

PC TERMINAL DETAIL

PC COMMON

.110 ± .015(2,79 ± 0,38)

.016 ± .004 SQ.(0,4 ± 0,10)

.046 ± .004(1,2 ± 0,10)

.016 ± .004(0,4 ± 0,10)

.110 ± .015(2,79 ± 0,38)

Ø .025 ± .002(0,64 ± 0,05)ANGLE OF ANGLE

THROW A

30° 105°36° 108°


SOLDER LUG TERMINAL DETAIL

.063 ± .005(1,60 ± 0,13)

.016 ± .004(0,41 ± 0,10)

.046 ± .004(1,17 ± 0,10)

.020 ± .004(0,51 ± 0,10)

.125 ± .015(3,18 ± 0,38)

Ø .062 ± .002(1,58 ± 0,51)


GR

AY

HIL

L2

110

9.500Ø

± .015(12,70 ± 0,25)

.203 ± .003 (5,16 ± 0,08)ACROSS BUSHING FLATS

A

POS. 1

.094 ± .010(2,39 ± 0,25)

Ø .125 ± .002(3,18 ± 0,06)

.250 ± .015(6,35 ± 0,38)

.375 ± .015(9,53 ± 0,38)

.250 ± .015(6,35 ± 0,38)


.377 ± .020(9,58 ± 0,51)

.110 ± .015(2,79 ± 0,38)

Rotary11


Rotary S

witches


CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS AND REAR VIEWS: PC Mountable AND Solder Lug Terminals

Rear View Circuit as Viewed From Shaft End

30° Angleof Throw

ONE POLE

TWO POLES

36° Angleof Throw

PC Mount Solder LugDimension Terminals Terminals

A .184 ± .015 .126 ± .015(4,67 ± 0,38) (3,20 ± 0,38)

FOUR POLES

ONE POLE

TWO POLES

15°

30° TYP.

.366 ± .015(9,30 ± 0,38) DIA. CIRCLE OF CENTERS

.190 ± .015 (4,83 ± 0,38)DIA. CIRCLE OF CENTERS (PC MOUNT AND SOLDER LUG)

COMMON LOCATIONFOR 1 POLE SWITCH


POS. 1


18°

36° TYP.

DIMENSION ADIA. CIRCLE OF CENTERS



POS. 1

15°

30° TYP.


.190 ± .015 (4,83 ± 0,38)DIA. CIRCLE OF CENTERS (PC MOUNT AND SOLDER LUG) POS. 1

7

89 10

11

12

1

234

5

6

C2

C1

6

78

9

10

1

23

4

5

7

89 10

11

12

1

234

5

6

7

89 10

11

12

1

234

5

6

C3C4

C2C1

C2

C1

6

78

9

10

1

23

4

5

SPECIFICATIONSElectrical RatingsChart shown for non-shorting (break before make)contacts, resistive load.

300

200

0

0 10 20 30

CYCLES x 1000115 Vac 0r 30 Vdc

CU

RR

EN

T -

MIL

LIA

MP

S

100

One cycle is 360° rotation clockwise and 360°return. The data for the curve was measured atsea level, 25°C and 68% relative humidity withthe life limiting criteria which follows.Contact Resistance: 100 milliohms maximum,(15 milliohms initially).Insulation Resistance: 10,000 Mohmsminimum between mutually insulated parts(50,000 Mohms initially).Voltage Breakdown: 600 Vac minimumbetween mutually insulated parts at standardatmospheric pressure.Life Expectancy: As determined from the load-life curve for the current to be switched. ContactGRAYHILL for more information if any of thefollowing is true: the life limiting criteria are more

critical than those listed; longer operation isrequired; a larger make and break current isrequired; the operating environment includeselevated temperatures or reduced pressures.Contact Carry Rating: Switch will carry 6amperes continuously with a maximumcontact temperature rise of 20°C.

Additional CharacteristicsContact Type and Forces: Shorting or non-shorting wiping contacts with over 25 grams ofcontact force.Shaft Flat Orientation: Flat opposite contactingposition of pole number one (see circuit diagrams).Terminals: Switches have the full circle ofterminals, regardless of number of active positions.Stop Strength: 7.5 lb-in. minimumRotational Torque: 3.5 to 9 oz-in. (21-53 mN-m), depending on the number of poles.Bushing Mounting: Required for switches withstops, and recommended for switches withoutstops.Meets MIL-S-3786 for:High and medium shock; Vibration (10 to 2,000Hz); Thermal shock (-65° to 85 ° C); Salt spray;Explosion; Stop strength (7.5 in-lbs. minimum(.85 N-m); Terminal strength; Sealed styleswithstand water pressure of 15 PSI minimum(103 KPa) without leakage.

Materials and FinishesHousing: Zinc die cast, tin zinc platedMounting Nut: Brass, tin zinc platedLockwasher: Spring steel, zinc platedPanel Seal: Silicone rubberShaft and Stop Arm: Zinc die castRetaining Ring: 302 Stainless steel, passivatedShaft Seal: Silicone rubberStop Pins: 303 Stainless steel, passivatedDetent Rotor: Molded thermoplasticDetent Spring: Tinned music wireDetent Balls: Steel, nickel-platedContact Spring: Stainless steel, passivatedRotor Contact: Brass, silver over nickel plateCommon Ring: Brass, gold over silver overnickel plateTerminals: Brass, gold over silver over nickelplateSwitch Base: Molded thermoset plasticMounting Hardware: One mounting nut .089"thick by .375" across flats and one internal toothlockwasher are supplied with the switch.

Rotary12


Rotary S

witches


SHAFT AND PANEL SEAL: Style S

SCREWDRIVER SLOTTED SHAFT: Option

ADJUSTABLE STOP SWITCHES

SUGGESTED ADJUSTABLE STOP SUBSTITUTION GUIDE

Fixed Stop Adjustable Stop Fixed Stop Adjustable StopStyle Style Equivalent Style Style Equivalent

56A 56D 56B 56BD56S 56SD 56BS 56BSD56P 56DP 56BP 56BDP56SP 56SDP 56BSP 56BSDP

ADJUSTABLE STOP PINS

ADJUSTABLE STOP PINS

REMOVABLESTICKER FORADJUSTMENTOF STOPS

REMOVABLESEAL WASHER FOR ADJUSTMENTOF STOPS

Panel is sealed by a flat rubberseal washer at the base of bush-ing. Shaft is sealed by an O-ring inside the bushing. Afterthe switch is mounted, seals donot alter the dimensions of theunsealed style.

Series 56 rotary switches areavailable with a screwdriverslotted shaft with dimensionsas shown. Available in thestyles, angles of throw and pole/positions combinations shownin the choice and limitationschart.

SEAL

Two stop pins and an adhesive backed stickeror seal washer are provided. Sticker istemporarily removed to locate stop pins as

desired to limit the shaft rotation. All dimensionsare identical to the fixed stop switch counterpart.

In Inches (and millimeters)

Cut round hole for the bushing and for thenon-turn tab. Washer fits the double Dbushing flats. Washer is sold only whenaccompanied by an order for a like numberof switches. Washer is 302 stainless steel.

Part No. 50J1066

ACCESSORY: Non-Turn Washer

.250 ± .003(6,35 ± 0,08)

.060 ± .001(1,52 ± 0,25)

.400 ± .005

DIA. (10,16 ± 0,13)

90° ± 1°

.125 ± .005(3,16 ± 0,13)


.025 ± .001(0,64 ± 0,03)

AdjustableStop

ScrewdriverSlotted Shaft

Shaft andPanel Seal

A.032 ± .005(0,81 ± 0,13)

.125 ± .015(3,18 ± 0,38)

.050 ± .005(1,27 ± 0,13)

Rotary13


Rotary S

witches


Angle Number Number Of Shorting Or Of Of Positions Non-Shorting

Throw Poles Per Pole Contacts


30°

36°

ScrewdriverSlotted ShaftEquivalent

AdjustableStops1

Shaft/PanelSeal

PC MountTerminals

Solder LugTerminals

StyleDesignation

FEATURES

A X B

S X X BS

P X BP

SP X X BSP

D X X BD

SD X X X BSD

DP X X BDP

SDP X X X BSDP

1 Adjustable stop versions allow selection of 2 positions to the maximum number of positions per pole.


1 02 thru 12 N or S2 02 thru 06 N or S4 02 or 03 N or S


SeriesStyle: Letters from Choices ChartAngle of Throw: 30 or 36°

56A36–01–1–10N–F

Stop Arrangement: The suffix C or F must be added to a one poleper deck switch with the maximum number of positions to indicatecontinuous rotation (C) or fixed stops (F) between position 1 andthe last position.Type of Contacts: N = Non-shorting, S = ShortingPositions Per Pole: 02 as a minimum to the maximum allowable for the angle of throw and number of poles per the Choices Chart. Use the letters AJ in this location if adjustable stop switch is to be ordered.Poles per Deck: Limited by angle of throw. See chartNumber of Decks: 01 only

STANDARD OPTIONSAvailable from your local Grayhill DistributorFor prices and discounts, contact a local SalesOffice, an authorized local Distributor, or Grayhill.Not available thru Distributors when Intermixingof shorting and non-shorting contacts. ContactGrayhill.

A = Standard, 1/8" ShaftB = Screwdriver Slot ShaftD = Adjustable Stop (Adj. Stop)

P = PC Mount TerminalsS = Shaft/Panel Seal (S/P Seal)

Rotary14


Rotary S

witches


SERIES 192" Diameter, 15 Amp

FEATURES• UL Recognized• Rugged Construction• Choice of Termination

Solder Lug Terminals ‘Faston’ Terminals

All dimensions not shownare the same as theSolder Lug Terminals.



1.687 ± .030(42,85 ± 0,76)

DIA.


.950 ± .060(24,13 ± 1,52)

.375 ± .020(9,53 ± 0,51)

.500 ± .020(12,7 ± 0,51)

BUSHING KEYWAY.066 ± .003 WIDE(1,68 ± 0,08).036 ± .005 DEEP(0,91 ± 0,13)

.344 ± .010(8,74 ± 0,25)

.250 ± .005 (6,35 ± 0,13) DIA.

HEX MTG NUT9/16 ± .010 (14,29 ± 0,25)ACROSS FLATS3/32 ± .010 (2,38 ± 0,25)THICK

.88(22,4)

2.00(50,8)

SOLDER TERMINALSWIRE HOLE .125 (3,18)

1.687 ± .030(42,85 ± 0,76)

DIA.

.88(22,4)

2.28(57,91)

DIA.

FOR AMP .250 SERIES OR EQUIVALENT WIRE HOLE .080" (2,03)

.219 ± .005(5,56 ± 0,15)

SPECIFICATIONSElectrical RatingRated: UL Recognition: File Number E3528915 Amps, 120 Vac, non-inductive load.One Amp, 120 Vdc, non-inductive load.Additional Grayhill Rating: 7.5 Amps, 220 Vac,non-inductive load.This rating is based on the following criteria:Overload—50 operations at 125% rated ac loadand 150% rated DC load.Endurance—6000 operations at rated load with900 Vac dielectric strength before and after test.Temperature Rise—Not to exceed 30°C whencarrying rated ac load after endurance test.Contacts will carry 20 Amps at 115 volts AC with30°C maximum temperature rise.Contact Resistance: (Measured at 2 Vdc andapproximately 100 mA) for new switchapproximately 10 milliohms.Insulation Resistance: Approximately 100,000Mohms. Between mutually insulated parts.Voltage Breakdown: Approximately 2500 Vacbetween mutually insulated parts.

Materials and FinishesRotor Contact: Silver alloyStator Contact: Silver alloyShaft: 303 Stainless steelStop Rivet: Steel, tin/zinc-platedMounting Bushing: Brass, tin/zinc-platedBase and Drive Hub: Heat resistant, electricalgrade phenolic.Mounting Nut: Brass, tin/zinc-plated or stain-less steel.

Detent Mechanism: Brass, silver-plated“Faston” Terminal: Brass, silver-platedSolder Terminal: Brass, silver-platedMounting Hardware: One mounting nut 9/16"across flats, 3/32" thick and one non-turn washer(see detail) are supplied with each switch.

Additional CharacteristicsSingle Pole, Single Deck: 2 to 11 positionsplus common 30° Indexing.Contacts: Non-shorting typeStops: A rivet provides the fixed stop on allswitches. Minimum number of positions is 2,and maximum is 11. Terminal 12, the common,is isolated from rotation.Rotational Torque: 30 to 75 ounce-inches ona new switch. Approximately 22 ounce-inchesafter 25,000 cycles of operation.Contact Force: Approximately 12 ouncesShaft Flat Orientation: Opposite point of con-tact (see circuit diagram).

ACCESSORIESScrew Terminal AdapterSpring loaded, plug-in adapters for ‘Faston’Terminals provide excellent mechanical fit andelectrical contact. Adapter material is brasstin-plated. The terminal adapters are avail-able with a 6-32 thread (-1) or 8-32 thread(-2). A 1/4" panhead screw is provided aspart of the adapter.

Circuit Diagram viewed fromshaft end with switch in position #1

Non-Turn Washer Detail.625 ± .010

(15,88 ± 0,25)DIA.

.187 ± .003(4,75 ± 0,08)

.500 ± .005(12,7 ± 1,27)

.060 ± .010(1,52 ± 0,25)

.093 + .015/ – .000(2,36 + 0,38/ – 0,00)

.025 ± .002(0,64 ± 0,05)

Part No. SC906-1 .........6-32 ThreadPart No. SC906-2 .........8-32 Thread

Non-Turn WasherBrass, tin/zinc-plated washer, detailed abovemay be purchased as a separate item.Part No. 19C1014.

ORDERING INFORMATIONPart Numbers: Designate as follows, using the2 digits after the dash to indicate the number ofpositions.For Faston Terminal:Use 19101-02UL through 19101-11ULFor Solder Terminal:Use 19001-02UL through 19001-11ULSpecials: Not available through Distributors.For special shafts, bushings, etc. contact Grayhill.


12 (COMMON)

3

5

7

89 10

24

6

1

11

OF BUSHING KEYWAY

Rotary15


Rotary S

witches


SPECIFICATIONSElectrical RatingRated: To make and break the following loads:1 amp at 115 Vac resistive; 0.5 amp at 220 Vacresistive; 1/4 amp, 115 Vac inductive; 1/50 amp,115 Vdc inductive, 1/10 amp, 6 to 28 Vdc inductive;1/10 amp, 115 Vdc resistive; 1 amp, 6 to 28 Vdcresistive; to carry 10 amps continuously.Contact Resistance: 10 milliohms initial. After25,000 cycles of operation 20 milliohmsmaximum.Insulation Resistance: 50,000 Mohmsminimum initiallyVoltage Breakdown: 1,000 Vac (500 Vac, orbetter after most environmental tests).Life Expectancy: 100,000 mechanical cyclesof operation normally.NOTE: Actual life is determined by a number offactors, including electrical loading, rate ofrotation, and environment, as well as maximumcontact resistance, minimum insulationresistance, and minimum voltage breakdownrequired at the end of life.

Materials and FinishesSwitch Base: Melamine per MIL-M-14 (ASTM-D-5948)Cover, Stop Washers, Bushing: Brass, tin/zinc-platedMounting Nut: Brass, tin/zinc-plated or stainlesssteel



Circuit Diagram(Switch is viewed from shaft end.)Note: Common Terminal islocated above Base Terminal 10.

.823 ± .020(20,90 ± 0,51)

DIA.

.219 ± .005(5,56 ± 0,13)

36° ± 5°

.564 ± .020(14,33 ± 0,51)

COMMON

7 89

10

123

4

6

5

C L OF BUSHINGKEYWAY

ONE POLE

C1

SERIES 50001" Diameter, 1 Amp, .470" Behind Panel

FEATURES• High Quality at a Low Price• High Contact Force Provides Stable

Electrical and Mechanical Operation• Proven Reliability in Thousands of

Applications

Retaining Rings, Stop Arms, and ThrustWashers: Stainless steelShaft: Stainless steelTerminals (except common): Brass, tin platedRotor Contact: Phosphor bronze, silver-plated.0003" minimumStator (Base) Contact: Brass, silver-plated.0003" minimumCommon Plate: Brass, silver-plated .0003"minimumRotor Mounting Plate: Nylon fabric-basedlaminated Phenolic per MIL-T-1 5047.

Additional CharacteristicsStop Strength: 12 in-lbsRotational Torque: 12 in-ozs.Contacts: Shorting or non-shorting wipingcontacts with over 500 grams contact force.Shaft Flat Orientation: Opposite point ofcontact (See circuit diagram.)Environmental: These switches have passedthe following environmental testing: Altitudeand temperature; 100 hour salt spray; Vibration10 to 500 cps; Shock 30-G; Humidity; Fungus.Detent: A formed spring operating against aformed wave washer.

STANDARD OPTIONSSpecial TerminalsNot available through distributors.

ORDERING INFORMATIONThe Series 5000 switches are single deck, onepole switches of two to 10 positions. Ten positionswitches have continuous rotation. Ten positionfixed stop switches are available by specialorder.

The part number is 05001-XX with the numberof positions required (02,03, etc.) listed in placeof the XX. Complete part number by adding Nfor non-shorting contacts or S for shortingcontacts.


3/8-32UNEF-2ATHREAD

BUSHING KEYWAY.066 ± .002 (1,68 ± 0,05) WIDE.036 ± .005 (0,91 ± 0,13) DEEP FROM THE .375 (9,53) DIAMETER

.490 ± .020(12,45 ± 0,51)

1.015 ± .015(25,78 ± 0,38)

DIA.

TE

RM

INA

L 9

IN L

INE

WIT

H K

EY

WA

Y

.823 ± .015(20,9 ± 0,38)

.250 + .001/ – .002(6,35 + 0,03/ – 0,05) DIA.

.250 ± .020 (6,35 ± 0.51)

.250 ± .020 (6,35 ± 0.51)

.312 ± .020(7,93 ± 0,51)

Rotary16


Rotary S

witches


SPECIFICATIONSElectrical RatingRated: To make and break the following loads:1 amp at 115 Vac, resistive; 0.5 amp at 220Vac resistive; 1/4 amp, 115 Vac inductive; 1/50amp, 115 Vdc inductive; 1/10 amp, 6 to 28 Vdcinductive; 1/10 amp, 115 Vdc resistive; 1 amp,6 to 28 Vdc resistive; to carry 10 amps continu-ously.Contact Resistance: 10 milliohms initial. Af-ter 25,000 cycles of operation 20 milliohmsmaximum.Insulation Resistance: 50,000 Mohmsminimum initiallyVoltage Breakdown: 1,000 Vac, (500 Vac, orbetter after most environmental tests).Life Expectancy: 100,000 mechanical cyclesof operation normally. NOTE: Actual life isdetermined by a number of factors, includingelectrical loading, rate of rotation, and environ-ment, as well as maximum contact resistance,minimum insulation resistance, and minimumvoltage breakdown required at the end of life.

Materials and FinishesSwitch Base: Melamine per (MIL-M-14)ASTM-D-5948Cover, Stop Washers, Bushing: Brass, tin/zinc-platedContacts: Both shorting and non-shortingwiping contacts have over 300 gramscontact force.


Typical Terminal Detail (PCMount)

Terminal Location (PC Mount)

Solder Lug PC Mountable


.937 ± .020(23,80 ± 0,51)

DIA.

.219 ± .005(5,56 ± 0,13)

36° ± 5°

.564 ± .020(14,33 ± 0,51)

COMMON

APPROX..750 (19,05) DIA. OVER TERMINAL ENDS AT

INSERTION END

.109 ± .015(2,77 ± 0,38)

.531 ± .020(13,49 ± 0,51)

.050 ± .002(1,27 ± 0,05)

.096 ± .003(2,44 ± 0,08)

BASE TERMINAL.020 ± .002 (0,51 ± 0,05) COMMON TERMINAL.016 ± .002 (0,41 ± 0,05)

.187 ± .005(4,75 ± 0,13)

7 89

10

123

4

6

5


ONE POLE

C1

Circuit DiagramSolder Lug and PC Mount(Switch is viewed from shaft end.)Note: Common Terminal islocated above Base Terminal 10.

36° TYP. REF.

.113 (2,87) TYP.

.213 (5,41) TYP.

.347 (8,81) TYP.

.363 (9,22) TYP..525

(13,34) TYP.

.294 (7,47) TYP.

.250 + .001/ – .002(6,35 + 0,03/ – 0,05) DIA. 1.015 ± .015

(25,78 ± 0,38)DIA.

TE

RM

INA

L 9

IN L

INE

W

ITH

KE

YW

AY

BUSHING KEYWAY.066 ± .002 (1,68 ± 0,05) WIDE.036 ± .005 (0,91 ± 0,13) DEEP FROM THE .375 (9,53) DIAMETER

3/8-32UNEF-2ATHREAD

.578 ± .030(14,68 ± 0,76).250 ± .020

(6,35 ± 0,51)

.250 ± .020(6,35 ± 0,51)

.312 ± .020(7,93 ± 0,51)

SERIES 241" Diameter, 1 Amp,.580" Behind Panel

Retaining Rings, Stop Arms, and ThrustWashers: Stainless steelDetent Balls: Steel, nickel-platedShafts: Stainless steel, or plasticDetent: Opposing spring and ball in a hill andvalley raceway.Detent Springs: Tinned music wireTerminals (except common): Brass, tin plated.Rotor Contact: Steel shaft version—phosphorbronze, silver-plated .0003" minimum. Plasticshaft version—silver alloy.Stator (Base) Contact: Brass, silver-plated.0003" minimumCommon Plate, including Solder Lug or PCTab: Brass, silver-plated .0003" minimumRotor Mounting Plate: Nylon fabric-basedlaminated phenolic per MIL-T-15047Mounting Nut: Brass, tin/zinc-plated orstainless steel.

Additional CharacteristicsStop Strength: 12 in-lbsRotational Torque: 12 in-ozsShaft Flat Orientation: Opposite point of con-tact (See circuit diagram.)Environmental: These switches have passedthe following environmental testing: Altitudeand temperature, 100 hour salt spray; Vibration10 to 500 cps; Shock 30-G; Humidity; Fungus.PC Mount: PC Switches are furnished with 10base terminals for mounting purposes.

STANDARD OPTIONSSpecial TerminalsRFI GroundingNot available through distributors.

ORDERING INFORMATIONSwitches are single deck, one pole switches of2 to 10 positions. They have plastic or steelshaft, with solder lug or PC terminals, with eithershorting or non-shorting contacts (plastic shaftPC mount in non-shorting only). Ten positionswitches have continuous rotation; fixed stopswitch with a metal shaft is available by specialorder. Base part numbers are as follows:Lug style, steel shaft: 24001-X*Lug style, plastic shaft: 24B36-01-1-X*PC style, steel shaft: 24878-X*PC style, plastic shaft: 24P36-01-1-X*

The X is replaced with the number of positionsrequired (02, 03, etc.) Complete the part num-ber by adding N for non-shorting contacts or Sfor shorting contacts.


FEATURES• Positive Detent Provides Operator

Feedback• Stainless Steel or Plastic Shaft

Option• Unsurpassed Performance in

Numerous Applications

Rotary17


Rotary S

witches


Rotary S

witches

Contents: Mulit-Deck Rotary Switches

MULTI-DECKROTARY SWITCHES

• Maximal Circuitry Possibilities

• Wide Range of Sizes andRatings

• High Quality, Enclosed SwitchesIncluding Military Types


• High Current UL Types

Page

.5-.75" DIAMETER, 1/4 AMPStandard, Military SR39, Metric, PC Mount ...... Series 71 .........................2PC Mount ........................................................... Series 71 .........................4Process Sealed ................................................. Series 71 .........................7Concentric Shaft ................................................ Series 71 .........................8Adjustable Stop, Shaft/Panel Seal, Accessories Series 71 ..................... 12Choices Chart .................................................... Series 71 ...................... 14

.5" DIAMETER, 1/4 AMPStandard, Military SR13 .................................... Series 08 & 09 .............. 16PC Mount ........................................................... Series 08 & 09 .............. 18Choices Chart .................................................... Series 08 & 09 .............. 21

1" DIAMETER, 1 AMPStandard, Military SR04, UL.............................. Series 42, 43, 44, 54 .... 22PC Mount ........................................................... Series 42 ...................... 24Concentric Shaft, Add-A-Pot ............................. Series 43 & 54 .............. 25Choices Chart .................................................... Series 42, 43, 44, 54 .... 30Accessories ....................................................... Series 08, 12, 42 .......... 31

1.125" DIAMETER, 1/4 AMPMilitary Qualified SR36 ...................................... Series 53, 57, 59 .......... 32Choices Chart .................................................... Series 53, 57, 59 .......... 35

Rotary1


Rotary S

witches

Multi-Deck Rotary Switches

SERIES 71.5-.75" Diameter, 1/4 Amp

FEATURES• Performance and Value Leader• Molded-In Position Terminals• Choice of Shaft/Bushing Diameters• 30° and 36° Angles of Throw• Military Qualified MIL-DTL-3786/39

0.125" Diameter Shaft–Styles A and MA (and sealed versions) Rear Views–Style A, B, MA, MB(and sealed versions)

36° Angle of Throw

Terminal Detail

Note: Common location for a single pole perdeck switch. For common location onmultipole switches see circuit diagrams.

DIMENSIONS: Standard and Military In inches (and millimeters)

30° and 36° Angle of Throw may beinterposed on either shaft diameter.

30° Angle of Throw

All dimensions not shownare the same as above.

0.250" Diameter Shaft–Styles B and MB (and sealed versions)

Approx. Approx.No. of Dimension Dimension Weight No. of Dimension Dimension WeightDecks A B Grams Decks A B Grams

1 .761 (19,33) .031 (0,79) 14 7 2.349 (59,66) .312 (7,92) 262 .979 (24,87) .031 (0,79) 16 8 2.567 (65,20) .312 (7,92) 283 1.197 (30,40) .031 (0,79) 18 9 2.785 (70,74) .312 (7,92) 304 1.415 (35,94) .031 (0,79) 20 10 3.003 (76,28) .312 (7,92) 325 1.633 (41,48) .031 (0,79) 22 11 3.221 (81,81) .312 (7,92) 346 2.131 (54,13) .312 (7,92) 24 12 3.439 (87,35) .312 (7,92) 36

Angle C is 15° in 12 position switches and 36 ° in 10 position switches.

Grayhill part number and date code marked on detent cover label. Customer partnumber marked on request. Military part number marked when required.

1/4 32UNEF-2A THREAD

.125 + .001 –.002 DIA.(3,18 + 0,25 –0,05)

.312 ± .020(7,92 ± 0,51)

.250 ± .020(6,35 ± 0,51)

.375 ± .020(9,53 ± 0,51)

.562 ± .015(14,27 ± 0,38)

DIM. A ± .046 (1,17)

DIM. B REF.STUD PROJECTION(SEE CHARACTER-

ISTICS)

.687 ± .015 (17,45 ± 0,38)

DIA.

.094 ± .010(2,39 ± 0,25)

.203 ± .005(5,16 ± 0,13)

OF POSITION NO. 1

OF BUSHING FLATS

C

SEE CHART

C LC L

GR

AY

HIL

L

121

3 4

67

8

910

11

.500 ± .015(12,7 ± 0,38)

DIA.

.750 ± .020(19,05 ± 0,51)

OVER TERMINALS

SEE DETAIL

SEE NOTE

2 5

.312 ± .020(7,92 ± 0,51)

.250 + .001 –.002 DIA.(6,36 + 0,25 –0,05)

.250 ± .020(6,35 ± 0,51)

.375 ± .020(9,53 ± 0,51)

BUSHING KEYWAY.066 ± .002 (1,68 ± 0,05) WIDE BY.036 ± .003 (0,91 ± 0,08) DEEPFROM A .375 (9,53) DIA.

3/8-32UNEF-2A THREAD

.687 ± .015 (17,45 ± 0,38)

DIA.

C

SEE CHART

C L OF POSITION NO. 1

C L OF BUSHING KEYWAY

.219 ± .004(5,56 ± 0,10)

GR

AY

HIL

L

101

2 3

45

6

78

9

.500 ± .015(12,7 ± 0,38)

DIA.

.750 ± .020(19,05 ± 0,51)

OVER TERMINALS

SEE DETAIL

SEE NOTE

.034 ± .003(0,86 ± 0,08) .068 ± .005

(1,73 ± 0,13)

Rotary2


Rotary S

witches

Mulit-Deck Rotary Switches

DIMENSIONS: Metric All dimensions are in millimeters

36° Angle of Throw

Terminal Detail

Rear Views4mm Diameter Shaft–Style E and ES

Approx.No. of Dim. Dim. WeightDecks A B Grams

1 19,33 0,79 122 24,87 0,79 143 30,40 0,79 164 35,94 0,79 185 41,48 0,79 206 54,13 7,92 227 59,66 7,92 248 65,20 7,92 269 70,74 7,92 28

10 76,28 7,92 3011 81,81 7,92 3212 87,35 7,92 34

Angle C is 15° in 12 position switches and36° in 10 position switches.

Ø 17,45 ± 0,4

OF POSITION NO. 1

OF BUSHING FLATS

C

SEE CHART

6,00 + 0,00 –0,08

C LC L

M7,0 X 0,75 THREAD

14,27 ± 0,4

DIM. A ± 1,2


ISTICS)

Ø 4,00 ± 0,03

25,00 ± 0,5

8,00 ± 0,3

GR

AY

HIL

L

121

3 4

67

8

910

11

Ø 12,70± 0,4

19,05 ± 0,5OVER TERMINALS

SEE DETAIL

SEE NOTE

2 5

30° Angle of Throw

0,86 ± 0,07

1,73 ± 0,13

GR

AY

HIL

L

101

2 3

45

6

78

9

Ø 12,70 ± 0,4

19,05 ± 0,5OVER TERMINALS

SEE DETAIL

SEE NOTE


Grayhill part number and date code marked on detent cover label. Customer part number marked on request.

30° Angleof Throw

36° Angleof Throw

Switch is Viewed From Shaft End and Shown in Position No. 1.Note: All common terminals are located above base terminals as shown.

CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS: Standard, Military and Metric

ONE POLE TWO POLE THREE POLE FOUR POLE FIVE OR SIX POLE

ONE POLE TWO POLE

C1

C2

C310

11

12

1

234

5

6

7

89

C L

C4

C1

C2

C3

10 11

12

12

34

5

6

7

89

C LC1

C2

C3

C4

C5C610

1112

12

34

5

6

7

89

C LC LC1

C2

1011

12

1

234

5

6

7

89

43 2

1

10

98

5

6

7

C1


43 2

1

10

98

5

67

C1

C2

C L

C1

1011

12

1

234

5

6

7

89


Rotary3


Rotary S

witches


SERIES 71.5-.75" Diameter, 1/4 Amp, PC Mount

FEATURES• Terminals From One Side• Minimum Board Footprint• Choice of Shaft/Bushing Diameters• 30° and 36° Angles of Throw• Military Qualified MIL-DTL-3786/39

See pages F-39 through F-44 for specifications,accessories and ordering information.

36° Angle of Throw

Note: Common location for a single pole perdeck switch. For common location ontwo pole switches see circuit diagrams.

Dimension A Dimension A Dimension B Approx. Dimension A Dimension B Approx.No. of Standard Military All Weight No. of Standard Standard WeightDecks Style Style Styles Grams Decks Style Style Grams

1 .761 (19,33) .761 (19,33) .031 (0,79) 12 7 2.349 (59,66) .312 (7,92) 242 .979 (24,87) .979 (24,87) .031 (0,79) 14 8 2.567 (65,20) .312 (7,92) 263 1.197 (30,40) 1.415 (35,94) .031 (0,79) 16* 9 2.785 (70,74) .312 (7,92) 284 1.415 (35,94) 1.633 (41,49) .031 (0,79) 18* 10 3.003 (76,28) .312 (7,92) 305 1.633 (41,48) N.A. .031 (0,79) 20 11 3.221 (81,81) .312 (7,92) 326 2.131 (54,13) N.A. .312 (7,92) 22 12 3.439 (87,35) .312 (7,92) 34

All dimensions not shownare the same as above.


0.125" Diameter Shaft: Styles AF and MAF (and sealed versions) Rear Views: Styles AF, BF, MAF, MBF(and sealed versions)Military Qualified style MAF

includes a spacer deck betweendecks 2 and 3. See dimension chart.


30° Angle of Throw

0.250" Diameter Shaft: Styles BF and MBF (and sealed versions)Military Qualified style MBFincludes a spacer deck between decks2 and 3. See dimension chart.

Grayhill part number and date code marked on detent cover label. Customer partnumber marked on request. Military part number marked when required.

.687 ± .015(17,45 ± 0,38)

DIA.

.020 ± .003(0,51 ± 0,08) TYP.

.203 ± .005(5,16 ± 0,13)

TERMINAL NO. 1

.094 ± .010(2,39 ± 0,25)

CSEECHART

C L

SHAFT SHOWN IN POSITION ONE

OF BUSHING FLATS

C L

.875 (30°) .725 (36°) ± .015

(22,23, 18,42 ± 0,38)

.125 – .002 + .001(3,18 – 0,05 + 0,03)DIA.


.250 ± .020(6,35 ± 0,51)

.375 ± .020(9,53 ± 0,51)

.312 ± .020(7,92 ± 0,51)

DIM. A ± .046 (1,17)


ISTICS)

.562 ± .015(14,27 ± 0,38)

SEE NOTEBELOW

C L

C L

C L

.110 ± .010(2,79 ± 0,25)TYP..412 ± .010

(10,46 ± 0,25)TYP.

.015 ± .002(0,38 ± 0,05)

12

34

5 6

78

9

10

GR

AY

HIL

L

.500 ± .015(12,7 ± 0,38)

DIA.

.156 ± .010(3,96 ± 0,25)

TYP.

SEE NOTE

.368 (9,35) REF.

.125 ± .010(3,18 ± 0,25)TYP.

.037 ± .005(0,94 ± 0,13)TYP.

.075 ± .005(1,91 ± 0,13)

TYP. C LC L

12

34

5

6 78

910

11

12

.500 ± .015(12,7 ± 0,38)

DIA.

.368 (9,35) REF.

.125 ± .010(3,18 ± 0,25)TYP.

.156 ± .010(3,96 ± 0,25)

TYP.

.037 ± .005(0,94 ± 0,13)TYP.

.075 ± .005(1,91 ± 0,13)

TYP. C LC L

SEE NOTE

GR

AY

HIL

L

CSEECHART

.219 ± .004(5,56 ± 0,10)

.687 ± .015(17,45 ± 0,38)

DIA.

.875 (30°) .725 (36°) ± .015

(22,23, 18,42 ± 0,38) SHAFT

SHOWN IN POSITION ONE

OF BUSHING KEYWAY

C L

3/8 32UNEF-2A THREAD

.250 – .002 + .001(6,35 – 0,05 + 0,03)DIA.

.250 ± .020(6,35 ± 0,51)

.375 ± .020(9,53 ± 0,51)

.312 ± .020(7,92 ± 0,51)

BUSHING KEYWAY .066 ± .002 (1,68 ± 0,05) WIDE BY .036 ± .003 (0,91 ± 0,08) DEEP FROM A .375 (9,53) DIA.

Angle C is 15° in 12 position switches and 18° in 10 position switches.*Military style switch is 18 grams for 3 decks and 20 grams for 4 decks.

Rotary4


Rotary S

witches


Ø 17,45 ± 0,4

22,23 ± 0,4

0,51 ± 0,08 TYP.

6,00 + 0,00 –0,08

TERMINALNO. 1

OF BUSHING FLATS

C L

Ø 4,00 ± 0,03


ISTICS)

DIM. A ± 1,1725,00 ± 0,51

8,00 ± 0,3

14,27 ± 0,38

M7 X 0,75THREAD

SEE NOTEBELOW

C L

C L

C L

2,79 ± 0,25TYP.

10,46 ± 0,25

.0,38 ± 0,03TYP.

DIMENSIONS: Metric All dimensions are in millimeters

4mm Diameter Shaft: Style EF and ESF Rear Views

30° Angle of Throw


36° Angle of Throw

Approx. Approx.No. of Dim. Dim. Weight No. of Dim. Dim. WeightDecks A B Grams Decks A B Grams

1 19,33 0,79 12 7 59,66 7,92 242 24,87 0,79 14 8 65,20 7,92 263 30,40 0,79 16 9 70,74 7,92 284 35,94 0,79 18 10 76,28 7,92 305 41,48 0,79 20 11 81,81 7,92 326 54,13 7,92 22 12 87,35 7,92 34


Note: Common location for a single pole perdeck switch. For common location ontwo pole switches see circuit diagrams.

12

34

5

6 78

910

11

12

Ø 12,7 ± 0,38

9,35 REF.

3,18 ± 0,25TYP.

3,96 ± 0,25 TYP.

0,94 ± 0,13TYP.1,91 ± 0,13TYP.

C LC L

SEE NOTE

GR

AY

HIL

L

C LC L

7,62 ± 0,25

GR

AY

HIL

L

Ø 12,7 ± 0,38

3,96 ± 0,25 TYP.

SEE NOTE

9,35REF.

3,18 ± 0,25TYP.

0,94 ± 0,13TYP.1,91 ± 0,13TYP.

C LC L

C LC L

7,62 ± 0,25

18,42 ± 0,04

12

34

5 6

78

9

10

CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS: Standard, Military and Metric PC Mount

ONE POLE

TWO POLE

ONE POLE

TWO POLE

30° Angleof Throw

36° Angleof Throw

Circuit is Viewed From Shaft End and Shown in Position No. 1

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 11112

C1C2

C L

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 11112

OF BUSHING KEYWAY OR FLATS

C L

C12 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

C1


C L

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

C1C2

C L

Rotary5


Rotary S

witches


SERIES 71: PC Board Pattern In inches (and millimeters)

Spacer decks can be supplied to facilitate PC board layouts ofthree or more decks. A spacer deck does not have anyterminals and provides no switching function. Dimensionally, itrequires the same space as one normal switch deck. Spacerdeck can be placed at any location in the switch, per yourinstructions. Switches which include spacer decks are procuredunder a special part number.

Number of Poles Common Terminal Per Deck Hole Location

1 A2 A and B

Shown for a two deck switch.Bushing mount is recommended.

30° Angle of Throw 36° Angle of Throw

SERIES 71: PC MOUNT ACCESSORY

For printed circuit styles. Mounting bushing provides additionalsupport for the front end of the switch. Order separately byappropriate part number. Rotary switch discount applies.

1/8" and 1/4" Diameter Shaft StylesIn inches (and millimeters)

Metric Mount StylesIn millimeters

All Styles Except 71BT

.110 (2,79 )TYP.

.110 TYP. (2,79 )

SHAFT ENDOF SWITCH

.075 (1,91)TYP. .037 (0,94)

A

.300 (7,62) TYP.

B

COMMON TERMINAL HOLELOCATION (SEE CHART)

.110 (2,79 )TYP.

.110 TYP. (2,79 )

SHAFT ENDOF SWITCH

.075 (1,91)TYP. .037 (0,94)

A

.300 (7,62) TYP.

B

COMMON TERMINAL HOLELOCATION (SEE CHART)

OF COMMON FOR DECK ONE

C L

0.030 ±.001(0,76 ± 0,03)

.207 ±.005(5,26 ± 0,13)

.500±.002(12,7 ± 0,05)

C L

.255 ±.002 (6,48 ± 0,05) DIA.

0.368 ± .003(9,35 ± 0,08)

.130 ±.003(3,30 ± 0,08)

WASHER IS.032 (0,81) THICK

DIMENSIONS APPLY TO BOTH WASHERS.

FOR USE WITHSTYLE AF

PART 71C2054

FOR USE WITHSTYLE BF

PART 71C2053

.375 ± .002(9,53 ± 0,05)

.687(17,45)

DIA.C L

Ø 17.45±0.08

9.35±0.08

THICKNESS0.81 ±0.05

12.7±0.05

0.76 ±0.03

FOR USE WITHSTYLE EF

PART 71C2111

Rotary6


Rotary S

witches


No. of Dimension DimensionDecks A B

1 0.795 (20,19) 0.031 (0,79)2 1.040 (26,42) 0.053 (1,35)3 1.285 (32,64) 0.076 (1,93)4 1.530 (38,86) 0.098 (2,49)5 1.775 (45,09) 0.120 (3,05)


Shaft flat is opposite point of contact for polenumber one. Shaft is shown here in position 1.

Rear ViewStyle BT


CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS

Circuit is Viewed From Shaft Endand Shown in Position No. 1

TWO POLE

ONE POLE

STYLE 71BT: PC Board Pattern

Including Integral Front PlateStandoffs

36° Angle of Throw

.037 ± .005(0,94 ± 0,13).075 ± .005(1,91 ± 0,13) TYP.

.368 ± .005(9,35 ± 0,13)

.125 ± .010(3,18 ± 0,25)

.156 ± .010(3,96 ± 0,25)

C L C L

1 10

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

C1


C L

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

C1C2

C L.110 (2,79) 5 PLS.

OF COMMON TERMINAL

OF STAND-OFFS

POLENO. 1

.220 (5,59)

.440 (11,18)

.300 (7,62)

.0375(0,95)

.075 (1,91) 9 PLS.

C L OF SWITCH

.029 (0,74) Ø MIN. HOLE 33 PLS.

.250 (6,35)

.428 (10,87)

.500 (12,7)

.036 (0,91) Ø MIN. HOLE 2 PLS.

C LC L

SH

AF

T E

ND

OF

SW

ITC

H

SERIES 71.5-.75" Diameter, 1/4 Amp,Process Sealed

.725 ± .015(18,42 ± 0,38)

Ø .687 ± .015(17,45 ± 0,38)

.310 ± .010(7,87 ± 0,25)

.219 ± .004(5,56 ± 0,10)

COMMON TERMINAL

TERMINAL NO. 1

.030 ± .002(0,76 ± 0,05)TYP.

.020 ± .003(0,51 ± 0,08)TYP.

.250 + .001 –.002 DIA.(6,36 + 0,25 –0,05)

.275 ± .020(6,99 ± 0,51)

.250 ± .020(6,35 ± 0,51)

.375 ± .020(9,53 ± 0,51)

DIM. A ± .046(1,17)

DIM. BREF.

.562 ± .015(14,27 ± 0,38)

.100 ± .010(2,5 ± 0,25)

2 PLS.

C L

C L

C L

.015 ± .002(0,38 ± 0,05)TYP.

.110 ± .010(2,79 ± 0,25)TYP.

.015 ± .002(0,38 ± 0,05)

.449 ± .008(11,4 ± 0,20)

3/8-32UNEF-2A THREAD

.428 ± .008(10,87 ± 0,20)

18°

FEATURES• No Hand Soldering Required• Sealed to Resist Intrusion by Flux,

Solder and Cleaning Solutions• .75" Diameter• 250 mA for 20,000 Cycles• 36°, 1 or 2 Poles, Up to 5 Decks• 10 Positions, Continuous Rotation,

or 2-9 Positions With Fixed Stops

Rotary7


Rotary S

witches


SERIES 710.5 to 0.75" Diameter, 1/4 Amp,Concentric Shaft

FEATURES• Two Switches in the Panel Space

of a Single Shaft Rotary

CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS: Solder Lug Terminals


Solder Lug Terminals: Style C Rear Views30° and 36° Angle of Throw may beinterposed on either shaft diameter.

Terminal Detail

30° Angle of Throw


30° Angleof Throw

ONE POLE TWO POLE THREE POLE FOUR POLE FIVE OR SIX POLE

36° Angleof Throw

ONE POLE TWO POLE

Approx.Weight

Sec. A Sec. B Dimension A Dimension B Grams

1 1 1.415 (35,94) .032 (0,81) 242 1 1.633 (41,49) .032 (0,81) 263 1 2.131 (54,13) .312 (7,92) 281 2 1.633 (41,49) .032 (0,81) 262 2 2.131 (54,13) .312 (7,92) 283 2 2.349 (59,66) .312 (7,92) 301 3 2.131 (54,13) .312 (7,92) 282 3 2.349 (59,66) .312 (7,92) 303 3 2.567 (65,20) .312 (7,92) 32

Angle C is 15° in 12 position switches and 36 ° in 10 position switches.

No. of Decks


36° Angle of Throw


C

SEE CHART

OF POSITION NO. 1

OF BUSHING KEYWAY

C LC L

.687 ± .015 (17,45 ± 0,38)

DIA.

C L

.094 ± .010(2,39 ± 0,25)

.219 ± .004(5,56 ± 0,10)

.562 ± .015(14,27 ± 0,38)

DIM. A ± .046 (1,17)

DIM. B REF.STUD PROJECTION

3/8-32UNEF-2ATHREAD

.125 + .001 –.002 DIA.(3,18 + 0,25 –0,05)

.312 ± .020(7,92 ± 0,51)

SECTIONA

SECTIONB

CONTROLLED BY .250 (6,35)

DIA. SHAFT

CONTROLLED BY .125 (3,18)

DIA. SHAFT

.250 + .001 –.002(6,35 + 0,03 –0,05)DIA.

.250 ± .020(6,35 ± 0,05)

.375 ± .020(9,53 ± 0,05)

BUSHING KEYWAY .066 ± .002 (1,68 ± 0,05) WIDE BY.036 ± .003 (0,91 ± 0,08) DEEP FROM A .375 (9,53) DIA.

GR

AY

HIL

L

121

3 4

67

8

910

11

.500 ± .015(12,7 ± 0,38)

DIA.

.750 ± .020(19,05 ± 0,51)

OVER TERMINALS

SEE NOTE

2 5

SEE DETAIL

GR

AY

HIL

L

101

2 3

45

6

78

9

.500 ± .015(12,7 ± 0,38)

DIA.

.750 ± .020(19,05 ± 0,51)

OVER TERMINALS

SEE NOTE

SEE DETAIL

.034 ± .003(0,86 ± 0,08) .068 ± .005

(1,73 ± 0,13)

C1

1011

12

1

234

5

6

7

89


C LC1

C2

1011

12

1

234

5

6

7

89

C1

C2

C310

11

12

1

234

5

6

7

89

C L

C4

C1

C2

C3

10 11

12

12

34

5

6

7

89

C LC1

C2

C3

C4

C5C610

1112

12

34

5

6

7

89

C L

43 2

1

10

98

5

67

C1

C2

C L

43 2

1

10

98

5

6

7

C1


ADD-A-POT SWITCHESContact Grayhill for Series 71 Concentric Add-A-Pot or Add-A-Switch type switches.

Rotary8


Rotary S

witches




PC Mount: Style CF30° and 36° Angle of Throw may beinterposed on either shaft diameter.

Approx.Weight

Sec. A Sec. B Dimension A Dimension B Grams

1 1 1.415 (35,94) .032 (0,81) 242 1 1.633 (41,49) .032 (0,81) 263 1 2.131 (54,13) .312 (7,92) 281 2 1.633 (41,49) .032 (0,81) 262 2 2.131 (54,13) .312 (7,92) 283 2 2.349 (59,66) .312 (7,92) 301 3 2.131 (54,13) .312 (7,92) 282 3 2.349 (59,66) .312 (7,92) 303 3 2.567 (65,20) .312 (7,92) 32

No. of Decks

For additional dimensions and referencesfor shafts, flat orientation and bushingkeyway, see drawings for styles 71AF and71BF.

CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS: PC Mount Terminals

ONE POLE TWO POLE ONE POLE TWO POLE

36° Angle of Throw

30° Angle of Throw

30° Angle of Throw

Rear Views

Note: Common location for a Single Pole PerDeck Switch. For common location onmultipole switches see circuit diagrams.Grayhill part number and date code marked on detent cover label. Customer part number marked on request.

.020 ± .003(0,51 ± 0,08) TYP.

POSITION NO. 1

.687 ± .015(17,45 ± 0,38)

DIA.

.875 (30°) .725 (36°) ± .015

(22,23, 18,42 ± 0,38)

.562 ± .015(14,27 ± 0,38)

DIM. A

DIM. B REF.STUD PROJECTION

SECTIONA

SECTIONB

.125 + .001 –.002 DIA.(3,18 + 0,25 –0,05)

.312 ± .020(7,92 ± 0,51)

.250 + .001 –.002(6,35 + 0,03 –0,05)DIA.

.250 ± .020(6,35 ± 0,05)

.375 ± .020(9,53 ± 0,05)

SEE NOTEBELOW

C L

C L

C L

.110 ± .010(2,79 ± 0,25)TYP.

.412 ± .010(10,46 ± 0,25)TYP.

.015 ± .002(0,38 ± 0,05)

C L

.656(16,66)


COMMONDECK 1

SECTION A

COMMONDECK 1

SECTION B

SEE SOLDER LUG VERSION FOR SHAFT FLATS AND DIMENSIONS

12

34

5

6 78

910

11

12

.500 ± .015(12,7 ± 0,38)

DIA.

.368 (9,35) REF.

.125 ± .010(3,18 ± 0,25)TYP.

.156 ± .010(3,96 ± 0,25)

TYP.

.037 ± .005(0,94 ± 0,13)TYP.

.075 ± .005(1,91 ± 0,13)

TYP. C LC L

SEE NOTE

GR

AY

HIL

L

12

34

5 6

78

9

10

GR

AY

HIL

L

.500 ± .015(12,7 ± 0,38)

DIA.

.156 ± .010(3,96 ± 0,25)

TYP.

SEE NOTE

.368 (9,35) REF.

.125 ± .010(3,18 ± 0,25)TYP.

.037 ± .005(0,94 ± 0,13)TYP.

.075 ± .005(1,91 ± 0,13)

TYP. C LC L

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 11112


C L

C12 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

C1


C L

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

C1C2

C L

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 11112

C1C2

C L

36° Angle of Throw

Rotary9


Rotary S

witches


SPECIFICATIONS

Military Qualification MIL-DTL-3786/39The military style of the Series 71 rotary switchis qualified to MIL-DTL-3786/39. Completeelectrical rating information is listed on thefollowing page. The Series 71 rotary switchqualification includes the 30° and the 36° anglesof throw, in .125" (3,18) and .250" (6,35)diameter shafts, with solder lug terminals andprinted circuit terminals, in sealed and unsealedstyle switches. Standard variations such asshaft and/or bushing length, etc. that do notaffect the switch performance can also bemarked as qualified product. Contact Grayhillfor complete details.

Dimensionally the military style is the same asthe standard style with the exception of the PCversion of 3 or 4 decks; a spacer deck betweendecks 2 and 3 adds another deck length to the

SPECIFICATIONS: Materials and Finishes

switch without increasing the number of operativedecks.

Another difference in the standard and militarystyles is the mounting hardware. Ordered asoptions with a standard style switch these itemsare included with the military style switch: non-turn washer with solder lug style and a non-turnwasher plus a mounting bushing washer withthe PC terminal style.

Complete specification drawings are availablefrom Grayhill, Inc. for the standard militaryqualified products. Military qualified Series 71rotary switches may be ordered by the “M”number listed in Military Specification Sheet/39or by Grayhill part number. All qualified switcheswill be marked to the specification.

Military Shaft and Panel SealA shaft and panel seal is available to providewatertight mounting of the Series 71 standardmilitary style rotary switches. Sealing isaccomplished by an O-ring shaft seal and apanel seal washer. Panel seal dimensiondifferences are shown in the dimensionaldrawings. When the panel seal is compressed,dimensions are approximately the same as anunsealed switch. If the non-turn washersupplied with the switch is used, it should notbe allowed to extend entirely through thepanel when mounting a sealed switch.However, the bushing may be used as a non-turn device instead. Switches are providedwith a double flat bushing in styles whichinclude the letter A and with a bushing whichhas a keyway in the styles which include theletter B.

Materials and FinishesStandard StyleCover: Diallyl per (MIL-M-14) ASTM-D-5948 except for 71 BT (see bushing).Base and Deck Separator: Diallyl per(MIL-M-14) ASTM-D-5948Rotor Mounting Plate: ThermoplasticBushing: Zinc casting, tin/zinc-plated.Through Bolts and Nuts, Shaft and RearSupport Plate, Stop Pins and Stop Arm(All Others): Stainless steelShaft, Stop Plates, Stop Arm (71BT):Reinforced thermoplasticDetent Rotor: Reinforced thermoplastic for71BT; phenolic per (MIL-M-14) ASTM-D-5948 for all othersDetent Balls: Steel, nickel-platedDetent Springs: Tinned music wireRotor Contact: Silver alloy and berylliumcopperBase Contacts, Common Plate andTerminals: Brass, Gold plate .000005"minimum over Silver plate .00005" overnickel .00002".Front Support Plate (71 BT only):Tempered steel, tin/lead-plated.Interdeck Seal (71 BT Only): SiliconeExtension: Brass, unplated

Mounting Hardware: One mounting nut andone internal tooth lockwasher are supplied witheach switch. For switches with A in the styledescription, the nut is .062" (1,57) thick by.312" (7,92) across flats. For switches with B orC in the style description, the nut is .094" (2,39)thick by .562" (14,27) across flats. Nuts arebrass, tin/zinc-plated or stainless steel.

Materials and FinishesMilitary QualifiedCover, Base and Deck Separator: Diallyl per(MIL-M-14) ASTM-D-5948Rotor Mounting Plate: ThermoplasticBushing: Zinc casting, tin/zinc-platedThrough Bolts and Nuts, Shaft Extension,Lockwashers, Shaft and Rear SupportPlate, Stop Pins and Stop Arm (AllOthers): Stainless steelDetent Balls: Steel, nickel-platedDetent Springs: Tinned music wireRotor Contact: Silver alloy and berylliumcopperBase Contacts, Common Plate and Terminals:Brass, gold plate .000005" minimum over silverplate .00005" over Nickel .00002".

Detent Rotor: Phenolic per (MIL-M-14)ASTM-D-5948Mounting Hardware: One mounting nut andone internal tooth lockwasher are suppliedwith each Series 71 switch. For switches withStyle A in the description, the nut is .062"(1,57) thick by .312" (7,92) across flats. Forswitches with Style B or C in the description,the nut is .094" (2,39) thick by .562" (14,27)across flats. Nuts are brass, tin/zinc-plated orstainless steel.Additional Hardware: Each switch issupplied with a non-turn washer to use ifdesired. Additionally, each PC mount switchis supplied with a mounting bushing washer(see PC Mount Accessory). For switcheswith Style A in the description, non-turnwasher is stainless steel; for switches withStyle B in the description, non-turn washer isstainless steel. Mounting bushing washer(PC Mount Accessory) is brass, tin/zinc-plated.

Rotary10


Rotary S

witches


SPECIFICATIONS: Electrical Ratings, Others

Standard

Military

Electrical RatingsGeneralCharts: Charts shown are for non-shorting(break before make) contacts. Measurementswere made at 25°C and 68% relative humidity.The load life curves show the number ofrotational cycles which can be expected forthe voltage, current and type of load. Thus,for a standard style switch with a 300milliampere 115 Vac resistive load, theexpected life is 15,000 cycles. Reducing theload to 200 milliamperes increases the life to25,000 cycles. Life limiting or failure criteriaare listed in the rating sections which follow.Cycles: A cycle is a 360° rotation and a returnthrough all switch positions to the startingposition.Voltage: As listed in charts.

CYCLES x 1000

CU

RR

EN

TM

ILLI

AM

PS VOLTAGE 115 VAC

OR 30 VDCRESISTIVE

10 25 50

400300200100

500600

CYCLES x 1000

CU

RR

EN

TM

ILLI

AM

PS 250

20015010050

10 25 50

VOLTAGE 30 VDCINDUCTIVE

(250 MILLIHENRIES)

CYCLES x 1000

CU

RR

EN

TM

ILLI

AM

PS

VOLTAGE 115 VACOR 30 VDCRESISTIVE

10 25 50

400300200100

500600

800700

CYCLES x 1000

CU

RR

EN

TM

ILLI

AM

PS

VOLTAGE 30 VDCINDUCTIVE

(250 MILLIHENRIES)

10 25 50

20015010050

250

Electrical RatingsStandard StyleCurves are based on the following failurecriteria:Contact Resistance: 50 milliohms maximum(20 milliohms initially).Insulation Resistance: 1,000 megohmsminimum between terminals and shaft. (50,000megohms initially).Voltage Breakdown: 500 Vac minimumbetween mutually insulated parts.Current Rating: These switches will carry 4amperes with a maximum contact temperaturerise of 20°C. If the life limiting characteristicsare less critical than those shown above, ifelevated temperatures or reduced pressuresare involved, Grayhill can predict the switchlife for the application.Meet the Following Requirements of MIL-DTL-3786: Moisture Resistance: Medium andHigh Shock; Vibration (10 to 2,000 cps);Thermal Shock (-65°C to 85°C); Salt Spray,Explosion; and Stop Strength (10 in-lb).

Electrical RatingsMilitary StyleCurves are based on the following failurecriteria:Qualified to the following MIL-DTL-3786/39circuit values: (also see standard styledescription.) The Series 71 has been tested tomeet the requirements of MIL-DTL-3786, StyleSR39, the majority of which are listed here. At85°C approximately 68% relative humidity andsea level pressure, the switches have beentested to make and break the following loads,as stated in MIL-DTL-3786/39: 125mill iamperes at 28 Vdc resistive; 75milliamperes at 115 Vac resistive.

The switches have also been tested at reducedbarometric pressure (70,000 feet), 25°C atapproximately 68% relative humidity to makeand break the following loads as stated in MIL-DTL-3786/39: 50 milliamperes, 28 Vdc resistive;20 milliamperes, 115 Vac resistive. Whentested to the above loads at stated conditions,the Series 71 switches meet the following life-limiting criteria after 25,000 cycles of operationin accordance with MIL-DTL-3786/39.

Contact Resistance: 50 milliohms maximumafter life.Insulation Resistance: 1,000 megohmsminimum between terminals and shaft.Dielectric Strength: 500 Vac (atmosphericpressure) and 350 Vac (reduced pressure)between mutually insulated parts.

The Series 71 also meets the requirementsof MIL-DTL-3786/39 for moisture resistance,stop strength, rotational torque, vibration (10through 2,000 cps), medium and high shock,salt spray, explosion, thermal shock (-65°Cto 85°C) and terminal pull. When tested at sealevel, 25°C and 68% relative humidity withfailure criteria of 50 milliohms maximumcontact resistance and 500 Vac breakdownvoltage, these switches will make and break250 milliamps at 28 Vdc inductive (250millihenries) 500 milliamps at 28 Vdc resistive:500 milliamps at 115 volts Vac, 60 hertzresistive, for 10,000 cycles of operation.

Additional CharacteristicsStandard and Military StylesRotational Torque: 4-32 ounce-inches, (28-230 N•mm) depending on the number ofpoles per deck and the number of decks.Contacts: Shorting or non-shorting wipingcontacts with over 100 grams of contactforce.Shaft Flat Orientation: Opposite first positionpole no. 1 (See Circuit Diagrams).Terminals: Switches are provided with fullcircle of terminals regardless of the numberof active positions.Extended Studs: Switches of 6 or moredecks (or concentric switches of 4 or more)have longer studs and extra stud nuts forrecommended double end mounting. Studhole size is 1/16" diameter for #0-80 NF-2Athread.Stop Strength: 10 pound-inches.Mounting Bushing Strength: 10 pound-inches.

Rotary11


Rotary S

witches


ADJUSTABLE STOPS

Set and Reset Stops to Limit RotationForm, Fit, Function Equivalent to Fixed Stop Styles

The adjustable stop Series 71 rotary switches allow you tochange the number of positions per pole. Simply removeand relocate stop pins in the holes in the front of the switch.The pins are held in place by a self adhesive sticker whichfits over the front plate.

This feature is available in the Series 71 single shaftstandard switches with either 1/8" or 1/4" diameter shaftswith either PC or solder lug terminals. It is not available inmilitary qualified or concentric shaft styles.

All dimensions, ratings and characteristics are the same asthe fixed stop equivalent. The chart shown here describesthe adjustable stop style substitutions for the fixed stopstyles. Although Series 71 is not an exact dimensionalequivalent of the fixed stop styles of Series 8 and 9, it mostnearly represents a functional substitution.

Fixed Stop Adjustable Stop Style Substitution

08A 71AD09A 71AD

71A 71AD71AF 71ADF

71B 71BD71BF 71BDF71E 71ED71EF 71EDF

SHAFT AND PANEL SEAL

The shaft is sealed by an O-ring inside the bushing. Thepanel is sealed by an O-ring at the base of the bushing.

The seals do not alter the dimensions as shown in thedrawings when the switch is mounted.

The panel seal is silicone rubber. The shaft seal is an O-ringper MIL-P-5516B.

STOP PIN HOLES

STOP PINS

STICKER

PANEL SEAL

SHAFT “O” RING

Rotary12


Rotary S

witches

C L

1,57 ± 0,08

5,08 ± 0,05

11,13 ± 0,13

DIA.

90˚ ± 1˚

0,64 ± 0,05

2,36 ± 0,13



1/8" and 1/4" Diameter Shaft Switches

The bushing of the Series 71 switch is designed so the switch will not turnif the panel has been cut to fit the exact bushing shape. The bushing forthe 1/8" diameter shaft switch has a double flat; the 1/4" diameter shaftswitch has a keyway in the bushing. An alternate means of keeping theswitches from turning is to mount them with optional, non-turn washers.

Part number 50J1066 is made of Stainless Steel. It is supplied withmilitary switches with Style A in the description. When ordered forstandard product, a like number of switches must be ordered.

Part number 12C1087-1 is Brass, tin/zinc-plated and may be ordered forstandard product.

Part number SHH694-5 is Stainless Steel washer supplied with all militarystyle switches with Style B in the description.

PART NO. 12C1087-1STANDARD

ACCESSORIES: Non-Turn Washers In inches (and millimeters)

PART NO. 50J1066MILITARY AND STANDARDFOR 1/8" DIAMETER SHAFT

PART NO. SHH694-5MILITARY

FOR 1/4" DIAMETER SHAFT

4mm Diameter Shaft Switches

Non-Turn WasherFor styles E, ED, EF and EDF.Mounting bushing washer provides non-turnfeature.302 Stainless Steel.Part No. 71 J1103. Contact Grayhill for price.

.250 ± .003(6,35 ± 0,08)

.060 ± .001(1,52 ± 0,25)

.400 ± .005

DIA. (10,16 ± 0,13)

90° ± 1°

.125 ± .005(3,16 ± 0,13)


.025 ± .001(0,64 ± 0,03)

C L

.125 ± .010(3,16 ± 0,25)

.005 ± .003(0,38 ± 0,08)RADIUS

.032 ± .002(0,81 ± 0,05)

90˚ ± 1˚

.625 ± .010 DIA.(15,89 ± 0,25)

.120 ± .003(3,05 ± 0,08)

.437 + .010 –.000(11,10 + 0,25 –0,00)

C L

.375 ± .005(9,53 ± 0,13)

.125 ± .002(3,18 ± 0,05)

.625 ± .010 DIA. (15,89 ± 0,25)

90° ± 1°

.125 ± .005(3,16 ± 0,13)


.032 ± .005(0,81 ± 0,13)

Rotary13


Rotary S

witches


01 thru 12 1 02 thru 123 N or S01 thru 08 2 02 thru 06 N or S01 thru 05 3 02 thru 04 N or S01 thru 04 4 02 or 03 N or S01 thru 03 55 02 N or S01 or 02 65 02 N or S

01 thru 12 1 02 thru 103 N or S01 thru 08 2 02 thru 05 N or S




01 thru 054 1 02 thru 123 N or S01 thru 054 2 02 thru 06 N or S01 thru 054 3 02 thru 04 N or S01 thru 044 4 02 or 03 N or S01 thru 024 6 02 N or S


01 thru 042,4 1 02 thru 123 N or S01 thru 042,4 2 02 thru 06 N or S

01 thru 042,4 1 02 thru 103 N or S01 thru 042,4 2 02 thru 05 N or S

01 thru 03 1 02 thru 123 N or S01 thru 03 2 02 thru 06 N or S01 or 02 3 02 thru 04 N or S01 4 02 or 03 N or S01 5 02 N or S01 6 02 N or S




30°

36°

30°

36°

36°

30°

36°

30°

36°

30°

36°

30°

36°

A AS ADB BS BDE ES ED

AF ASF ADFBF BSF BDFEF ESF EDF

BT —— ——

MA MAS ——MB MBS ——

MAF MASF ——MBF MBSF ——

C —— ——

CF —— ——

A = 1/8" Diameter ShaftB = 1/4" Diameter ShaftE = Metric Mount Shaft & BushingD = Adjustable Stops (Adj. Stop)S = Shaft and Panel Seal (S/P Seal)

Style Choices Angle of No. Of Poles Positions Shorting OrBasic Style With S/P Seal Adj. Stop Throw Decks Per Deck Per Pole1 Non-Shorting


F = PC Mount TerminalsT = PC Mount Terminals and Process Sealed

Switching Decks & Bushing; no panel sealM = Military

All switches without F or T have solder lugs

C = Concentric Shaft2 Switches with same Style and Angle ofThrow, one behind the other.Limits below apply to either switch section(A or B).

1 For Adjustable Stop styles (with the letter D),use AJ instead of number of positions whenordering.2 Military Qualified PC mount switches of 3 or4 operative decks have an additional spacerdeck after deck 2. Use total decks to calculate

length; but use only the number of operativedecks when creating the part number.3 For 1-pole switches with maximum positions,specify Fixed stop after last position orContinuous rotation when ordering. (Note: 1 p,71BT, 10 positions, is available only asContinuous).

4 In addition to qualified types (Solder lug–5decks; PC mount–4 decks), Grayhill can pro-vide switches with additional decks in thematerials of the ‘M’ style. Contact Grayhill.5 Switches in 30° throw with 5 or 6 poles perdeck are not available with adjustable stops.

Rotary14


Rotary S

witches


ORDERING INFORMATION: Single Shaft Switches

Series

Style*: Letter(s) from the Choices and Limitations chart

Angle of Throw: 30° or 36°

Number of Decks: As limited by Choices and Limitations chart

71A30–02–1–12N–C

Stop Arrangement: Use suffix only when ordering 1 pole withmaximum positions.C = Continuous rotation; F = Stop between last and first positions

Type of Contacts: N = Non-shorting; S = Shorting

Positions Per Pole: 02 to 12 per Choices chart.For adjustable stop switches (D) use AJ here.

Poles Per Deck: As limited by the Choices chart

* All rotary switches that are required to have military designated markings and testing adhering to MIL-DTL-3786are to be ordered by specifying the military part number identified on the appropriate slash sheet.

ORDERING INFORMATION: Concentric Shaft Switches

Entire SwitchSeries and Style: 71C or 71CF

Angle of Throw: 30° or 36°. Both switch sections will be the same.

Switch Section A (Front Switch)Number of Decks: 1 to 3, per Choices and Limitations chart

Poles Per Deck: As limited by the Choices and Limitations chart

Positions Per Pole: 02 to 12 per Choices and Limitations chart


Stop Arrangement: Use suffix only when ordering 1 pole withmaximum positions.C = Continuous rotation; F = Stop between last and first positions

71C362110NC–3202S

Switch Section B (Rear Switch)Stop Arrangement: Use suffix only when ordering 1 pole withmaximum positions.C = Continuous rotation; F = Stop between last and first positions


Positions Per Pole: 02 to 12 per Choices and Limitations chart.

Poles Per Deck: As limited by the Choices and Limitations chart

Number of Decks: 1 to 3, per Choices and Limitations chart

Available from your local Grayhill Distributor.For prices and discounts, contact a Local SalesOffice, an authorized local Distributor or Grayhill.

Rotary15


Rotary S

witches



Note: Common location for a single pole perdeck switch. For common location onmulti-pole switches, see circuit diagrams.

No. Approx. Weight No. Approx. Weightof Dimension Dimension Grams of Dimension Dimension Grams

Decks A B Srs. 08 Srs. 09 Decks A B Srs. 08 Srs. 09

1 .960 (24,38) .062 (1,57) 12 16.0 7 2.818 (71,58) .312 (7,92) 24 31.02 1.228 (31,19) .062 (1,57) 14 18.5 8 3.086 (78,38) .312 (7,92) 26 33.53 1.496 (38,00) .062 (1,57) 16 21.0 9 3.354 (85,19) .312 (7,92) 28 36.04 1.764 (44,81) .062 (1,57) 18 23.5 10 3.622 (91,00) .312 (7,92) 30 38.55 2.032 (51,61) .062 (1,57) 20 26.0 11 3.890 (98,81) .312 (7,92) 32 41.06 2.550 (64,77) .312 (7,92) 22 28.5 12 4.158 (105,61) .312 (7,92) 34 43.5

Rear Views

Front view shows terminal locationof Series 8, 36° angle of throw.Transpose rear view for terminallocation of other angles of throw.

For rear view of 45°, 60° and 90°,see circuit diagrams.

Standard Style

Series 0930° Angle of Throw


SERIES 08SERIES 090.5" Diameter, 1/4 Amp,Standard, Military SR13

Grayhill part number and date code marked on standard style detent cover label.Customer part number marked on request. Grayhill part number and date codeprinted on military style cover. Military number printed when required.

8910

1

23 4

56

7

GR

AY

HIL

L11

12

.750 ± .015(19,05 ± 0,38)

OVER TERMINALS

.562 ± .020(14,27 ± 0,51)

DIA.

15°

30°COMMON LUG

8

910

1

2 3

45

6

7

GR

AY

HIL

L.500 ± .020(12,7 ± 0,51)DIA.

.687 ± .015(17,45 ± 0,38)

OVER TERMINALS

36°

.033 ± .002 (0,84 ± 0,05) DIA. HOLE AFTER PLATING

COMMONLUG

FEATURES• Proven Quality in Thousands of

Applications• Gold-plated Contact System• 30°, 36°, 45°, 60° and 90° Angle

of Throw Options• MIL Qualified Versions MIL-S-3786/13

.562 (14,27) SER. 8

.625 (15,88) SER. 9

DIM. A + .046 – .020(+ 0,05 – 0,51)

DIM. B REF.STUDPROJECTION

#0 THREAD.135 ± .015 (3,43 ± 0,38)

.250 ± .020(6,35 ± 0,51)

.375 ± .020(9,53 ± 0,51)

.312 ± .020(7,92 ± 0,51)

.125 + .001 – .002(3,18 + 0,03 – 0,05) DIA.


INTEGRAL ASSEMBLY NUT, DO NOT REMOVE

COMMON LUG .045 ± .003 (1,14 ± 0,08) DIA. HOLE AFTER PLATING

.260 ± .015(6,60 ± 0,38) C L OF NON-TURN

TAB

.387 (9,83) SER.8

.453 (11,51) SER. 9± .015 (0,38)

NON-TURN TAB .062 ± .005(1,58 ± 0,13) WIDE BY.020 ± .003 (0,51 ± 0,08) THICK

SEE NOTE

.094 ± .010(2,38 ± 0,25)

Rotary16


Rotary S

witches



Switch is Viewed From Shaft End and Shown in Position No. 1Note: All common terminals are located above base terminals as shown.

ONE POLE TWO POLE THREE POLE

ONE POLE TWO POLE

ONE POLE TWO POLE THREE OR FOUR POLE

ONE POLE TWO POLE


FOUR POLE FIVE OR SIX POLE

Series 0990° Angleof Throw




Rear Views


C1

1011

12

1

234

5

6

7

89

C L OF NON-TURNTAB

C LC1

C2

1011

12

1

234

5

6

7

89

C1

C2

C310

11

12

1

234

5

6

7

89

C L

C4

C1

C2

C3

10 11

12

12

34

5

6

7

89

C LC1

C2

C3

C4

C5C610

1112

12

34

5

6

7

89

C L

43 2

1

10

98

5

6

7

C1

C L OF NON-TURNTAB

43 2

1

10

98

5

67

C1

C2

C L

C1

7

8

1

23

4

5

6

C L OF NON-TURNTAB

C1

C2

7

8

1

23

4

5

6

C L

C4

7

8

23

4

5

6

C1

C2

C3

C L1

81

2 3

45

67

GR

AY

HIL

L

15°

45°

COMMON LUGSINGLE POLE

C1

C L OF NON-TURNTAB6

1

23

4

5

C1

C2

6

1

23

4

5

C LC1

C2

C3

C L

6

1

2

3

4

5

1

23

4

56

GR

AY

HIL

L

15°

60°


C1

4

1

2

3

C L OF NON-TURNTAB

C LC1

C2

4

1

2

3

1

2

3

4

GR

AY

HIL

L

15°

90°


Rotary17


Rotary S

witches




Front view shows terminal location of36° angle of throw. Transpose rearview for terminal location of 30° angleof throw. See Circuit Diagrams for 60°and 90° angles of throw.

PC Mount Style

SERIES 08SERIES 09.5" Diameter, 1/4 Amp, PC Mount

*TerminationA standard switch uses the entire 360° of each deck as required by the circuitry.Thus one-sided termination is standard for Series 08, 36°, 1 pole switches with 1 to5 positions per pole; it is also standard for Series 09, 30°, 1 pole switches with 1 to6 positions per pole. Two-sided termination is standard for 1 pole switches with morepositions per pole and for switches of 2 or more poles per deck.

Special switches with one-sided termination can be made for circuitry which wouldrequire two-sided termination in standard switches. Contact Grayhill for a specialpart number. See also Special Options, page J-10.

Grayhill part number and date code marked on detent cover label. Customerpart number marked on request.

Rear Views



NON-TURN TAB .062 ± .005(1,58 ± 0,13) WIDE BY.020 ± .003 (0,51 ± 0,08) THICK

SEE NOTE

.260 ± .015(6,60 ± 0,38)

C L OF NON-TURNTAB.094 ± .010

(2,38 ± 0,25)

DIM. A + .046 – .020(+ 0,05 – 0,51)


#0 THREAD

.375 ± .020(9,53 ± 0,51)

.312 ± .020(7,92 ± 0,51)

.125 + .001 – .002(3,18 + 0,03 – 0,05) DIA.



COMMON LUG

.562 (14,27) SER. 8

.625 (15,88) SER. 9± .015 (0,38)

C L.250 ± .020(6,35 ± 0,51)

C L C L

.134 ± .010(3,40 ± 0,25)

.135 ± .015 (3,43 ± 0,38)

.134 ± .010(3,40 ± 0,25)

.588 ± .020(14,73 ± 0,51)

1

23

45

6 7

89

10

GR

AY

HIL

L

.562 ± .020(14,27 ± 0,51)DIA.

.187 ± .015(4,75 ± 0,38) TYP.

.140 ± .015(3,56 ± 0,38)

TYP.1112

1.200 ± .020(30,48 ± 0,51)

TYP.

.070 ± .010(1,78 ± 0,25)

TYP.

1

23

4

5 6

79

9

10

GR

AY

HIL

L

.500 ± .020(12,7 ± 0,51)DIA.

1.125 ± .020(28,58 ± 0,51)

TYP.

.187 ± .015(4,75 ± 0,38) TYP.

.140 ± .015(3,56 ± 0,38)

TYP.

TERMINAL DIMENSIONS AT THIS POINT ARE .032 + .000 – .010 (0,81 + 0,00 – 0,25) WIDEBY .015 + .000 – .003 (0,38 + 0,00 – 0,08) THICK

FEATURES• Gold-plated Contact System• 30°, 36°, 60° or 90° Angle of

Throw Options• Compatible with Logic Level

Voltages and Currents

Rotary18


Rotary S

witches


SHAFT AND PANEL SEAL

A shaft and panel seal is available to provide watertight mounting of the Series 08and 09. Standard and Military Style rotary switches. Sealing is accomplished byO-ring shaft seal and panel seal washer. When the panel seal is compressed,dimensions are approximately the same as an unsealed switch. Sealed switches areprovided with a double flat bushing. Non-turn feature can be accomplished by properfit of this bushing into panel hole and/or by allowing non-turn tab to extend into (butnot through) panel. Military Style rotary sealed switches do not have a non-turn tab.

CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS: PC Mount


PC BOARD MOUNTING PATTERN





Number of Poles Common TerminalPer Deck Hole Location

1 Pole Per Deck A2 Poles Per Deck A

30°, 60° and 90° Angle of Throw36° Angle of Throw

Diagrams shown for a two deck switch. Bushing mounting isrecommended for all PC mount rotary switches.

Base TerminalsAngle of Throw Hole Location

30° All60° E and F90° D and F



C1

12

3

4

567

8

9

10

1112

C L OF NON-TURNTAB

C1

12

3

4

567

8

9

10

1112

C2 C L

76 5

4

3

21

8

9

10

C1

C L OF NON-TURNTAB

76 5

4

3

21

8

9

10

C1 C LC2

C1

1

2

34

5

6

C L OF NON-TURNTAB

C1

1

2

34

5

6

C LC2

C1

1

2

3

4

C L OF NON-TURNTAB

C1

1

2

3

4 C LC2

.134 (3,40) TYP.

.134 (3,40) TYP..210 (5,33) TYP.

.280 (7,11) TYP.

SHAFT ENDOF SWITCH

ECD

A

CB

F

E

D .070 (1,78)

.140(3,56)TYP.

COMMON TERMINAL ROWHOLE LOCATION (SEE CHART)

BASE TERMINAL ROW HOLE LOCATION (SEE CHART)

.134 (3,40) TYP.

.134 (3,40) TYP.

.140 (3,56) TYP.

SHAFT ENDOF SWITCH

Rotary19


Rotary S

witches


MILITARY QUALIFIED

Materials and FinishesMilitary QualifiedDeck Separators, End Plate and Switch Bases:Diallyl per (MIL-M-14) ASTM-D-5948Rotor Mounting Plate: ThermoplasticMounting Bushing: Brass, tin/zinc-plated.Shaft, Cover, Stop Plate, Retaining Ring,Through Bolts, Shaft Extension, Stop Arm,Thrust Washers, Cover Plate and Rear SupportPlate, Lockwashers and Nuts: Stainless steelDetent Balls: Steel, nickel-platedDetent Springs: Tinned music wireTerminals, Stator (Base) Contacts andCommon Plate: Brass, gold plate .00001"minimum over silver plate .0003" minimumRotor Contact: Silver alloy, gold-plated .00001"minimumMounting Hardware: Two mounting nuts .062"(1,57) thick by .312" (7,92) across flats and oneinternal tooth lockwasher are supplied with thisswitch.Mounting Nuts, Washers: Brass, tin/zinc-plated and or stainless steel.

ADDITIONAL CHARACTERISTICSStandard Style and Military QualifiedContacts: Shorting or Non-shorting contactsavailable in 30°, 36° and 45° angle of throw rotaryswitches. Non-shorting contacts available in 60°and 90° angle of throw switches. All are wipingcontacts with over 100 grams of contact force.Stop Strength: 12 lb-inches minimumRotational Torque: 8-64 oz-in depending uponthe number of poles per deck and the number ofdecksExtended Studs: Switches of six decks or morehave longer studs with extra stud nuts forrecommended double end mounting.

Contact Resistance: 50 milliohms maximum afterlifeInsulation Resistance: 1,000 megaohmsminimum between terminals and shaftDielectric Strength: 500 Vac (atmosphericpressure) and 350 Vac (reduced pressure)between mutually insulated parts.

The Series 08M and 09M also meet therequirements of MIL-DTL-3786 SR13 for moistureresistance, stop strength, rotational torque,vibration (10 to 2,000 cps), medium and highshock, salt spray, explosion, thermal shock (-65°C to 85°C) and terminal pull. When tested atsea level, 25°C and 68% relative humidity withfailure criteria of 50 milliohms maximum contactresistance and 500 Vac breakdown voltage, theseswitches will make and break 250 mA at 28 Vdcinductive (250 millihenries): 1/2 amp: at 28 Vdcresistive: 1/2 amp; at 115 Vac: 60 Hz resistive for10,000 cycles of operation.

Materials and FinishesStandard StyleSwitch Bases: Melamine per (MIL-M-14) ASTM-D-5948Cover, Deck Separators and End Plate: Phenolicper (MIL-M-14) ASTM-D-5948Rotor Mounting Plate: ThermoplasticMounting Bushing: Brass, tin/zinc-plated.Shaft, Retaining Rings, Through Bolts, ShaftExtension, Stop Washers, Stop Arm, ThrustWashers, Nuts, Cover Plate and Rear SupportPlate: Stainless steelDetent Balls: Steel, nickel-platedDetent Springs: Tinned Music wireTerminals, Stator (Base) Contacts andCommon Plate: Brass, gold plate .00001"minimum over silver plate .0003" minimumRotor Contact: Silver alloy, gold-plated .00001"minimumMounting Hardware: Two mounting nuts .062"(1,57) thick by .312" (7,92) across flats and oneinternal lockwasher are supplied with switch.Lockwasher: Stainless steelMounting Nuts, Washers: Brass, tin/zinc-plated and or stainless steel.

Terminal Detail

Front view shows terminal location ofSeries 09, 30° angle of throw.Transpose rear view for terminal locationof other angles of throw.




.034 ± .003(0,86 ± 0,08) .068 ± .005

(1,73 ± 0,13)

.094 ± .010(2,38 ± 0,25)

.260 ± .015(6,60 ± 0,38) C L OF NON-TURN

TAB

SEE NOTE

8910

1

23 4

56

7

GR

AY

HIL

L11

12

.781 ± .020(19,83 ± 0,51)

OVER TERMINALS

.562 ± .020(14,27 ± 0,51)

DIA.

15°

30°

8

910

1

2 3

45

6

7

GR

AY

HIL

L

.500 ± .020(12,7 ± 0,51)DIA.

.718 ± .020(18,24 ± 0,51)

OVER TERMINALS

36°

Series 08 and 09 military switches are qualifiedto MIL-DTL-3786/13. They include 30°, 36°, 45°and 60° angles of throw with solder lug terminalsin sealed and unsealed styles. See front andrear views at right. Standard variations which donot affect switch performance can also be markedas qualified product–contact Grayhill.

The military style is dimensionally the same asthe standard except for the solder lug. Convertstandard style switch drawings to military styledrawings by including this terminal detail andchanging the over-terminal dimensions shownhere. Grayhill can provide complete specificationdrawings. Qualified switches can be ordered bythe Grayhill number or the "M" number; they willbe marked per MIL-DTL-3786/13.

SPECIFICATIONSElectrical RatingsStandard StyleRated: To make and break the following loads:1/4 amp, 115 Vac resistive; 1/4 amp, 6-28 Vdcresistive; 20 mA, 115 Vdc resistive; 50 mA, 115Vac inductive; 20 mA, 28 Vdc inductive; to carry4 amps continuous.Contact Resistance: After 25,000 cycles ofoperation, 50 milliohms maximumInsulation Resistance: 1,000 megohmsminimum between terminals and shaftVoltage Breakdown: 1,000 Vac initially(500 Vac or better after most environmental tests)Life Expectancy: 50,000 mechanical cycles ofoperation. Note: Actual life is determined by anumber of factors, including electrical loading,rate of rotation and environment, as well asmaximum contact resistance, minimum insulationresistance and minimum voltage breakdownrequired at the end of life.

Electrical RatingsMilitary QualifiedQualified to the following MIL-DTL-3786/13Circuit Values: (Also see Standard Styledescription.) The Series 08M and 09M have beentested to meet the requirements of MIL-S-3786,Style SR13, the majority of which are listed. At85°C, approximately 68% relative humidity andsea level pressure, the switches have been testedto make and break the following loads, as statedin MIL-DTL-3786/SR13: 125 milliamperes at 28Vdc resistive: 75 milliamperes at 115 Vac resistive.

The switches have also been tested at reducedbarometric pressure (70,000 feet), 25°C atapproximately 68% relative humidity to make andbreak the following loads as stated in MIL-DTL-3786/SR13. 50 milliamperes 28 Vdc resistive; 20milliamperes 115 Vac resistive. When tested tothe above loads at the stated conditions, theSeries 08M and 09M switches meet the followinglife-limiting criteria after 25,000 cycles of operationin accordance with MIL-DTL-3786.

Rotary20


Rotary S

witches


Angle Number of Decks Poles Number ofSeries Style and Designation of Throw Stops Terminals Shorting Non-Shorting Per Deck Positions/Pole

A = StandardS = Standard, Shaft/Panel SealM = Military StyleMS = Style M, Shaft/Panel Seal

P = Standard, PC MountSP = Style P, Shaft/Panel SealMP = Military Style, PC MountMSP = Style MP, Shaft/Panel Seal

A = StandardS = Standard, Shaft/Panel SealM = Military StyleMS = Style M, Shaft/Panel Seal


A = Standard,S = Standard, Shaft/Panel SealM = Military StyleMS = Style M, Shaft/Panel Seal

A = Standard,S = Standard, Shaft/Panel SealM = Military StyleMS = Style M, Shaft/Panel Seal


A = StandardS = Standard, Shaft/Panel Seal

P = Standard, PC MountSP = Style, Shaft/Panel Seal

Solder

PrintedCircuit

Solder

PrintedCircuit

Solder

PrintedCircuit

Solder

PrintedCircuit

Fixed

Fixed

36°

30°

45°

60°

90°

08

09


Series: determined by the angle of throw

Style*: Letter(s) from the Choices and Limitations chartAngle of Throw: Must agree with Series Number

09A30–03–1–12N–FStop Arrangement: Add letter C or F to a one pole per deck switch with the maximum number of positionsfor a stop between position 1 and the last position.

Type of Contacts: N = Non-shorting; S = ShortingPositions Per Pole: Requires 02 positions as a minimum to the maximum allowable dependent on the angleof throw and poles per deck

Poles Per Deck: As limited by angle of throw and switch styleNumber of Decks: As limited by the angle of throw, the poles per deck, switch style and types of contacts

* All rotary switches that are required to have military designated markings and testing adhering to MIL-3786 are to be ordered by specifyingthe military part number identified on the appropriate slash sheet.

01 thru 12 01 thru 12 1 02 thru 1001 thru 09 01 thru 09 2 02 thru 05


01 thru 12 01 thru 12 1 02 thru 1201 thru 09 01 thru 09 2 02 thru 0601 thu 06 01 thru 06 3 02 thru 0401 thru 04 01 thru 04 4 02 or 0301 thru 03 01 thru 03 5 0201 thru 03 01 thru 03 6 02


01 thru 12 01 thru 12 1 02 thru 0801 thru 06 01 thru 06 2 02 thru 0401 thru 04 01 thru 04 3 0201 thru 03 01 thru 03 4 02

01 thru 06 1 02 thru 00601 thru 03 2 02 or 0301 or 02 3 02

Not 01 thru 06 1 02 thru 06Available 01 thru 03 2 02 or 03

Not 01 thru 06 1 02 thru 04Available 01 thru 03 2 02

Not 01 thru 06 1 02 thru 04Available 01 thru 03 2 02


NotAvailable

Available from your local Grayhill Distributor For prices and discounts, contact a Local Sales Office, an authorized local Distributor or Grayhill.

Rotary21


Rotary S

witches


Standard, UL Recognized andMilitary Qualified Solder Lug Styles

Note: Common location for a single pole perdeck switch. For common location onmulti-pole switches, see circuitdiagrams.

For rear view of 45°, 60° and 90°,see circuit diagram.

Rear Views

Series 44

Series 42


No. Dimension B Approx. Weight No. Dimension B Approx. Weightof Dimension Style Style Grams of Dimension Style Style Grams

Decks A A M or H 42 44 Decks A A M or H 42 44

1 1.025 (26,04) .062 (1,57) .030 (0,76) 40.0 48 7 3.351 (85,16) .312 (7,92) .280 (7,11) 73.0 902 1.371 (34,82) .062 (1,57) .030 (0,76) 45.5 55 8 3.697 (93,90) .312 (7,92) .280 (7,11) 78.5 973 1.717 (43,61) .062 (1,57) .030 (0,76) 51.0 62 9 4.043 (102,69) .312 (7,92) .280 (7,11) 84.0 1044 2.063 (52,40) .062 (1,57) .030 (0,76) 56.5 69 10 4.389 (111,48) .312 (7,92) .280 (7,11) 89.5 1115 2.409 (61,19) .062 (1,57) .030 (0,76) 62.0 76 11 4.735 (120,27) .312 (7,92) .280 (7,11) 95.0 1186 3.005 (76,33) .312 (7,92) .280 (7,11) 67.5 83 12 5.081 (129,06) .312 (7,92) .280 (7,11) 100.5 125

Dimension C D E F

Series 42 .562 (14,27) 1.000 (25,4) .830 (21,08) .093 (2,36)Series 44 .642 (16,31) 1.162 (29,51) 1.000 (25,4) .121 (3,07)

Grayhill part number and date code marked on detent cover label.Customer part number marked on request. Military part numbermarked when required. UL recognized markings as required.

1.015 ± .015 (25,78 ± 0,38) DIA. OVER TERMINALS

8

9

101

2 3

45

6

7

GR

AY

HIL

L

.064 (1,63) MIN. DIA.HOLE AFTER PLATING

36°


1011

12

3 4

56

78

9G

RA

YH

ILL


30°

2

115°

DIM. D ± .010 (0,25) DIA.

.375 ± .015(9,53

± 0,38)

CL OF NON-TURN TAB

OF BUSHINGKEYWAY

CL

SEE NOTE

NON-TURN TAB .125 ± .003 (3,18 ± 0,08) WIDE BY .031 ± .003 (0,79 ± 0,08) THICK

DIM. C± .015 (0,38)

.219 ± .005(5,56

± 0,13)

DIM. E± .010 (0,25)

.250 + .001 –.002(6,35 + 0,03 –0,05) DIA.

DIM. F ± .015 (0,38)


#1 THREAD

DIM. A + .046 –.020(+ 0,05 –0,51)

.250 ± .020(6,35 ± 0,51)

.437 ± .020(11,10 ± 0,51)

.437 ± .020(11,10 ± 0,51)

3/8-32 UNEF-2A THREAD(MTG. HOLE = 3/8 DIA. MIN.)

BUSHING KEYWAY .066 ± .002 (1,68 ± 0,05) WIDE BY .036 ± .003 (0,91 ± 0,08) DEEPFROM A .375 (9,53) DIA.


SERIES 42, 43, 44 and 541" Diameter, 1 Amp, Standard,Military SR04

FEATURES• Rugged Construction Insures

Switch Operation for the Life ofYour Equipment

• Many Circuitry Options• MIL Qualified Versions MIL-S-3786/04• Features Choice Include: Shaft/

Panel Seal, Adjustable Stops, PCTermination, UL Recognized

Rotary22


Rotary S

witches




ONE POLE TWO POLE THREE POLE THREE POLE Styles A, D and S Styles M, MS, H and HS

ONE POLE TWO POLE


Rear Views

ONE POLE TWO POLE


FOUR POLE FIVE OR SIX POLE


Series 42 & 4336° Angleof Throw



Series 44 & 5430° Angleof Throw

C1

1011

12

1

234

5

6

7

89


C LC1

C2

1011

12

1

234

5

6

7

89

C1

C2

C310

11

12

1

234

5

6

7

89

C L

C1

C2

C310

11

12

1

234

5

6

7

89

C L

C4

C1

C2

C3

10 11

12

12

34

5

6

7

89

C LC1

C2

C3

C4

C5C610

1112

12

34

5

6

7

89

C L

43 2

1

10

98

5

6

7

C1


43 2

1

10

98

5

67

C1

C2

C L

C1

7

8

1

23

4

5

6


C1

C2

7

8

1

23

4

5

6

C L

C4

7

8

23

4

5

6

C1

C2

C3

C L1

81

2 3

45

67

GR

AY

HIL

L

15°

45°

C1

C L OF BUSHINGKEYWAY6

1

23

4

5

C1

C2

6

1

23

4

5

C LC1

C2

C3

C L

6

1

2

3

4

5

1

2

34

5

6

GR

AY

HIL

L

15°

60°

C1

4

1

2

3


C LC1

C2

4

1

2

3

1

2

3

4

GR

AY

HIL

L

15°

90°

Rotary23


Rotary S

witches


The standard and UL recognized switches arealso available with adjustable stops. Tworemovable stop washers allow you to limit thenumber of switch positions as needed. A knurlednut is supplied to secure the washers if desired.These switches have no bushing keyway. Allother dimensions, ratings and characteristicsare the same as the standard fixed stop styles.Although not military qualified, the adjustablestyles are useful in military equipmentprototypes. However, when submitting theequipment for government approval, the fixedstop qualified style should be substituted.

Equivalent StylesFor style 42A36, use 42D36,For style 44A30, use 44D30For style 42M36, use 42D36 initiallyFor style 44M30, use 44D30 initiallyFor style 42U36, use 42UD36For style 44U30, use 44UD30

ADJUSTABLE STOP SWITCHES: Series 42 and 44

Front Views

Series 42 Series 44

Switch is Viewed From Shaft Endand Shown in Position No. 1

Note: All common terminals are located abovebase terminals as shown.

PC BOARD MOUNTING PATTERN

TerminationOne-sided termination is standard for switches with 2 to 5positions per pole. Two-sided termination is standard forswitches with 6 thru 10 positions per pole.

6 thru 10 positionsper pole andterminals from oneside of switch areavailable on specialorder. See SpecialOptions, page F-10or contact Grayhill.

Shown for a two deck switch

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM: PC Mount

ONE POLE

Standard Style


Grayhill part number and date code marked on detent cover label. Customer partnumber marked on request. UL recognized marking as required.


76 5

4

3

21

8

9

10

C1

1.000 ± .010 (25,4 ± 0,25)

DIA.

TERMINAL DIMENSIONS AT THIS POINT ARE .050 ± .005 (1,27 ± 0,13)WIDE BY .020 ± .003 (0,51 ± 0,08) THICK

.375 ± .015 (9,53 ± 0,38) TYP.

.750 ± .010 (19,05 ± 0,25)

TYP.

OF BUSHINGKEYWAY

CL

.250 + .001 –.002 (6,35 + 0,03 –0,05) DIA.

3/8-32 UNEF-2A THREAD(MTG. HOLE=3/8 DIA. MIN.)

BUSHING KEYWAY .066 ± .002 (1,68 ± 0,05) WIDE BY .036 ± .003 (0,91 ± 0,08) DEEPFROM A .375 (9,53) DIA.


COMMON LUG

.250 ± .020(6,35 ± 0,51)

.830 ± .010 (21,08 ± 0,25)

DIM. A + .046 – .020 (+1,17 –0,00).437 ± .020

(11,10 ± 0,51)

.600 ± .031 (15,24 ± 0,79)


#1 THREAD

.174 ± .010 (4,42 ± 0,25)

CL CL CL

.174 ± .010 (4,42 ± 0,25)

.786 ± .010 (19,96 ± 0,25) DIA.

.500 ± .015 (12,7 ± 0,38)

TYP.

1.470 ± .020 (37,34 ± 0,51)

TYP.

.735 ± .010 (18,67 ± 0,25) TYP.

.187 ± .015 (4,75 ± 0,38) TYP.

.250 ± .015 (6,35 ± 0,38) TYP.

1 10

65

43

2 98

7

GR

AY

HILL

.219 ± .005(5,56 ± 0,13)

8

9

6

54

3 FIRST

STOP

7

8 9 10

11

65

4 32

FIRS

TS

TOP

ADJUSTABLE STOP WASHERS

USE OF KNURLED NUT IS OPTIONAL

SERIES 421" Diameter, 1 Amp, PC Mount

OF FRONT SUPPORT PLATE MOUNTING HOLES

C L

.375 (9,53) TYP.

.750 (19,05)

TYP.

.492 (12,50)

.500 (12,7) TYP.

.250 (6,35) TYP.

.110 (2,79)

.174 (4,42) TYP.

C L OF REAR SUPPORT PLATE MOUNTING HOLES

C L OF BASETERMINALMOUNTING HOLES

C L COMMON TERMINALMOUNTINGHOLES

SH

AF

T E

ND

.174 (4,42) TYP.

SHAFT AND PANEL SEAL: Srs. 42 & 44

Standard StyleThe Series 42/44 Styles, which include the letter "S" with theexception of style "HS", are watertight sealed to the mountingpanel by utilizing the panel seal kit. These switches are builtwith a front plate that does not have a non-turn tab. Thepanel seal kit consists of a grooved hex nut, a keyed washerand a keyed panel seal. The grooved hex nut is assembledto the switch bushing. The keyed washer is slid down thebushing slot and seated into the hex nut groove. The sealis likewise assembled to the bushing and hex nut. Thekeyed washer is required to provide seal integrity in thebushing slot. When assembled to the panel, the groovednut, backing washer and seal require the same space as anormal mounting nut. Hence, the seal kit does not alter thedimensions. Panel seal kit includes a non-turn washer to beused into a blind hole in the back panel. For panel seal kitpart dimensions, see Accessories. Style "HS" switches usea similar sealing method, except the integral assembly nutretains the panel seal. All sealed style switches are providedwith a shaft to bushing internal seal.

FEATURES• Satisfies High Current Board Level

Applications• 36° Angle of Throw Permits up to

Ten Positions• UL Recognized Versions

Rotary24


Rotary S

witches


Standard Style and Military Qualified



Rear Views

Series 54

Series 43

Number of Approx. WeightDecks Dimension A Dimension B Grams

Section Section Style Style Style Series Series“A” “B” A, M or H A M or H 43 54

1 1 1.818 (46,18) .062 (1,57) .030 (0,76) 48 602 1 2.164 (54,97) .062 (1,57) .030 (0,76) 54 673 1 2.510 (63,75) .062 (1,57) .280 (7,11) 60 741 2 2.164 (54,97) .062 (1,57) .030 (0,76) 54 672 2 2.510 (63,75) .062 (1,57) .280 (7,11) 60 743 2 3.105 (78,87) .312 (7,92) .280 (7,11) 66 811 3 2.510 (63,75) .062 (1,57) .280 (7,11) 60 742 3 3.105 (78,87) .312 (7,92) .280 (7,11) 66 813 3 3.451 (87,66) .312 (7,92) .280 (7,11) 72 88

Grayhill part number and date code marked on detent cover label. Customer part numbermarked on request. Military part number marked when required.

1.162 (29,51) DIA. SER. 54

1.000 (25,4) DIA. SER. 43

.375 ± .015 (9,53

± 0,25)

.642 (16,31) SER. 54

.562 (14,27) SER. 43

±.015(0,38)OF BUSHINGKEYWAY

CL

SEE NOTE


.219 ± .005(5,56 ± 0,13)

.094 ± .004(2,39 ± 0,10)

.125 + .001 –.002(3,18 + 0,03 –0,05) DIA.

.250 ± .020 (6,35 ± 0,51)

CL OF NON-TURN TAB

.250 ± .020 (6,35 ± 0,51)

.093 ± .015 (2,36 ± 0,38) SER. 43.121 ± .015 (3,07 ± 0,38) SER. 54

.375 ± .020 (9,53 ± 0,51)

.375 ± .020 (9,53 ± 0,51) .250 ± .020 (6,35 ± 0,51)

DIM. A + .046 –.020(+0,05 –0,51)


#1 THREAD

SECTION A

SECTION B




.250 + .001 –.002(6,35 + 0,03 –0,05) DIA.

.830 (21,08) SER. 43

1.000 (25,4) SER. 54

± .010 (0,25)

CONTROLLED BY.250 (6,35) .125 (3,18)

DIA. SHAFT

MILITARY NUMBER MARKED ON ALLQUALIFIED SWITCHES

1.015 ± .015 (25,78 ± 0,38)

OVER TERMINALS

36°

GR

AY

HIL

L


8

9

101

2 3

45

6

7


1011

12

3 4

56

78

9

GR

AY

HIL

L


30°

2

115°

SERIES 43SERIES 541" Diameter, 1 Amp, ConcentricShafts

FEATURES• Two Switches in the Panel Space

of a Single Shaft Rotary• Military Qualified Versions

MIL-3786/04• Choice of 10 Positions (Series 43)

or 12 Positions (Series 54)

Rotary25


Rotary S

witches


SERIES 43 and 541" Diameter, 1 Amp, Add-A-Pot

FEATURES• Central Shaft Designed to Operate

an Add-On Potentiometer• Potentiometer Mounting Plates

Provided• Adjustable Stop Standard, Fixed

Stop by Order• Choice of 10 Positions (Series 43)

or 12 Positions (Series 54)

Standard Style

Series 43


Numberof Dimension

Decks A Series 43 Series 54

1 .974 (24,74) 48 602 1.320 (33,53) 54 673 1.666 (42,32) 60 74

Approx. WeightGrams

Series 54


Two potentiometer mounting plates aresupplied. Mounting plates have .261 (6,63)and .380 (9,65) diameter holes respectivelyfor mounting potentiometers with 1/4" and 3/8"bushings. Additional nuts for the through boltsof the switch are provided for adjustment ofmounting plate location. Tapered tongue on1/8" shaft provides coupling to screwdriverslots in potentiometer shafts.

Rear Views

Series 54

Series 43

23

45

67

8

9

1.000 ± .010(25,4 ± 0,25)

DIA.

.375 ± .015(9,53

± 0,38)

SEE NOTENON-TURN TAB .125 ± .003 (3,18 ± 0,08) WIDE BY .031 ± .003 (0,79 ± 0,08) THICK

CL OF NON-TURN TAB

.562 ± .015(14,27 ± 0,38)

.125 + .001 –.002(3,18 + 0,03 –0,05) DIA.

.250 + .001 –.002(6,35 + 0,03 –0,05) DIA.

.250 ± .020 (6,35 ± 0,51)

.250 ± .020 (6,35 ± 0,51)

.250 ± .020 (6,35 ± 0,51)

.375 ± .020 (9,53 ± 0,51)

.375 ± .020 (9,53 ± 0,51)

.093 ± .015 (2,36 ± 0,38) SER. 43.121 ± .015 (3,07 ± 0,38) SER. 54

.140 ± .062 (3,56 ± 1,57)

DIM. A + .046 –.020(+0,05 –0,51)

.625 ± .046 (15,88 ± 1,17)

#1 THREAD

.830 (21,08) SER. 431.000 (25,4) SER. 54

± .010 (0,25)


STOP WASHERS

USE OF KNURLED NUT OPTIONAL

FIRST

STOP

.219 ± .005(5,56 ± 0,13)

.094 ± .004(2,39 ± 0,10)

1.015 ± .015 (25,78 ± 0,38)

OVER TERMINALS


8

9

10

2 3

45

6

7

36°

1

FIRST

STOP2

34

56

7

8 10

11

9

1.162 ± .010(29,51 ± 0,25)

DIA.

.642 ± .015(16,31 ± 0,38)

1.170 ± .015 (29,72 ± 0,38)

OVER TERMINALS

12

9

87

6

432

1

5

1110

30°

15°

Plated brass spacers for ease of positioningmounting plate driving assembly are availableon special request (sold only with switches). Theuse of spacers is recommended for other thanprototype requirements. When ordering switcheswith spacers, give full details regarding speciallength, potentiometer being used, etc.

Standard style, concentric shaft, add-a-potswitches have adjustable stops. SeeAdjustable Stop description.

Grayhill part number and date code marked on detent coverlabel. Customer part number marked on request. Militarypart number marked when required.

Rotary26


Rotary S

witches


SERIES 541" Diameter, 1 Amp, Add-A-Pot

FEATURES• Military Qualified MIL-3786/04• Central Shaft Designed to Operate

MIL Potentiometer• Mounting Plate Options Provide

Choice of Potentiometer• Fixed Distance from Switch to

Mounting Plate

Military Qualified Style

Note: Common locations for a single pole perdeck switch. For common location onmultiple switches, see circuit diagram.

Number Approximateof Dimension Weight

Decks A Grams

1 1.024 (26,01) 602 1.370 (34,80) 673 1.716 (43,59) 74


Potentiometer MountingThe two mounting plates shown below are supplied with

each switch.

Mounting Plate A Mounting Plate B

Series 54M Add-A-Pot Switch is a concentricshaft unit with provision for potentiometermounting. Outer shaft operates switch decks.Inner shaft terminates in tapered tongue,which allows any desired potentiometer to bemounted. The Series 54M Add-A-Pot isqualified to MIL-DTL-3786/4-3. Patent No.3,297,830.Grayhill part number and date code marked on detentcover label. Customer part number marked onrequest. Military part number marked when required.

DIM. A + .046 –.020(+ 0,05 –0,51)

.642 ± .015 (16,31 ± 0,38)


.219 ± .005(5,56 ± 0,13)

CL OF NON-TURN TAB.375

± .015 (9,53

± 0,38)

1.162 ± .010 (29,51 ± 0,25)

DIA.

.125 + .001 –.002(3,18 + 0,03 –0,05) DIA.

.250 + .001 –.002(6,35 + 0,03 –0,05) DIA.

.250 ± .020 (6,35 ± 0,51)

.121 ± .015 (3,07 ± 0,38)

.375 ± .020 (9,53 ± 0,51)

.375 ± .020 (9,53 ± 0,51)

.250 ± .020 (6,35 ± 0,51)

.140 ± .062 (3,56 ± 1,57)

1.000 ± .010 (25,4

± 0,25)

3/8-32 NEF-2A THREAD



GRAYHILL OR CUSTOMER PART NUMBERMARKED ON SWITCH COVER UPON REQUEST.MILITARY NUMBER MARKED ON ALLQUALIFIED SWITCHES

.575 (14,61) REF.

#1 THREAD

SEE POTENTIOMETER MOUNTING

1.170 ± .015 (29,72 ± 0,38)

OVER TERMINALS

12

9

87

6

432

1

511

10

30°

15°

.018 ± .005 (0,46 ± 0,13).052 ± .005 (1,32 ± 0,13)

1.265 (32,13)

DIA.

27.5 ± 2

.098 ± .003 (2,49 ± 0,08) DIA. (3)

THROUGH BOLT HOLE (2 EA.)

15 ± 2

.245 ± .003 (6,22 ± 0,08) R.

.375 ± .003 (9,53 ± 0,08) R.

.261 ± .003 (6,63 ± 0,08) DIA. (1)

1.265 (32,13)

DIA.

15 ± 2

9 ± 2

.437 ± .003 (11,10 ± 0,08) R.

.531 ± .003 (13,49 ± 0,08) R.

.380 ± .003 (9,65 ± 0,08) DIA. (1)

.130 ± .003 (3,30 ± 0,08) DIA. (2)

Rotary27


Rotary S

witches


MILITARY QUALIFIEDSingle Shaft SwitchesThe military styles of the single shaft Series 42and 44 rotary switches are qualified to MIL-DTL-3786/4, specifically SR04-1. Qualificationincludes two temperature ranges. Unsealedstyles M, MB, MG and MBG are qualified for -65to 85°C. Unsealed styles H, HB, HG and HBG,plus sealed styles HS, HBS, HGS and HBGS arequalified for -65°C to 125°C. Qualification includeslow level switching and shaft grounding asspecified in MIL-DTL-3786. Qualification includes30°, 36°, 45°, 60° and 90° angles of throw withsolder lug terminals. The military styles aredimensionally the same as the standard styleswith two exceptions. The location of the commonfor the 3-pole switch differs (see circuit diagrams)and the non-turn tab for styles HS, HBS, HGSand HBGS differs per the Shaft and Panel Sealdescription following.

Two Switches, Concentric ShaftsThe M style of the concentric shaft Series 43and 54 switches is qualified to MIL-DTL-3786/4,

specifically SR04-2. Unsealed switches arequalified for -65°C to 85°C in 30°, 36°, 45°, 60°and 90° throws. The standard and militarystyles of the concentric switches have thesame dimensions with the exception of thelocation of the 3 pole common (see circuitdiagrams). The 30° and 36° throws are describedin the ordering information. If the 45°, 60° and90° throws are required, they can be provided inSection A of the Series 54 Rotary Switches; seeStandard Options, page J-9.

Add-A-Pot SwitchesThe military style of the add-a-pot Series 54switch is qualified to MIL-DTL-3786/4, specificallySR04-3. These unsealed switches are qualifiedfor -65°C to 85°C in 30°, 45°, 60° and 90° throws.The dimensions of the military style add-a-potswitches are not the same as the standard add-a-pot switches; see drawings.

All Qualified SwitchesComplete electrical ratings and characteristicsfor all of these qualified switches are listed on the

following pages. Standard variations such asterminals, shaft and/or bushing length etc., whichdo not affect performance, can be marked asqualified product. Adjustable stops cannot bequalified. Contact Grayhill for details aboutvariations.

Military qualified switches may be ordered bythe military M number listed in MIL-DTL-3786/4or by the Grayhill part number. They will bemarked to specifications.

MILITARY QUALIFIED SHAFT ANDPANEL SEAL:Styles HS, HBS, HGS and HBGSThe shaft is sealed to the bushing by an internalO-ring per MIL-P-5516B. The bushing is sealedto the panel with a silicone rubber washer and astainless steel backing washer. The combineduncompressed thickness is 0.055" (1,40). Sincethis switch has a flat cover, a non-turn washer issupplied (see Panel Seal Kit). If using it, mountit in front of the panel.

SPECIFICATIONS:

Electrical RatingsStandard StyleRated: To make and break the followingloads:

Angle of Throw30° or 36° 45° or 60° 90°

115 Vac resistive 1 amp 5 amps 5 amps6-28 Vdc resistive 1 amp 1 amp 2 amps115 Vac inductive 0.25 amp 2 amps 2 amps115 Vdc inductive 0.02 amp — —6-28 Vdc inductive 0.10 amp — —115 Vdc resistive 0.10 amp — —

To carry 10 amps continuously.

Contact Resistance: 50 milliohms maximumInsulation Resistance: 1,000 megaohmsminimumVoltage Breakdown: 1,000 Vac initially (500Vac or better after most environmental tests)Life Expectancy: 100,000 mechanical cyclesof operation. Note: Actual life is determinedby a number of factors, including electricalloading, rate of rotation and environment, aswell as maximum voltage breakdown requiredat the end of life.

UL Recognition–Styles UA, UD, UM, UP, US and USPGrayhill styles A and M and their variations(D, P, S and SP) of the Series 42, 43, 44 and54 rotary switches have been tested byUnderwriters Laboratories. The letter U in thestyle indicates proper marking as required byUnderwriters Laboratories. These switchesare recognized under file number E35289.The UL rating for the Series 42, 43, 44 and 54is as follows:Electrical Parameters: style UA = 1.0 ampereat 125 Vac. Style UM = 1.0 ampere at 125 Vacand also .5 ampere at 125 Vac, inductiveload, 0.75 to 0.8 power factor.

Rating based on the following criteria:Overload: 50 operations at 150% rated ACloadEndurance: 6000 operations at the rated loadwith 1000 Vac dielectric strength before andafter testTemperature Rise: Not to exceed 30°C whencarrying rated AC load after test.Note: all dimensional drawings for the standardstyle Series 42, 43, 44 and 54 also apply tothese switches, with the exception that switchesare marked per specifications.

Electrical RatingsMilitary StyleGeneral Rating: This rating is based onstandard Grayhill tests of the Military styleswitch done at ambient conditions. It is providedfor comparison to the Standard Style switch.Charts shown for non-shorting contacts (break

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

00

CYCLES x 1,000

10 25 50

CU

RR

EN

T (

AM

PS

)

VOLTAGE 115 VACRESISTIVE

CYCLES x 1,000

0 10 25 50

1.7

1.5

1.2

1.0

.75

.50

.20

0

CU

RR

EN

T (

AM

PS

)

VOLTAGE 30 VDCRESISTIVE

INDUCTIVE(2.8 HENRIES)

before make)Voltage and Load: As listed in the chartOne cycle is 360° rotation and a returnthrough all switch positions to the startingposition. The data for the curves wasmeasured at sea level, 25°C and 68% relativehumidity.

The Series 42, 43, 44 and 54, style M, H andHS switches are made to meet requirementsof MIL-DTL-3786, style SR04. Diallyl phthalatemolded parts and the design of internalswitching elements provide exceptionalperformance.

Curves shown are typical load-life curves forSeries 42, 43, 44 and 54, style M, H and HSswitches with 30° or 36° angles of throw.They show the numbers of cycles of rotationallife expectancy for the types of loads shown.Thus, with a 5 amp, 115 Vac resistive load,10,000 cycles of life is expected. If the loadis reduced to 3 amps, life is increased to25,000 cycles. The larger angles of throw(45°, 60° or 90°) switch larger currents for alike number of cycles.

Life limiting or failure criteria for these curvesare:Contact Resistance: 50 milliohms maximumInsulation Resistance: 1,000 megaohmsminimum between mutually insulated partsVoltage Breakdown: 1,000 Vac minimumbetween mutually insulated parts. Theseswitches will carry 10 amps with maximumcontact temperature rise of 20°C. Life can bepredicted by Grayhill if less critical lifecharacteristics, elevated temperature orreduced pressure is involved.

Rotary28


Rotary S

witches


SPECIFICATIONS:

MIL-S-3786 Electrical ValuesMilitary StyleStyle M switches, at 85°C, approximately68% humidity and sea level pressure andstyle H and HS at 125°C have been tested tomake and break the following loads as statedin MIL-DTL-3786/SR04; 250 milliamperes at28 Vdc resistive, 100 milliamperes at 28 Vdcinductive (2.8 henries); 75 milliamperes at115 Vac resistive.

These switches have also been tested atreduced barometric pressure (70,000 feet),25°C at approximately 68% relative humidityto make and break the following loads asstated in MIL-DTL-3786/SR04; 200milliamperes, 28 Vdc resistive; 25 milliamperes,28 Vdc inductive (2.8 henries); 20milliamperes, 115 Vac resistive. When testedto these loads and conditions the style M, Hand HS switches meet the following life limitingor failure criteria after 25,000 cycles inaccordance with MIL-S-3786.

Contact Resistance: 50 milliohms maximumInsulation Resistance: 1,000 megaohmsminimum between terminals and shaftsDielectric Strength: 1,000 Vac (atmosphericpressure) and 450 Vac (reduced pressure)minimum between mutually insulated parts.

When tested at sea level 25°C and 68%relative humidity with failure criteria of 50milliohms max. and 750 Vac breakdownvoltage, these switches will make and breakthe following loads: 250 mA at 28 Vdc,inductive (2.8 henries); 1.25 amps at 28 Vdcresistive; 2.0 amps at 115 Vac, 60 Hz resistive,for 10,000 cycles.

These switches also meet MIL-DTL-3786/SR04for moisture resistance, medium and high shock,vibration (10 to 2000 cps), thermal shock (-65°C to 125°C), salt spray, explosion andterminal pull.

Materials and FinishesStandard StyleBases: Melamine per (MIL-M-14) ASTM-D-5948Cover, Deck Separators, End Plate and RotorMounting Plate: Phenolic per (MIL-M-14)ASTM-D-5948Mounting Bushings: Brass, tin/zinc-plated.Shaft, Cover Plate, Retaining Rings, ThroughBolts, Shaft Extensions, Stop Arm, ThrustWashers Stop Washers and Rear SupportPlate: Stainless SteelDetent Balls: Steel, nickel-platedDetent Springs: Tinned music wireRotor Contact, Stator (Base) Contacts: SilveralloyTerminals (Except Common): Brass, tin platedCommon Plate, Including Solder Lug: Brass,silver-plated .0003" minimumMounting Hardware: Two mounting nuts .094"(2,39) thick by .562" (14,27) across flats andone internal tooth lockwasher are suppliedwith each switch.Stud Nuts, Mounting Nuts, Lock Washers:Tin/zinc-plated or stainless steel.

Materials and FinishesMilitary QualifiedBases: Diallyl per (MIL-M-14) ASTM-D-5948Cover, Deck Separators, End Plate and RotorMounting Plate: Diallyl per (MIL-M-14) ASTM-D-5948

Mounting Bushings: Brass, tin/zinc-plated.Shaft, Cover Plate, Retaining Rings,Through Bolts, Shaft Extensions, StopArm, Stop Washers, Thrust Washers andRear Support Plate: Stainless steelDetent Balls: Steel, nickel-platedDetent Springs: Tinned music wireRotor Contact: Silver alloyTerminals, Common Plate includingSolder Lug: Brass, silver-plated .0003"minimumMounting Hardware: Two mounting nuts.094" thick by .562" across flats and oneinternal tooth lockwasher are supplied witheach switch.Stud Nuts, Mounting Nuts, Lock Washers:Tin/zinc-plated or stainless steel.

Additional CharacteristicsStandard Style and Military QualifiedContact: Shorting or non-shorting wipingcontacts with over 150 grams of contactforceRotational Torque: 8-115 ounce-inchesdepending upon the number of poles perdeck, number of decks and angle of throwMechanical Life Expectancy: 100,000cycles of operationShaft Flat Orientation: Flat oppositecontacting position of pole number one (Seecircuit diagram).Stop Strength: For Standard style: 15 pound-inches minimum. For Adjustable stop styles:12 pound-inchesExtended Stud: Single shaft switches of sixor more decks and concentric shaft switchesof a combination of five or more decks(Standard style) or four or more decks (Militarystyle) have longer studs with extra mountingnuts for recommended double end mount.

Rotary29


Rotary S

witches


CHOICES AND LIMITATIONS: Series 42, 43, 44 and 54A = Standard, Solder LugsP = Standard, PC Mount TerminalsD = Standard, Adjustable Stops

S = Shaft and Panel SealU = UL RecognizedM = Military Qualified 85°C4

H = Military Qualified, 125°CB = Military, Grounded ShaftG = Military, Low Level Rating

SINGLE SHAFT SWITCHES Style Choices Angle of Number of Poles Positions Shorting or

Series Unsealed Shaft/Panel Seal Throw Decks Per Deck Per Pole1,3 Non-Shorting


01 thru 12 1 02 thru 123 N or S01 thru 12 2 02 thru 06 N or S01 thru 08 3 02 thru 04 N or S01 thru 06 4 02 or 03 N or S01 thru 04 5 02 N or S01 thru 04 6 02 N or S

01 thru 12 1 02 thru 083 N or S01 thru 06 2 02 thru 04 N or S01 thru 04 3 02 N01 thru 03 4 02 N

01 thru 12 1 02 thru 063 N01 thru 06 2 02 or 03 N01 thru 04 3 02 N

01 thru 12 1 02 thru 043 N01 thru 06 2 02 N

01 thru 12 1 AJ (2 thru 12)1 N or S01 thru 12 2 AJ (2 thru 6)1 N or S01 thru 08 3 AJ (2 thru 4)1 N or S01 thru 06 4 AJ (2 or 3)1 N or S

01 thru 12 1 AJ (2 thru 10)1 N or S01 thru 12 2 AJ (2 thru 5)1 N or S

01 thru 12 1 02 thru 103 N or S

A SUA USUM5 —M MS4

MB MBS4

MG MGS4

MBG MBGS4

H HSHB HBSHG HGSHBG HBGS

D —UD —

P SPUP USP

1For Adjustable Stop (with the letter D), use AJinstead of number of positions when ordering.2For 45°, 60° or 90° throws in Series 54 switchesof these styles, see Standard Options.3For single pole switches with the maximumpositions per pole, continuous rotation ispossible. Specify fixed stop or continuousrotation when ordering single shaft switches.Concentric shaft switches have continuous

Style Angle of Section A (Front) Section B (Rear)Series Choices Throw Decks Poles Position N or S Decks Poles Position N or S

CONCENTRIC SHAFT, 2 SWITCHES

A2

UA2

M2

DUD

M

54

43

54

43

54

ADD-A-POT SWITCHES

Second shaft operates a potentiometersupplied by the customer.Rear mounting plates are provided.

30°

36°

30°

36°

30°

01 thru 03 1 02 thru 105 N or S

Concentric Shaft Switches

36°

30°

45°

60°

90°

30°

36°

36°

42

44

44

42

42


01 thru 03 1 02 thru 123 N or S 01 or 02 3 02 thru 04 N or S01 thru 03 2 02 thru 06 N or S 01 4 02 or 03 N or S

01 5 02 N or S01 6 02 N or S


01 thru 03 1 AJ (2-12)1 N or S01 thru 03 2 AJ (2-6)1 N or S

01 thru 03 1 AJ (2-10)1 N or S


rotation.4Styles which include both M and S are notqualified but are made of the same materials andconstruction as qualified types. For qualifiedswitches with shaft and panel seal, use equivalentHS style.5UM switches are made of the same materialsand construction as the M style switches. Formilitary switch UM is not required; use M style.

Rotary30


Rotary S

witches


ACCESSORIES

Internal Tooth Lockwasher–Figure AFor a 3/8" bushing. Approximately 0.500" (12,7)outside diameter, .022" (0,56) thickness. Materialis cadmium-plated steel. Part No. 12Q1272-1For a 1/4" bushing. Approximately0.400" (10,16) outside diameter, .018"(0,46) thickness. Material is steel, tin/zinc plated.

Non-Turn Washer–Figure BCan be ordered as extra hardware for theSeries 5000, 24, 42, 43, 44, 54, 71B, 53, 57 and59 rotary switches. The internal key of thewasher slides into the bushing keyway. Theright angle tab locks into a predrilled hole onthe back side of the mounting panel. Material isbrass, tin/zinc plated. Part No. 12C1087-1

Panel Seal Kit–Figure CSold as a separate item to seal the switch

ORDERING INFORMATION: Single Shaft Switches, Add-A-Pot Switches

ORDERING INFORMATION: Concentric Shaft Rotary Switches

Series: Determined by the type of switch andthe angle of throw


Angle of Throw: Must agree with Series NumberNumber of Decks: As limited by the angle of throw, the poles per deck, switch style and type of contacts

44M30–02–1–12N–FStop Arrangement: Add letter F to a one pole per deck switch with the maximum number of positions fora stop between position 1 and the last position. Leave blank for continuous rotationType of Contacts: N = Non-shorting; S = Shorting

Positions Per Pole: Requires 02 positions as a minimum to maximum allowable dependent on the angleof throw and poles per deck. Use AJ for adjustable stops (Styles D and UD).

Poles Per Deck: As limited by angle of throw, switch series and style


Series: Determined by the angle of throw, applicable to both sections


Section A (front)Number of Decks: As limited by the number of poles per deck

Poles Per Deck: As limited by the angle of throwPositions Per Pole: Requires 02 positions as a minimum to the maximum allowable dependent on the angleof throw and the poles per deck

Type of Contacts: N=Non-shorting, S=Shorting. All one pole per deck switches with the maximum numberof positions are continuous rotation

43M02110N–M03203SSection B (rear)

The limitations listed for Section A apply to Section BType of ContactsPositions Per PolePoles Per DeckNumber of DecksStyle


Available from your local Grayhill Distributor

Non-Turn Washer Seal Keyed Washer Hex Nut FIGURE C

.625 ± .010(15,88 ± 0,25) DIA..375 + .004 – .000(9,53 + 0,10) DIA.

.375 ± .005(9,53 ± 0,13)

.125 ± .003(3,18 ± 0,08)

C L

.032 ± .002 (0,81 ± 0,05)

.187 ± .010(4,75 ± 0,25)

.045 ± .003(1,14 ± 0,08)

.010 ± .002(0,25 ± 0,05)

.562 (14,27)ACROSS FLATS

.088 (2,24)/

.093 (2,36)

.120 ± .003 (3,18 ± 0,08)

.060 ± .002 (1,52 ± 0,05)

.154 + .004 –.000(3,91 + 0,10 –0,00) DIA.

.437 ± .010 (11,10 ± 0,25)

.625 ± .010(15,88 ± 0,25)DIA..376 + .003 –.000(9,55 + 0,08 –0,00)DIA.

.125 ± .010 (3,18 ± 0,25)

.032 ± .002(0,81 ± 0,05)

FIGURE B

FIGURE A

bushing to the panel. The kit consists of fouritems: a grooved hex nut, a keyed washer, akeyed seal and a non-turn washer. Assembly isdescribed on Page J-53. Dimensions of panelseal kit items are shown in Figure C. This kitseals the bushing to the panel; it does not sealthe shaft to the bushing. Not usable withadjustable stop switches. Part No. 42-24

For prices and discounts, contact a local Sales Office, an authorized local Distributor or Grayhill.

Rotary31


Rotary S

witches


Military Style

Rear viewsshown with circuit diagrams

Non-Turn Washer Detail D


Approx. Approx.No. of Dimension Dimension Weight No. of Dimension Dimension WeightDecks A B Grams Decks A B Grams

1 .916 (23,27) .032 (0,81) 50 7 3.164 (80,37) .281 (7,14) 1102 1.249 (31,72) .032 (0,81) 60 8 3.497 (88,82) .281 (7,14) 1203 1.582 (40,18) .032 (0,81) 70 9 3.830 (97,28) .281 (7,14) 1304 1.915 (48,64) .032 (0,81) 80 10 4.163 (105,74) .281 (7,14) 1405 2.248 (57,10) .032 (0,81) 90 11 4.496 (114,20) .281 (7,14) 1506 2.831 (71,91) .281 (7,14) 100 12 4.829 (122,66) .281 (7,14) 160

Mounting Hardware: Two mounting nuts, .094" (2,39) thick by .562" (14,27) across flats, one internal tooth lockwasherand one non-turn washer (see detail D for dimensions), are supplied with switch.

Grayhill part number and date code marked on detent cover label. Customer part number marked on request. Militarypart number marked when required.

Ser. 53—1.281 (32,54)Ser. 57 & 59—

1.125 ± .010 (28,58 ± 0,25)

C L

C L

C L

C L

45°

.219 ± .004(5.56 ± 0,10) OF POSITION

NO. 1

OF BUSHING KEYWAY

SEE CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

1.000 (25.4) SER. 57 & 591.156 (29.36) SER. 53

± .010 (0,25)

DIM. A + .046 (1,17)– .020 (0,51)

DIM. B REF. STUDPROJECTION

.437±.020(11,10±0,51)

.437±.020(11,10±0,51)

.250 + .001 –.002 DIA.(6,35 + 0,03 –0,05) MILITARY NUMBERS MARKED HERE

BUSHING KEYWAY.066 ± .002 (1,68 ± 0,05) WIDE BY .036 ± .003 (0,91 ± 0,08)DEEP FROM A .375 (9,53) DIA. INTEGRAL ASSEMBLY NUT. DO NOT REMOVE.


.250 ± .020(6,35 ± 0,51)

.375 ± .005(9,53 ± 0,13)

.032 ± .003(0,81 ± 0,08)

STYLE M—.187 (4,75)STYLE HS—.125 (3,18)± .010 (0,25)

.125 ± .003(3,18 ± 0,08)

SERIES 53, 57 and 591.125" Diameter, 1/4 Amp

STANDARD STYLEMILITARY QUALIFIEDThe Series 53, 57 and 59 rotary switches are allmilitary type switches. Grayhill manufacturesthese switches in two styles: M and HS. Style Mis unsealed and is not qualified; Style HS is shaftand panel sealed and is qualified. The non-qualified Style M can be regarded as ourStandard Style for types of switches. Althoughit is not qualified, Style M is constructed of thesame military grade materials and will providecomparable performance in all areas. Forexample, the Style ‘M’ switches, in addition tothe electrical ratings listed elsewhere in thesepages, will meet the following requirements ofMIL-DTL-3786:Moisture Resistance: Medium and High Shock;Vibration (10 to 500 cps); Thermal Shock (-65°C to 125 °C); Salt Spray; Explosion; TerminalStrength (pull, 2 lbs. minimum); and StopStrength (15 pound-inches minimum).

The line drawings shown above are applicableto the Style M and Style HS. The only differencebetween the two is the length of the tab of thenon-turn washer. The shorter tab for the HS isexplained in the following paragraph.

The Series 53, 57 and 59 Style HS rotaryswitches are qualified to MIL-DTL-3786/36. TheStyle HS is shaft and panel sealed. The panel issealed by an O-ring at the base of the bushing.The shaft is sealed by an O-ring inside thebushing. These seals do not alter the dimensionsshown in the line drawings when the switch ismounted.

A non-turn washer, supplied with the mountinghardware, may be used with the Style HSswitches. It is suggested that the non-turn washerbe mounted in the following manner to preservethe seal: from the front of the panel into a holethat does not go through the panel.

The qualification of the Series 53, 57 and 59rotary switches does not extend to all possiblecombinations listed in the Choices andLimitations chart. The limitations on thequalification are described in the chart shownbelow.

Standard variations, such as shaft and/orbushing length, etc., that do not affect switchperformance can also be marked as qualifiedproduct. For complete details contact Grayhill.Military qualified Series 53, 57 and 59 Style HSrotary switches may be ordered by the ‘M’number listed in MIL-DTL-3786/36 or by theGrayhill part number. Military style switcheswill be marked to the specification.

Style HS Switches are MIL-DTL-3786/36Qualified for the Following Characteristics

Max. No. Max. No. Max. No.Series of Decks Poles/Deck Total Poles/Switch

53 5 8 2457 5 4 2059 5 5 20

FEATURES• Smallest Diameter Rotary Switch

with this Number of Positions andCurrent Capacity

• Military Qualified MIL-DTL-3786/36• Gold-plated Contact System

Compatible with Logic Circuitry

Rotary32


Rotary S

witches


6

2 1

19

17

1514

8910

C1345

7

11 12 13

16

18

20

18˚

45˚

OF BUSHINGKEYWAY

C L

6

2 1

19

17

1514

8910

C134

5

7

11 12 13

16

18

20

C L

C2

6

2 1

19

17

1514

8910

C1

345

7

1112 13

16

18

20

C L

C3

C2C4

6

2 1

19

17

1514

8910

C4

345

7

11 12 13

16

18

20

C L

C5

C1

C2

C3

6

2 1

19

17

1514

8910

C7

345

7

11 12 13

16

18

20

C L

C8

C9

C10

C1C2

C3

C4

C5

C6

C L

OF POSITIONNO. 1

62

1

1514

89

10

C1345

7

1112

1316

OF BUSHINGKEYWAY

C L

C L OF POSITIONNO. 1

171819

202122

2324 45˚

62

1

1514

89

10

C1 345

7

1112

13161718

19202122

2324

C2

C L

62

1

1514

89

10

C1345

7

1112

13161718

19202122

2324

C2

C L

C3

62

1

1514

89

10

C1345

7

1112

13161718

19202122

2324C2

C L

C4

C3

62

1

1514

89

10

C2 345

7

1112

13161718

19202122

2324

C5

C L

C6

C4

C3

C1

62

1

1514

89

10

C1

345

7

1112

13161718

19202122

2324

C2C L

C L

C LC3

C4

C5 C6

C7

C8

7 /2˚1

C1

C2

C3C4

C5

C6

C7

C8

C9 C10

C11

C12

12

34

56789

1011

12

1314

1516

17 18 19 2021

222324

OF POSITION #1

OF BUSHING KEYWAY

7.5°

37.5°

CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS: Series 53


Rear View


18° Angleof Throw


Rear View


Terminal Detail


15° Angleof Throw

ONE POLE TWO POLE THREE POLE FOUR POLE

FIVE POLE SIX THRU TEN POLE


FIVE OR SIX POLE SEVEN OR EIGHT POLE NINE THRU TWELVE POLE

GRAYHILLLA GRANGE

ILLINOIS

14151617

18

1920

1

13

1211

109

87

65432

2122

2324

SEE NOTE

SEE DETAIL

1.350 ± .015(34,29 ± 0,38)

OVER TERMINALS

.034 ± .003(0,86 ± 0,08) .068 ± .005

(1,73 ± 0,13)

1.190 ± .015(30,23 ± 0,38)

OVER TERMINALS

14

15

1617

1819

20

1

13 12 11

109

87

65

432

SEE NOTE

SEE DETAIL

GRAYHILLLA GRANGE

ILLINOIS

Rotary33


Rotary S

witches


SPECIFICATIONS


Rear ViewSwitch is Viewed From Shaft End and Shown in Position No. 1.Note: All common terminals are located above base terminals as shown.

221/2° Angleof Throw


THREE OR FIVE THRUFOUR POLE EIGHT POLE

ONE POLE TWO POLE

Electrical RatingsGeneralSwitch rating for break before make contacts.Voltage: As listed in the chart.

Curve data based on test data conducted atsea level, 25°C and relative humidity. Cycleequals 360° rotation and 360° return. Cyclingrate is 10 cycles per minute. The curvesshown are typical load life curves for a Series53M, 57M and 59M Rotary Switch. They showthe number of cycles of rotational life that canbe expected for the voltages, currents and

6

2 1

15

14

8

9 10

C134

5

7

1112

13

1611-15°

OF BUSHINGKEYWAY

C L

C L OF POSITIONNO. 1

6

1

15

14

8

9 10

C1 45

7

1112

13

16

C2

23 C L

6

2 1

15

148

910

C13

45

7

1112

13

16

C L

C3

C2

C4

6

2 1

15

148

9 10

C13

45

7

1112

13

16

C L

C5

C3

C7

C2

C4

C6

C8

1415

16

1

13

1211 10

9

87

65

432

SEE NOTE

SEE DETAIL

1.190 ± .015(30,23 ± 0,38)

OVER TERMINALS

GRAYHILLLA GRANGE

ILLINOIS

400

300

200

100

00

CYCLES x 1,000

5 10 25

CU

RR

EN

T M

ILLI

AM

PS

VOLTAGE 115 VAC

15 20

400

300

200

100

00

CYCLES x 1,000

5 10 25

CU

RR

EN

T M

ILLI

AM

PS

30 VDC RESISTIVE

15 20

30 VDCINDUCTIVE

types of loads shown. Thus, with a 250milliamperes, 30 Vdc resistive load, 10,000cycles of life can be expected. Life limiting orfailure criteria for these curves are:Contact Resistance: 50 milliohms maximum(20 milliohms initially).Insulation Resistance: 1,000 megohmsminimum between mutually insulated parts.Voltage Breakdown: 500 Vac minimumbetween mutually insulated parts. Theseswitches will carry 4 amperes with a maximumcontact temperature rise of 20°C. If the lifelimiting characteristics are less critical thanthose shown above or if elevated temperaturesor reduced pressures are involved, Grayhill canpredict the switch life for the application.

Electrical RatingsMilitary QualifiedThe Series 53, 57 and 59 Style HS, RotarySwitches have been tested to make and breakthe following loads as stated in MIL-DTL-3786/36: 70,000 ft. altitude for 10,000 cycles: 10mA,28 Vdc, inductive (250 mH); 50 mA, 28 Vdc,resistive; 20 mA, 115 Vac, resistive. Atmosphericpressure, 125°C for 10,000 cycles: 25 mA,28 Vdc inductive (250 mH); 75 mA, 28 Vdc,resistive; 50 mA, 115 Vac resistive. Atmosphericpressure, 25°C for 10,000 cycles: 75 mA,28 Vdc, inductive (250 mH); 250 mA, 28 Vdcresistive; 150 mA, 115 Vac, resistive. Life limitingcriteria for these loads are:Contact Resistance: 50 milliohms maximum.Dielectric Strength: 500 Vac (350 Vac—reduced pressure).Insulation Resistance: 1,000 megohmsminimum. These switches also meet MIL-DTL-3786/36 for moisture resistance, medium and

high shock, vibration, thermal, thermal shock,salt spray, explosion, terminal strength andstop strength.Materials and FinishesCover, Base, Spacer and Rotor MountingPlate: Diallyl per (MIL-M-14) ASTM-D-5948Mounting Bushing: Brass, tin/zinc-plated.Shaft, Stop Pins, Retaining Rings, ThroughBolts, Shaft Extension, Stop Arm, ThrustWashers, Lockwashers, Nuts, Non-turnWasher, Cover Plate and Rear SupportPlate: Stainless steelDetent Balls: Steel, nickel-platedDetent Springs: Tinned music wireRotor Contact: Silver alloy, gold-plated.00001" minimum.Terminals and Common Plate IncludingSolder Lug: Brass, gold plate .00002"minimum over silver plate .0003" minimum.Panel Seal: Silicone rubber.Shaft Seal: O-ring per MIL-M-5516B.Mounting Nut, Lock Washer: Brass, tin/zinc-plated or stainless steel.

Additional CharacteristicsRotational Torque: 20-80 in-ozs., dependingon the number of poles per deck and thenumber of decks.Contacts: Shorting or non-shorting wipingcontacts with over 100 grams of contact force.Shaft Flat Orientation: Flat oppositecontacting position pole #1 (See CircuitDiagrams).Extended Studs: Switches of 6 decks ormore have longer studs with extra stud nutsfor recommended double end mounting.Terminals: Switch is provided with fullcomplement of base or position terminalsregardless of the number of active positions.

Rotary34


Rotary S

witches



Style and Angle of Number of Decks Poles Number ofSeries Designation Throw Stops Terminals Shorting Non-Shorting Per Deck Positions/Pole

01 thru 12 01 thru 12 1 02 thru 2401 thru 12 01 thru 12 2 02 thru 1201 thru 08 01 thru 08 3 02 thru 0801 thru 06 01 thru 06 4 02 thru 0601 thru 04 01 thru 04 5 or 6 02 thru 0401 thru 03 01 thru 03 7 or 8 02 or 0301 or 02 01 or 02 9, 10, 11 or 12 02

01 thru 12 01 thru 12 1 02 thru 1601 thru 12 01 thru 12 2 02 thru 0801 thru 06 01 thru 06 3 or 4 02 thru 0401 thru 03 01 thru 03 5, 6, 7 or 8 02

01 thru 12 01 thru 12 1 02 thru 2001 thru 12 01 thru 12 2 02 thru 1001 thru 06 01 thru 06 3 or 4 02 thru 0501 thru 04 01 thru 04 5 02 thru 0401 or 02 01 or 02 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10 02

15° Fixed

221/2° Fixed

18° Fixed

SolderLug

SolderLug

SolderLug

53

57

59

M = Military Style

HS = Military Qualified,Shaft/Panel Seal

M = Military Style


M = Military Style



Series


Angle of Throw: Must agree with Series Number

Number of Decks: As limited by Choices and Limitations chart

57M22–01–1–16N–F

Stop Arrangement: Use suffix only when ordering 1 pole withmaximum positions.F = Stop between last and first positions; C = Continuous Rotation


Positions Per Pole: requires 02 as a minimum to the maximum allowabledependent on the angle of throw and poles per deck

Poles Per Deck: As limited by angle of throw

* All rotary switches that are required to have military designated markings and testing adhering to MIL-DTL-3786are to be ordered by specifying the military part number identified on the appropriate slash sheet.

Available from your local Grayhill Distributor

MIL Spec. provides for qualification up to and including five decks. Switches of longer length,although not specifically qualified, are built of the same materials and are of the same construction.

For prices and discounts, contact a local Sales Office, an authorized local Distributor or Grayhill.

Rotary35


Rotary S

witches

Keylock Rotary Switches

F-65F-65F-65F-65F-65


Rotary S

witches

Keylock Rotary SwitchesContents: Keylock Rotary Switches

KEYLOCK ROTARY SWITCHES

• Protection From UnauthorizedUse

• Static Damage Protection

• High Quality, Enclosed Switches


• Choices of Size, Circuitry,Rating

Page

SINGLE DECK.....................................................Series 58 ....................... 2

MULTI-DECK ...................................... Series 71J and 71L ....................... 5

HIGH CURRENT ...............................................Series 44L ....................... 7

Rotary1


Rotary S

witches


43

12

LOCKWASHERØ 1.062 ± .020 (Ø 26,97 ± 0,51)SHOWN IN THIS VIEW ONLY

MOUNTING NUT.875 (22,23) ACROSS FLATS.125 (3,18) THICKSHOWN IN THIS VIEW ONLY

.260 ± .020(6,60 ± 0,51)

.792 ± .020(20,12 ± 0,51)

.268 ± .015(6,81 ± 0,38)

.187 ± .015(4,75 ± 0,38)

1.957 ± .062(49,71 ± 1,57)

43

12

.125 ± .015(3,18 ± 0,38)

1.875 ± .062(47,63 ± 1,57)

Ø .900(Ø 22,86)

APOSITIONINDICATORARROW

.625 ± .010(15,88 ± 0,25)

COMMONTERMINAL

TERMINAL FORPOSITION 1

Dimensions not shown are the same as above.

All terminals are provided regardless of the number of

active switch positions.


Keyslot is shown in switch position 1.Key removal position A.Key is inserted cut edge down.

SERIES 58Single Deck, Antistatic


Standard Style

PC Mount Style

SWITCH FEATURES• Economical• Solder Lug or PC Mount• 36°, 45°, 60°, or 90° Throws• 1 or 2 Poles Per Switch• Up to 10 Positions for 1 Pole• 200 mA for 25,000 Cycles

36°, 45°, 60°, or 90°Angle of Throw

36°, 45°, 60, or 90°Angle of Throw

TERMINAL DETAIL

A = .064 ± .005 (1,63±0,13)B = .032 ± .004 (0,81±0,10)

E = .125 ± .015 (3,18 ±0,38)F = .020 ± .003 (0,51 ±0,08)

C = .050 ± .010 (1,27±0,25)D = .062 Ø ± .002 (1,57 Ø ±0,05)

G = .020 ± .003 (0,51 ±0,08)H = .062 ± .004 (1,57 ±0,10)

Solder Lug Solder Lug Common PC Mount

A

B

G

H DC

E

F

G

H

.629 + .010 –.000(15,98 + 0,25)

.750 + .015 –.000(19,05 + 0,38)

RECOMMENDED PANEL CUT

LOCK FEATURES• Minimum Space Behind Panel• 15,000 Vdc Static Protection• 5 Tumbler-Plate Security• In-Panel Key Recoding

Rotary2


Rotary S

witches


LOCK SPECIFICATIONS

General CharacteristicsMounting: By bushing, nut and lockwasherKeying: All locks keyed alike except byspecial orderOrientation of Keylock Switch: Lock flatson both sides with key upright (cut sidedown) in position 1.Key Removals:36° Throw Switch At every position or

At 0° & 180°45° Throw Switch At every position or

At 0°, 90°, 180°, 270°60° Throw Switch At every position or

At 0°, 180°90° Throw Switch At every position or

At 0°, 180°Optional pulls Contact Grayhill

Electrical CharacteristicsChart is shown for non-shorting contacts andresistive load and for the life limiting criteriaindicated below. The data for the curve wasmeasured at sea level, 25°C and 68% relativehumidity. Contact Grayhill for more informationif any of the following is true: life limitingcriteria are more critical than those listed;more cycles of operation are required; alarger make and break current is required;the operating environment includes elevatedtemperatures or reduced pressures.

Curve A: 220 Vac all anglesof throw.Curve B: 115 Vac and 30Vdc for all angles of throw.

300

200

0

0 10 20 30

CYCLES x 1000

CU

RR

EN

TM

ILLI

AM

PS

100

AB

36° Angle of Throw 45° Angle of Throw

CIRCUITRY

90° Angle of Throw

VIEWED FROM FRONT END; SHOWN IN POSITION 1. VIEWED FROM FRONT END; SHOWN IN POSITION 1.

REARVIEW

TWO POLEONE POLE ONE POLE TWO POLE

60° Angle of Throw


VIEWED FROM FRONT END; SHOWN IN POSITION 1.VIEWED FROM FRONT END; SHOWN IN POSITION 1.

REARVIEW

REARVIEW

REARVIEW

6

7

8

910 1

2

3

45

C2

C1

6

7

8

910 1

2

3

4

5

7

8 1

2

3

45

6

7

8 1

2

3

45

6

C2 C1

1

2

34

5

6 1

2

34

5

6

C2 C1

4 1

23

4 1

23

C2 C1

18˚

36˚




POS. 1

.125 ± .015(3,18 ± 0,38)

45˚

22.5˚




POS. 1

.125 ± .015(3,18 ± 0,38)

60˚

30˚


POS. 1

.125 ± .015(3,18 ± 0,38)



45˚

90˚


POS. 1

.125 ± .015(3,18 ± 0,38)


.320 ± .015 (8,13 ± 0,38) DIAMETER CIRCLE OF TERMINAL CENTERS

Materials & FinishesKeys: Brass; 2 suppliedLock Barrel & Plug: Zinc, clear chromateLockwasher: Steel, tin zinc platedMounting Nut: Steel, nickel-platedTumbler Plates: Brass

SWITCH SPECIFICATIONS

Rotary3


Rotary S

witches


SWITCH SPECIFICATIONS Continued

Contact Resistance:Initially: less than 10 mΩEnd of life: less than 50 mΩ

Insulation Resistance: (Between mutuallyinsulated parts)

Initially: 50,000 MΩMinimum: 10,000 MΩ

Breakdown Voltage: (Between mutuallyinsulated parts) more than 600 VacLife Expectancy: Per chart; cycle is 1rotation thru all active positions plus a fullreturn.Carry Current: 6A; maximum temperaturerise 20°C

Materials and FinishesSwitch Base: Thermoset plasticSwitch Housing: NylonDetent Rotor: NylonDetent Balls: Steel, nickel-platedDetent Springs, and Contact Springs:Stainless steelCommon Ring: Brass, gold plate over silverplateTerminals: Brass, gold over silver andnickel plateRotor Contact: Precious metal, gold alloy

Anti-Static Voltage: Anti-static types testedto withstand 15,000 Vdc

Mechanical CharacteristicsSwitching Mode: Shorting (make before break)or non-shorting (break before make) as limitedby the Choices chartType of Contact: WipingNumber of Terminals: All switches are providedwith the full circle of terminals regardless of thenumber of active positionsStop Strength: 1.70 Nm maximum (15.0 in-lbs)Switching Torque: 8 to 16 in-ozs


Lock Style and Switch Style and Angle of No. Of Poles/ Positions Shorting orDescription* Description Throw Decks Deck Per Pole** Non-Shrtg.

Series 58J Switches

1 02 to 08 N or S2 02 to 04 N or S

1 02 to 10 N or S2 02 to 05 N or S

1 02 to 08 N or S2 02 to 04 N or S

1 02 to 04 N2 02 N

1 02 to 10 N or S2 02 to 05 N or S

1 02 to 08 N or S2 02 to 04 N or S

1 02 to 06 N2 02 to 03 N

1 02 to 04 N2 02 N

45° 1

36° 1

45° 1

90° 1

36° 1

45° 1

60° 1

90° 1

A = Standard, Solder LugsP = Standard, PC Mount



J4: Standard–Key pulls at Position 1and at 90 Degree Increments

J8: Standard–Key Pulls at EachPosition

J9: Standard–Key Pulls at Position 1and at 180 Degrees

*Standard Keylock has anti-static protection. All keylock versions available without anti-static protection, with a reduced overall body length. ContactGrayhill for more information.**For single pole switches with maximum positions, specify continuous rotation or fixed stop when ordering.

SeriesLock Style: per Choices Chart J4, J8, J9Switch Style: per Choices Chart A or PAngle of Throw: 36, 45, 60 or 90 (per Choices chart)Number of Decks: 01Poles per Deck: = 1 or 2 (per Choices chart)Positions per Pole: 02 thru 10 (per Choices chart)Type of Contacts: (per Choices chart)

N = Non-shortingS = Shorting

Stop Arrangement Suffix:(needed only for 1-pole switches with maximum positions)F = Fixed stop between last and first positions*Leave blank for continuous rotation

58J8A36-01-1-10N-F

ORDERING INFORMATIONAvailable from your local Grayhill Distributor.For prices and discounts, contact a local SalesOffice, an authorized local Distributor or Grayhill.

Rotary4


Rotary S

witches


SERIES 71 J and LMulti-Deck, Standard &Anti-Static

Number of decks 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Dim. A, Style J (In.) 2.441 2.659 2.877 3.095 3.313 3.811 4.029 4.247 4.465 4.683 4.901 5.119Dim. A, Style L (In.) 1.811 2.029 2.247 2.465 2.683 3.181 3.399 3.617 3.835 4.053 4.271 4.489Dim. B Style J & L(In.) .031 .031 .031 .031 .031 .312 .312 .312 .312 .312 .312 .312

Dim. A, Style J (mm) 62,00 67,54 73,08 78,61 84,15 96,80 102,34 107,87 113,41 118,95 124,49 130,02Dim. A, Style L (mm) 46,00 51,54 57,07 62,61 68,15 80,80 86,33 91.87 97,41 102,95 108.48 114,02Dim. B Style J & L(mm) 0,79 0,79 0,79 0,79 0,79 7,92 7,92 7,92 7,92 7,92 7,92 7,92

For switch specifications and additional dimensions, see Standard Switch Pages.

30° 36°

LOCK DETAIL

Key slot shown in position 1.Key to be inserted with cutside down.

Note: Switch/key positions are not aligned with terminal positions.



0.687 ± .010(17,45 ± 0,25)

0.900 ± .005(22,86 ± 0,13)

.685 ± .015(17,4 ± 0,4)

OVER TERMINALS

GR

AY

HIL

L

101

2 3

45

6

78

9

.685 ± .015(17,4 ± 0,4)

OVER TERMINALS

121

3 4

67

8

910

112 5

GR

AY

HIL

L

DIMENSION A

DIM. B

3/4-24 UNS-2ATHREAD

.730 (18,54)

1.0 (25,4) REF.

1.050 (26,25) REF.

A B

LOCKWASHER

MOUNTING NUT

3/4-24 UNS-2ATHREAD

1.680 (42,67)

B

ANTI-STATICADAPTOR

LOCKADAPTOR

LOCKWASHER IS 1.062 ± .022 (26,97 ± 0,56) DIA. BY .022 (0,56) THICK

A = .218 (5,54)B = .875 ± .020 (22,23 ± 0,51)NUT IS APPROXIMATELY .875 (22,23) ACROSS FLATS

LOCK FEATURES• Economical• Standard or Anti-Static Style• 5-Plates, 1-Sided Key


.691 + .010 –.000(17,55 + 0,25)

.750 + .015 –.000(19,05 + 0,38)

Rotary5

SWITCH FEATURES• Economical• 36° or 30° Throws• Up to 16 Poles Per Switch• 250 mA for 15,000 Cycles


Rotary S

witches


Style Description Angle of No. Of Poles/ Positions Shorting orThrow Decks Deck Per Pole Non-Shrtg.

Series 71 Switches

30° 01 to 12 1 02 to 12* N or S01 to 08 2 02 to 06 N or S01 to 05 3 02 to 03 N or S01 to 04 4 02 to 03 N or S01 to 03 5 02 N or S01 or 02 6 02 N or S

36° 01 to 12 1 02 to 10* N or S01 to 08 2 02 to 05 N or S

CHOICES

*For single pole switches with maximum positions, specify continuous rotation or fixed stop when ordering.


71 L 30-03-1-12N-F

SeriesStyle Letter: L for standard; J for anti-staticAngle of Throw: 30 or 36Number of Decks: 01 thru 12 (per Choices chart)Poles per Deck: 1 thru 6 (per Choices chart)Positions per Pole: 02 thru 12 (per Choices chart)Type of Contacts:

N = Non-shortingS = Shorting

Stop Arrangement Suffix:(needed only for 1-pole switches with maximum positions)F = Fixed stop between last and first positions*Leave blank for continuous rotation

LOCK SPECIFICATIONSMounting: By bushing, nut and lockwasherStatic Voltages: Anti-static style withstands15,000 VdcKeying: All locks have identical keys unlessspecially ordered otherwise

STANDARD SWITCH PAGESFor additional switch dimensions, ratings, circuitry,and specifications, see Series 71. Switchesbeginning on page J-31.


Key Removal30° Throw: Position 1 and 180°Special key removal: Every 90°

36° Throw: All positionsSpecial key removal: Position 1 only

Orientation of Keylock Switch: Bushing flatsare on both sides of the mounting thread withthe key upright in the first position with cut sidedown.

LOCK MATERIALS & FINISHESKeys: Brass; 2 suppliedLock Bezel: Stainless steelLock Barrel & Plug: Zinc treated with chromateLock Adaptor/Extension: Thermoplastic

L Standard, Solder LugsJ Anti-static, Solder Lugs

Rotary6


Rotary S

witches


Note: Switch/key positions are notaligned with terminal positions.

No. of decks 1 2 3 4 5 6

Dim. A (In.) 1.556 1.902 2.248 2.594 2.940 3.536Dim. B (in.) .062 .062 .062 .062 .062 .312

Dim. A (mm) 39,52 48,31 57,10 65,89 74,68 89,81Dim. B (mm) 1,57 1,57 1,57 1,57 1,57 7,92

1 2 3 4 5 6

123 120 127 144 151 158

No. of DecksApprox. Weightin Grams


L Standard, Solder Lugs 45°

Series 44 Switches

Style Description


SERIES 44LHigh Current, 5 Amp



1.575 ± .015(40,0 ± 0,38) DIA.B

C

D

E

F

G

H

1.332 ± .002(33,83 ± 0,05)ACROSS FLATS

SWITCH POSITION 1(KEY REMOVAL A)

LOCK SWITCH

DIM. A.283 ± .062

(7,19 ± 1,57)

DIM. B

1-3/8-32 UNS-2ATHREAD

KNURLED NUT 1.800 (45,72) DIA.; .281 (7,14) THICK; PIN HOLES 90¡ APART

² 1.950 (49,53) DIA.LOCKWASHER

12

3

45

67

8

1.170 ± .015(29,72 ± 0,38)

OVER TERMINALS

45˚ 15˚

HOLE DIA.≥ .064 (1,63)AFTERPLATING

.522 ± .020(13,26 ± 0,51)

1.335 + .010 – .000(33,91 + 0,25 – 0,00)

1.375 + .015 – .000(34,93 + 0,38 – 0,00)

LOCK FEATURES• 8-Pin, Round Key Security• Options for Flat Keys, Special

Keying, and Key Removals

SWITCH FEATURES• High, 5 Amp Current Switching• 45°, Up to 8 Poles Per Switch• 25,000 Cycles of Operation• RoHS Compliant

LOCK SPECIFICATIONSKeying: Each lock is keyed differentlyKey Removal: All positions (45°, etc)Special Options: Flat key with 90° or 180°increment key removals; 7 thru 12 decks.

LOCK MATERIALS AND FINISHESBushing and Knurled Spanner Nut:Aluminum, black anodizedKeying Washer, Cover Support Plate,Shaft Extension: 302 Stainless steelInternal and External Lockwashers: Brass,tin/zinc-plated or stainless steel.Keys, Cylindrical: Stainless steel; 2 supplied

Angle of No. Of Poles/ Positions Shorting orThrow Decks Deck Per Pole Non-Shrtg.

01 to 06 1 02 to 08 N or S01 to 03 2 02 to 04 N or S01 or 02 3 01 or 02 N01 or 02 4 01 or 02 N

Rotary7


Rotary S

witches


SWITCH SPECIFICATIONS

Electrical CharacteristicsIndustrial Grade SwitchSwitching Current and LifeThe load-life values indicate the number ofcycles of operation expected for the voltage,current and type of load. End of life is definedusing the resistance and breakdown failurecriteria listed below.

5A at 115 Vac, resistive 1A at 6 to 28 Vdc, resistive 2A at 115 Vac, inductive

Cycle of Operation: 360° rotation plus a 360°return

Test Conditions: 25°C, 68% relative humidity,atmospheric pressureLife Expectancy: With loads above: 25,000 cycles Without load: 100,000 cycles

Contact Resistance: End of life: less than 20 mΩ

Insulation Resistance:(Between mutually insulated parts) Initially: 50,000 MΩ


44 L 45-02-1-08N-F

SeriesStyle Letter: LAngle of Throw: 45°Number of Decks: 01 thru 06 (per Choices chart)Poles per Deck: 1 thru 4 (per Choices chart)Positions per Pole: 02 thru 08 (per Choices chart)Type of Contacts:

N = Non-shortingS = Shorting (per Choices chart)

Stop Arrangement Suffix: (needed only for 1-pole switches withmaximum positions)F = Fixed stop between positions 8 and 1*Leave blank for continuous rotation


Breakdown Voltage:(Between mutually insulated parts) Initially: 1,000 Vac End of life: 500 Vac

Carry Current: 10A; maximum temperaturerise 20°C

Mechanical CharacteristicsSwitching Mode:45°, 1 or 2 poles: Shorting or non-shorting45°, 3 or 4 poles: Non-shortingType of Contact: Wiping contactsContact Force: greater than 150gNumber of Terminals: Switches are providedwith only the number of terminals neededStop Strength: greater than 15 in-lbs (1.70Nm)Switching Torque: 8-115 in-ozs (28 to 230mNm), depending on the number of poles,number of decks, and angle of throw

Additional CharacteristicsSwitches of 6 or more decks have longer studswith extra mounting nuts for recommendeddouble end mount

Materials and Finishes: SwitchSwitch Bases: Melamine per MIL–M–14, 4Switch Bases:Industrial Grade: Melamine per MIL–M–14Military: Diallyl per MIL–M–14Cover, Deck Separators, End Plate, andRotor Mounting Plate: Phenolic perMIL–M–14Shaft, Shaft Extension, Stop Arm, StopWashers, Rear Support Plate, CoverPlate, Retaining Ring, Studs, Nuts:Stainless steelDetent Balls: Steel, nickel-platedDetent Springs: Tinned music wireRotor Contact, and Stator (Base)Contacts: Silver alloyCommon Plate, and Common Terminal:Brass, 300µ inch, (7.6 µm) silver plateBase Terminals: Brass, tin plated

Rotary8


Rotary S

witches

Special Function Rotary Switches

DIMENSIONS

SPECIFICATIONSElectrical RatingsThe switching elements, and therefore ratings,are the same in an isolated position switch as ina conventional rotary switch. Mechanical life isalso the same.

Additional CharacteristicsShaft Movement or Vertical Travel:

Series 09 .062 ± .020 (1,57 ± 0,51)Series 42 & 44 .070 ± .020 (1,78 ± 0,51)Series 50 & 51 .080 ± .020 (2,03 ± 0,51)

Push or Pull Force Required:Series 09 1.75 ± .5 lbsSeries 42 & 44 2 ± .5 lbsSeries 50 & 51 2 ± .5 lbs

Stops: Single pole per deck switches with themaximum number of positions are supplied withstops only on request: 12 positions in 30° throw,10 in 36°, and 8 in 45°.Stop Strength: Approximately 7.5 pound-inchesfor the isolated position stop.

FEATURES• Protected Switch Positions For

Safety, Calibration, or Stand-by• Choice of Push- or Pull-To-Turn• 1/2" Diameter, 200 mA and

1" Diameter, 1 Amp Switch• 10,000 Cycles of Operation

Series 09 Series 42 & 44Series 50 & 51

Dimension A

1 Deck 1.371 (34,82)2 Decks 1.717 (43,61)3 Decks 2.063 (52,40)4 Decks 2.409 (61,19)

Dimension A

1 Deck 1.228 (31,19)2 Decks 1.496 (38,0)3 Decks 1.764 (44,81)4 Decks 2.032 (51,61)

Dimension A

Solder Lug .893 ± .025 (22,68 ± 0,64)PC Style .897 ± .025 (22,78 ± 0,64)

Grayhill part number and date code marked on label.Customer number marked on request.

DESCRIPTIONAn isolated position is one which cannot be reached by the normal rotation. An additional action isrequired by the operator. It could be either Push-To-Turn, or Pull-To-Turn. After the switch is rotatedto the isolated position, releasing the shaft locks the switch in that position. Push or pull again torotate the switch again.

Use isolated positions to protect a switch position from indiscriminate rotation. Such safety positionsmight include “calibrate”, “off” and/or “stand-by”.

EXTERNAL DIFFERENCESThe isolated position mechanism increases thedepth of the Series 50 and 51 by 0.217" (5,51mm). All other dimensions remain unchanged.In Series 9, 42 and 44, it has the appearance ofan additional deck section without terminals,located directly behind the detent system.

Materials and FinishesMaterials and finishes for the isolationmechanism are listed here.

Series 50 and 51Housing: Zinc casting, tin/zinc-platedShaft: 303 stainless steelStop Pin and Stop Post: 303 stainless steelSpring: Tinned music wire

Series 09Housing: Phenolic for style A; Diallyl, for MShaft: 303 stainless steel, electro-polishedStop Pin and Stop Post: 303 stainless steelSpring: Tinned music wire

Series 42 and 44Housing: Diallyl per MIL-M-14Shaft: 303 stainless steelLock Plate: 302 stainless steelLock Arm: 316 stainless steelLock Post: Brass, tin/zinc-platedCompression Spring: Tinned music wire

SERIES 09, 42, 44, 50, 51Isolated Position

Rotary4

DIM. A + .046 (1,17) –.020 (0,51)

.062 (1,57)DIM. A SOLDER

LUGS

DIM. A PC TERMINALS

DIM. A + .046 –.020(+ 0,05 –0,51)


Rotary S

witches

CONVENTIONAL NUMBERSStart by creating a conventional switch numberin the manner which follows:

Series & StyleAngle of ThrowNumber of Decks

09A30-01-1-12NType of Contacts Shorting = S Non-Shorting = NPositions Per PolePoles Per Deck

Note: No stop arrangement suffix is needed.See Describing Stops.

Special Function Rotary Switches

Standard Military Style Angle Of No. Of Poles Per Positions Shorting OrStyle Style** Description Throw Decks Deck Per Pole Non-Shorting

01 to 04 1 02 to 12 N or S01 to 04 2 02 to 06 N or S

09A 09M Solder Lug 30° 01 to 04 3 02 to 04 N or S01 to 04 4 02 or 03 N or S01 to 04 5 02 N or S01 to 03 6 02 N or S

42A 42M Solder Lug42S — Sealed 36° 01 to 04 1 02 to 10 N or S— 42H 125° Temperature Rating 01 to 04 2 02 to 05 N or S— 42HS 125° Temp Rating, Sealed

01 to 04 1 02 to 12 N or S01 to 04 2 02 to 06 N or S

30° 01 to 04 3 02 to 04 N or S44A 44M Solder Lug 01 to 04 4 02 or 03 N or S44S — Sealed 01 to 04 5 02 N or S— 44H 125° Temperature Rating 01 to 04 6 02 N or S— 44HS 125° Temp Rating, Sealed

45° 01 to 04 1 02 to 08 N or S01 to 03 2 02 to 04 N or S01 or 02 3 02 N or S01 or 02 4 02 N

-- 50C Solder Lug-- 50CP PC Mount 36° 01 1 02 to 10 N or S-- 50M* Solder Lug, Sealed 2 02 to 05 N or S-- 50MP* Sealed, PC

-- 51C Solder Lug 1 02 to 12 N or S-- 51CP PC Mount 30° 01 2 02 to 06 N or S-- 51M* Solder Lug, Sealed 3 02 or 03 N or S-- 51MP* PC Mount, Sealed 4 02 or 03 N or S

*(Pull-to-Turn only) **For specifics on military qualified products, see Standard Switch Pages.


DESCRIBING STOPSWhen a 1-pole switch has less than the maximumnumber of positions, consider also the stopsystem. Following is the arrangement for a 6position switch with the position 1 isolated.

STOP 1P2 3 4 5 6 STOPThe word “STOP” indicates the conventionalswitch stops, which limit rotation to positions 1through 6. To isolate position 1 we insert onlyone isolation post–between terminals 1 and 2.The stop system already prevents rotationbeyond terminal 1.In multi-pole switches, the stop system andisolation system described for the first pole,automatically affects the other poles. In theexample above, isolating position #1 on the firstpole isolates the first position (terminal #7) ofthe second pole. See Standard Switch Pagesfor a 2 pole circuit diagram for a 30° throwswitch.

Let's isolate position 1 and position 2 from allother positions and from each other. We indicateisolation posts as shown here:

12P1P2P3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12To isolate just position 1, describe like this:

12P1P2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12To isolate positions 1 and 2 from all otherpositions, but not from each other, do this:

12P1 2P3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

ORDERING INFORMATIONIndicate this as a SPECIAL switch to ensurethat no error is made when the order is entered.Sample part number:

SPECIAL09A30-04-1-12N

PULL 12P1P2P3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

This sample part number orders a Series 9standard style, four deck, one pole per deck,twelve positions per pole rotary switch with non-shorting contacts and isolation posts betweenpositions 12 and 1, between 1 and 2, andbetween 2 and 3.

This lengthy order number is required to preventany possible confusion in ordering the switch.When we receive your order, we will assign aspecial “short form” part number to facilitatefuture identification of this special switch. Thisnumber is sequentially assigned as the needarises, and is non-descriptive. A typical “shortform” special part number might be 09YY12345.Contact Grayhill for price.

Not available through Distributors.

DESCRIBING POSITIONSThe Grayhill system for isolating positions letsyou choose the positions to be isolated. Grayhillinserts isolation posts next to the positions to beisolated. Consider a continuous rotation switchof the Series 09A with a 30° angle of throw. Theterminals are listed here from 1 through 12 witha space between each to indicate where isolationposts might be inserted.

12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Rotary5


Ta

ct

Sw

itc

he

s


Ta

ct

Sw

itc

he

sContents: Tactile Switches

Page

Selection Chart ............................................................................................. 2

NON-WASHABLE TACTILE SWITCHES

6mm x 3.5mm................................................................................................ 36mm Square .................................................................................................. 412mm Square ................................................................................................ 75mm Square .................................................................................................. 9

WASHABLE TACTILE SWITCHES

6mm ............................................................................................................. 10

TACT SWITCHES

• Excellent tactile feedback

• Washable and non-washableversions

• Insert molded terminals toprevent flux buildup duringsoldering

• Ultraminiature and lightweightdesign suitable for highdensity mounting

• RoHS Compliant

TACT1


Ta

ct

Sw

itc

he

s

Selection Chart

Description Actuation Forces Actuator Heights Series PageAvailable (grams) Available (inch)

Non Washable Tactile Switches

Surface Mount-Gullwing Leads 3.5mm x 6mm 160 .169, .197 95C04 C-4320 .169, .197 95C04 C-4

5 mm square 160 0.059 95C05 C-10

6mm Square 100 .169, .197, .276, .374, .512 95C06 C-5160 .169, .197, .276, .374, .512 95C06 C-5260 .169, .197, .276, .374, .512 95C06 C-5320 .169, .197, .276, .374, .512 95C06 C-5520 .169, .197, .276, .374, .512 95C06 C-5

6mm Square for use with actuator cap 100 0.287 95C06 C-5160 0.287 95C06 C-5260 0.287 95C06 C-5320 0.287 95C06 C-5520 0.287 95C06 C-5

12mm Square 160 .169, .335 95C12 C-8260 .169, .335 95C12 C-8

12mm Square for use with actuator cap 160 0.287 95C12 C-8260 0.287 95C12 C-8

Thru-Hole 3.5mm x 6mm 160 .169, .197 95C04 C-4320 .169, .197 95C04 C-4

6mm Square 100 .169, .197, .276, .374, .512 95C06 C-5160 .169, .197, .276, .374, .512 95C06 C-5260 .169, .197, .276, .374, .512 95C06 C-5320 .169, .197, .276, .374, .512 95C06 C-5520 .169, .197, .276, .374, .512 95C06 C-5

6mm Square for use with actuator cap 100 0.287 95C06 C-5160 0.287 95C06 C-5260 0.287 95C06 C-5320 0.287 95C06 C-5520 0.287 95C06 C-5

12mm Square 160 .169, .335 95C12 C-8260 .169, .335 95C12 C-8

12mm Square for use with actuator cap 160 0.287 95C12 C-8260 0.287 95C12 C-8

Right Angle Thru-Hole 6mm Square 100 .124, .152, .230, .329, .467 95C06 C-5160 .124, .152, .230, .329, .467 95C06 C-5260 .124, .152, .230, .329, .467 95C06 C-5

6mm Square for use with actuator cap 100 0.287 95C06 C-5160 0.287 95C06 C-5260 0.287 95C06 C-5

Description Actuation Forces Actuator Heights Series PageWashable Tactile Switches Available (grams) Available (inch)

Surface Mount-Gullwing Leads 6mm square 160 0.091, .122 95CW06 C-11180 .138, .150, .205 95CW06 C-11260 .138, .150, .205 95CW06 C-11360 .138, .150, .205 95CW06 C-11520 .150, .205 95CW06 C-11

Surface Mount-J Leads 6mm square 160 0.091, .122 95CW06 C-11180 .138, .150, .205 95CW06 C-11260 .138, .150, .205 95CW06 C-11360 .138, .150, .205 95CW06 C-11520 .150, .205 95CW06 C-11

Thru-Hole 6mm square 160 0.091, .122 95CW06 C-11180 .138, .150, .205 95CW06 C-11260 .138, .150, .205 95CW06 C-11360 .138, .150, .205 95CW06 C-11520 .150, .205 95CW06 C-11

Surface Mount-Right Angle 6mm square 260 .031, .039, .091 95CW06 C-11

TACT2


Ta

ct

Sw

itc

he

s


FEATURES• Excellent Tactile Feedback• Thru-hole and Gull Wing Versions• Surface Mount Versions Compatible

with SMT Assembly IncludingInfrared and Vapor Phase

• Ultraminiature and LightweightStructure Suitable for High DensityMounting

• Insert Molded Terminals to PreventFlux Build-Up During Soldering

APPLICATIONSUsed in applications such as consumerelectronics, audio equipment, PCs, VCRs,cable boxes, modems, communicationsequipment, controls, security and alarmequipment, and test and measurementequipment.

C .020(0,50) MAX.

.256 ±0.20 (6,50 ±0,50)

.071 +0.0-0.20(1,80 +0,0-0,50)

"H" DIM. ± .008 ("H" DIM. ± 0,20)

.010 (0,25)

L

.138 ±0.20 (3,50 ±0,50)

.118 (3,00).236 (6,00)

LC .138 (3,50)

.059 (1,50)

.039 (1,00).020 (0,51)

LC

P.C.B. LAYOUT 2xØ.051 ±.002(2xØ1,30 ±0,05)

.256 ± .004(6,50 ± 0,10)

.311 ± 0.20(7,90 ± 0,50)

.138(3,50)

Top View Front View Side ViewThru-Hole

.039 (1,00)

.059 (1,50)

.283 (7,20)

.118 (3,00)

30˚

.035 (0,90)

See Ordering

Information

.138 (3,50)

.063(1,60)

.291 (7,40)

.134 (3,40)

Gull Wing .236 (6,00)

LC LC LC

.138 (3,50)

P.C.B. LAYOUT

.002 (0,05) MAX.

.002 (0,05) MAX.

"H" DIM. ± .008 ("H" DIM. ± 0,20)

SPECIFICATIONSMaterialsBase: UL94V-0 Nylon thermoplasticCover: Stainless steelActuator: UL94V-0 Nylon thermoplasticTerminal: Brass with silver-platingContact: Stainless steel with silver-plating

ElectricalRating: 50mA, 12 VdcLife: 50,000 cyclesActuator Travel: .010” + .008”/ - .004”Contact Resistance: 100 mΩ max.Insulation Resistance: 100 MΩ min. at 500Vdc

Dielectric Strength: No dielectric breakdownafter 250V after one minuteContact Arrangement: single pole, singlethrow

EnvironmentalOperating Temperature Range: -25 to 70°CStorage Temperature Range: -30 to 80°CMechanical Shock: MIL-STD-202F, Method213B, Test Condition A. Gravity: 50G (peak value),11 msec. Direction and times: 6 sides and 3 timesin each direction. High reliability.Vibration: MIL-STD-202F, Method 201A. Passed6 hours (2 hours in each) of three perpendicularplanes at a cycle of 10-55-10Hz/minute.

Soldering ProcessHand Soldering: Use a soldering iron of 30watts, controlled at 350°C for 5 secondsmaximum while applying solder.Reflow Soldering (surface mount versions only):Peak temperature 260°C (500°F).Wave Soldering: 260°C (500°F) max. for 5seconds. Subject to P.C.B. .063 in. (1,6mm)thickness.

PackagingThru-Hole: 135 pcs/tube. Surface Mount: 135pcs/tube, 1800 pcs/reel (.169" height), 1600pcs/reel (.197" height).

CIRCUITRY

Available from your local Grayhill Component Distributor.For prices and discounts, contact a local Sales Office, an authorized local distributor, or Grayhill.

SeriesSize: 04 = 3.5mm x 6mmHeight (“H”): A = .169 (4,30), B = .197 (5,00)

95C04A3GWRT RoHS compliantPackaging: Blank = Tube, R = Tape and Reel (see pkg note) Terminal Style: Blank = Thru-Hole, GW = Gull WingOperating Force: 3 = 160g (brown), 5 = 320g (orange)


Unless otherise specified, dimension tolerances are ±0.010.

Thru-Hole, 160g,Brown Actuator

Gull Wing, 320g,Orange Actuator

T2

T1

SERIES 95C6mm x 3.5mm

Non-Washable Tactile Switches

TACT3


Ta

ct

Sw

itc

he

s


FEATURES

• Excellent Tactile Feedback

• Thru-hole, Gull Wings, and RightAngle Versions

• Surface Mount VersionsCompatible with SMT AssemblyIncluding Infrared and VaporPhase


• Insert Molded Terminals toPrevent Flux Build-up DuringSoldering

DIMENSIONS: Non-Washable Switches In inches (and millimeters)

APPLICATIONS

Used in applications such asconsumer electronics, audioequipment, PCs, VCRs, cable boxes,modems,communications equipment,controls, security and alarmequipment, and test andmeasurement equipment.

SERIES 95C6mm Square, Non-washable

.071 +0-0.02

(1,80 +0,0-0,5)

.020 (0,50) MAX.

.138 ±.020 (3,50 ±0,50)

.256 ±.020 (6,50 ±0,50).311 ±.020

(7,90 ±0,50)

.012 (0,30)

Ø.138 (Ø3,50)

CL

.138(3,50)

"H" DIM.See OrderingInformation

.177(4,50)

CL

.028 (0,70)

LC

.244 (6,20)

LC

0˚

.354 (9,00)

10˚

LC

.008 ±.004(0,20 ±0,10)

CLGull Wing

Thru-hole

P.C.B. LAYOUT

.177 ±.004(4,50 ± 0,10)

4xØ .040 ±.002 (4xØ 1,00 ±0,05)

.256 ±.004(6,50 ± 0,10)

P.C.B. LAYOUT

.051 (1,30)

.252 (6,40)

.374 (9,50)

.177 (4,50)

Top View Front View Side View

Front View


T1 T2

T3 T4

T1 T2

T3 T4

Actuactor Style "F"for use with decorative caps. See page C-7

Actuactor Style "F"for use with decorative caps. See page C-7

.008±.004

.138.170

.287

.067

.138DIA.

.020 MAX.

.354

10˚0˚

CL

.311±.020

.256±.020

.012

.020 MAX.

.138DIA.

+.000-.020.071

.287

.170.138

.138±.020

.067

CL

Thru-Hole

Gull Wing

TACT4


Ta

ct

Sw

itc

he

sNon-Washable Tactile Switches

DIMENSIONS: Non-Washable Switches In inches (and millimeters)

Right Angle

P.C.B. LAYOUT

4x.039 ±.002 (4xØ1,0 ±0,05)

.291(7,40)

.258 (6,55)

.276 ±.020 (7,00 ± 0,50) .335 ±.016

(8,50 ±0,40)

.177 (4,50)

.028 (0,70)

.016 (0,40)

0.071 +0.00-.020(1.800 +0,00-0,50)

CL

LC

.138 ±.020 (3,50 ±0,50)

.100 (2,55)


.157(4,00)

.012 (0,30)

Ø.138 (Ø3,50)

.098 (2,50)

.028 (0,70)

.098 ±.004 (2,50 ±0,10)

.177 ±.004 (4,50 ±0,10)

.012 (0,30) MAX.

.276 ±.004 (7,00 ±0,10)

Side ViewTop View

.283 (7,20)

.063.095

.067

.242

.124 .098

.012

.100 .028

.258

Actuactor Style "F"for use with caps. See page

F1 F2

GroundTerminalT1 T2

Right Angle

MAX 260°255°

230°

150°

RoomTemperature

120-150 sec.

60 sec.

5-10 sec.

REFLOW TEMPERATURE PROFILE:

TACT5


Ta

ct

Sw

itc

he

s


SPECIFICATIONS:Non-Washable SwitchesMaterialsBase: UL94V-0 Nylon thermoplasticCover: Stainless steel, tin-plated steelActuator: UL94V-0 Nylon thermoplasticTerminal: Brass with silver-platingContact: Stainless steel with silver-platingCap: Thermoplastic ABSElectricalRating: 50mA, 12 VdcLife: 100g, 160g: 1,000,000 cycles;260g: 500,000 cycles320g, 520g, 300,000 cyclesActuator Travel: .010” + .008”/ - .004”Contact Resistance: 100 mΩ max.Insulation Resistance: 100 MΩ min.at 500Vdc

Dielectric Strength: No dielectric breakdownafter 250V for one minuteContact Arrangement: single pole, singlethrowEnvironmentalOperating Temp. Range: -25 to 70°CStorage Temp. Range: -30 to 80°CMechanical Shock: MIL-STD-202F, Method213B, Test Condition A. Gravity: 50G's (peakvalue), 11 msec. Direction and times: 6 sides and3 times in each direction. High reliability.Vibration: MIL-STD-202F, Method 201A. Passed6 hours (2 hours in each) of three perpendicularplanes at a cycle of 10-55-10Hz/minute. Highreliability.

Soldering ProcessHand Soldering: Use a soldering iron of 30watts, controlled at 350°C for 5 secondsmaximum while applying solder.Reflow Soldering (surface mount versionsonly): Peak temperature 260°C (500°F).Wave Soldering: 260C° (500°F) maximumfor 5 seconds subject to PCB .063 in.(1,6mm) thickness.Available from your local GrayhillComponent Distributor.For prices and discounts, contact a localSales Office, an authorized localdistributor, or Grayhill.

ORDERING INFORMATION: Non-Washable Switches

SeriesSize: 06 = 6mm SquareHeight (“H”): A = .124 (3,14), B = .152 (3,86), C = .230 (5,84), D = .329 (8,36), E = .467 (11,86)

95C06A2RAT F = .242 (6,15) for use with decorative capsRoHS compliantTerminal Style: RA = Right AngleOperating Force (Actuator Color): 2 = 100g (Black), 3 = 160g (Brown), 4 = 260g (Red)

SeriesSize: 06 = 6mm SquareHeight (“H”): A = .169 (4,29), B = .197 (5,00), C = .276 (7,01), D = .374 (9,50), E = .512 (13,00)

95C06A2GWRT F = .287 (7,29) for use with decorative capsRoHS compliantPackaging: Blank = Tube or bulk, R = Tape and Reel (see pkg note)Terminal Style: Blank = Thru-hole, GW = Gull WingOperating Force (Actuator Color): 2 = 100g (Black), 3 = 160g (Brown), 4 = 260g (Red),5 = 320g (Orange), 6 = 520g (Yellow)

Thru-Hole and Gull Wing

Right Angle

Packaging Thru-Hole: Bulk,1000 pcs/bag. Surface Mount: 77 pcs/tube, 1000 pcs/reel (.169" height), 900 pcs/reel (.197" height), 500 pcs/reel(.276" and .287” height), 380 pcs/reel (.374" height). Right Angle: Bulk, 1000 pcs/bag.

6mm SQUARE

"A"

,

"A"

"B"

"B"

.217

SEC "A-A"

.110

.157

SEC "B-B"

figure 1 figure 2

6mm ROUND

A

.217

.110

SEC A-A'

.177DIA.

A'

BSEC B-B'

B'

PARTNUMBER

95CAP-000

95CAP-001

95CAP-002

95CAP-003

95CAP-004

95CAP-005

95CAP-006

95CAP-010

95CAP-011

95CAP-012

95CAP-013

95CAP-014

95CAP-015

95CAP-016

SWITCHSIZE

6mm

6mm

6mm

6mm

6mm

6mm

6mm

6mm

6mm

6mm

6mm

6mm

6mm

6mm

SHAPE

SQUARE

SQUARE

SQUARE

SQUARE

SQUARE

SQUARE

SQUARE

ROUND

ROUND

ROUND

ROUND

ROUND

ROUND

ROUND

COLOR

YELLOW

BLUE

RED

NATURAL

BLACK

GREEN

ORANGE

YELLOW

BLUE

RED

NATURAL

BLACK

GREEN

ORANGE

FIGURE

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

DECORATIVE CAPS (for use with “F” style square actuators)

TACT6


Ta

ct

Sw

itc

he



FEATURES• Excellent Tactile Feedback• Surface Mount Versions Compatible

with SMT Assembly IncludingInfrared and Vapor Phase



APPLICATIONSUsed in applications such as consumerelectronics, audio equipment, PCs, VCRs,cable boxes, modems, communicationsequipment, controls, security and alarmequipment, and test and measurementequipment. Thru-Hole

Gull Wing

SERIES 95C12mm Square

P.C.B. LAYOUT

.063(1,60)

0˚ 10˚

.020 (0,50) MAX.

.590 (15,00) .004 ±.004

(0,10 ±0,10)

.138 (3,50)C

Ø.278 (Ø7,10)L CL

.197 (5,00)

.610 (15,50)

.488 (12,40)

Gull Wing

P.C.B. LAYOUT

.020 (0,50) MAX.

.012 (0,30)

.547 ±.020(13,90 ±0,50)

.492 ±.020(12,50 ±0,50)

CLØ.278 (Ø7,10)CL

CL.138 ±.020(3,50 ±0,50) .040 (1,00)

.138 (3,50)LC

.472 (11,99).492 ±0.004(12,50 ±0,10)

4x Ø.047 ±.002(4x Ø1,20 ±0,05)

.197 ±.004(5,00 ±0,10)

.071 +0-0.02(1,80

+0-0,5)

Top View Front View Side View

.197 (5,00)

See OrderingInformation

Thru-Hole

"H" DIM.

See OrderingInformation

"H" DIM.

.547±.020+.000-.020

.071

.169.287

.067.020 MAX.

.278DIA.

.492±.020

.012

LC

.138±.020

.138

.287

.067

.590

.278DIA.

.020 MAX.

0˚10˚

LC

.169

.004±.004

.138

TACT7


Ta

ct

Sw

itc

he

s


SPECIFICATIONSMaterialsBase: UL94V-0 Nylon thermoplasticCover: Stainless steel, tin-platedActuator: UL94V-0 Nylon thermoplasticTerminal: Brass with silver-platingContact: Stainless steel with silver-platingCap: Thermoplastic ABS

ElectricalRating: 50mA, 12 VdcLife: 160g: 1,000,000 cycles/260g: 500,000 cyclesActuator Travel: .014” ± .004”Contact Resistance: 100 mΩ max.

Insulation Resistance: 100 MΩ min. at 500VdcDielectric Strength: No dielectric breakdownafter 250V for one minuteContact Arrangement: single pole, singlethrow

EnvironmentalOperating Temp. Range: -25 to 70°CStorage Temp. Range: -30 to 80°CMechanical Shock: MIL-STD-202F, Method,213B, Test Condition A. Gravity: 50G's (peakvalue), 11 msec. Direction and times: 6 sidesand 3 times in each direction. High reliability.Vibration: MIL-STD-202F, Method 201A.Passed 6 hours (2 hours in each) of three

perpendicular planes at a cycle of 10-55-10Hz/1minute.Stop Strength: Place the switch such thatvertical, a static load of 3kg shall be applied inthe direction of stem operation for a period of 15seconds.

Soldering ProcessHand Soldering: Use a soldering iron of 30watts, controlled at 350°C for 5 secondsmaximum while applying solder.Reflow Soldering (surface mount versions only):Peak temperature 260°C (500°F).Wave Soldering: 260C° (500°F) maximumfor 5 seconds subject to PCB .063 in. (1,6mm)thickness.

PackagingThru-Hole: Bulk, 500 pcs/bag.Surface Mount: 40 pcs/tube, 700 pcs/reel(.169" height), 500 pcs/reel (.335" and .287”height).

CIRCUITRY


T1 T2

T3 T4


SeriesSize: 12 = 12mm SquareHeight (“H”): A = .169 (4,29); B = .335 (8,51); C = Square .287 (7,29)

95C12A3GWRTRoHS compliantPackaging: Blank = Tube or Bulk, R = Tape and Reel (see pkg note)Terminal Style: Blank = Thru-hole, GW = Gull WingOperating Force (Actuator Color): 3 = 160g (Brown), 4 = 260g (Red)

DECORATIVE CAPS (for use with “C” style square actuators)

PARTNUMBER

95CAP-100

95CAP-101

95CAP-102

95CAP-103

95CAP-104

95CAP-105

95CAP-106

95CAP-110

95CAP-111

95CAP-112

95CAP-113

95CAP-114

95CAP-115

95CAP-116

SWITCHSIZE

12mm

12mm

12mm

12mm

12mm

12mm

12mm

12mm

12mm

12mm

12mm

12mm

12mm

12mm

SHAPE

SQUARE

SQUARE

SQUARE

SQUARE

SQUARE

SQUARE

SQUARE

ROUND

ROUND

ROUND

ROUND

ROUND

ROUND

ROUND

COLOR

YELLOW

BLUE

RED

NATURAL

BLACK

GREEN

ORANGE

YELLOW

BLUE

RED

NATURAL

BLACK

GREEN

ORANGE

FIGURE

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

figure 3 figure 4

.472

12mm Square

.059

.157

.224

.079

.059

12mm Round

.512 DIA.

.452 DIA.

TACT8


Ta

ct

Sw

itc

he



FEATURES• Excellent Tactile Feedback• Compatible with SMT Assembly

Including Infrared and Vapor Phase• Ultraminiature and Lightweight

Structure Suitable for High DensityMounting


APPLICATIONSUsed in applications such as consumerelectronics, audio equipment, PCs,VCRs, cable boxes, modems,communications equipment, controls,security and alarm equipment, and testand measurement equipment.

SPECIFICATIONSMaterialsBase: UL94V-0 LCP thermoplasticCover: Nickel silverActuator: Brass with nickel-platingTerminal: Brass with silver-platingContact: Stainless steel with silver-plating

ElectricalRating: 50mA, 12 VdcLife: 160g: 1,000,000 cycles;260g: 200,000 cyclesActuator Travel: .010” + .008”/ - .004”Contact Resistance: 100 mΩ max.Insulation Resistance: 100 MΩ min. at 500Vdc

Dielectric Strength: No dielectric breakdownafter 250V for one minute.Contact Arrangement: single pole, singlethrow

EnvironmentalOperating Temp. Range: -25 to 70°CStorage Temp. Range: -30 to 80°CMechanical Shock: MIL-STD-202F, Method213B, Test Condition A. Gravity: 50G (peakvalue), 11 msec. Direction and times: 6 sidesand 3 times in each direction.Vibration: MIL-STD-202F, Method 201A.Passed 6 hours (2 hours in each) of three

perpendicular planes at a cycle of 10-55-10Hz/minute.

Soldering ProcessHand Soldering: Use a soldering iron of 30watts, controlled at 350°C for 5 secondsmaximum while applying solder.Reflow Soldering: Peak temperature 260°C(500°F).

PackagingTape and Reel: 4000 pcs/reel.

CIRCUITRY


SeriesSize: 05 = 5mm SquareHeight: B = .059 (1,49)

95C05B3GWRTRoHS compliantPackaging: R = Tape and Reel (see pkg note)Terminal Style: GW = Gull WingOperating Force: 3 = 160g, 4 = 260g


Unless otherwise specified, tolerances are ±.010 (0,25)

T1 T2

T3 T4

SERIES 95C5mm Square

.241 (6,12)

.146 (3,70)

.205 (5,20)

.205 (5,20) .059 (1,49)

.004 (0,10).002 (0,50)Ø.079 (Ø2,00)

.315 (8,00)

.189 (4,80)

.102 (2,60)

.173 (4,40)

Top View Front View

Side View

P.C.B. LAYOUT

TACT9


Ta

ct

Sw

itc

he

s

Washable Tactile Switches

SERIES 95C6mm Square, Washable

FEATURES• Designed to Allow Submersed Washing

After Soldering• Excellent Tactile Feedback• Thru-hole, Gull Wings, Right Angle,

and J-Lead Versions

• Surface Mount Versions Compatible withSMT Assembly Including Infrared andVapor Phase

• Ultraminiature and Lightweight StructureSuitable for High Density Mounting

• Insert Molded Terminals to Prevent FluxBuild-up During Soldering

P.C.B. LAYOUT

Top View

Thru-Hole

Gull Wing

Ø.118 (Ø3,00)C L

"H" DIM.See Ordering Information


.138 ±.020(3,50 ±0,50)

.256 ±.020(6,50 ±0,50)

.311 ±.020 (7,90 ±0,50)

.071 +0.0-.02

(1,80 +0,0-0,5)

.256 ±.004(6,50 ±0,10)

C L

.157 ±.004(4,00 ±0,10)

4xØ.040 ±.002(4xØ1,00 ±0,05)

.244 (6,20) .027(0,70)

.157 (4,00)

.236 (6,00)

.248 (6,30)

Ø.118 (Ø3,00)

.004 ±.004 (0,10 ±0,10)

.228 (5,80)

C L

10˚

0˚

C L

.339 (8,60)

.157 (4,00)

.102 (2,60)

.212 (5,40)

P.C.B. LAYOUT

Front View Side View

C LJ-Lead Ø.118 (Ø3,00)

10˚.177 (4,50)

.268 (6,80)

0˚

.016(0,40)

C L

C L

C L

.276 (7,02)

.240 (6,10)

0.297 ±0.02(7,55 ±0,50) 0.157 ±0.02

(4,00 ±0,50)

0.154 (3,90)

0.181 (4,61)

"H" DIM. ±0,008("H" DIM. ±0,20)See Ordering

Information

P.C.B. LAYOUT

0.136 ±0.012 (3,45 ±0,30)

Ø.118 (Ø3,00).028

(0,70)

.146 (3,70)

0.197 ±0.004 (5,00 ±0,10)

0.098 ±0.004(2,50 ±0,10)

.165 (4,20)

.354 ±0.004 (9,00 ±0,10)

.228 ±0.004 (5,80 ±0,10)

0.031(0,80)

0.067(1,70)

.433 (11,00)

.267 (6,80)

.102 (2,60)

.212 (5,40)

P.C.B. LAYOUT


Thru-hole

Gull Wing

T1 T2

T3 T4

J-Lead

DIMENSIONS: Washable Switches In inches (and millimeters)

T1F1

F2T2

Unless otherwise specified, tolerances are ±.010 (0,25).

Right Angle

CIRCUITRY

CIRCUITRY

APPLICATIONSUsed in applications such as consumerelectronics, audio equipment, PCs, VCRs,cable boxes, modems, communicationsequipment, controls, security and alarmequipment, and test and measurementequipment.

SPECIFICATIONS:Washable SwitchesMaterialsBase: UL94V-0 Nylon thermoplasticCover: Stainless steel,nickel silverActuator: Silicone rubberTerminal: Brass with silver-platingContact: Stainless steel with silver-plating

ElectricalRating: 50mA, 12 VdcLife: See table, page C-12Actuator Travel: .018” ± .008”Contact Resistance: 100 mΩ max.

Insulation Resistance: 100 MΩ min. at 500VdcDielectric Strength: No dielectric breakdownafter 250V for one minuteContact Arrangement: single pole, singlethrow

EnvironmentalOperating Temp. Range: -25 to 70°CStorage Temp. Range: -30 to 80°CMechanical Shock: MIL-STD-202F, Method213B, Test Condition A. Gravity: 50G's (peakvalue), 11 msec. Direction and times: 6 sidesand 3 times in each direction. High reliability.Vibration: MIL-STD-202F, Method 201A.

Passed 6 hours (2 hours in each) of threeperpendicular planes at a cycle of 10-55-10Hz/minute. High reliability.

Soldering ProcessHand Soldering: Use a soldering iron of 30watts, controlled at 350°C for 5 secondsmaximum while applying solder.Reflow Soldering (surface mount versionsonly): Peak temperature 260°C (500°F).Wave Soldering: 260C° (500°F) maximumfor 5 seconds subject to PCB .063 in. (1,60mm) thickness.

TACT10


Ta

ct

Sw

itc

he

sWashable Tactile Switches

Available from your local Grayhill Component Distributor. *Insert “R” before “T” for tape and reel packaging.For prices and discounts, contact a local Sales Office, an authorized local distributor, or Grayhill.

ORDERING INFORMATION: Washable Switches

Thru-HolePart Number Height (“H”) in (mm) Force (Grams) Actuator Color Electrical Life (Cycles) Tube Packaging95CW06A1T .091 (2,3) 160 Silver 100,000 75PCS/Tube

95CW06B1T .122 (3,1) 160 Brown 100,000 75PCS/Tube

95CW06C2T .138 (3,5) 180 Brown 500,000 75PCS/Tube

95CW06C3T .138 (3,5) 260 Red 500,000 75PCS/Tube

95CW06C5T .138 (3,5) 360 Clear 500,000 75PCS/Tube

95CW06D2T .150 (3,8) 180 Brown 500,000 75PCS/Tube

95CW06D3T .150 (3,8) 260 Red 500,000 75PCS/Tube

95CW06D4T .150 (3,8) 520 Yellow 50,000 75PCS/Tube

95CW06D5T .150 (3,8) 360 Clear 500,000 75PCS/Tube

95CW06E2T .205 (5,2) 180 Brown 500,000 77PCS/Tube

95CW06E3T .205 (5,2) 260 Red 500,000 77PCS/Tube

95CW06E4T .205 (5,2) 520 Yellow 50,000 77PCS/Tube

95CW06E5T .205 (5,2) 360 Clear 500,000 77PCS/Tube

Part Number Height in (“H”) (mm) Force (Grams) Actuator Color Electrical Life (Cycles) Tape & Reel Packaging95CW06A3RART .031 (0,79) 260 Red 500,0000 700PCS/Reel

95CW06B3RART .039 (0,99) 260 Red 500,0000 700PCS/Reel

95CW06C3RART .091 (2,31) 260 Red 500,0000 700PCS/Reel

Right Angle

Gull WingPart Height (“H”) Force Actuator Electrical Tube Tape & ReelNumber in (mm) (Grams) Color Life (Cycles) Packaging Packaging95CW06A1GWT .091 (2,29) 160 Silver 100,000 75PCS/Tube 2000PCS/Reel

95CW06B1GWT .122 (3,10) 160 Brown 100,000 75PCS/Tube 2000PCS/Reel

95CW06C2GWT .138 (3,51) 180 Brown 500,000 75PCS/Tube 1900PCS/Reel

95CW06C3GWT .138 (3,51) 260 Red 500,000 75PCS/Tube 1900PCS/Reel

95CW06C5GWT .138 (3,51) 360 Clear 500,000 75PCS/Tube 1900PCS/Reel

95CW06D2GWT .150 (3,81) 180 Brown 500,000 75PCS/Tube 1900PCS/Reel

95CW06D3GWT .150 (3,81) 260 Red 500,000 75PCS/Tube 1900PCS/Reel

95CW06D4GWT .150 (3,81) 520 Yellow 50,000 75PCS/Tube 1900PCS/Reel

95CW06D5GWT .150 (3,81) 360 Clear 500,000 75PCS/Tube 1900PCS/Reel

95CW06E2GWT .205 (5,21) 180 Brown 500,000 77PCS/Tube 900PCS/Reel

95CW06E3GWT .205 (5,21) 260 Red 500,000 77PCS/Tube 900PCS/Reel

95CW06E4GWT .205 (5,21) 520 Yellow 50,000 77PCS/Tube 900PCS/Reel

95CW06E5GWT .205 (5,21) 360 Clear 500,000 77PCS/Tube 900PCS/Reel

Part Height (“H”) Force Actuator Electrical Tube Tape & ReelNumber in (mm) (Grams) Color Life (Cycles) Packaging Packaging95CW06A1JT .091 (2,29) 160 Silver 100,000 75PCS/Tube 2000PCS/Reel

95CW06B1JT .122 (3,10) 160 Brown 100,000 75PCS/Tube 1900PCS/Reel

95CW06C2JT .138 (3,51) 180 Brown 500,000 75PCS/Tube 1800PCS/Reel

95CW06C3JT .138 (3,51) 260 Red 500,000 75PCS/Tube 1800PCS/Reel

95CW06C5JT .138 (3,51) 360 Clear 500,000 75PCS/Tube 1800PCS/Reel

95CW06D2JT .150 (3,81) 180 Brown 500,000 75PCS/Tube 1800PCS/Reel

95CW06D3JT .150 (3,81) 260 Red 500,000 75PCS/Tube 1800PCS/Reel

95CW06D4JT .150 (3,81) 520 Yellow 50,000 75PCS/Tube 1800PCS/Reel

95CW06D5JT .150 (3,81) 360 Clear 500,000 75PCS/Tube 1800PCS/Reel

95CW06E2JT .205 (5,21) 180 Brown 500,000 77PCS/Tube 900PCS/Reel

95CW06E3JT .205 (5,21) 260 Red 500,000 77PCS/Tube 900PCS/Reel

95CW06E4JT .205 (5,21) 520 Yellow 50,000 77PCS/Tube 900PCS/Reel

95CW06E5JT .205 (5,21) 360 Clear 500,000 77PCS/Tube 900PCS/Reel

J-Lead

*

*

TACT11


Tog

gle

Sw

itch

es

DIP

S

wit

ch

es


Tog

gle

Sw

itch

es

PageTOGGLE SWITCHES

Selection Chart .............................................................................................. 3Miniature .............................................................. Series 34A ....................... 4Sealed Miniature .................................................. Series 34B ..................... 10Sub-Miniature ...................................................... Series 34C .................... 14Sealed Sub-Miniature ......................................... Series 34D .................... 18Sealed Surface Mount ........................................ Series 34E .................... 21

TOGGLE SWITCHES• Save Space and Weight• SPDT, DPDT, 3PDT, and

4DPT Circuitry• Choice of Actuators, Bushings

and Terminations• PC and Panel Mount Versions

Contents: Toggle Switches

Typical Applications:• Computers and Peripherals• Instrumentation• Medical Equipment• Telecommunications• Test and Measurement Equipment

Toggle2


Tog

gle

Sw

itch

es

Series 34A 34B 34C 34D 34EPage Number 4-9 10-13 14-17 18-20 21-24Size Miniature Miniature Sub-Miniature Sub-Miniature Sub-MiniatureCircuitry SPDT, DPDT, 3PDT, 4PDT SPDT, DPDT, 3PDT SPDT, DPDT SPDT, DPDT SPDTMax Contact Rating 5A 5A 3A 3A 0.4VAProcess Sealed Yes Yes Yes

Mounting OptionsPC Vertical Yes Yes Yes YesPC Vertical w/ Support Bracket Yes Yes Yes YesPC Right Angle Yes Yes Yes YesPC Right Angle Vertical Yes Yes Yes YesSurface Mount YesPanel Yes Yes Yes

Termination OptionsSolder Lug Yes Yes YesPC Mount Yes Yes Yes YesPC Mount, Quick Connect YesGullwing Yes

Selection Chart

TOGGLE SWITCHES

Toggle3

DIP

S

wit

ch

es


Tog

gle

Sw

itch

es

NONE

OFF

OFF

OFF

NONE

OPEN


3P5

3P4

3P3

3P2

3P1

ON

(ON)

2-3,5-6

ON

ON

ON

2-1,5-4

(ON)

(ON)

ON

(ON)

ON

TERM. COMM.8-9 8-7

()=MOMENTARY

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

SCHEMATIC

02COMM.

1 3

05COMM.

4 6

08COMM.

7 9

.500(12.7)

.030(0.76)

.185(4.70)

Ø.115 (Ø 2.92)

KEYWAY

.650(16.51)

1/4-40 UNS-2A

KEYWAYTHIS SIDE

.190(4.83)

.350(8.89)

.410(10.41)

.415(10.54)

EPOXY SEAL

.060(1.52)

.570(14.48)

SERIES 34AMiniature Toggle Switches

FEATURES• Save Space and Weight• SPDT, DPDT, 3PDT, and 4DPT Circuitry• Choice of Actuators, Bushings and Terminations• UL Recognized


SPDT

DPDT

3PDT

Series 34A: Miniature Toggle Switches

NONE

OFF

OFF

OFF

NONE

OPEN


SP5

SP4

SP3

SP2

SP1

ON

(ON)

2-3

ON

ON

ON

2-1

(ON)

(ON)

ON

(ON)

ON

1

2

3

TERM. COMM.

()=MOMENTARY

SCHEMATIC

02COMM.

1 3

1/4-40 UNS-2A

.410(10.41)

.500(12.7)

.350(8.89) .030

(0.76)

.185(4.70)

Ø.115(Ø 2.92)

KEYWAYTHIS SIDE

KEYWAY

.350(8.89)

.270(6.86)

.155(3.94)

EPOXY SEAL

NONE

OFF

OFF

OFF

NONE

OPEN


DP5

DP4

DP3

DP2

DP1

ON

(ON)

2-3,

ON

ON

ON

2-1,

(ON)

(ON)

ON

(ON)

ON

TERM. COMM.

1

2

3

4

5

6

5-6 5-4

()=MOMENTARY

SCHEMATIC

02COMM.

1 3

05COMM.

4 6

.410(10.41)

.500(12.7)

.185(4.70)

Ø.115(Ø 2.92)

KEYWAYTHIS SIDEKEYWAY

.450(11.43)

.190(4.83)

1/4-40 UNS-2A

.350(8.89)

EPOXY SEAL

.350(8.89)

.505(12.83)

.060(1.52)

.030(0.76)

Toggle4


Tog

gle

Sw

itch

es


1 Std 2 3 4 5


4PDT

Use with Bushing OptionsT1, T2, T5 and T6 only. Use T7 Bushing Option only.


NONE

OFF

OFF

OFF

NONE

OPEN


4P5

4P4

4P3

4P2

4P1

ON

(ON)

2-3,5-6

ON

ON

ON

2-1,5-4

(ON)

(ON)

ON

(ON)

ON

TERM. COMM.

1

2

3

4

5

6

()=MOMENTARY

8-9,11-12 8-7,11-10

10

11

12

7

8

9

SCALE:1.5:1

SCHEMATIC

02COMM.

1 3

05COMM.

4 6

08COMM.

7 9

011COMM.

10 12

.500(12.7)

.030(0.76)

.185(4.70)

Ø.115(Ø 2.92)

KEYWAY

.850(21.59)

1/4-40 UNS-2A

KEYWAYTHIS SIDE

.190(4.83)

.410(10.41)

.350(8.89)

EPOXY SEAL

.415(10.54)

.570(14.48)

.060(1.52)

.115DIA.(Ø3.01) .410

(10.41)

.107DIA.(Ø2.71)

.200(5.08) .134

DIA.(Ø3.40) .550

(13.97)

.131DIA.(Ø3.32) .640

(16.26)

.131(3.32)

.840(21.32)

6 7 8 9 Nylon Black

.450(11.43)

.200DIA.(Ø5.08)

.240DIA.(Ø6.09)

15/32-32NS

.465(11.80)

KEYWAY

.487(12.37)

.687(17.45)

.240DIA.(Ø6.09)

.465(11.80)

KEYWAY

15/32-32NS

.840(21.34)

.645(16.38)

Ø.129(Ø3.28)

L THD.(STD.)N NON-THD.

.579(14,73)LOCKED

Ø.214(Ø5,44)

1/4-40 UNS-2A

.640(16,26)UNLOCKED

Actuators 1-5 shown with standard B1 bushing. Add .070 (1.78) for B3, subtract .020 (0.51) for B6 bushing.

Use T7 Bushing Option only.

L THD. (STD.)

N NON-THD

Toggle5

DIP

S

wit

ch

es


Tog

gle

Sw

itch

es

T1

BUSHING OPTIONS In inches (and millimeters)

B3 ThdB4 Non-Thd

B5 High Torque B6 High Torque

B7 Long B8 Metric B9 Splash-Proof

PANEL MOUNTING In inches (and millimeters)


B1 Thd (Std)B2 Non-Thd

Ø.244(Ø6.20)

.350(8.89)

1/4-40 UNS-2A

.028(0.71)

.040(1.02)

Ø.244(Ø6.20)

.280(7.10)

1/4-40 UNS-2A

.028(0.71)

.040(1.02)

1/4-40 UNS-2A

Ø.314(Ø7.98)

.225(5.72)

.296(7.52)

.040(1.02)

.020(0.51)

.315(8.00)

1/4-40 UNS-2A

.028(0.71)

.040(1.02)

Ø.314(Ø7.98)

.040(1.02)

.020(0.51)

1/4-40 UNS-2A

.225(5.72)

.350(8.89)

M6P0.75THD.

.028(0.71)

.040(1.02)

.350(8.89)

1/4-40 UNS-2A

.225(5.72)

SEALS

.465 DIA.(Ø11.81)

.057(1.44)

.020(0.51)

.296(7.52)

1/4" BUSHING

15/32" BUSHING

METRIC BUSHING

.234(5.95)

Ø.250(Ø6.35)

Ø.250(Ø6.35) Ø.250

(Ø6.35)

.022(0.56).033

(0.85)

.240(6.10)

Ø.094(Ø2.38)

.378(9.60)

Ø.496(Ø11.91)

Ø.150(Ø3.81)

Ø.496(Ø11.91)

.031(0.79)

.065(1.65)

.187(4.75)

Ø.250(Ø6.35)

Ø.078(Ø1.98)

Ø.250(Ø6.35) Ø.250

(Ø6.35)

Ø.094(Ø2.38)

.031(0.80)

.028(0.70)

.248(6.30)

T2 T5 T6

.028(0.71)

.040(1.02)

1/4-40UNS-2A

.297(7,55)

.057(1,44)

.225(5,72)

1/4-40UNS-2A

.297(7,55)

.057(1,44)

T7 *FOR USEWITHACTUATORS7 AND 8ONLY.

15/32-32 UNS-2A

KEYWAY

.020(0.51)

.448(11.38)

.065(1.65)

.031(0.79)

Toggle6


Tog

gle

Sw

itch

es

W1

OPTIONCODE

W2W3W4

DIM."A".750(19.05)

.964(24.48)

.425(10.80)

1.062(26.97)

WIRE WRAP

DIM."A"

.0751.91

.0501.27




M1 Solder Lug (Std) M2 P.C. Mount M3 P.C. Mount, Quick Connect WX


SPDT

DPDT

SPDT

DPDT

THK. .030 (0.76)

.080(2.03).047

(1.19)

.156(3.96)

.078(1.98)

THK. .030 (0.76)

.189(4.80)

.250(6.36)

.050(1.27)

.030 (0.76) THK.

.062(1.57)

.250(6.35)

EPOXY SEAL

.189(4.80)

1 2 3

4 5 6

P.C. MOUNTING

1 2 3

P.C. MOUNTING

.288(7.31)

.500(12.7)

.030(0.76)

.106(2.69)

.126(3.17)

.500(12.7)

.150(3.81)

.254(6.46)

Ø.245(Ø6.22)

.050(1.27)

.450(11.43)

.185(4.70)

.500(12.7) .150

(3.81)

.200(5.08)

.185(4.70)

KEYWAYTHIS SIDE

.288(7.31)

.500(12.7)

.030(0.76) .500

(12.7)

.254(6.46)

Ø.245(Ø6.22)

.270(6.86)

.185(4.70)

.500(12.7)

.200(5.08)

KEYWAYTHIS SIDE

.185(4.69)

.125(3.17)

Ø.105 (Ø2.67)

Ø.105 (Ø2.67)

.050(1.27)

Ø.073(Ø1.85)

Ø.073(Ø1.85)

.106(2.69)

3

1

2

P.C. MOUNTING

.270(6.86)

.050(1.27)

.500(12.7)

.150(3.81)

.500(12.7)

.288(7.31)

.500(12.7)

.150(3.81)

.200(5.08)

.073 DIA.(Ø1.85)

KEYWAYTHIS SIDE

Ø.245(Ø6.22)

.125(3.18)

.048(1.22)

.200(5.08)

.030(0.76)

.254(6.46)

3

1

2

P.C. MOUNTING

4

5

6

.450(11.43)

.150(3.81)

.500(12.7)

.288(7.31)

.500(12.7)

.150(3.81)

.200(5.08)

KEYWAYTHIS SIDE

Ø.245(Ø6.22)

.073 DIA.(Ø1.85)

.190(4.83)

.125(3.17)

.200(5.08)

.190(4.83)

.125(3.18)

.048(1.22)

.500(12.70)

.030(0.76)

.050(1.27)

.254(6.46)

Toggle7

DIP

S

wit

ch

es


Tog

gle

Sw

itch

es




3PDT

4PDT


3

1

2

P.C. MOUNTING

4

56

7

89

P.C. MOUNTING

4

56

1

23

7

89

10

1112

.650(16.51)

.500(12.7)

.150(3.81)

.288(7.31)

.150(3.81)

.200(5.08)

KEYWAYTHIS SIDE

Ø.245(Ø6.22)

.073 DIA.(Ø1.85)

.190(4.83)

.565(14.35)

.200(5.08)

.048(1.22)

.565(14.35)

.850(21.59)

.150(3.81)

.288(7.31)

.150(3.81)

.200(5.08)

KEYWAYTHIS SIDEØ.245

(Ø6.22)

.073 DIA.(Ø1.85)

.190(4.83)

.565(14.35)

.200(5.08)

.048(1.22)

.565(14.35)

.50012.7

.190(4.83)

.050(1.27)

.190(4.83)

.050(1.27)

.030(0.76)

.125(3.18)

.125(3.18)

.030(0.76)

.254(6.46)

.254(6.46)

OPTIONCODE DIM."A"

V2

V3

.460(11,68)

.630(16,00)

P.C. MOUNTING

OPTIONCODE DIM."A"

V2

V3

.460(11,68)

.630(16,00)

P.C. MOUNTING

4 5 6

1 2 3

DIM. "A"

.185(4.70)

.320(8.13)

.048(1.22)

.125(3.18)

.620(15.75)

.020(0.51)

.185(4.70)

.030(0.76)

.280(7.11)

.620(15.75)

.185(4.70)

.125(3.18)

.073 DIA.(Ø1.85)

DIM. "A"

.185(4.70)

.320(8.13)

.048(1.22)

.125(3.18)

.620(15.75)

.020(0.51)

.185(4.70)

.030(0.76)

.280(7.11)

.620(15.75)

.125(3.18)

.450(11.43)

.073 DIA.(Ø1.85)

.190(4.83)

.185(4.70)

EPOXY SEAL

EPOXY SEAL

.254(6.46)

.254(6.46)SPDT

DPDT

Toggle8


Tog

gle

Sw

itch

es

SPECIFICATIONSRATINGSContact Rating: Q option - 5A with resistiveload @ 125VAC or 28 VDC; 2A with resistiveload @ 250 VAC. R option-0.4 VA max @ 20Vmax (AC or DC)Electrical Life: 40,000 make-and-breakcycles at full load



HARDWARE In inches (and millimeters)

LOCKING RINGS LOCK WASHERS

Series 34A (Std) Dress Nut For Actuator Options 7, 8 (Std) Knurled Nut (Sealed)

Series 34A (Std)

NUTS

Contact Resistance: 10 milliohms max.initial @ 2-4 VDC, 100 mA for both gold &silver contactsInsulation Resistance: 1,000 megaohmsminimumDielectic Strength: 1,000 V RMS @ sealevelOperating Temperature: -30°C to 85°C

UL Recognition: File number is E35289

MATERIALSCase: Diallyl phthalate (DAP) (UL94V-0)Toggle Handle: Brass, chrome-platedBushing: Brass, nickle-platedHousing: Stainless steel

( ) ( )

( ) ( )

( )( )

( )

( )

( )

( )

HDW2 HDW3 HDW4 HDW5

( )

( )

( )

( )( )

( )

( )( )

( )

( )

( )

( )( )

( )

( )

For Actuator Options 7, 8

( )

( )( )

( )

Series 34A (Std) For Actuator Options 7, 8

HDW15 HDW16 HDW17 HDW11 HDW12


Series 34A Miniature Toggle SwitchModel: SPDT: SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4, SP5, DPDT: DP1, DP2, DP3, DP4, DP53PDT: 3P1, 3P2, 3P3, 3P4, 3P54PDT: 4P1, 4P2, 4P3, 4P4, 4P5(See Model options)Actuator Options: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, L, N (See Actuator options.)Bushing Options: B1, B2, B3, B4, B5, B6, B7, B8, B9, T1, T2, T5, T6(See Bushing options.)

34ASP12B4M2RT

Termination Options: M1, M2, M3, M6, M7, V2, V3, W1, W2, W3, W4

Contact: R: Copper alloy, gold plate over nickel plate; Q: Copper alloy, silver plated; G: Copper alloy over gold plate over silver plate

RoHS Compliant

(See Termination options.)

Toggle9

DIP

S

wit

ch

es


Tog

gle

Sw

itch

es

()=MOMENTARY

()=MOMENTARY

()=MOMENTARY

SCHEMATIC

02COMM.

1 3

SCHEMATIC

02COMM.

1 3

05COMM.

4 6

SCHEMATIC

02COMM.

1 3

05COMM.

4 6

08COMM.

7 9

Switching PositionModel

Comm.Term.

WSP4

WSP5

WSP3

WSP2

WSP1

No.

(ON)

2-3 OPEN 2-1

(ON)

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON NONE

NONE

(ON)

ON

(ON)

ON

1

2

3

1

2

3

4

5

6


Comm.Term.

WDP4

WDP5

WDP3

WDP2

WDP1

No.

(ON)

2-3 OPEN 2-1

(ON)

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON NONE

NONE

(ON)

ON

(ON)

ON

5-6 5-4

4

5

6

7

8

9


W3P3

W3P2

W3P1

No.

ON OFF

ON

ON NONE

NONE

(ON)

ON

ON

W3P4 (ON) OFF

OFFONW3P5

Term.Comm.

2-35-6 OPEN 2-1

5-4

(ON)

(ON)1

2

3

.268 (6.8)

.504(12.8)

.250(6.35)

.663(16.85)

.250(6.35)

.030(0.76)

.185 (4.7)

.050(1.27)

Ø.107(Ø2.72)

EPOXY SEAL

.457(11.6)

.504(12.8)

.250(6.35)

.663(16.85)

.250(6.35)

.030(0.76)

.185 (4.7)

.050(1.27)

EPOXY SEAL

Ø.220Ø5.60

Ø.220(Ø5.60)

.297(7.54)

Ø.107(Ø2.72)

.297(7.54)

.190(4.83)

.650(16.5)

.250(6.35)

.722(18.35)

.250(6.35)

.030(0.76)

.185 (4.7)

.050(1.27)

EPOXY SEAL

Ø.220(Ø5.60)

Ø.107(Ø2.72)

.297(7.54)

.190(4.83)

.500(12.7)

SERIES 34BSealed Miniature Toggle Switches

FEATURES• Save Space and Weight• SPDT, DPDT, and 3PDT Circuitry• Choice of Actuators, Bushings and

Terminations• Sealed per IP67


SPDT

DPDT

3PDT

Series 34B: Sealed Miniature Toggle Switches

Toggle1 0


Tog

gle

Sw

itch

es

THK. .030 (0.76) THK. .030 (0.76)

SUBTRACT .079 (2.00) FORBUSHING OPTION B1

SUBTRACT .083 (2.10) FORBUSHING OPTION B1

.496(12.60)

.299(7.60)

Ø.115(Ø2.92)

Ø.107(Ø2.72)

.350(8.90)

1/4-40 UNS

.250(6.35)

.189(4.80)

.080(2.03).047

(1.19)

.078(1.98)

.156(3.96)

EPOXY SEAL

.050(1.27)

.220(5.60)

EPOXY SEAL

1 2 3

P.C. MOUNTING

.050(1.26)

.504(12.8)

.200(5.08)

.106(2.70)

Ø.220(Ø5.60)

.500(12.7)

.050(1.26)

.663(16.85)

.297(7.54)

Ø.107(Ø2.72)

.125(3.18)

.030(0.76)

.050(1.27)

.185(4.70)

.200(5.08)

.185(4.70)

.500(12.7)

Ø.073(Ø1.85)

P.C. MOUNTING

1 2 3

4 5 6 .500(12.7) .150

(3.81)

.200(5.08)

.185(4.70)

Ø.073(Ø1.85)

Ø.220(Ø5.60)

.200(5.08)

.050(1.26)

.106(2.70)

.504(12.8)

.500(12.7)

.297(7.54)

Ø.107(Ø2.72)

.663(16.85)

.050(1.26)

.125(3.18)

.030(0.76)

.185(4.70)

.050(1.26)

EPOXY SEAL

EPOXY SEAL

M1 M2





1 2 Std

B1 B4 Std


SPDT

DPDT

P.C. Mount(Std)

Solder Lug

Toggle1 1

DIP

S

wit

ch

es


Tog

gle

Sw

itch

es

P.C. MOUNTING

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

Ø.220(Ø5.60)

.200(5.08)

.050(1.26)

.106(2.70)

.504(12.8)

.297(7.54)

Ø.107(Ø2.72)

.720(16.85) .185

(4.70)

.565(14.35)

EPOXY SEAL

.200(5.08)

.185(4.70)

.150(3.81)

.565(14.35)

Ø.073(Ø1.85)

.030(0.76)

.050(1.26)

.125(3.18)

.050(1.26)

3

1

2

1 2 3

.500(12.7)

.500(12.7)

.150(3.81)

.200(5.08)

Ø.073(Ø1.85)

.504(12.8)

.106(2.70)

.050(1.26)

Ø.220(Ø5.60)

.297(7.54)

Ø.107(Ø2.72)

.663(16.85)

EPOXY SEAL

.125(3.18)

.150(3.81)

.050(1.26)

.030(0.76)

.200(5.08)

P.C. MOUNTING

P.C. MOUNTING

4 5 6

P.C. MOUNTING

3

2

1

6

5

4

7 8 9

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

.500(12.7)

.500(12.7)

.150(3.81)

.200(5.08)

Ø.073(Ø1.85)

.106(2.70)

Ø.220(Ø5.60)

.297(7.54)

EPOXY SEAL

.125(3.18)

.150(3.81)

.457(11.6)

.050(1.26)

.663(16.85)

Ø.220(Ø5.60)

.650(12.8)

.720(18.30)

.565(14.35)

EPOXY SEAL

.200(5.08)

.150(3.81)

.565(14.35)

.504(12.8)

.190(4.83)

.050(1.27)

.200(5.08)

.050(1.26)

.030(0.76)

.190(4.83)

.190(4.83)

.500(12.7)

.297(7.54)

.150(3.81)

.125(3.18)

.200(5.08)

.048(1.22)

Ø.073(Ø1.85)

.190(4.83)

Ø.107(Ø2.72)

Ø.107(Ø2.72)

OPTIONCODE DIM."A"

V2

V3

.460(11,68)

.630(16,00)

P.C. MOUNTING

1 2 3

DIM. "A"

.320(8.13)

.048(1.22) .125

(3.18)

.620(15.75)

.020(0.51)

.185(4.70)

.030(0.76)

.620(15.75)

.185(4.70)

.125(3.18)

.073 DIA.(Ø1.85)

Ø.107(Ø2.72)

.230(5.84)

.297(7.54)




3PDT


3PDT

SPDT

DPDT

SPDT

Toggle1 2


Tog

gle

Sw

itch

es

( )

( )

( )( ) ( )

( )( )

SPECIFICATIONSRATINGSContact Rating: Q option - 5A with resistiveload @ 125VAC or 28 VDC; 2A with resistiveload @ 250 VAC. R option-0.4 VA max @ 20Vmax (AC or DC)Electrical Life: 50,000 make-and-breakcycles at full loadContact Resistance: 10 milliohms max.

initial @ 2-4 VDC, 100 mAInsulation Resistance: 1,000 megaohmsminimumDielectic Strength: 1,500 V RMS @ sealevelOperating Temperature: -30°C to 85°C

MATERIALSCase and Bushings: Glass-filled nylon 6/6,


flame retardant, heat stabilized (UL94V-0)Actuator: Brass, chrome plated. Internal O-ring seal standard with all actuators.Frame: Spring steelSwitch Support: Brass, tin-platedActuator Pivot & Mounting Bracket:NylonActuator Pivot Retainer: Stainless SteelTerminal and Contacts: Copper alloy withplated over nickel or silver plateTerminal Seal: Epoxy


NUT LOCKING RING LOCK WASHER




DPDT

3PDT

OPTIONCODE DIM."A"

V2

V3

.460(11,68)

.630(16,00)

P.C. MOUNTING

4 5 6

OPTIONCODE DIM."A"

V2

V3

.460(11,68)

.630(16,00)

P.C. MOUNTING

4 5 6

DIM. "A"

.320(8.13)

.048(1.22) .125

(3.18)

.620(15.75)

.020(0.51)

.185(4.70)

.030(0.76)

.620(15.75)

.125(3.18)

Ø.073(Ø1.85)

.190(4.83)

.185(4.70)

.297(7.54)

.230(5.84)

Ø.107(Ø2.72)

DIM. "A"

.320(8.13)

.048(1.22) .125

(3.18)

.620(15.75)

.020(0.51)

.185(4.70)

.030(0.76)

.620(15.75)

.190(4.83)

.297(7.54)

.230(5.84)

Ø.107(Ø2.72) .185

(4.70)

Ø.073(Ø1.85)

34BWSP12B4M2RT

Series 34B Sealed Miniature Toggle SwitchesModel: SPDT: WSP1, WSP2, WSP3, WSP4, WSP5DPDT: WDP1, WDP2, WDP3, WDP4, WDP53PDT: W3P1, W3P2, W3P3, W3P4, W3P5(See Model options.)Actuator: 1, 2 (See Actuator options)

RoHS CompliantContact: R = Copper alloy, gold plate over nickel plate, Q = Copper alloy, gold plate over silver plate

Termination Options: M1, M2, M6, M7, V2, V3(See Termination options.)

Bushing Option: B1, B4 (See Bushing options.)

Toggle1 3

DIP

S

wit

ch

es


Tog

gle

Sw

itch

es

NONE

OFF

OFF

OFF

NONE

OPEN


MSP5

MSP4

MSP3

MSP2

MSP1

ON

(ON)

2-3

ON

ON

ON

2-1

(ON)

(ON)

ON

(ON)

ON

TERM. COMM.

NONE

OFF

OFF

OFF

NONE

OPEN


MDP5

MDP4

MDP3

MDP2

MDP1

ON

(ON)

2-3,

ON

ON

ON

2-1,

(ON)

(ON)

ON

(ON)

ON

TERM. COMM.5-6 5-4

()=MOMENTARY

()=MOMENTARY

SCHEMATIC

02COMM.

1 3

SCHEMATIC

02COMM.

1 3

05COMM.

4 6

3

2

1

3

2

14

5

6

.200(5.08)

.320(8.13)

.220(5.59)

.340(8.64)

.110(2.79)

.160(4.06)

.100(2.54)

.020(0.51)

.060(1.52)

.360(9.14)

.320(8.13)

Ø.236(Ø6.00) .220

(5.59)

.340(8.64)

.110(2.79)

.160(4.06)

.100(2.54)

.020(0.51)

.060(1.52)

.160(4.06)

Ø.236(Ø6.00)

.173(4.39) .370

(9.40)

Ø.100(Ø2.54)

.173(4.39) .370

(9.40)

Ø.100(Ø2.54)

.370(9.40)

Ø.100(Ø2.54)

.210(5.33)

Ø.100(Ø2.54)

Ø.100(Ø2.54)

.290(7.37)

Ø.100(Ø2.54)

.410(10.41)

.220(5.59)

Ø.100(Ø2.54)

SERIES 34CSub-Miniature Toggle Switches


Terminations• UL Recoginized


SPDT

DPDT


1 2 3 4 5

Series 34C: Sub-Miniature Toggle Switches

Actuator options 1, 2 and 3 shown with B1 to B4 bushing, subtract 0.90 (2.29) for bushing B5,subtract 0.40 (1,02) for B7 bushing.Actuators 4 and 5 shown with B5 and B6 bushing, add 0.90 (2.29) for bushing B1 to B3,add 0.50 (1,27) for B7 bushing.

Toggle1 4


Tog

gle

Sw

itch

es

FLAT.173(4.39) .020

(0.51)

.220(5.59)

10-48 UNS 10-48 UNS

.220(5.59)

.020(0.51)

.030(0.76)

.015(0.38)

.260(6.60).040

(1.02)Ø.280(Ø7.10)

.020(0.51)

1/4-40 UNS

.310(7.87)

.020(0.51)

.028(0.71)

FLAT.225(5.72)

Ø.280(Ø7.10)

1/4-40 UNS

Ø.236(Ø6.00)

Ø.236(Ø6.00)

.244(6.20)

THK. .020 (0.51) THK. .020 (0.51)SP DPTHK. .020 (0.51) THK. .020 (0.51)SP DP

.060(1.52)

.030(0.76)

.060(1.52)

.110(2.79) .160

(4.06)

.060(1.52)

.110(2.79).160

(4.06)

.160(4.06)

.030(0.76)EPOXY

SEAL

EPOXYSEAL

.030(0.76)

EPOXYSEAL

.130(3.30)

.030(0.76)

.200(5.08)

.130(3.30)

EPOXYSEAL

1 2 3

P.C. MOUNTING.200(5.08)

.130(3.30)

.020(0.51) .200

(5.08)

.100(2.54)

Ø.048(Ø1.09)

EPOXY SEAL

.200(5.08)

.030(0.7)

.020(0.51)

.030(0.76)

.320(8.13)

.194(4.93)

.220(5.59)

.158(4.01)

.016(0.41)

.100(2.54)

WITHOUT LOCKING RING WITH STD. LOCKING RINGWITHOUT LOCKING RING WITH STD. LOCKING RING

.234(5.94)

Ø.250(Ø6.35)

Ø.250(Ø6.35) Ø.250

(Ø6.35)

.022(0.55).033

(0.85)

.240(6.10)

Ø.094(Ø2.38)

.010(0.25)

.023(0.58)

.179(4.55)

Ø.195(Ø4.95)

Ø.195(Ø4.95)

.240(6.10)

Ø.195(Ø4.95)

Ø.094(Ø2.38)






PANEL MOUNTING In inches (and millimeters)

10-48 Bushing 1/4" Bushing



M1 Solder Lug M2 P.C. Mount (Std)


SPDT

P.C. MOUNTING

Toggle1 5

DIP

S

wit

ch

es


Tog

gle

Sw

itch

es

1 2 3

P.C. MOUNTING

4 5 6EPOXY SEAL

.200(5.08)

.100(2.54)

.200(5.08)Ø.043

(Ø1.09)

.200(5.08)

.030(0.76)

.194(4.93)

.220(5.59)

.100(2.54)

.200(5.08)

.158(4.01)

.016(0.41)

.030(0.76)

.130(3.30)

.320(8.13)

.360(9.14)

.100(2.54)

.020(0.51)

.020(0.51)

3

2

1

P.C. MOUNTING.200(5.08) .100

(2.54)

.320(8.13)

.200(5.08)

.100(2.54)

Ø.043(Ø1.09)

EPOXY SEAL

.158(4.01)

.016(0.41)

.220(5.59)

.194(4.93)

.130(3.30)

.200(5.08)

.030(0.76)

.200(5.08)

.030(0.76)

.020(0.51)

P.C. MOUNTING

1 2 3

.130(3.30)

.030(0.76)

.200(5.08)

.400(10.16)

.100(2.54)

.020(0.51)

.016(0.41)

EPOXYSEAL

.400(10.16)

.100(2.54)

Ø.043(Ø1.09)

.355(9.02)

.194(4.93)

.220(5.59)

3

2

1

P.C. MOUNTING

6

5

4

.200(5.08)

.100(2.54)

.320(8.13)

.100(2.54)

Ø.043(Ø1.09)

EPOXY SEAL

.158(4.01)

.016(0.41)

.220(5.59)

.194(4.93)

.130(3.30)

.200(5.08)

.200(5.08)

.030(0.76)

.360(9.14)

.030(0.76)

.200(5.08)

.200(5.08)

.100(2.54)

.020(0.51)

P.C. MOUNTING

4 5 6

.400(10.16)

.100(2.54)

.020(0.51)

.016(0.41)

EPOXYSEAL

.400(10.16)

Ø.043(Ø1.09)

.194(4.93)

.220(5.59)

.130(3.30).352

(8.94)

.100(2.54) .200

(5.08)

.360(9.14)

.100(2.54)

.200(5.08)

.100(2.54)

V2 Vertical Bracket P.C. Mount V3 Vertical Bracket P.C. Mount




DPDT

SPDT

DPDT

SPDT DPDT

M6

Toggle1 6


Tog

gle

Sw

itch

es

( )

( )

( )

10-48 UNS-2B

SPECIFICATIONSRATINGSContact Rating: Q option - 3A with resistiveload @ 125VAC or 28 VDC; 1.5A withresistive load @ 250 VAC. R option-0.4 VAmax @ 20 Vmax (AC or DC)Electrical Life: 30,000 make-and-breakcycles at full load


MATERIALSCase: Diallyl phthalate (DAP) (UL 94V-0)Toggle Handle: Brass, chrome platedBushing: Brass, nickel platedHousing: Stainless steelTerminal/Switch Support: Brass, electrotinplatedTerminal Seal: Epoxy


NUT LOCK WASHER



HDW21 HDW22

( )( )


34CWSP12B4M2RT

Series 34C Sub-Miniature Toggle SwitchesModel: SPDT: MSP1, MSP2, MSP3, MSP4, MSP5DPDT: MDP1, MDP2, MDP3, MDP4, MDP5(See Model options.)

Actuator: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 (See Actuator options.)

RoHS CompliantContact: R = Copper alloy, gold plate over nickel plate, Q = Copper alloy over silver plate

Termination Options: M1, M2, M6, M7, V2, V3(See Termination options.)

Bushing Option: B1, B2, B3, B4, B5, B6, B7, B8 (See Bushing options.)

Toggle1 7

DIP

S

wit

ch

es


Tog

gle

Sw

itch

es

()=MOMENTARY

SCHEMATIC

02COMM.

1 3


Comm.Term.

WMSP4

WMSP5

WMSP3

WMSP2

WMSP1

No.

(ON)

2-3 OPEN 2-1

(ON)

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON NONE

NONE

(ON)

ON

(ON)

ON

1

2

3

.148(3.76)

Ø.180(Ø4.58)

.416(10.57)

.543(13.80)

.185(4.70)

.130(3.30)

.100(2.54)

TYP..020(0.51)

.320(8.13)

.200(5.08)

.029(0.75)Ø.100

(Ø2.52)

EPOXY SEAL

()=MOMENTARY

SCHEMATIC

02COMM.

1 3

05COMM.

4 6


Comm.Term.

WMDP4

WMDP5

WMDP3

WMDP2

WMDP1

No.

(ON)

2-3 OPEN 2-1

(ON)

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON NONE

NONE

(ON)

ON

(ON)

ON

5-6 5-4

4

5

6

.148(3.76)

Ø.180(Ø4.58)

.416(10.57)

.543(13.80)

.185(4.70)

.130(3.30)

.100(2.54)

TYP..020(0.51)

.320(8.13)

.364(5.08)

.029(0.75)

Ø.100(Ø2.52)


.421(10.70)

Ø.100(Ø2.52)

Ø.100(Ø2.52)

.240(6.10)

Ø.100(Ø2.52)

.342(8.70)

Ø.100(Ø2.52)

.550(13.97)

Ø.100(Ø2.52)

Ø.100(Ø2.52)

.421(10.70)

.264(6.70)

SERIES 34DSealed Sub-Miniature ToggleSwitches


Terminations• Sealed per IP67


SPDT

DPDT


1 2 Std 3 4 5 6ESD ResistantPlastic Toggle

ESD ResistantPlastic Toggle

Series 34D: Sealed Sub-Miniature Toggle Switches

Toggle1 8


Tog

gle

Sw

itch

es

SINGLE POLE

P.C. MOUNTING

DOUBLE POLE

P.C. MOUNTING

P.C.MOUNT P.C. MOUNT

.177(4.50)

Ø.180(Ø4.57)

.030(0.76)

.130(3.30)


Ø.043(Ø1.09)

Ø.043(Ø1.09)

.200(5.08)

.030(0.76)

.130(3.30)

.100(2.54)

.200(5.08)

1 2 3

P.C. MOUNTING P.C. MOUNTING

1 2 3

4 5 6

.240(6.10)

.200(5.08)

.165(4.19)

.200(5.08)

.130(3.30)

.020(0.51)

.200(5.08)

.100(2.54)Ø.043

(Ø1.09)

EPOXY SEAL EPOXYSEAL

.200(5.08)

.100(2.54)

.200(5.08)

Ø.043(Ø1.09)

.200(5.08)

.030(0.76)

.148(3.78)

.162(4.11)

.320(8.13)

.020(0.51)

.200(5.08)

.200(5.08) .031

(0.81)

.240(6.10)

.159(4.05)

.370(9.40)

.163(4.15)

.016(0.42)

.035(0.90)

.100(2.54)

.142(3.61)

.200(5.08) .031

(0.80)

.015(0.38)

.030(0.76)

321

P.C. MOUNTING

.236(6.00)

.030(0.76)

.336(8.53)

.240(6.10)

.162(4.11)

.165(4.19)

.200(5.08)

.100(2.54)

.130(3.30)

.530(13.46)

.019(0.48)

.015(0.38)

.320(8.13)

.200(5.08)

.100(2.54)

Ø.043(Ø1.09)

Ø.100(Ø2.52)

EPOXY SEAL

THK. .020 (0.51)THK. .020 (0.51)SP

DP

.110(2,80)

.150(3,80)

.059(1,50)

.061(1,55)

.028(0,70)

.150(3,80)

.110(2,80)

.158(4,00)

.061(1,55)

.039(1,00)


M2 M2

M1


B4

BUSHING OPTION In inches (and millimeters)

TERMINATION OPTIONSIn inches (and millimeters)



SPDT

DPDT

SPDT

Toggle1 9

DIP

S

wit

ch

es


Tog

gle

Sw

itch

es

3

2

1

P.C. MOUNTING

6

5

4

.391(9.94)

.030(0.76)

.336(8.53)

.240(6.10)

.162(4.11)

.165(4.19)

.200(5.08)

.100(2.54)

.130(3.30)

.530(13.46)

.019(0.48)

.015(0.38)

.320(8.13)

.200(5.08)

Ø.043(Ø1.09)

.200(5.08)

Ø.100(Ø2.52)

Ø.194(Ø4.91)

.364(9.25) .100

(2.54).200(5.08)

P.C. MOUNTING

1 2 3

P.C. MOUNTING

1 2 3

.366(9.30)

.130(3.30)

.030(0.76)

.200(5.08)

.230(5.84) .240

(6.10) .165(4.20)

.400(10.16)

.100(2.54)

.020(0.51)

.015(0.38)

EPOXYSEAL

.400(10.16)

.100(2.54)

Ø.043(Ø1.09)

EPOXYSEAL

Ø.043(Ø1.09)

.366(9.30)

.130(3.30)

.200(5.08)

.030(0.76)

.100(2.54)

.020(0.51)

.400(10.16)

.015(0.38)

.165(4.20)

.240(6.10)

.200(5.08)

.400(10.16)

.100(2.54)

V2 Vertical Bracket P.C. Mount


SPECIFICATIONSRATINGSContact Rating: Q option - 3A with resistiveload @ 125VAC or 28 VDC; 1.5A withresistive load @ 250 VAC. R option-0.4 VAmax @ 20 Vmax (AC or DC)Electrical Life: 30,000 make-and-breakcycles at full load


MATERIALSCase: Diallyl phthalate (DAP) (UL94V-0)Toggle Handle: Brass, chrome platedBushing: Brass, nickel platedHousing: Stainless steelTerminal/Switch Support: Brass, electrotinplatedContacts & Terminals: Copper alloy, goldplate over nickel plate or silver plateTerminal Seal: EpoxyORDERING INFORMATION



DPDT

SPDT

DPDT

M7

34DWMSP12B4M2RT

Series 34B Sealed Sub-Miniature Toggle Switches

Model: SPDT: WMSP1, WMSP2, WMSP3, WMSP4, WMSP5DPDT: WMDP1, WMDP2, WMDP3, WMDP4, WMDP5(See model no. for switching positions)Actuator: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 (See Actuator options)

RoHS CompliantContact: R = Copper alloy, gold plate over nickel plate, Q = Copper alloy, gold plate over silver plate

Termination Options: M1, M2, M6, M7, V2 (See termination options)

Bushing Option: B4 (See Bushing option)

Toggle2 0


Tog

gle

Sw

itch

es

NONE

OFF

OFF

OFF

NONE

OPEN


WMSP5

WMSP4

WMSP3

WMSP2

WMSP1

ON

(ON)

2-3

ON

ON

ON

2-1

(ON)

(ON)

ON

(ON)

ON

TERM. COMM.

()=MOMENTARY

()=MOMENTARY

SCHEMATIC

02COMM.

1 3

SCHEMATIC

02COMM.

1 3

05COMM.

4 6

NONE

OFF

OFF

OFF

NONE

OPEN


WMSP5

WMSP4

WMSP3

WMSP2

WMSP1

ON

(ON)

2-3

ON

ON

ON

2-1

(ON)

(ON)

ON

(ON)

ON

TERM. COMM.

.020(0.62)

.100(2.54)

.148(3.78)

.150(3.81)

.290(7.37)

.040(1.02)

.140(3.56)

.300(7.62)

.080(2.03)

.080(2.03)

.320(8.13)

.410(10.40)

.200(5.08)

.240(6.10) .162

(4.11)

.100(2.52)

.020(0.51)

.030(0.76)

EPOXYSEAL

.240(6.10) .162

(4.11)

.100(2.52)

EPOXYSEAL

.276(7.00)

.100(2.54)

.323(8.20)

.315(8.00)

Ø.179(Ø4.55)

.032(0.80)

.280(7.10)

.100(2.54)

.079(2.00)

.366(9.30)

.071(1.80)

.059(1.50)

SERIES 34ESealed Surface Mount Toggle Switches

FEATURES• Save Space and Weight• SPDT Circuitry• Choice of Actuators and Terminations• Sealed per IP67


SPDT

SPDT

Series 34E: Sealed Surface Mount Toggle Switches

M6

S6

Toggle2 1

DIP

S

wit

ch

es


Tog

gle

Sw

itch

es

NONE

OFF

OFF

OFF

NONE

OPEN


WMSP5

WMSP4

WMSP3

WMSP2

WMSP1

ON

(ON)

2-3

ON

ON

ON

2-1

(ON)

(ON)

ON

(ON)

ON

TERM. COMM.

()=MOMENTARY

SCHEMATIC

02COMM.

1 3

.175(4.46)Ø.180

(Ø4.60)

Ø.100(Ø2.54)

.030(0.76).215(5.50)

.105(2.70)

.240(6.10)

Ø.099(Ø2.52)

.640(16.26) .335

(8.51)

.020(0.50)

.030(0.76)

.080(1.98)

.173(4.39) .125

(3.18)

.561(14.25)

.079(2.00)

.125(3.18)

.325(8.27)

.100(2.54)

.120(3.00)

.221(5.60) .063

(1.60)

.425(10.80)

Ø.100(Ø2.52)

Ø.100(Ø2.52) Ø.100

(Ø2.52)

.240(6.10)

Ø.100(Ø2.52)

.425(10.80)

.264(6.70)


1 2 3 4ESD ResistantPlastic Toggle

ESD ResistantPlastic Toggle

For S6, M7 TerminationOptions Only

TERMINATION OPTIONS

M6 S6 M7


SPDT

M7

Toggle2 2


Tog

gle

Sw

itch

es


TAPE AND REEL PACKAGING In inches (and millimeters)

.197(5.00)

.260(6.60)

.618(15.70)

.421(10.7)

.039(1.00)

.339(8.60)

.472(12.00)

Ø.059(Ø1.50) .882

(22.40)

1.118(28.40)

1.260(32.00)

.071(1.80)

.559(14.20)

.630(16.00)

.157(4.00)

.079(2.00) Ø.059

(Ø1.50)

.016(0.40)

.244(6.20)

.291(7.40)

30˚

Ø.059(Ø1.50)

.819(20.80)

.415(10.55)

.098(2.50)

.453(11.5)

.228(5.80)

.331(8.40)

1.260(32.00)

1.118(28.40)

.559(12.40)

.014(0.35)

.248(6.30)

.071(1.80) .157

(4.00)

.079(2.00)

.630(16.00)5˚

.386(9.80)

.591(15.00)

.272(6.90)

.071(1.80)

.504(12.80)

1.114(28.30)

.305(7.75)

.197(5.00)

.098(2.50)

1.732(44.00)

.866(22.00)

.157(4.00)

.634(16.10)

1.598(40.)

Ø.063(Ø1.60)

.236(6.00)

.014(0.35)

.315(8.00)

.354(9.00)

.394(10.00)

.610(15.50)

.252(6.40)

For M6 TerminationOption Only

For M7 TerminationOption Only

For S6 TerminationOption Only

Toggle2 3

DIP

S

wit

ch

es


Tog

gle

Sw

itch

es

SPECIFICATIONSRATINGSContact Rating: 0.4 VA max. @ 20V max.(AC or DC)Mechanical and Electrical Life: 30,000make-and-break cycles at full loadContact Resistance: 20 milliohms max. typ.initial @ 2-4 VDC, 100 mA

Insulation Resistance: 1,000 megaohmsminimumDielectic Strength: 1,500 V RMS @ sealevelOperating Temperature: -30°C to 85°C

MATERIALSCase and Bushings: Glass-filled nylon 4/6,

flame retardant, heat stabilized (UL94V-0)Actuator: Brass, chrome platedContacts: Copper alloy, gold plate overnickel plateTerminals: Copper alloy, tin plate over nickelplateTerminal Seal: EpoxyTape and Reel: 500 pcs/per reel




34EWMSP12M6RT

Series 34E Sealed Surface Mount Toggle Switches

Model: SPDT: WMSP1, WMSP2, WMSP3, WMSP4, WMSP5(See Model options.)

Actuator: 1, 2, 3, 4 (See Actuator options.)

RoHS Compliant

Contact: R = Copper alloy, gold plate over nickel plate

Termination Options: M6, S6, M7 (See Termination options.)

Toggle2 4

Documents

Grayhill Catalog